CFR TITLE 29 - Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations For Construction

PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.60 Methylenedianiline.
1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, plac-

REGULATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION ards and labels.
1926.62 Lead.
Sec. 1926.64 Process safety management of high-
ly hazardous chemicals.
Subpart A—General 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and
emergency response.
1926.1 Purpose and scope.
1926.66 Criteria for design and construction
1926.2 Variances from safety and health
of spray booths.
standards.
1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.
1926.4 Rules of practice for administrative Subpart E—Personal Protective and Life
adjudications for enforcement of safety Saving Equipment
and health standards.
1926.95 Criteria for personal protective
1926.5 OMB control numbers under the Pa-
equipment.
perwork Reduction Act.
1926.96 Occupational foot protection.
1926.97–1926.98 [Reserved]
Subpart B—General Interpretations
1926.100 Head protection.
1926.10 Scope of subpart. 1926.101 Hearing protection.
1926.11 Coverage under section 103 of the act 1926.102 Eye and face protection.
distinguished. 1926.103 Respiratory protection.
1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950. 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and lanyards.
1926.13 Interpretation of statutory terms. 1926.105 Safety nets.
1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’ types 1926.106 Working over or near water.
of performance. 1926.107 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.15 Relationship to the Service Contract part.
Act; Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act.
1926.16 Rules of construction. Subpart F—Fire Protection and Prevention
Subpart C—General Safety and Health 1926.150 Fire protection.
Provisions 1926.151 Fire prevention.
1926.152 Flammable and combustible liq-
1926.20 General safety and health provi- uids.
sions. 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas (LP-Gas).
1926.21 Safety training and education. 1926.154 Temporary heating devices.
1926.22 Recording and reporting of injuries. 1926.155 Definitions applicable to this sub-
[Reserved] part.
1926.23 First aid and medical attention.
1926.24 Fire protection and prevention. Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and Barricades
1926.25 Housekeeping.
1926.26 Illumination. 1926.200 Accident prevention signs and tags.
1926.27 Sanitation. 1926.201 Signaling.
1926.28 Personal protective equipment. 1926.202 Barricades.
1926.29 Acceptable certifications. 1926.203 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repairing. part.
1926.31 Incorporation by reference.
1926.32 Definitions. Subpart H—Materials Handling, Storage,
1926.33 Access to employee exposure and Use, and Disposal
medical records.
1926.34 Means of egress. 1926.250 General requirements for storage.
1926.35 Employee emergency action plans. 1926.251 Rigging equipment for material
handling.
Subpart D—Occupational Health and 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials.
Environmental Controls
Subpart I—Tools—Hand and Power
1926.50 Medical services and first aid.
1926.51 Sanitation. 1926.300 General requirements.
1926.52 Occupational noise exposure. 1926.301 Hand tools.
1926.53 Ionizing radiation. 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools.
1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools.
1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts, and 1926.304 Woodworking tools.
cprice-sewell on DSKDVH8Z91PROD with CFR
mists. 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, screw,

1926.56 Illumination. and hydraulic.
1926.57 Ventilation. 1926.306 Air receivers.
1926.58 [Reserved] 1926.307 Mechanical power-transmission ap-
1926.59 Hazard communication. paratus.
VerDate Nov<24>2008 14:57 Aug 03, 2009 Jkt 217116 PO 00000 Frm 00017 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\217116.XXX 217116
Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
Subpart J—Welding and Cutting APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L—LIST OF NA-

TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS
1926.350 Gas welding and cutting. APPENDIX D TO SUBPART L—LIST OF TRAINING
1926.351 Arc welding and cutting. TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DIS-
1926.352 Fire prevention. MANTLERS [RESERVED]
1926.353 Ventilation and protection in weld- APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L—DRAWINGS AND
ing, cutting, and heating. ILLUSTRATIONS
1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heating in
way of preservative coatings. Subpart M—Fall Protection
Subpart K—Electrical 1926.500 Scope, application, and definitions
applicable to this subpart.
GENERAL 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
1926.502 Fall protection systems criteria
1926.400 Introduction.
and practices.
1926.401 [Reserved]
1926.503 Training requirements.
INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M—DETERMINING
ROOF WIDTHS
1926.402 Applicability.
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M—GUARDRAIL SYS-
1926.403 General requirements.
TEMS
1926.404 Wiring design and protection.
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M—PERSONAL FALL
1926.405 Wiring methods, components, and
ARREST SYSTEMS
equipment for general use.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M—POSITIONING DE-
1926.406 Specific purpose equipment and in-
VICE SYSTEMS
stallations.
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M—SAMPLE FALL
1926.407 Hazardous (classified) locations.
PROTECTION PLANS
1926.408 Special systems.
1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved]
Subpart N—Cranes, Derricks, Hoists,
SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES Elevators, and Conveyors
1926.416 General requirements. 1926.550 Cranes and derricks.
1926.417 Lockout and tagging of circuits. 1926.551 Helicopters.
1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved] 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel hoists,
and elevators.
SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS 1926.554 Overhead hoists.
1926.431 Maintenance of equipment. 1926.555 Conveyors.
1926.432 Environmental deterioration of
equipment. Subpart O—Motor Vehicles, Mechanized
1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved] Equipment, and Marine Operations
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL 1926.600 Equipment.
EQUIPMENT 1926.601 Motor vehicles.
1926.602 Material handling equipment.
1926.441 Batteries and battery charging. 1926.603 Pile driving equipment.
1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved] 1926.604 Site clearing.
1926.605 Marine operations and equipment.
DEFINITIONS
1926.606 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.449 Definitions applicable to this subpart.
part.
Subpart P—Excavations
Subpart L—Scaffolds
1926.650 Scope, application, and definitions
1926.450 Scope, application and definitions applicable to this subpart.
applicable to this subpart. 1926.651 Specific excavation requirements.
1926.451 General requirements. 1926.652 Requirements for protective sys-
1926.452 Additional requirements applicable tems.
to specific types of scaffolds. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P—SOIL CLASSIFICA-
1926.453 Aerial lifts. TION
1926.454 Training requirements. APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P—SLOPING AND
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART L—SCAFFOLD SPECI- BENCHING
FICATIONS APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P—TIMBER SHORING
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L—CRITERIA FOR DE- FOR TRENCHES

TERMINING THE FEASIBILITY OF PROVIDING APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P—ALUMINUM HY-
SAFE ACCESS AND FALL PROTECTION FOR DRAULIC SHORING FOR TRENCHES
SCAFFOLD ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P—ALTERNATIVES TO
[RESERVED] TIMBER SHORING
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P—SELECTION OF CONNECTION AND A STAGGERED CONNEC-
PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS TION: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR
COMPLYING WITH COMPLYING WITH
Subpart Q—Concrete and Masonry § 1926.756(C)(1)
Construction
Subpart S—Underground Construction,
1926.700 Scope, application, and definitions Caissons, Cofferdams and Compressed Air
applicable to this subpart.
1926.701 General requirements. 1926.800 Underground construction.
1926.702 Requirements for equipment and 1926.801 Caissons.
tools. 1926.802 Cofferdams.
1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-place con- 1926.803 Compressed air.
crete. 1926.804 Definitions applicable to this sub-
1926.704 Requirements for precast concrete. part.
1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab construc- APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S—DECOMPRESSION
tion operations. TABLES
1926.706 Requirements for masonry con-
struction. Subpart T—Demolition
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q—REFERENCES TO
SUBPART Q OF PART 1926 1926.850 Preparatory operations.
1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and ladders.
Subpart R—Steel Erection 1926.852 Chutes.
1926.853 Removal of materials through floor
1926.750 Scope. openings.
1926.751 Definitions. 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry sec-
1926.752 Site layout, site-specific erection tions, and chimneys.
plan and construction sequence. 1926.855 Manual removal of floors.
1926.753 Hoisting and rigging. 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, and mate-
1926.754 Structural steel assembly. rial with equipment.
1926.755 Column anchorage. 1926.857 Storage.
1926.756 Beams and columns. 1926.858 Removal of steel construction.
1926.757 Open web steel joists. 1926.859 Mechanical demolition.
1926.758 Systems-engineered metal build- 1926.860 Selective demolition by explosives.
ings.
1926.759 Falling object protection. Subpart U—Blasting and the Use of
1926.760 Fall protection. Explosives
1926.761 Training.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R—GUIDELINES FOR 1926.900 General provisions.
ESTABLISHING THE COMPONENTS OF A SITE- 1926.901 Blaster qualifications.
SPECIFIC ERECTION PLAN: NON-MANDATORY 1926.902 Surface transportation of explo-
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH sives.
§ 1926.752(E) 1926.903 Underground transportation of ex-
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R [RESERVED] plosives.
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R—ILLUSTRATIONS 1926.904 Storage of explosives and blasting
OF BRIDGING TERMINUS POINTS: NON-MAN- agents.
DATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH 1926.905 Loading of explosives or blasting
§ 1926.757(A)(10) AND § 1926.757(C)(5) agents.
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R—ILLUSTRATION OF 1926.906 Initiation of explosive charges—
THE USE OF CONTROL LINES TO DEMARCATE electric blasting.
CONTROLLED DECKING ZONES (CDZS): NON- 1926.907 Use of safety fuse.
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING 1926.908 Use of detonating cord.
WITH § 1926.760(C)(3) 1926.909 Firing the blast.
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R—TRAINING: NON- 1926.910 Inspection after blasting.
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING 1926.911 Misfires.
WITH § 1926.761 1926.912 Underwater blasting.
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R—PERIMETER COL- 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work under
UMNS: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR compressed air.
COMPLYING WITH § 1926.756(E) TO PROTECT 1926.914 Definitions applicable to this sub-
THE UNPROTECTED SIDE OR EDGE OF A part.
WALKING/WORKING SURFACE
APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R—FALL PROTECTION Subpart V—Power Transmission and
SYSTEMS CRITERIA AND PRACTICES FROM Distribution
§ 1926.502: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES

FOR COMPLYING WITH COMPLYING WITH 1926.950 General requirements.
§ 1926.760(D) 1926.951 Tools and protective equipment.
APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R—DOUBLE CONNEC- 1926.952 Mechanical equipment.
TIONS: ILLUSTRATION OF A CLIPPED END 1926.953 Material handling.
Pt. 1926 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
1926.954 Grounding for protection of em- RECORDKEEPING
ployees.
1926.955 Overhead lines. 1926.1091 Recordkeeping requirements.
1926.956 Underground lines. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Y—EXAMPLES OF
1926.957 Construction in energized sub- CONDITIONS WHICH MAY RESTRICT OR
stations. LIMIT EXPOSURE TO HYPERBARIC CONDI-
1926.958 External load helicopters. TIONS
1926.959 Lineman’s body belts, safety straps, APPENDIX B TO SUBPART Y—GUIDELINES FOR
and lanyards. SCIENTIFIC DIVING
1926.960 Definitions applicable to this sub-
part. Subpart Z—Toxic and Hazardous
Substances
Subpart W—Rollover Protective Structures;
Overhead Protection 1926.1100 [Reserved]
1926.1101 Asbestos.
1926.1000 Rollover protective structures
(ROPS) for material handling equipment. 1926.1102 Coal tar pitch volatiles; interpre-
1926.1001 Minimum performance criteria for tation of term.
rollover protective structures for des- 1926.1103 13 carcinogens (4-Nitrobiphenyl,
ignated scrapers, loaders, dozers, graders, etc.).
and crawler tractors. 1926.1104 alpha-Naphthylamine.
1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-over pro- 1926.1105 [Reserved]
tective structures, known as ROPS) for 1926.1106 Methyl chloromethyl ether.
wheel-type agricultural and industrial 1926.1107 3,3′-Dichlorobenzidiene (and its
tractors used in construction. salts).
1926.1003 Overhead protection for operators 1926.1108 bis-Chloromethyl ether.
of agricultural and industrial tractors
1926.1109 beta-Naphthylamine.
used in construction.
1926.1110 Benzidine.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART W—FIGURES W–14
1926.1111 4-Aminodiphenyl.
THROUGH W–28
1926.1112 Ethyleneimine.
Subpart X—Stairways and Ladders 1926.1113 beta-Propiolactone.
1926.1114 2-Acetylaminofluorene.
1926.1050 Scope, application, and definitions 1926.1115 4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene.
applicable to this subpart. 1926.1116 N-Nitrosodimethylamine.
1926.1051 General requirements. 1926.1117 Vinyl chloride.
1926.1052 Stairways. 1926.1118 Inorganic arsenic.
1926.1053 Ladders.
1926.1126 Chromium (VI).
1926.1054–1926.1059 [Reserved]
1926.1060 Training requirements. 1926.1127 Cadmium.
1926.1128 Benzene.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART X—LADDERS
1926.1129 Coke oven emissions.
Subpart Y—Diving 1926.1144 1,2-dibromo-3-chloropropane.
1926.1145 Acrylonitrile.
GENERAL 1926.1147 Ethylene oxide.
1926.1071 Scope and application. 1926.1148 Formaldehyde.
1926.1072 Definitions. 1926.1152 Methylene chloride.
APPENDIX A TO PART 1926—DESIGNATIONS FOR
PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL INDUSTRY STANDARDS INCOR-
1926.1076 Qualifications of dive team. PORATED INTO BODY OF CONSTRUCTION
STANDARDS
GENERAL OPERATIONS PROCEDURES
SOURCE: 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR
1926.1080 Safe practices manual.
20940, Apr. 6, 1979, unless otherwise noted.
1926.1081 Pre-dive procedures.
1926.1082 Procedures during dive. EDITORIAL NOTE: At 44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979,
1926.1083 Post-dive procedures. and corrected at 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, 1979,
OSHA reprinted without change the entire
SPECIFIC OPERATIONS PROCEDURES
text of 29 CFR part 1926 together with cer-
1926.1084 SCUBA diving. tain General Industry Occupational Safety
1926.1085 Surface-supplied air diving. and Health Standards contained in 29 CFR
1926.1086 Mixed-gas diving. part 1910, which have been identified as also
1926.1087 Liveboating. applicable to construction work. This repub-

lication developed a single set of OSHA regu-
EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES AND REQUIREMENTS
lations for both labor and management
1926.1090 Equipment. forces within the construction industry.
10
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor § 1926.4
Subpart A—General § 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.

(a) It shall be a condition of each
AUTHORITY: Sec. 3704, Contract Work Hours contract which is subject to section 107
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); of the Contract Work Hours and Safety
secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and Standards Act that the Secretary of
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Labor or any authorized representative
Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR shall have a right of entry to any site
8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 6– of contract performance for the fol-
96 (62 FR 111), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31160) as appli- lowing purposes:
cable; and 29 CFR part 1911. (1) To inspect or investigate the mat-
ter of compliance with the safety and
§ 1926.1 Purpose and scope. health standards contained in subpart
(a) This part sets forth the safety and C of this part and following subparts;
health standards promulgated by the and
Secretary of Labor under section 107 of (2) To carry out the duties of the Sec-
the Contract Work Hours and Safety retary under section 107(b) of the Act.
Standards Act. The standards are pub- (b) For the purpose of carrying out
lished in subpart C of this part and fol- his investigative duties under the Act,
lowing subparts. the Secretary of Labor may, by agree-
(b) Subpart B of this part contains ment, use with or without reimburse-
statements of general policy and inter- ment the services, personnel, and fa-
pretations of section 107 of the Con- cilities of any State or Federal agency.
tract Work Hours and Safety Stand- Any agreements with States under this
section shall be similar to those pro-
ards Act having general applicability.
vided for under the Walsh-Healey Pub-
§ 1926.2 Variances from safety and lic Contracts Act under 41 CFR part 50–
health standards. 205.
(a) Variances from standards which § 1926.4 Rules of practice for adminis-
are, or may be, published in this part trative adjudications for enforce-
may be granted under the same cir- ment of safety and health stand-
cumstances whereunder variances may ards.
be granted under section 6(b)(A) or 6(d) (a) The rules of practice for adminis-
of the Williams-Steiger Occupational trative adjudications for the enforce-
Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. ment of the safety and health stand-
65). The procedures for the granting of ards contained in subpart C of this part
variances and for related relief under and the following subparts shall be the
this part are those published in part same as those published in part 6 of
1905 of this title. this title with respect to safety and
(b) Any requests for variances under health violations of the Service Con-
this section shall also be considered retract Act of 1965 (69 Stat. 1035), except
quests for variances under the Wil- as provided in paragraph (b) of this sec-
tion.
liams-Steiger Occupational Safety and
(b) In the case of debarment, the find-
Health Act of 1970, and any requests for
ings required by section 107(d) of the
variances under Williams-Steiger Occu- Act shall be made by the hearing exam-
pational Safety and Health Act with iner or the Assistant Secretary of
respect to construction safety or Labor for Occupational Safety and
health standards shall be considered to Health, as the case may be. Whenever,
be also variances under the Construc- as provided in section 107(d)(2), a con-
tion Safety Act. Any variance from a tractor requests termination of debar-
construction safety or health standard ment before the end of the 3-year pe-
which is contained in this part and riod prescribed in that section, the re-
which is incorporated by reference in quest shall be filed in writing with the
part 1910 of this title shall be deemed a Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occu-
variance from the standard under both pational Safety and Health who shall
the Construction Safety Act and the publish a notice in the FEDERAL REG-
Williams-Steiger Occupational Safety ISTER that the request has been re-
and Health Act of 1970. ceived and afford interested persons an
11
§ 1926.5 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
opportunity to be heard upon the re- 29 CFR citation OMB con-

quest, and thereafter the provisions of trol No.
part 6 of this title shall apply with re- 1926.1115 ............................................................ 1218–0044
spect to prehearing conferences, hear- 1926.1116 ............................................................ 1218–0081
ings and related matters, and decisions 1926.1117 ............................................................ 1218–0010
1926.1118 ............................................................ 1218–0104
and orders. 1926.1126 ............................................................ 1218–0252
1926.1127 ............................................................ 1218–0186
§ 1926.5 OMB control numbers under 1926.1128 ............................................................ 1218–0129
the Paperwork Reduction Act. 1926.1129 ............................................................ 1218–0128
1926.1144 ............................................................ 1218–0101
The following sections or paragraphs 1926.1145 ............................................................ 1218–0126
each contain a collection of informa- 1926.1147 ............................................................ 1218–0108
1926.1148 ............................................................ 1218–0145
tion requirement which has been ap-
proved by the Office of Management
and Budget under the control number [61 FR 5509, Feb. 13, 1996, as amended at 63
listed. FR 3814, Jan. 27, 1998; 63 FR 13340, Mar. 19,
1998; 63 FR 17094, Apr. 8, 1998; 64 FR 18810,
29 CFR citation OMB con- Apr. 16, 1999; 71 FR 38086, July 5, 2006]
trol No.
1926.33 ................................................................ 1218–0065 Subpart B—General

1926.50 ................................................................ 1218–0093
1926.52 ................................................................ 1218–0048
Interpretations
1926.53 ................................................................ 1218–0103
1926.59 ................................................................ 1218–0072
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours
1926.60 ................................................................ 1218–0183
1926.62 ................................................................ 1218–0189 and Safety Standards Act (Construction
1926.64 ................................................................ 1218–0200 Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333).
1926.65 ................................................................ 1218–0202
1926.103 .............................................................. 1218–0099 § 1926.10 Scope of subpart.
1926.200 .............................................................. 1218–0132
1926.250 .............................................................. 1218–0093 (a) This subpart contains the general
1926.251 .............................................................. 1218–0233 rules of the Secretary of Labor inter-
1926.403 .............................................................. 1218–0130 preting and applying the construction
1926.404 .............................................................. 1218–0130
1926.405 .............................................................. 1218–0130 safety and health provisions of section
1926.407 .............................................................. 1218–0130 107 of the Contract Work Hours and
1926.408 .............................................................. 1218–0130 Safety Standards Act (83 Stat. 96). Sec-
1926.453(a)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0216
1926.502 .............................................................. 1218–0197
tion 107 requires as a condition of each
1926.503 .............................................................. 1218–0197 contract which is entered into under
1926.550(a)(1) ..................................................... 1218–0115 legislation subject to Reorganization
1926.550(a)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0115 Plan Number 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267),
1926.550(a)(4) ..................................................... 1218–0115
1926.550(a)(6) ..................................................... 1218–0113 and which is for construction, alter-
1926.550(a)(11) ................................................... 1218–0054 ation, and/or repair, including painting
1926.550(a)(16) ................................................... 1218–0115 and decorating, that no contractor or
1926.550(b)(2) ..................................................... 1218–0232
1926.550(g) ......................................................... 1218–0151
subcontractor contracting for any part
1926.552 .............................................................. 1218–0231 of the contract work shall require any
1926.652 .............................................................. 1218–0137 laborer or mechanic employed in the
1926.703 .............................................................. 1218–0095 performance of the contract to work in
1926.800 .............................................................. 1218–0067
1926.803 .............................................................. 1218–0067 surroundings or under working condi-
1926.900 .............................................................. 1218–0217 tions which are unsanitary, hazardous,
1926.903 .............................................................. 1218–0227 or dangerous to his health or safety, as
1926.1080 ............................................................ 1218–0069
1926.1081 ............................................................ 1218–0069
determined under construction safety
1926.1083 ............................................................ 1218–0069 and health standards promulgated by
1926.1090 ............................................................ 1218–0069 the Secretary by regulation.
1926.1091 ............................................................ 1218–0069
1926.1101 ............................................................ 1218–0134 § 1926.11 Coverage under section 103
1926.1103 ............................................................ 1218–0085
1926.1104 ............................................................ 1218–0084
of the act distinguished.
1926.1106 ............................................................ 1218–0086 (a) Coverage under section 103. It is im-
1926.1107 ............................................................ 1218–0083
1926.1108 ............................................................ 1218–0087
portant to note that the coverage of
1926.1109 ............................................................ 1218–0089 section 107 differs from that for the
1926.1110 ............................................................ 1218–0082 overtime requirements of the Contract

1926.1111 ............................................................ 1218–0090 Work Hours and Safety Standards Act.
1926.1112 ............................................................ 1218–0080
1926.1113 ............................................................ 1218–0079 The application of the overtime re-
1926.1114 ............................................................ 1218–0088 quirements is governed by section 103,
12
which subject to specific exemptions, full scope of the work to be performed

includes: (1) Federal contracts requir- under each statute. The individual
ing or involving the employment of la- statutes should be resorted to for a
borers or mechanics (thus including, more detailed scope of the work.
but not limited to, contracts for con- (2) Federal-Aid Highway Acts. The pro-
struction), and (2) contracts assisted in visions codified in 23 U.S.C. 113 apply
whole or in part by Federal loans, to the initial construction, reconstruc-
grants, or guarantees under any stat- tion, or improvement work performed
ute ‘‘providing wage standards for such by contractors or subcontractors on
work.’’ The statutes ‘‘providing wage highway projects on the Federal-aid
standards for such work’’ include stat- systems, the primary and secondary, as
utes for construction which require the well as their extensions in urban areas,
payment of minimum wages in accord- and the Interstate System, authorized
ance with prevailing wage findings by under the highway laws providing for
the Secretary of Labor in accordance the expenditure of Federal funds upon
with the Davis-Bacon Act. A provision the Federal-aid system. As cited in 41
to section 103 excludes from the over- Op. A.G. 488, 496, the Attorney General
time requirements work where the ruled that the Federal-Aid Highway
Federal assistance is only in the form Acts are subject to Reorganization
of a loan guarantee or insurance. Plan No. 14 of 1950.
(b) Coverage under section 107. To be (3) National Housing Act (12 U.S.C.
covered by section 107 of the Contract 1713, 1715a, 1715e, 1715k, 1715l(d)(3) and
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, (4), 1715v, 1715w, 1715x, 1743, 1747, 1748,
a contract must be one which (1) is en- 1748h–2, 1750g, 1715l(h)(1), 1715z(j)(1),
tered into under a statute that is sub- 1715z–1, 1715y(d), Subchapter 1x-A and
ject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1x-B, 1715z–7). This act covers construc-
1950 (64 Stat. 1267); and (2) is for ‘‘con- tion which is financed with assistance
struction, alteration, and/or repair, in- by the Federal Government through
cluding painting and decorating.’’ programs of loan and mortgage insur-
ance for the following purposes:
§ 1926.12 Reorganization Plan No. 14 (i) Rental Housing—Section 1713 pro-
of 1950. vides mortgage and insurance on rental
(a) General provisions. Reorganization housing of eight or more units and on
Plan No. 14 of 1950 relates to the pre- mobile-home courts.
scribing by the Secretary of Labor of (ii) Section 1715a—Repealed.
‘‘appropriate standards, regulations, (iii) Cooperative Housing—Section
and procedures’’ with respect to the en- 1715e authorizes mortgage insurance on
forcement of labor standards under cooperative housing of five or more
Federal and federally assisted con- units as well as supplementary loans
tracts which are subject to various for improvement of repair or resale of
statutes subject to the Plan. The rules memberships.
of the Secretary of Labor imple- (iv) Urban Renewal Housing—Section
menting the Plan are published in part 1715k provides mortgage insurance on
5 of this title. Briefly, the statutes sub- single family or multifamily housing
ject to the Plan include the Davis- in approved urban renewal areas.
Bacon Act, including its extension to (v) Low or Moderate Income Hous-
Federal-aid highway legislation subject ing—Section 1715L(d) (3) and (4) insures
to 23 U.S.C. 113, and other statutes sub- mortgages on low-cost single family or
ject to the Plan by its original terms, multifamily housing.
statutes by which the Plan is expressly (vi) Housing for Elderly—Section
applied, such as the Contract Work 1715v provides mortgage insurance on
Hours Standards Act by virtue of sec- rental housing for elderly or handi-
tion 104(d) thereof. capped persons.
(b) The Plan. (1) The statutes subject (vii) Nursing Homes—Section 1715w
to Reorganization Plan No. 14 of 1950 authorizes mortgage insurance on
are cited and briefly described in the nursing home facilities and major
remaining paragraphs of this section. equipment.
These descriptions are general in na- (viii) Experimental Housing—Section
ture and not intended to convey the 1715x provides mortgage insurance on
13
single family or multifamily housing roads, streets, curbs, gutters, side-

with experimental design of materials. walks, storm drainage facilities, and
(ix) War Housing Insurance—Section other installations or work.
1743 not active. (xviii) Group Medical Practice Facili-
(x) Yield Insurance—Section 1747 in- ties—Subchapter LX-B authorizes
sures investment returns on multi- mortgage insurance for the financing
family housing. of construction and equipment, of fa-
(xi) Armed Services Housing—Sec- cilities for group practice of medicine,
tion 1748b to assist in relieving acute optometry, or dentistry.
shortage and urgent need for family (xix) Nonprofit Hospitals—1715z–7 au-
housing at or in areas adjacent to mili- thorizes mortgage insurance to cover
tary installations.
new and rehabilitated hospitals, in-
(xii) Defense Housing for Impacted
cluding initial equipment.
Areas—Section 1748h–2 provides mort-
gage insurance on single family or (4) Hospital Survey and Construction
multifamily housing for sale or rent Act, as amended by the Hospital and
primarily to military or civilian per- Medical Facilities Amendments of 1964 (42
sonnel of the Armed Services, National U.S.C. 291e). The provisions of this Act
Aeronautics and Space Administration, cover construction contracts made by
or Atomic Energy Commission. State or local authorities or private in-
(xiii) Defense Rental Housing—Sec- stitutions under Federal grant-in-aid
tion 1750g provides for mortgage insur- programs for the construction of hos-
ance in critical defense housing areas. pitals and other medical facilities.
(xiv) Rehabilitation—Section 1715L (5) Federal Airport Act (49 U.S.C.
(h)(1) provides mortgage insurance for 1114(b)). The act provides grant-in-aid
nonprofit organizations to finance the funds for airport construction limited
purchase and rehabilitation of deterio- to general site preparation runways,
rating or substandard housing for sub- taxiways, aprons, lighting appurtenant
sequent resale to low-income home thereto, and fire, rescue, and mainte-
purchasers. There must be located on nance buildings. The act excludes con-
the property five or more single family struction intended for use as a public
dwellings of detached, semidetached, or parking facility for passenger auto-
row construction. mobiles and the cost of construction of
(xv) Homeowner Assistance—Section any part of an airport building except
1715Z(j)(1) authorizes mortgage insur- such of those buildings or parts of
ance to nonprofit organizations or pub- buildings to house facilities or activi-
lic bodies or agencies executed to fi- ties directly related to the safety of
nance sale of individual dwellings to persons at the airport.
lower income individuals or families.
(6) Housing Act of 1949 (42 U.S.C. 1459).
Also includes the rehabilitation of such
Construction contracts awarded by
housing if it is deteriorating or sub-
standard for subsequent resale to lower local authorities financed with the as-
income home purchasers. sistance of loans and grants from the
(xvi) Rental Housing Assistance— Federal Government. The construction
Section 1715Z–1 authorizes mortgage programs are for slum clearance and
insurance and interest reduction pay- urban renewal which includes rehabili-
ments on behalf of owners of rental tation grants, neighborhood develop-
housing projects designed for occu- ment programs, neighborhood renewal
pancy by lower income families. Pay- plans, community renewal, demolition
ments are also authorized for certain projects, and assistance for blighted
State or locally aided projects. areas. See the Housing Act of 1964,
(xvii) Condominium Housing—Sec- paragraph (b)(21) of this section, con-
tion 1715y(d) provides mortgage insur- cerning financial assistance for low-
ance on property purchased for the de- rent housing for domestic farm labor.
velopment of building sites. This in- (7) School Survey and Construction Act
cludes waterlines and water supply in- of 1950 (20 U.S.C. 636). This act provides
stallations, sewer lines and sewage dis- for a Federal grant-in-aid program to
posal installations, steam, gas, and assist in the construction of schools in
electrical lines and installations, federally affected areas.
14
(8) Defense Housing & Community Fa- 293a(c)(5)). The provisions of this act
cilities & Services Act of 1951 (42 U.S.C. provide for grants to assist public and
1592i). Inactive Program. nonprofit medical, dental, and similar
(9) United States Housing Act of 1937 schools for the construction, expan-
(42 U.S.C. 1416). This statute covers the sion, or renovation of teaching facili-
construction of low-rent public housing ties.
and slum clearance projects awarded (14) Mental Retardation Facilities Con-
by local authorities. These projects are struction Act (42 U.S.C. 295(a)(2)(D),
financed with the assistance of loans 2662(5), 2675(a)(5)). This act authorizes
and grants from the Federal Govern- Federal financial assistance in the con-
ment. The slum clearance is the demo- struction of centers for research on
lition and removal of buildings from mental retardation and related aspects
any slum area to be used for a low-rent of human development, of university-
housing project. affiliated facilities for the mentally re-
(10) Federal Civil Defense Act of 1950 (50 tarded and of facilities for the men-
U.S.C. App. 2281). This act provides for tally retarded.
Federal assistance to the several (15) Community Mental Health Centers
States and their political subdivisions Act (42 U.S.C. 2685(a)(5)). This act au-
in the field of civil defense which in- thorizes Federal grants for the con-
cludes procurement, construction, leas- struction of public and other nonprofit
ing, or renovating of materials and fa- community mental health centers.
cilities. (16) Higher Education Facilities Act of
(11) Delaware River Basin Compact 1963 (20 U.S.C. 753). This act authorizes
(sec. 15.1, 75 Stat. 714). This joint resolu- the grant or loan of Federal funds to
tion creates, by intergovernmental assist public and other nonprofit insti-
compact between the United States, tutions of higher education in financ-
Delaware, New Jersey, New York, and ing the construction, rehabilitation, or
Pennsylvania, a regional agency for improvement of academic and related
planning, conservation, utilization, de- facilities in undergraduate and grad-
velopment, management and control of uate schools.
the water and related sources of the (17) Vocational Educational Act of 1963
Delaware River. (20 U.S.C. 35f). This act provides for
(12) Cooperative Research Act (20 U.S.C. Federal grants to the various States
332a(c)). This act provides Federal for construction of area vocational
grants to a university, college, or other education school facilities.
appropriate public or nonprofit private (18) Library Services and Construction
agency or institution for part or all of Act (20 U.S.C. 355e(a)(4)). This act pro-
the cost of constructing a facility for vides for Federal assistance to the var-
research or for research and related ious States for the construction of pub-
purposes. Research and related pur- lic libraries.
poses means research, research train- (19) Urban Mass Transportation Act of
ing, surveys, or demonstrations in the 1954 (49 U.S.C. 1609). This act provides
field of education, or the dissemination for grants and loans to assist States
of information derived therefrom, or and local public bodies and agencies
all of such activities, including (but thereof in financing the acquisition,
without limitation) experimental construction, reconstruction, and im-
schools, except that such term does not provement of facilities and equipment
include research, research training, for use, by operation or lease or other-
surveys, or demonstrations in the field wise, in mass transportation service in
of sectarian instruction or the dissemi- urban areas and in coordinating such
nation of information derived there- service with highway and other trans-
from. Construction includes new build- portation in such areas.
ings, and the acquisition, expansion, (20) Economic Opportunity Act of 1964
remodeling, replacement, and alter- (42 U.S.C. 2947). This act covers con-
ation of existing buildings and the struction which is financed with assist-
equipping of new buildings and existing ance of the Federal Government for the
buildings. following purposes:
(13) Health Professions Educational As- (i) Authorizes Federal assistance for
sistance Act of 1963 (42 U.S.C. 292d (c)(4), construction of projects, buildings and
15
works which will provide young men search and development of the com-
and women in rural and urban residen- mercial fisheries resources of the Na-
tial centers with education, vocational tion.
training, and useful work experience (23) The Nurse Training Act of 1964 (42
(Title I). U.S.C. 296a(b)(5)). This act provides for
(ii) Authorizes financial assistance grants to assist in the construction of
for construction work planned and car- new facilities for collegiate, associate
ried out at the community level for degree, and diploma schools of nursing,
antipoverty programs (Title II): or replacement or rehabilitation of ex-
(a) Authorizes loans to low income isting facilities of such schools.
rural families by assisting them to ac- (24) Elementary and Secondary Edu-
quire or improve real estate or reduce cation Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. 241i, 848).
encumbrances or erect improvements The purpose of the act is to provide fi-
thereon, and to participate in coopera- nancial assistance to local educational
tive associations and/or to finance non- agencies serving areas with concentra-
agricultural enterprises which will en- tions of children from low-income fam-
able such families to supplement their ilies for construction in connection
income (Title III); with the expansion or improvement of
(b) Authorizes loans to local coopera- their educational programs.
tive associations furnishing essential (25) Federal Water Pollution Control
processing, purchasing, or marketing Act, as amended by the Water Quality Act
services, supplies, or facilities predomi- of 1965 (3 U.S.C. 466e(g)). Provides for fi-
nantly to low-income rural families nancial assistance to States or munici-
(Title III); palities for construction of facilities in
(c) Authorizes financial assistance to connection with the prevention and
States, political subdivisions of States, control of water pollution. This in-
public and nonprofit agencies, institu- cludes projects that will control the
tions, organizations, farm associations, discharge into any waters of untreated
or individuals in establishing housing, or inadequately treated sewage.
sanitation, education, and child day- (26) Appalachian Regional Development
care programs for migrants and other Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. App. 402). Author-
seasonally employed agricultural em- izes Federal assistance in the construc-
ployees and their families (Title III). tion of an Appalachian development
(iii) Authorizes loans or guarantees highway system; construction of multi-
loans to small businesses for construc- county demonstration health facilities,
tion work (Title IV). hospitals, regional health, diagnostic
(iv) Authorizes the payment of the and treatment centers, and other fa-
cost of experimental, pilot, or dem- cilities for health; seal and fill voids in
onstration projects to foster State pro- abandoned mines and to rehabilitate
grams providing construction work ex- strip mine areas; construction of
perience or training for unemployed fa- school facilities for vocational edu-
thers and needy people (Title V). cation; and to assist in construction of
(21) Housing Act of 1964 (42 U.S.C. sewage treatment works.
1486(f); 42 U.S.C. 1452b(e)). Provides fi- (27) National Technical Institute for the
nancial assistance for low-rent housing Deaf Act (20 U.S.C. 684(b)(5)). Provides
for domestic farm labor. The Act fur- for financial assistance for institutions
ther provides for loans, through public of higher education for the establish-
or private agencies, where feasible, to ment, construction, including equip-
owners or tenants of property in urban ment and operation, of a National In-
renewal areas to finance rehabilitation stitution for the Deaf.
required to conform the property to ap- (28) Housing Act of 1959 (12 U.S.C.
plicable code requirements or carry out 1701(q)(c)(3)). This act authorizes loans
the objectives of the urban renewal to nonprofit corporations to be used for
plan for the area. the construction of housing and related
(22) The Commercial Fisheries Research facilities for elderly families. Also, the
and Development Act of 1964 (16 U.S.C. provisions of the act provide for reha-
779e(b)). This Act authorizes financial bilitation, alteration, conversion or
assistance to State agencies for con- improvement of existing structures
struction projects designed for the re- which are otherwise inadequate for
16
proposed dwellings used by such fami- thorizes loans to assist in financing the
lies. purchase or development of land for
(29) College Housing Act of 1950, as public works which will assist in the
amended (12 U.S.C. 1749a(f)). This act creation of long-term employment op-
provides for Federal loans to assist portunities in the area.
educational institutions in providing (ii) Loans for the purchase or devel-
housing and other educational facili- opment of land and facilities (including
ties for students and faculties. machinery and equipment) for indus-
(30) Housing and Urban Development trial or commercial usage within rede-
Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 1500c–3, 3107). This velopment areas; guarantee of loans for
act provides for Federal assistance for working capital made to private bor-
the following purposes: rowers by private lending institutions
(i) Grants to States and local public in connection with direct loan projects;
bodies to assist in any construction and to contract to pay to, or on behalf
work to be carried out under the open- of, business entities locating in rede-
space land and urban beautification velopment areas, a portion of the inter-
provisions contained therein. It pro- est costs which they incur in financing
vides for parks and recreation areas, their expansions from private sources.
conservation of land and other natural (iii) Loans and grants to create eco-
resources, and historical and scenic nomic development centers within des-
purposes. ignated county economic development
(ii) Grants to local public bodies and districts.
agencies to finance specific projects for (33) High-Speed Ground Transportation
basic public water facilities (including Study (40 U.S.C. 1636(b)). This act pro-
works for the storage, treatment, puri- vides for financial assistance for con-
fication, and distribution of water), struction activities in connection with
and for basic public sewer facilities research and development of different
(other than ‘‘treatment works’’ as de- forms of high-speed ground transpor-
fined in the Federal Water Pollution tation and demonstration projects re-
Control Act). lating to intercity rail passenger serv-
(iii) Grants to any local public body ice.
or agency to assist in financing neigh- (34) Heart Disease, Cancer and Stroke
borhood facilities. These facilities Amendments of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 299(b)(4)).
must be necessary for carrying out a This act provides for grants to public
program of health, recreational, social, or nonprofit private universities, med-
or similar community service and lo- ical schools, research, institutions,
cated so as to be available for the use hospitals, and other public and non-
of the area’s low or moderate income profit agencies and institutions, or as-
residents. sociations thereof to assist in construc-
(31) National Foundation on the Arts tion and equipment of facilities in con-
and the Humanities Act of 1965 (20 U.S.C. nection with research, training, dem-
954(k)). The act establishes the ‘‘Na- onstration of patient care, diagnostic
tional Foundation on the Arts and the and treatment related to heart disease,
Humanities’’ which may provide cancer, stroke, and other major dis-
matching grants to groups (nonprofit eases.
organizations and State and other pub- (35) Mental Retardation Facilities and
lic organizations) and to individuals Community Mental Health Centers Con-
engaged in creative and performing struction Act Amendments of 1965 (20
arts for the entire range of artistic ac- U.S.C. 618(g)). These provisions provide
tivity, including construction of nec- for grants to institutions of higher edu-
essary facilities. cation for construction of facilities for
(32) Public Works and Economic Devel- research or for research and related
opment Act of 1965 (42 U.S.C. 3222). This purposes relating to education for men-
act provides for Federal assistance for tally retarded, hard of hearing, deaf,
the following purposes: speech impaired, visually handicapped,
(i) Grants for the acquisition or de- seriously emotionally disturbed, crip-
velopment of land or improvements for pled, or other health impaired children
public works or development facility who by reason thereof require special
usage in redevelopment areas. It au- education.
17
(36) Vocational Rehabilitation Act 1416). This act provides for Federal as-
Amendments of 1965 (29 U.S.C. 41a(b)(4)). sistance for the following purposes:
This act authorizes grants to assist in (i) Grants to assist in the construc-
meeting the costs of construction of tion, rehabilitation, alteration, or re-
public or other nonprofit workshops pair of residential property only if such
and rehabilitation facilities. residential property is designed for res-
(37) Clean Air and Solid Waste Disposal idential use for eight or more families
Acts (42 U.S.C. 3256). This act provides to enable city demonstration agencies
for financial assistance to public (Fed- to carry out comprehensive city dem-
eral, State, interstate, or local) au- onstration programs (42 U.S.C. 3310).
thorities, agencies, and institutions, (ii) Amends the National Housing Act
private agencies and institutions, and (12 U.S.C. 1715c) and the Housing Act of
individuals in the construction of fa- 1937 (42 U.S.C. 1416). See these acts for
cilities for solid-waste disposal. The coverage.
term construction includes the instal- (45) Air Quality Act of 1967 (42 U.S.C.
lation of initial equipment. 1857j–3). This act provides for Federal
(38) Medical Library Assistance Act of assistance to public or nonprofit agen-
1965 (42 U.S.C. 280b–3(b)(3)). This act cies, institutions, and organizations
provides for grants to public or private and to individuals, and contracts with
non-profit agencies or institutions for public or private agencies, institutions,
the cost of construction of medical li- or persons for construction of research
brary facilities. and development facilities and dem-
(39) Veterans Nursing Home Care Act onstration plants relating to the appli-
(38 U.S.C. 5035(a)(8)). The construction cation of preventing or controlling dis-
industry health and safety standards charges into the air of various types of
do not apply to this act since it is not pollutants.
subject to Reorganization Plan No. 14 (46) Elementary and Secondary Edu-
of 1950. cation Amendments of 1967 (Title VII—Bi-
(40) National Capital Transportation lingual Education Act) (20 U.S.C. 880b–6).
Act of 1965 (40 U.S.C. 682(b)(4)). This act This act provides for Federal assist-
provides for Federal assistance to the ance to local educational agencies or
National Capital Transportation Agen- to an institution of higher education
cy for construction of a rail rapid tran- applying jointly with a local edu-
sit system and related facilities for the cational agency for minor remodeling
Nation’s Capital. projects in connection with bilingual
(41) Alaska Centennial—1967 (80 Stat. education programs to meet the special
82). The program under this legislation needs of children with limited English-
has expired. speaking ability in the United States.
(42) Model Secondary School for the (47) Vocational Rehabilitation Amend-
Deaf Act (80 Stat. 1028). This act pro- ments of 1967 (29 U.S.C. 42a(c)(3)). This
vides for funds to establish and oper- act authorizes Federal assistance to
ate, including construction and initial any public or nonprofit private agency
equipment of new buildings, expansion, or organization for the construction of
remodeling, and alteration of existing a center for vocational rehabilitation
buildings and equipment thereof, a of handicapped individuals who are
model secondary school for the deaf to both deaf and blind which shall be
serve the residents of the District of known as the National Center for Deaf-
Columbia and nearby States. Blind Youths and Adults. Construction
(43) Allied Health Professions Personnel includes new buildings and expansion,
Training Act of 1966 (42 U.S.C. remodeling, alteration and renovation
295h(b)(2)(E)). This act provides for of existing buildings, and initial equip-
grants to assist in the construction of ment of such new, newly acquired, ex-
new facilities for training centers for panded, remodeled, altered, or ren-
allied health professions, or replace- ovated buildings.
ment or rehabilitation of existing fa- (48) National Visitor Center Facilities
cilities for such centers. Act of 1968 (40 U.S.C. 808). This act au-
(44) Demonstration Cities and Metro- thorizes agreements and leases with
politan Development Act of 1966 (42 the owner of property in the District of
U.S.C. 3310; 12 U.S.C. 1715c; 42 U.S.C. Columbia known as Union Station for
18
the use of all or a part of such property bility and desirability of such schools.
for a national visitor center to be The act still further provides grants to
known as the National Visitor Center. State boards, to colleges and univer-
The agreements and leases shall pro- sities, to public educational agencies,
vide for such alterations of the Union organizations or institutions to reduce
Station Building as necessary to pro- the cost of borrowing funds for the con-
vide adequate facilities for visitors. struction of residential schools and
They also provide for the construction dormitories.
of a parking facility, including nec- (53) Postal Reorganization Act (39
essary approaches and ramps. U.S.C. 410(d)(2)). This Act provides for
(49) Juvenile Delinquency Prevention construction, modification, alteration,
and Control Act of 1968 (42 U.S.C. 3843). repair, and other improvements of
This act provides for Federal grants to postal facilities located in leased build-
State, county, municipal, or other pub- ings.
lic agency or combination thereof for (54) Airport and Airway Development
the construction of facilities to be used Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–258, section
in connection with rehabilitation serv- 52(b)(7)). This Act provides for Federal
ices for the diagnosis, treatment, and financial assistance to States and lo-
rehabilitation of delinquent youths and calities for the construction, improve-
youths in danger of becoming delin- ment, or repair of public airports.
quent.
(55) (i) Public Law 91–230. This Act
(50) Housing and Urban Development
provides for federal financial assist-
Act of 1968 (including New Communities
ance to institutions of higher learning
Act of 1968) (42 U.S.C. 3909). This act
for the construction of a National Cen-
provides for Federal assistance for the
ter on Educational Media and Mate-
following purposes:
rials for the Handicapped. The program
(i) Guarantees, and commitments to
under this statute expires on July 1,
guarantee, the bonds, debentures,
1971. Public Law 91–230, section 662(1).
notes, and other obligations issued by
new community developers to help fi- (ii) Education of the Handicapped Act
nance new community development (20 U.S.C. 12326, 1404(a)). This Act pro-
projects. vides for financial assistance to States
(ii) Amends section 212(a) of the Na- for construction, expansion, remod-
tional Housing Act, adding section 236 eling, or alteration of facilities for the
for ‘‘Rental Housing for Lower Income education of handicapped children at
Families’’ and section 242 ‘‘Mortgage the preschool, elementary school, and
Insurance for Nonprofit Hospitals’’ secondary school levels.
thereto. (56) Housing and Urban Development
(51) Public Health Service Act Amend- Act of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–609, section
ment (Alcoholic and Narcotic Addict Re- 707(b)). This Act provides for grants to
habilitation Amendments of 1968) (42 States and local public agencies to help
U.S.C. 2681, et seq.). This act provides finance the development of open-space
for grants to a public and nonprofit pri- or other land in urban areas for open-
vate agency or organization for con- space uses. This Act becomes effective
struction projects consisting of any fa- on July 1, 1971.
cilities (including post-hospitalization (57) Developmental Disabilities Services
treatment facilities for the prevention and Facilities Construction Amendments
and treatment of alcoholism or treat- of 1970 (Pub. L. 91–517, section 135(a)(5)).
ment of narcotic addicts.) This Act authorizes grants to States
(52) Vocational Education Amendments for construction of facilities for the
of 1968 (20 U.S.C. 1246). This act pro- provision of services to persons with
vides for grants to States for the con- developmental disabilities who are un-
struction of area vocational education able to pay for such services.
school facilities. The act further pro- (58) Rail Passenger Service Act of 1970
vides grants to public educational (Pub. L. 91–518, section 405(d)). This stat-
agencies, organizations, or institutions ute provides that the National Rail-

for construction of residential schools road Passenger Corporation may con-
to provide vocational education for the struct physical facilities necessary to
purpose of demonstrating the feasi- intercity rail passenger operations
19
within the basic national rail pas- or dangerous to his health or safety’’ as
senger system designated by the Sec- these health and safety standards are
retary of Transportation. applied in the rules of the Secretary of
(c) VA and FHA housing. In the course Labor.
of the legislative development of sec- (c) The term subcontractor under sec-
tion 107, it was recognized that section tion 107 is considered to mean a person
107 would not apply to housing con- who agrees to perform any part of the
struction for which insurance was labor or material requirements of a
issued by the Federal Housing Author- contract for construction, alteration or
ity and Veterans’ Administration for repair. Cf. MacEvoy Co. v. United
individual home ownership. Concerning States, 322 U.S. 102, 108–9 (1944). A per-
construction under the National Hous- son who undertakes to perform a por-
ing Act, Reorganization Plan No. 14 of tion of a contract involving the fur-
1950 applies to construction which is nishing of supplies or materials will be
subject to the minimum wage require- considered a ‘‘subcontractor’’ under
ments of section 212(a) thereof (12 this part and section 107 if the work in
U.S.C. 1715c). question involves the performance of
construction work and is to be per-
§ 1926.13 Interpretation of statutory formed: (1) Directly on or near the con-
terms. struction site, or (2) by the employer
(a) The terms construction, alteration, for the specific project on a customized
and repair used in section 107 of the Act basis. Thus, a supplier of materials
are also used in section 1 of the Davis- which will become an integral part of
Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 276a), providing the construction is a ‘‘subcontractor’’
minimum wage protection on Federal if the supplier fabricates or assembles
construction contracts, and section 1 of the goods or materials in question spe-
the Miller Act (40 U.S.C. 270a), pro- cifically for the construction project
viding performance and payment bond and the work involved may be said to
protection on Federal construction be construction activity. If the goods
contracts. Similarly, the terms con- or materials in question are ordinarily
tractor and subcontractor are used in sold to other customers from regular
those statutes, as well as in Copeland inventory, the supplier is not a ‘‘sub-
(Anti-Kickback) Act (40 U.S.C. 276c) contractor.’’ Generally, the furnishing
and the Contract Work Hours and Safe- of prestressed concrete beams and
ty Standards Act itself, which apply prestressed structural steel would be
concurrently with the Miller Act and considered manufacturing; therefore a
the Davis-Bacon Act on Federal con- supplier of such materials would not be
struction contracts and also apply to considered a ‘‘subcontractor.’’ An ex-
most federally assisted construction ample of material supplied ‘‘for the
contracts. The use of the same or iden- specific project on a customized basis’’
tical terms in these statutes which as that phrase is used in this section
apply concurrently with section 107 of would be ventilating ducts, fabricated
the Act have considerable precedential in a shop away from the construction
value in ascertaining the coverage of job site and specifically cut for the
section 107. project according to design specifica-
(b) It should be noted that section 1 tions. On the other hand, if a con-
of the Davis-Bacon Act limits min- tractor buys standard size nails from a
imum wage protection to laborers and foundry, the foundry would not be a
mechanics ‘‘employed directly’’ upon covered ‘‘subcontractor.’’ Ordinarily a
the ‘‘site of the work.’’ There is no contract for the supplying of construc-
comparable limitation in section 107 of tion equipment to a contractor would
the Act. Section 107 expressly requires not, in and of itself, be considered a
as a self-executing condition of each ‘‘subcontractor’’ for purposes of this
covered contract that no contractor or part.
subcontractor shall require ‘‘any la-
borer or mechanic employed in the per- § 1926.14 Federal contract for ‘‘mixed’’
formance of the contract to work in types of performance.
surroundings or under working condi- (a) It is the intent of the Congress to
tions which are unsanitary, hazardous, provide safety and health protection of
20
Federal, federally financed, or feder- tract will be performed nor will any of
ally assisted construction. See, for ex- the materials, supplies, articles or
ample, H. Report No. 91–241, 91st Cong., equipment to be manufactured or fur-
first session, p. 1 (1969). Thus, it is clear nished under said contract be manufac-
that when a Federal contract calls for tured or fabricated in any plants, fac-
mixed types of performance, such as tories, buildings, or surroundings or
both manufacturing and construction, under working conditions which are
section 107 would apply to the con- unsanitary or hazardous or dangerous
struction. By its express terms, section to the health and safety of employees
107 applies to a contract which is ‘‘for engaged in the performance of said
construction, alteration, and/or re- contract.’’ The rules of the Secretary
pair.’’ Such a contract is not required concerning these standards are pub-
to be exclusively for such services. The lished in 41 CFR part 50–204, and ex-
application of the section is not lim- press the Secretary of Labor’s interpre-
ited to contracts which permit an over- tation and application of section 1(e) of
all characterization as ‘‘construction the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act
contracts.’’ The text of section 107 is to certain particular working condi-
not so limited. tions. None of the described working
(b) When the mixed types of perform- conditions are intended to deal with
ances include both construction and construction activities, although such
manufacturing, see also § 1926.15(b) con- activities may conceivably be a part of
cerning the relationship between the a contract which is subject to the
Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act and Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act.
section 107. Nevertheless, such activities remain
subject to the general statutory duty
§ 1926.15 Relationship to the Service
Contract Act; Walsh-Healey Public prescribed by section 1(e). Section
Contracts Act. 103(b) of the Contract Work Hours and
Safety Standards Act provides, among
(a) A contract for ‘‘construction’’ is other things, that the Act shall not
one for nonpersonal service. See, e.g., apply to any work required to be done
41 CFR 1–1.208. Section 2(e) of the Serv- in accordance with the provisions of
ice Contract Act of 1965 requires as a the Walsh-Healey Public Contracts
condition of every Federal contract Act.
(and bid specification therefor) exceed-
ing $2,500, the ‘‘principal purpose’’ of § 1926.16 Rules of construction.
which is to furnish services to the
United States through the use of (a) The prime contractor and any
‘‘service employees,’’ that certain safe- subcontractors may make their own
ty and health standards be met. See 29 arrangements with respect to obliga-
CFR part 1925, which contains the De- tions which might be more appro-
partment rules concerning these stand- priately treated on a jobsite basis rath-
ards. Section 7 of the Service Contract er than individually. Thus, for exam-
Act provides that the Act shall not ple, the prime contractor and his sub-
apply to ‘‘any contract of the United contractors may wish to make an ex-
States or District of Columbia for con- press agreement that the prime con-
struction, alteration, and/or repair, in- tractor or one of the subcontractors
cluding painting and decorating of pub- will provide all required first-aid or
lic buildings or public works.’’ It is toilet facilities, thus relieving the sub-
clear from the legislative history of contractors from the actual, but not
section 107 that no gaps in coverage be- any legal, responsibility (or, as the
tween the two statutes are intended. case may be, relieving the other sub-
(b) The Walsh-Healey Public Con- contractors from this responsibility).
tracts Act requires that contracts en- In no case shall the prime contractor
tered into by any Federal agency for be relieved of overall responsibility for
the manufacture or furnishing of mate- compliance with the requirements of
rials, supplies, articles, and equipment this part for all work to be performed
in any amount exceeding $10,000 must under the contract.
contain, among other provisions, a re- (b) By contracting for full perform-
quirement that ‘‘no part of such con- ance of a contract subject to section
21
107 of the Act, the prime contractor as- programs as may be necessary to com-
sumes all obligations prescribed as em- ply with this part.
ployer obligations under the standards (2) Such programs shall provide for
contained in this part, whether or not frequent and regular inspections of the
he subcontracts any part of the work. job sites, materials, and equipment to
(c) To the extent that a subcon- be made by competent persons des-
tractor of any tier agrees to perform ignated by the employers.
any part of the contract, he also as- (3) The use of any machinery, tool,
sumes responsibility for complying material, or equipment which is not in
with the standards in this part with re- compliance with any applicable re-
spect to that part. Thus, the prime quirement of this part is prohibited.
contractor assumes the entire responsi- Such machine, tool, material, or equip-
bility under the contract and the sub- ment shall either be identified as un-
contractor assumes responsibility with safe by tagging or locking the controls
respect to his portion of the work. to render them inoperable or shall be
With respect to subcontracted work, physically removed from its place of
the prime contractor and any subcon- operation.
tractor or subcontractors shall be (4) The employer shall permit only
deemed to have joint responsibility. those employees qualified by training
(d) Where joint responsibility exists, or experience to operate equipment and
both the prime contractor and his sub- machinery.
contractor or subcontractors, regard- (c) The standards contained in this
less of tier, shall be considered subject part shall apply with respect to em-
to the enforcement provisions of the ployments performed in a workplace in
Act. a State, the District of Columbia, the
Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the
Subpart C—General Safety and Virgin Islands, American Samoa,
Health Provisions Guam, Trust Territory of the Pacific
Islands, Wake Island, Outer Conti-
nental Shelf lands defined in the Outer
AUTHORITY: Sec. 3704, Contract Work Hours Continental Shelf Lands Act, Johnston
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333);
Island, and the Canal Zone.
secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); (d) (1) If a particular standard is spe-
Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR cifically applicable to a condition,
8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 6– practice, means, method, operation, or
96 (62 FR 111), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31160) as appli- process, it shall prevail over any dif-
cable; and 29 CFR part 1911. ferent general standard which might
otherwise be applicable to the same
§ 1926.20 General safety and health condition, practice, means, method, op-
provisions. eration, or process.
(a) Contractor requirements. (1) Sec- (2) On the other hand, any standard
tion 107 of the Act requires that it shall apply according to its terms to
shall be a condition of each contract any employment and place of employ-
which is entered into under legislation ment in any industry, even though par-
subject to Reorganization Plan Number ticular standards are also prescribed
14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267), as defined in for the industry to the extent that
§ 1926.12, and is for construction, alter- none of such particular standards ap-
ation, and/or repair, including painting plies.
and decorating, that no contractor or (e) In the event a standard protects
subcontractor for any part of the con- on its face a class of persons larger
tract work shall require any laborer or than employees, the standard shall be
mechanic employed in the performance applicable under this part only to em-
of the contract to work in sur- ployees and their employment and
roundings or under working conditions places of employment.
which are unsanitary, hazardous, or (f) Compliance duties owed to each em-
dangerous to his health or safety. ployee.—(1) Personal protective equip-

(b) Accident prevention responsibilities. ment. Standards in this part requiring
(1) It shall be the responsibility of the the employer to provide personal pro-
employer to initiate and maintain such tective equipment (PPE), including
22
respirators and other types of PPE, be- structed regarding the potential haz-
cause of hazards to employees impose a ards, and how to avoid injury, and the
separate compliance duty with respect first aid procedures to be used in the
to each employee covered by the re- event of injury.
quirement. The employer must provide (5) Employees required to handle or
PPE to each employee required to use use flammable liquids, gases, or toxic
the PPE, and each failure to provide materials shall be instructed in the
PPE to an employee may be considered safe handling and use of these mate-
a separate violation. rials and made aware of the specific re-
(2) Training. Standards in this part quirements contained in subparts D, F,
requiring training on hazards and re- and other applicable subparts of this
lated matters, such as standards re- part.
quiring that employees receive train- (6)(i) All employees required to enter
ing or that the employer train employ- into confined or enclosed spaces shall
ees, provide training to employees, or be instructed as to the nature of the
institute or implement a training pro- hazards involved, the necessary pre-
gram, impose a separate compliance cautions to be taken, and in the use of
duty with respect to each employee protective and emergency equipment
covered by the requirement. The em- required. The employer shall comply
ployer must train each affected em- with any specific regulations that
ployee in the manner required by the apply to work in dangerous or poten-
standard, and each failure to train an tially dangerous areas.
employee may be considered a separate (ii) For purposes of paragraph (b)(6)(i)
violation. of this section, confined or enclosed
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, space means any space having a limited
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993; means of egress, which is subject to the
73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008] accumulation of toxic or flammable
contaminants or has an oxygen defi-
§ 1926.21 Safety training and edu- cient atmosphere. Confined or enclosed
cation. spaces include, but are not limited to,
(a) General requirements. The Sec- storage tanks, process vessels, bins,
retary shall, pursuant to section 107(f) boilers, ventilation or exhaust ducts,
of the Act, establish and supervise pro- sewers, underground utility vaults,
grams for the education and training of tunnels, pipelines, and open top spaces
employers and employees in the rec- more than 4 feet in depth such as pits,
ognition, avoidance and prevention of tubs, vaults, and vessels.
unsafe conditions in employments cov-
ered by the act. § 1926.22 Recording and reporting of
(b) Employer responsibility. (1) The em- injuries. [Reserved]
ployer should avail himself of the safe-
ty and health training programs the § 1926.23 First aid and medical atten-
tion.
Secretary provides.
(2) The employer shall instruct each First aid services and provisions for
employee in the recognition and avoid- medical care shall be made available
ance of unsafe conditions and the regu- by the employer for every employee
lations applicable to his work environ- covered by these regulations. Regula-
ment to control or eliminate any haz- tions prescribing specific requirements
ards or other exposure to illness or infor first aid, medical attention, and
jury. emergency facilities are contained in
(3) Employees required to handle or subpart D of this part.
use poisons, caustics, and other harm-
ful substances shall be instructed re- § 1926.24 Fire protection and preven-
garding the safe handling and use, and tion.
be made aware of the potential haz- The employer shall be responsible for
ards, personal hygiene, and personal the development and maintenance of
protective measures required. an effective fire protection and preven-

(4) In job site areas where harmful tion program at the job site through-
plants or animals are present, employ- out all phases of the construction, re-
ees who may be exposed shall be in- pair, alteration, or demolition work.
23
The employer shall ensure the avail- § 1926.29 Acceptable certifications.

ability of the fire protection and sup-
pression equipment required by subpart (a) Pressure vessels. Current and valid
F of this part. certification by an insurance company
or regulatory authority shall be
§ 1926.25 Housekeeping. deemed as acceptable evidence of safe
installation, inspection, and testing of
(a) During the course of construction,
alteration, or repairs, form and scrap pressure vessels provided by the em-
lumber with protruding nails, and all ployer.
other debris, shall be kept cleared from (b) Boilers. Boilers provided by the
work areas, passageways, and stairs, in employer shall be deemed to be in com-
and around buildings or other struc- pliance with the requirements of this
tures. part when evidence of current and valid
(b) Combustible scrap and debris certification by an insurance company
shall be removed at regular intervals or regulatory authority attesting to
during the course of construction. Safe the safe installation, inspection, and
means shall be provided to facilitate testing is presented.
such removal. (c) Other requirements. Regulations
(c) Containers shall be provided for prescribing specific requirements for
the collection and separation of waste, other types of pressure vessels and
trash, oily and used rags, and other similar equipment are contained in
refuse. Containers used for garbage and subparts F and O of this part.
other oily, flammable, or hazardous
wastes, such as caustics, acids, harmful § 1926.30 Shipbuilding and ship repair-
dusts, etc. shall be equipped with cov- ing.
ers. Garbage and other waste shall be (a) General. Shipbuilding, ship repair-
disposed of at frequent and regular ining, alterations, and maintenance per-
tervals. formed on ships under Government
contract, except naval ship construc-
§ 1926.26 Illumination. tion, is work subject to the Act.
Construction areas, aisles, stairs, (b) Applicable safety and health stand-
ramps, runways, corridors, offices, ards. For the purpose of work carried
shops, and storage areas where work is out under this section, the safety and
in progress shall be lighted with either health regulations in part 1915 of this
natural or artificial illumination. The title, Shipyard Employment, shall
minimum illumination requirements apply.
for work areas are contained in subpart
D of this part. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996]
§ 1926.27 Sanitation.
§ 1926.31 Incorporation by reference.
Health and sanitation requirements
for drinking water are contained in (a) The standards of agencies of the
subpart D of this part. U.S. Government, and organizations
which are not agencies of the U.S. Gov-
§ 1926.28 Personal protective equip- ernment which are incorporated by ref-
ment. erence in this part, have the same force
(a) The employer is responsible for and effect as other standards in this
requiring the wearing of appropriate part. Only the mandatory provisions
personal protective equipment in all (i.e., provisions containing the word
operations where there is an exposure ‘‘shall’’ or other mandatory language)
to hazardous conditions or where this of standards incorporated by reference
part indicates the need for using such are adopted as standards under the Oc-
equipment to reduce the hazards to the cupational Safety and Health Act. The
employees. locations where these standards may
(b) Regulations governing the use, se- be examined are as follows:
lection, and maintenance of personal (1) Offices of the Occupational Safety

protective and lifesaving equipment and Health Administration, U.S. De-
are described under subpart E of this partment of Labor, Frances Perkins
part. Building, Washington, DC 20210.
24
(2) The Regional and Field Offices of (i) Designated person means ‘‘author-
the Occupational Safety and Health ized person’’ as defined in paragraph (d)
Administration, which are listed in the of this section.
U.S. Government Manual. (j) Employee means every laborer or
(b) Any changes in the specifications, mechanic under the Act regardless of
standards and codes incorporated by the contractual relationship which
reference in this part and an official may be alleged to exist between the la-
historic file of such changes are avail- borer and mechanic and the contractor
able at the offices referred to in para- or subcontractor who engaged him.
graph (a) of this section. All questions ‘‘Laborer and mechanic’’ are not de-
as to the applicability of such changes fined in the Act, but the identical
should also be referred to these offices. terms are used in the Davis-Bacon Act
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(40 U.S.C. 276a), which provides for
1979, as amended at 61 FR 9249, Mar. 7, 1996; minimum wage protection on Federal
63 FR 33468, June 18, 1998] and federally assisted construction
contracts. The use of the same term in
§ 1926.32 Definitions. a statute which often applies concur-
The following definitions shall apply rently with section 107 of the Act has
in the application of the regulations in considerable precedential value in
this part: ascertaining the meaning of ‘‘laborer
and mechanic’’ as used in the Act. La-
(a) Act means section 107 of the Con-
tract Work Hours and Safety Stand- borer generally means one who per-
ards Act, commonly known as the Con- forms manual labor or who labors at an
struction Safety Act (86 Stat. 96; 40 occupation requiring physical strength;
U.S.C. 333). mechanic generally means a worker
skilled with tools. See 18 Comp. Gen.
(b) ANSI means American National
341.
Standards Institute.
(k) Employer means contractor or
(c) Approved means sanctioned, en-
subcontractor within the meaning of
dorsed, accredited, certified, or accept-
ed as satisfactory by a duly constituted the Act and of this part.
and nationally recognized authority or (l) Hazardous substance means a sub-
agency. stance which, by reason of being explo-
(d) Authorized person means a person sive, flammable, poisonous, corrosive,
approved or assigned by the employer oxidizing, irritating, or otherwise
to perform a specific type of duty or harmful, is likely to cause death or in-
duties or to be at a specific location or jury.
locations at the jobsite. (m) Qualified means one who, by pos-
(e) Administration means the Occupa- session of a recognized degree, certifi-
tional Safety and Health Administra- cate, or professional standing, or who
tion. by extensive knowledge, training, and
(f) Competent person means one who is experience, has successfully dem-
capable of identifying existing and pre- onstrated his ability to solve or resolve
dictable hazards in the surroundings or problems relating to the subject mat-
working conditions which are unsani- ter, the work, or the project.
tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em- (n) Safety factor means the ratio of
ployees, and who has authorization to the ultimate breaking strength of a
take prompt corrective measures to member or piece of material or equip-
eliminate them. ment to the actual working stress or
(g) Construction work. For purposes of safe load when in use.
this section, Construction work means (o) Secretary means the Secretary of
work for construction, alteration, and/ Labor.
or repair, including painting and deco- (p) SAE means Society of Automotive
rating. Engineers.
(h) Defect means any characteristic (q) Shall means mandatory.

or condition which tends to weaken or (r) Should means recommended.
reduce the strength of the tool, object, (s) Suitable means that which fits,
or structure of which it is a part. and has the qualities or qualifications
25
to meet a given purpose, occasion, con- (2) Procedures to be followed by em-

dition, function, or circumstance. ployees who remain to operate critical
plant operations before they evacuate;
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35078, June 30, 1993] (3) Procedures to account for all em-
ployees after emergency evacuation
§ 1926.33 Access to employee exposure has been completed;
and medical records. (4) Rescue and medical duties for
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- those employees who are to perform
struction work under this section are iden- them;
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1020 of this (5) The preferred means of reporting
chapter. fires and other emergencies; and
[61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] (6) Names or regular job titles of per-
sons or departments who can be con-
§ 1926.34 Means of egress. tacted for further information or expla-
(a) General. In every building or nation of duties under the plan.
structure exits shall be so arranged and (c) Alarm system. (1) The employer
maintained as to provide free and un- shall establish an employee alarm sys-
obstructed egress from all parts of the tem which complies with § 1926.159.
building or structure at all times when (2) If the employee alarm system is
it is occupied. No lock or fastening to used for alerting fire brigade members,
prevent free escape from the inside of or for other purposes, a distinctive sig-
any building shall be installed except nal for each purpose shall be used.
in mental, penal, or corrective institu- (d) Evacuation. The employer shall
tions where supervisory personnel is establish in the emergency action plan
continually on duty and effective pro- the types of evacuation to be used in
visions are made to remove occupants emergency circumstances.
in case of fire or other emergency.
(e) Training. (1) Before implementing
(b) Exit marking. Exits shall be
the emergency action plan, the em-
marked by a readily visible sign. Ac-
ployer shall designate and train a suffi-
cess to exits shall be marked by readily
visible signs in all cases where the exit cient number of persons to assist in the
or way to reach it is not immediately safe and orderly emergency evacuation
visible to the occupants. of employees.
(c) Maintenance and workmanship. (2) The employer shall review the
Means of egress shall be continually plan with each employee covered by
maintained free of all obstructions or the plan at the following times:
impediments to full instant use in the (i) Initially when the plan is devel-
case of fire or other emergency. oped,
(ii) Whenever the employee’s respon-
[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993]
sibilities or designated actions under
§ 1926.35 Employee emergency action the plan change, and
plans. (iii) Whenever the plan is changed.
(3) The employer shall review with
(a) Scope and application. This section
applies to all emergency action plans each employee upon initial assignment
required by a particular OSHA stand- those parts of the plan which the em-
ard. The emergency action plan shall ployee must know to protect the em-
be in writing (except as provided in the ployee in the event of an emergency.
last sentence of paragraph (e)(3) of this The written plan shall be kept at the
section) and shall cover those des- workplace and made available for em-
ignated actions employers and employ- ployee review. For those employers
ees must take to ensure employee safe- with 10 or fewer employees the plan
ty from fire and other emergencies. may be communicated orally to em-
(b) Elements. The following elements, ployees and the employer need not
at a minimum, shall be included in the maintain a written plan.

plan:
[58 FR 35083, June 30, 1993]
(1) Emergency escape procedures and
emergency escape route assignments;
26
Subpart D—Occupational Health essary ambulance service, shall be pro-

and Environmental Controls vided.
(f) In areas where 911 is not available,
the telephone numbers of the physi-
AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract cians, hospitals, or ambulances shall be
Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
conspicuously posted.
U.S.C. 3701 et seq.); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (g) Where the eyes or body of any
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La- person may be exposed to injurious cor-
bor’s Orders 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR rosive materials, suitable facilities for
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6– quick drenching or flushing of the eyes
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (62 FR 50017), 5–2002 (67 and body shall be provided within the
FR 65008); or 5–2007 (72 FR 31160) as applica- work area for immediate emergency
ble; and 29 CFR part 1911. use.
Sections 1926.58, 1926.59, 1926.60, and 1926.65
also issued under 5 U.S.C. 553 and 29 CFR APPENDIX A TO § 1926.50—FIRST AID KITS
part 1911. (NON-MANDATORY)
Section 1926.62 of 29 CFR also issued under
section 1031 of the Housing and Community First aid supplies are required to be
Development Act of 1992 (42 U.S.C. 4853). easily accessible under paragraph
Section 1926.65 of 29 CFR also issued under § 1926.50(d)(1). An example of the mini-
section 126 of the Superfund Amendments mal contents of a generic first aid kit
and Reauthorization Act of 1986, as amended is described in American National
(29 U.S.C. 655 note), and 5 U.S.C. 553.
Standard (ANSI) Z308.1–1978 ‘‘Minimum
Requirements for Industrial Unit-Type
§ 1926.50 Medical services and first
aid. First-aid Kits’’. The contents of the kit
listed in the ANSI standard should be
(a) The employer shall insure the adequate for small work sites. When
availability of medical personnel for larger operations or multiple oper-
advice and consultation on matters of ations are being conducted at the same
occupational health. location, employers should determine
(b) Provisions shall be made prior to the need for additional first aid kits at
commencement of the project for the worksite, additional types of first
prompt medical attention in case of se- aid equipment and supplies and addi-
rious injury. tional quantities and types of supplies
(c) In the absence of an infirmary, and equipment in the first aid kits.
clinic, hospital, or physician, that is In a similar fashion, employers who
reasonably accessible in terms of time have unique or changing first-aid needs
and distance to the worksite, which is in their workplace, may need to en-
available for the treatment of injured hance their first-aid kits. The em-
employees, a person who has a valid ployer can use the OSHA 200 log, OSHA
certificate in first-aid training from 101’s or other reports to identify these
the U.S. Bureau of Mines, the Amer- unique problems. Consultation from
ican Red Cross, or equivalent training the local Fire/Rescue Department, ap-
that can be verified by documentary propriate medical professional, or local
evidence, shall be available at the emergency room may be helpful to em-
worksite to render first aid. ployers in these circumstances. By as-
(d)(1) First aid supplies shall be eas- sessing the specific needs of their
ily accessible when required. workplace, employers can ensure that
(2) The contents of the first aid kit reasonably anticipated supplies are
shall be placed in a weatherproof con- available. Employers should assess the
tainer with individual sealed packages specific needs of their worksite periodi-
for each type of item, and shall be cally and augment the first aid kit ap-
checked by the employer before being propriately.
sent out on each job and at least week- If it is reasonably anticipated em-
ly on each job to ensure that the ex- ployees will be exposed to blood or
pended items are replaced. other potentially infectious materials
(e) Proper equipment for prompt while using first-aid supplies, employ-
transportation of the injured person to ers should provide personal protective
a physician or hospital, or a commu- equipment (PPE). Appropriate PPE in-
nication system for contacting nec- cludes gloves, gowns, face shields,
27
masks and eye protection (see ‘‘Occu- (2) Under temporary field conditions,
pational Exposure to Blood borne provisions shall be made to assure not
Pathogens’’, 29 CFR 1910.1030(d)(3)) (56 less than one toilet facility is avail-
FR 64175). able.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (3) Job sites, not provided with a san-
1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; itary sewer, shall be provided with one
58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, of the following toilet facilities unless
1996; 63 FR 33469, June 18, 1998] prohibited by local codes:
(i) Privies (where their use will not
§ 1926.51 Sanitation. contaminate ground or surface water);
(a) Potable water. (1) An adequate sup- (ii) Chemical toilets;
ply of potable water shall be provided (iii) Recirculating toilets;
in all places of employment. (iv) Combustion toilets.
(2) Portable containers used to dis- (4) The requirements of this para-
pense drinking water shall be capable graph (c) for sanitation facilities shall
of being tightly closed, and equipped not apply to mobile crews having
with a tap. Water shall not be dipped transportation readily available to
from containers. nearby toilet facilities.
(3) Any container used to distribute (d) Food handling. (1) All employees’
drinking water shall be clearly marked food service facilities and operations
as to the nature of its contents and not shall meet the applicable laws, ordi-
used for any other purpose. nances, and regulations of the jurisdic-
(4) The common drinking cup is pro- tions in which they are located.
hibited. (2) All employee food service facili-
(5) Where single service cups (to be ties and operations shall be carried out
used but once) are supplied, both a san- in accordance with sound hygienic
itary container for the unused cups and principles. In all places of employment
a receptacle for disposing of the used where all or part of the food service is
cups shall be provided. provided, the food dispensed shall be
(6) Potable water means water which wholesome, free from spoilage, and
meets the quality standards prescribed shall be processed, prepared, handled,
in the U.S. Public Health Service and stored in such a manner as to be
Drinking Water Standards, published protected against contamination.
in 42 CFR part 72, or water which is ap- (e) Temporary sleeping quarters. When
proved for drinking purposes by the temporary sleeping quarters are pro-
State or local authority having juris- vided, they shall be heated, ventilated,
diction. and lighted.
(b) Nonpotable water. (1) Outlets for (f) Washing facilities. (1) The employer
nonpotable water, such as water for in- shall provide adequate washing facili-
dustrial or firefighting purposes only, ties for employees engaged in the ap-
shall be identified by signs meeting the plication of paints, coating, herbicides,
requirements of subpart G of this part, or insecticides, or in other operations
to indicate clearly that the water is where contaminants may be harmful to
unsafe and is not to be used for drink- the employees. Such facilities shall be
ing, washing, or cooking purposes. in near proximity to the worksite and
(2) There shall be no cross-connec- shall be so equipped as to enable em-
tion, open or potential, between a sys- ployees to remove such substances.
tem furnishing potable water and a (2) General. Washing facilities shall
system furnishing nonpotable water. be maintained in a sanitary condition.
(c) Toilets at construction jobsites. (1) (3) Lavatories. (i) Lavatories shall be
Toilets shall be provided for employees
made available in all places of employ-
according to the following table:
ment. The requirements of this sub-
TABLE D–1 division do not apply to mobile crews
or to normally unattended work loca-
Number of em- Minimum number of facilities tions if employees working at these lo-
ployees
cations have transportation readily
20 or less .......... 1. available to nearby washing facilities
20 or more ......... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 40 workers. which meet the other requirements of
200 or more ....... 1 toilet seat and 1 urinal per 50 workers.
this paragraph.
28
(ii) Each lavatory shall be provided the sound levels exceed those shown in
with hot and cold running water, or Table D–2 of this section when meas-
tepid running water. ured on the A-scale of a standard sound
(iii) Hand soap or similar cleansing level meter at slow response.
agents shall be provided. (b) When employees are subjected to
(iv) Individual hand towels or sec- sound levels exceeding those listed in
tions thereof, of cloth or paper, warm Table D–2 of this section, feasible ad-
air blowers or clean individual sections ministrative or engineering controls
of continuous cloth toweling, conven- shall be utilized. If such controls fail to
ient to the lavatories, shall be pro- reduce sound levels within the levels of
vided. the table, personal protective equip-
(4) Showers. (i) Whenever showers are ment as required in subpart E, shall be
required by a particular standard, the provided and used to reduce sound lev-
showers shall be provided in accord- els within the levels of the table.
ance with paragraphs (f)(4) (ii) through
(c) If the variations in noise level in-
(v) of this section.
volve maxima at intervals of 1 second
(ii) One shower shall be provided for
or less, it is to be considered contin-
each 10 employees of each sex, or nu-
merical fraction thereof, who are re- uous.
quired to shower during the same shift. (d)(1) In all cases where the sound
(iii) Body soap or other appropriate levels exceed the values shown herein,
cleansing agents convenient to the a continuing, effective hearing con-
showers shall be provided as specified servation program shall be adminis-
in paragraph (f)(3)(iii) of this section. tered.
(iv) Showers shall be provided with
hot and cold water feeding a common TABLE D–2—PERMISSIBLE NOISE EXPOSURES
discharge line. Sound level
(v) Employees who use showers shall Duration per day, hours dBA slow
response
be provided with individual clean tow-
els. 8 ......................................................................... 90
(g) Eating and drinking areas. No em- 6 ......................................................................... 92
ployee shall be allowed to consume 4 ......................................................................... 95
food or beverages in a toilet room nor 3 ......................................................................... 97
2 ......................................................................... 100
in any area exposed to a toxic mate-
11⁄2 ..................................................................... 102
rial. 1 ......................................................................... 105
(h) Vermin control. Every enclosed 1⁄2 ....................................................................... 110
workplace shall be so constructed, 1⁄4 or less ........................................................... 115
equipped, and maintained, so far as
reasonably practicable, as to prevent (2)(i) When the daily noise exposure
the entrance or harborage of rodents, is composed of two or more periods of
insects, and other vermin. A con- noise exposure of different levels, their
tinuing and effective extermination combined effect should be considered,
program shall be instituted where their rather than the individual effect of
presence is detected. each. Exposure to different levels for
(i) Change rooms. Whenever employ- various periods of time shall be com-
ees are required by a particular stand- puted according to the formula set
ard to wear protective clothing because forth in paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this sec-
of the possibility of contamination tion.
with toxic materials, change rooms (ii) Fe = (T1/L1)+(T2/L2)+ · · · + (Tn/Ln)
equipped with storage facilities for
street clothes and separate storage fa- Where:
cilities for the protective clothing Fe = The equivalent noise exposure factor.
shall be provided. T = The period of noise exposure at any es-
sentially constant level.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, L = The duration of the permissible noise ex-
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35084, June 30, 1993] posure at the constant level (from Table D–
2).
§ 1926.52 Occupational noise exposure.
(a) Protection against the effects of If the value of Fe exceeds unity (1) the
noise exposure shall be provided when exposure exceeds permissible levels.
29
(iii) A sample computation showing (c) Employees, when working in areas

an application of the formula in para- in which a potential exposure to direct
graph (d)(2)(ii) of this section is as fol- or reflected laser light greater than
lows. An employee is exposed at these 0.005 watts (5 milliwatts) exists, shall
levels for these periods: be provided with antilaser eye protec-
tion devices as specified in subpart E of
110 db A 1⁄4 hour.
100 db A 1⁄2 hour.
this part.
90 db A 11⁄2 hours. (d) Areas in which lasers are used
shall be posted with standard laser
Fe = (1⁄4/1⁄2)+(1⁄2/2)+(11⁄2/8) warning placards.
Fe = 0.500+0.25+0.188 (e) Beam shutters or caps shall be
Fe = 0.938
utilized, or the laser turned off, when
Since the value of Fe does not exceed laser transmission is not actually re-
unity, the exposure is within permis- quired. When the laser is left unat-
sible limits. tended for a substantial period of time,
(e) Exposure to impulsive or impact such as during lunch hour, overnight,
noise should not exceed 140 dB peak or at change of shifts, the laser shall be
sound pressure level. turned off.
(f) Only mechanical or electronic
§ 1926.53 Ionizing radiation. means shall be used as a detector for
guiding the internal alignment of the
(a) In construction and related ac-
laser.
tivities involving the use of sources of
(g) The laser beam shall not be di-
ionizing radiation, the pertinent provi-
rected at employees.
sions of the Nuclear Regulatory Com-
(h) When it is raining or snowing, or
mission’s Standards for Protection
when there is dust or fog in the air, the
Against Radiation (10 CFR part 20), re-
operation of laser systems shall be pro-
lating to protection against occupa-
hibited where practicable; in any
tional radiation exposure, shall apply.
event, employees shall be kept out of
(b) Any activity which involves the range of the area of source and target
use of radioactive materials or X-rays, during such weather conditions.
whether or not under license from the (i) Laser equipment shall bear a label
Nuclear Regulatory Commission, shall to indicate maximum output.
be performed by competent persons (j) Employees shall not be exposed to
specially trained in the proper and safe light intensities above:
operation of such equipment. In the (1) Direct staring: 1 micro-watt per
case of materials used under Commis- square centimeter;
sion license, only persons actually li- (2) Incidental observing: 1 milliwatt
censed, or competent persons under di- per square centimeter;
rection and supervision of the licensee, (3) Diffused reflected light: 21⁄2 watts
shall perform such work. per square centimeter.
(c)–(r) [Reserved] (k) Laser unit in operation should be
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con- set up above the heads of the employ-
struction work under paragraphs (c) through ees, when possible.
(r) of this section are identical to those set (l) Employees shall not be exposed to
forth at paragraphs (a) through (p) of microwave power densities in excess of
§ 1910.1096 of this chapter. 10 milliwatts per square centimeter.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996; § 1926.55 Gases, vapors, fumes, dusts,
61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996] and mists.
(a) Exposure of employees to inhala-
§ 1926.54 Nonionizing radiation. tion, ingestion, skin absorption, or
(a) Only qualified and trained em- contact with any material or substance
ployees shall be assigned to install, ad- at a concentration above those speci-
just, and operate laser equipment. fied in the ‘‘Threshold Limit Values of
(b) Proof of qualification of the laser Airborne Contaminants for 1970’’ of the
equipment operator shall be available American Conference of Governmental
and in possession of the operator at all Industrial Hygienists, shall be avoided.
times. See Appendix A to this section.
30
(b) To achieve compliance with para- (c) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec-
graph (a) of this section, administration do not apply to the exposure of
tive or engineering controls must first employees to airborne asbestos,
be implemented whenever feasible. tremolite, anthophyllite, or actinolite
When such controls are not feasible to dust. Whenever any employee is ex-
achieve full compliance, protective posed to airborne asbestos, tremolite,
equipment or other protective meas- anthophyllite, or actinolite dust, the
ures shall be used to keep the exposure requirements of § 1910.1101 or § 1926.58 of
of employees to air contaminants with- this title shall apply.
in the limits prescribed in this section.
(d) Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this sec-
Any equipment and technical measures
used for this purpose must first be ap- tion do not apply to the exposure of
proved for each particular use by a employees to formaldehyde. Whenever
competent industrial hygienist or any employee is exposed to formalde-
other technically qualified person. hyde, the requirements of § 1910.1048 of
Whenever respirators are used, their this title shall apply.
use shall comply with § 1926.103.
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.55—1970 AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL

INDUSTRIAL HYGIENISTS’ THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION
Skin Designa-
Substance CAS No. d ppm a mg/m 3,b tion
Abate; see Temephos.

Acetaldehyde ......................................... 75–07–0 200 360 —
Acetic acid ............................................. 64–19–7 10 25 —
Acetic anhydride .................................... 108–24–7 5 20 —
Acetone ................................................. 67–64–1 1000 2400 —
Acetonitrile ............................................. 75–05–8 40 70 —
2-Acetylaminofluorine; see § 1926.1114 53–96–3
Acetylene ............................................... 74–86–2 E
Acetylene dichloride; see 1,2-
Dichloroethylene.
Acetylene tetrabromide ......................... 79–27–6 1 14 —
Acrolein ................................................. 107–02–8 0.1 0.25 —
Acrylamide ............................................. 79–06–1 — 0.3 X
Acrylonitrile; see § 1926.1145 ............... 107–13–1
Aldrin ..................................................... 309–00–2 — 0.25 X
Allyl alcohol ........................................... 107–18–6 2 5 X
Allyl chloride .......................................... 107–05–1 1 3 —
Allyl glycidyl ether (AGE) ...................... 106–92–3 (C)10 (C)45 —
Allyl propyl disulfide .............................. 2179–59–1 2 12 —
alpha-Alumina ....................................... 1344–28–1
Total dust ....................................... — —
Respirable fraction ......................... — —
Alundum; see alpha-Alumina.
4-Aminodiphenyl; see § 1926.1111 ....... 92–67–1
2-Aminoethanol; see Ethanolamine.
2-Aminopyridine .................................... 504–29–0 0.5 2 —
Ammonia ............................................... 7664–41–7 50 35 —
Ammonium sulfamate ........................... 7773–06–0
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Respirable fraction ......................... — 5 —
n-Amyl acetate ...................................... 628–63–7 100 525 —
sec-Amyl acetate ................................... 626–38–0 125 650 —
Aniline and homologs ............................ 62–53–3 5 19 X

Anisidine (o-, p-isomers) ....................... 29191–52–4 — 0.5 X
Antimony and compounds (as Sb) ....... 7440–36–0 — 0.5 —
ANTU (alpha Naphthylthiourea) ............ 86–88–4 — 0.3 —
Argon ..................................................... 7440–37–1 E
31
THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued
Skin Designa-
Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As);

see § 1926.1118 ................................ 7440–38–2 — — —
Arsenic, organic compounds (as As) .... 7440–38–2 — 0.5 —
Arsine .................................................... 7784–42–1 0.05 0.2 —
Asbestos; see 1926.58.
Azinphos-methyl .................................... 86–50–0 — 0.2 X
Barium, soluble compounds (as Ba) ..... 7440–39–3 — 0.5 —
Benzene g; see § 1926.1128 ................. 71–43–2
Benzidine; see § 1926.1110 .................. 92–87–5
p-Benzoquinone; see Quinone.
Benzo(a)pyrene; see Coal tar pitch
volatiles.
Benzoyl peroxide ................................... 94–36–0 — 5 —
Benzyl chloride ...................................... 100–44–7 1 5 —
Beryllium and beryllium compounds (as
Be) ..................................................... 7440–41–7 — 0.002 —
Biphenyl; see Diphenyl.
Bisphenol A; see Diglycidyl ether.
Boron oxide ........................................... 1303–86–2
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Boron tribromide .................................... 10294–33–4 1 10 —
Boron trifluoride ..................................... 7637–07–2 (C)1 (C)3 —
Bromine ................................................. 7726–95–6 0.1 0.7 —
Bromine pentafluoride ........................... 7789–30–2 0.1 0.7 —
Bromoform ............................................. 75–25–2 0.5 5 X
Butadiene (1,3-Butadiene); see 29 CFR
1910.1051; 29 CFR 1910.19(l) .......... 106–99–0 STEL
1 ppm/5 ppm ...................... —
Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan.

2-Butanone (Methyl ethyl ketone) ......... 78–93–3 200 590 —
2-Butoxyethanol .................................... 111–76–2 50 240 X
n-Butyl-acetate ...................................... 123–86–4 150 710 —
sec-Butyl acetate ................................... 105–46–4 200 950 —
tert-Butyl acetate ................................... 540–88–5 200 950 —
n-Butyl alcohol ....................................... 71–36–3 100 300 —
sec-Butyl alcohol ................................... 78–92–2 150 450 —
tert-Butyl alcohol ................................... 75–65–0 100 300 —
Butylamine ............................................. 109–73–9 (C)5 (C)15 X
tert-Butyl chromate (as CrO3); see
1926.1126 n ........................................ 1189–85–1
n-Butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) .................. 2426–08–6 50 270 —
Butyl mercaptan .................................... 109–79–5 0.5 1.5 —
p-tert-Butyltoluene ................................. 98–51–1 10 60 —
Cadmium (as Cd); see 1926.1127 ........ 7440–43–9
Calcium carbonate ................................ 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Calcium oxide ........................................ 1305–78–8 — 5 —
Calcium sulfate ...................................... 7778–18–9
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Camphor, synthetic ............................... 76–22–2 — 2 —
Carbaryl (Sevin) .................................... 63–25–2 — 5 —
Carbon black ......................................... 1333–86–4 — 3.5 —
Carbon dioxide ...................................... 124–38–9 5000 9000 —
Carbon disulfide .................................... 75–15–0 20 60 X
Carbon monoxide .................................. 630–08–0 50 55 —

Carbon tetrachloride .............................. 56–23–5 10 65 X
Cellulose ................................................ 9004–34–6
Total dust ....................................... — —
Chlordane .............................................. 57–74–9 — 0.5 X
32
Skin Designa-
Chlorinated camphene .......................... 8001–35–2 — 0.5 X

Chlorinated diphenyl oxide .................... 55720–99–5 — 0.5 —
Chlorine ................................................. 7782–50–5 1 3 —
Chlorine dioxide .................................... 10049–04–4 0.1 0.3
Chlorine trifluoride ................................. 7790–91–2 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 —
Chloroacetaldehyde .............................. 107–20–0 (C)1 (C)3 —
a-Chloroacetophenone (Phenacyl chlo-
ride) .................................................... 532–27–4 0.05 0.3 —
Chlorobenzene ...................................... 108–90–7 75 350 —
o-Chlorobenzylidene malononitrile ........ 2698–41–1 0.05 0.4 —
Chlorobromomethane ............................ 74–97–5 200 1050 —
2-Chloro-1,3-butadiene; see beta-Chlo-
roprene.
Chlorodiphenyl (42% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 53469–21–9 — 1 X
Chlorodiphenyl (54% Chlorine) (PCB) .. 11097–69–1 — 0.5 X
1-Chloro,2,3-epoxypropane; see
Epichlorohydrin.
2-Chloroethanol; see Ethylene
chlorohydrin.
Chloroethylene; see Vinyl chloride.
Chloroform (Trichloromethane) ............. 67–66–3 (C)50 (C)240 —
bis(Chloromethyl) ether; see
§ 1926.1108 ....................................... 542–88–1
Chloromethyl methyl ether; see
§ 1926.1106 ....................................... 107–30–2
1-Chloro-1-nitropropane ........................ 600–25–9 20 100 —
Chloropicrin ........................................... 76–06–2 0.1 0.7 —
beta-Chloroprene .................................. 126–99–8 25 90 X
Chromium (II) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440–47–3 — 0.5 —
Chromium (III) compounds.
(as Cr) ............................................ 7440–47–3 — 0.5 —
Chromium (VI) compounds; See
1926.1126 o.
Chromium metal and insol. salts (as
Cr) ...................................................... 7440–47–3 — 1 —
Chrysene; see Coal tar pitch volatiles.
Coal tar pitch volatiles (benzene solu-
ble fraction), anthracene, BaP, phen-
anthrene, acridine, chrysene, pyrene 65996–93–2 — 0.2 —
Cobalt metal, dust, and fume (as Co) .. 7440–48–4 — 0.1 —
Coke oven emissions; see § 1926.1129.
Copper ................................................... 7440–50–8
Fume (as Cu) ................................. — 0.1 —
Dusts and mists (as Cu) ................ — 1 —
Corundum; see Emery.
Cotton dust (raw) .................................. — 1
Crag herbicide (Sesone) ....................... 136–78–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Cresol, all isomers ................................ 1319–77–3 5 22 X
Crotonaldehyde ..................................... 123–73–9; 2 6
4170–30–3
Cumene ................................................. 98–82–8 50 245 X
Cyanides (as CN) .................................. Varies with — 5 X
Compound
Cyanogen .............................................. 460–19–5 10 — —
Cyclohexane .......................................... 110–82–7 300 1050 —

Cyclohexanol ......................................... 108–93–0 50 200 —
Cyclohexanone ...................................... 108–94–1 50 200 —
Cyclohexene .......................................... 110–83–8 300 1015 —
Cyclonite ................................................ 121–82–4 — 1.5 X
33
Skin Designa-
Cyclopentadiene .................................... 542–92–7 75 200 —

DDT, see
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane.
DDVP, see Dichlorvos.
2,4-D (Dichlorophenoxyacetic acid) ...... 94–75–7 — 10 —
Decaborane ........................................... 17702–41–9 0.05 0.3 X
Demeton (Systox) ................................. 8065–48–3 — 0.1 X
Diacetone alcohol (4-Hydroxy-4-methyl-
2-pentanone) ..................................... 123–42–2 50 240 —
1,2-Diaminoethane; see Ethylene-
diamine.
Diazomethane ....................................... 334–88–3 0.2 0.4 —
Diborane ................................................ 19287–45–7 0.1 0.1 —
1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane (DBCP);
see § 1926.1144 ................................ 96–12–8 —
1,2-Dibromoethane; see Ethylene
dibromide.
Dibutyl phosphate ................................. 107–66–4 1 5 —
Dibutyl phthalate ................................... 84–74–2 — 5 —
Dichloroacetylene .................................. 7572–29–4 (C)0.1 (C)0.4 —
o-Dichlorobenzene ................................ 95–50–1 (C)50 (C)300 —
p-Dichlorobenzene ................................ 106–46–7 75 450 —
3,3′-Dichlorobenzidine; see
§ 1926.1107 ....................................... 91–94–1
Dichlorodifluoromethane ....................... 75–71–8 1000 4950 —
1,3-Dichloro-5,5-dimethyl hydantoin ..... 118–52–5 — 0.2 —
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT) 50–29–3 — 1 X
1,1-Dichloroethane ................................ 75–34–3 100 400 —
1,2-Dichloroethane; see Ethylene di-
chloride.
1,2-Dichloroethylene ............................. 540–59–0 200 790 —
Dichloroethyl ether ................................ 111–44–4 (C)15 (C)90 X
Dichloromethane; see Methylene chlo-
ride.
Dichloromonofluoromethane ................. 75–43–4 1000 4200 —
1,1-Dichloro-1-nitroethane ..................... 594–72–9 (C)10 (C)60 —
1,2-Dichloropropane; see Propylene di-
chloride.
Dichlorotetrafluoroethane ...................... 76–14–2 1000 7000 —
Dichlorvos (DDVP) ................................ 62–73–7 — 1 X
Dieldrin .................................................. 60–57–1 — 0.25 X
Diethylamine .......................................... 109–89–7 25 75 —
2-Diethylaminoethanol ........................... 100–37–8 10 50 X
Diethylene triamine ............................... 111–40–0 (C)10 (C)42 X
Diethyl ether; see Ethyl ether.
Difluorodibromomethane ....................... 75–61–6 100 860 —
Diglycidyl ether (DGE) .......................... 2238–07–5 (C)0.5 (C)2.8 —
Dihydroxybenzene; see Hydroquinone.
Diisobutyl ketone ................................... 108–83–8 50 290 —
Diisopropylamine ................................... 108–18–9 5 20 X
4-Dimethylaminoazobenzene; see
§ 1926.1115 ....................................... 60–11–7
Dimethoxymethane; see Methylal.
Dimethyl acetamide ............................... 127–19–5 10 35 X
Dimethylamine ....................................... 124–40–3 10 18 —
Dimethylaminobenzene; see Xylidine.
Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline) ... 121–69–7 5 25 X

Dimethylbenzene; see Xylene.
Dimethyl-1,2-dibromo- 2,2-dichloroethyl
phosphate .......................................... 300–76–5 — 3 —
Dimethylformamide ............................... 68–12–2 10 30 X
34
Skin Designa-
2,6-Dimethyl-4-heptanone; see
Diisobutyl ketone.
1,1-Dimethylhydrazine ........................... 57–14–7 0.5 1 X
Dimethylphthalate .................................. 131–11–3 — 5 —
Dimethyl sulfate ..................................... 77–78–3 1 5 X
Dinitrobenzene (all isomers) ................. 1 X
(ortho) ............................................. 528–29–0
(meta) ............................................. 99–65–0
(para) .............................................. 100–25–4
Dinitro-o-cresol ...................................... 534–52–1 — 0.2 X
Dinitrotoluene ........................................ 25321–14–6 — 1.5 X
Dioxane (Diethylene dioxide) ................ 123–91–1 100 360 X
Diphenyl (Biphenyl) ............................... 92–52–4 0.2 1 —
Diphenylamine ....................................... 122–39–4 — 10 —
Diphenylmethane diisocyanate; see
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate.
Dipropylene glycol methyl ether ............ 34590–94–8 100 600 X
Di-sec octyl phthalate (Di-(2-ethylhexyl)
phthalate) ........................................... 117–81–7 — 5 —
Emery .................................................... 12415–34–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
Endosulfan ............................................ 115–29–7 — 0.1 X
Endrin .................................................... 72–20–8 — 0.1 X
Epichlorohydrin ...................................... 106–89–8 5 19 X
EPN ....................................................... 2104–64–5 — 0.5 X
1,2-Epoxypropane; see Propylene
oxide.
2,3-Epoxy-1-propanol; see Glycidol.
Ethane ................................................... 74–84–0 E
Ethanethiol; see Ethyl mercaptan.
Ethanolamine ........................................ 141–43–5 3 6 —
2-Ethoxyethanol (Cellosolve) ................ 110–80–5 200 740 X
2-Ethoxyethyl acetate (Cellosolve ace-
tate) .................................................... 111–15–9 100 540 X
Ethyl acetate ......................................... 141–78–6 400 1400 —
Ethyl acrylate ......................................... 140–88–5 25 100 X
Ethyl alcohol (Ethanol) .......................... 64–17–5 1000 1900 —
Ethylamine ............................................. 75–04–7 10 18 —
Ethyl amyl ketone (5-Methyl-3-
heptanone) ......................................... 541–85–5 25 130 —
Ethyl benzene ....................................... 100–41–4 100 435 —
Ethyl bromide ........................................ 74–96–4 200 890 —
Ethyl butyl ketone (3-Heptanone) ......... 106–35–4 50 230 —
Ethyl chloride ......................................... 75–00–3 1000 2600 —
Ethyl ether ............................................. 60–29–7 400 1200 —
Ethyl formate ......................................... 109–94–4 100 300 —
Ethyl mercaptan .................................... 75–08–1 0.5 1 —
Ethyl silicate .......................................... 78–10–4 100 850 —
Ethylene ................................................ 74–85–1 E
Ethylene chlorohydrin ............................ 107–07–3 5 16 X
Ethylenediamine .................................... 107–15–3 10 25 —
Ethylene dibromide ............................... 106–93–4 (C)25 (C)190 X
Ethylene dichloride (1,2-
Dichloroethane) ................................. 107–06–2 50 200 —
Ethylene glycol dinitrate ........................ 628–96–6 (C)0.2 (C)1 X
Ethylene glycol methyl acetate; see
Methyl cellosolve acetate.

Ethyleneimine; see § 1926.1112 ........... 151–56–4
Ethylene oxide; see § 1926.1147 .......... 75–21–8
Ethylidene chloride; see 1,1-
Dichloroethane.
35
Skin Designa-
N-Ethylmorpholine ................................. 100–74–3 20 94 X

Ferbam .................................................. 14484–64–1
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Ferrovanadium dust .............................. 12604–58–9 — 1 —
Fibrous Glass.
Total dust ....................................... —
Fluorides (as F) ..................................... Varies with — 2.5 —
compound
Fluorine ................................................. 7782–41–4 0.1 0.2 —
Fluorotrichloromethane
(Trichlorofluoromethane) ................... 75–69–4 1000 5600 —
Formaldehyde; see § 1926.1148 ........... 50–00–0
Formic acid ............................................ 64–18–6 5 9 —
Furfural .................................................. 98–01–1 5 20 X
Furfuryl alcohol ...................................... 98–00–0 50 200 —
Gasoline ................................................ 8006–61–9 A3 —
Glycerin (mist) ....................................... 56–81–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Glycidol .................................................. 556–52–5 50 150 —
Glycol monoethyl ether; see 2-
Ethoxyethanol.
Graphite, natural, respirable dust ......... 7782–42–5 (2) (2) (2)
Graphite, synthetic.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Guthion; see Azinphos methyl.
Gypsum ................................................. 13397–24–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Hafnium ................................................. 7440–58–6 — 0.5 —
Helium ................................................... 7440–59–7 E
Heptachlor ............................................. 76–44–8 — 0.5 X
Heptane (n-Heptane) ............................ 142–82–5 500 2000 —
Hexachloroethane ................................. 67–72–1 1 10 X
Hexachloronaphthalene ........................ 1335–87–1 — 0.2 X
n-Hexane ............................................... 110–54–3 500 1800 —
2-Hexanone (Methyl n-butyl ketone) ..... 591–78–6 100 410 —
Hexone (Methyl isobutyl ketone) .......... 108–10–1 100 410 —
sec-Hexyl acetate .................................. 108–84–9 50 300 —
Hydrazine .............................................. 302–01–2 1 1.3 X
Hydrogen ............................................... 1333–74–0 E
Hydrogen bromide ................................. 10035–10–6 3 10 —
Hydrogen chloride ................................. 7647–01–0 (C)5 (C)7 —
Hydrogen cyanide ................................. 74–90–8 10 11 X
Hydrogen fluoride (as F) ....................... 7664–39–3 3 2 —
Hydrogen peroxide ................................ 7722–84–1 1 1.4 —
Hydrogen selenide (as Se) ................... 7783–07–5 0.05 .02 —
Hydrogen sulfide ................................... 7783–06–4 10 15 —
Hydroquinone ........................................ 123–31–9 — 2 —
Indene ................................................... 95–13–6 10 45 —
Indium and compounds (as In) ............. 7440–74–6 — 0.1 —
Iodine ..................................................... 7553–56–2 (C)0.1 (C)1 —
Iron oxide fume ..................................... 1309–37–1 — 10 —
Iron salts (soluble) (as Fe) .................... Varies with — 1 —
compound
Isoamyl acetate ..................................... 123–92–2 100 525 —

Isoamyl alcohol (primary and sec-
ondary) ............................................... 123–51–3 100 360 —
Isobutyl acetate ..................................... 110–19–0 150 700 —
Isobutyl alcohol ..................................... 78–83–1 100 300 —
36
Skin Designa-
Isophorone ............................................ 78–59–1 25 140 —

Isopropyl acetate ................................... 108–21–4 250 950 —
Isopropyl alcohol ................................... 67–63–0 400 980 —
Isopropylamine ...................................... 75–31–0 5 12 —
Isopropyl ether ...................................... 108–20–3 500 2100 —
Isopropyl glycidyl ether (IGE) ................ 4016–14–2 50 240 —
Kaolin .................................................... 1332–58–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Ketene ................................................... 463–51–4 0.5 0.9 —
Lead, inorganic (as Pb); see 1926.62 .. 7439–92–1
Limestone .............................................. 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Lindane .................................................. 58–89–9 — 0.5 X
Lithium hydride ...................................... 7580–67–8 — 0.025 —
L.P.G. (Liquefied petroleum gas) .......... 68476–85–7 1000 1800
Magnesite .............................................. 546–93–0
Total dust ....................................... — —
Magnesium oxide fume ......................... 1309–48–4
Total particulate ............................. 15 — —
Malathion ............................................... 121–75–5
Total dust ....................................... — 15 X
Maleic anhydride ................................... 108–31–6 0.25
Manganese compounds (as Mn) .......... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 —
Manganese fume (as Mn) ..................... 7439–96–5 — (C)5 —
Marble ................................................... 1317–65–3
Total dust ....................................... — —
Mercury (aryl and inorganic)(as Hg) ..... 7439–97–6 0.1 X
Mercury (organo) alkyl compounds (as
Hg) ..................................................... 7439–97–6 — 0.01 X
Mercury (vapor) (as Hg) ........................ 7439–97–6 — 0.1 X
Mesityl oxide ......................................... 141–79–7 25 100 —
Methane ................................................ 74–82–8 E
Methanethiol; see Methyl mercaptan.
Methoxychlor ......................................... 72–43–5
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
2-Methoxyethanol (Methyl cellosolve) ... 109–86–4 25 80 X
2-Methoxyethyl acetate (Methyl
cellosolve acetate) ............................. 110–49–6 25 120 X
Methyl acetate ....................................... 79–20–9 200 610 —
Methyl acetylene (Propyne) .................. 74–99–7 1000 1650 —
Methyl acetylene-propadiene mixture
(MAPP) .............................................. 1000 1800 —
Methyl acrylate ...................................... 96–33–3 10 35 X
Methylal (Dimethoxy-methane) ............. 109–87–5 1000 3100 —
Methyl alcohol ....................................... 67–56–1 200 260 —
Methylamine .......................................... 74–89–5 10 12 —
Methyl amyl alcohol; see Methyl iso-
butyl carbinol.
Methyl n-amyl ketone ............................ 110–43–0 100 465 —
Methyl bromide ...................................... 74–83–9 (C)20 (C)80 X
Methyl butyl ketone; see 2-Hexanone.
Methyl cellosolve; see 2-
Methoxyethanol.
Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-

Methoxyethyl acetate.
Methylene chloride; see § 1910.1052.
Methyl chloroform (1,1,1-Trichloro-
ethane) ............................................... 71–55–6 350 1900 —
37
Skin Designa-
Methylcyclohexane ................................ 108–87–2 500 2000 —

Methylcyclohexanol ............................... 25639–42–3 100 470 —
o-Methylcyclohexanone ......................... 583–60–8 100 460 X
Methylene chloride ................................ 75–09–2 500 1740 —
Methylenedianiline (MDA) ..................... 101–77–9
Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK); see 2-Buta-
none.
Methyl formate ...................................... 107–31–3 100 250 —
Methyl hydrazine (Monomethyl hydra-
zine) ................................................... 60–34–4 (C)0.2 (C)0.35 X
Methyl iodide ......................................... 74–88–4 5 28 X
Methyl isoamyl ketone .......................... 110–12–3 100 475 —
Methyl isobutyl carbinol ......................... 108–11–2 25 100 X
Methyl isobutyl ketone; see Hexone.
Methyl isocyanate ................................. 624–83–9 0.02 0.05 X
Methyl mercaptan .................................. 74–93–1 0.5 1 —
Methyl methacrylate .............................. 80–62–6 100 410 —
Methyl propyl ketone; see 2-Pentanone.
Methyl silicate ........................................ 681–84–5 (C)5 (C)30 —
alpha-Methyl styrene ............................. 98–83–9 (C)100 (C)480 —
Methylene bisphenyl isocyanate (MDI) 101–68–8 (C)0.02 (C)0.2 —
Mica; see Silicates.
Molybdenum (as Mo) ............................ 7439–98–7
Soluble compounds ....................... — 5 —
Insoluble compounds.
Total dust .................................... — 15 —
Monomethyl aniline ............................... 100–61–8 2 9 X
Monomethyl hydrazine; see Methyl hy-
drazine.
Morpholine ............................................. 110–91–8 20 70 X
Naphtha (Coal tar) ................................ 8030–30–6 100 400 —
Naphthalene .......................................... 91–20–3 10 50 —
alpha-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1104 134–32–7
beta-Naphthylamine; see § 1926.1109 91–59–8 —
Neon ...................................................... 7440–01–9 E
Nickel carbonyl (as Ni) .......................... 13463–39–3 0.001 0.007 —
Nickel, metal and insoluble compounds
(as Ni) ................................................ 7440–02–0 — 1 —
Nickel, soluble compounds (as Ni) ....... 7440–02–0 — 1 —
Nicotine ................................................. 54–11–5 — 0.5 X
Nitric acid .............................................. 7697–37–2 2 5 —
Nitric oxide ............................................ 10102–43–9 25 30 —
p-Nitroaniline ......................................... 100–01–6 1 6 X
Nitrobenzene ......................................... 98–95–3 1 5 X
p-Nitrochlorobenzene ............................ 100–00–5 — 1 X
4-Nitrodiphenyl; see § 1926.1103 ......... 92–93–3
Nitroethane ............................................ 79–24–3 100 310 —
Nitrogen ................................................. 7727–37–9 E
Nitrogen dioxide .................................... 10102–44–0 (C)5 (C)9 —
Nitrogen trifluoride ................................. 7783–54–2 10 29 —
Nitroglycerin .......................................... 55–63–0 (C)0.2 (C)2 X
Nitromethane ......................................... 75–52–5 100 250 —
1-Nitropropane ...................................... 108–03–2 25 90 —
2-Nitropropane ...................................... 79–46–9 25 90 —
N-Nitrosodimethylamine; see
§ 1926.1116 ....................................... 62–79–9 —
Nitrotoluene (all isomers) ...................... 5 30 X
o-isomer ......................................... 88–72–2;

m-isomer ........................................ 99–08–1;
p-isomer ......................................... 99–99–0
Nitrotrichloromethane; see Chloropicrin.
Nitrous oxide ......................................... 10024–97–2 E
38
Skin Designa-
Octachloronaphthalene ......................... 2234–13–1 — 0.1 X

Octane ................................................... 111–65–9 400 1900 —
Oil mist, mineral .................................... 8012–95–1 — 5 —
Osmium tetroxide (as Os) ..................... 20816–12–0 — 0.002 —
Oxalic acid ............................................. 144–62–7 — 1 —
Oxygen difluoride .................................. 7783–41–7 0.05 0.1 —
Ozone .................................................... 10028–15–6 0.1 0.2 —
Paraquat, respirable dust ...................... 4685–14–7; — 0.5 X
1910–42–5;
2074–50–2
Parathion ............................................... 56–38–2 — 0.1 X
Particulates not otherwise regulated.
Total dust organic and inorganic ... — 15 —
PCB; see Chlorodiphenyl (42% and
54% chlorine).
Pentaborane .......................................... 19624–22–7 0.005 0.01 —
Pentachloronaphthalene ....................... 1321–64–8 — 0.5 X
Pentachlorophenol ................................ 87–86–5 — 0.5 X
Pentaerythritol ....................................... 115–77–5
Total dust ....................................... — —
Pentane ................................................. 109–66–0 500 1500 —
2-Pentanone (Methyl propyl ketone) ..... 107–87–9 200 700 —
Perchloroethylene
(Tetrachloroethylene) ......................... 127–18–4 100 670 —
Perchloromethyl mercaptan .................. 594–42–3 0.1 0.8 —
Perchloryl fluoride ................................. 7616–94–6 3 13.5 —
Petroleum distillates (Naphtha)(Rubber
Solvent) .............................................. A3 —
Phenol ................................................... 108–95–2 5 19 X
p-Phenylene diamine ............................ 106–50–3 — 0.1 X
Phenyl ether, vapor ............................... 101–84–8 1 7 —
Phenyl ether-biphenyl mixture, vapor ... 1 7 —
Phenylethylene; see Styrene.
Phenyl glycidyl ether (PGE) .................. 122–60–1 10 60 —
Phenylhydrazine .................................... 100–63–0 5 22 X
Phosdrin (Mevinphos) ........................... 7786–34–7 — 0.1 X
Phosgene (Carbonyl chloride) .............. 75–44–5 0.1 0.4 —
Phosphine ............................................. 7803–51–2 0.3 0.4 —
Phosphoric acid ..................................... 7664–38–2 — 1 —
Phosphorus (yellow) .............................. 7723–14–0 — 0.1 —
Phosphorus pentachloride .................... 10026–13–8 — 1 —
Phosphorus pentasulfide ....................... 1314–80–3 — 1 —
Phosphorus trichloride .......................... 7719–12–2 0.5 3 —
Phthalic anhydride ................................. 85–44–9 2 12 —
Picric acid .............................................. 88–89–1 — 0.1 X
Pindone (2-Pivalyl-1,3-indandione) ....... 83–26–1 — 0.1 —
Plaster of Paris ...................................... 26499–65–0
Total dust ....................................... — —
Platinum (as Pt) .................................... 7440–06–4
Metal .............................................. — — —
Soluble salts ................................... — 0.002 —
Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition
products ............................................. A2
Portland cement .................................... 65997–15–1
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Respirable fraction ......................... 5 —

Propane ................................................. 74–98–6 E
Propargyl alcohol .................................. 107–19–7 1 — X
beta-Propriolactone; see § 1926.1113 .. 57–57–8
n-Propyl acetate .................................... 109–60–4 200 840 —
39
Skin Designa-
n-Propyl alcohol .................................... 71–23–8 200 500 —

n-Propyl nitrate ...................................... 627–13–4 25 110 —
Propylene dichloride .............................. 78–87–5 75 350 —
Propylene imine .................................... 75–55–8 2 5 X
Propylene oxide .................................... 75–56–9 100 240 —
Propyne; see Methyl acetylene.
Pyrethrum .............................................. 8003–34–7 — 5 —
Pyridine ................................................. 110–86–1 5 15 —
Quinone ................................................. 106–51–4 0.1 0.4 —
RDX; see Cyclonite.
Rhodium (as Rh), metal fume and in-
soluble compounds ............................ 7440–16–6 — 0.1 —
Rhodium (as Rh), soluble compounds 7440–16–6 — 0.001 —
Ronnel ................................................... 299–84–3 — 10 —
Rotenone ............................................... 83–79–4 — 5 —
Rouge.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Selenium compounds (as Se) ............... 7782–49–2 — 0.2 —
Selenium hexafluoride (as Se) .............. 7783–79–1 0.05 0.4 —
Silica, amorphous, precipitated and gel 112926–00–8 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, amorphous, diatomaceous earth,
containing less than 1% crystalline
silica ................................................... 61790–53–2 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline cristobalite, respirable
dust .................................................... 14464–46–1 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline quartz, respirable dust 14808–60–7 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline tripoli (as quartz), res-
pirable dust ........................................ 1317–95–9 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, crystalline tridymite, respirable
dust .................................................... 15468–32–3 (2) (2) (2)
Silica, fused, respirable dust ................. 60676–86–0 (2) (2) (2)
Silicates (less than 1% crystalline sili-
ca).
Mica (respirable dust) .................... 12001–26–2 (2) (2) (2)
Soapstone, total dust ..................... (2) (2) (2)
Soapstone, respirable dust ............ (2) (2) (2)
Talc (containing asbestos); use as-
bestos limit; see 1926.58.
Talc (containing no asbestos), res-
pirable dust ................................. 14807–96–6 (2) (2) (2)
Tremolite, asbestiform; see
1926.58.
Silicon carbide ....................................... 409–21–2
Total dust ....................................... — —
Silver, metal and soluble compounds
(as Ag) ............................................... 7440–22–4 — 0.01 —
Soapstone; see Silicates.
Sodium fluoroacetate ............................ 62–74–8 — 0.05 X
Sodium hydroxide ................................. 1310–73–2 — 2 —
Starch .................................................... 9005–25–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
Stibine ................................................... 7803–52–3 0.1 0.5 —
Stoddard solvent ................................... 8052–41–3 200 1150 —
Strychnine ............................................. 57–24–9 — 0.15 —
Styrene .................................................. 100–42–5 (C)100 (C)420 —

Sucrose ................................................. 57–50–1
Total dust ....................................... — —
Sulfur dioxide ........................................ 7446–09–5 5 13 —
40
Skin Designa-
Sulfur hexafluoride ................................ 2551–62–4 1000 6000 —

Sulfuric acid ........................................... 7664–93–9 — 1 —
Sulfur monochloride .............................. 10025–67–9 1 6 —
Sulfur pentafluoride ............................... 5714–22–7 0.025 0.25 —
Sulfuryl fluoride ..................................... 2699–79–8 5 20 —
Systox, see Demeton.
2,4,5-T (2,4,5-trichlorophenoxyacetic
acid) ................................................... 93–76–5 — 10 —
Talc; see Silicates—.
Tantalum, metal and oxide dust ........... 7440–25–7 — 5 —
TEDP (Sulfotep) .................................... 3689–24–5 — 0.2 X
Teflon decomposition products ............. A2
Tellurium and compounds (as Te) ........ 13494–80–9 — 0.1 —
Tellurium hexafluoride (as Te) .............. 7783–80–4 0.02 0.2 —
Temephos ............................................. 3383–96–8
Total dust ....................................... — —
TEPP (Tetraethyl pyrophosphate) ........ 107–49–3 — 0.05 X
Terphenyls ............................................. 26140–60–3 (C)1 (C)9 —
1,1,1,2-Tetrachloro-2,2-difluoroethane .. 76–11–9 500 4170 —
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloro-1,2-difluoroethane .. 76–12–0 500 4170 —
1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane ..................... 79–34–5 5 35 X
Tetrachloroethylene; see
Perchloroethylene.
Tetrachloromethane; see Carbon tetra-
chloride.
Tetrachloronaphthalene ........................ 1335–88–2 — 2 X
Tetraethyl lead (as Pb) ......................... 78–00–2 — 0.1 X
Tetrahydrofuran ..................................... 109–99–9 200 590 —
Tetramethyl lead, (as Pb) ..................... 75–74–1 — 0.15 X
Tetramethyl succinonitrile ..................... 3333–52–6 0.5 3 X
Tetranitromethane ................................. 509–14–8 1 8 —
Tetryl (2,4,6-
Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine) .......... 479–45–8 — 1.5 X
Thallium, soluble compounds (as Tl) .... 7440–28–0 — 0.1 X
Thiram ................................................... 137–26–8 — 5 —
Tin, inorganic compounds (except ox-
ides) (as Sn) ...................................... 7440–31–5 — 2 —
Tin, organic compounds (as Sn) ........... 7440–31–5 — 0.1 —
Tin oxide (as Sn) ................................... 21651–19–4 — — —
Total dust ....................................... — —
Titanium dioxide .................................... 13463–67–7
Total dust ....................................... — —
Toluene ................................................. 108–88–3 200 750 —
Toluene-2,4-diisocyanate (TDI) ............. 584–84–9 (C)0.02 (C)0.14 —
o-Toluidine ............................................. 95–53–4 5 22 X
Toxaphene; see Chlorinated camphene.
Tremolite; see Silicates.
Tributyl phosphate ................................. 126–73–8 — 5 —
1,1,1-Trichloroethane; see Methyl chlo-
roform.
1,1,2-Trichloroethane ............................ 79–00–5 10 45 X
Trichloroethylene ................................... 79–01–6 100 535 —
Trichloromethane; see Chloroform.
Trichloronaphthalene ............................. 1321–65–9 — 5 X
1,2,3-Trichloropropane .......................... 96–18–4 50 300 —
1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane ...... 76–13–1 1000 7600 —

Triethylamine ......................................... 121–44–8 25 100 —
Trifluorobromomethane ......................... 75–63–8 1000 6100 —
Trimethyl benzene ................................. 25551–13–7 25 120 —
2,4,6-Trinitrophenol; see Picric acid.
41
Skin Designa-
2,4,6-Trinitrophenylmethylnitramine;
see Tetryl.
2,4,6-Trinitrotoluene (TNT) .................... 118–96–7 — 1.5 X
Triorthocresyl phosphate ....................... 78–30–8 — 0.1 —
Triphenyl phosphate .............................. 115–86–6 — 3 —
Tungsten (as W) ................................... 7440–33–7
Insoluble compounds ..................... — 5 —
Soluble compounds ....................... — 1 —
Turpentine ............................................. 8006–64–2 100 560 —
Uranium (as U) ...................................... 7440–61–1
Soluble compounds ....................... — 0.2 —
Insoluble compounds ..................... — 0.2 —
Vanadium .............................................. 1314–62–1
Respirable dust (as V2 O5) ............ — (C)0.5 —
Fume (as V2 O5) ............................ — (C)0.1 —
Vegetable oil mist.
Total dust ....................................... — —
Vinyl benzene; see Styrene.
Vinyl chloride; see § 1926.1117 ............ 75–01–4
Vinyl cyanide; see Acrylonitrile.
Vinyl toluene .......................................... 25013–15–4 100 480 —
Warfarin ................................................. 81–81–2 — 0.1 —
Xylenes (o-, m-, p-isomers) .................. 1330–20–7 100 435 —
Xylidine .................................................. 1300–73–8 5 25 X
Yttrium ................................................... 7440–65–5 — 1 —
Zinc chloride fume ................................. 7646–85–7 — 1 —
Zinc oxide fume ..................................... 1314–13–2 — 5 —
Zinc oxide .............................................. 1314–13–2
Total dust ....................................... — 15 —
Zirconium compounds (as Zr) ............... 7440–67–7 — 5
MINERAL DUSTS
SILICA:
Crystalline
Quartz. Threshold Limit calculated from the formula .......... 250 (k)
%SiO2+5
Cristobalite.
Amorphous, including natural diatomaceous earth ...... 20
SILICATES (less than 1% crystalline silica)
Mica .............................................................................. 20
Portland cement ............................................................ 50
Soapstone ..................................................................... 20
Talc (non-asbestiform) .................................................. 20
Talc (fibrous), use asbestos limit .................................. --
Graphite (natural) ................................................................. 15
Inert or Nuisance Particulates: (m) 50 (or 15 mg/m3 whichever is the smaller) of total
dust <1% SiO2
[Inert or Nuisance Dusts includes all mineral, inorganic,
and organic dusts as indicated by examples in TLV’s
Appendix D]
Conversion factors.
mppcf × 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles

per c.c.
Footnotes
1 [Reserved]
42
2 See Mineral Dusts Table.
3 Use Asbestos Limit § 1926.58.
4 See 1926.58.
* The PELs are 8-hour TWAs unless otherwise noted; a (C) designation denotes a ceiling limit.
** As determined from breathing-zone air samples.
a Parts of vapor or gas per million parts of contaminated air by volume at 25 °C and 760 torr.
b Milligrams of substance per cubic meter of air. When entry is in this column only, the value is exact; when listed with a
ppm entry, it is approximate.
c [Reserved]
d The CAS number is for information only. Enforcement is based on the substance name. For an entry covering more than
one metal compound, measured as the metal, the CAS number for the metal is given—not CAS numbers for the individual
compounds.
e f [Reserved]
g For sectors excluded from § 1926.1128 the limit is 10 ppm TWA.
h i [Reserved]
j Millions of particles per cubic foot of air, based on impinger samples counted by light-field techniques.
k The percentage of crystalline silica in the formula is the amount determined from airborne samples, except in those in-
stances in which other methods have been shown to be applicable.
l [Reserved]
m Covers all organic and inorganic particulates not otherwise regulated. Same as Particulates Not Otherwise Regulated.
n If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is a ceiling of 0.1 mg/m3.
o If the exposure limit in § 1926.1126 is stayed or is otherwise not in effect, the exposure limit is 0.1 mg/m3 (as CrO ) as an
3
8-hour TWA.
The 1970 TLV uses letter designations instead of a numerical value as follows:
A 1 [Reserved]
A 2 Polytetrafluoroethylene decomposition products. Because these products decompose in part by hydrolysis in alkaline solu-
tion, they can be quantitatively determined in air as fluoride to provide an index of exposure. No TLV is recommended pending
determination of the toxicity of the products, but air concentrations should be minimal.
A 3 Gasoline and/or Petroleum Distillates. The composition of these materials varies greatly and thus a single TLV for all
types of these materials is no longer applicable. The content of benzene, other aromatics and additives should be determined
to arrive at the appropriate TLV.
E Simple asphyxiants. The limiting factor is the available oxygen which shall be at least 19.5% and be within the require-
ments addressing explosion in part 1926.
[39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 51 FR 37007, Oct. 17, 1986; 52 FR 46312, Dec. 4, 1987;
58 FR 35089, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9249, 9250, Mar. 7, 1996; 61 FR 56856, Nov. 4, 1996; 62 FR 1619,
Jan. 10, 1997; 71 FR 10381, Feb. 28, 2006; 71 FR 36009, June 23, 2006]
§ 1926.56 Illumination. (b) Other areas. For areas or oper-

(a) General. Construction areas, ations not covered above, refer to the
ramps, runways, corridors, offices, American National Standard A11.1–
shops, and storage areas shall be light- 1965, R1970, Practice for Industrial
ed to not less than the minimum illu- Lighting, for recommended values of il-
mination intensities listed in Table D– lumination.
3 while any work is in progress:
§ 1926.57 Ventilation.
TABLE D–3—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION INTENSITIES (a) General. Whenever hazardous sub-
IN FOOT-CANDLES stances such as dusts, fumes, mists, va-
Foot-candles Area or operation
pors, or gases exist or are produced in
the course of construction work, their
5 ........................ General construction area lighting. concentrations shall not exceed the
3 ........................ General construction areas, concrete
placement, excavation and waste areas,
limits specified in § 1926.55(a). When
accessways, active storage areas, load- ventilation is used as an engineering
ing platforms, refueling, and field main- control method, the system shall be in-
tenance areas. stalled and operated according to the
5 ........................ Indoors: warehouses, corridors, hallways,
and exitways. requirements of this section.
5 ........................ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground (b) Local exhaust ventilation. Local ex-
work areas: (Exception: minimum of 10 haust ventilation when used as de-
foot-candles is required at tunnel and
shaft heading during drilling, mucking, scribed in (a) shall be designed to pre-
and scaling. Bureau of Mines approved vent dispersion into the air of dusts,
cap lights shall be acceptable for use in fumes, mists, vapors, and gases in con-
the tunnel heading.)
10 ...................... General construction plant and shops
centrations causing harmful exposure.
(e.g., batch plants, screening plants, Such exhaust systems shall be so de-
mechanical and electrical equipment signed that dusts, fumes, mists, vapors,
rooms, carpenter shops, rigging lofts or gases are not drawn through the
and active storerooms, barracks or liv-

ing quarters, locker or dressing rooms, work area of employees.
mess halls, and indoor toilets and work- (c) Design and operation. Exhaust
rooms). fans, jets, ducts, hoods, separators, and
30 ...................... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices.
all necessary appurtenances, including
43
refuse receptacles, shall be so designed, (iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete

constructed, maintained and operated enclosure which rotates on an axis, or
as to ensure the required protection by which has an internal moving tread to
maintaining a volume and velocity of tumble the parts, in order to expose
exhaust air sufficient to gather dusts, various surfaces of the parts to the ac-
fumes, vapors, or gases from said tion of an automatic blast spray.
equipment or process, and to convey (iv) Blast cleaning room. A complete
them to suitable points of safe dis- enclosure in which blasting operations
posal, thereby preventing their disper- are performed and where the operator
sion in harmful quantities into the at- works inside of the room to operate the
mosphere where employees work. blasting nozzle and direct the flow of
(d) Duration of operations. (1) The ex- the abrasive material.
haust system shall be in operation con- (v) Blasting cabinet. An enclosure
tinually during all operations which it where the operator stands outside and
is designed to serve. If the employee re- operates the blasting nozzle through an
mains in the contaminated zone, the opening or openings in the enclosure.
system shall continue to operate after (vi) Clean air. Air of such purity that
the cessation of said operations, the it will not cause harm or discomfort to
length of time to depend upon the indi- an individual if it is inhaled for ex-
vidual circumstances and effectiveness tended periods of time.
of the general ventilation system.
(vii) Dust collector. A device or com-
(2) Since dust capable of causing dis-
bination of devices for separating dust
ability is, according to the best med-
from the air handled by an exhaust
ical opinion, of microscopic size, tend-
ventilation system.
ing to remain for hours in suspension
(viii) Exhaust ventilation system. A
in still air, it is essential that the ex-
system for removing contaminated air
haust system be continued in operation
from a space, comprising two or more
for a time after the work process or
of the following elements (A) enclosure
equipment served by the same shall
or hood, (B) duct work, (C) dust col-
have ceased, in order to ensure the re-
lecting equipment, (D) exhauster, and
moval of the harmful elements to the
(E) discharge stack.
required extent. For the same reason,
employees wearing respiratory equip- (ix) Particulate-filter respirator. An air
ment should not remove same imme- purifying respirator, commonly re-
diately until the atmosphere seems ferred to as a dust or a fume respirator,
clear. which removes most of the dust or
(e) Disposal of exhaust materials. The fume from the air passing through the
air outlet from every dust separator, device.
and the dusts, fumes, mists, vapors, or (x) Respirable dust. Airborne dust in
gases collected by an exhaust or ven- sizes capable of passing through the
tilating system shall discharge to the upper respiratory system to reach the
outside atmosphere. Collecting sys- lower lung passages.
tems which return air to work area (xi) Rotary blast cleaning table. An en-
may be used if concentrations which closure where the pieces to be cleaned
accumulate in the work area air do not are positioned on a rotating table and
result in harmful exposure to employ- are passed automatically through a se-
ees. Dust and refuse discharged from an ries of blast sprays.
exhaust system shall be disposed of in (xii) Abrasive blasting. The forcible
such a manner that it will not result in application of an abrasive to a surface
harmful exposure to employees. by pneumatic pressure, hydraulic pres-
(f) Abrasive blasting—(1) Definitions sure, or centrifugal force.
applicable to this paragraph—(i) Abra- (2) Dust hazards from abrasive blasting.
sive. A solid substance used in an abra- (i) Abrasives and the surface coatings
sive blasting operation. on the materials blasted are shattered
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirator. A res- and pulverized during blasting oper-
pirator constructed so that it covers ations and the dust formed will contain
the wearer’s head, neck, and shoulders particles of respirable size. The com-
to protect the wearer from rebounding position and toxicity of the dust from
abrasive. these sources shall be considered in
44
making an evaluation of the potential dows, where hard deep-cutting abra-

health hazards. sives are used.
(ii) The concentration of respirable (E) Slit abrasive-resistant baffles
dust or fume in the breathing zone of shall be installed in multiple sets at all
the abrasive-blasting operator or any small access openings where dust
other worker shall be kept below the might escape, and shall be inspected
levels specified in § 1926.55 or other per- regularly and replaced when needed.
tinent sections of this part. (1) Doors shall be flanged and tight
(iii) Organic abrasives which are when closed.
combustible shall be used only in auto- (2) Doors on blast-cleaning rooms
matic systems. Where flammable or ex- shall be operable from both inside and
plosive dust mixtures may be present, outside, except that where there is a
the construction of the equipment, in- small operator access door, the large
cluding the exhaust system and all work access door may be closed or
electric wiring, shall conform to the opened from the outside only.
requirements of American National (4) Exhaust ventilation systems. (i) The
Standard Installation of Blower and construction, installation, inspection,
Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock, and
and maintenance of exhaust systems
Vapor Removal or Conveying, Z33.1–
shall conform to the principles and re-
1961 (NFPA 91–1961), and subpart S of
quirements set forth in American Na-
this part. The blast nozzle shall be
tional Standard Fundamentals Gov-
bonded and grounded to prevent the
erning the Design and Operation of
build up of static charges. Where flam-
Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960, and
mable or explosive dust mixtures may
ANSI Z33.1–1961.
be present, the abrasive blasting enclo-
sure, the ducts, and the dust collector (a) When dust leaks are noted, re-
shall be constructed with loose panels pairs shall be made as soon as possible.
or explosion venting areas, located on (b) The static pressure drop at the ex-
sides away from any occupied area, to haust ducts leading from the equip-
provide for pressure relief in case of ex- ment shall be checked when the instal-
plosion, following the principles set lation is completed and periodically
forth in the National Fire Protection thereafter to assure continued satisfac-
Association Explosion Venting Guide. tory operation. Whenever an appre-
NFPA 68–1954. ciable change in the pressure drop indi-
(3) Blast-cleaning enclosures. (i) Blast- cates a partial blockage, the system
cleaning enclosures shall be exhaust shall be cleaned and returned to nor-
ventilated in such a way that a contin- mal operating condition.
uous inward flow of air will be main- (ii) In installations where the abra-
tained at all openings in the enclosure sive is recirculated, the exhaust ven-
during the blasting operation. tilation system for the blasting enclo-
(A) All air inlets and access openings sure shall not be relied upon for the re-
shall be baffled or so arranged that by moval of fines from the spent abrasive
the combination of inward air flow and instead of an abrasive separator. An
baffling the escape of abrasive or dust abrasive separator shall be provided for
particles into an adjacent work area the purpose.
will be minimized and visible spurts of (iii) The air exhausted from blast-
dust will not be observed. cleaning equipment shall be discharged
(B) The rate of exhaust shall be suffi- through dust collecting equipment.
cient to provide prompt clearance of Dust collectors shall be set up so that
the dust-laden air within the enclosure the accumulated dust can be emptied
after the cessation of blasting. and removed without contaminating
(C) Before the enclosure is opened, other working areas.
the blast shall be turned off and the ex- (5) Personal protective equipment. (i)
haust system shall be run for a suffi- Employers must use only respirators
cient period of time to remove the approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part
dusty air within the enclosure. 84 for protecting employees from dusts
(D) Safety glass protected by screen- produced during abrasive-blasting op-
ing shall be used in observation win- erations.
45
(ii) Abrasive-blasting respirators ity and use specified in 29 CFR

shall be worn by all abrasive-blasting 1910.134(i).
operators: (7) Operational procedures and general
(A) When working inside of blast- safety. Dust shall not be permitted to
cleaning rooms, or accumulate on the floor or on ledges
(B) When using silica sand in manual outside of an abrasive-blasting enclo-
blasting operations where the nozzle sure, and dust spills shall be cleaned up
and blast are not physically separated promptly. Aisles and walkways shall be
from the operator in an exhaust venti- kept clear of steel shot or similar abra-
lated enclosure, or sive which may create a slipping haz-
(C) Where concentrations of toxic ard.
dust dispersed by the abrasive blasting (8) Scope. This paragraph applies to
may exceed the limits set in § 1926.55 or all operations where an abrasive is
other pertinent sections of this part forcibly applied to a surface by pneu-
and the nozzle and blast are not phys- matic or hydraulic pressure, or by cen-
ically separated from the operator in trifugal force. It does not apply to
an exhaust-ventilated enclosure. steam blasting, or steam cleaning, or
(iii) Properly fitted particulate-filter hydraulic cleaning methods where
respirators, commonly referred to as work is done without the aid of abra-
dust-filter respirators, may be used for sives.
short, intermittent, or occasional dust
(g) Grinding, polishing, and buffing op-
exposures such as cleanup, dumping of
erations—(1) Definitions applicable to
dust collectors, or unloading shipments
this paragraph—
of sand at a receiving point when it is
not feasible to control the dust by en- (i) Abrasive cutting-off wheels. Or-
closure, exhaust ventilation, or other ganic-bonded wheels, the thickness of
means. The respirators used must be which is not more than one forty-
approved by NIOSH under 42 CFR part eighth of their diameter for those up
84 for protection against the specific to, and including, 20 inches (50.8 cm) in
type of dust encountered. diameter, and not more than one-six-
(iv) A respiratory protection program tieth of their diameter for those larger
as defined and described in § 1926.103, than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diameter,
shall be established wherever it is nec- used for a multitude of operations var-
essary to use respiratory protective iously known as cutting, cutting off,
equipment. grooving, slotting, coping, and joint-
(v) Operators shall be equipped with ing, and the like. The wheels may be
heavy canvas or leather gloves and ‘‘solid’’ consisting of organic-bonded
aprons or equivalent protection to pro- abrasive material throughout, ‘‘steel
tect them from the impact of abra- centered’’ consisting of a steel disc
sives. Safety shoes shall be worn to with a rim of organic-bonded material
protect against foot injury where moulded around the periphery, or of
heavy pieces of work are handled. the ‘‘inserted tooth’’ type consisting of
(A) Safety shoes shall conform to the a steel disc with organic-bonded abra-
requirements of American National sive teeth or inserts mechanically se-
Standard for Men’s Safety-Toe Foot- cured around the periphery.
wear, Z41.1–1967. (ii) Belts. All power-driven, flexible,
(B) Equipment for protection of the coated bands used for grinding,
eyes and face shall be supplied to the polishing, or buffing purposes.
operator when the respirator design (iii) Branch pipe. The part of an ex-
does not provide such protection and to haust system piping that is connected
any other personnel working in the vi- directly to the hood or enclosure.
cinity of abrasive blasting operations. (iv) Cradle. A movable fixture, upon
This equipment shall conform to the which the part to be ground or polished
requirements of § 1926.102. is placed.
(6) Air supply and air compressors. Air (v) Disc wheels. All power-driven ro-
for abrasive-blasting respirators must tatable discs faced with abrasive mate-
be free of harmful quantities of dusts, rials, artificial or natural, and used for
mists, or noxious gases, and must meet grinding or polishing on the side of the
the requirements for supplied-air qual- assembled disc.
46
(vi) Entry loss. The loss in static pres- framework can be manipulated over
sure caused by air flowing into a duct stationary objects.
or hood. It is usually expressed in (xvii) Velocity pressure (vp). The ki-
inches of water gauge. netic pressure in the direction of flow
(vii) Exhaust system. A system con- necessary to cause a fluid at rest to
sisting of branch pipes connected to flow at a given velocity. It is usually
hoods or enclosures, one or more head- expressed in inches of water gauge.
er pipes, an exhaust fan, means for sep- (xviii) Vertical spindle disc grinder. A
arating solid contaminants from the grinding machine having a vertical, ro-
air flowing in the system, and a dis- tatable power-driven spindle carrying a
charge stack to outside. horizontal abrasive disc wheel.
(viii) Grinding wheels. All power-driv- (2) Application. Wherever dry grind-
ing, dry polishing or buffing is per-
en rotatable grinding or abrasive
formed, and employee exposure, with-
wheels, except disc wheels as defined in
out regard to the use of respirators, ex-
this standard, consisting of abrasive
ceeds the permissible exposure limits
particles held together by artificial or
prescribed in § 1926.55 or other perti-
natural bonds and used for peripheral
nent sections of this part, a local ex-
grinding.
haust ventilation system shall be pro-
(ix) Header pipe (main pipe). A pipe vided and used to maintain employee
into which one or more branch pipes exposures within the prescribed limits.
enter and which connects such branch (3) Hood and branch pipe requirements.
pipes to the remainder of the exhaust (i) Hoods connected to exhaust systems
system. shall be used, and such hoods shall be
(x) Hoods and enclosures. The partial designed, located, and placed so that
or complete enclosure around the the dust or dirt particles shall fall or
wheel or disc through which air enters be projected into the hoods in the di-
an exhaust system during operation. rection of the air flow. No wheels,
(xi) Horizontal double-spindle disc discs, straps, or belts shall be operated
grinder. A grinding machine carrying in such manner and in such direction
two power-driven, rotatable, coaxial, as to cause the dust and dirt particles
horizontal spindles upon the inside to be thrown into the operator’s
ends of which are mounted abrasive breathing zone.
disc wheels used for grinding two sur- (ii) Grinding wheels on floor stands,
faces simultaneously. pedestals, benches, and special-purpose
(xii) Horizontal single-spindle disc grinding machines and abrasive cut-
grinder. A grinding machine carrying ting-off wheels shall have not less than
an abrasive disc wheel upon one or the minimum exhaust volumes shown
both ends of a power-driven, rotatable in Table D–57.1 with a recommended
single horizontal spindle. minimum duct velocity of 4,500 feet per
(xiii) Polishing and buffing wheels. All minute in the branch and 3,500 feet per
power-driven rotatable wheels com- minute in the main. The entry losses
posed all or in part of textile fabrics, from all hoods except the vertical-spin-
wood, felt, leather, paper, and may be dle disc grinder hood, shall equal 0.65
coated with abrasives on the periphery velocity pressure for a straight takeoff
of the wheel for purposes of polishing, and 0.45 velocity pressure for a tapered
buffing, and light grinding. takeoff. The entry loss for the vertical-
(xiv) Portable grinder. Any power-driv- spindle disc grinder hood is shown in
en rotatable grinding, polishing, or figure D–57.1 (following paragraph (g)
buffing wheel mounted in such manner of this section).
that it may be manually manipulated.
TABLE D–57.1—GRINDING AND ABRASIVE
(xv) Scratch brush wheels. All power-
CUTTING-OFF WHEELS
driven rotatable wheels made from
wire or bristles, and used for scratch Wheel Minimum
cleaning and brushing purposes. width, exhaust
Wheel diameter, inches (cm)
inches volume
(xvi) Swing-frame grinder. Any power- (cm) (feet3/min.)
driven rotatable grinding, polishing, or
To 9 (22.86) ................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 220
buffing wheel mounted in such a man- Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ....... 2 (5.08) 390
ner that the wheel with its supporting Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 3 (7.62) 500
47
TABLE D–57.1—GRINDING AND ABRASIVE having exhaust volumes as shown in

CUTTING-OFF WHEELS—Continued Table D–57.4.
Wheel Minimum TABLE D–57.4—HORIZONTAL DOUBLE-SPINDLE
width, exhaust
Wheel diameter, inches (cm) DISC GRINDER
inches volume
(cm) (feet3/min.)
Exhaust
Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 4 (10.16) 610 Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume
Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ....... 5 (12.7) 880 (ft.3/min.)
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,200
Up to 19 (48.26) .................................................. 610
Over 19 to 25 (48.26 to 63.5) ............................. 880
For any wheel wider than wheel diame- Over 25 to 30 (63.5 to 76.2) ............................... 1,200
ters shown in Table D–57.1, increase the Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to 134.62) ........................... 1,770
exhaust volume by the ratio of the new Over 53 to 72 (134.62 to 182.88) ....................... 6,280
width to the width shown.
(vi) Grinding wheels or discs for
Example: If wheel width = 41⁄2 inches (11.43 vertical single-spindle disc grinders
cm),
shall be encircled with hoods to remove
then 4.5÷4 × 610 = 686 (rounded to 690). the dust generated in the operation.
(iii) Scratch-brush wheels and all The hoods shall be connected to one or
buffing and polishing wheels mounted more branch pipes having exhaust vol-
on floor stands, pedestals, benches, or umes as shown in Table D–57.5.
special-purpose machines shall have
not less than the minimum exhaust TABLE D–57.5—VERTICAL SPINDLE DISC
volume shown in Table D–57.2. GRINDER
One-half or more Disc not cov-
TABLE D–57.2—BUFFING AND POLISHING of disc covered ered
WHEELS Disc diameter, inches Ex- Ex-
(cm) Num- haust Num- haust
Minimum ber 1 foot 3/ ber 1 foot3/
Wheel exhaust min. min.
Wheel diameter, inches (cm) width, volume
inches cm) (feet3/min.)
Up to 20 (50.8) .......... 1 500 2 780
To 9 (22.86) ................................... 2 (5.08) 300 Over 20 to 30 (50.8 to
Over 9 to 16 (22.86 to 40.64) ....... 3 (7.62) 500 76.2) ....................... 2 780 2 1,480
Over 16 to 19 (40.64 to 48.26) ..... 4 (10.16) 610 Over 30 to 53 (76.2 to
Over 19 to 24 (48.26 to 60.96) ..... 5 (12.7) 740 134.62) ................... 2 1,770 4 3,530
Over 24 to 30 (60.96 to 76.2) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,040 Over 53 to 72 (134.62
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ....... 6 (15.24) 1,200 to 182.88) ............... 2 3,140 5 6,010
1 Number of exhaust outlets around periphery of hood, or
(iv) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- equal distribution provided by other means.
zontal single-spindle disc grinders shall (vii) Grinding and polishing belts
be hooded to collect the dust or dirt shall be provided with hoods to remove
generated by the grinding operation dust and dirt generated in the oper-
and the hoods shall be connected to ations and the hoods shall be connected
branch pipes having exhaust volumes to branch pipes having exhaust vol-
as shown in Table D–57.3. umes as shown in Table D–57.6.
TABLE D–57.3—HORIZONTAL SINGLE-SPINDLE TABLE D–57.6—GRINDING AND POLISHING
DISC GRINDER BELTS
Exhaust Exhaust
Disc diameter, inches (cm) volume Belts width, inches (cm) volume
(ft.3/min.) (ft.3/min.)
Up to 12 (30.48) .................................................. 220 Up to 3 (7.62) ...................................................... 220
Over 12 to 19 (30.48 to 48.26) ........................... 390 Over 3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ................................... 300
Over 19 to 30 (48.26 to 76.2) ............................. 610 Over 5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) ................................. 390
Over 30 to 36 (76.2 to 91.44) ............................. 880
Over 7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ............................... 500
Over 9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ............................. 610
(v) Grinding wheels or discs for hori- Over 11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) ........................... 740
zontal double-spindle disc grinders

shall have a hood enclosing the grind- (viii) Cradles and swing-frame grind-
ing chamber and the hood shall be con- ers. Where cradles are used for han-
nected to one or more branch pipes dling the parts to be ground, polished,
48
or buffed, requiring large partial enclo- mits, shall be conducted within a par-
sures to house the complete operation, tial enclosure. The opening in the en-
a minimum average air velocity of 150 closure shall be no larger than is actu-
feet per minute shall be maintained ally required in the operation and an
over the entire opening of the enclo- average face air velocity of not less
sure. Swing-frame grinders shall also than 200 feet per minute shall be main-
be exhausted in the same manner as tained.
provided for cradles. (See fig. D–57.3) (v) Hoods for polishing and buffing
(ix) Where the work is outside the and scratch-brush wheels shall be con-
hood, air volumes must be increased as structed to conform as closely to figure
shown in American Standard Fun- D–57.4 as the nature of the work will
damentals Governing the Design and permit.
Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, (vi) Cradle grinding and polishing op-
Z9.2–1960 (section 4, exhaust hoods). erations shall be performed within a
(4) Exhaust systems. (i) Exhaust sys- partial enclosure similar to figure D–
tems for grinding, polishing, and buff- 57.5. The operator shall be positioned
ing operations should be designed in outside the working face of the opening
accordance with American Standard of the enclosure. The face opening of
Fundamentals Governing the Design the enclosure should not be any greater
and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- in area than that actually required for
tems, Z9.2–1960. the performance of the operation and
(ii) Exhaust systems for grinding, the average air velocity into the work-
polishing, and buffing operations shall ing face of the enclosure shall not be
be tested in the manner described in less than 150 feet per minute.
American Standard Fundamentals
(vii) Hoods for horizontal single-spin-
Governing the Design and Operation of
dle disc grinders shall be constructed
Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2–1960.
to conform as closely as possible to the
(iii) All exhaust systems shall be pro-
hood shown in figure D–57.6. It is essen-
vided with suitable dust collectors.
tial that there be a space between the
(5) Hood and enclosure design. (i) (A) It
back of the wheel and the hood, and a
is the dual function of grinding and ab-
rasive cutting-off wheel hoods to pro- space around the periphery of the
tect the operator from the hazards of wheel of at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
bursting wheels as well as to provide a order to permit the suction to act
means for the removal of dust and dirt around the wheel periphery. The open-
generated. All hoods shall be not less ing on the side of the disc shall be no
in structural strength than specified in larger than is required for the grinding
the American National Standard Safe- operation, but must never be less than
ty Code for the Use, Care, and Protec- twice the area of the branch outlet.
tion of Abrasive Wheels, B7.1–1970. (viii) Horizontal double-spindle disc
(B) Due to the variety of work and grinders shall have a hood encircling
types of grinding machines employed, the wheels and grinding chamber simi-
it is necessary to develop hoods adapt- lar to that illustrated in figure D–57.7.
able to the particular machine in ques- The openings for passing the work into
tion, and such hoods shall be located as the grinding chamber should be kept as
close as possible to the operation. small as possible, but must never be
(ii) Exhaust hoods for floor stands, less than twice the area of the branch
pedestals, and bench grinders shall be outlets.
designed in accordance with figure D– (ix) Vertical-spindle disc grinders
57.2. The adjustable tongue shown in shall be encircled with a hood so con-
the figure shall be kept in working structed that the heavy dust is drawn
order and shall be adjusted within one- off a surface of the disc and the lighter
fourth inch (0.635 cm) of the wheel pe- dust exhausted through a continuous
riphery at all times. slot at the top of the hood as shown in
(iii) Swing-frame grinders shall be figure D–57.1.
provided with exhaust booths as indi- (x) Grinding and polishing belt hoods
cated in figure D–57.3. shall be constructed as close to the op-
(iv) Portable grinding operations, eration as possible. The hood should
whenever the nature of the work per- extend almost to the belt, and 1-inch
49
(2.54 cm) wide openings should be pro- shows a typical hood for a belt oper-
vided on either side. Figure D–57.8 ation.
Dia. D inches (cm) Exhaust E Volume Ex-

hausted at Note
4,500 ft/min
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. ft3/min
.................................... 20 (50.8) 1 41⁄4 (10.795) 500 When one-half or more of the disc
can be hooded, use exhaust
ducts as shown at the left.
Over 20 (50.8) ........... 30 (76.2) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2) ........... 72 (182.88) 2 6 (15.24) 1,770
Over 53 (134.62) ....... 72 (182.88) 2 8 (20.32) 3,140
.................................... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780 When no hood can be used over

disc, use exhaust ducts as
shown at left.
Over 20 (50.8) ........... 20 (50.8) 2 4 (10.16) 780
Over 30 (76.2) ........... 30 (76.2) 2 51⁄2 (13.97) 1,480

Over 53 (134.62) ....... 53 (134.62) 4 6 (15.24) 3,530
72 (182.88) 5 7 (17.78) 6,010
Entry loss=1.0 slot velocity pressure + 0.5 branch velocity pressure.
Minimum slot velocity=2,000 ft/min—1⁄2-inch (1.27 cm) slot width.
50
EC30OC91.000
Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Volume of

Exhaust outlet, air at
Diameter inches (centi- 4,500 ft/
Width, Max meters) E min
Min= d Max= D
9 (22.86) 11⁄2 (3.81) 3 220

Over 9 (22.86) ............................................................................. 16 (40.64) 2 (5.08) 4 390
Over 16 (40.64) ........................................................................... 19 (48.26) 3 (7.62) 4 ⁄
12 500
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................... 24 (60.96) 4 (10.16) 5 610
Over 24 (60.96) ........................................................................... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 6 880
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1,200
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
51
EC30OC91.001
FIGURE D–57.3—A METHOD OF APPLYING AN EXHAUST ENCLOSURE TO SWING-FRAME GRINDERS
NOTE: Baffle to reduce front opening as

much as possible
52
EC30OC91.002
STANDARD BUFFING AND POLISHING HOOD

Wheel dimension, inches (centimeters) Volume of
Exhaust outlet, air at
Diameter inches E 4,500 ft/
Width, Max min
Min= d Max= D
9 (22.86) 2 (5.08) 31⁄2 (3.81) 300

Over 9 (22.86) ............................................................................. 16 (40.64) 3 (5.08) 4 500
Over 16 (40.64) ........................................................................... 19 (48.26) 4 (11.43) 5 610
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................... 24 (60.96) 5 (12.7) 51⁄2 740
Over 24 (60.96) ........................................................................... 30 (76.2) 6 (15.24) 61⁄2 1.040
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 7 1.200
Entry loss = 0.15 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65 velocity pressure for straight takeoff.
53
EC30OC91.003
FIGURE D–57.5—CRADLE POLISHING OR GRINDING ENCLOSURE
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for

tapered takeoff
54
EC30OC91.004
Dia D, inches (centimeters) Volume ex-

Exhaust E, hausted at
dia. inches 4,500 ft/min
Min. Max. (cm) ft3/min
12 (30.48) 3 (7.6) 220

Over 12 (30.48) ........................................................................................................... 19 (48.26) 4 (10.16) 390
Over 19 (48.26) ........................................................................................................... 30 (76.2) 5 (12.7) 610
Over 30 (76.2) ............................................................................................................. 36 (91.44) 6 (15.24) 880
NOTE: If grinding wheels are used for disc grinding purposes, hoods must conform to structural strength and materials as de-
scribed in 9.1.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
55
EC30OC91.005
Disc dia. inches (centimeters) Exhaust E Volume

exhaust at
4,500 ft/ Note
Min. Max. No Pipes Dia. min. ft3/
min
19 (48.26) 1 5 610
Over 19 (48.26) ................. 25 (63.5) 1 6 880 When width ‘‘W’’ permits, exhaust
ducts should be as near heaviest
grinding as possible.
Over 25 (63.5) ................... 30 (76.2) 1 7 1,200
Over 30 (76.2) ................... 53 (134.62) 2 6 1,770
Over 53 (134.62) ............... 72 (182.88) 4 8 6,280
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff.
56
EC30OC91.006
FIGURE D–57.8—A TYPICAL HOOD FOR A BELT OPERATION
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for mable and Combustible Materials,
tapered takeoff NFPA No. 33–1969).
(iii) Spray room. A spray room is a
Exhaust room in which spray-finishing oper-
Belt width W. inches (centimeters) volume.
ft.1/min ations not conducted in a spray booth
are performed separately from other
Up to 3 (7.62) ...................................................... 220
3 to 5 (7.62 to 12.7) ............................................ 300
areas.
5 to 7 (12.7 to 17.78) .......................................... 390 (iv) Minimum maintained velocity. Min-
7 to 9 (17.78 to 22.86) ........................................ 500 imum maintained velocity is the veloc-
9 to 11 (22.86 to 27.94) ...................................... 610 ity of air movement which must be
11 to 13 (27.94 to 33.02) .................................... 740 maintained in order to meet minimum
Minimum duct velocity = 4,500 ft/min branch, 3,500 ft/min specified requirements for health and
main. safety.
Entry loss = 0.45 velocity pressure for tapered takeoff; 0.65
velocity pressure for straight takeoff. (2) Location and application. Spray
booths or spray rooms are to be used to
(6) Scope. This paragraph (g), pre- enclose or confine all operations.
scribes the use of exhaust hood enclo- Spray-finishing operations shall be lo-
sures and systems in removing dust, cated as provided in sections 201
dirt, fumes, and gases generated through 206 of the Standard for Spray
through the grinding, polishing, or Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
buffing of ferrous and nonferrous met- bustible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.
als. (3) Design and construction of spray
(h) Spray finishing operations—(1) Defi- booths. (i) Spray booths shall be de-
nitions applicable to this paragraph—(i) signed and constructed in accordance
Spray-finishing operations. Spray-fin- with § 1926.66(b) (1) through (4) and (6)
ishing operations are employment of through (10) (see sections 301–304 and
methods wherein organic or inorganic 306–310 of the Standard for Spray Fin-
materials are utilized in dispersed form ishing Using Flammable and Combus-
for deposit on surfaces to be coated, tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969), for
treated, or cleaned. Such methods of general construction specifications.
deposit may involve either automatic, For a more detailed discussion of fun-
manual, or electrostatic deposition but damentals relating to this subject, see
do not include metal spraying or met- ANSI Z9.2–1960
allizing, dipping, flow coating, roller (A) Lights, motors, electrical equip-
coating, tumbling, centrifuging, or ment, and other sources of ignition
spray washing and degreasing as con- shall conform to the requirements of
ducted in self-contained washing and § 1926.66(b)(10) and (c). (See section 310
degreasing machines or systems. and chapter 4 of the Standard for Spray
(ii) Spray booth. Spray booths are de- Finishing Using Flammable and Com-
fined and described in § 1926.66(a). (See bustible Materials NFPA No. 33–1969.)
sections 103, 104, and 105 of the Stand- (B) In no case shall combustible ma-
ard for Spray Finishing Using Flam- terial be used in the construction of a
57
EC30OC91.007
spray booth and supply or exhaust duct concrete, masonry, or other material
connected to it. having similar properties.
(ii) Unobstructed walkways shall not (A) Tanks shall be provided with
be less than 61⁄2 feet (1.976 m) high and weirs, skimmer plates, or screens to
shall be maintained clear of obstruc- prevent sludge and floating paint from
tion from any work location in the entering the pump suction box. Means
booth to a booth exit or open booth for automatically maintaining the
front. In booths where the open front is proper water level shall also be pro-
the only exit, such exits shall be not vided. Fresh water inlets shall not be
less than 3 feet (0.912 m) wide. In submerged. They shall terminate at
booths having multiple exits, such least one pipe diameter above the safe-
exits shall not be less than 2 feet (0.608 ty overflow level of the tank.
m) wide, provided that the maximum (B) Tanks shall be so constructed as
distance from the work location to the to discourage accumulation of haz-
exit is 25 feet (7.6 m) or less. Where ardous deposits.
booth exits are provided with doors, (vi) Pump manifolds, risers, and
such doors shall open outward from the headers shall be adequately sized to in-
booth. sure sufficient water flow to provide ef-
(iii) Baffles, distribution plates, and ficient operation of the water chamber.
dry-type overspray collectors shall (4) Design and construction of spray
conform to the requirements of rooms. (i) Spray rooms, including
§ 1926.66(b) (4) and (5). (See sections 304 floors, shall be constructed of masonry,
and 305 of the Standard for Spray Fin- concrete, or other noncombustible ma-
ishing Using Flammable and Combus- terial.
tible Materials, NFPA No. 33–1969.) (ii) Spray rooms shall have non-
(A) Overspray filters shall be in- combustible fire doors and shutters.
stalled and maintained in accordance (iii) Spray rooms shall be adequately
with the requirements of § 1926.66(b)(5), ventilated so that the atmosphere in
(see section 305 of the Standard for the breathing zone of the operator
Spray Finishing Using Flammable and shall be maintained in accordance with
Combustible Materials, NFPA No. 33– the requirements of paragraph (h)(6)(ii)
1969), and shall only be in a location of this section.
easily accessible for inspection, clean- (iv) Spray rooms used for production
ing, or replacement. spray-finishing operations shall con-
(B) Where effective means, inde- form to the requirements for spray
pendent of the overspray filters, are in- booths.
stalled which will result in design air (5) Ventilation. (i) Ventilation shall be
distribution across the booth cross sec- provided in accordance with provisions
tion, it is permissible to operate the of § 1926.66(d) (see chapter 5 of the
booth without the filters in place. Standard for Spray Finishing Using
(iv) (A) For wet or water-wash spray Flammable or Combustible Materials,
booths, the water-chamber enclosure, NFPA No. 33–1969), and in accordance
within which intimate contact of con- with the following:
taminated air and cleaning water or (A) Where a fan plenum is used to
other cleaning medium is maintained, equalize or control the distribution of
if made of steel, shall be 18 gage or exhaust air movement through the
heavier and adequately protected booth, it shall be of sufficient strength
against corrosion. or rigidity to withstand the differential
(B) Chambers may include scrubber air pressure or other superficially im-
spray nozzles, headers, troughs, or posed loads for which the equipment is
other devices. Chambers shall be pro- designed and also to facilitate clean-
vided with adequate means for creating ing. Construction specifications shall
and maintaining scrubbing action for be at least equivalent to those of para-
removal of particulate matter from the graph (h)(5)(iii) of this section.
exhaust air stream. (B) [Reserved]
(v) Collecting tanks shall be of weld- (ii) Inlet or supply ductwork used to
ed steel construction or other suitable transport makeup air to spray booths
non-combustible material. If pits are or surrounding areas shall be con-
used as collecting tanks, they shall be structed of noncombustible materials.
58
(A) If negative pressure exists within (E) Inspection or clean-out doors

inlet ductwork, all seams and joints shall be provided for every 9 to 12 feet
shall be sealed if there is a possibility (2.736 to 3.648 m) of running length for
of infiltration of harmful quantities of ducts up to 12 inches (0.304 m) in di-
noxious gases, fumes, or mists from ameter, but the distance between
areas through which ductwork passes. cleanout doors may be greater for larg-
(B) Inlet ductwork shall be sized in er pipes. (See 8.3.21 of American Na-
accordance with volume flow require- tional Standard Z9.1–1951.) A clean-out
ments and provide design air require- door or doors shall be provided for serv-
ments at the spray booth. icing the fan, and where necessary, a
(C) Inlet ductwork shall be ade- drain shall be provided.
quately supported throughout its (F) Where ductwork passes through a
length to sustain at least its own combustible roof or wall, the roof or
weight plus any negative pressure wall shall be protected at the point of
which is exerted upon it under normal penetration by open space or fire-resis-
operating conditions. tive material between the duct and the
(iii) [Reserved] roof or wall. When ducts pass through
(A) Exhaust ductwork shall be ade- firewalls, they shall be provided with
quately supported throughout its automatic fire dampers on both sides of
length to sustain its weight plus any the wall, except that three-eighth-inch
normal accumulation in interior dur- steel plates may be used in lieu of
ing normal operating conditions and automatic fire dampers for ducts not
any negative pressure exerted upon it. exceeding 18 inches (45.72 cm) in diame-
(B) Exhaust ductwork shall be sized ter.
in accordance with good design prac- (G) Ductwork used for ventilating
tice which shall include consideration any process covered in this standard
of fan capacity, length of duct, number shall not be connected to ducts ven-
of turns and elbows, variation in size, tilating any other process or any chim-
volume, and character of materials ney or flue used for conveying any
being exhausted. See American Na- products of combustion.
tional Standard Z9.2–1960 for further (6) Velocity and air flow requirements.
details and explanation concerning ele- (i) Except where a spray booth has an
ments of design. adequate air replacement system, the
(C) Longitudinal joints in sheet steel velocity of air into all openings of a
ductwork shall be either lock-seamed, spray booth shall be not less than that
riveted, or welded. For other than steel specified in Table D–57.7 for the oper-
construction, equivalent securing of ating conditions specified. An adequate
joints shall be provided. air replacement system is one which
(D) Circumferential joints in duct- introduces replacement air upstream
work shall be substantially fastened or above the object being sprayed and
together and lapped in the direction of is so designed that the velocity of air
airflow. At least every fourth joint in the booth cross section is not less
shall be provided with connecting than that specified in Table D–57.7
flanges, bolted together, or of equiva- when measured upstream or above the
lent fastening security. object being sprayed.
TABLE D–57.7—MINIMUM MAINTAINED VELOCITIES INTO SPRAY BOOTHS
Airflow velocities, f.p.m.
Crossdraft,
Operating conditions for objects completely inside booth f.p.m. Design Range
Electrostatic and automatic airless operation contained in booth Negligible .... 50 large booth ...................... 50–75
without operator.
................. 100 small booth .................... 75–125
Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 50 ...... 100 large booth .................... 75–125
................. 150 small booth .................... 125–175

Air-operated guns, manual or automatic ............................................ Up to 100 .... 150 large booth .................... 125–175
................. 200 small booth .................... 150–250

NOTES:
59
(1) Attention is invited to the fact that the effectiveness of the spray booth is dependent upon the relationship of the depth of
the booth to its height and width.
(2) Crossdrafts can be eliminated through proper design and such design should be sought. Crossdrafts in excess of
100fpm (feet per minute) should not be permitted.
(3) Excessive air pressures result in loss of both efficiency and material waste in addition to creating a backlash that may
carry overspray and fumes into adjacent work areas.
(4) Booths should be designed with velocities shown in the column headed ‘‘Design.’’ However, booths operating with veloci-
ties shown in the column headed ‘‘Range’’ are in compliance with this standard.
(ii) In addition to the requirements TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF

in paragraph (h)(6)(i) of this section the SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS—Continued
total air volume exhausted through a
Lower ex-
spray booth shall be such as to dilute Cubic feet plosive
per gallon
solvent vapor to at least 25 percent of of vapor of limit in per-
Solvent cent by
the lower explosive limit of the solvent liquid at 70 volume of
°F (21.11
being sprayed. An example of the meth- air at 70 °F
°C). (21.11 °C)
od of calculating this volume is given
below. Benzene ........................................ 36.8 1 1.4
Butyl Acetate (n) ............................ 24.8 1.7

Example: To determine the lower explosive Butyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 35.2 1.4
limits of the most common solvents used in Butyl Cellosolve ............................. 24.8 1.1
spray finishing, see Table D–57.8. Column 1 Cellosolve ...................................... 33.6 1.8
gives the number of cubic feet of vapor per Cellosolve Acetate ......................... 23.2 1.7
Cyclohexanone .............................. 31.2 1 1.1
gallon of solvent and column 2 gives the
1,1 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 5.9
lower explosive limit (LEL) in percentage by 1,2 Dichloroethylene ...................... 42.4 9.7
volume of air. Note that the quantity of sol- Ethyl Acetate ................................. 32.8 2.5
vent will be diminished by the quantity of Ethyl Alcohol .................................. 55.2 4.3
solids and nonflammables contained in the Ethyl Lactate .................................. 28.0 1 1.5
finish. Methyl Acetate ............................... 40.0 3.1

To determine the volume of air in cubic Methyl Alcohol ............................... 80.8 7.3
Methyl Cellosolve .......................... 40.8 2.5
feet necessary to dilute the vapor from 1 gal- Methyl Ethyl Ketone ...................... 36.0 1.8
lon of solvent to 25 percent of the lower ex- Methyl n-Propyl Ketone ................. 30.4 1.5
plosive limit, apply the following formula: Naphtha (VM&P) (76°Naphtha) ..... 22.4 0.9
Naphtha (100°Flash) Safety Sol-
Dilution volume required per gallon of vent—Stoddard Solvent ............. 23.2 1.0
solvent=4 (100–LEL) (cubic feet of Propyl Acetate (n) ......................... 27.2 2.8
vapor per gallon)÷ LEL Propyl Acetate (iso) ....................... 28.0 1.1
Propyl Alcohol (n) .......................... 44.8 2.1
Using toluene as the solvent. Propyl Alcohol (iso) ....................... 44.0 2.0
(1) LEL of toluene from Table D–57.8, col- Toluene .......................................... 30.4 1.4
Turpentine ..................................... 20.8 0.8
umn 2, is 1.4 percent.
Xylene (o) ...................................... 26.4 1.0
(2) Cubic feet of vapor per gallon from
Table D–57.8, column 1, is 30.4 cubic feet per 1 At 212 °F (100 °C).
gallon.
(3) Dilution volume required =
(iii)(A) When an operator is in a
booth downstream of the object being
4 (100–1.4) 30.4÷ 1.4=8,564 cubic feet. sprayed, an air-supplied respirator or
(4) To convert to cubic feet per minute of other type of respirator approved by
required ventilation, multiply the dilution NIOSH under 42 CFR Part 84 for the
volume required per gallon of solvent by the material being sprayed should be used
number of gallons of solvent evaporated per by the operator.
minute. (B) Where downdraft booths are pro-
vided with doors, such doors shall be
TABLE D–57.8—LOWER EXPLOSIVE LIMIT OF closed when spray painting.
SOME COMMONLY USED SOLVENTS (7) Make-up air. (i) Clean fresh air,
Lower ex- free of contamination from adjacent
Cubic feet
per gallon plosive industrial exhaust systems, chimneys,
limit in per-
Solvent of vapor of cent by stacks, or vents, shall be supplied to a
liquid at 70
°F (21.11 volume of spray booth or room in quantities
air at 70 °F
°C). equal to the volume of air exhausted
(21.11 °C)
through the spray booth.
Column 1 Column 2 (ii) Where a spray booth or room re-

Acetone ......................................... 44.0 2.6 ceives make-up air through self-closing
Amyl Acetate (iso) ......................... 21.6 1 1.0
Amyl Alcohol (n) ............................ 29.6 1.2 doors, dampers, or louvers, they shall
Amyl Alcohol (iso) ......................... 29.6 1.2 be fully open at all times when the
60
booth or room is in use for spraying. sources of heat may be employed to

The velocity of air through such doors, meet this requirement.
dampers, or louvers shall not exceed (C) No means of heating make-up air
200 feet per minute. If the fan charac- shall be located in a spray booth.
teristics are such that the required air (D) Where make-up air is heated by
flow through the booth will be pro- coal or oil, the products of combustion
vided, higher velocities through the shall not be allowed to mix with the
doors, dampers, or louvers may be make-up air, and the products of com-
used. bustion shall be conducted outside the
(iii) (A) Where the air supply to a building through a flue terminating at
spray booth or room is filtered, the fan a point remote from all points where
static pressure shall be calculated on make-up air enters the building.
the assumption that the filters are (E) Where make-up air is heated by
dirty to the extent that they require gas, and the products of combustion
cleaning or replacement. are not mixed with the make-up air but
(B) The rating of filters shall be gov- are conducted through an independent
erned by test data supplied by the man- flue to a point outside the building re-
ufacturer of the filter. A pressure gage mote from all points where make-up
shall be installed to show the pressure air enters the building, it is not nec-
drop across the filters. This gage shall essary to comply with paragraph
be marked to show the pressure drop at (h)(7)(iv)(F) of this section.
which the filters require cleaning or re- (F) Where make-up air to any manu-
placement. Filters shall be replaced or ally operated spray booth or room is
cleaned whenever the pressure drop heated by gas and the products of com-
across them becomes excessive or bustion are allowed to mix with the
whenever the air flow through the face supply air, the following precautions
of the booth falls below that specified must be taken:
in Table D–57.7. (1) The gas must have a distinctive
(iv) (A) Means for heating make-up and strong enough odor to warn work-
air to any spray booth or room, before men in a spray booth or room of its
or at the time spraying is normally presence if in an unburned state in the
performed, shall be provided in all make-up air.
places where the outdoor temperature (2) The maximum rate of gas supply
may be expected to remain below 55 °F. to the make-up air heater burners
(12.77 °C.) for appreciable periods of must not exceed that which would
time during the operation of the booth yield in excess of 200 p.p.m. (parts per
except where adequate and safe means million) of carbon monoxide or 2,000
of radiant heating for all operating per- p.p.m. of total combustible gases in the
sonnel affected is provided. The re- mixture if the unburned gas upon the
placement air during the heating sea- occurrence of flame failure were mixed
sons shall be maintained at not less with all of the make-up air supplied.
than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) at the point of (3) A fan must be provided to deliver
entry into the spray booth or spray the mixture of heated air and products
room. When otherwise unheated make- of combustion from the plenum cham-
up air would be at a temperature of ber housing the gas burners to the
more than 10 °F. below room tempera- spray booth or room.
ture, its temperature shall be regulated (8) Scope. Spray booths or spray
as provided in section 3.6.3 of ANSI rooms are to be used to enclose or con-
Z9.2–1960. fine all spray finishing operations cov-
(B) As an alternative to an air re- ered by this paragraph (h). This para-
placement system complying with the graph does not apply to the spraying of
preceding section, general heating of the exteriors of buildings, fixed tanks,
the building in which the spray room or similar structures, nor to small
or booth is located may be employed portable spraying apparatus not used
provided that all occupied parts of the repeatedly in the same location.
building are maintained at not less (i) Open surface tanks—(1) General. (i)
than 65 °F. (18.33 °C.) when the exhaust This paragraph applies to all oper-
system is in operation or the general ations involving the immersion of ma-
heating system supplemented by other terials in liquids, or in the vapors of
61
such liquids, for the purpose of clean- Combustible Liquids, NFPA No. 34–
ing or altering the surface or adding to 1966, National Fire Protection Associa-
or imparting a finish thereto or chang- tion. Where the tank contains a mix-
ing the character of the materials, and ture of liquids, other than organic sol-
their subsequent removal from the liq- vents, whose effects are additive, the
uid or vapor, draining, and drying. hygienic standard of the most toxic
These operations include washing, elec- component (for example, the one hav-
troplating, anodizing, pickling, ing the lowest p.p.m. or mg./m.3) shall
quenching, dying, dipping, tanning, be used, except where such substance
dressing, bleaching, degreasing, alka- constitutes an insignificantly small
line cleaning, stripping, rinsing, digest- fraction of the mixture. For mixtures
ing, and other similar operations. of organic solvents, their combined ef-
(ii) Except where specific construc- fect, rather than that of either individ-
tion specifications are prescribed in ually, shall determine the hazard po-
this section, hoods, ducts, elbows, fans, tential. In the absence of information
blowers, and all other exhaust system to the contrary, the effects shall be
parts, components, and supports there- considered as additive. If the sum of
of shall be so constructed as to meet the ratios of the airborne concentra-
conditions of service and to facilitate tion of each contaminant to the toxic
maintenance and shall conform in con- concentration of that contaminant ex-
struction to the specifications con- ceeds unity, the toxic concentration
tained in American National Standard shall be considered to have been ex-
Fundamentals Governing the Design ceeded. (See Note A to paragraph
and Operation of Local Exhaust Sys- (i)(2)(v) of this section.)
tems, Z9.2–1960. (v) Hazard potential shall be deter-
(2) Classification of open-surface tank mined from Table D–57.9, with the
operations. (i) Open-surface tank oper- value indicating greater hazard being
ations shall be classified into 16 class- used. When the hazardous material
es, numbered A–1 to D–4, inclusive. may be either a vapor with a
(ii) Determination of class. Class is de- threshhold limit value (TLV) in p.p.m.
termined by two factors, hazard poten- or a mist with a TLV in mg./m.3, the
tial designated by a letter from A to D, TLV indicating the greater hazard shall
inclusive, and rate of gas, vapor, or be used (for example, A takes prece-
mist evolution designated by a number dence over B or C; B over C; C over D).
from 1 to 4, inclusive (for example, B.3). NOTE A:
(iii) Hazard potential is an index, on (c1÷TLV1)+(c2÷TLV2)+(c3÷TLV3)+; . .
a scale of from A to D, inclusive, of the .(cN÷TLVN)1
severity of the hazard associated with Where:
the substance contained in the tank be- c = Concentration measured at the operation
cause of the toxic, flammable, or explo- in p.p.m.
sive nature of the vapor, gas, or mist
produced therefrom. The toxic hazard TABLE D–57.9—DETERMINATION OF HAZARD
is determined from the concentration, POTENTIAL
measured in parts by volume of a gas Toxicity group
or vapor, per million parts by volume
of contaminated air (p.p.m.), or in mil- Hazard potential Gas or Mist (mg./ Flash point in
vapor
ligrams of mist per cubic meter of air m3) degrees F. (C.)
(p.p.m.)
(mg./m.3), below which ill effects are
A .......................... 0–10 0–0.1 ..........................
unlikely to occur to the exposed work- B .......................... 11–100 0.11–1.0 Under 100
er. The concentrations shall be those in (37.77)
§ 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of C .......................... 101–500 1.1–10 100 200
(37.77–93.33)
this part. D .......................... Over 500 Over 10 Over 200
(iv) The relative fire or explosion (93.33)
hazard is measured in degrees Fahr-
enheit in terms of the closed-cup flash (vi) Rate of gas, vapor, or mist evo-
point of the substance in the tank. De- lution is a numerical index, on a scale
tailed information on the prevention of of from 1 to 4, inclusive, both of the
fire hazards in dip tanks may be found relative capacity of the tank to
in Dip Tanks Containing Flammable or produce gas, vapor, or mist and of the
62
relative energy with which it is pro- (D) The extent that the tank gases or
jected or carried upwards from the produces mist in an arbitrary scale—
tank. Rate is evaluated in terms of high, medium, low, and nil. (See Table
(A) The temperature of the liquid in D–57.10, Note 2.) Gassing depends upon
the tank in degrees Fahrenheit; electrochemical or mechanical proc-
(B) The number of degrees Fahr- esses, the effects of which have to be
enheit that this temperature is below individually evaluated for each instal-
the boiling point of the liquid in de- lation (see Table D–57.10, Note 3).
grees Fahrenheit; (vii) Rate of evolution shall be deter-
(C) The relative evaporation of the mined from Table D–57.10. When evapo-
liquid in still air at room temperature ration and gassing yield different rates,
in an arbitrary scale—fast, medium, the lowest numerical value shall be
slow, or nil; and used.
TABLE D–57.10—DETERMINATION OF RATE OF GAS, VAPOR, OR MIST EVOLUTION 1
Liquid temperature, Degrees below boil-
Rate Relative evaporation 2 Gassing 3
°F. (C.) ing point
1 ................................ Over 200 (93.33) 0–20 Fast ...................................... High.

2 ................................ 150–200 (65.55– 21–50 Medium ................................ Medium.
93.33)
3 ................................ 94–149 (34.44–65) 51–100 Slow ..................................... Low.
4 ................................ Under 94 (34.44) Over 100 Nil ........................................ Nil.
1 In certain classes of equipment, specifically vapor degreasers, an internal condenser or vapor level thermostat is used to pre-
vent the vapor from leaving the tank during normal operation. In such cases, rate of vapor evolution from the tank into the work-
room is not dependent upon the factors listed in the table, but rather upon abnormalities of operating procedure, such as carry-
out of vapors from excessively fast action, dragout of liquid by entrainment in parts, contamination of solvent by water and other
materials, or improper heat balance. When operating procedure is excellent, effective rate of evolution may be taken as 4. When
operating procedure is average, the effective rate of evolution may be taken as 3. When operation is poor, a rate of 2 or 1 is in-
dicated, depending upon observed conditions.
2 Relative evaporation rate is determined according to the methods described by A. K. Doolittle in Industrial and Engineering
Chemistry, vol. 27, p. 1169, (3) where time for 100-percent evaporation is as follows: Fast: 0–3 hours; Medium: 3–12 hours;
Slow: 12–50 hours; Nil: more than 50 hours.
3 Gassing means the formation by chemical or electrochemical action of minute bubbles of gas under the surface of the liquid
in the tank and is generally limited to aqueous solutions.
(3) Ventilation. Where ventilation is (ii) All tanks exhausted by means of

used to control potential exposures to hoods which
workers as defined in paragraph (A) Project over the entire tank;
(i)(2)(iii) of this section, it shall be ade- (B) Are fixed in position in such a lo-
quate to reduce the concentration of cation that the head of the workman,
the air contaminant to the degree that in all his normal operating positions
a hazard to the worker does not exist. while working at the tank, is in front
Methods of ventilation are discussed in of all hood openings; and
American National Standard Fun-
(C) Are completely enclosed on at
damentals Governing the Design and
Operation of Local Exhaust Systems, least two sides, shall be considered to
Z9.2–1960. be exhausted through an enclosing
(4) Control requirements. (i) Control hood.
velocities shall conform to Table D– (D) The quantity of air in cubic feet
57.11 in all cases where the flow of air per minute necessary to be exhausted
past the breathing or working zone of through an enclosing hood shall be not
the operator and into the hoods is unless than the product of the control ve-
disturbed by local environmental con- locity times the net area of all open-
ditions, such as open windows, wall ings in the enclosure through which air
fans, unit heaters, or moving machin- can flow into the hood.
ery.
63
TABLE D–57.11—CONTROL VELOCITIES IN FEET PER MINUTE (F.P.M.) FOR UNDISTURBED LOCATIONS
Enclosing hood Canopy hood 2
Lateral ex-
Class One open Two open haust 1 Three Four open
side sides open sides sides
B–1 and A–2 ........................................................................... 100 150 150 Do not use Do not use
A–3 2, B–1, B–2, and C–1 ....................................................... 75 100 100 125 175
A–3, C–2, and D–1 3 ............................................................... 65 90 75 100 150
B–4 2, C–3, and D–2 3 ............................................................. 50 75 50 75 125
A–4, C–4, D–3 3, and D–4 4 .................................................... .................. .................. .................. .................. ..................
1 See Table D–57.12 for computation of ventilation rate.
2 Do not use canopy hood for Hazard Potential A processes.
3 Where complete control of hot water is desired, design as next highest class.
4 General room ventilation required.
(iii) All tanks exhausted by means of (A) For lateral exhaust hoods over 42
hoods which do not project over the en- inches (1.06 m) wide, or where it is de-
tire tank, and in which the direction of sirable to reduce the amount of air re-
air movement into the hood or hoods is moved from the workroom, air supply
substantially horizontal, shall be con- slots or orifices shall be provided along
sidered to be laterally exhausted. The the side or the center of the tank oppo-
quantity of air in cubic feet per minute site from the exhaust slots. The design
necessary to be laterally exhausted per of such systems shall meet the fol-
square foot of tank area in order to
lowing criteria:
maintain the required control velocity
shall be determined from Table D–57.12 (1) The supply air volume plus the en-
for all variations in ratio of tank width trained air shall not exceed 50 percent
(W) to tank length $(L). The total of the exhaust volume.
quantity of air in cubic feet per minute (2) The velocity of the supply air-
required to be exhausted per tank shall stream as it reaches the effective con-
be not less than the product of the area trol area of the exhaust slot shall be
of tank surface times the cubic feet per less than the effective velocity over
minute per square foot of tank area, the exhaust slot area.
determined from Table D–57.12.
TABLE D–57.12—MINIMUM VENTILATION RATE IN CUBIC FEET OF AIR PER MINUTE PER SQUARE
FOOT OF TANK AREA FOR LATERAL EXHAUST
C.f.m. per sq. ft. to maintain required minimum velocities at fol-
Required minimum control velocity, f.p.m. (from Table D– lowing ratios (tank width (W)/tank length (L)). 1, 2
57.11)
0.0–0.09 0.1–0.24 0.25–0.49 0.5–0.99 1.0–2.0
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of tank when one hood is against a wall or baffle. 2
Also for a manifold along tank centerline. 3
50 ............................................................................................ 50 60 75 90 100
75 ............................................................................................ 75 90 110 130 150
100 .......................................................................................... 100 125 150 175 200
150 .......................................................................................... 150 190 225 260 300
Hood along one side or two parallel sides of free standing tank not against wall or baffle.
50 ............................................................................................ 75 90 100 110 125

75 ............................................................................................ 110 130 150 170 190
100 .......................................................................................... 150 175 200 225 250
150 .......................................................................................... 225 260 300 340 375
1 Itis not practicable to ventilate across the long dimension of a tank whose ratio W/L exceeds 2.0.
It is undesirable to do so when W/L exceeds 1.0. For circular tanks with lateral exhaust along up to 1/2 the circumference, use
W/L=1.0; for over one-half the circumference use W/L=0.5.
2 Baffle is a vertical plate the same length as the tank, and with the top of the plate as high as the tank is wide. If the exhaust
hood is on the side of a tank against a building wall or close to it, it is perfectly baffled.
3 Use W/2 as tank width in computing when manifold is along centerline, or when hoods are used on two parallel sides of a
tank.
Tank Width (W) means the effective width over which the hood must pull air to operate (for example, where the hood face is
set back from the edge of the tank, this set back must be added in measuring tank width). The surface area of tanks can fre-
quently be reduced and better control obtained (particularly on conveyorized systems) by using covers extending from the upper
edges of the slots toward the center of the tank.
64
(3) The vertical height of the receiv- the liquid in the tank to minimize mist
ing exhaust hood, including any baffle, formation, or any combination thereof,
shall not be less than one-quarter the may all be used as gas, mist, or vapor
width of the tank. control means for open-surface tank
(4) The supply airstream shall not be operations, provided that they effec-
allowed to impinge on obstructions be- tively reduce the concentrations of
tween it and the exhaust slot in such a hazardous materials in the vicinity of
manner as to significantly interfere the worker below the limits set in ac-
with the performance of the exhaust cordance with paragraph (i)(2) of this
hood. section.
(5) Since most failure of push-pull (7) System design. (i) The equipment
systems result from excessive supply for exhausting air shall have sufficient
air volumes and pressures, methods of capacity to produce the flow of air re-
measuring and adjusting the supply air quired in each of the hoods and open-
shall be provided. When satisfactory ings of the system.
control has been achieved, the adjust- (ii) The capacity required in para-
able features of the hood shall be fixed graph (i)(7)(i) of this section shall be
so that they will not be altered. obtained when the airflow producing
(iv) All tanks exhausted by means of equipment is operating against the fol-
hoods which project over the entire lowing pressure losses, the sum of
tank, and which do not conform to the which is the static pressure:
definition of enclosing hoods, shall be (A) Entrance losses into the hood.
considered to be overhead canopy (B) Resistance to airflow in branch
hoods. The quantity of air in cubic feet pipe including bends and trans-
per minute necessary to be exhausted formations.
through a canopy hood shall be not less (C) Entrance loss into the main pipe.
than the product of the control veloc- (D) Resistance to airflow in main
ity times the net area of all openings pipe including bends and trans-
between the bottom edges of the hood formations.
and the top edges of the tank. (E) Resistance of mechanical equip-
(v) The rate of vapor evolution (in- ment; that is, filters, washers, con-
cluding steam or products of combus- densers, absorbers, etc., plus their en-
tion) from the process shall be esti- trance and exit losses.
mated. If the rate of vapor evolution is (F) Resistance in outlet duct and dis-
equal to or greater than 10 percent of charge stack.
the calculated exhaust volume re- (iii) Two or more operations shall not
quired, the exhaust volume shall be in- be connected to the same exhaust sys-
creased in equal amount. tem where either one or the combina-
(5) Spray cleaning and degreasing. tion of the substances removed may
Wherever spraying or other mechanical constitute a fire, explosion, or chem-
means are used to disperse a liquid ical reaction hazard in the duct sys-
above an open-surface tank, control tem. Traps or other devices shall be
must be provided for the airborne provided to insure that condensate in
spray. Such operations shall be en- ducts does not drain back into any
closed as completely as possible. The tank.
inward air velocity into the enclosure (iv) The exhaust system, consisting
shall be sufficient to prevent the dis- of hoods, ducts, air mover, and dis-
charge of spray into the workroom. charge outlet, shall be designed in ac-
Mechanical baffles may be used to help cordance with American National
prevent the discharge of spray. Spray Standard Fundamentals Governing the
painting operations are covered by Design and Operation of Local Exhaust
paragraph (h) of this section. Systems, Z9.2–1960, or the manual, In-
(6) Control means other than ventila- dustrial Ventilation, published by the
tion. Tank covers, foams, beads, chips, American Conference of Governmental
or other materials floating on the tank Industrial Hygienists 1970. Airflow and
surface so as to confine gases, mists, or pressure loss data provided by the man-
vapors to the area under the cover or ufacturer of any air cleaning device
to the foam, bead, or chip layer; or sur- shall be included in the design calcula-
face tension depressive agents added to tions.
65
(8) Operation. (i) The required airflow (ii) All persons required to work in
shall be maintained at all times during such a manner that their feet may be-
which gas, mist, or vapor is emitted come wet shall be provided with rubber
from the tank, and at all times the or other impervious boots or shoes,
tank, the draining, or the drying area rubbers, or wooden-soled shoes suffi-
is in operation or use. When the system cient to keep feet dry.
is first installed, the airflow from each (iii) All persons required to handle
hood shall be measured by means of a work wet with a liquid other than
pitot traverse in the exhaust duct and water shall be provided with gloves im-
corrective action taken if the flow is pervious to such a liquid and of a
less than that required. When the prop- length sufficient to prevent entrance of
er flow is obtained, the hood static liquid into the tops of the gloves. The
pressure shall be measured and re- interior of gloves shall be kept free
corded. At intervals of not more than 3 from corrosive or irritating contami-
months operation, or after a prolonged nants.
shutdown period, the hoods and duct (iv) All persons required to work in
system shall be inspected for evidence such a manner that their clothing may
of corrosion or damage. In any case become wet shall be provided with such
where the airflow is found to be less aprons, coats, jackets, sleeves, or other
than required, it shall be increased to garments made of rubber, or of other
the required value. (Information on air- materials impervious to liquids other
flow and static pressure measurement than water, as are required to keep
and calculations may be found in their clothing dry. Aprons shall extend
American National Standard Funda- well below the top of boots to prevent
mental Governing the Design and Oper- liquid splashing into the boots. Provi-
ation of Local Exhaust Systems, Z9.2– sion of dry, clean, cotton clothing
1960, or in the manual, Industrial Ven- along with rubber shoes or short boots
tilation, published by the American and an apron impervious to liquids
Conference of Governmental Industrial other than water shall be considered a
satisfactory substitute where small
Hygienists.)
parts are cleaned, plated, or acid
(ii) The exhaust system shall dis-
dipped in open tanks and rapid work is
charge to the outer air in such a man-
required.
ner that the possibility of its effluent (v) Whenever there is a danger of
entering any building is at a minimum. splashing, for example, when additions
Recirculation shall only be through a are made manually to the tanks, or
device for contaminant removal which when acids and chemicals are removed
will prevent the creation of a health from the tanks, the employees so en-
hazard in the room or area to which gaged shall be required to wear either
the air is recirculated. tight-fitting chemical goggles or an ef-
(iii) A volume of outside air in the fective face shield. See § 1926.102.
range of 90 percent to 110 percent of the (vi) When, during the emergencies
exhaust volume shall be provided to specified in paragraph (i)(11)(v) of this
each room having exhaust hoods. The section, employees must be in areas
outside air supply shall enter the work- where concentrations of air contami-
room in such a manner as not to be nants are greater than the limits set
detrimental to any exhaust hood. The by paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section
airflow of the makeup air system shall or oxygen concentrations are less than
be measured on installation. Corrective 19.5 percent, they must use respirators
action shall be taken when the airflow that reduce their exposure to a level
is below that required. The makeup air below these limits or that provide ade-
shall be uncontaminated. quate oxygen. Such respirators must
(9) Personal protection. (i) All employ- also be provided in marked, quickly-ac-
ees working in and around open-surface cessible storage compartments built
tank operations must be instructed as for this purpose when the possibility
to the hazards of their respective jobs, exists of accidental release of haz-

and in the personal protection and first ardous concentrations of air contami-
aid procedures applicable to these haz- nants. Respirators must be approved by
ards. NIOSH under 42 CFR part 84, selected
66
by a competent industrial hygienist or type of construction and by frequent

other technically-qualified source, and flushing. They shall be firm, sound, and
used in accordance with 29 CFR of the design and construction to mini-
1926.103. mize the possibility of tripping.
(vii) Near each tank containing a liq- (ii) Before cleaning the interior of
uid which may burn, irritate, or other- any tank, the contents shall be drained
wise be harmful to the skin if splashed off, and the cleanout doors shall be
upon the worker’s body, there shall be opened where provided. All pockets in
a supply of clean cold water. The water tanks or pits, where it is possible for
pipe (carrying a pressure not exceeding hazardous vapors to collect, shall be
25 pounds (11.325 kg)) shall be provided ventilated and cleared of such vapors.
with a quick opening valve and at least (iii) Tanks which have been drained
48 inches (1.216 m) of hose not smaller to permit employees to enter for the
than three-fourths inch, so that no purposes of cleaning, inspection, or
time may be lost in washing off liquids maintenance may contain atmospheres
from the skin or clothing. Alter- which are hazardous to life or health,
natively, deluge showers and eye through the presence of flammable or
flushes shall be provided in cases where toxic air contaminants, or through the
harmful chemicals may be splashed on absence of sufficient oxygen. Before
parts of the body. employees shall be permitted to enter
(viii) Operators with sores, burns, or any such tank, appropriate tests of the
other skin lesions requiring medical atmosphere shall be made to determine
treatment shall not be allowed to work
if the limits set by paragraph (i)(2)(iii)
at their regular operations until so au-
of this section are exceeded, or if the
thorized by a physician. Any small
oxygen concentration is less than 19.5
skin abrasions, cuts, rash, or open
percent.
sores which are found or reported shall
be treated by a properly designated (iv) If the tests made in accordance
person so that chances of exposures to with paragraph (i)(11)(iii) of this sec-
the chemicals are removed. Workers tion indicate that the atmosphere in
exposed to chromic acids shall have a the tank is unsafe, before any em-
periodic examination made of the nos- ployee is permitted to enter the tank,
trils and other parts of the body, to de- the tank shall be ventilated until the
tect incipient ulceration. hazardous atmosphere is removed, and
(ix) Sufficient washing facilities, in- ventilation shall be continued so as to
cluding soap, individual towels, and prevent the occurrence of a hazardous
hot water, shall be provided for all per- atmosphere as long as an employee is
sons required to use or handle any liq- in the tank.
uids which may burn, irritate, or oth- (v) If, in emergencies, such as rescue
erwise be harmful to the skin, on the work, it is necessary to enter a tank
basis of at least one basin (or its equiv- which may contain a hazardous atmos-
alent) with a hot water faucet for every phere, suitable respirators, such as
10 employees. See § 1926.51(f). self-contained breathing apparatus;
(x) Locker space or equivalent cloth- hose mask with blower, if there is a
ing storage facilities shall be provided possibility of oxygen deficiency; or a
to prevent contamination of street gas mask, selected and operated in ac-
clothing. cordance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of
(xi) First aid facilities specific to the this section, shall be used. If a con-
hazards of the operations conducted taminant in the tank can cause derma-
shall be readily available. titis, or be absorbed through the skin,
(10) Special precautions for cyanide. the employee entering the tank shall
Dikes or other arrangements shall be also wear protective clothing. At least
provided to prevent the possibility of one trained standby employee, with
intermixing of cyanide and acid in the suitable respirator, shall be present in
event of tank rupture. the nearest uncontaminated area. The
(11) Inspection, maintenance, and in- standby employee must be able to com-
stallation. (i) Floors and platforms municate with the employee in the
around tanks shall be prevented from tank and be able to haul him out of the
becoming slippery both by original tank with a lifeline if necessary.
67
(vi) Maintenance work requiring the vapors of such liquids, for the pur-
welding or open flame, where toxic pose of cleaning or altering their sur-
metal fumes such as cadmium, chro- faces, or adding or imparting a finish
mium, or lead may be evolved, shall be thereto, or changing the character of
done only with sufficient local exhaust the materials, and their subsequent re-
ventilation to prevent the creation of a moval from the liquids or vapors,
health hazard, or be done with res- draining, and drying. Such operations
pirators selected and used in accord- include washing, electroplating, anod-
ance with paragraph (i)(9)(vi) of this izing, pickling, quenching, dyeing, dip-
section. Welding, or the use of open ping, tanning, dressing, bleaching,
flames near any solvent cleaning degreasing, alkaline cleaning, strip-
equipment shall be permitted only ping, rinsing, digesting, and other simi-
after such equipment has first been lar operations, but do not include mol-
thoroughly cleared of solvents and va- ten materials handling operations, or
pors. surface coating operations.
(12) Vapor degreasing tanks. (i) In any (ii) Molten materials handling oper-
vapor degreasing tank equipped with a ations means all operations, other than
condenser or vapor level thermostat, welding, burning, and soldering oper-
the condenser or thermostat shall keep ations, involving the use, melting,
the level of vapors below the top edge smelting, or pouring of metals, alloys,
of the tank by a distance at least equal salts, or other similar substances in
to one-half the tank width, or at least the molten state. Such operations also
36 inches (0.912 m), whichever is short- include heat treating baths, descaling
er. baths, die casting stereotyping, gal-
(ii) Where gas is used as a fuel for vanizing, tinning, and similar oper-
heating vapor degreasing tanks, the ations.
combustion chamber shall be of tight (iii) Surface coating operations means
construction, except for such openings all operations involving the applica-
as the exhaust flue, and those that are tion of protective, decorative, adhe-
necessary for supplying air for combus- sive, or strengthening coating or im-
tion. Flues shall be of corrosion-resist- pregnation to one or more surfaces, or
ant construction and shall extend to into the interstices of any object or
the outer air. If mechanical exhaust is material, by means of spraying, spread-
used on this flue, a draft diverter shall ing, flowing, brushing, roll coating,
be used. Special precautions must be pouring, cementing, or similar means;
taken to prevent solvent fumes from and any subsequent draining or drying
entering the combustion air of this or operations, excluding open-tank oper-
any other heater when chlorinated or ations.
fluorinated hydrocarbon solvents (for
example, trichloroethylene, Freon) are [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
used. 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35099, June 30, 1993;
61 FR 9250, Mar. 3, 1996; 63 FR 1295, Jan. 8,
(iii) Heating elements shall be so de-
1998]
signed and maintained that their sur-
face temperature will not cause the § 1926.58 [Reserved]
solvent or mixture to decompose, break
down, or be converted into an excessive § 1926.59 Hazard communication.
quantity of vapor.
(iv) Tanks or machines of more than NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this section are iden-
4 square feet (0.368 m2) of vapor area, tical to those set forth at § 1910.1200 of this
used for solvent cleaning or vapor chapter.
degreasing, shall be equipped with suit-
able cleanout or sludge doors located [61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996]
near the bottom of each tank or still.
These doors shall be so designed and § 1926.60 Methylenedianiline.
gasketed that there will be no leakage (a) Scope and application. (1) This sec-
of solvent when they are closed. tion applies to all construction work as
(13) Scope. (i) This paragraph (i) ap- defined in 29 CFR 1910.12(b), in which
plies to all operations involving the there is exposure to MDA, including
immersion of materials in liquids, or in but not limited to the following:
68
(i) Construction, alteration, repair, ployer shall maintain records of the

maintenance, or renovation of struc- initial monitoring results or objective
tures, substrates, or portions thereof, data supporting that exemption and
that contain MDA; the basis for the employer’s reliance on
(ii) Installation or the finishing of the data, as provided in the record-
surfaces with products containing keeping provision of paragraph (o) of
MDA; this section.
(iii) MDA spill/emergency cleanup at (b) Definitions. For the purpose of this
construction sites; and section, the following definitions shall
(iv) Transportation, disposal, stor- apply:
age, or containment of MDA or prod- Action level means a concentration of
ucts containing MDA on the site or lo- airborne MDA of 5 ppb as an eight (8)-
cation at which construction activities hour time-weighted average.
are performed. Assistant Secretary means the Assist-
(2) Except as provided in paragraphs ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
(a)(7) and (f)(5) of this section, this sectional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart-
tion does not apply to the processing, ment of Labor, or designee.
use, and handling of products con-
Authorized person means any person
taining MDA where initial monitoring
specifically authorized by the employer
indicates that the product is not capa-
whose duties require the person to
ble of releasing MDA in excess of the
enter a regulated area, or any person
action level under the expected condi-
entering such an area as a designated
tions of processing, use, and handling
representative of employees for the
which will cause the greatest possible
purpose of exercising the right to ob-
release; and where no ‘‘dermal exposure
serve monitoring and measuring proce-
to MDA’’ can occur.
dures under paragraph (p) of this sec-
(3) Except as provided in paragraph
tion, or any other person authorized by
(a)(7) of this section, this section does
the Act or regulations issued under the
not apply to the processing, use, and
Act.
handling of products containing MDA
Container means any barrel, bottle,
where objective data are reasonably re-
can, cylinder, drum, reaction vessel,
lied upon which demonstrate the prod-
storage tank, commercial packaging or
uct is not capable of releasing MDA
the like, but does not include piping
under the expected conditions of proc-
systems.
essing, use, and handling which will
cause the greatest possible release; and Decontamination area means an area
where no ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’ outside of but as near as practical to
can occur. the regulated area, consisting of an
(4) Except as provided in paragraph equipment storage area, wash area, and
(a)(7) of this section, this section does clean change area, which is used for
not apply to the storage, transpor- the decontamination of workers, mate-
tation, distribution or sale of MDA in rials, and equipment contaminated
intact containers sealed in such a man- with MDA.
ner as to contain the MDA dusts, va- Dermal exposure to MDA occurs where
pors, or liquids, except for the provi- employees are engaged in the handling,
sions of 29 CFR 1910.1200 and paragraph application or use of mixtures or mate-
(e) of this section. rials containing MDA, with any of the
(5) Except as provided in paragraph following non-airborne forms of MDA:
(a)(7) of this section, this section does (i) Liquid, powdered, granular, or
not apply to materials in any form flaked mixtures containing MDA in
which contain less than 0.1% MDA by concentrations greater than 0.1% by
weight or volume. weight or volume; and
(6) Except as provided in paragraph (ii) Materials other than ‘‘finished ar-
(a)(7) of this section, this section does ticles’’ containing MDA in concentra-
not apply to ‘‘finished articles con- tions greater than 0.1% by weight or
taining MDA.’’ volume.

(7) Where products containing MDA Director means the Director of the
are exempted under paragraphs (a)(2) National Institute for Occupational
through (a)(6) of this section, the em- Safety and Health, U.S. Department of
69
Health and Human Services, or des- diaminodiphenylmethane, Chemical

ignee. Abstract Service Registry number 101–
Emergency means any occurrence 77–9, in the form of a vapor, liquid, or
such as, but not limited to, equipment solid. The definition also includes the
failure, rupture of containers, or fail- salts of MDA.
ure of control equipment which results Regulated Areas means areas where
in an unexpected and potentially haz- airborne concentrations of MDA exceed
ardous release of MDA. or can reasonably be expected to ex-
Employee exposure means exposure to ceed, the permissible exposure limits,
MDA which would occur if the em- or where ‘‘dermal exposure to MDA’’
ployee were not using respirators or can occur.
protective work clothing and equip- STEL means short term exposure
ment. limit as determined by any 15-minute
Finished article containing MDA is de- sample period.
fined as a manufactured item: (c) Permissible exposure limits. The em-
(i) Which is formed to a specific ployer shall assure that no employee is
shape or design during manufacture; exposed to an airborne concentration
(ii) Which has end use function(s) de- of MDA in excess of ten parts per bil-
pendent in whole or part upon its shape lion (10 ppb) as an 8-hour time-weight-
or design during end use; and ed average and a STEL of one hundred
(iii) Where applicable, is an item
parts per billion (100 ppb).
which is fully cured by virtue of having
(d) Communication among employers.
been subjected to the conditions (tem-
On multi-employer worksites, an em-
perature, time) necessary to complete
the desired chemical reaction. ployer performing work involving the
Historical monitoring data means mon- application of MDA or materials con-
itoring data for construction jobs that taining MDA for which establishment
meet the following conditions: of one or more regulated areas is re-
(i) The data upon which judgments quired shall inform other employers on
are based are scientifically sound and the site of the nature of the employer’s
were collected using methods that are work with MDA and of the existence of,
sufficiently accurate and precise; and requirements pertaining to, regu-
(ii) The processes and work practices lated areas.
that were in use when the historical (e) Emergency situations—(1) Written
monitoring data were obtained are es- plan. (i) A written plan for emergency
sentially the same as those to be used situations shall be developed for each
during the job for which initial moni- construction operation where there is a
toring will not be performed; possibility of an emergency. The plan
(iii) The characteristics of the MDA- shall include procedures where the em-
containing material being handled ployer identifies emergency escape
when the historical monitoring data routes for his employees at each con-
were obtained are the same as those on struction site before the construction
the job for which initial monitoring operation begins. Appropriate portions
will not be performed; of the plan shall be implemented in the
(iv) Environmental conditions pre- event of an emergency.
vailing when the historical monitoring (ii) The plan shall specifically pro-
data were obtained are the same as vide that employees engaged in cor-
those on the job for which initial moni- recting emergency conditions shall be
toring will not be performed; and equipped with the appropriate personal
(v) Other data relevant to the oper- protective equipment and clothing as
ations, materials, processing, or em- required in paragraphs (i) and (j) of this
ployee exposures covered by the excep- section until the emergency is abated.
tion are substantially similar. The (iii) The plan shall specifically in-
data must be scientifically sound, the clude provisions for alerting and evacu-
characteristics of the MDA containing ating affected employees as well as the
material must be similar and the envi- applicable elements prescribed in 29

ronmental conditions comparable. CFR 1910.38 and 29 CFR 1910.39, ‘‘Emer-
4,4′Methylenedianiline or MDA means gency action plans’’ and ‘‘Fire preven-
the chemical; 4,4′- tion plans,’’ respectively.
70
(2) Alerting employees. Where there is monitoring for each such employee at
the possibility of employee exposure to least every six (6) months.
MDA due to an emergency, means shall (ii) If the monitoring required by
be developed to promptly alert employ- paragraph (f)(2) of this section reveals
ees who have the potential to be di- employee exposure above the PELs, the
rectly exposed. Affected employees not employer shall repeat such monitoring
engaged in correcting emergency con- for each such employee at least every
ditions shall be evacuated immediately three (3) months.
in the event that an emergency occurs. (iii) Employers who are conducting
Means shall also be developed for alert- MDA operations within a regulated
ing other employees who may be ex- area can forego periodic monitoring if
posed as a result of the emergency. the employees are all wearing supplied-
(f) Exposure monitoring—(1) General. air respirators while working in the
(i) Determinations of employee expo- regulated area.
sure shall be made from breathing zone (iv) The employer may alter the mon-
air samples that are representative of itoring schedule from every three
each employee’s exposure to airborne months to every six months for any
MDA over an eight (8) hour period. De- employee for whom two consecutive
termination of employee exposure to measurements taken at least 7 days
the STEL shall be made from breathing apart indicate that the employee expo-
zone air samples collected over a 15 sure has decreased to below the PELs
minute sampling period. but above the action level.
(ii) Representative employee expo- (4) Termination of monitoring. (i) If the
sure shall be determined on the basis of initial monitoring required by para-
one or more samples representing full graph (f)(2) of this section reveals em-
shift exposure for each shift for each ployee exposure to be below the action
job classification in each work area level, the employer may discontinue
the monitoring for that employee, ex-
where exposure to MDA may occur.
cept as otherwise required by para-
(iii) Where the employer can docu-
graph (f)(5) of this section.
ment that exposure levels are equiva-
(ii) If the periodic monitoring re-
lent for similar operations in different quired by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
work shifts, the employer shall only be tion reveals that employee exposures,
required to determine representative as indicated by at least two consecu-
employee exposure for that operation tive measurements taken at least 7
during one shift. days apart, are below the action level
(2) Initial monitoring. Each employer the employer may discontinue the
who has a workplace or work operation monitoring for that employee, except
covered by this standard shall perform as otherwise required by paragraph
initial monitoring to determine accu- (f)(5) of this section.
rately the airborne concentrations of (5) Additional monitoring. The em-
MDA to which employees may be ex- ployer shall institute the exposure
posed unless: monitoring required under paragraphs
(i) The employer can demonstrate, on (f)(2) and (f)(3) of this section when
the basis of objective data, that the there has been a change in production
MDA-containing product or material process, chemicals present, control
being handled cannot cause exposures equipment, personnel, or work prac-
above the standard’s action level, even tices which may result in new or addi-
under worst-case release conditions; or tional exposures to MDA, or when the
(ii) The employer has historical mon- employer has any reason to suspect a
itoring or other data demonstrating change which may result in new or ad-
that exposures on a particular job will ditional exposures.
be below the action level. (6) Accuracy of monitoring. Monitoring
(3) Periodic monitoring and monitoring shall be accurate, to a confidence level
frequency. (i) If the monitoring required of 95 percent, to within plus or minus
by paragraph (f)(2) of this section re- 25 percent for airborne concentrations

veals employee exposure at or above of MDA.
the action level, but at or below the (7) Employee notification of monitoring
PELs, the employer shall repeat such results. (i) The employer must, as soon
71
as possible but no later than 5 working drink, smoke, chew tobacco or gum, or
days after the receipt of the results of apply cosmetics in regulated areas.
any monitoring performed under this (h) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi-
section, notify each affected employee neering controls and work practices and
of these results either individually in respirators. (i) The employer shall use
writing or by posting the results in an one or any combination of the fol-
appropriate location that is accessible lowing control methods to achieve
to employees. compliance with the permissible expo-
(ii) The written notification required sure limits prescribed by paragraph (c)
by paragraph (f)(7)(i) of this section of this section:
shall contain the corrective action
(A) Local exhaust ventilation
being taken by the employer or any
other protective measures which have equipped with HEPA filter dust collec-
been implemented to reduce the em- tion systems;
ployee exposure to or below the PELs, (B) General ventilation systems;
wherever the PELs are exceeded. (C) Use of workpractices; or
(8) Visual monitoring. The employer (D) Other engineering controls such
shall make routine inspections of em- as isolation and enclosure that the As-
ployee hands, face and forearms poten- sistant Secretary can show to be fea-
tially exposed to MDA. Other potential sible.
dermal exposures reported by the em- (ii) Wherever the feasible engineering
ployee must be referred to the appro- controls and work practices ‘‘which
priate medical personnel for observa- can be instituted are not sufficient to
tion. If the employer determines that reduce employee exposure to or below
the employee has been exposed to MDA the PELs, the employer shall use them
the employer shall: to reduce employee exposure to the
(i) Determine the source of exposure; lowest levels achievable by these con-
(ii) Implement protective measures trols and shall supplement them by the
to correct the hazard; and
use of respiratory protective devices
(iii) Maintain records of the correc-
which comply with the requirements of
tive actions in accordance with para-
graph (o) of this section. paragraph (i) of this section.
(g) Regulated areas—(1) Establish- (2) Special Provisions. For workers en-
ment—(i) Airborne exposures. The em- gaged in spray application methods,
ployer shall establish regulated areas respiratory protection must be used in
where airborne concentrations of MDA addition to feasible engineering con-
exceed or can reasonably be expected trols and work practices to reduce em-
to exceed, the permissible exposure ployee exposure to or below the PELs.
limits. (3) Prohibitions. Compressed air shall
(ii) Dermal exposures. Where employ- not be used to remove MDA, unless the
ees are subject to ‘‘dermal exposure to compressed air is used in conjunction
MDA’’ the employer shall establish with an enclosed ventilation system
those work areas as regulated areas. designed to capture the dust cloud cre-
(2) Demarcation. Regulated areas shall ated by the compressed air.
be demarcated from the rest of the (4) Employee rotation. The employer
workplace in a manner that minimizes shall not use employee rotation as a
the number of persons potentially ex- means of compliance with the exposure
posed. limits prescribed in paragraph (c) of
(3) Access. Access to regulated areas this section.
shall be limited to authorized persons.
(5) Compliance program. (i) The em-
(4) Personal protective equipment and
clothing. Each person entering a regu- ployer shall establish and implement a
lated area shall be supplied with, and written program to reduce employee
required to use, the appropriate per- exposure to or below the PELs by
sonal protective clothing and equip- means of engineering and work prac-
ment in accordance with paragraphs (i) tice controls, as required by paragraph

and (j) of this section. (h)(1) of this section, and by use of res-
(5) Prohibited activities. The employer piratory protection where permitted
shall ensure that employees do not eat, under this section.
72
(ii) Upon request this written pro- (ii) An employee who cannot use a
gram shall be furnished for examina- negative-pressure respirator must be
tion and copying to the Assistant Sec- given the option of using a positive-
retary, the Director, affected employ- pressure respirator, or a supplied-air
ees and designated employee represent- respirator operated in the continuous-
atives. The employer shall review and, flow or pressure-demand mode.
as necessary, update such plans at (j) Protective work clothing and equip-
least once every 12 months to make ment—(1) Provision and use. Where em-
certain they reflect the current status ployees are subject to dermal exposure
of the program. to MDA, where liquids containing MDA
(i) Respiratory protection—(1) General. can be splashed into the eyes, or where
For employees who use respirators re- airborne concentrations of MDA are in
quired by this section, the employer excess of the PEL, the employer shall
must provide each employee an appro- provide, at no cost to the employee,
priate respirator that complies with and ensure that the employee uses, ap-
the requirements of this paragraph. propriate protective work clothing and
Respirators must be used during: equipment which prevent contact with
(i) Periods necessary to install or im- MDA such as, but not limited to:
plement feasible engineering and work- (i) Aprons, coveralls or other full-
practice controls. body work clothing;
(ii) Work operations, such as mainte- (ii) Gloves, head coverings, and foot
nance and repair activities and spray- coverings; and
application processes, for which engi-
(iii) Face shields, chemical goggles;
neering and work-practice controls are
or
not feasible.
(iv) Other appropriate protective
(iii) Work operations for which fea-
equipment which comply with 29 CFR
sible engineering and work-practice
1910.133.
controls are not yet sufficient to re-
duce employee exposure to or below the (2) Removal and storage. (i) The em-
PELs. ployer shall ensure that, at the end of
(iv) Emergencies. their work shift, employees remove
(2) Respirator program. The employer MDA-contaminated protective work
must implement a respiratory protec- clothing and equipment that is not
tion program in accordance with routinely removed throughout the day
§ 1910.134 (b) through (d) (except in change areas provided in accordance
(d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which with the provisions in paragraph (k) of
covers each employee required by this this section.
section to use a respirator. (ii) The employer shall ensure that,
(3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers during their work shift, employees re-
must: move all other MDA-contaminated pro-
(A) Select, and provide to employees, tective work clothing or equipment be-
the appropriate respirators specified in fore leaving a regulated area.
paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR (iii) The employer shall ensure that
1910.134. no employee takes MDA-contaminated
(B) Provide HEPA filters for powered work clothing or equipment out of the
and non-powered air-purifying res- decontamination areas, except those
pirators. employees authorized to do so for the
(C) For escape, provide employees purpose of laundering, maintenance, or
with one of the following respirator op- disposal.
tions: Any self-contained breathing ap- (iv) MDA-contaminated work cloth-
paratus with a full facepiece or hood ing or equipment shall be placed and
operated in the positive-pressure or stored and transported in sealed, im-
continuous-flow mode; or a full face- permeable bags, or other closed imper-
piece air-purifying respirator. meable containers.
(D) Provide a combination HEPA fil- (v) Containers of MDA-contaminated
ter and organic vapor canister or car- protective work clothing or equipment
tridge with air-purifying respirators which are to be taken out of decon-
when MDA is in liquid form or used as tamination areas or the workplace for
part of a process requiring heat. cleaning, maintenance, or disposal,
73
shall bear labels warning of the hazards (iii) Equipment area. The equipment
of MDA. area shall be supplied with imper-
(3) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The meable, labeled bags and containers for
employer shall provide the employee the containment and disposal of con-
with clean protective clothing and taminated protective clothing and
equipment. The employer shall ensure equipment.
that protective work clothing or equip- (2) Shower area. (i) Where feasible,
ment required by this paragraph is shower facilities shall be provided
cleaned, laundered, repaired, or re- which comply with 29 CFR 1910.141(d)(3)
placed at intervals appropriate to wherever the possibility of employee
maintain its effectiveness. exposure to airborne levels of MDA in
(ii) The employer shall prohibit the excess of the permissible exposure
removal of MDA from protective work limit exists.
clothing or equipment by blowing, (ii) Where dermal exposure to MDA
shaking, or any methods which allow occurs, the employer shall ensure that
MDA to re-enter the workplace. materials spilled or deposited on the
(iii) The employer shall ensure that skin are removed as soon as possible by
laundering of MDA-contaminated methods which do not facilitate the
clothing shall be done so as to prevent dermal absorption of MDA.
the release of MDA in the workplace. (3) Lunch Areas. (i) Whenever food or
(iv) Any employer who gives MDA- beverages are consumed at the work-
contaminated clothing to another per- site and employees are exposed to MDA
son for laundering shall inform such the employer shall provide clean lunch
person of the requirement to prevent areas were MDA levels are below the
the release of MDA. action level and where no dermal expo-
(v) The employer shall inform any sure to MDA can occur.
person who launders or cleans protec- (ii) The employer shall ensure that
tive clothing or equipment contami- employees wash their hands and faces
nated with MDA of the potentially with soap and water prior to eating,
harmful effects of exposure. drinking, smoking, or applying cos-
(4) Visual Examination. (i) The em- metics.
ployer shall ensure that employees’ (iii) The employer shall ensure that
work clothing is examined periodically employees do not enter lunch facilities
for rips or tears that may occur during with contaminated protective work
performance of work. clothing or equipment.
(ii) When rips or tears are detected, (l) Communication of hazards to em-
the protective equipment or clothing ployees—(1) Signs and labels. (i) The em-
shall be repaired and replaced imme- ployer shall post and maintain legible
diately. signs demarcating regulated areas and
(k) Hygiene facilities and practices—(1) entrances or accessways to regulated
General. (i) The employer shall provide areas that bear the following legend:
decontamination areas for employees DANGER
required to work in regulated areas or MDA
required by paragraph (j)(1) of this sec- MAY CAUSE CANCER
tion to wear protective clothing. Excep- LIVER TOXIN
tion: In lieu of the decontamination AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY
RESPIRATORS AND PROTECTIVE CLOTH-
area requirement specified in para- ING MAY BE REQUIRED TO BE WORN IN
graph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the em- THIS AREA
ployer may permit employees engaged
in small scale, short duration oper- (ii) The employer shall ensure that
ations, to clean their protective cloth- labels or other appropriate forms of
ing or dispose of the protective cloth- warning are provided for containers of
ing before such employees leave the MDA within the workplace. The labels
area where the work was performed. shall comply with the requirements of
(ii) Change areas. The employer shall 29 CFR 1910.1200(f) and shall include
ensure that change areas are equipped one of the following legends:
with separate storage facilities for pro- (A) For pure MDA
tective clothing and street clothing, in DANGER
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.141(e). CONTAINS MDA
74
MAY CAUSE CANCER (4) Surfaces contaminated with MDA
LIVER TOXIN may not be cleaned by the use of com-
(B) For mixtures containing MDA pressed air.
(5) Shoveling, dry sweeping, and
DANGER
other methods of dry clean-up of MDA
CONTAINS MDA
CONTAINS MATERIALS WHICH MAY may be used where HEPA filtered
CAUSE CANCER vacuuming and/or wet cleaning are not
LIVER TOXIN feasible or practical.
(6) Waste, scrap, debris, bags, con-
(2) Material safety data sheets (MSDS).
tainers, equipment, and clothing con-
Employers shall obtain or develop, and
taminated with MDA shall be collected
shall provide access to their employ-
ees, to a material safety data sheet and disposed of in a manner to prevent
(MSDS) for MDA. the re-entry of MDA into the work-
(3) Information and training. (i) The place.
employer shall provide employees with (n) Medical surveillance—(1) General.
information and training on MDA, in (i) The employer shall make available
accordance with 29 CFR 1910.1200(h), at a medical surveillance program for em-
the time of initial assignment and at ployees exposed to MDA under the fol-
least annually thereafter. lowing circumstances:
(ii) In addition to the information re- (A) Employees exposed at or above
quired under 29 CFR 1910.1200, the em- the action level for 30 or more days per
ployer shall: year;
(A) Provide an explanation of the (B) Employees who are subject to
contents of this section, including ap- dermal exposure to MDA for 15 or more
pendices A and B of this section, and days per year;
indicate to employees where a copy of (C) Employees who have been exposed
the standard is available; in an emergency situation;
(B) Describe the medical surveillance (D) Employees whom the employer,
program required under paragraph (n) based on results from compliance with
of this section, and explain the infor- paragraph (f)(8) of this section, has rea-
mation contained in appendix C of this son to believe are being dermally ex-
section; and posed; and
(C) Describe the medical removal (E) Employees who show signs or
provision required under paragraph (n) symptoms of MDA exposure.
of this section. (ii) The employer shall ensure that
(4) Access to training materials. (i) The all medical examinations and proce-
employer shall make readily available dures are performed by or under the su-
to all affected employees, without cost,
pervision of a licensed physician at a
all written materials relating to the
reasonable time and place, and pro-
employee training program, including
vided without cost to the employee.
a copy of this regulation.
(2) Initial examinations. (i) Within 150
(ii) The employer shall provide to the
Assistant Secretary and the Director, days of the effective date of this stand-
upon request, all information and ard, or before the time of initial assign-
training materials relating to the em- ment, the employer shall provide each
ployee information and training pro- employee covered by paragraph (n)(1)(i)
gram. of this section with a medical examina-
(m) Housekeeping. (1) All surfaces tion including the following elements:
shall be maintained as free as prac- (A) A detailed history which in-
ticable of visible accumulations of cludes:
MDA. (1) Past work exposure to MDA or
(2) The employer shall institute a any other toxic substances;
program for detecting MDA leaks, (2) A history of drugs, alcohol, to-
spills, and discharges, including reg- bacco, and medication routinely taken
ular visual inspections of operations (duration and quantity); and

involving liquid or solid MDA. (3) A history of dermatitis, chemical
(3) All leaks shall be repaired and liq- skin sensitization, or previous hepatic
uid or dust spills cleaned up promptly. disease.
75
(B) A physical examination which in- normal, tests must be repeated two to
cludes all routine physical examina- three weeks from the initial testing. If
tion parameters, skin examination, and the results of the second set of tests
examination for signs of liver disease. are normal and on the advice of the
(C) Laboratory tests including: physician, no additional testing is re-
(1) Liver function tests and (2) Uri- quired.
nalysis. (5) Additional examinations. Where the
(D) Additional tests as necessary in employee develops signs and symptoms
the opinion of the physician. associated with exposure to MDA, the
(ii) No initial medical examination is employer shall provide the employee
required if adequate records show that with an additional medical examina-
the employee has been examined in action including liver function tests. Re-
cordance with the requirements of this peat liver function tests shall be con-
section within the previous six months ducted on the advice of the physician.
prior to the effective date of this stand- If the results of the tests are normal,
ard or prior to the date of initial as- tests must be repeated two to three
signment. weeks from the initial testing. If the
(3) Periodic examinations. (i) The em- results of the second set of tests are
ployer shall provide each employee normal and on the advice of the physi-
covered by this section with a medical cian, no additional testing is required.
examination at least annually fol- (6) Multiple physician review mecha-
lowing the initial examination. These nism. (i) If the employer selects the ini-
periodic examinations shall include at tial physician who conducts any med-
least the following elements: ical examination or consultation pro-
(A) A brief history regarding any new vided to an employee under this sec-
exposure to potential liver toxins, tion, and the employee has signs or
changes in drug, tobacco, and alcohol symptoms of occupational exposure to
intake, and the appearance of physical MDA (which could include an abnormal
signs relating to the liver, and the liver function test), and the employee
skin; disagrees with the opinion of the exam-
(B) The appropriate tests and exami- ining physician, and this opinion could
nations including liver function tests affect the employee’s job status, the
and skin examinations; and employee may designate an appro-
(C) Appropriate additional tests or priate and mutually acceptable second
examinations as deemed necessary by physician:
the physician. (A) To review any findings, deter-
(ii) If in the physician’s opinion the minations or recommendations of the
results of liver function tests indicate initial physician; and
an abnormality, the employee shall be (B) To conduct such examinations,
removed from further MDA exposure in consultations, and laboratory tests as
accordance with paragraph (n)(9) of the second physician deems necessary
this section. Repeat liver function to facilitate this review.
tests shall be conducted on advice of (ii) The employer shall promptly no-
the physician. tify an employee of the right to seek a
(4) Emergency examinations. If the em- second medical opinion after each oc-
ployer determines that the employee casion that an initial physician con-
has been exposed to a potentially haz- ducts a medical examination or con-
ardous amount of MDA in an emer- sultation pursuant to this section. The
gency situation under paragraph (e) of employer may condition its participa-
this section, the employer shall provide tion in, and payment for, the multiple
medical examinations in accordance physician review mechanism upon the
with paragraphs (n)(3) (i) and (ii) of employee doing the following within
this section. If the results of liver func- fifteen (15) days after receipt of the
tion testing indicate an abnormality, foregoing notification, or receipt of the
the employee shall be removed in ac- initial physician’s written opinion,
cordance with paragraph (n)(9) of this whichever is later:

section. Repeat liver function tests (A) The employee informing the em-
shall be conducted on the advice of the ployer that he or she intends to seek a
physician. If the results of the tests are second medical opinion, and
76
(B) The employee initiating steps to in 15 days of its receipt. The written
make an appointment with a second opinion shall include the following:
physician. (A) The occupationally pertinent re-
(iii) If the findings, determinations, sults of the medical examination and
or recommendations of the second phy- tests;
sician differ from those of the initial (B) The physician’s opinion con-
physician, then the employer and the cerning whether the employee has any
employee shall assure that efforts are detected medical conditions which
made for the two physicians to resolve would place the employee at increased
any disagreement. risk of material impairment of health
(iv) If the two physicians have been from exposure to MDA;
unable to quickly resolve their dis- (C) The physician’s recommended
agreement, then the employer and the limitations upon the employee’s expo-
employee through their respective phy- sure to MDA or upon the employee’s
sicians shall designate a third physi- use of protective clothing or equipment
cian: and respirators; and
(A) To review any findings, deter- (D) A statement that the employee
minations, or recommendations of the has been informed by the physician of
prior physicians; and the results of the medical examination
(B) To conduct such examinations, and any medical conditions resulting
consultations, laboratory tests, and from MDA exposure which require fur-
discussions with the prior physicians ther explanation or treatment.
as the third physician deems necessary (ii) The written opinion obtained by
to resolve the disagreement of the the employer shall not reveal specific
prior physicians. findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
(v) The employer shall act consistent cupational exposures.
with the findings, determinations, and (9) Medical removal—(i) Temporary
recommendations of the second physi- medical removal of an employee—(A)
cian, unless the employer and the em- Temporary removal resulting from occupa-
ployee reach a mutually acceptable tional exposure. The employee shall be
agreement. removed from work environments in
which exposure to MDA is at or above
(7) Information provided to the exam-
the action level or where dermal expo-
ining physician. (i) The employer shall
sure to MDA may occur, following an
provide the following information to
initial examination (paragraph (n)(2) of
the examining physician:
this section), periodic examinations
(A) A copy of this regulation and its
(paragraph (n)(3) of this section), an
appendices;
emergency situation (paragraph (n)(4)
(B) A description of the affected em- of this section), or an additional exam-
ployee’s duties as they relate to the ination (paragraph (n)(5) of this sec-
employee’s potential exposure to MDA; tion) in the following circumstances:
(C) The employee’s current actual or (1) When the employee exhibits signs
representative MDA exposure level; and/or symptoms indicative of acute
(D) A description of any personal pro- exposure to MDA; or
tective equipment used or to be used; (2) When the examining physician de-
and termines that an employee’s abnormal
(E) Information from previous em- liver function tests are not associated
ployment related medical examina- with MDA exposure but that the abnor-
tions of the affected employee. malities may be exacerbated as a re-
(ii) The employer shall provide the sult of occupational exposure to MDA.
foregoing information to a second phy- (B) Temporary removal due to a final
sician under this section upon request medical determination. (1) The employer
either by the second physician, or by shall remove an employee from work
the employee. having an exposure to MDA at or above
(8) Physician’s written opinion. (i) For the action level or where the potential
each examination under this section, for dermal exposure exists on each oc-
the employer shall obtain, and provide casion that a final medical determina-
the employee with a copy of, the exam- tion results in a medical finding, deter-
ining physician’s written opinion with- mination, or opinion that the employee
77
has a detected medical condition which spect to an employee, the employer

places the employee at increased risk shall act as follows:
of material impairment to health from (A) Removal. The employer may re-
exposure to MDA. move the employee from exposure to
(2) For the purposes of this section, MDA, provide special protective meas-
the phrase ‘‘final medical determina- ures to the employee, or place limita-
tion’’ shall mean the outcome of the tions upon the employee, consistent
physician review mechanism used pur- with the medical findings, determina-
suant to the medical surveillance pro- tions, or recommendations of the phy-
visions of this section. sician who has reviewed the employee’s
(3) Where a final medical determina- health status.
tion results in any recommended spe- (B) Return. The employer may return
cial protective measures for an em- the employee to his or her former job
ployee, or limitations on an employee’s status, and end any special protective
exposure to MDA, the employer shall measures provided to the employee,
implement and act consistent with the consistent with the medical findings,
recommendation. determinations, or recommendations of
(ii) Return of the employee to former job any of the physicians who have re-
status. (A) The employer shall return viewed the employee’s health status,
an employee to his or her former job with two exceptions:
status:
(1) If the initial removal, special pro-
(1) When the employee no longer
tection, or limitation of the employee
shows signs or symptoms of exposure
resulted from a final medical deter-
to MDA, or upon the advice of the phy-
mination which differed from the find-
sician.
ings, determinations, or recommenda-
(2) When a subsequent final medical
tions of the initial physician; or
determination results in a medical
finding, determination, or opinion that (2) The employee has been on re-
the employee no longer has a detected moval status for the preceding six
medical condition which places the em- months as a result of exposure to MDA,
ployee at increased risk of material then the employer shall await a final
impairment to health from exposure to medical determination.
MDA. (v) Medical removal protection bene-
(B) For the purposes of this section, fits—(A) Provisions of medical removal
the requirement that an employer re- protection benefits. The employer shall
turn an employee to his or her former provide to an employee up to six (6)
job status is not intended to expand months of medical removal protection
upon or restrict any rights an em- benefits on each occasion that an em-
ployee has or would have had, absent ployee is removed from exposure to
temporary medical removal, to a spe- MDA or otherwise limited pursuant to
cific job classification or position this section.
under the terms of a collective bar- (B) Definition of medical removal pro-
gaining agreement. tection benefits. For the purposes of this
(iii) Removal of other employee special section, the requirement that an em-
protective measure or limitations. The ployer provide medical removal protec-
employer shall remove any limitations tion benefits means that the employer
placed on an employee or end any spe- shall maintain the earnings, seniority,
cial protective measures provided to an and other employment rights and bene-
employee pursuant to a final medical fits of an employee as though the em-
determination when a subsequent final ployee had not been removed from nor-
medical determination indicates that mal exposure to MDA or otherwise lim-
the limitations or special protective ited.
measures are no longer necessary. (C) Follow-up medical surveillance dur-
(iv) Employer options pending a final ing the period of employee removal or lim-
medical determination. Where the physi- itations. During the period of time that
cian review mechanism used pursuant an employee is removed from normal

to the medical surveillance provisions exposure to MDA or otherwise limited,
of this section, has not yet resulted in the employer may condition the provi-
a final medical determination with re- sion of medical removal protection
78
benefits upon the employee’s participa- ly returning to his or her former job
tion in follow-up medical surveillance status; and
made available pursuant to this sec- (4) Where the employer acts pursuant
tion. to a final medical determination which
(D) Workers’ compensation claims. If a permits the return of the employee to
removed employee files a claim for his or her former job status despite
workers’ compensation payments for a what would otherwise be an unaccept-
MDA-related disability, then the em- able liver function test, later questions
ployer shall continue to provide med- concerning removing the employee
ical removal protection benefits pend- again shall be decided by a final med-
ing disposition of the claim. To the ex-
ical determination. The employer need
tent that an award is made to the em-
not automatically remove such an em-
ployee for earnings lost during the pe-
riod of removal, the employer’s med- ployee pursuant to the MDA removal
ical removal protection obligation criteria provided by this section.
shall be reduced by such amount. The (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of
employer shall receive no credit for an employee. Where an employer, al-
workers’ compensation payments re- though not required by this section to
ceived by the employee for treatment- do so, removes an employee from expo-
related expenses. sure to MDA or otherwise places limi-
(E) Other credits. The employer’s obli- tations on an employee due to the ef-
gation to provide medical removal pro- fects of MDA exposure on the employ-
tection benefits to a removed employee ee’s medical condition, the employer
shall be reduced to the extent that the shall provide medical removal protec-
employee receives compensation for tion benefits to the employee equal to
earnings lost during the period of re- that required by paragraph (n)(9)(v) of
moval either from a publicly or em- this section.
ployer-funded compensation program, (o) Recordkeeping—(1) Objective data
or receives income from employment for exempted operations. (i) Where the
with any employer made possible by employer has relied on objective data
virtue of the employee’s removal. that demonstrate that products made
(F) Employees who do not recover with-
from or containing MDA are not capa-
in the 6 months of removal. The em-
ble of releasing MDA or do not present
ployer shall take the following meas-
a dermal exposure problem under the
ures with respect to any employee re-
moved from exposure to MDA: expected conditions of processing, use,
(1) The employer shall make avail- or handling to exempt such operations
able to the employee a medical exam- from the initial monitoring require-
ination pursuant to this section to ob- ments under paragraph (f)(2) of this
tain a final medical determination section, the employer shall establish
with respect to the employee; and maintain an accurate record of ob-
(2) The employer shall assure that jective data reasonably relied upon in
the final medical determination ob- support of the exemption.
tained indicates whether or not the (ii) The record shall include at least
employee may be returned to his or her the following information:
former job status, and, if not, what (A) The product qualifying for ex-
steps should be taken to protect the emption;
employee’s health; (B) The source of the objective data;
(3) Where the final medical deter- (C) The testing protocol, results of
mination has not yet been obtained, or testing, and/or analysis of the material
once obtained indicates that the em- for the release of MDA;
ployee may not yet be returned to his
(D) A description of the operation ex-
or her former job status, the employer
shall continue to provide medical re- empted and how the data support the
moval protection benefits to the em- exemption; and
ployee until either the employee is re- (E) Other data relevant to the oper-
turned to former job status, or a final ations, materials, processing, or em-
medical determination is made that ployee exposures covered by the ex-
the employee is incapable of ever safe- emption.
79
(iii) The employer shall maintain (A) The date of measurement;

this record for the duration of the em- (B) The operation involving exposure
ployer’s reliance upon such objective to MDA;
data. (C) Sampling and analytical methods
(2) Historical monitoring data. (i) used and evidence of their accuracy;
Where the employer has relied on his- (D) Number, duration, and results of
torical monitoring data that dem- samples taken;
onstrate that exposures on a particular (E) Type of protective devices worn,
job will be below the action level to ex- if any; and
empt such operations from the initial (F) Name, social security number,
monitoring requirements under para- and exposure of the employees whose
graph (f)(2) of this section, the em- exposures are represented.
ployer shall establish and maintain an (iii) The employer shall maintain
accurate record of historical moni- this record for at least thirty (30)
toring data reasonably relied upon in years, in accordance with 29 CFR
support of the exception. 1910.33.
(ii) The record shall include informa- (5) Medical surveillance. (i) The em-
tion that reflect the following condi- ployer shall establish and maintain an
tions: accurate record for each employee sub-
(A) The data upon which judgments ject to medical surveillance by para-
are based are scientifically sound and graph (n) of this section, in accordance
were collected using methods that are with 29 CFR 1910.33.
sufficiently accurate and precise; (ii) The record shall include at least
(B) The processes and work practices the following information:
that were in use when the historical (A) The name and social security
monitoring data were obtained are es- number of the employee;
sentially the same as those to be used (B) A copy of the employee’s medical
during the job for which initial moni- examination results, including the
toring will not be performed; medical history, questionnaire re-
(C) The characteristics of the MDA- sponses, results of any tests, and physi-
containing material being handled cian’s recommendations.
when the historical monitoring data (C) Physician’s written opinions;
were obtained are the same as those on (D) Any employee medical com-
the job for which initial monitoring plaints related to exposure to MDA;
will not be performed; and
(D) Environmental conditions pre- (E) A copy of the information pro-
vailing when the historical monitoring vided to the physician as required by
data were obtained are the same as paragraph (n) of this section.
those on the job for which initial moni- (iii) The employer shall ensure that
toring will not be performed; and this record is maintained for the dura-
(E) Other data relevant to the oper- tion of employment plus thirty (30)
ations, materials, processing, or em- years, in accordance with 29 CFR
ployee exposures covered by the excep- 1910.33.
tion. (iv) A copy of the employee’s medical
(iii) The employer shall maintain removal and return to work status.
this record for the duration of the em- (6) Training records. The employer
ployer’s reliance upon such historical shall maintain all employee training
monitoring data. records for one (1) year beyond the last
(3) The employer may utilize the date of employment.
services of competent organizations (7) Availability. (i) The employer,
such as industry trade associations and upon written request, shall make all
employee associations to maintain the records required to be maintained by
records required by this section. this section available to the Assistant
(4) Exposure measurements. (i) The em- Secretary and the Director for exam-
ployer shall keep an accurate record of ination and copying.
all measurements taken to monitor (ii) The employer, upon request, shall
employee exposure to MDA. make any exposure records required by
(ii) This record shall include at least paragraphs (f) and (n) of this section
the following information: available for examination and copying
80
to affected employees, former employ- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE

ees, designated representatives, and DATA SHEET, FOR 4–4′
the Assistant Secretary, in accordance METHYLENEDIANILINE
with 29 CFR 1910.33(a)–(e) and (g)–(i).
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
(iii) The employer, upon request, struction work under this Appendix A are
shall make employee medical records identical to those set forth in Appendix A to
required by paragraphs (n) and (o) of § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
this section available for examination
and copying to the subject employee, APPENDIX B TO § 1926.60—SUBSTANCE
anyone having the specific written con- TECHNICAL GUIDELINES, MDA
sent of the subject employee, and the NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
Assistant Secretary, in accordance struction work under this Appendix B are
with 29 CFR 1910.33. identical to those set forth in Appendix B to
(8) Transfer of records. (i) The em- § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
ployer shall comply with the require-
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.60—MEDICAL
ments concerning transfer of records
SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES FOR MDA
set forth in 29 CFR 1910.33(h).
(ii) Whenever the employer ceases to NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
do business and there is no successor struction work under this Appendix C are
employer to receive and retain the identical to those set forth in Appendix C to
§ 1910.1050 of this chapter.
records for the prescribed period, the
employer shall notify the Director at APPENDIX D TO § 1926.60—SAMPLING AND
least 90 days prior to disposal and, ANALYTICAL METHODS FOR MDA MON-
upon request, transmit them to the Di- ITORING AND MEASUREMENT PROCE-
rector. DURES
(p) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em-
ployee observation. The employer shall NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
provide affected employees, or their struction work under this Appendix D are
identical to those set forth in Appendix D to
designated representatives, an oppor- § 1910.1050 of this chapter.
tunity to observe the measuring or
monitoring of employee exposure to [57 FR 35681, Aug. 10, 1992, as amended at 57
FR 49649, Nov. 3, 1992; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
MDA conducted pursuant to paragraph 1996; 61 FR 31431, June 20, 1996; 63 FR 1296,
(f) of this section. Jan. 8, 1998; 69 FR 70373, Dec. 6, 2004; 70 FR
(2) Observation procedures. When ob- 1143, Jan. 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71
servation of the measuring or moni- FR 50191, Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12,
toring of employee exposure to MDA 2008]
requires entry into areas where the use
§ 1926.61 Retention of DOT markings,
of protective clothing and equipment placards and labels.
or respirators is required, the employer
shall provide the observer with per- NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
struction work under this section are iden-
sonal protective clothing and equip-
tical to those set forth at § 1910.1201 of this
ment or respirators required to be worn chapter.
by employees working in the area, as-
sure the use of such clothing and equip- [61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996]
ment or respirators, and require the § 1926.62 Lead.
observer to comply with all other ap-
plicable safety and health procedures. (a) Scope. This section applies to all
(q) Appendices. The information con- construction work where an employee
tained in appendices A, B, C, and D of may be occupationally exposed to lead.
All construction work excluded from
this section is not intended, by itself,
coverage in the general industry stand-
to create any additional obligations
ard for lead by 29 CFR 1910.1025(a)(2) is
not otherwise imposed by this standard
covered by this standard. Construction
nor detract from any existing obliga- work is defined as work for construc-
tion. tion, alteration and/or repair, including
painting and decorating. It includes
but is not limited to the following:
81
(1) Demolition or salvage of struc- day, shall be reduced according to the

tures where lead or materials con- following formula:
taining lead are present;
Allowable employee exposure (in μg/m3)
(2) Removal or encapsulation of ma-
= 400 divided by hours worked in the
terials containing lead;
day.
(3) New construction, alteration, re-
pair, or renovation of structures, sub- (3) When respirators are used to limit
strates, or portions thereof, that con- employee exposure as required under
tain lead, or materials containing lead; paragraph (c) of this section and all the
(4) Installation of products con- requirements of paragraphs (e)(1) and
taining lead; (f) of this section have been met, em-
(5) Lead contamination/emergency ployee exposure may be considered to
cleanup; be at the level provided by the protec-
(6) Transportation, disposal, storage, tion factor of the respirator for those
or containment of lead or materials periods the respirator is worn. Those
containing lead on the site or location periods may be averaged with exposure
at which construction activities are levels during periods when respirators
performed, and are not worn to determine the employ-
(7) Maintenance operations associ- ee’s daily TWA exposure.
ated with the construction activities (d) Exposure assessment—(1) General.
described in this paragraph. (i) Each employer who has a workplace
(b) Definitions. or operation covered by this standard
Action level means employee expo- shall initially determine if any em-
sure, without regard to the use of res- ployee may be exposed to lead at or
pirators, to an airborne concentration above the action level.
of lead of 30 micrograms per cubic (ii) For the purposes of paragraph (d)
meter of air (30 μg/m3) calculated as an of this section, employee exposure is
8-hour time-weighted average (TWA). that exposure which would occur if the
Assistant Secretary means the Assist- employee were not using a respirator.
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- (iii) With the exception of moni-
tional Safety and Health, U.S. Depart- toring under paragraph (d)(3), where
ment of Labor, or designee. monitoring is required under this sec-
Competent person means one who is tion, the employer shall collect per-
capable of identifying existing and pre- sonal samples representative of a full
dictable lead hazards in the sur- shift including at least one sample for
roundings or working conditions and each job classification in each work
who has authorization to take prompt area either for each shift or for the
corrective measures to eliminate them. shift with the highest exposure level.
Director means the Director, National (iv) Full shift personal samples shall
Institute for Occupational Safety and be representative of the monitored em-
Health (NIOSH), U.S. Department of ployee’s regular, daily exposure to
Health and Human Services, or des- lead.
ignee. (2) Protection of employees during as-
Lead means metallic lead, all inor- sessment of exposure. (i) With respect to
ganic lead compounds, and organic lead the lead related tasks listed in para-
soaps. Excluded from this definition graph (d)(2)(i) of this section, where
are all other organic lead compounds. lead is present, until the employer per-
This section means this standard. forms an employee exposure assess-
(c) Permissible exposure limit. (1) The ment as required in paragraph (d) of
employer shall assure that no em- this section and documents that the
ployee is exposed to lead at concentra- employee performing any of the listed
tions greater than fifty micrograms per tasks is not exposed above the PEL,
cubic meter of air (50 μg/m3) averaged the employer shall treat the employee
over an 8-hour period. as if the employee were exposed above
(2) If an employee is exposed to lead the PEL, and not in excess of ten (10)
for more than 8 hours in any work day times the PEL, and shall implement
the employees’ allowable exposure, as a employee protective measures pre-
time weighted average (TWA) for that scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this
82
section. The tasks covered by this re- assessment as required in paragraph (d)
quirement are: of this section and documents that the
(A) Where lead containing coatings employee performing any of the listed
or paint are present: Manual demoli- tasks is not exposed to lead in excess of
tion of structures (e.g, dry wall), man- 2,500 μg/m3 (50×PEL), the employer
ual scraping, manual sanding, heat gun shall treat the employee as if the em-
applications, and power tool cleaning ployee were exposed to lead in excess of
with dust collection systems; 2,500 μg/m3 and shall implement em-
(B) Spray painting with lead paint. ployee protective measures as pre-
(ii) In addition, with regard to tasks scribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this
not listed in paragraph (d)(2)(i), where section. Where the employer does es-
the employee has any reason to believe tablish that the employee is exposed to
that an employee performing the task levels of lead below 2,500 μg/m3, the em-
may be exposed to lead in excess of the ployer may provide the exposed em-
PEL, until the employer performs an ployee with the appropriate respirator
employee exposure assessment as re- prescribed for use at such lower expo-
quired by paragraph (d) of this section sures, in accordance with Table I of
and documents that the employee’s this section. Interim protection as de-
lead exposure is not above the PEL the scribed in this paragaraph is required
employer shall treat the employee as if where lead containing coatings or
the employee were exposed above the paint are present on structures when
PEL and shall implememt employee performing:
protective measures as prescribed in (A) Abrasive blasting,
paragraph (d)(2)(v) of this section. (B) Welding,
(iii) With respect to the tasks listed (C) Cutting, and
in paragraph (d)(2)(iii) of this section, (D) Torch burning.
where lead is present, until the em- (v) Until the employer performs an
ployer performs an employee exposure employee exposure assessment as re-
assessment as required in paragraph (d) quired under paragraph (d) of this sec-
of this section, and documents that the tion and determines actual employee
employee performing any of the listed exposure, the employer shall provide to
tasks is not exposed in excess of 500 μg/ employees performing the tasks de-
m3, the employer shall treat the em- scribed in paragraphs (d)(2)(i), (d)(2)(ii),
ployee as if the employee were exposed (d)(2)(iii), and (d)(2)(iv) of this section
to lead in excess of 500 μg/m3 and shall with interim protection as follows:
implement employee protective meas- (A) Appropriate respiratory protec-
ures as prescribed in paragraph (d)(2)(v) tion in accordance with paragraph (f)
of this section. Where the employer of this section.
does establish that the employee is ex- (B) Appropriate personal protective
posed to levels of lead below 500 μg/m3, clothing and equipment in accordance
the employer may provide the exposed with paragraph (g) of this section.
employee with the appropriate res- (C) Change areas in accordance with
pirator prescribed for such use at such paragraph (i)(2) of this section.
lower exposures, in accordance with (D) Hand washing facilities in accord-
Table 1 of this section. The tasks cov- ance with paragraph (i)(5) of this sec-
ered by this requirement are: tion.
(A) Using lead containing mortar; (E) Biological monitoring in accord-
lead burning ance with paragraph (j)(1)(i) of this sec-
(B) Where lead containing coatings or tion, to consist of blood sampling and
paint are present: rivet busting; power analysis for lead and zinc
tool cleaning without dust collection protoporphyrin levels, and
systems; cleanup activities where dry (F) Training as required under para-
expendable abrasives are used; and ab- graph (l)(1)(i) of this section regarding
rasive blasting enclosure movement 29 CFR 1926.59, Hazard Communication;
and removal. training as required under paragraph
(iv) With respect to the tasks listed (1)(2)(iii) of this section, regarding use
in paragraph (d)(2)(iv) of this section, of respirators; and training in accord-
where lead is present, until the em- ance with 29 CFR 1926.21, Safety train-
ployer performs an employee exposure ing and education.
83
(3) Basis of initial determination. (i) not permitted to be used for exposure
Except as provided under paragraphs assessment in connection with para-
(d)(3)(iii) and (d)(3)(iv) of this section graph (d)(2) of this section.
the employer shall monitor employee (4) Positive initial determination and
exposures and shall base initial deter- initial monitoring. (i) Where a deter-
minations on the employee exposure mination conducted under paragraphs
monitoring results and any of the fol- (d) (1), (2) and (3) of this section shows
lowing, relevant considerations: the possibility of any employee expo-
(A) Any information, observations, or sure at or above the action level the
calculations which would indicate em- employer shall conduct monitoring
ployee exposure to lead; which is representative of the exposure
(B) Any previous measurements of for each employee in the workplace
airborne lead; and who is exposed to lead.
(C) Any employee complaints of (ii) Where the employer has pre-
symptoms which may be attributable viously monitored for lead exposure,
to exposure to lead. and the data were obtained within the
(ii) Monitoring for the initial deter- past 12 months during work operations
mination where performed may be lim- conducted under workplace conditions
ited to a representative sample of the closely resembling the processes, type
exposed employees who the employer of material, control methods, work
reasonably believes are exposed to the practices, and environmental condi-
greatest airborne concentrations of tions used and prevailing in the em-
lead in the workplace. ployer’s current operations, the em-
(iii) Where the employer has pre- ployer may rely on such earlier moni-
viously monitored for lead exposures, toring results to satisfy the require-
and the data were obtained within the ments of paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this sec-
past 12 months during work operations tion if the sampling and analytical
conducted under workplace conditions
methods meet the accuracy and con-
closely resembling the processes, type
fidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of
of material, control methods, work
this section.
practices, and environmental condi-
tions used and prevailing in the em- (5) Negative initial determination.
ployer’s current operations, the em- Where a determination, conducted
ployer may rely on such earlier moni- under paragraphs (d) (1), (2), and (3) of
toring results to satisfy the require- this section is made that no employee
ments of paragraphs (d)(3)(i) and (d)(6) is exposed to airborne concentrations
of this section if the sampling and ana- of lead at or above the action level the
lytical methods meet the accuracy and employer shall make a written record
confidence levels of paragraph (d)(10) of of such determination. The record shall
this section. include at least the information speci-
(iv) Where the employer has objec- fied in paragraph (d)(3)(i) of this sec-
tive data, demonstrating that a par- tion and shall also include the date of
ticular product or material containing determination, location within the
lead or a specific process, operation or worksite, and the name and social se-
activity involving lead cannot result in curity number of each employee mon-
employee exposure to lead at or above itored.
the action level during processing, use, (6) Frequency. (i) If the initial deter-
or handling, the employer may rely mination reveals employee exposure to
upon such data instead of imple- be below the action level further expo-
menting initial monitoring. sure determination need not be re-
(A) The employer shall establish and peated except as otherwise provided in
maintain an accurate record docu- paragraph (d)(7) of this section.
menting the nature and relevancy of (ii) If the initial determination or
objective data as specified in paragraph subsequent determination reveals em-
(n)(4) of this section, where used in as- ployee exposure to be at or above the
sessing employee exposure in lieu of action level but at or below the PEL
exposure monitoring. the employer shall perform monitoring
(B) Objective data, as described in in accordance with this paragraph at
paragraph (d)(3)(iv) of this section, is least every 6 months. The employer
84
shall continue monitoring at the re- at or above that level and a description
quired frequency until at least two of the corrective action taken or to be
consecutive measurements, taken at taken to reduce exposure to below that
least 7 days apart, are below the action level.
level at which time the employer may (9) Accuracy of measurement. The em-
discontinue monitoring for that employer shall use a method of moni-
ployee except as otherwise provided in toring and analysis which has an accu-
paragraph (d)(7) of this section. racy (to a confidence level of 95%) of
(iii) If the initial determination re- not less than plus or minus 25 percent
veals that employee exposure is above for airborne concentrations of lead
the PEL the employer shall perform equal to or greater than 30 μg/m3.
monitoring quarterly. The employer (e) Methods of compliance—(1) Engi-
shall continue monitoring at the re- neering and work practice controls. The
quired frequency until at least two employer shall implement engineering
consecutive measurements, taken at and work practice controls, including
least 7 days apart, are at or below the administrative controls, to reduce and
PEL but at or above the action level at maintain employee exposure to lead to
which time the employer shall repeat or below the permissible exposure limit
monitoring for that employee at the to the extent that such controls are
frequency specified in paragraph feasible. Wherever all feasible engi-
(d)(6)(ii) of this section, except as oth- neering and work practices controls
erwise provided in paragraph (d)(7) of that can be instituted are not suffi-
this section. The employer shall con- cient to reduce employee exposure to
tinue monitoring at the required fre- or below the permissible exposure limit
quency until at least two consecutive prescribed in paragraph (c) of this sec-
measurements, taken at least 7 days tion, the employer shall nonetheless
apart, are below the action level at use them to reduce employee exposure
which time the employer may dis-
to the lowest feasible level and shall
continue monitoring for that employee
supplement them by the use of res-
except as otherwise provided in para-
piratory protection that complies with
graph (d)(7) of this section.
the requirements of paragraph (f) of
(7) Additional exposure assessments.
this section.
Whenever there has been a change of
(2) Compliance program. (i) Prior to
equipment, process, control, personnel
commencement of the job each em-
or a new task has been initiated that
ployer shall establish and implement a
may result in additional employees
written compliance program to achieve
being exposed to lead at or above the
compliance with paragraph (c) of this
action level or may result in employees
section.
already exposed at or above the action
level being exposed above the PEL, the (ii) Written plans for these compli-
employer shall conduct additional ance programs shall include at least
monitoring in accordance with this the following:
paragraph. (A) A description of each activity in
(8) Employee notification. (i) The em- which lead is emitted; e.g. equipment
ployer must, as soon as possible but no used, material involved, controls in
later than 5 working days after the replace, crew size, employee job respon-
ceipt of the results of any monitoring sibilities, operating procedures and
performed under this section, notify maintenance practices;
each affected employee of these results (B) A description of the specific
either individually in writing or by means that will be employed to achieve
posting the results in an appropriate compliance and, where engineering
location that is accessible to employ- controls are required engineering plans
ees. and studies used to determine methods
(ii) Whenever the results indicate selected for controlling exposure to
that the representative employee expo- lead;
sure, without regard to respirators, is (C) A report of the technology consid-

at or above the PEL the employer shall ered in meeting the PEL;
include in the written notice a state- (D) Air monitoring data which docu-
ment that the employees exposure was ments the source of lead emissions;
85
(E) A detailed schedule for implemen- (5) The employer shall ensure that, to
tation of the program, including docu- the extent relevant, employees follow
mentation such as copies of purchase good work practices such as described
orders for equipment, construction in Appendix B of this section.
contracts, etc.; (f) Respiratory protection—(1) General.
(F) A work practice program which For employees who use respirators re-
includes items required under para- quired by this section, the employer
graphs (g), (h) and (i) of this section must provide each employee an appro-
and incorporates other relevant work priate respirator that complies with
practices such as those specified in the requirements of this paragraph.
paragraph (e)(5) of this section; Respirators must be used during:
(G) An administrative control sched- (i) Periods when an employee’s expo-
ule required by paragraph (e)(4) of this sure to lead exceeds the PEL.
section, if applicable; (ii) Work operations for which engi-
(H) A description of arrangements neering and work-practice controls are
made among contractors on multi-con- not sufficient to reduce employee expo-
tractor sites with respect to informing sures to or below the PEL.
affected employees of potential expo- (iii) Periods when an employee re-
sure to lead and with respect to respon- quests a respirator.
sibility for compliance with this sec- (iv) Periods when respirators are re-
tion as set-forth in § 1926.16. quired to provide interim protection of
(I) Other relevant information. employees while they perform the op-
(iii) The compliance program shall erations specified in paragraph (d)(2) of
provide for frequent and regular inspec- this section.
tions of job sites, materials, and equip- (2) Respirator program. (i) The em-
ment to be made by a competent per- ployer must implement a respiratory
son. protection program in accordance with
(iv) Written programs shall be sub- § 1910.134(b) through (d) (except
mitted upon request to any affected (d)(1)(iii)), and (f) through (m), which
employee or authorized employee rep- covers each employee required by this
resentatives, to the Assistant Sec- section to use a respirator.
retary and the Director, and shall be (ii) If an employee has breathing dif-
available at the worksite for examina- ficulty during fit testing or respirator
tion and copying by the Assistant Sec- use, the employer must provide the em-
retary and the Director. ployee with a medical examination in
(v) Written programs must be revised accordance with paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)
and updated at least annually to re- of this section to determine whether or
flect the current status of the program. not the employee can use a respirator
(3) Mechanical ventilation. When ven- while performing the required duty.
tilation is used to control lead expo- (3) Respirator selection. (i) Employers
sure, the employer shall evaluate the must:
mechanical performance of the system (A) Select, and provide to employees,
in controlling exposure as necessary to the appropriate respirators specified in
maintain its effectiveness. paragraph (d)(3)(i)(A) of 29 CFR
(4) Administrative controls. If adminis- 1910.134.
trative controls are used as a means of (B) Provide employees with a full
reducing employees TWA exposure to facepiece respirator instead of a half
lead, the employer shall establish and mask respirator for protection against
implement a job rotation schedule lead aerosols that may cause eye or
which includes: skin irritation at the use concentra-
(i) Name or identification number of tions.
each affected employee; (C) Provide HEPA filters for powered
(ii) Duration and exposure levels at and non-powered air-purifying res-
each job or work station where each af- pirators.
fected employee is located; and (ii) The employer must provide a
(iii) Any other information which powered air-purifying respirator when

may be useful in assessing the reli- an employee chooses to use such a res-
ability of administrative controls to pirator and it will provide adequate
reduce exposure to lead. protection to the employee.
86
(g) Protective work clothing and equip- of the potentially harmful effects of ex-
ment—(1) Provision and use. Where an posure to lead.
employee is exposed to lead above the (vii) The employer shall assure that
PEL without regard to the use of res- the containers of contaminated protec-
pirators, where employees are exposed tive clothing and equipment required
to lead compounds which may cause by paragraph (g)(2)(v) of this section
skin or eye irritation (e.g. lead arse- are labeled as follows:
nate, lead azide), and as interim pro-
Caution: Clothing contaminated with lead.
tection for employees performing tasks Do not remove dust by blowing or shaking.
as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this Dispose of lead contaminated wash water in
section, the employer shall provide at accordance with applicable local, state, or
no cost to the employee and assure federal regulations.
that the employee uses appropriate
(viii) The employer shall prohibit the
protective work clothing and equip-
removal of lead from protective cloth-
ment that prevents contamination of
ing or equipment by blowing, shaking,
the employee and the employee’s gar- or any other means which disperses
ments such as, but not limited to: lead into the air.
(i) Coveralls or similar full-body (h) Housekeeping—(1) All surfaces
work clothing; shall be maintained as free as prac-
(ii) Gloves, hats, and shoes or dispos- ticable of accumulations of lead.
able shoe coverlets; and (2) Clean-up of floors and other sur-
(iii) Face shields, vented goggles, or faces where lead accumulates shall
other appropriate protective equip- wherever possible, be cleaned by
ment which complies with § 1910.133 of vacuuming or other methods that min-
this chapter. imize the likelihood of lead becoming
(2) Cleaning and replacement. (i) The airborne.
employer shall provide the protective (3) Shoveling, dry or wet sweeping,
clothing required in paragraph (g)(1) of and brushing may be used only where
this section in a clean and dry condi- vacuuming or other equally effective
tion at least weekly, and daily to em- methods have been tried and found not
ployees whose exposure levels without to be effective.
regard to a respirator are over 200 μg/ (4) Where vacuuming methods are se-
m3 of lead as an 8-hour TWA. lected, the vacuums shall be equipped
(ii) The employer shall provide for with HEPA filters and used and
the cleaning, laundering, and disposal emptied in a manner which minimizes
of protective clothing and equipment the reentry of lead into the workplace.
required by paragraph (g)(1) of this sec- (5) Compressed air shall not be used
tion. to remove lead from any surface unless
(iii) The employer shall repair or re- the compressed air is used in conjunc-
place required protective clothing and tion with a ventilation system de-
equipment as needed to maintain their signed to capture the airborne dust cre-
effectiveness. ated by the compressed air.
(iv) The employer shall assure that (i) Hygiene facilities and practices. (1)
all protective clothing is removed at The employer shall assure that in areas
the completion of a work shift only in where employees are exposed to lead
change areas provided for that purpose above the PEL without regard to the
as prescribed in paragraph (i)(2) of this use of respirators, food or beverage is
section. not present or consumed, tobacco prod-
(v) The employer shall assure that ucts are not present or used, and cos-
contaminated protective clothing metics are not applied.
which is to be cleaned, laundered, or (2) Change areas. (i) The employer
disposed of, is placed in a closed con- shall provide clean change areas for
tainer in the change area which pre- employees whose airborne exposure to
vents dispersion of lead outside the lead is above the PEL, and as interim
container. protection for employees performing

(vi) The employer shall inform in tasks as specified in paragraph (d)(2) of
writing any person who cleans or laun- this section, without regard to the use
ders protective clothing or equipment of respirators.
87
(ii) The employer shall assure that occupationally exposed on any day to
change areas are equipped with sepa- lead at or above the action level. Ini-
rate storage facilities for protective tial medical surveillance consists of bi-
work clothing and equipment and for ological monitoring in the form of
street clothes which prevent cross-con- blood sampling and analysis for lead
tamination. and zinc protoporphyrin levels.
(iii) The employer shall assure that (ii) The employer shall institute a
employees do not leave the workplace medical surveillance program in ac-
wearing any protective clothing or cordance with paragraphs (j)(2) and
equipment that is required to be worn (j)(3) of this section for all employees
during the work shift. who are or may be exposed by the em-
(3) Showers. (i) The employer shall ployer at or above the action level for
provide shower facilities, where fea- more than 30 days in any consecutive
sible, for use by employees whose air- 12 months;
borne exposure to lead is above the (iii) The employer shall assure that
PEL. all medical examinations and proce-
(ii) The employer shall assure, where dures are performed by or under the su-
shower facilities are available, that pervision of a licensed physician.
employees shower at the end of the (iv) The employer shall make avail-
work shift and shall provide an ade- able the required medical surveillance
quate supply of cleansing agents and
including multiple physician review
towels for use by affected employees.
under paragraph (j)(3)(iii) without cost
(4) Eating facilities. (i) The employer
to employees and at a reasonable time
shall provide lunchroom facilities or
and place.
eating areas for employees whose air-
borne exposure to lead is above the (2) Biological monitoring—(i) Blood lead
PEL, without regard to the use of res- and ZPP level sampling and analysis.
pirators. The employer shall make available bio-
(ii) The employer shall assure that logical monitoring in the form of blood
lunchroom facilities or eating areas sampling and analysis for lead and zinc
are as free as practicable from lead protoporphyrin levels to each employee
contamination and are readily acces- covered under paragraphs (j)(1)(i) and
sible to employees. (ii) of this section on the following
(iii) The employer shall assure that schedule:
employees whose airborne exposure to (A) For each employee covered under
lead is above the PEL, without regard paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of this section, at
to the use of a respirator, wash their least every 2 months for the first 6
hands and face prior to eating, drink- months and every 6 months thereafter;
ing, smoking or applying cosmetics. (B) For each employee covered under
(iv) The employer shall assure that paragraphs (j)(1) (i) or (ii) of this sec-
employees do not enter lunchroom fa- tion whose last blood sampling and
cilities or eating areas with protective analysis indicated a blood lead level at
work clothing or equipment unless sur- or above 40 μg/dl, at least every two
face lead dust has been removed by months. This frequency shall continue
vacuuming, downdraft booth, or other until two consecutive blood samples
cleaning method that limits dispersion and analyses indicate a blood lead level
of lead dust. below 40 μg/dl; and
(5) Hand washing facilities. (i) The em- (C) For each employee who is re-
ployer shall provide adequate moved from exposure to lead due to an
handwashing facilities for use by em- elevated blood lead level at least
ployees exposed to lead in accordance monthly during the removal period.
with 29 CFR 1926.51(f). (ii) Follow-up blood sampling tests.
(ii) Where showers are not provided Whenever the results of a blood lead
the employer shall assure that employ- level test indicate that an employee’s
ees wash their hands and face at the blood lead level exceeds the numerical
end of the work-shift. criterion for medical removal under

(j) Medical surveillance—(1) General. (i) paragraph (k)(1)(i) of this section, the
The employer shall make available ini- employer shall provide a second (fol-
tial medical surveillance to employees low-up) blood sampling test within two
88
weeks after the employer receives the tion shall be determined by an exam-
results of the first blood sampling test. ining physician and, if requested by an
(iii) Accuracy of blood lead level sam- employee, shall include pregnancy
pling and analysis. Blood lead level testing or laboratory evaluation of
sampling and analysis provided pursu- male fertility. Medical examinations
ant to this section shall have an accu- made available pursuant to paragraph
racy (to a confidence level of 95 per- (j)(3)(i)(A) of this section shall include
cent) within plus or minus 15 percent the following elements:
or 6 μg/dl, whichever is greater, and (A) A detailed work history and a
shall be conducted by a laboratory ap- medical history, with particular atten-
proved by OSHA.
tion to past lead exposure (occupa-
(iv) Employee notification. (A) Within
tional and non-occupational), personal
five working days after the receipt of
biological monitoring results, the em- habits (smoking, hygiene), and past
ployer shall notify each employee in gastrointestinal, hematologic, renal,
writing of his or her blood lead level; cardiovascular, reproductive and neu-
and rological problems;
(B) The employer shall notify each (B) A thorough physical examination,
employee whose blood lead level ex- with particular attention to teeth,
ceeds 40 μg/dl that the standard re- gums, hematologic, gastrointestinal,
quires temporary medical removal renal, cardiovascular, and neurological
with Medical Removal Protection ben- systems. Pulmonary status should be
efits when an employee’s blood lead evaluated if respiratory protection will
level exceeds the numerical criterion be used;
for medical removal under paragraph (C) A blood pressure measurement;
(k)(1)(i) of this section. (D) A blood sample and analysis
(3) Medical examinations and consulta- which determines:
tions—(i) Frequency. The employer shall (1) Blood lead level;
make available medical examinations
(2) Hemoglobin and hematocrit deter-
and consultations to each employee
minations, red cell indices, and exam-
covered under paragraph (j)(1)(ii) of
this section on the following schedule: ination of peripheral smear mor-
(A) At least annually for each em- phology;
ployee for whom a blood sampling test (3) Zinc protoporphyrin;
conducted at any time during the pre- (4) Blood urea nitrogen; and,
ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead (5) Serum creatinine;
level at or above 40 μg/dl; (E) A routine urinalysis with micro-
(B) As soon as possible, upon notifi- scopic examination; and
cation by an employee either that the (F) Any laboratory or other test rel-
employee has developed signs or symp- evant to lead exposure which the exam-
toms commonly associated with lead ining physician deems necessary by
intoxication, that the employee desires sound medical practice.
medical advice concerning the effects (iii) Multiple physician review mecha-
of current or past exposure to lead on nism. (A) If the employer selects the
the employee’s ability to procreate a initial physician who conducts any
healthy child, that the employee is medical examination or consultation
pregnant, or that the employee has
provided to an employee under this sec-
demonstrated difficulty in breathing
tion, the employee may designate a
during a respirator fitting test or dur-
second physician:
ing use; and
(C) As medically appropriate for each (1) To review any findings, deter-
employee either removed from expo- minations or recommendations of the
sure to lead due to a risk of sustaining initial physician; and
material impairment to health, or oth- (2) To conduct such examinations,
erwise limited pursuant to a final med- consultations, and laboratory tests as
ical determination. the second physician deems necessary

(ii) Content. The content of medical to facilitate this review.
examinations made available pursuant (B) The employer shall promptly no-
to paragraph (j)(3)(i)(B)–(C) of this sec- tify an employee of the right to seek a
89
second medical opinion after each oc- (3) The employee’s exposure level or
casion that an initial physician con- anticipated exposure level to lead and
ducts a medical examination or con- to any other toxic substance (if appli-
sultation pursuant to this section. The cable);
employer may condition its participa- (4) A description of any personal pro-
tion in, and payment for, the multiple tective equipment used or to be used;
physician review mechanism upon the (5) Prior blood lead determinations;
employee doing the following within and
fifteen (15) days after receipt of the (6) All prior written medical opinions
foregoing notification, or receipt of the concerning the employee in the em-
initial physician’s written opinion, ployer’s possession or control.
whichever is later:
(B) The employer shall provide the
(1) The employee informing the em-
foregoing information to a second or
ployer that he or she intends to seek a
third physician conducting a medical
second medical opinion, and
(2) The employee initiating steps to examination or consultation under this
make an appointment with a second section upon request either by the sec-
physician. ond or third physician, or by the em-
(C) If the findings, determinations or ployee.
recommendations of the second physi- (v) Written medical opinions. (A) The
cian differ from those of the initial employer shall obtain and furnish the
physician, then the employer and the employee with a copy of a written med-
employee shall assure that efforts are ical opinion from each examining or
made for the two physicians to resolve consulting physician which contains
any disagreement. only the following information:
(D) If the two physicians have been (1) The physician’s opinion as to
unable to quickly resolve their dis- whether the employee has any detected
agreement, then the employer and the medical condition which would place
employee through their respective phy- the employee at increased risk of ma-
sicians shall designate a third physi- terial impairment of the employee’s
cian: health from exposure to lead;
(1) To review any findings, deter- (2) Any recommended special protec-
minations or recommendations of the tive measures to be provided to the em-
prior physicians; and ployee, or limitations to be placed
(2) To conduct such examinations, upon the employee’s exposure to lead;
consultations, laboratory tests and dis- (3) Any recommended limitation
cussions with the prior physicians as upon the employee’s use of respirators,
the third physician deems necessary to including a determination of whether
resolve the disagreement of the prior the employee can wear a powered air
physicians. purifying respirator if a physician de-
(E) The employer shall act consistent termines that the employee cannot
with the findings, determinations and wear a negative pressure respirator;
recommendations of the third physi- and
cian, unless the employer and the em-
(4) The results of the blood lead de-
ployee reach an agreement which is
terminations.
otherwise consistent with the rec-
ommendations of at least one of the (B) The employer shall instruct each
three physicians. examining and consulting physician to:
(iv) Information provided to examining (1) Not reveal either in the written
and consulting physicians. (A) The em- opinion or orally, or in any other
ployer shall provide an initial physi- means of communication with the em-
cian conducting a medical examination ployer, findings, including laboratory
or consultation under this section with results, or diagnoses unrelated to an
the following information: employee’s occupational exposure to
(1) A copy of this regulation for lead lead; and
including all Appendices; (2) Advise the employee of any med-

(2) A description of the affected em- ical condition, occupational or non-
ployee’s duties as they relate to the occupational, which dictates further
employee’s exposure; medical examination or treatment.
90
(vi) Alternate physician determination ant to the medical surveillance provi-

mechanisms. The employer and an em- sions of this section.
ployee or authorized employee rep- (C) Where a final medical determina-
resentative may agree upon the use of tion results in any recommended spe-
any alternate physician determination cial protective measures for an em-
mechanism in lieu of the multiple phy- ployee, or limitations on an employee’s
sician review mechanism provided by exposure to lead, the employer shall
paragraph (j)(3)(iii) of this section so implement and act consistent with the
long as the alternate mechanism is as recommendation.
expeditious and protective as the re- (iii) Return of the employee to former
quirements contained in this para- job status. (A) The employer shall re-
graph. turn an employee to his or her former
(4) Chelation. (i) The employer shall job status:
assure that any person whom he re- (1) For an employee removed due to a
tains, employs, supervises or controls blood lead level at or above 50 μg/dl
does not engage in prophylactic chela- when two consecutive blood sampling
tion of any employee at any time. tests indicate that the employee’s
(ii) If therapeutic or diagnostic che- blood lead level is at or below 40 μg/dl;
lation is to be performed by any person (2) For an employee removed due to a
in paragraph (j)(4)(i) of this section, final medical determination, when a
the employer shall assure that it be subsequent final medical determina-
done under the supervision of a lition results in a medical finding, deter-
censed physician in a clinical setting mination, or opinion that the employee
with thorough and appropriate medical no longer has a detected medical condi-
monitoring and that the employee is tion which places the employee at in-
notified in writing prior to its occur- creased risk of material impairment to
rence. health from exposure to lead.
(k) Medical removal protection—(1) (B) For the purposes of this section,
Temporary medical removal and return of the requirement that an employer re-
an employee—(i) Temporary removal due turn an employee to his or her former
to elevated blood lead level. The em- job status is not intended to expand
ployer shall remove an employee from upon or restrict any rights an em-
work having an exposure to lead at or ployee has or would have had, absent
above the action level on each occasion temporary medical removal, to a spe-
that a periodic and a follow-up blood cific job classification or position
sampling test conducted pursuant to under the terms of a collective bar-
this section indicate that the employ- gaining agreement.
ee’s blood lead level is at or above 50 (iv) Removal of other employee special
μg/dl; and, protective measure or limitations. The
(ii) Temporary removal due to a final employer shall remove any limitations
medical determination. (A) The employer placed on an employee or end any spe-
shall remove an employee from work cial protective measures provided to an
having an exposure to lead at or above employee pursuant to a final medical
the action level on each occasion that determination when a subsequent final
a final medical determination results medical determination indicates that
in a medical finding, determination, or the limitations or special protective
opinion that the employee has a de- measures are no longer necessary.
tected medical condition which places (v) Employer options pending a final
the employee at increased risk of ma- medical determination. Where the mul-
terial impairment to health from expo- tiple physician review mechanism, or
sure to lead. alternate medical determination mech-
(B) For the purposes of this section, anism used pursuant to the medical
the phrase final medical determination surveillance provisions of this section,
means the written medical opinion on has not yet resulted in a final medical
the employees’ health status by the ex- determination with respect to an em-
amining physician or, where relevant, ployee, the employer shall act as fol-
the outcome of the multiple physician lows:
review mechanism or alternate medical (A) Removal. The employer may re-
determination mechanism used pursu- move the employee from exposure to
91
lead, provide special protective meas- protection benefits upon the employ-
ures to the employee, or place limita- ee’s participation in follow-up medical
tions upon the employee, consistent surveillance made available pursuant
with the medical findings, determina- to this section.
tions, or recommendations of any of (iv) Workers’ compensation claims. If a
the physicians who have reviewed the removed employee files a claim for
employee’s health status. workers’ compensation payments for a
(B) Return. The employer may return lead-related disability, then the em-
the employee to his or her former job ployer shall continue to provide med-
status, end any special protective ical removal protection benefits pend-
measures provided to the employee, ing disposition of the claim. To the ex-
and remove any limitations placed tent that an award is made to the em-
upon the employee, consistent with the ployee for earnings lost during the pe-
medical findings, determinations, or riod of removal, the employer’s med-
recommendations of any of the physi- ical removal protection obligation
cians who have reviewed the employ- shall be reduced by such amount. The
ee’s health status, with two exceptions. employer shall receive no credit for
(1) If the initial removal, special pro- workers’ compensation payments re-
tection, or limitation of the employee ceived by the employee for treatment-
resulted from a final medical deter- related expenses.
mination which differed from the find- (v) Other credits. The employer’s obli-
ings, determinations, or recommenda- gation to provide medical removal pro-
tions of the initial physician or; tection benefits to a removed employee
(2) If the employee has been on re- shall be reduced to the extent that the
moval status for the preceding eight- employee receives compensation for
een months due to an elevated blood earnings lost during the period of re-
lead level, then the employer shall moval either from a publicly or em-
await a final medical determination. ployer-funded compensation program,
(2) Medical removal protection bene- or receives income from employment
fits—(i) Provision of medical removal pro- with another employer made possible
tection benefits. The employer shall pro- by virtue of the employee’s removal.
vide an employee up to eighteen (18) (vi) Voluntary removal or restriction of
months of medical removal protection an employee. Where an employer, al-
benefits on each occasion that an em- though not required by this section to
ployee is removed from exposure to do so, removes an employee from expo-
lead or otherwise limited pursuant to sure to lead or otherwise places limita-
this section. tions on an employee due to the effects
(ii) Definition of medical removal proof lead exposure on the employee’s
tection benefits. For the purposes of this medical condition, the employer shall
section, the requirement that an em- provide medical removal protection
ployer provide medical removal protec- benefits to the employee equal to that
tion benefits means that, as long as the required by paragraph (k)(2) (i) and (ii)
job the employee was removed from of this section.
continues, the employer shall maintain (l) Employee information and training—
the total normal earnings, seniority (1) General. (i) The employer shall com-
and other employment rights and bene- municate information concerning lead
fits of an employee, including the em- hazards according to the requirements
ployee’s right to his or her former job of OSHA’s Hazard Communication
status as though the employee had not Standard for the construction indus-
been medically removed from the em- try, 29 CFR 1926.59, including but not
ployee’s job or otherwise medically limited to the requirements concerning
limited. warning signs and labels, material safe-
(iii) Follow-up medical surveillance ty data sheets (MSDS), and employee
during the period of employee removal or information and training. In addition,
limitation. During the period of time employers shall comply with the fol-
that an employee is medically removed lowing requirements:

from his or her job or otherwise medi- (ii) The employer shall train each
cally limited, the employer may condi- employee who is subject to exposure to
tion the provision of medical removal lead at or above the action level on any
92
day, or who is subject to exposure to ployees a copy of this standard and its
lead compounds which may cause skin appendices.
or eye irritation (e.g., lead arsenate, (ii) The employer shall provide, upon
lead azide), in accordance with the re- request, all materials relating to the
quirements of this section. The em- employee information and training
ployer shall institute a training pro- program to affected employees and
gram and ensure employee participa- their designated representatives, and
tion in the program. to the Assistant Secretary and the Di-
(iii) The employer shall provide the rector.
training program as initial training (m) Signs—(1) General. (i) The em-
prior to the time of job assignment or ployer may use signs required by other
prior to the start up date for this re- statutes, regulations or ordinances in
quirement, whichever comes last. addition to, or in combination with,
(iv) The employer shall also provide signs required by this paragraph.
the training program at least annually (ii) The employer shall assure that no
for each employee who is subject to statement appears on or near any sign
lead exposure at or above the action required by this paragraph which con-
level on any day. tradicts or detracts from the meaning
(2) Training program. The employer of the required sign.
shall assure that each employee is (2) Signs. (i) The employer shall post
trained in the following: the following warning signs in each
(i) The content of this standard and work area where an employees expo-
its appendices; sure to lead is above the PEL.
(ii) The specific nature of the oper- WARNING
ations which could result in exposure LEAD WORK AREA
to lead above the action level; POISON
(iii) The purpose, proper selection, NO SMOKING OR EATING
fitting, use, and limitations of res- (ii) The employer shall assure that
pirators; signs required by this paragraph are il-
(iv) The purpose and a description of luminated and cleaned as necessary so
the medical surveillance program, and that the legend is readily visible.
the medical removal protection pro- (n) Recordkeeping—(1) Exposure assess-
gram including information concerning ment. (i) The employer shall establish
the adverse health effects associated and maintain an accurate record of all
with excessive exposure to lead (with monitoring and other data used in con-
particular attention to the adverse re- ducting employee exposure assess-
productive effects on both males and ments as required in paragraph (d) of
females and hazards to the fetus and this section.
additional precautions for employees (ii) Exposure monitoring records
who are pregnant); shall include:
(v) The engineering controls and (A) The date(s), number, duration, lo-
work practices associated with the em- cation and results of each of the sam-
ployee’s job assignment including ples taken if any, including a descrip-
training of employees to follow rel- tion of the sampling procedure used to
evant good work practices described in determine representative employee ex-
Appendix B of this section; posure where applicable;
(vi) The contents of any compliance (B) A description of the sampling and
plan in effect; analytical methods used and evidence
(vii) Instructions to employees that of their accuracy;
chelating agents should not routinely (C) The type of respiratory protective
be used to remove lead from their bod- devices worn, if any;
ies and should not be used at all except (D) Name, social security number,
under the direction of a licensed physi- and job classification of the employee
cian; and monitored and of all other employees
(viii) The employee’s right of access whose exposure the measurement is in-
to records under 29 CFR 1910.20. tended to represent; and

(3) Access to information and training (E) The environmental variables that
materials. (i) The employer shall make could affect the measurement of em-
readily available to all affected employee exposure.
93
(iii) The employer shall maintain reason for the removal was an elevated
monitoring and other exposure assess- blood lead level.
ment records in accordance with the (iii) The employer shall maintain
provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33. each medical removal record for at
(2) Medical surveillance. (i) The em- least the duration of an employee’s em-
ployer shall establish and maintain an ployment.
accurate record for each employee sub- (4) Objective data for exemption from re-
ject to medical surveillance as required quirement for initial monitoring. (i) For
by paragraph (j) of this section. purposes of this section, objective data
(ii) This record shall include: are information demonstrating that a
(A) The name, social security num- particular product or material con-
ber, and description of the duties of the taining lead or a specific process, oper-
employee; ation, or activity involving lead cannot
(B) A copy of the physician’s written release dust or fumes in concentrations
opinions; at or above the action level under any
(C) Results of any airborne exposure expected conditions of use. Objective
monitoring done on or for that em- data can be obtained from an industry-
ployee and provided to the physician; wide study or from laboratory product
and test results from manufacturers of lead
(D) Any employee medical com- containing products or materials. The
plaints related to exposure to lead. data the employer uses from an indus-
(iii) The employer shall keep, or as- try-wide survey must be obtained
sure that the examining physician under workplace conditions closely re-
keeps, the following medical records: sembling the processes, types of mate-
(A) A copy of the medical examina- rial, control methods, work practices
tion results including medical and and environmental conditions in the
work history required under paragraph employer’s current operations.
(j) of this section; (ii) The employer shall maintain the
(B) A description of the laboratory record of the objective data relied upon
procedures and a copy of any standards for at least 30 years.
or guidelines used to interpret the test (5) Availability. The employer shall
results or references to that informa- make available upon request all
tion; records required to be maintained by
(C) A copy of the results of biological paragraph (n) of this section to affected
monitoring. employees, former employees, and
(iv) The employer shall maintain or their designated representatives, and
assure that the physician maintains to the Assistant Secretary and the Di-
medical records in accordance with the rector for examination and copying.
provisions of 29 CFR 1910.33. (6) Transfer of records. (i) Whenever
(3) Medical removals. (i) The employer the employer ceases to do business, the
shall establish and maintain an accu- successor employer shall receive and
rate record for each employee removed retain all records required to be main-
from current exposure to lead pursuant tained by paragraph (n) of this section.
to paragraph (k) of this section. (ii) Whenever the employer ceases to
(ii) Each record shall include: do business and there is no successor
(A) The name and social security employer to receive and retain the
number of the employee; records required to be maintained by
(B) The date of each occasion that this section for the prescribed period,
the employee was removed from cur- these records shall be transmitted to
rent exposure to lead as well as the the Director.
corresponding date on which the em- (iii) At the expiration of the reten-
ployee was returned to his or her tion period for the records required to
former job status; be maintained by this section, the em-
(C) A brief explanation of how each ployer shall notify the Director at
removal was or is being accomplished; least 3 months prior to the disposal of

and such records and shall transmit those
(D) A statement with respect to each records to the Director if requested
removal indicating whether or not the within the period.
94
(iv) The employer shall also comply not apply to other organic lead com-
with any additional requirements in- pounds.
volving transfer of records set forth in C. Uses: Exposure to lead occurs in
29 CFR 1910.33(h). several different occupations in the
(o) Observation of monitoring—(1) Em- construction industry, including demo-
ployee observation. The employer shall lition or salvage of structures where
provide affected employees or their lead or lead-containing materials are
designated representatives an oppor- present; removal or encapsulation of
tunity to observe any monitoring of lead-containing materials, new con-
employee exposure to lead conducted struction, alteration, repair, or renova-
pursuant to paragraph (d) of this section of structures that contain lead or
tion. materials containing lead; installation
(2) Observation procedures. (i) When- of products containing lead. In addi-
ever observation of the monitoring of tion, there are construction related ac-
employee exposure to lead requires tivities where exposure to lead may
entry into an area where the use of res- occur, including transportation, dis-
pirators, protective clothing or equip- posal, storage, or containment of lead
ment is required, the employer shall or materials containing lead on con-
provide the observer with and assure struction sites, and maintenance oper-
the use of such respirators, clothing ations associated with construction ac-
and equipment, and shall require the tivities.
observer to comply with all other ap- D. Permissible exposure: The permis-
sible exposure limit (PEL) set by the
plicable safety and health procedures.
standard is 50 micrograms of lead per
(ii) Without interfering with the
cubic meter of air (50 μg/m3), averaged
monitoring, observers shall be entitled
over an 8-hour workday.
to: E. Action level: The interim final
(A) Receive an explanation of the standard establishes an action level of
measurement procedures; 30 micrograms of lead per cubic meter
(B) Observe all steps related to the of air (30 μg/m3), averaged over an 8-
monitoring of lead performed at the hour workday. The action level trig-
place of exposure; and gers several ancillary provisions of the
(C) Record the results obtained or re- standard such as exposure monitoring,
ceive copies of the results when re- medical surveillance, and training.
turned by the laboratory.
(p) Appendices. The information con- II. Health Hazard Data
tained in the appendices to this section A. Ways in which lead enters your
is not intended by itself, to create any body. When absorbed into your body in
additional obligations not otherwise certain doses, lead is a toxic substance.
imposed by this standard nor detract The object of the lead standard is to
from any existing obligation. prevent absorption of harmful quan-
APPENDIX A TO § 1926.62—SUBSTANCE tities of lead. The standard is intended
DATA SHEET FOR OCCUPATIONAL EXPO- to protect you not only from the imme-
SURE TO LEAD
diate toxic effects of lead, but also
from the serious toxic effects that may
I. Substance Identification not become apparent until years of ex-
posure have passed. Lead can be ab-
A. Substance: Pure lead (Pb) is a sorbed into your body by inhalation
heavy metal at room temperature and (breathing) and ingestion (eating).
pressure and is a basic chemical ele- Lead (except for certain organic lead
ment. It can combine with various compounds not covered by the stand-
other substances to form numerous ard, such as tetraethyl lead) is not ab-
lead compounds. sorbed through your skin. When lead is
B. Compounds covered by the standard: scattered in the air as a dust, fume res-
The word lead when used in this in- piratory tract. Inhalation of airborne
terim final standard means elemental lead is generally the most important
lead, all inorganic lead compounds and source of occupational lead absorption.
a class of organic lead compounds You can also absorb lead through your
called lead soaps. This standard does digestive system if lead gets into your
95
mouth and is swallowed. If you handle bility, muscle and joint pain or sore-
food, cigarettes, chewing tobacco, or ness, fine tremors, numbness, dizziness,
make-up which have lead on them or hyperactivity and colic. In lead colic
handle them with hands contaminated there may be severe abdominal pain.
with lead, this will contribute to inges- Damage to the central nervous system
tion. A significant portion of the lead in general and the brain
that you inhale or ingest gets into your (encephalopathy) in particular is one of
blood stream. Once in your blood the most severe forms of lead poi-
stream, lead is circulated throughout soning. The most severe, often fatal,
your body and stored in various organs form of encephalopathy may be pre-
and body tissues. Some of this lead is ceded by vomiting, a feeling of dullness
quickly filtered out of your body and progressing to drowsiness and stupor,
excreted, but some remains in the poor memory, restlessness, irritability,
blood and other tissues. As exposure to tremor, and convulsions. It may arise
lead continues, the amount stored in suddenly with the onset of seizures, fol-
your body will increase if you are ab- lowed by coma, and death. There is a
sorbing more lead than your body is ex- tendency for muscular weakness to de-
creting. Even though you may not be velop at the same time. This weakness
aware of any immediate symptoms of may progress to paralysis often ob-
disease, this lead stored in your tissues served as a characteristic ‘‘wrist drop’’
can be slowly causing irreversible dam- or ‘‘foot drop’’ and is a manifestation
age, first to individual cells, then to
of a disease to the nervous system
your organs and whole body systems.
called peripheral neuropathy. Chronic
B. Effects of overexposure to lead—(1)
overexposure to lead also results in
Short term (acute) overexposure. Lead is
kidney disease with few, if any, symp-
a potent, systemic poison that serves
toms appearing until extensive and
no known useful function once ab-
sorbed by your body. Taken in large most likely permanent kidney damage
enough doses, lead can kill you in a has occurred. Routine laboratory tests
matter of days. A condition affecting reveal the presence of this kidney dis-
the brain called acute encephalopathy ease only after about two-thirds of kid-
may arise which develops quickly to ney function is lost. When overt symp-
seizures, coma, and death from cardio- toms of urinary dysfunction arise, it is
respiratory arrest. A short term dose of often too late to correct or prevent
lead can lead to acute encephalopathy. worsening conditions, and progression
Short term occupational exposures of to kidney dialysis or death is possible.
this magnitude are highly unusual, but Chronic overexposure to lead impairs
not impossible. Similar forms of the reproductive systems of both men
encephalopathy may, however, arise and women. Overexposure to lead may
from extended, chronic exposure to result in decreased sex drive, impo-
lower doses of lead. There is no sharp tence and sterility in men. Lead can
dividing line between rapidly devel- alter the structure of sperm cells rais-
oping acute effects of lead, and chronic ing the risk of birth defects. There is
effects which take longer to acquire. evidence of miscarriage and stillbirth
Lead adversely affects numerous body in women whose husbands were exposed
systems, and causes forms of health to lead or who were exposed to lead
impairment and disease which arise themselves. Lead exposure also may re-
after periods of exposure as short as sult in decreased fertility, and abnor-
days or as long as several years. mal menstrual cycles in women. The
(2) Long-term (chronic) overexposure. course of pregnancy may be adversely
Chronic overexposure to lead may re- affected by exposure to lead since lead
sult in severe damage to your blood- crosses the placental barrier and poses
forming, nervous, urinary and repro- risks to developing fetuses. Children
ductive systems. Some common symp- born of parents either one of whom
toms of chronic overexposure include were exposed to excess lead levels are
loss of appetite, metallic taste in the more likely to have birth defects, men-
mouth, anxiety, constipation, nausea, tal retardation, behavioral disorders or
pallor, excessive tiredness, weakness, die during the first year of childhood.
insomnia, headache, nervous irrita- Overexposure to lead also disrupts the
96
blood-forming system resulting in de- in a given person will cause a par-

creased hemoglobin (the substance in ticular effect. Studies have associated
the blood that carries oxygen to the fatal encephalopathy with BLLs as low
cells) and ultimately anemia. Anemia as 150 μg/dl. Other studies have shown
is characterized by weakness, pallor other forms of diseases in some work-
and fatigability as a result of decreased ers with BLLs well below 80 μg/dl. Your
oxygen carrying capacity in the blood. BLL is a crucial indicator of the risks
(3) Health protection goals of the stand- to your health, but one other factor is
ard. Prevention of adverse health ef- also extremely important. This factor
fects for most workers from exposure is the length of time you have had ele-
to lead throughout a working lifetime vated BLLs. The longer you have an
requires that a worker’s blood lead elevated BLL, the greater the risk that
level (BLL, also expressed as PbB) be large quantities of lead are being
maintained at or below forty gradually stored in your organs and
micrograms per deciliter of whole tissues (body burden). The greater your
blood (40 μg/dl). The blood lead levels of overall body burden, the greater the
workers (both male and female work- chances of substantial permanent dam-
ers) who intend to have children should age. The best way to prevent all forms
be maintained below 30 μg/dl to mini- of lead-related impairments and dis-
mize adverse reproductive health ef- eases—both short term and long term—
fects to the parents and to the devel- is to maintain your BLL below 40 μg/dl.
oping fetus. The measurement of your The provisions of the standard are de-
blood lead level (BLL) is the most use- signed with this end in mind.
ful indicator of the amount of lead Your employer has prime responsi-
being absorbed by your body. Blood bility to assure that the provisions of
lead levels are most often reported in the standard are complied with both by
units of milligrams (mg) or the company and by individual work-
micrograms (μg) of lead (1 mg=1000 μg) ers. You, as a worker, however, also
per 100 grams (100g), 100 milliliters (100 have a responsibility to assist your em-
ml) or deciliter (dl) of blood. These ployer in complying with the standard.
three units are essentially the same. You can play a key role in protecting
Sometime BLLs are expressed in the your own health by learning about the
form of mg% or μg%. This is a short- lead hazards and their control, learning
hand notation for 100g, 100 ml, or dl. what the standard requires, following
(References to BLL measurements in the standard where it governs your own
this standard are expressed in the form actions, and seeing that your employer
of μg/dl.) complies with provisions governing his
BLL measurements show the amount or her actions.
of lead circulating in your blood (4) Reporting signs and symptoms of
stream, but do not give any informa- health problems. You should imme-
tion about the amount of lead stored in diately notify your employer if you de-
your various tissues. BLL measure- velop signs or symptoms associated
ments merely show current absorption with lead poisoning or if you desire
of lead, not the effect that lead is hav- medical advice concerning the effects
ing on your body or the effects that of current or past exposure to lead or
past lead exposure may have already your ability to have a healthy child.
caused. Past research into lead-related You should also notify your employer
diseases, however, has focused heavily if you have difficulty breathing during
on associations between BLLs and var- a respirator fit test or while wearing a
ious diseases. As a result, your BLL is respirator. In each of these cases, your
an important indicator of the likeli- employer must make available to you
hood that you will gradually acquire a appropriate medical examinations or
lead-related health impairment or dis- consultations. These must be provided
ease. at no cost to you and at a reasonable
Once your blood lead level climbs time and place. The standard contains
above 40 μg/dl, your risk of disease in- a procedure whereby you can obtain a
creases. There is a wide variability of second opinion by a physician of your
individual response to lead, thus it is choice if your employer selected the
difficult to say that a particular BLL initial physician.
97
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.62—EMPLOYEE available, the employer need proceed

STANDARD SUMMARY no further on employee exposure as-
sessment until such time that condi-
This appendix summarizes key provi-
sions of the interim final standard for tions have changed and the determina-
lead in construction that you as a tion is no longer valid.
worker should become familiar with. Objective data may be compiled from
various sources, e.g., insurance compa-
I. Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL)— nies and trade associations and infor-
Paragraph (C) mation from suppliers or exposure data
The standard sets a permissible expo- collected from similar operations. Ob-
sure limit (PEL) of 50 micrograms of jective data may also comprise pre-
lead per cubic meter of air (50 μg/m3), viously-collected sampling data includ-
averaged over an 8-hour workday which ing area monitoring. If it cannot be de-
is referred to as a time-weighted aver- termined through using objective data
age (TWA). This is the highest level of that worker exposure is less than the
lead in air to which you may be per- action level, your employer must con-
missibly exposed over an 8-hour work- duct monitoring or must rely on rel-
day. However, since this is an 8-hour evant previous personal sampling, if
average, short exposures above the available. Where monitoring is re-
PEL are permitted so long as for each quired for the initial determination, it
8-hour work day your average exposure may be limited to a representative
does not exceed this level. This interim number of employees who are reason-
final standard, however, takes into ac- ably expected to have the highest expo-
count the fact that your daily exposure sure levels. If your employer has con-
to lead can extend beyond a typical 8- ducted appropriate air sampling for
hour workday as the result of overtime lead in the past 12 months, he or she
or other alterations in your work may use these results, provided they
schedule. To deal with this situation, are applicable to the same employee
the standard contains a formula which tasks and exposure conditions and
reduces your permissible exposure meet the requirements for accuracy as
when you are exposed more than 8 specified in the standard. As with ob-
hours. For example, if you are exposed jective data, if such results are relied
to lead for 10 hours a day, the max- upon for the initial determination,
imum permitted average exposure
your employer must establish and
would be 40 μg/m3.
maintain a record as to the relevancy
II. Exposure Assessment—Paragraph (D) of such data to current job conditions.
If there have been any employee
If lead is present in your workplace complaints of symptoms which may be
in any quantity, your employer is re- attributable to exposure to lead or if
quired to make an initial determina- there is any other information or ob-
tion of whether any employee’s expo-
servations which would indicate em-
sure to lead exceeds the action level (30
ployee exposure to lead, this must also
μg/m3 averaged over an 8-hour day).
be considered as part of the initial de-
Employee exposure is that exposure
termination.
which would occur if the employee
were not using a respirator. This ini- If this initial determination shows
tial determination requires your em- that a reasonable possibility exists
ployer to monitor workers’ exposures that any employee may be exposed,
unless he or she has objective data without regard to respirators, over the
which can demonstrate conclusively action level, your employer must set
that no employee will be exposed to up an air monitoring program to deter-
lead in excess of the action level. mine the exposure level representative
Where objective data is used in lieu of of each employee exposed to lead at
actual monitoring the employer must your workplace. In carrying out this
establish and maintain an accurate air monitoring program, your employer

record, documenting its relevancy in is not required to monitor the exposure
assessing exposure levels for current of every employee, but he or she must
job conditions. If such objective data is monitor a representative number of
98
employees and job types. Enough sam- tion level. However, whenever there is
pling must be done to enable each em- a change of equipment, process, con-
ployee’s exposure level to be reason- trol, or personnel or a new type of job
ably represent full shift exposure. In is added at your workplace which may
addition, these air samples must be result in new or additional exposure to
taken under conditions which rep- lead, your employer must perform ad-
resent each employee’s regular, daily ditional monitoring.
exposure to lead. Sampling performed
in the past 12 months may be used to III. Methods of Compliance—Paragraph
determine exposures above the action (E)
level if such sampling was conducted
during work activities essentially simi- Your employer is required to assure
lar to present work conditions. that no employee is exposed to lead in
The standard lists certain tasks excess of the PEL as an 8-hour TWA.
which may likely result in exposures to The interim final standard for lead in
lead in excess of the PEL and, in some construction requires employers to in-
cases, exposures in excess of 50 times stitute engineering and work practice
the PEL. If you are performing any of controls including administrative con-
these tasks, your employer must pro- trols to the extent feasible to reduce
vide you with appropriate respiratory employee exposure to lead. Where such
protection, protective clothing and controls are feasible but not adequate
equipment, change areas, hand washing to reduce exposures below the PEL
facilities, biological monitoring, and they must be used nonetheless to re-
training until such time that an expo- duce exposures to the lowest level that
sure assessment is conducted which can be accomplished by these means
demonstrates that your exposure level and then supplemented with appro-
is below the PEL. priate respiratory protection.
If you are exposed to lead and air Your employer is required to develop
sampling is performed, your employer and implement a written compliance
is required to notify you in writing program prior to the commencement of
within 5 working days of the air moni- any job where employee exposures may
toring results which represent your ex- reach the PEL as an 8-hour TWA. The
posure. If the results indicate that interim final standard identifies the
your exposure exceeds the PEL (with- various elements that must be included
out regard to your use of a respirator), in the plan. For example, employers
then your employer must also notify are required to include a description of
you of this in writing, and provide you operations in which lead is emitted, de-
with a description of the corrective ac- tailing other relevant information
tion that has been taken or will be about the operation such as the type of
taken to reduce your exposure. equipment used, the type of material
Your exposure must be rechecked by involved, employee job responsibilities,
monitoring, at least every six months operating procedures and maintenance
if your exposure is at or over the ac- practices. In addition, your employer’s
tion level but below the PEL. Your em- compliance plan must specify the
ployer may discontinue monitoring for means that will be used to achieve
you if 2 consecutive measurements, compliance and, where engineering
taken at least 7 days apart, are at or controls are required, include any engi-
below the action level. Air monitoring neering plans or studies that have been
must be repeated every 3 months if you used to select the control methods. If
are exposed over the PEL. Your em- administrative controls involving job
ployer must continue monitoring for rotation are used to reduce employee
you at this frequency until 2 consecu- exposure to lead, the job rotation
tive measurements, taken at least 7 schedule must be included in the com-
days apart, are below the PEL but pliance plan. The plan must also detail
above the action level, at which time the type of protective clothing and
your employer must repeat monitoring equipment, including respirators,

of your exposure every six months and housekeeping and hygiene practices
may discontinue monitoring only after that will be used to protect you from
your exposure drops to or below the ac- the adverse effects of exposure to lead.
99
The written compliance program ister to clean the air, and a power
must be made available, upon request, source that continuously blows filtered
to affected employees and their des- air into your breathing zone. Your em-
ignated representatives, the Assistant ployer might make a PAPR available
Secretary and the Director. to you to ease the burden of having to
Finally, the plan must be reviewed wear a respirator for long periods of
and updated at least every 6 months to time. The standard provides that you
assure it reflects the current status in can obtain a PAPR upon request.
exposure control. Your employer must also start a Res-
piratory Protection Program. This pro-
IV. Respiratory Protection—Paragraph gram must include written procedures
(F) for the proper selection, use, cleaning,
Your employer is required to provide storage, and maintenance of res-
and assure your use of respirators when pirators.
your exposure to lead is not controlled Your employer must ensure that
below the PEL by other means. The your respirator facepiece fits properly.
employer must pay the cost of the res- Proper fit of a respirator facepiece is
pirator. Whenever you request one, critical to your protection from air-
your employer is also required to pro- borne lead. Obtaining a proper fit on
vide you a respirator even if your air each employee may require your em-
exposure level is not above the PEL. ployer to make available several dif-
You might desire a respirator when, for ferent types of respirator masks. To
example, you have received medical ad- ensure that your respirator fits prop-
vice that your lead absorption should erly and that facepiece leakage is mini-
be decreased. Or, you may intend to mal, your employer must give you ei-
have children in the near future, and ther a qualitative or quantitative fit
want to reduce the level of lead in your test as specified in Appendix A of the
body to minimize adverse reproductive Respiratory Protection standard lo-
effects. While respirators are the least cated at 29 CFR 1910.134.
satisfactory means of controlling your You must also receive from your em-
exposure, they are capable of providing ployer proper training in the use of res-
significant protection if properly cho- pirators. Your employer is required to
sen, fitted, worn, cleaned, maintained, teach you how to wear a respirator, to
and replaced when they stop providing know why it is needed, and to under-
adequate protection. stand its limitations.
Your employer is required to select The standard provides that if your
respirators from the types listed in respirator uses filter elements, you
Table I of the Respiratory Protection must be given an opportunity to
section of the standard (§ 1926.62 (f)). change the filter elements whenever an
Any respirator chosen must be ap- increase in breathing resistance is de-
proved by the National Institute for tected. You also must be permitted to
Occupational Safety and Health periodically leave your work area to
(NIOSH) under the provisions of 42 CFR wash your face and respirator facepiece
part 84. This respirator selection table whenever necessary to prevent skin ir-
will enable your employer to choose a ritation. If you ever have difficulty in
type of respirator that will give you a breathing during a fit test or while
proper amount of protection based on using a respirator, your employer must
your airborne lead exposure. Your em- make a medical examination available
ployer may select a type of respirator to you to determine whether you can
that provides greater protection than safely wear a respirator. The result of
that required by the standard; that is, this examination may be to give you a
one recommended for a higher con- positive pressure respirator (which re-
centration of lead than is present in duces breathing resistance) or to pro-
your workplace. For example, a pow- vide alternative means of protection.
ered air-purifying respirator (PAPR) is
V. Protective Work Clothing and

much more protective than a typical
Equipment—Paragraph (G)
negative pressure respirator, and may
also be more comfortable to wear. A If you are exposed to lead above the
PAPR has a filter, cartridge, or can- PEL as an 8-hour TWA, without regard
100
to your use of a respirator, or if you 5. Wash hands and face.

are exposed to lead compounds such as Workers should follow these proce-
lead arsenate or lead azide which can dures upon finishing work for the day
cause skin and eye irritation, your em- (in addition to procedures described
ployer must provide you with protec- above):
tive work clothing and equipment ap- 1. Where applicable, place disposal
propriate for the hazard. If work cloth- coveralls and shoe covers with the
ing is provided, it must be provided in abatement waste;
a clean and dry condition at least 2. Contaminated clothing which is to
weekly, and daily if your airborne ex- be cleaned, laundered or disposed of
posure to lead is greater than 200 μg/m3. must be placed in closed containers in
Appropriate protective work clothing the change room.
and equipment can include coveralls or 3. Clean protective gear, including
similar full-body work clothing, gloves, respirators, according to standard pro-
hats, shoes or disposable shoe cover- cedures;
lets, and face shields or vented goggles. 4. Wash hands and face again. If
Your employer is required to provide showers are available, take a shower
all such equipment at no cost to you. and wash hair. If shower facilities are
In addition, your employer is respon- not available at the work site, shower
sible for providing repairs and replace- immediately at home and wash hair.
ment as necessary, and also is respon-
VI. Housekeeping—Paragraph (H)
sible for the cleaning, laundering or
disposal of protective clothing and Your employer must establish a
equipment. housekeeping program sufficient to
The interim final standard requires maintain all surfaces as free as prac-
that your employer assure that you ticable of accumulations of lead dust.
follow good work practices when you Vacuuming is the preferred method of
are working in areas where your expo- meeting this requirement, and the use
sure to lead may exceed the PEL. With of compressed air to clean floors and
respect to protective clothing and other surfaces is generally prohibited
equipment, where appropriate, the fol- unless removal with compressed air is
lowing procedures should be observed done in conjunction with ventilation
prior to beginning work: systems designed to contain dispersal
1. Change into work clothing and of the lead dust. Dry or wet sweeping,
shoe covers in the clean section of the shoveling, or brushing may not be used
designated changing areas; except where vacuuming or other
2. Use work garments of appropriate equally effective methods have been
protective gear, including respirators tried and do not work. Vacuums must
before entering the work area; and be used equipped with a special filter
3. Store any clothing not worn under called a high-efficiency particulate air
protective clothing in the designated (HEPA) filter and emptied in a manner
changing area. which minimizes the reentry of lead
Workers should follow these proce- into the workplace.
dures upon leaving the work area:
VII. Hygiene Facilities and Practices—
1. HEPA vacuum heavily contami-
Paragraph (I)
nated protective work clothing while it
is still being worn. At no time may The standard requires that hand
lead be removed from protective cloth- washing facilities be provided where
ing by any means which result in un- occupational exposure to lead occurs.
controlled dispersal of lead into the In addition, change areas, showers
air; (where feasible), and lunchrooms or
2. Remove shoe covers and leave eating areas are to be made available
them in the work area; to workers exposed to lead above the
3. Remove protective clothing and PEL. Your employer must assure that
gear in the dirty area of the designated except in these facilities, food and bev-
changing area. Remove protective coverage is not present or consumed, to-
eralls by carefully rolling down the bacco products are not present or used,
garment to reduce exposure to dust. and cosmetics are not applied, where
4. Remove respirators last; and airborne exposures are above the PEL.
101
Change rooms provided by your em- could be aggravated by lead exposure

ployer must be equipped with separate (e.g., renal disease, anemia). In addi-
storage facilities for your protective tion, control systems may fail, or hy-
clothing and equipment and street giene and respirator programs may be
clothes to avoid cross-contamination. inadequate. Periodic medical surveil-
After showering, no required protective lance of individual workers will help
clothing or equipment worn during the detect those failures. Medical surveil-
shift may be worn home. It is impor- lance will also be important to protect
tant that contaminated clothing or your reproductive ability-regardless of
equipment be removed in change areas whether you are a man or woman.
and not be worn home or you will ex- All medical surveillance required by
tend your exposure and expose your the interim final standard must be per-
family since lead from your clothing formed by or under the supervision of a
can accumulate in your house, car, etc. licensed physician. The employer must
Lunchrooms or eating areas may not provide required medical surveillance
be entered with protective clothing or without cost to employees and at a rea-
equipment unless surface dust has been sonable time and place. The standard’s
removed by vacuuming, downdraft medical surveillance program has two
booth, or other cleaning method. Fi- parts—periodic biological monitoring
nally, workers exposed above the PEL and medical examinations. Your em-
must wash both their hands and faces ployer’s obligation to offer you medical
prior to eating, drinking, smoking or surveillance is triggered by the results
applying cosmetics. of the air monitoring program. Full
All of the facilities and hygiene prac- medical surveillance must be made
tices just discussed are essential to available to all employees who are or
minimize additional sources of lead ab- may be exposed to lead in excess of the
sorption from inhalation or ingestion action level for more than 30 days a
of lead that may accumulate on you, year and whose blood lead level exceeds
your clothes, or your possessions. 40 μg/dl. Initial medical surveillance
Strict compliance with these provi- consisting of blood sampling and anal-
sions can virtually eliminate several ysis for lead and zinc protoporphyrin
sources of lead exposure which signifi- must be provided to all employees ex-
cantly contribute to excessive lead ab- posed at any time (1 day) above the ac-
sorption. tion level.
Biological monitoring under the
VIII. Medical Surveillance—Paragraph
standard must be provided at least
(J)
every 2 months for the first 6 months
The medical surveillance program is and every 6 months thereafter until
part of the standard’s comprehensive your blood lead level is below 40 μg/dl.
approach to the prevention of lead-re- A zinc protoporphyrin (ZPP) test is a
lated disease. Its purpose is to supple- very useful blood test which measures
ment the main thrust of the standard an adverse metabolic effect of lead on
which is aimed at minimizing airborne your body and is therefore an indicator
concentrations of lead and sources of of lead toxicity.
ingestion. Only medical surveillance If your BLL exceeds 40 μg/dl the mon-
can determine if the other provisions of itoring frequency must be increased
the standard have affectively protected from every 6 months to at least every
you as an individual. Compliance with 2 months and not reduced until two
the standard’s provision will protect consecutive BLLs indicate a blood lead
most workers from the adverse effects level below 40 μg/dl. Each time your
of lead exposure, but may not be satis- BLL is determined to be over 40 μg/dl,
factory to protect individual workers your employer must notify you of this
(1) who have high body burdens of lead in writing within five working days of
acquired over past years, (2) who have his or her receipt of the test results.
additional uncontrolled sources of non- The employer must also inform you
occupational lead exposure, (3) who ex- that the standard requires temporary
hibit unusual variations in lead absorp- medical removal with economic protec-
tion rates, or (4) who have specific non- tion when your BLL exceeds 50 μg/dl.
work related medical conditions which (See Discussion of Medical Removal
102
Protection-Paragraph (k).) Anytime medical examinations must include (1)

your BLL exceeds 50 μg/dl your em- a detailed work history and medical
ployer must make available to you history; (2) a thorough physical exam-
within two weeks of receipt of these ination, including an evaluation of
test results a second follow-up BLL your pulmonary status if you will be
test to confirm your BLL. If the two required to use a respirator; (3) a blood
tests both exceed 50 μg/dl, and you are pressure measurement; and (4) a series
temporarily removed, then your em- of laboratory tests designed to check
ployer must make successive BLL tests your blood chemistry and your kidney
available to you on a monthly basis function. In addition, at any time upon
during the period of your removal. your request, a laboratory evaluation
Medical examinations beyond the ini- of male fertility will be made (micro-
tial one must be made available on an scopic examination of a sperm sample),
annual basis if your blood lead level ex- or a pregnancy test will be given.
ceeds 40 μg/dl at any time during the The standard does not require that
preceding year and you are being ex- you participate in any of the medical
posed above the airborne action level procedures, tests, etc. which your em-
of 30 μg/m3 for 30 or more days per year. ployer is required to make available to
The initial examination will provide you. Medical surveillance can, how-
information to establish a baseline to ever, play a very important role in pro-
which subsequent data can be com- tecting your health. You are strongly
pared. encouraged, therefore, to participate in
An initial medical examination to a meaningful fashion. The standard
consist of blood sampling and analysis contains a multiple physician review
for lead and zinc protoporphyrin must mechanism which will give you a
also be made available (prior to assign- chance to have a physician of your
ment) for each employee being as- choice directly participate in the med-
signed for the first time to an area ical surveillance program. If you are
where the airborne concentration of dissatisfied with an examination by a
lead equals or exceeds the action level physician chosen by your employer,
at any time. In addition, a medical ex- you can select a second physician to
amination or consultation must be conduct an independent analysis. The
made available as soon as possible if two doctors would attempt to resolve
you notify your employer that you are any differences of opinion, and select a
experiencing signs or symptoms com- third physician to resolve any firm dis-
monly associated with lead poisoning pute. Generally your employer will
or that you have difficulty breathing choose the physician who conducts
while wearing a respirator or during a medical surveillance under the lead
respirator fit test. You must also be standard-unless you and your employer
provided a medical examination or con- can agree on the choice of a physician
sultation if you notify your employer or physicians. Some companies and
that you desire medical advice con- unions have agreed in advance, for ex-
cerning the effects of current or past ample, to use certain independent med-
exposure to lead on your ability to pro- ical laboratories or panels of physi-
create a healthy child. cians. Any of these arrangements are
Finally, appropriate follow-up med- acceptable so long as required medical
ical examinations or consultations surveillance is made available to work-
may also be provided for employees ers.
who have been temporarily removed The standard requires your employer
from exposure under the medical re- to provide certain information to a
moval protection provisions of the physician to aid in his or her examina-
standard. (See Part IX, below.) tion of you. This information includes
The standard specifies the minimum (1) the standard and its appendices, (2)
content of pre-assignment and annual a description of your duties as they re-
medical examinations. The content of late to occupational lead exposure, (3)
other types of medical examinations your exposure level or anticipated ex-

and consultations is left up to the posure level, (4) a description of any
sound discretion of the examining phy- personal protective equipment you
sician. Pre-assignment and annual wear, (5) prior blood lead level results,
103
and (6) prior written medical opinions treatment of very severe lead poi-
concerning you that the employer has. soning. On the other hand, it has also
After a medical examination or con- been established that there can be a
sultation the physician must prepare a long list of extremely harmful side ef-
written report which must contain (1) fects associated with the use of
the physician’s opinion as to whether chelating agents. The medical commu-
you have any medical condition which nity has balanced the advantages and
places you at increased risk of mate- disadvantages resulting from the use of
rial impairment to health from expo- chelating agents in various cir-
sure to lead, (2) any recommended spe- cumstances and has established when
cial protective measures to be provided the use of these agents is acceptable.
to you, (3) any blood lead level deter- The standard includes these accepted
minations, and (4) any recommended limitations due to a history of abuse of
limitation on your use of respirators.
chelation therapy by some lead compa-
This last element must include a deter-
nies. The most widely used chelating
mination of whether you can wear a
agents are calcium disodium EDTA,
powered air purifying respirator
(Ca Na2 EDTA), Calcium Disodium
(PAPR) if you are found unable to wear
a negative pressure respirator. Versenate (Versenate), and d-
The medical surveillance program of penicillamine (pencillamine or
the interim lead standard may at some Cupramine).
point in time serve to notify certain The standard prohibits ‘‘prophylactic
workers that they have acquired a dis- chelation’’ of any employee by any per-
ease or other adverse medical condi- son the employer retains, supervises or
tion as a result of occupational lead ex- controls. Prophylactic chelation is the
posure. If this is true, these workers routine use of chelating or similarly
might have legal rights to compensa- acting drugs to prevent elevated blood
tion from public agencies, their em- levels in workers who are occupation-
ployers, firms that supply hazardous ally exposed to lead, or the use of these
products to their employers, or other drugs to routinely lower blood lead lev-
persons. Some states have laws, includ- els to predesignated concentrations be-
ing worker compensation laws, that lieved to be ‘‘safe’’. It should be empha-
disallow a worker who learns of a job- sized that where an employer takes a
related health impairment to sue, un- worker who has no symptoms of lead
less the worker sues within a short pe- poisoning and has chelation carried out
riod of time after learning of the im- by a physician (either inside or outside
pairment. (This period of time may be of a hospital) solely to reduce the
a matter of months or years.) An attor- worker’s blood lead level, that will gen-
ney can be consulted about these possi- erally be considered prophylactic che-
bilities. It should be stressed that lation. The use of a hospital and a phy-
OSHA is in no way trying to either en- sician does not mean that prophylactic
courage or discourage claims or law- chelation is not being performed. Rou-
suits. However, since results of the
tine chelation to prevent increased or
standard’s medical surveillance pro-
reduce current blood lead levels is un-
gram can significantly affect the legal
acceptable whatever the setting.
remedies of a worker who has acquired
a job-related disease or impairment, it The standard allows the use of
is proper for OSHA to make you aware ‘‘therapeutic’’ or ‘‘diagnostic’’ chela-
of this. tion if administered under the super-
The medical surveillance section of vision of a licensed physician in a clin-
the standard also contains provisions ical setting with thorough and appro-
dealing with chelation. Chelation is the priate medical monitoring. Thera-
use of certain drugs (administered in peutic chelation responds to severe
pill form or injected into the body) to lead poisoning where there are marked
reduce the amount of lead absorbed in symptoms. Diagnostic chelation in-
body tissues. Experience accumulated volved giving a patient a dose of the

by the medical and scientific commu- drug then collecting all urine excreted
nities has largely confirmed the effec- for some period of time as an aid to the
tiveness of this type of therapy for the diagnosis of lead poisoning.
104
In cases where the examining physi- assignments. Each removal must be ac-
cian determines that chelation is ap- complished in a manner consistent
propriate, you must be notified in writ- with existing collective bargaining re-
ing of this fact before such treatment. lationships. Your employer is given
This will inform you of a potentially broad discretion to implement tem-
harmful treatment, and allow you to porary removals so long as no attempt
obtain a second opinion. is made to override existing agree-
ments. Similarly, a removed worker is
IX. Medical Removal Protection—
Paragraph (K) provided no right to veto an employer’s
choice which satisfies the standard.
Excessive lead absorption subjects In most cases, employers will likely
you to increased risk of disease. Med- transfer removed employees to other
ical removal protection (MRP) is a jobs with sufficiently low lead expo-
means of protecting you when, for sure. Alternatively, a worker’s hours
whatever reasons, other methods, such may be reduced so that the time
as engineering controls, work prac- weighted average exposure is reduced,
tices, and respirators, have failed to
or he or she may be temporarily laid
provide the protection you need. MRP
off if no other alternative is feasible.
involves the temporary removal of a
worker from his or her regular job to a In all of these situation, MRP bene-
place of significantly lower exposure fits must be provided during the period
without any loss of earnings, seniority, of removal—i.e., you continue to re-
or other employment rights or bene- ceive the same earnings, seniority, and
fits. The purpose of this program is to other rights and benefits you would
cease further lead absorption and allow have had if you had not been removed.
your body to naturally excrete lead Earnings includes more than just your
which has previously been absorbed. base wage; it includes overtime, shift
Temporary medical removal can result differentials, incentives, and other
from an elevated blood lead level, or a compensation you would have earned if
medical opinion. For up to 18 months, you had not been removed. During the
or for as long as the job the employee period of removal you must also be pro-
was removed from lasts, protection is vided with appropriate follow-up med-
provided as a result of either form of ical surveillance. If you were removed
removal. The vast majority of removed because your blood lead level was too
workers, however, will return to their high, you must be provided with a
former jobs long before this eighteen monthly blood test. If a medical opin-
month period expires. ion caused your removal, you must be
You may also be removed from expo- provided medical tests or examinations
sure even if your blood lead level is that the doctor believes to be appro-
below 50 μg/dl if a final medical deter- priate. If you do not participate in this
mination indicates that you tempo- follow up medical surveillance, you
rarily need reduced lead exposure for may lose your eligibility for MRP ben-
medical reasons. If the physician who
efits.
is implementing your employers med-
When you are medically eligible to
ical program makes a final written
opinion recommending your removal or return to your former job, your em-
other special protective measures, your ployer must return you to your
employer must implement the physi- ‘‘former job status.’’ This means that
cian’s recommendation. If you are re- you are entitled to the position, wages,
moved in this manner, you may only be benefits, etc., you would have had if
returned when the doctor indicates you had not been removed. If you
that it is safe for you to do so. would still be in your old job if no re-
The standard does not give specific moval had occurred that is where you
instructions dealing with what an em- go back. If not, you are returned con-
ployer must do with a removed worker. sistent with whatever job assignment
Your job assignment upon removal is a discretion your employer would have
matter for you, your employer and had if no removal had occurred. MRP
your union (if any) to work out con- only seeks to maintain your rights, not
sistent with existing procedures for job expand them or diminish them.
105
If you are removed under MRP and LEAD WORK AREA

you are also eligible for worker com- POISON
pensation or other compensation for
lost wages, your employer’s MRP bene- NO SMOKING OR EATING
fits obligation is reduced by the These signs are to be posted and
amount that you actually receive from maintained in a manner which assures
these other sources. This is also true if that the legend is readily visible.
you obtain other employment during
the time you are laid off with MRP XII. Recordkeeping—Paragraph (N)
benefits. Your employer is required to keep all
The standard also covers situations records of exposure monitoring for air-
where an employer voluntarily re- borne lead. These records must include
moves a worker from exposure to lead the name and job classification of em-
due to the effects of lead on the employees measured, details of the sam-
ployee’s medical condition, even pling and analytical techniques, the re-
though the standard does not require sults of this sampling, and the type of
removal. In these situations MRP bene- respiratory protection being worn by
fits must still be provided as though the person sampled. Such records are
the standard required removal. Finally, to be retained for at least 30 years.
it is important to note that in all cases Your employer is also required to keep
where removal is required, respirators
all records of biological monitoring
cannot be used as a substitute. Res-
and medical examination results.
pirators may be used before removal
These records must include the names
becomes necessary, but not as an alter-
of the employees, the physician’s writ-
native to a transfer to a low exposure
ten opinion, and a copy of the results
job, or to a lay-off with MRP benefits.
of the examination. Medical records
X. Employee Information and Training— must be preserved and maintained for
Paragraph (L) the duration of employment plus 30
years. However, if the employee’s dura-
Your employer is required to provide tion of employment is less than one
an information and training program year, the employer need not retain
for all employees exposed to lead above that employee’s medical records be-
the action level or who may suffer skin yond the period of employment if they
or eye irritation from lead compounds are provided to the employee upon ter-
such as lead arsenate or lead azide. The mination of employment.
program must train these employees Recordkeeping is also required if you
regarding the specific hazards associ- are temporarily removed from your job
ated with their work environment, pro- under the medical removal protection
tective measures which can be taken, program. This record must include
including the contents of any compli-
your name and social security number,
ance plan in effect, the danger of lead
the date of your removal and return,
to their bodies (including their repro-
how the removal was or is being ac-
ductive systems), and their rights
complished, and whether or not the
under the standard. All employees
reason for the removal was an elevated
must be trained prior to initial assign-
blood lead level. Your employer is re-
ment to areas where there is a possi-
quired to keep each medical removal
bility of exposure over the action level.
record only for as long as the duration
This training program must also be
provided at least annually thereafter of an employee’s employment.
unless further exposure above the ac- The standard requires that if you re-
tion level will not occur. quest to see or copy environmental
monitoring, blood lead level moni-
XI. Signs—Paragraph (M) toring, or medical removal records,
they must be made available to you or
The standard requires that the fol- to a representative that you authorize.
lowing warning sign be posted in work Your union also has access to these
areas where the exposure to lead ex- records. Medical records other than
ceeds the PEL: BLL’s must also be provided upon re-
WARNING quest to you, to your physician or to
106
any other person whom you may spe- including metallic lead, all inorganic
cifically designate. Your union does lead compounds and organic lead soaps.
not have access to your personal med- Under this interim final standard oc-
ical records unless you authorize their cupational exposure to inorganic lead
access. is to be limited to 50 μg/m3
(micrograms per cubic meter) based on
XIII. Observation of Monitoring— an 8 hour time-weighted average
Paragraph (O) (TWA). This permissible exposure limit
When air monitoring for lead is per- (PEL) must be achieved through a com-
formed at your workplace as required bination of engineering, work practice
by this standard, your employer must and administrative controls to the ex-
allow you or someone you designate to tent feasible. Where these controls are
act as an observer of the monitoring. in place but are found not to reduce
Observers are entitled to an expla- employee exposures to or below the
nation of the measurement procedure, PEL, they must be used nonetheless,
and to record the results obtained. and supplemented with respirators to
Since results will not normally be meet the 50 μg/m3 exposure limit.
available at the time of the moni- The standard also provides for a pro-
toring, observers are entitled to record gram of biological monitoring for em-
or receive the results of the monitoring ployees exposed to lead above the ac-
when returned by the laboratory. Your tion level at any time, and additional
employer is required to provide the ob- medical surveillance for all employees
server with any personal protective de- exposed to levels of inorganic lead
vices required to be worn by employees above 30 μg/m3 (TWA) for more than 30
working in the area that is being mon- days per year and whose BLL exceeds
itored. The employer must require the 40 μg/dl.
observer to wear all such equipment The purpose of this document is to
and to comply with all other applicable outline the medical surveillance provi-
safety and health procedures. sions of the interim standard for inor-
ganic lead in construction, and to pro-
XIV. For Additional Information vide further information to the physi-
cian regarding the examination and
A. A copy of the interim standard for evaluation of workers exposed to inor-
lead in construction can be obtained ganic lead.
free of charge by calling or writing the Section 1 provides a detailed descrip-
OSHA Office of Publications, room N– tion of the monitoring procedure in-
3101, United States Department of cluding the required frequency of blood
Labor, Washington, DC 20210: Tele- testing for exposed workers, provisions
phone (202) 219–4667. for medical removal protection (MRP),
B. Additional information about the the recommended right of the em-
standard, its enforcement, and your ployee to a second medical opinion,
employer’s compliance can be obtained and notification and recordkeeping re-
from the nearest OSHA Area Office quirements of the employer. A discus-
listed in your telephone directory sion of the requirements for respirator
under United States Government/De- use and respirator monitoring and
partment of Labor. OSHA’s position on prophylactic chela-
tion therapy are also included in this
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.62—MEDICAL section.
SURVEILLANCE GUIDELINES Section 2 discusses the toxic effects
Introduction and clinical manifestations of lead poi-
soning and effects of lead intoxication
The primary purpose of the Occupa- on enzymatic pathways in heme syn-
tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 is thesis. The adverse effects on both
to assure, so far as possible, safe and male and female reproductive capacity
healthful working conditions for every and on the fetus are also discussed.
working man and woman. The interim Section 3 outlines the recommended
final occupational health standard for medical evaluation of the worker ex-
lead in construction is designed to proposed to inorganic lead, including de-
tect workers exposed to inorganic lead tails of the medical history, physical
107
examination, and recommended labora- An annual medical examination and

tory tests, which are based on the toxic consultation performed under the
effects of lead as discussed in Section 2. guidelines discussed in Section 3 is to
Section 4 provides detailed informa- be made available to each employee ex-
tion concerning the laboratory tests posed above 30 μg/m3 for more than 30
available for the monitoring of exposed days per year for whom a blood test
workers. Included also is a discussion conducted at any time during the pre-
of the relative value of each test and ceding 12 months indicated a blood lead
the limitations and precautions which level at or above 40 μg/dl. Also, an ex-
are necessary in the interpretation of amination is to be given to all employ-
the laboratory results. ees prior to their assignment to an
area in which airborne lead concentra-
I. Medical Surveillance and Monitoring tions reach or exceed the 30 μg/m3 for
Requirements for Workers Exposed to more than 30 days per year. In addi-
Inorganic Lead tion, a medical examination must be
Under the interim final standard for provided as soon as possible after noti-
inorganic lead in the construction in- fication by an employee that the em-
dustry, initial medical surveillance ployee has developed signs or symp-
consisting of biological monitoring to toms commonly associated with lead
include blood lead and ZPP level deter- intoxication, that the employee desires
mination shall be provided to employ- medical advice regarding lead exposure
ees exposed to lead at or above the ac- and the ability to procreate a healthy
tion level on any one day. In addition, child, or that the employee has dem-
a program of biological monitoring is onstrated difficulty in breathing dur-
to be made available to all employees ing a respirator fitting test or during
exposed above the action level at any respirator use. An examination is also
time and additional medical surveil- to be made available to each employee
lance is to be made available to all em- removed from exposure to lead due to a
ployees exposed to lead above 30 μg/m3 risk of sustaining material impairment
TWA for more than 30 days each year to health, or otherwise limited or spe-
and whose BLL exceeds 40 μg/dl. This cially protected pursuant to medical
program consists of periodic blood recommendations.
sampling and medical evaluation to be Results of biological monitoring or
performed on a schedule which is de- the recommendations of an examining
fined by previous laboratory results, physician may necessitate removal of
worker complaints or concerns, and the an employee from further lead expo-
clinical assessment of the examining sure pursuant to the standard’s med-
physician. ical removal protection (MRP) pro-
Under this program, the blood lead gram. The object of the MRP program
level (BLL) of all employees who are is to provide temporary medical re-
exposed to lead above 30 μg/m3 for more moval to workers either with substan-
than 30 days per year or whose blood tially elevated blood lead levels or oth-
lead is above 40 μg/dl but exposed for no erwise at risk of sustaining material
more than 30 days per year is to be de- health impairment from continued sub-
termined at least every two months for stantial exposure to lead.
the first six months of exposure and Under the standard’s ultimate work-
every six months thereafter. The fre- er removal criteria, a worker is to be
quency is increased to every two removed from any work having an
months for employees whose last blood eight hour TWA exposure to lead of 30
lead level was 40 μg/dl or above. For μg/m3 when his or her blood lead level
employees who are removed from expo- reaches 50 μg/dl and is confirmed by a
sure to lead due to an elevated blood second follow-up blood lead level per-
lead, a new blood lead level must be formed within two weeks after the em-
measured monthly. A zinc ployer receives the results of the first
protoporphyrin (ZPP) measurement is blood sampling test. Return of the em-

strongly recommended on each occa- ployee to his or her job status depends
sion that a blood lead level measure- on a worker’s blood lead level declining
ment is made. to 40 μg/dl.
108
As part of the interim standard, the During the period of any form of spe-
employer is required to notify in writ- cial protection or removal, the em-
ing each employee whose blood lead ployer must maintain the worker’s
level exceeds 40 μg/dl. In addition each earnings, seniority, and other employ-
such employee is to be informed that ment rights and benefits (as though the
the standard requires medical removal worker had not been removed) for a pe-
with MRP benefits, discussed below, riod of up to 18 months or for as long as
when an employee’s blood lead level ex- the job the employee was removed
ceeds the above defined limit. from lasts if less than 18 months. This
In addition to the above blood lead economic protection will maximize
level criterion, temporary worker re- meaningful worker participation in the
moval may also take place as a result medical surveillance program, and is
of medical determinations and rec- appropriate as part of the employer’s
ommendations. Written medical opin- overall obligation to provide a safe and
ions must be prepared after each exam- healthful workplace. The provisions of
ination pursuant to the standard. If the MRP benefits during the employee’s re-
examining physician includes a med- moval period may, however, be condi-
ical finding, determination or opinion tioned upon participation in medical
that the employee has a medical condi- surveillance.
tion which places the employee at in- The lead standard provides for a mul-
creased risk of material health impair- tiple physician review in cases where
ment from exposure to lead, then the the employee wishes a second opinion
employee must be removed from expo- concerning potential lead poisoning or
sure to lead at or above 30 μg/m3. Alter- toxicity. If an employee wishes a sec-
natively, if the examining physician ond opinion, he or she can make an ap-
recommends special protective meas- pointment with a physician of his or
ures for an employee (e.g., use of a her choice. This second physician will
powered air purifying respirator) or review the findings, recommendations
recommends limitations on an employ- or determinations of the first physician
ee’s exposure to lead, then the em- and conduct any examinations, con-
ployer must implement these rec- sultations or tests deemed necessary in
ommendations. an attempt to make a final medical de-
Recommendations may be more termination. If the first and second
stringent than the specific provisions physicians do not agree in their assess-
of the standard. The examining physi- ment they must try to resolve their
cian, therefore, is given broad flexi- differences. If they cannot reach an
bility to tailor special protective pro- agreement then they must designate a
cedures to the needs of individual em- third physician to resolve the dispute.
ployees. This flexibility extends to the The employer must provide exam-
evaluation and management of preg- ining and consulting physicians with
nant workers and male and female the following specific information: A
workers who are planning to raise chil- copy of the lead regulations and all ap-
dren. Based on the history, physical ex- pendices, a description of the employ-
amination, and laboratory studies, the ee’s duties as related to exposure, the
physician might recommend special exposure level or anticipated level to
protective measures or medical re- lead and any other toxic substances (if
moval for an employee who is pregnant applicable), a description of personal
or who is planning to conceive a child protective equipment used, blood lead
when, in the physician’s judgment, levels, and all prior written medical
continued exposure to lead at the cur- opinions regarding the employee in the
rent job would pose a significant risk. employer’s possession or control. The
The return of the employee to his or employer must also obtain from the
her former job status, or the removal physician and provide the employee
of special protections or limitations, with a written medical opinion con-
depends upon the examining physician taining blood lead levels, the
determining that the employee is no physicians’s opinion as to whether the

longer at increased risk of material im- employee is at risk of material impair-
pairment or that special measures are ment to health, any recommended pro-
no longer needed. tective measures for the employee if
109
further exposure is permitted, as well felt to be a result of lead toxicity along

as any recommended limitations upon with blood lead levels, ZPP levels, and
an employee’s use of respirators. other laboratory tests as appropriate.
Employers must instruct each physi- EDTA and penicillamine which are the
cian not to reveal to the employer in primary chelating agents used in the
writing or in any other way his or her therapy of occupational lead poisoning
findings, laboratory results, or diag- have significant potential side effects
noses which are felt to be unrelated to and their use must be justified on the
occupational lead exposure. They must basis of expected benefits to the work-
also instruct each physician to advise er. Unless frank and severe symptoms
the employee of any occupationally or are present, therapeutic chelation is
non-occupationally related medical not recommended, given the oppor-
condition requiring further treatment tunity to remove a worker from expo-
or evaluation. sure and allow the body to naturally
The standard provides for the use of excrete accumulated lead. As a diag-
respirators where engineering and nostic aid, the chelation mobilization
other primary controls are not effec- test using CA-EDTA has limited appli-
tive. However, the use of respirator cability. According to some investiga-
protection shall not be used in lieu of tors, the test can differentiate between
temporary medical removal due to ele- lead-induced and other nephropathies.
vated blood lead levels or findings that The test may also provide an esti-
an employee is at risk of material mation of the mobile fraction of the
health impairment. This is based on total body lead burden.
the numerous inadequacies of res- Employers are required to assure
pirators including skin rash where the that accurate records are maintained
facepiece makes contact with the skin, on exposure assessment, including en-
unacceptable stress to breathing in vironmental monitoring, medical sur-
some workers with underlying veillance, and medical removal for
cardiopulmonary impairment, dif- each employee. Exposure assessment
ficulty in providing adequate fit, the records must be kept for at least 30
tendency for respirators to create addi- years. Medical surveillance records
tional hazards by interfering with vi- must be kept for the duration of em-
sion, hearing, and mobility, and the ployment plus 30 years except in cases
difficulties of assuring the maximum where the employment was less than
effectiveness of a complicated work one year. If duration of employment is
practice program involving respirators. less than one year, the employer need
Respirators do, however, serve a useful not retain this record beyond the term
function where engineering and work of employment if the record is provided
practice controls are inadequate by to the employee upon termination of
providing supplementary, interim, or employment. Medical removal records
short-term protection, provided they also must be maintained for the dura-
are properly selected for the environ- tion of employment. All records re-
ment in which the employee will be quired under the standard must be
working, properly fitted to the em- made available upon request to the As-
ployee, maintained and cleaned peri- sistant Secretary of Labor for Occupa-
odically, and worn by the employee tional Safety and Health and the Direc-
when required. tor of the National Institute for Occu-
In its interim final standard on occupational Safety and Health. Employers
pational exposure to inorganic lead in must also make environmental and bi-
the construction industry, OSHA has ological monitoring and medical re-
prohibited prophylactic chelation. Di- moval records available to affected em-
agnostic and therapeutic chelation are ployees and to former employees or
permitted only under the supervision their authorized employee representa-
of a licensed physician with appro- tives. Employees or their specifically
priate medical monitoring in an ac- designated representatives have access
ceptable clinical setting. The decision to their entire medical surveillance

to initiate chelation therapy must be records.
made on an individual basis and take In addition, the standard requires
into account the severity of symptoms that the employer inform all workers
110
exposed to lead at or above 30 μg/m3 of changes as well as later stages of dis-

the provisions of the standard and all ease.
its appendices, the purpose and descrip- 1. Heme Synthesis Inhibition. The
tion of medical surveillance and provi- earliest demonstrated effect of lead in-
sions for medical removal protection if volves its ability to inhibit at least two
temporary removal is required. An un- enzymes of the heme synthesis path-
derstanding of the potential health ef- way at very low blood levels. Inhibition
fects of lead exposure by all exposed of delta aminolevulinic acid dehydrase
employees along with full under- (ALA-D) which catalyzes the conver-
standing of their rights under the lead sion of delta-aminolevulinic acid (ALA)
standard is essential for an effective to protoporphyrin is observed at a
monitoring program. blood lead level below 20 μg/dl. At a
blood lead level of 40 μg/dl, more than
II. Adverse Health Effects of Inorganic 20% of the population would have 70%
Lead inhibition of ALA-D. There is an expo-
Although the toxicity of lead has nential increase in ALA excretion at
been known for 2,000 years, the knowl- blood lead levels greater than 40 μg/dl.
edge of the complex relationship be- Another enzyme, ferrochelatase, is
tween lead exposure and human re- also inhibited at low blood lead levels.
sponse is still being refined. Signifi- Inhibition of ferrochelatase leads to in-
cant research into the toxic properties creased free erythrocyte
of lead continues throughout the protoporphyrin (FEP) in the blood
world, and it should be anticipated which can then bind to zinc to yield
that our understanding of thresholds of zinc protoporphyrin. At a blood lead
effects and margins of safety will be level of 50 μg/dl or greater, nearly 100%
improved in future years. The provi- of the population will have an increase
sions of the lead standard are founded in FEP. There is also an exponential
on two prime medical judgments: First, relationship between blood lead levels
the prevention of adverse health effects greater than 40 μg/dl and the associated
from exposure to lead throughout a ZPP level, which has led to the devel-
working lifetime requires that worker opment of the ZPP screening test for
blood lead levels be maintained at or lead exposure.
below 40 μg/dl and second, the blood While the significance of these ef-
lead levels of workers, male or female, fects is subject to debate, it is OSHA’s
who intend to parent in the near future position that these enzyme disturb-
should be maintained below 30 μg/dl to ances are early stages of a disease proc-
minimize adverse reproductive health ess which may eventually result in the
effects to the parents and developing clinical symptoms of lead poisoning.
fetus. The adverse effects of lead on re- Whether or not the effects do progress
production are being actively re- to the later stages of clinical disease,
searched and OSHA encourages the disruption of these enzyme processes
physician to remain abreast of recent over a working lifetime is considered
developments in the area to best advise to be a material impairment of health.
pregnant workers or workers planning One of the eventual results of lead-in-
to conceive children. duced inhibition of enzymes in the
The spectrum of health effects caused heme synthesis pathway is anemia
by lead exposure can be subdivided into which can be asymptomatic if mild but
five developmental stages: Normal, associated with a wide array of symp-
physiological changes of uncertain sig- toms including dizziness, fatigue, and
nificance, pathophysiological changes, tachycardia when more severe. Studies
overt symptoms (morbidity), and mor- have indicated that lead levels as low
tality. Within this process there are no as 50 μg/dl can be associated with a
sharp distinctions, but rather a con- definite decreased hemoglobin, al-
tinuum of effects. Boundaries between though most cases of lead-induced ane-
categories overlap due to the wide vari- mia, as well as shortened red-cell sur-
ation of individual responses and expo- vival times, occur at lead levels ex-
sures in the working population. ceeding 80 μg/dl. Inhibited hemoglobin
OSHA’s development of the lead stand- synthesis is more common in chronic
ard focused on pathophysiological cases whereas shortened erythrocyte
111
life span is more common in acute extensor muscle weakness usually in-
cases. volving the extensor muscles of the fin-
In lead-induced anemias, there is gers and hand in the most active upper
usually a reticulocytosis along with extremity, followed in severe cases by
the presence of basophilic stippling, wrist drop or, much less commonly,
and ringed sideroblasts, although none foot drop.
of the above are pathognomonic for In addition to slowing of nerve con-
lead-induced anemia. duction, electromyographical studies
2. Neurological Effects. Inorganic in patients with blood lead levels
lead has been found to have toxic ef- greater than 50 μg/dl have dem-
fects on both the central and periph- onstrated a decrease in the number of
eral nervous systems. The earliest acting motor unit potentials, an in-
stages of lead-induced central nervous crease in the duration of motor unit
system effects first manifest them- potentials, and spontaneous patholog-
selves in the form of behavioral dis- ical activity including fibrillations and
turbances and central nervous system fasciculations. Whether these effects
symptoms including irritability, rest- occur at levels of 40 μg/dl is undeter-
lessness, insomnia and other sleep dis- mined.
turbances, fatigue, vertigo, headache, While the peripheral neuropathies
poor memory, tremor, depression, and can occasionally be reversed with ther-
apathy. With more severe exposure, apy, again such recovery is not assured
symptoms can progress to drowsiness, particularly in the more severe
stupor, hallucinations, delirium, con- neuropathies and often improvement is
vulsions and coma. only partial. The lack of reversibility
The most severe and acute form of is felt to be due in part to segmental
lead poisoning which usually follows demyelination.
ingestion or inhalation of large
3. Gastrointestinal. Lead may also af-
amounts of lead is acute
fect the gastrointestinal system pro-
encephalopathy which may arise pre-
ducing abdominal colic or diffuse ab-
cipitously with the onset of intractable
dominal pain, constipation,
seizures, coma, cardiorespiratory ar-
rest, and death within 48 hours. obstipation, diarrhea, anorexia, nausea
While there is disagreement about and vomiting. Lead colic rarely devel-
what exposure levels are needed to ops at blood lead levels below 80 μg/dl.
produce the earliest symptoms, most 4. Renal. Renal toxicity represents
experts agree that symptoms definitely one of the most serious health effects
can occur at blood lead levels of 60 μg/ of lead poisoning. In the early stages of
dl whole blood and therefore rec- disease nuclear inclusion bodies can
ommend a 40 μg/dl maximum. The cen- frequently be identified in proximal
tral nervous system effects frequently renal tubular cells. Renal function re-
are not reversible following discon- mains normal and the changes in this
tinued exposure or chelation therapy stage are probably reversible. With
and when improvement does occur, it is more advanced disease there is progres-
almost always only partial. sive interstitial fibrosis and impaired
The peripheral neuropathy resulting renal function. Eventually extensive
from lead exposure characteristically interstitial fibrosis ensues with scle-
involves only motor function with rotic glomeruli and dilated and atro-
minimal sensory damage and has a phied proximal tubules; all represent
marked predilection for the extensor end stage kidney disease. Azotemia can
muscles of the most active extremity. be progressive, eventually resulting in
The peripheral neuropathy can occur frank uremia necessitating dialysis.
with varying degrees of severity. The There is occasionally associated hyper-
earliest and mildest form which can be tension and hyperuricemia with or
detected in workers with blood lead without gout.
levels as low as 50 μg/dl is manifested Early kidney disease is difficult to
by slowing of motor nerve conduction detect. The urinalysis is normal in

velocity often without clinical symp- early lead nephropathy and the blood
toms. With progression of the neurop- urea nitrogen and serum creatinine in-
athy there is development of painless crease only when two-thirds of kidney
112
function is lost. Measurement of cre- and newborn would be at least as sus-

atinine clearance can often detect ear- ceptible to neurological damage as
lier disease as can other methods of young children. Blood lead levels of 50–
measurement of glomerular filtration 60 μg/dl in children can cause signifi-
rate. An abnormal Ca-EDTA mobiliza- cant neurobehavioral impairments and
tion test has been used to differentiate there is evidence of hyperactivity at
between lead-induced and other blood levels as low as 25 μg/dl. Given
nephropathies, but this procedure is the overall body of literature con-
not widely accepted. A form of Fanconi cerning the adverse health effects of
syndrome with aminoaciduria, lead in children, OSHA feels that the
glycosuria, and hyperphosphaturia in- blood lead level in children should be
dicating severe injury to the proximal maintained below 30 μg/dl with a popu-
renal tubules is occasionally seen in lation mean of 15 μg/dl. Blood lead lev-
children. els in the fetus and newborn likewise
5. Reproductive effects. Exposure to should not exceed 30 μg/dl.
lead can have serious effects on repro- Because of lead’s ability to pass
ductive function in both males and fe- through the placental barrier and also
males. In male workers exposed to lead because of the demonstrated adverse
there can be a decrease in sexual drive, effects of lead on reproductive function
impotence, decreased ability to in both the male and female as well as
produce healthy sperm, and sterility. the risk of genetic damage of lead on
Malformed sperm (teratospermia), de- both the ovum and sperm, OSHA rec-
creased number of sperm ommends a 30 μg/dl maximum permis-
(hypospermia), and sperm with de- sible blood lead level in both males and
creased motility (asthenospermia) can females who wish to bear children.
all occur. Teratospermia has been 6. Other toxic effects. Debate and re-
noted at mean blood lead levels of 53 search continue on the effects of lead
μg/dl and hypospermia and on the human body. Hypertension has
asthenospermia at 41 μg/dl. Further- frequently been noted in occupation-
more, there appears to be a dose-re- ally exposed individuals although it is
sponse relationship for teratospermia difficult to assess whether this is due
in lead exposed workers. to lead’s adverse effects on the kidney
Women exposed to lead may experi- or if some other mechanism is in-
ence menstrual disturbances including volved. Vascular and electrocardio-
dysmenorrhea, menorrhagia and amen- graphic changes have been detected but
orrhea. Following exposure to lead, have not been well characterized. Lead
women have a higher frequency of ste- is thought to impair thyroid function
rility, premature births, spontaneous and interfere with the pituitary-adre-
miscarriages, and stillbirths. nal axis, but again these effects have
Germ cells can be affected by lead not been well defined.
and cause genetic damage in the egg or
sperm cells before conception and re- III. Medical Evaluation
sult in failure to implant, miscarriage,
stillbirth, or birth defects. The most important principle in
Infants of mothers with lead poi- evaluating a worker for any occupa-
soning have a higher mortality during tional disease including lead poisoning
the first year and suffer from lowered is a high index of suspicion on the part
birth weights, slower growth, and nerv- of the examining physician. As dis-
ous system disorders. cussed in Section 2, lead can affect nu-
Lead can pass through the placental merous organ systems and produce a
barrier and lead levels in the mother’s wide array of signs and symptoms,
blood are comparable to concentra- most of which are non-specific and sub-
tions of lead in the umbilical cord at tle in nature at least in the early
birth. Transplacental passage becomes stages of disease. Unless serious con-
detectable at 12–14 weeks of gestation cern for lead toxicity is present, many
and increases until birth. of the early clues to diagnosis may eas-
There is little direct data on damage ily be overlooked.
to the fetus from exposure to lead but The crucial initial step in the med-
it is generally assumed that the fetus ical evaluation is recognizing that a
113
worker’s employment can result in ex- consumption, and also non-occupa-

posure to lead. The worker will fre- tional lead exposures such as hobbies
quently be able to define exposures to (hunting, riflery). Also known child-
lead and lead containing materials but hood exposures should be elicited. Any
often will not volunteer this informa- previous history of hematological, neu-
tion unless specifically asked. In other rological, gastrointestinal, renal, psy-
situations the worker may not know of chological, gynecological, genetic, or
any exposures to lead but the suspicion reproductive problems should be spe-
might be raised on the part of the phy- cifically noted.
sician because of the industry or occu- A careful and complete review of sys-
pation of the worker. Potential occupa- tems must be performed to assess both
tional exposure to lead and its com- recognized complaints and subtle or
pounds occur in many occupations in slowly acquired symptoms which the
the construction industry, including worker might not appreciate as being
demolition and salvaging operations, significant. The review of symptoms
removal or encapsulation of materials should include the following:
containing lead, construction, alter- 1. General—weight loss, fatigue, de-
ation, repair or renovation of struc- creased appetite.
tures containing lead, transportation, 2. Head, Eyes, Ears, Nose, Throat
disposal, storage or containment of (HEENT)—headaches, visual disturb-
lead or lead-containing materials on ances or decreased visual acuity, hear-
construction sites, and maintenance ing deficits or tinnitus, pigmentation
operations associated with construc- of the oral mucosa, or metallic taste in
tion activities. mouth.
Once the possibility for lead exposure 3. Cardio-pulmonary—shortness of
is raised, the focus can then be directed breath, cough, chest pains, palpita-
toward eliciting information from the tions, or orthopnea.
medical history, physical exam, and fi- 4. Gastrointestinal—nausea, vom-
nally from laboratory data to evaluate iting, heartburn, abdominal pain, con-
the worker for potential lead toxicity. stipation or diarrhea.
A complete and detailed work history 5. Neurologic—irritability, insomnia,
is important in the initial evaluation. weakness (fatigue), dizziness, loss of
A listing of all previous employment memory, confusion, hallucinations,
with information on job description, incoordination, ataxia, decreased
exposure to fumes or dust, known expo- strength in hands or feet, disturbances
sures to lead or other toxic substances, in gait, difficulty in climbing stairs, or
a description of any personal protec- seizures.
tive equipment used, and previous med- 6. Hematologic—pallor, easy fatiga-
ical surveillance should all be included bility, abnormal blood loss, melena.
in the worker’s record. Where exposure 7. Reproductive (male and female and
to lead is suspected, information con- spouse where relevant)—history of in-
cerning on-the-job personal hygiene, fertility, impotence, loss of libido, ab-
smoking or eating habits in work normal menstrual periods, history of
areas, laundry procedures, and use of miscarriages, stillbirths, or children
any protective clothing or respiratory with birth defects.
protection equipment should be noted. 8. Musculo-skeletal—muscle and
A complete work history is essential in joint pains.
the medical evaluation of a worker The physical examination should em-
with suspected lead toxicity, especially phasize the neurological, gastro-
when long term effects such as intestinal, and cardiovascular systems.
neurotoxicity and nephrotoxicity are The worker’s weight and blood pressure
considered. should be recorded and the oral mucosa
The medical history is also of funda- checked for pigmentation char-
mental importance and should include acteristic of a possible Burtonian or
a listing of all past and current med- lead line on the gingiva. It should be
ical conditions, current medications noted, however, that the lead line may
including proprietary drug intake, pre- not be present even in severe lead poi-
vious surgeries and hospitalizations, soning if good oral hygiene is prac-
allergies, smoking history, alcohol ticed.
114
The presence of pallor on skin exam- blood lead and ZPP levels are equivocal
ination may indicate an anemia which, include delta aminolevulinic acid and
if severe, might also be associated with coproporphyrin concentrations in the
a tachycardia. If an anemia is sus- urine, and dark-field illumination for
pected, an active search for blood loss detection of basophilic stippling in red
should be undertaken including poten- blood cells.
tial blood loss through the gastro- If an anemia is detected further stud-
intestinal tract. ies including a careful examination of
A complete neurological examination the peripheral smear, reticulocyte
should include an adequate mental sta- count, stool for occult blood, serum
tus evaluation including a search for iron, total iron binding capacity, bili-
behavioral and psychological disturb- rubin, and, if appropriate, vitamin B12
ances, memory testing, evaluation for and folate may be of value in attempt-
irritability, insomnia, hallucinations, ing to identify the cause of the anemia.
and mental clouding. Gait and coordi- If a peripheral neuropathy is sus-
nation should be examined along with pected, nerve conduction studies are
close observation for tremor. A de- warranted both for diagnosis and as a
tailed evaluation of peripheral nerve basis to monitor any therapy.
function including careful sensory and If renal disease is questioned, a 24
motor function testing is warranted. hour urine collection for creatinine
Strength testing particularly of exten- clearance, protein, and electrolytes
sor muscle groups of all extremities is may be indicated. Elevated uric acid
of fundamental importance. levels may result from lead-induced
Cranial nerve evaluation should also renal disease and a serum uric acid
be included in the routine examination. level might be performed.
The abdominal examination should An electrocardiogram and chest x-
include auscultation for bowel sounds ray may be obtained as deemed appro-
and abdominal bruits and palpation for priate.
organomegaly, masses, and diffuse ab- Sophisticated and highly specialized
dominal tenderness. testing should not be done routinely
Cardiovascular examination should and where indicated should be under
evaluate possible early signs of conges- the direction of a specialist.
tive heart failure. Pulmonary status
should be addressed particularly if res- IV. Laboratory Evaluation
pirator protection is contemplated. The blood lead level at present re-
As part of the medical evaluation, mains the single most important test
the interim lead standard requires the to monitor lead exposure and is the
following laboratory studies: test used in the medical surveillance
1. Blood lead level program under the lead standard to
2. Hemoglobin and hematocrit deter- guide employee medical removal. The
minations, red cell indices, and exam- ZPP has several advantages over the
ination of the peripheral blood smear blood lead level. Because of its rel-
to evaluate red blood cell morphology atively recent development and the
3. Blood urea nitrogen lack of extensive data concerning its
4. Serum creatinine interpretation, the ZPP currently re-
5. Routine urinalysis with micro- mains an ancillary test.
scopic examination. This section will discuss the blood
6. A zinc protoporphyrin level. lead level and ZPP in detail and will
In addition to the above, the physi- outline their relative advantages and
cian is authorized to order any further disadvantages. Other blood tests cur-
laboratory or other tests which he or rently available to evaluate lead expo-
she deems necessary in accordance sure will also be reviewed.
with sound medical practice. The eval- The blood lead level is a good index
uation must also include pregnancy of current or recent lead absorption
testing or laboratory evaluation of when there is no anemia present and
male fertility if requested by the em- when the worker has not taken any
ployee. Additional tests which are chelating agents. However, blood lead
probably not warranted on a routine levels along with urinary lead levels do
basis but may be appropriate when not necessarily indicate the total body
115
burden of lead and are not adequate as such is a better indicator of lead
measures of past exposure. One reason toxicity than the level of blood lead
for this is that lead has a high affinity itself. The level of ZPP reflects lead
for bone and up to 90% of the body’s absorption over the preceding 3 to 4
total lead is deposited there. A very months, and therefore is a better indi-
important component of the total lead cator of lead body burden. The ZPP re-
body burden is lead in soft tissue (liver, quires more time than the blood lead
kidney, and brain). This fraction of the to read significantly elevated levels;
lead body burden, the biologically ac- the return to normal after dis-
tive lead, is not entirely reflected by continuing lead exposure is also slower.
blood lead levels since it is a function Furthermore, the ZPP test is simpler,
of the dynamics of lead absorption, dis- faster, and less expensive to perform
tribution, deposition in bone and excre- and no contamination is possible.
tion. Following discontinuation of ex- Many investigators believe it is the
posure to lead, the excess body burden most reliable means of monitoring
is only slowly mobilized from bone and chronic lead absorption.
other relatively stable body stores and Zinc protoporphyrin results from the
excreted. Consequently, a high blood inhibition of the enzyme ferrochelatase
lead level may only represent recent which catalyzes the insertion of an
heavy exposure to lead without a sig- iron molecule into the protoporphyrin
nificant total body excess and likewise molecule, which then becomes heme. If
a low blood lead level does not exclude iron is not inserted into the molecule
an elevated total body burden of lead. then zinc, having a greater affinity for
Also due to its correlation with re- protoporphyrin, takes the place of the
cent exposures, the blood lead level iron, forming ZPP.
may vary considerably over short time
An elevation in the level of circu-
intervals.
lating ZPP may occur at blood lead
To minimize laboratory error and er-
levels as low as 20–30 μg/dl in some
roneous results due to contamination,
workers. Once the blood lead level has
blood specimens must be carefully col-
reached 40 μg/dl there is more marked
lected after thorough cleaning of the
rise in the ZPP value from its normal
skin with appropriate methods using
range of less than 100 μg/dl100 ml. In-
lead-free blood containers and analyzed
by a reliable laboratory. Under the creases in blood lead levels beyond 40
standard, samples must be analyzed in μg/100 g are associated with exponential
laboratories which are approved by increases in ZPP.
OSHA. Analysis is to be made using Whereas blood lead levels fluctuate
atomic absorption spectrophotometry, over short time spans, ZPP levels re-
anodic stripping voltammetry or any main relatively stable. ZPP is meas-
method which meets the accuracy re- ured directly in red blood cells and is
quirements set forth by the standard. present for the cell’s entire 120 day life-
The determination of lead in urine is span. Therefore, the ZPP level in blood
generally considered a less reliable reflects the average ZPP production
monitoring technique than analysis of over the previous 3–4 months and con-
whole blood primarily due to indi- sequently the average lead exposure
vidual variability in urinary excretion during that time interval.
capacity as well as the technical dif- It is recommended that a hematocrit
ficulty of obtaining accurate 24 hour be determined whenever a confirmed
urine collections. In addition, workers ZPP of 50 μg/100 ml whole blood is ob-
with renal insufficiency, whether due tained to rule out a significant under-
to lead or some other cause, may have lying anemia. If the ZPP is in excess of
decreased lead clearance and con- 100 μg/100 ml and not associated with
sequently urine lead levels may under- abnormal elevations in blood lead lev-
estimate the true lead burden. There- els, the laboratory should be checked
fore, urine lead levels should not be to be sure that blood leads were deter-
used as a routine test. mined using atomic absorption

The zinc protoporphyrin test, unlike spectrophotometry anodic stripping
the blood lead determination, measures voltammetry, or any method which
an adverse metabolic effect of lead and meets the accuracy requirements set
116
forth by the standard by an OSHA ap- in lead poisoned individuals, but its
proved laboratory which is experienced correlation with blood lead levels and
in lead level determinations. Repeat ZPP are not as good as those of ALA.
periodic blood lead studies should be Increases in urinary porphyrins are not
obtained in all individuals with ele- diagnostic of lead toxicity and may be
vated ZPP levels to be certain that an seen in porphyria, some liver diseases,
associated elevated blood lead level has and in patients with high reticulocyte
not been missed due to transient fluc- counts.
tuations in blood leads. Summary. The Occupational Safety
ZPP has a characteristic fluorescence and Health Administration’s interim
spectrum with a peak at 594 nm which standard for inorganic lead in the con-
is detectable with a struction industry places significant
hematofluorimeter. The emphasis on the medical surveillance
hematofluorimeter is accurate and of all workers exposed to levels of inor-
portable and can provide on-site, in- ganic lead above 30 μg/m3 TWA. The
stantaneous results for workers who physician has a fundamental role in
can be frequently tested via a finger this surveillance program, and in the
prick. operation of the medical removal pro-
However, careful attention must be tection program.
given to calibration and quality con- Even with adequate worker edu-
trol procedures. Limited data on blood cation on the adverse health effects of
lead-ZPP correlations and the ZPP lev- lead and appropriate training in work
els which are associated with the ad- practices, personal hygiene and other
verse health effects discussed in Sec- control measures, the physician has a
tion 2 are the major limitations of the primary responsibility for evaluating
test. Also it is difficult to correlate potential lead toxicity in the worker.
ZPP levels with environmental expo- It is only through a careful and de-
sure and there is some variation of re-
tailed medical and work history, a
sponse with age and sex. Nevertheless,
complete physical examination and ap-
the ZPP promises to be an important
propriate laboratory testing that an
diagnostic test for the early detection
accurate assessment can be made.
of lead toxicity and its value will in-
Many of the adverse health effects of
crease as more data is collected regard-
lead toxicity are either irreversible or
ing its relationship to other manifesta-
only partially reversible and therefore
tions of lead poisoning.
early detection of disease is very im-
Levels of delta-aminolevulinic acid
portant.
(ALA) in the urine are also used as a
measure of lead exposure. Increasing This document outlines the medical
concentrations of ALA are believed to monitoring program as defined by the
result from the inhibition of the en- occupational safety and health stand-
zyme delta-aminolevulinic acid ard for inorganic lead. It reviews the
dehydrase (ALA-D). Although the test adverse health effects of lead poisoning
is relatively easy to perform, inexpen- and describes the important elements
sive, and rapid, the disadvantages in- of the history and physical examina-
clude variability in results, the neces- tions as they relate to these adverse ef-
sity to collect a complete 24 hour urine fects. Finally, the appropriate labora-
sample which has a specific gravity tory testing for evaluating lead expo-
greater than 1.010, and also the fact sure and toxicity is presented.
that ALA decomposes in the presence It is hoped that this review and dis-
of light. cussion will give the physician a better
The pattern of porphyrin excretion in understanding of the OSHA standard
the urine can also be helpful in identi- with the ultimate goal of protecting
fying lead intoxication. With lead poi- the health and well-being of the worker
soning, the urine concentrations of exposed to lead under his or her care.
coproporphyrins I and II,
[58 FR 26627, May 4, 1993, as amended at 58

porphobilinogen and uroporphyrin I FR 34218, June 24, 1993; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
rise. The most important increase, 1996; 63 FR 1296, Jan. 8, 1998; 70 FR 1143, Jan.
however, is that of coproporphyrin III; 5, 2005; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3, 2006; 71 FR 50191,
levels may exceed 5,000 μg/l in the urine Aug. 24, 2006; 73 FR 75588, Dec. 12, 2008]
117
§ 1926.64 Process safety management ardous chemicals, that presents serious

of highly hazardous chemicals. danger to employees in the workplace.
Purpose. This section contains re- Facility means the buildings, con-
quirements for preventing or mini- tainers or equipment which contain a
mizing the consequences of cata- process.
strophic releases of toxic, reactive, Highly hazardous chemical means a
flammable, or explosive chemicals. substance possessing toxic, reactive,
These releases may result in toxic, fire flammable, or explosive properties and
or explosion hazards. specified by paragraph (a)(1) of this
(a) Application. (1) This section ap- section.
plies to the following: Hot work means work involving elec-
(i) A process which involves a chem- tric or gas welding, cutting, brazing, or
ical at or above the specified threshold similar flame or spark-producing oper-
quantities listed in Appendix A to this ations.
section; Normally unoccupied remote facility
(ii) A process which involves a flam- means a facility which is operated,
mable liquid or gas (as defined in maintained or serviced by employees
§ 1926.59(c) of this part) on site in one who visit the facility only periodically
location, in a quantity of 10,000 pounds to check its operation and to perform
(4535.9 kg) or more except for: necessary operating or maintenance
(A) Hydrocarbon fuels used solely for tasks. No employees are permanently
workplace consumption as a fuel (e.g., stationed at the facility. Facilities
propane used for comfort heating, gaso- meeting this definition are not contig-
line for vehicle refueling), if such fuels uous with, and must be geographically
are not a part of a process containing remote from all other buildings, proc-
another highly hazardous chemical esses or persons.
covered by this standard;
Process means any activity involving
(B) Flammable liquids stored in at-
a highly hazardous chemical including
mospheric tanks or transferred which
any use, storage, manufacturing, han-
are kept below their normal boiling
dling, or the on-site movement of such
point without benefit of chilling or re-
chemicals, or combination of these ac-
frigeration.
tivities. For purposes of this definition,
(2) This section does not apply to:
any group of vessels which are inter-
(i) Retail facilities;
connected and separate vessels which
(ii) Oil or gas well drilling or serv-
are located such that a highly haz-
icing operations; or,
(iii) Normally unoccupied remote fa- ardous chemical could be involved in a
cilities. potential release shall be considered a
(b) Definitions. Atmospheric tank single process.
means a storage tank which has been Replacement in kind means a replace-
designed to operate at pressures from ment which satisfies the design speci-
atmospheric through 0.5 p.s.i.g. (pounds fication.
per square inch gauge, 3.45 Kpa). Trade secret means any confidential
Boiling point means the boiling point formula, pattern, process, device, infor-
of a liquid at a pressure of 14.7 pounds mation or compilation of information
per square inch absolute (p.s.i.a.) (760 that is used in an employer’s business,
mm.). For the purposes of this section, and that gives the employer an oppor-
where an accurate boiling point is un- tunity to obtain an advantage over
available for the material in question, competitors who do not know or use it.
or for mixtures which do not have a Appendix D contained in § 1926.59 sets
constant boiling point, the 10 percent out the criteria to be used in evalu-
point of a distillation performed in ac- ating trade secrets.
cordance with the Standard Method of (c) Employee participation. (1) Employ-
Test for Distillation of Petroleum ers shall develop a written plan of ac-
Products, ASTM D-86-62, may be used tion regarding the implementation of
as the boiling point of the liquid. the employee participation required by

Catastrophic release means a major this paragraph.
uncontrolled emission, fire, or explo- (2) Employers shall consult with em-
sion, involving one or more highly haz- ployees and their representatives on
118
the conduct and development of proc- (D) Safe upper and lower limits for
ess hazards analyses and on the devel- such items as temperatures, pressures,
opment of the other elements of proc- flows or compositions; and,
ess safety management in this stand- (E) An evaluation of the con-
ard. sequences of deviations, including
(3) Employers shall provide to em- those affecting the safety and health of
ployees and their representatives ac- employees.
cess to process hazard analyses and to (ii) Where the original technical in-
all other information required to be deformation no longer exists, such infor-
veloped under this standard. mation may be developed in conjunc-
(d) Process safety information. In action with the process hazard analysis
cordance with the schedule set forth in in sufficient detail to support the anal-
paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the em- ysis.
ployer shall complete a compilation of (3) Information pertaining to the equip-
written process safety information be- ment in the process. (i) Information per-
fore conducting any process hazard taining to the equipment in the process
analysis required by the standard. The shall include:
compilation of written process safety (A) Materials of construction;
information is to enable the employer (B) Piping and instrument diagrams
and the employees involved in oper- (P&ID’s);
ating the process to identify and under- (C) Electrical classification;
stand the hazards posed by those proc-
(D) Relief system design and design
esses involving highly hazardous
basis;
chemicals. This process safety informa-
(E) Ventilation system design;
tion shall include information per-
taining to the hazards of the highly (F) Design codes and standards em-
hazardous chemicals used or produced ployed;
by the process, information pertaining (G) Material and energy balances for
to the technology of the process, and processes built after May 26, 1992; and,
information pertaining to the equip- (H) Safety systems (e.g. interlocks,
ment in the process. detection or suppression systems).
(1) Information pertaining to the haz- (ii) The employer shall document
ards of the highly hazardous chemicals in that equipment complies with recog-
the process. This information shall con- nized and generally accepted good engi-
sist of at least the following: neering practices.
(i) Toxicity information; (iii) For existing equipment designed
(ii) Permissible exposure limits; and constructed in accordance with
(iii) Physical data; codes, standards, or practices that are
(iv) Reactivity data: no longer in general use, the employer
(v) Corrosivity data; shall determine and document that the
(vi) Thermal and chemical stability equipment is designed, maintained, in-
data; and spected, tested, and operating in a safe
(vii) Hazardous effects of inadvertent manner.
mixing of different materials that (e) Process hazard analysis. (1) The
could foreseeably occur. employer shall perform an initial proc-
NOTE: Material Safety Data Sheets meet- ess hazard analysis (hazard evaluation)
ing the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59(g) on processes covered by this standard.
may be used to comply with this require- The process hazard analysis shall be
ment to the extent they contain the infor- appropriate to the complexity of the
mation required by this subparagraph. process and shall identify, evaluate,
(2) Information pertaining to the tech- and control the hazards involved in the
nology of the process. (i) Information process. Employers shall determine and
concerning the technology of the proc- document the priority order for con-
ess shall include at least the following: ducting process hazard analyses based
(A) A block flow diagram or sim- on a rationale which includes such con-
plified process flow diagram (see Ap- siderations as extent of the process
pendix B to this section); hazards, number of potentially affected
(B) Process chemistry; employees, age of the process, and op-
(C) Maximum intended inventory; erating history of the process. The
119
process hazard analysis shall be con- (vii) A qualitative evaluation of a

ducted as soon as possible, but not range of the possible safety and health
later than the following schedule: effects of failure of controls on employ-
(i) No less than 25 percent of the ini- ees in the workplace.
tial process hazards analyses shall be (4) The process hazard analysis shall
completed by May 26, 1994; be performed by a team with expertise
(ii) No less than 50 percent of the ini- in engineering and process operations,
tial process hazards analyses shall be and the team shall include at least one
completed by May 26, 1995; employee who has experience and
(iii) No less than 75 percent of the knowledge specific to the process being
initial process hazards analyses shall evaluated. Also, one member of the
be completed by May 26, 1996; team must be knowledgeable in the
(iv) All initial process hazards anal- specific process hazard analysis meth-
yses shall be completed by May 26, 1997. odology being used.
(v) Process hazards analyses com- (5) The employer shall establish a
pleted after May 26, 1987 which meet system to promptly address the team’s
the requirements of this paragraph are findings and recommendations; assure
acceptable as initial process hazards that the recommendations are resolved
analyses. These process hazard anal- in a timely manner and that the reso-
yses shall be updated and revalidated, lution is documented; document what
based on their completion date, in ac- actions are to be taken; complete ac-
cordance with paragraph (e)(6) of this tions as soon as possible; develop a
standard. written schedule of when these actions
(2) The employer shall use one or are to be completed; communicate the
more of the following methodologies actions to operating, maintenance and
that are appropriate to determine and other employees whose work assign-
evaluate the hazards of the process ments are in the process and who may
being analyzed. be affected by the recommendations or
(i) What-If; actions.
(ii) Checklist; (6) At least every five (5) years after
(iii) What-If/Checklist; the completion of the initial process
(iv) Hazard and Operability Study hazard analysis, the process hazard
(HAZOP); analysis shall be updated and revali-
(v) Failure Mode and Effects Analysis dated by a team meeting the require-
(FMEA); ments in paragraph (e)(4) of this sec-
(vi) Fault-Tree Analysis; or tion, to assure that the process hazard
(vii) An appropriate equivalent meth- analysis is consistent with the current
odology. process.
(3) The process hazard analysis shall (7) Employers shall retain process
address: hazards analyses and updates or re-
(i) The hazards of the process; validations for each process covered by
(ii) The identification of any previous this section, as well as the documented
incident which had a likely potential resolution of recommendations de-
for catastrophic consequences in the scribed in paragraph (e)(5) of this sec-
workplace; tion for the life of the process.
(iii) Engineering and administrative (f) Operating procedures. (1) The em-
controls applicable to the hazards and ployer shall develop and implement
their interrelationships such as appro- written operating procedures that pro-
priate application of detection meth- vide clear instructions for safely con-
odologies to provide early warning of ducting activities involved in each cov-
releases. (Acceptable detection meth- ered process consistent with the proc-
ods might include process monitoring ess safety information and shall ad-
and control instrumentation with dress at least the following elements.
alarms, and detection hardware such as (i) Steps for each operating phase:
hydrocarbon sensors.); (A) Initial startup;
(iv) Consequences of failure of engi- (B) Normal operations;

neering and administrative controls; (C) Temporary operations;
(v) Facility siting; (D) Emergency shutdown including
(vi) Human factors; and the conditions under which emergency
120
shutdown is required, and the assign- newly assigned process, shall be

ment of shutdown responsibility to trained in an overview of the process
qualified operators to ensure that and in the operating procedures as
emergency shutdown is executed in a specified in paragraph (f) of this sec-
safe and timely manner. tion. The training shall include empha-
(E) Emergency operations; sis on the specific safety and health
(F) Normal shutdown; and, hazards, emergency operations includ-
(G) Startup following a turnaround, ing shutdown, and safe work practices
or after an emergency shutdown. applicable to the employee’s job tasks.
(ii) Operating limits: (ii) In lieu of initial training for
(A) Consequences of deviation; and those employees already involved in
(B) Steps required to correct or avoid operating a process on May 26, 1992, an
deviation. employer may certify in writing that
(iii) Safety and health consider- the employee has the required knowl-
ations: edge, skills, and abilities to safely
(A) Properties of, and hazards pre- carry out the duties and responsibil-
sented by, the chemicals used in the ities as specified in the operating pro-
process; cedures.
(B) Precautions necessary to prevent (2) Refresher training. Refresher train-
exposure, including engineering con- ing shall be provided at least every
trols, administrative controls, and per- three years, and more often if nec-
sonal protective equipment; essary, to each employee involved in
(C) Control measures to be taken if operating a process to assure that the
physical contact or airborne exposure employee understands and adheres to
occurs; the current operating procedures of the
(D) Quality control for raw materials process. The employer, in consultation
and control of hazardous chemical in- with the employees involved in oper-
ventory levels; and, ating the process, shall determine the
(E) Any special or unique hazards. appropriate frequency of refresher
(iv) Safety systems and their func- training.
tions. (3) Training documentation. The em-
(2) Operating procedures shall be ployer shall ascertain that each em-
readily accessible to employees who ployee involved in operating a process
work in or maintain a process. has received and understood the train-
(3) The operating procedures shall be ing required by this paragraph. The
reviewed as often as necessary to as- employer shall prepare a record which
sure that they reflect current oper- contains the identity of the employee,
ating practice, including changes that the date of training, and the means
result from changes in process chemi- used to verify that the employee under-
cals, technology, and equipment, and stood the training.
changes to facilities. The employer (h) Contractors—(1) Application. This
shall certify annually that these oper- paragraph applies to contractors per-
ating procedures are current and accu- forming maintenance or repair, turn-
rate. around, major renovation, or specialty
(4) The employer shall develop and work on or adjacent to a covered proc-
implement safe work practices to pro- ess. It does not apply to contractors
vide for the control of hazards during providing incidental services which do
operations such as lockout/tagout; con- not influence process safety, such as
fined space entry; opening process janitorial work, food and drink serv-
equipment or piping; and control over ices, laundry, delivery or other supply
entrance into a facility by mainte- services.
nance, contractor, laboratory, or other (2) Employer responsibilities. (i) The
support personnel. These safe work employer, when selecting a contractor,
practices shall apply to employees and shall obtain and evaluate information
contractor employees. regarding the contract employer’s safe-
(g) Training—(1) Initial training. (i) ty performance and programs.

Each employee presently involved in (ii) The employer shall inform con-
operating a process, and each employee tract employers of the known potential
before being involved in operating a fire, explosion, or toxic release hazards
121
related to the contractor’s work and modified facilities when the modifica-
the process. tion is significant enough to require a
(iii) The employer shall explain to change in the process safety informa-
contract employers the applicable pro- tion.
visions of the emergency action plan (2) The pre-startup safety review
required by paragraph (n) of this sec- shall confirm that prior to the intro-
tion. duction of highly hazardous chemicals
(iv) The employer shall develop and to a process:
implement safe work practices con- (i) Construction and equipment is in
sistent with paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- accordance with design specifications;
tion, to control the entrance, presence (ii) Safety, operating, maintenance,
and exit of contract employers and and emergency procedures are in place
contract employees in covered process
and are adequate;
areas.
(iii) For new facilities, a process haz-
(v) The employer shall periodically
evaluate the performance of contract ard analysis has been performed and
employers in fulfilling their obliga- recommendations have been resolved
tions as specified in paragraph (h)(3) of or implemented before startup; and
this section. modified facilities meet the require-
(vi) The employer shall maintain a ments contained in management of
contract employee injury and illness change, paragraph (l).
log related to the contractor’s work in (iv) Training of each employee in-
process areas. volved in operating a process has been
(3) Contract employer responsibilities. completed.
(i) The contract employer shall assure (j) Mechanical integrity—(1) Applica-
that each contract employee is trained tion. Paragraphs (j)(2) through (j)(6) of
in the work practices necessary to safe- this section apply to the following
ly perform his/her job. process equipment:
(ii) The contract employer shall as- (i) Pressure vessels and storage
sure that each contract employee is in- tanks;
structed in the known potential fire, (ii) Piping systems (including piping
explosion, or toxic release hazards re- components such as valves);
lated to his/her job and the process, (iii) Relief and vent systems and de-
and the applicable provisions of the vices;
emergency action plan. (iv) Emergency shutdown systems;
(iii) The contract employer shall doc- (v) Controls (including monitoring
ument that each contract employee devices and sensors, alarms, and inter-
has received and understood the train- locks) and,
ing required by this paragraph. The
(vi) Pumps.
contract employer shall prepare a
record which contains the identity of (2) Written procedures. The employer
the contract employee, the date of shall establish and implement written
training, and the means used to verify procedures to maintain the on-going
that the employee understood the integrity of process equipment.
training. (3) Training for process maintenance
(iv) The contract employer shall as- activities. The employer shall train each
sure that each contract employee fol- employee involved in maintaining the
lows the safety rules of the facility in- on-going integrity of process equip-
cluding the safe work practices re- ment in an overview of that process
quired by paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- and its hazards and in the procedures
tion. applicable to the employee’s job tasks
(v) The contract employer shall ad- to assure that the employee can per-
vise the employer of any unique haz- form the job tasks in a safe manner.
ards presented by the contract employ- (4) Inspection and testing. (i) Inspec-
er’s work, or of any hazards found by tions and tests shall be performed on
the contract employer’s work. process equipment.

(i) Pre-startup safety review. (1) The (ii) Inspection and testing procedures
employer shall perform a pre-startup shall follow recognized and generally
safety review for new facilities and for accepted good engineering practices.
122
(iii) The frequency of inspections and (except for ‘‘replacements in kind’’) to

tests of process equipment shall be con- process chemicals, technology, equip-
sistent with applicable manufacturers’ ment, and procedures; and, changes to
recommendations and good engineering facilities that affect a covered process.
practices, and more frequently if deter- (2) The procedures shall assure that
mined to be necessary by prior oper- the following considerations are ad-
ating experience. dressed prior to any change:
(iv) The employer shall document (i) The technical basis for the pro-
each inspection and test that has been posed change;
performed on process equipment. The (ii) Impact of change on safety and
documentation shall identify the date health;
of the inspection or test, the name of (iii) Modifications to operating pro-
the person who performed the inspec- cedures;
tion or test, the serial number or other (iv) Necessary time period for the
identifier of the equipment on which change; and,
the inspection or test was performed, a (v) Authorization requirements for
description of the inspection or test the proposed change.
performed, and the results of the in- (3) Employees involved in operating a
spection or test. process and maintenance and contract
(5) Equipment deficiencies. The em- employees whose job tasks will be af-
ployer shall correct deficiencies in fected by a change in the process shall
equipment that are outside acceptable be informed of, and trained in, the
limits (defined by the process safety in- change prior to start-up of the process
formation in paragraph (d) of this sec- or affected part of the process.
tion) before further use or in a safe and (4) If a change covered by this para-
timely manner when necessary means graph results in a change in the process
are taken to assure safe operation. safety information required by para-
(6) Quality assurance. (i) In the con- graph (d) of this section, such informa-
struction of new plants and equipment, tion shall be updated accordingly.
the employer shall assure that equip- (5) If a change covered by this para-
ment as it is fabricated is suitable for graph results in a change in the oper-
the process application for which they ating procedures or practices required
will be used. by paragraph (f) of this section, such
(ii) Appropriate checks and inspec- procedures or practices shall be up-
tions shall be performed to assure that dated accordingly.
equipment is installed properly and (m) Incident investigation. (1) The em-
consistent with design specifications ployer shall investigate each incident
and the manufacturer’s instructions. which resulted in, or could reasonably
(iii) The employer shall assure that have resulted in a catastrophic release
maintenance materials, spare parts and of highly hazardous chemical in the
equipment are suitable for the process workplace.
application for which they will be used. (2) An incident investigation shall be
(k) Hot work permit. (1) The employer initiated as promptly as possible, but
shall issue a hot work permit for hot not later than 48 hours following the
work operations conducted on or near a incident.
covered process. (3) An incident investigation team
(2) The permit shall document that shall be established and consist of at
the fire prevention and protection re- least one person knowledgeable in the
quirements in 29 CFR 1926.352 have process involved, including a contract
been implemented prior to beginning employee if the incident involved work
the hot work operations; it shall indi- of the contractor, and other persons
cate the date(s) authorized for hot with appropriate knowledge and experi-
work; and identify the object on which ence to thoroughly investigate and
hot work is to be performed. The per- analyze the incident.
mit shall be kept on file until comple- (4) A report shall be prepared at the
tion of the hot work operations. conclusion of the investigation which

(l) Management of change. (1) The em- includes at a minimum:
ployer shall establish and implement (i) Date of incident;
written procedures to manage changes (ii) Date investigation began;
123
(iii) A description of the incident; graph (f) of this section), and those in-
(iv) The factors that contributed to volved in incident investigations (re-
the incident; and, quired by paragraph (m) of this sec-
(v) Any recommendations resulting tion), emergency planning and response
from the investigation. (paragraph (n) of this section) and com-
(5) The employer shall establish a pliance audits (paragraph (o) of this
system to promptly address and resolve section) without regard to possible
the incident report findings and rec- trade secret status of such informa-
ommendations. Resolutions and correction.
tive actions shall be documented. (2) Nothing in this paragraph shall
(6) The report shall be reviewed with preclude the employer from requiring
all affected personnel whose job tasks the persons to whom the information is
are relevant to the incident findings in- made available under paragraph (p)(1)
cluding contract employees where ap- of this section to enter into confiden-
plicable. tiality agreements not to disclose the
(7) Incident investigation reports information as set forth in 29 CFR
shall be retained for five years. 1926.59.
(n) Emergency planning and re- (3) Subject to the rules and proce-
sponse. The employer shall establish dures set forth in 29 CFR 1926.59(i) (1)
and implement an emergency action through (12), employees and their des-
plan for the entire plant in accordance ignated representatives shall have ac-
with the provisions of 29 CFR 1926.35(a). cess to trade secret information con-
In addition, the emergency action plan tained within the process hazard anal-
shall include procedures for handling ysis and other documents required to
small releases. Employers covered be developed by this standard.
under this standard may also be sub-
ject to the hazardous waste and emer- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.64—LIST OF HIGH-
gency response provisions contained in LY HAZARDOUS CHEMICALS, TOXICS
29 CFR 1926.65(a), (p) and (q). AND REACTIVES (MANDATORY)
(o) Compliance audits. (1) Employers This Appendix contains a listing of
shall certify that they have evaluated toxic and reactive highly hazardous
compliance with the provisions of this chemicals which present a potential for
section at least every three years to a catastrophic event at or above the
verify that the procedures and prac- threshold quantity.
tices developed under the standard are
adequate and are being followed. Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
(2) The compliance audit shall be
conducted by at least one person Acetaldehyde ......................... 75-07-0 2500
knowledgeable in the process. Acrolein (2-Propenal) ............ 107-02-8 150
(3) A report of the findings of the Acrylyl Chloride ..................... 814-68-6 250
Allyl Chloride ......................... 107-05-1 1000
audit shall be developed. Allylamine .............................. 107-11-9 1000
(4) The employer shall promptly de- Alkylaluminums ..................... Varies 5000
termine and document an appropriate Ammonia, Anhydrous ............ 7664-41-7 10000
response to each of the findings of the Ammonia solutions (greater
compliance audit, and document that than 44% ammonia by
deficiencies have been corrected. weight) ............................... 7664-41-7 15000
(5) Employers shall retain the two (2) Ammonium Perchlorate ......... 7790-98-9 500
Ammonium Permanganate ... 7787-36-2 7500
most recent compliance audit reports. Arsine (also called Arsenic
(p) Trade secrets. (1) Employers shall Hydride) ............................. 7784-42-1 100
make all information necessary to Bis(Chloromethyl) Ether ........ 542-88-1 100
comply with the section available to Boron Trichloride ................... 10294-34-5 2500
those persons responsible for compiling Boron Trifluoride .................... 7637-07-2 250
the process safety information (re- Bromine ................................. 7726-95-6 1500
quired by paragraph (d) of this section), Bromine Chloride .................. 13863-41-7 1500
Bromine Pentafluoride ........... 7789-30-2 2500
those assisting in the development of
Bromine Trifluoride ................ 7787-71-5 15000

the process hazard analysis (required 3-Bromopropyne (also called
by paragraph (e) of this section), those Propargyl Bromide) ............ 106-96-7 100
responsible for developing the oper- Butyl Hydroperoxide (Ter-
ating procedures (required by para- tiary) ................................... 75-91-2 5000
124
Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
Butyl Perbenzoate (Tertiary) 614-45-9 7500 Hydrogen Sulfide ................... 7783-06-4 1500
Carbonyl Chloride (see Phos- Hydroxylamine ....................... 7803-49-8 2500
gene) .................................. 75-44-5 100 Iron, Pentacarbonyl ............... 13463-40-6 250
* Carbonyl Fluoride ............... 353-50-4 2500 Isopropylamine ...................... 75-31-0 5000
Cellulose Nitrate (concentra- Ketene ................................... 463-51-4 100
tion greater than 12.6% ni- Methacrylaldehyde ................ 78-85-3 1000
trogen ................................. 9004-70-0 2500 Methacryloyl Chloride ............ 920-46-7 150
Chlorine ................................. 7782-50-5 1500 Methacryloyloxyethyl
Chlorine Dioxide .................... 10049-04-4 1000 Isocyanate ......................... 30674-80-7 100
Chlorine Pentrafluoride ......... 13637-63-3 1000 Methyl Acrylonitrile ................ 126-98-7 250
Chlorine Trifluoride ................ 7790-91-2 1000 Methylamine, Anhydrous ....... 74-89-5 1000
Chlorodiethylaluminum (also Methyl Bromide ..................... 74-83-9 2500
called Diethylaluminum Methyl Chloride ..................... 74-87-3 15000
Chloride) ............................ 96-10-6 5000 Methyl Chloroformate ............ 79-22-1 500
1-Chloro-2,4-Dinitrobenzene 97-00-7 5000 Methyl Ethyl Ketone Peroxide
Chloromethyl Methyl Ether .... 107-30-2 500 (concentration greater than
Chloropicrin ........................... 76-06-2 500 60%) .................................. 1338-23-4 5000
Chloropicrin and Methyl Bro- Methyl Fluoroacetate ............. 453-18-9 100
mide mixture ...................... None 1500 Methyl Fluorosulfate .............. 421-20-5 100
Chloropicrin and Methyl Chlo- Methyl Hydrazine .................. 60-34-4 100
ride mixture ........................ None 1500 Methyl Iodide ......................... 74-88-4 7500
Cumene Hydroperoxide ........ 80-15-9 5000 Methyl Isocyanate ................. 624-83-9 250
Cyanogen .............................. 460-19-5 2500 Methyl Mercaptan .................. 74-93-1 5000
Cyanogen Chloride ............... 506-77-4 500 Methyl Vinyl Ketone .............. 79-84-4 100
Cyanuric Fluoride .................. 675-14-9 100 Methyltrichlorosilane .............. 75-79-6 500
Diacetyl Peroxide (concentra- Nickel Carbonly (Nickel
tion greater than 70%) ....... 110-22-5 5000 Tetracarbonyl) .................... 13463-39-3 150
Diazomethane ....................... 334-88-3 500 Nitric Acid (94.5% by weight
Dibenzoyl Peroxide ............... 94-36-0 7500 or greater) .......................... 7697-37-2 500
Diborane ................................ 19287-45-7 100 Nitric Oxide ............................ 10102-43-9 250
Dibutyl Peroxide (Tertiary) .... 110-05-4 5000 Nitroaniline (para Nitroaniline 100-01-6 5000
Dichloro Acetylene ................ 7572-29-4 250 Nitromethane ......................... 75-52-5 2500
Dichlorosilane ........................ 4109-96-0 2500 Nitrogen Dioxide .................... 10102-44-0 250
Diethylzinc ............................. 557-20-0 10000 Nitrogen Oxides (NO; NO(2);
Diisopropyl N2O4; N2O3) ..................... 10102-44-0 250
Peroxydicarbonate ............. 105-64-6 7500 Nitrogen Tetroxide (also
Dilauroyl Peroxide ................. 105-74-8 7500 called Nitrogen Peroxide) .. 10544-72-6 250
Dimethyldichlorosilane .......... 75-78-5 1000 Nitrogen Trifluoride ................ 7783-54-2 5000
Dimethylhydrazine, 1,1- ........ 57-14-7 1000 Nitrogen Trioxide ................... 10544-73-7 250
Dimethylamine, Anhydrous ... 124-40-3 2500 Oleum (65% to 80% by
2,4-Dinitroaniline ................... 97-02-9 5000 weight; also called Fuming
Ethyl Methyl Ketone Peroxide Sulfuric Acid) ..................... 8014-94-7 1000
(also Methyl Ethyl Ketone Osmium Tetroxide ................. 20816-12-0 100
Peroxide; concentration Oxygen Difluoride (Fluorine
greater than 60%) .............. 1338-23-4 5000 Monoxide) .......................... 7783-41-7 100
Ethyl Nitrite ............................ 109-95-5 5000 Ozone .................................... 10028-15-6 100
Ethylamine ............................. 75-04-7 7500 Pentaborane .......................... 19624-22-7 100
Ethylene Fluorohydrin ........... 371-62-0 100 Peracetic Acid (concentration
Ethylene Oxide ...................... 75-21-8 5000 greater 60% Acetic Acid;
Ethyleneimine ........................ 151-56-4 1000 also called Peroxyacetic
Fluorine ................................. 7782-41-4 1000 Acid) ................................... 79-21-0 1000
Formaldehyde (Formalin) ...... 50-00-0 1000 Perchloric Acid (concentration
Furan ..................................... 110-00-9 500 greater than 60% by
Hexafluoroacetone ................ 684-16-2 5000 weight) ............................... 7601-90-3 5000
Hydrochloric Acid, Anhydrous 7647-01-0 5000 Perchloromethyl Mercaptan .. 594-42-3 150
Hydrofluoric Acid, Anhydrous 7664-39-3 1000 Perchloryl Fluoride ................ 7616-94-6 5000
Hydrogen Bromide ................ 10035-10-6 5000 Peroxyacetic Acid (concentra-
Hydrogen Chloride ................ 7647-01-0 5000 tion greater than 60% Ace-
Hydrogen Cyanide, Anhy- tic Acid; also called Per-
drous .................................. 74-90-8 1000 acetic Acid) ........................ 79-21-0 1000

Hydrogen Fluoride ................. 7664-39-3 1000 Phosgene (also called Car-
Hydrogen Peroxide (52% by bonyl Chloride) .................. 75-44-5 100
weight or greater) .............. 7722-84-1 7500 Phosphine (Hydrogen
Hydrogen Selenide ................ 7783-07-5 150 Phosphide) ......................... 7803-51-2 100
125
Chemical Name CAS* TQ** Chemical Name CAS* TQ**
Phosphorus Oxychloride Sulfuric Anhydride (also

(also called Phosphoryl called Sulfur Trioxide) ........ 7446-11-9 1000
Chloride) ............................ 10025-87-3 1000 Tellurium Hexafluoride .......... 7783-80-4 250
Phosphorus Trichloride ......... 7719-12-2 1000 Tetrafluoroethylene ............... 116-14-3 5000
Phosphoryl Chloride (also Tetrafluorohydrazine ............. 10036-47-2 5000
called Phosphorus Tetramethyl Lead .................. 75-74-1 1000
Oxychloride) ....................... 10025-87-3 1000 Thionyl Chloride .................... 7719-09-7 250
Propargyl Bromide ................ 106-96-7 100 Trichloro (chloromethyl) Sil-
Propyl Nitrate ........................ 627-3-4 2500 ane ..................................... 1558-25-4 100
Sarin ...................................... 107-44-8 100 Trichloro (dichlorophenyl) Sil-
ane ..................................... 27137-85-5 2500
Selenium Hexafluoride .......... 7783-79-1 1000
Trichlorosilane ....................... 10025-78-2 5000
Stibine (Antimony Hydride) ... 7803-52-3 500 Trifluorochloroethylene .......... 79-38-9 10000
Sulfur Dioxide (liquid) ............ 7446-09-5 1000 Trimethyoxysilane ................. 2487-90-3 1500
Sulfur Pentafluoride ............... 5714-22-7 250
Sulfur Tetrafluoride ................ 7783-60-0 250 * Chemical Abstract Service Number
Sulfur Trioxide (also called ** Threshold Quantity in Pounds (Amount
Sulfuric Anhydride) ............ 7446-11-9 1000 necessary to be covered by this standard.)
126
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.64—BLOCK FLOW DIAGRAM AND SIMPLIFIED PROCESS

FLOW DIAGRAM (NONMANDATORY)
127
EC30OC91.008</GPH>
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.64—COMPLIANCE safety management of highly haz-

GUIDELINES AND RECOMMENDATIONS ardous chemicals is to prevent un-
FOR PROCESS SAFETY MANAGEMENT wanted releases of hazardous chemicals
(NONMANDATORY) especially into locations which could
expose employees and others to serious
This appendix serves as a nonmanda- hazards. An effective process safety
tory guideline to assist employers and management program requires a sys-
employees in complying with the re- tematic approach to evaluating the
quirements of this section, as well as whole process. Using this approach the
provides other helpful recommenda- process design, process technology,
tions and information. Examples pre- operational and maintenance activities
sented in this appendix are not the and procedures, nonroutine activities
only means of achieving the perform- and procedures, emergency prepared-
ance goals in the standard. This appen- ness plans and procedures, training
dix neither adds nor detracts from the programs, and other elements which
requirements of the standard. impact the process are all considered
1. Introduction to Process Safety Man- in the evaluation. The various lines of
agement. The major objective of process defense that have been incorporated
128
EC30OC91.009</GPH>
into the design and operation of the plished by ordering smaller shipments
process to prevent or mitigate the re- and maintaining the minimum inven-
lease of hazardous chemicals need to be tory necessary for efficient and safe op-
evaluated and strengthened to assure eration. When reduced inventory is not
their effectiveness at each level. Proc- feasible, then the employer might con-
ess safety management is the proactive sider dispersing inventory to several
identification, evaluation and mitiga- locations on site. Dispersing storage
tion or prevention of chemical releases into locations where a release in one
that could occur as a result of failures location will not cause a release in an-
in process, procedures or equipment. other location is a practical method to
The process safety management also reduce the risk or potential for
standard targets highly hazardous catastrophic incidents.
chemicals that have the potential to 2. Employee Involvement in Process
cause a catastrophic incident. This Safety Management. Section 304 of the
standard as a whole is to aid employers Clean Air Act Amendments states that
in their efforts to prevent or mitigate employers are to consult with their
episodic chemical releases that could employees and their representatives re-
lead to a catastrophe in the workplace garding the employers efforts in the de-
and possibly to the surrounding com- velopment and implementation of the
munity. To control these types of haz- process safety management program
ards, employers need to develop the elements and hazard assessments. Sec-
necessary expertise, experiences, judge- tion 304 also requires employers to
ment and proactive initiative within train and educate their employees and
their workforce to properly implement to inform affected employees of the
and maintain an effective process safe- findings from incident investigations
ty management program as envisioned required by the process safety manage-
in the OSHA standard. This OSHA ment program. Many employers, under
standard is required by the Clean Air their safety and health programs, have
Act Amendments as is the Environ- already established means and methods
mental Protection Agency’s Risk Man- to keep employees and their represent-
agement Plan. Employers, who merge atives informed about relevant safety
the two sets of requirements into their and health issues and employers may
process safety management program, be able to adapt these practices and
will better assure full compliance with procedures to meet their obligations
each as well as enhancing their rela- under this standard. Employers who
tionship with the local community. have not implemented an occupational
While OSHA believes process safety safety and health program may wish to
management will have a positive effect form a safety and health committee of
on the safety of employees in work- employees and management represent-
places and also offers other potential atives to help the employer meet the
benefits to employers (increased pro- obligations specified by this standard.
ductivity), smaller businesses which These committees can become a sig-
may have limited resources available nificant ally in helping the employer
to them at this time, might consider to implement and maintain an effec-
alternative avenues of decreasing the tive process safety management pro-
risks associated with highly hazardous gram for all employees.
chemicals at their workplaces. One 3. Process Safety Information. Com-
method which might be considered is plete and accurate written information
the reduction in the inventory of the concerning process chemicals, process
highly hazardous chemical. This reduc- technology, and process equipment is
tion in inventory will result in a reduc- essential to an effective process safety
tion of the risk or potential for a cata- management program and to a process
strophic incident. Also, employers in- hazards analysis. The compiled infor-
cluding small employers may be able mation will be a necessary resource to
to establish more efficient inventory a variety of users including the team
control by reducing the quantities of that will perform the process hazards
highly hazardous chemicals on site analysis as required under paragraph
below the established threshold quan- (e); those developing the training pro-
tities. This reduction can be accom- grams and the operating procedures;
129
contractors whose employees will be trol loops are usually shown along with
working with the process; those con- key utilities on process flow diagrams.
ducting the pre-startup reviews; local Piping and instrument diagrams
emergency preparedness planners; and (P&Ids) may be the more appropriate
insurance and enforcement officials. type of diagrams to show some of the
The information to be compiled above details and to display the infor-
about the chemicals, including process mation for the piping designer and en-
intermediates, needs to be comprehen- gineering staff. The P&IDs are to be
sive enough for an accurate assessment used to describe the relationships be-
of the fire and explosion characteris- tween equipment and instrumentation
tics, reactivity hazards, the safety and as well as other relevant information
health hazards to workers, and the cor- that will enhance clarity. Computer
rosion and erosion effects on the proc- software programs which do P&Ids or
ess equipment and monitoring tools. other diagrams useful to the informa-
Current material safety data sheet tion package, may be used to help meet
(MSDS) information can be used to this requirement.
help meet this requirement which must The information pertaining to proc-
be supplemented with process chem- ess equipment design must be docu-
istry information including runaway mented. In other words, what were the
reaction and over pressure hazards if codes and standards relied on to estab-
applicable. lish good engineering practice. These
Process technology information will codes and standards are published by
such organizations as the American So-
be a part of the process safety informa-
ciety of Mechanical Engineers, Amer-
tion package and it is expected that it
ican Petroleum Institute, American
will include diagrams of the type
National Standards Institute, National
shown in Appendix B of this section as
Fire Protection Association, American
well as employer established criteria
Society for Testing and Materials, Na-
for maximum inventory levels for proc-
tional Board of Boiler and Pressure
ess chemicals; limits beyond which
Vessel Inspectors, National Association
would be considered upset conditions;
of Corrosion Engineers, American Soci-
and a qualitative estimate of the con-
ety of Exchange Manufacturers Asso-
sequences or results of deviation that
ciation, and model building code
could occur if operating beyond the es- groups.
tablished process limits. Employers are In addition, various engineering soci-
encouraged to use diagrams which will eties issue technical reports which im-
help users understand the process. pact process design. For example, the
A block flow diagram is used to show American Institute of Chemical Engi-
the major process equipment and inter- neers has published technical reports
connecting process flow lines and show on topics such as two phase flow for
flow rates, stream composition, tem- venting devices. This type of tech-
peratures, and pressures when nec- nically recognized report would con-
essary for clarity. The block flow dia- stitute good engineering practice.
gram is a simplified diagram. For existing equipment designed and
Process flow diagrams are more com- constructed many years ago in accord-
plex and will show all main flow ance with the codes and standards
streams including valves to enhance available at that time and no longer in
the understanding of the process, as general use today, the employer must
well as pressures and temperatures on document which codes and standards
all feed and product lines within all were used and that the design and con-
major vessels, in and out of headers struction along with the testing, in-
and heat exchangers, and points of spection and operation are still suit-
pressure and temperature control. able for the intended use. Where the
Also, materials of construction infor- process technology requires a design
mation, pump capacities and pressure which departs from the applicable
heads, compressor horsepower and ves- codes and standards, the employer
sel design pressures and temperatures must document that the design and
are shown when necessary for clarity. construction is suitable for the in-
In addition, major components of con- tended purpose.
130
4. Process Hazard Analysis. A process The team conducting the PHA need
hazard analysis (PHA), sometimes to understand the methodology that is
called a process hazard evaluation, is going to be used. A PHA team can vary
one of the most important elements of in size from two people to a number of
the process safety management pro- people with varied operational and
gram. A PHA is an organized and sys- technical backgrounds. Some team
tematic effort to identify and analyze members may only be a part of the
the significance of potential hazards team for a limited time. The team
associated with the processing or han- leader needs to be fully knowledgeable
dling of highly hazardous chemicals. A in the proper implementation of the
PHA provides information which will PHA methodology that is to be used
assist employers and employees in and should be impartial in the evalua-
making decisions for improving safety tion. The other full or part time team
and reducing the consequences of un- members need to provide the team with
wanted or unplanned releases of haz- expertise in areas such as process tech-
ardous chemicals. A PHA is directed nology, process design, operating pro-
toward analyzing potential causes and cedures and practices, including how
consequences of fires, explosions, re- the work is actually performed,
leases of toxic or flammable chemicals alarms, emergency procedures, instru-
and major spills of hazardous chemi- mentation, maintenance procedures,
cals. The PHA focuses on equipment, both routine and nonroutine tasks, in-
instrumentation, utilities, human ac- cluding how the tasks are authorized,
tions (routine and nonroutine), and ex-
procurement of parts and supplies,
ternal factors that might impact the
safety and health, and any other rel-
process. These considerations assist in
evant subject as the need dictates. At
determining the hazards and potential
least one team member must be famil-
failure points or failure modes in a
iar with the process.
process.
The selection of a PHA methodology The ideal team will have an intimate
or technique will be influenced by knowledge of the standards, codes,
many factors including the amount of specifications and regulations applica-
existing knowledge about the process. ble to the process being studied. The
Is it a process that has been operated selected team members need to be com-
for a long period of time with little or patible and the team leader needs to be
no innovation and extensive experience able to manage the team and the PHA
has been generated with its use? Or, is study. The team needs to be able to
it a new process or one which has been work together while benefiting from
changed frequently by the inclusion of the expertise of others on the team or
innovative features? Also, the size and outside the team, to resolve issues, and
complexity of the process will influ- to forge a consensus on the findings of
ence the decision as to the appropriate the study and the recommendations.
PHA methodology to use. All PHA The application of a PHA to a process
methodologies are subject to certain may involve the use of different meth-
limitations. For example, the checklist odologies for various parts of the proc-
methodology works well when the ess. For example, a process involving a
process is very stable and no changes series of unit operations of varying
are made, but it is not as effective sizes, complexities, and ages may use
when the process has undergone exten- different methodologies and team
sive change. The checklist may miss members for each operation. Then the
the most recent changes and con- conclusions can be integrated into one
sequently the changes would not be final study and evaluation. A more spe-
evaluated. Another limitation to be cific example is the use of a checklist
considered concerns the assumptions PHA for a standard boiler or heat ex-
made by the team or analyst. The PHA changer and the use of a Hazard and
is dependent on good judgement and Operability PHA for the overall proc-
the assumptions made during the study ess. Also, for batch type processes like
need to be documented and understood custom batch operations, a generic
by the team and reviewer and kept for PHA of a representative batch may be
a future PHA. used where there are only small
131
changes of monomer or other ingre- processes with the potential of ad-

dient ratios and the chemistry is docu- versely affecting the largest number of
mented for the full range and ratio of employees. This prioritizing should
batch ingredients. Another process consider the potential severity of a
that might consider using a generic chemical release, the number of poten-
type of PHA is a gas plant. Often these tially affected employees, the oper-
plants are simply moved from site to ating history of the process such as the
site and therefore, a generic PHA may frequency of chemical releases, the age
be used for these movable plants. Also, of the process and any other relevant
when an employer has several similar factors. These factors would suggest a
size gas plants and no sour gas is being ranking order and would suggest either
processed at the site, then a generic
using a weighing factor system or a
PHA is feasible as long as the vari-
systematic ranking method. The use of
ations of the individual sites are ac-
counted for in the PHA. Finally, when a preliminary hazard analysis would
an employer has a large continuous assist an employer in determining
process which has several control which process should be of the highest
rooms for different portions of the priority and thereby the employer
process such as for a distillation tower would obtain the greatest improvement
and a blending operation, the employer in safety at the facility.
may wish to do each segment sepa- Detailed guidance on the content and
rately and then integrate the final re- application of process hazard analysis
sults. methodologies is available from the
Additionally, small businesses which American Institute of Chemical Engi-
are covered by this rule, will often neers’ Center for Chemical Process
have processes that have less storage Safety (see Appendix D).
volume, less capacity, and less com- 5. Operating Procedures and Practices.
plicated than processes at a large facil- Operating procedures describe tasks to
ity. Therefore, OSHA would anticipate be performed, data to be recorded, op-
that the less complex methodologies erating conditions to be maintained,
would be used to meet the process haz- samples to be collected, and safety and
ard analysis criteria in the standard. health precautions to be taken. The
These process hazard analyses can be
procedures need to be technically accu-
done in less time and with a few people
rate, understandable to employees, and
being involved. A less complex process
revised periodically to ensure that they
generally means that less data, P&IDs,
and process information is needed to reflect current operations. The process
perform a process hazard analysis. safety information package is to be
Many small businesses have proc- used as a resource to better assure that
esses that are not unique, such as cold the operating procedures and practices
storage lockers or water treatment fa- are consistent with the known hazards
cilities. Where employer associations of the chemicals in the process and
have a number of members with such that the operating parameters are ac-
facilities, a generic PHA, evolved from curate. Operating procedures should be
a checklist or what-if questions, could reviewed by engineering staff and oper-
be developed and used by each em- ating personnel to ensure that they are
ployer effectively to reflect his/her par- accurate and provide practical instruc-
ticular process; this would simplify tions on how to actually carry out job
compliance for them. duties safely.
When the employer has a number of Operating procedures will include
processes which require a PHA, the em- specific instructions or details on what
ployer must set up a priority system of steps are to be taken or followed in
which PHAs to conduct first. A pre- carrying out the stated procedures.
liminary or gross hazard analysis may These operating instructions for each
be useful in prioritizing the processes
procedure should include the applicable

that the employer has determined are
safety precautions and should contain
subject to coverage by the process safe-
appropriate information on safety im-
ty management standard. Consider-
ation should first be given to those plications. For example, the operating
132
procedures addressing operating pa- coordinated and integrated with cur-

rameters will contain operating in- rent operating procedures and oper-
structions about pressure limits, tem- ating personnel must be oriented to the
perature ranges, flow rates, what to do changes in procedures before the
when an upset condition occurs, what change is made. When the process is
alarms and instruments are pertinent shutdown in order to make a change,
if an upset condition occurs, and other then the operating procedures must be
subjects. Another example of using op- updated before startup of the process.
erating instructions to properly imple- Training in how to handle upset con-
ment operating procedures is in start- ditions must be accomplished as well
ing up or shutting down the process. In as what operating personnel are to do
these cases, different parameters will in emergencies such as when a pump
be required from those of normal oper- seal fails or a pipeline ruptures. Com-
ation. These operating instructions munication between operating per-
need to clearly indicate the distinc- sonnel and workers performing work
tions between startup and normal oper- within the process area, such as non-
ations such as the appropriate allow- routine tasks, also must be main-
ances for heating up a unit to reach the tained. The hazards of the tasks are to
normal operating parameters. Also the be conveyed to operating personnel in
operating instructions need to describe accordance with established procedures
the proper method for increasing the and to those performing the actual
temperature of the unit until the nor- tasks. When the work is completed, op-
mal operating temperature parameters
erating personnel should be informed
are achieved.
to provide closure on the job.
Computerized process control sys-
6. Employee Training. All employees,
tems add complexity to operating in-
structions. These operating instruc- including maintenance and contractor
tions need to describe the logic of the employees, involved with highly haz-
software as well as the relationship be- ardous chemicals need to fully under-
tween the equipment and the control stand the safety and health hazards of
system; otherwise, it may not be ap- the chemicals and processes they work
parent to the operator. with for the protection of themselves,
Operating procedures and instruc- their fellow employees and the citizens
tions are important for training oper- of nearby communities. Training con-
ating personnel. The operating proce- ducted in compliance with 1926.59, the
dures are often viewed as the standard Hazard Communication standard, will
operating practices (SOPs) for oper- help employees to be more knowledge-
ations. Control room personnel and op- able about the chemicals they work
erating staff, in general, need to have a with as well as familiarize them with
full understanding of operating proce- reading and understanding MSDS.
dures. If workers are not fluent in However, additional training in sub-
English then procedures and instruc- jects such as operating procedures and
tions need to be prepared in a second safety work practices, emergency evac-
language understood by the workers. In uation and response, safety procedures,
addition, operating procedures need to routine and nonroutine work author-
be changed when there is a change in ization activities, and other areas per-
the process as a result of the manage- tinent to process safety and health will
ment of change procedures. The con- need to be covered by an employer’s
sequences of operating procedure training program.
changes need to be fully evaluated and In establishing their training pro-
the information conveyed to the per- grams, employers must clearly define
sonnel. For example, mechanical the employees to be trained and what
changes to the process made by the subjects are to be covered in their
maintenance department (like chang- training. Employers in setting up their
ing a valve from steel to brass or other training program will need to clearly
subtle changes) need to be evaluated to establish the goals and objectives they
determine if operating procedures and wish to achieve with the training that
practices also need to be changed. All they provide to their employees. The
management of change actions must be learning goals or objectives should be
133
written in clear measurable terms be- provide retraining, or provide more fre-
fore the training begins. These goals quent refresher training sessions until
and objectives need to be tailored to the deficiency is resolved. Those who
each of the specific training modules or conducted the training and those who
segments. Employers should describe received the training should also be
the important actions and conditions consulted as to how best to improve
under which the employee will dem- the training process. If there is a lan-
onstrate competence or knowledge as guage barrier, the language known to
well as what is acceptable perform- the trainees should be used to reinforce
ance. the training messages and information.
Hands-on-training where employees Careful consideration must be given
are able to use their senses beyond lis- to assure that employees including
tening, will enhance learning. For ex- maintenance and contract employees
ample, operating personnel, who will receive current and updated training.
work in a control room or at control For example, if changes are made to a
panels, would benefit by being trained process, impacted employees must be
at a simulated control panel or panels. trained in the changes and understand
Upset conditions of various types could the effects of the changes on their job
be displayed on the simulator, and then tasks (e.g., any new operating proce-
the employee could go through the dures pertinent to their tasks). Addi-
proper operating procedures to bring tionally, as already discussed the eval-
the simulator panel back to the normal uation of the employee’s absorption of
operating parameters. A training envi-
training will certainly influence the
ronment could be created to help the
need for training.
trainee feel the full reality of the situ-
7. Contractors. Employers who use
ation but, of course, under controlled
conditions. This realistic type of train- contractors to perform work in and
ing can be very effective in teaching around processes that involve highly
employees correct procedures while al- hazardous chemicals, will need to es-
lowing them to also see the con- tablish a screening process so that they
sequences of what might happens if hire and use contractors who accom-
they do not follow established oper- plish the desired job tasks without
ating procedures. Other training tech- compromising the safety and health of
niques using videos or on-the-job train- employees at a facility. For contrac-
ing can also be very effective for teach- tors, whose safety performance on the
ing other job tasks, duties, or other im- job is not known to the hiring em-
portant information. An effective ployer, the employer will need to ob-
training program will allow the em- tain information on injury and illness
ployee to fully participate in the train- rates and experience and should obtain
ing process and to practice their skill contractor references. Additionally,
or knowledge. the employer must assure that the con-
Employers need to periodically tractor has the appropriate job skills,
evaluate their training programs to see knowledge and certifications (such as
if the necessary skills, knowledge, and for pressure vessel welders). Contractor
routines are being properly understood work methods and experiences should
and implemented by their trained em- be evaluated. For example, does the
ployees. The means or methods for contractor conducting demolition work
evaluating the training should be de- swing loads over operating processes or
veloped along with the training pro- does the contractor avoid such haz-
gram goals and objectives. Training ards?
program evaluation will help employ- Maintaining a site injury and illness
ers to determine the amount of train- log for contractors is another method
ing their employees understood, and employers must use to track and main-
whether the desired results were obtain current knowledge of work activi-
tained. If, after the evaluation, it ap- ties involving contract employees
pears that the trained employees are working on or adjacent to covered

not at the level of knowledge and skill processes. Injury and illness logs of
that was expected, the employer will both the employer’s employees and
need to revise the training program, contract employees allow an employer
134
to have full knowledge of process instructions. If the changes made to the
jury and illness experience. This log process during shutdown are signifi-
will also contain information which cant and impact the training program,
will be of use to those auditing process then operating personnel as well as em-
safety management compliance and ployees engaged in routine and nonrou-
those involved in incident investiga- tine work in the process area may need
tions. some refresher or additional training
Contract employees must perform in light of the changes. Any incident
their work safely. Considering that investigation recommendations, com-
contractors often perform very special- pliance audits or PHA recommenda-
ized and potentially hazardous tasks tions need to be reviewed as well to see
such as confined space entry activities what impacts they may have on the
and nonroutine repair activities it is process before beginning the startup.
quite important that their activities be 9. Mechanical Integrity. Employers
controlled while they are working on will need to review their maintenance
or near a covered process. A permit programs and schedules to see if there
system or work authorization system are areas where ‘‘breakdown’’ mainte-
for these activities would also be help- nance is used rather than an on-going
ful to all affected employers. The use mechanical integrity program. Equip-
of a work authorization system keeps ment used to process, store, or handle
an employer informed of contract em- highly hazardous chemicals needs to be
ployee activities, and as a benefit the designed, constructed, installed and
employer will have better coordination maintained to minimize the risk of re-
and more management control over the leases of such chemicals. This requires
work being performed in the process that a mechanical integrity program
area. A well run and well maintained be in place to assure the continued in-
process where employee safety is fully tegrity of process equipment. Elements
recognized will benefit all of those who of a mechanical integrity program in-
work in the facility whether they be clude the identification and categoriza-
contract employees or employees of tion of equipment and instrumenta-
the owner. tion, inspections and tests, testing and
8. Pre-Startup Safety. For new proc- inspection frequencies, development of
esses, the employer will find a PHA maintenance procedures, training of
helpful in improving the design and maintenance personnel, the establish-
construction of the process from a reli- ment of criteria for acceptable test re-
ability and quality point of view. The sults, documentation of test and in-
safe operation of the new process will spection results, and documentation of
be enhanced by making use of the PHA manufacturer recommendations as to
recommendations before final installa- meantime to failure for equipment and
tions are completed. P&IDs are to be instrumentation.
completed along with having the oper- The first line of defense an employer
ating procedures in place and the oper- has available is to operate and main-
ating staff trained to run the process tain the process as designed, and to
before startup. The initial startup pro- keep the chemicals contained. This
cedures and normal operating proce- line of defense is backed up by the next
dures need to be fully evaluated as part line of defense which is the controlled
of the pre-startup review to assure a release of chemicals through venting to
safe transfer into the normal operating scrubbers or flares, or to surge or over-
mode for meeting the process param- flow tanks which are designed to re-
eters. ceive such chemicals, etc. These lines
For existing processes that have been of defense are the primary lines of de-
shutdown for turnaround, or modifica- fense or means to prevent unwanted re-
tion, etc., the employer must assure leases. The secondary lines of defense
that any changes other than ‘‘replace- would include fixed fire protection sys-
ment in kind’’ made to the process dur- tems like sprinklers, water spray, or
ing shutdown go through the manage- deluge systems, monitor guns, etc.,
ment of change procedures. P&IDs will dikes, designed drainage systems, and
need to be updated as necessary, as other systems which would control or
well as operating procedures and in- mitigate hazardous chemicals once an
135
unwanted release occurs. These pri- available in the codes. Internal inspec-
mary and secondary lines of defense tions need to cover items such as vessel
are what the mechanical integrity pro- shell, bottom and head; metallic lin-
gram needs to protect and strengthen ings; nonmetallic linings; thickness
these primary and secondary lines of measurements for vessels and piping;
defenses where appropriate. inspection for erosion, corrosion,
The first step of an effective mechan- cracking and bulges; internal equip-
ical integrity program is to compile ment like trays, baffles, sensors and
and categorize a list of process equip- screens for erosion, corrosion or crack-
ment and instrumentation for inclu- ing and other deficiencies. Some of
sion in the program. This list would in- these inspections may be performed by
clude pressure vessels, storage tanks, state or local government inspectors
process piping, relief and vent systems, under state and local statutes. How-
fire protection system components, ever, each employer needs to develop
emergency shutdown systems and procedures to ensure that tests and in-
alarms and interlocks and pumps. For spections are conducted properly and
the categorization of instrumentation that consistency is maintained even
and the listed equipment the employer where different employees may be in-
would prioritize which pieces of equip- volved. Appropriate training is to be
ment require closer scrutiny than oth- provided to maintenance personnel to
ers. Meantime to failure of various in- ensure that they understand the pre-
strumentation and equipment parts ventive maintenance program proce-
would be known from the manufactur- dures, safe practices, and the proper
ers data or the employer’s experience use and application of special equip-
with the parts, which would then influ- ment or unique tools that may be re-
ence the inspection and testing fre- quired. This training is part of the
quency and associated procedures. overall training program called for in
Also, applicable codes and standards the standard.
such as the National Board Inspection A quality assurance system is needed
Code, or those from the American Soci- to help ensure that the proper mate-
ety for Testing and Material, American rials of construction are used, that fab-
Petroleum Institute, National Fire rication and inspection procedures are
Protection Association, American Na- proper, and that installation proce-
tional Standards Institute, American dures recognize field installation con-
Society of Mechanical Engineers, and cerns. The quality assurance program
other groups, provide information to is an essential part of the mechanical
help establish an effective testing and integrity program and will help to
inspection frequency, as well as appro- maintain the primary and secondary
priate methodologies. lines of defense that have been de-
The applicable codes and standards signed into the process to prevent un-
provide criteria for external inspec- wanted chemical releases or those
tions for such items as foundation and which control or mitigate a release.
supports, anchor bolts, concrete or ‘‘As built’’ drawings, together with cer-
steel supports, guy wires, nozzles and tifications of coded vessels and other
sprinklers, pipe hangers, grounding equipment, and materials of construc-
connections, protective coatings and tion need to be verified and retained in
insulation, and external metal surfaces the quality assurance documentation.
of piping and vessels, etc. These codes Equipment installation jobs need to be
and standards also provide information properly inspected in the field for use
on methodologies for internal inspec- of proper materials and procedures and
tion, and a frequency formula based on to assure that qualified craftsmen are
the corrosion rate of the materials of used to do the job. The use of appro-
construction. Also, erosion both inter- priate gaskets, packing, bolts, valves,
nal and external needs to be considered lubricants and welding rods need to be
along with corrosion effects for piping verified in the field. Also, procedures
and valves. Where the corrosion rate is for installation of safety devices need
not known, a maximum inspection fre- to be verified, such as the torque on
quency is recommended, and methods the bolts on ruptured disc installa-
of developing the corrosion rate are tions, uniform torque on flange bolts,
136
proper installation of pump seals, etc. proval by a written management of

If the quality of parts is a problem, it change procedure.
may be appropriate to conduct audits Management of change covers such
of the equipment supplier’s facilities to as changes in process technology and
better assure proper purchases of re- changes to equipment and instrumen-
quired equipment which is suitable for tation. Changes in process technology
its intended service. Any changes in can result from changes in production
equipment that may become necessary rates, raw materials, experimentation,
will need to go through the manage- equipment unavailability, new equip-
ment of change procedures. ment, new product development,
10. Nonroutine Work Authorizations. change in catalyst and changes in oper-
Nonroutine work which is conducted in ating conditions to improve yield or
process areas needs to be controlled by quality. Equipment changes include
the employer in a consistent manner. among others change in materials of
The hazards identified involving the construction, equipment specifications,
work that is to be accomplished must piping pre-arrangements, experimental
be communicated to those doing the equipment, computer program revi-
work, but also to those operating per- sions and changes in alarms and inter-
sonnel whose work could affect the locks. Employers need to establish
safety of the process. A work author- means and methods to detect both
ization notice or permit must have a technical changes and mechanical
procedure that describes the steps the changes.
maintenance supervisor, contractor Temporary changes have caused a
representative or other person needs to number of catastrophes over the years,
follow to obtain the necessary clear- and employers need to establish ways
ance to get the job started. The work to detect temporary changes as well as
authorization procedures need to ref- those that are permanent. It is impor-
erence and coordinate, as applicable, tant that a time limit for temporary
lockout/tagout procedures, line break- changes be established and monitored
ing procedures, confined space entry since, without control, these changes
procedures and hot work authoriza- may tend to become permanent. Tem-
tions. This procedure also needs to pro- porary changes are subject to the man-
vide clear steps to follow once the job agement of change provisions. In addi-
is completed in order to provide clo- tion, the management of change proce-
sure for those that need to know the dures are used to insure that the equip-
job is now completed and equipment ment and procedures are returned to
can be returned to normal. their original or designed conditions at
11. Managing Change. To properly the end of the temporary change. Prop-
manage changes to process chemicals, er documentation and review of these
technology, equipment and facilities, changes is invaluable in assuring that
one must define what is meant by the safety and health considerations
change. In this process safety manage- are being incorporated into the oper-
ment standard, change includes all ating procedures and the process.
modifications to equipment, proce- Employers may wish to develop a
dures, raw materials and processing form or clearance sheet to facilitate
conditions other than ‘‘replacement in the processing of changes through the
kind.’’ These changes need to be prop- management of change procedures. A
erly managed by identifying and re- typical change form may include a de-
viewing them prior to implementation scription and the purpose of the
of the change. For example, the oper- change, the technical basis for the
ating procedures contain the operating change, safety and health consider-
parameters (pressure limits, tempera- ations, documentation of changes for
ture ranges, flow rates, etc.) and the the operating procedures, maintenance
importance of operating within these procedures, inspection and testing,
limits. While the operator must have P&IDs, electrical classification, train-
the flexibility to maintain safe oper- ing and communications, pre-startup

ation within the established param- inspection, duration if a temporary
eters, any operation outside of these change, approvals and authorization.
parameters requires review and ap- Where the impact of the change is
137
minor and well understood, a check list form a significant set of facts about
reviewed by an authorized person with the incident which occurred. The re-
proper communication to others who port, its findings and recommendations
are affected may be sufficient. How- are to be shared with those who can
ever, for a more complex or significant benefit from the information. The co-
design change, a hazard evaluation pro- operation of employees is essential to
cedure with approvals by operations, an effective incident investigation. The
maintenance, and safety departments focus of the investigation should be to
may be appropriate. Changes in docu- obtain facts, and not to place blame.
ments such as P&IDs, raw materials, The team and the investigation process
operating procedures, mechanical in- should clearly deal with all involved
tegrity programs, electrical classifica- individuals in a fair, open and con-
tions, etc., need to be noted so that sistent manner.
these revisions can be made permanent 13. Emergency Preparedness. Each em-
when the drawings and procedure ployer must address what actions em-
manuals are updated. Copies of process ployees are to take when there is an
changes need to be kept in an acces- unwanted release of highly hazardous
sible location to ensure that design chemicals. Emergency preparedness or
changes are available to operating per- the employer’s tertiary (third) lines of
sonnel as well as to PHA team mem- defense are those that will be relied on
bers when a PHA is being done or one along with the secondary lines of de-
is being updated. fense when the primary lines of defense
12. Investigation of Incidents. Incident which are used to prevent an unwanted
investigation is the process of identi- release fail to stop the release. Em-
fying the underlying causes of inci- ployers will need to decide if they want
dents and implementing steps to pre- employees to handle and stop small or
vent similar events from occurring. minor incidental releases. Whether
The intent of an incident investigation they wish to mobilize the available re-
is for employers to learn from past ex- sources at the plant and have them
periences and thus avoid repeating past brought to bear on a more significant
mistakes. The incidents for which release. Or whether employers want
OSHA expects employers to become their employees to evacuate the danger
aware and to investigate are the types area and promptly escape to a
of events which result in or could rea- preplanned safe zone area, and allow
sonably have resulted in a catastrophic the local community emergency re-
release. Some of the events are some- sponse organizations to handle the re-
times referred to as ‘‘near misses,’’ lease. Or whether the employer wants
meaning that a serious consequence did to use some combination of these ac-
not occur, but could have. tions. Employers will need to select
Employers need to develop in-house how many different emergency pre-
capability to investigate incidents that paredness or tertiary lines of defense
occur in their facilities. A team needs they plan to have and then develop the
to be assembled by the employer and necessary plans and procedures, and
trained in the techniques of investiga- appropriately train employees in their
tion including how to conduct inter- emergency duties and responsibilities
views of witnesses, needed documenta- and then implement these lines of de-
tion and report writing. A multi-dis- fense.
ciplinary team is better able to gather Employers at a minimum must have
the facts of the event and to analyze an emergency action plan which will
them and develop plausible scenarios facilitate the prompt evacuation of em-
as to what happened, and why. Team ployees when an unwanted release of
members should be selected on the highly hazardous chemical. This means
basis of their training, knowledge and that the employer will have a plan that
ability to contribute to a team effort will be activated by an alarm system
to fully investigate the incident. Em- to alert employees when to evacuate
ployees in the process area where the and, that employees who are physically
incident occurred should be consulted, impaired, will have the necessary sup-
interviewed or made a member of the port and assistance to get them to the
team. Their knowledge of the events safe zone as well. The intent of these
138
requirements is to alert and move em- take. The evacuation of the immediate
ployees to a safe zone quickly. Delay- release area and other areas as nec-
ing alarms or confusing alarms are to essary would be accomplished under
be avoided. The use of process control the emergency action plan. If the em-
centers or similar process buildings in ployer wishes to use plant personnel
the process area as safe areas is dis- such as a fire brigade, spill control
couraged. Recent catastrophes have team, a hazardous materials team, or
shown that a large life loss has oc- use employees to render aid to those in
curred in these structures because of the immediate release area and control
where they have been sited and because or mitigate the incident, these actions
they are not necessarily designed to are covered by 1926.65, the Hazardous
withstand over-pressures from Waste Operations and Emergency Re-
shockwaves resulting from explosions sponse (HAZWOPER) standard. If out-
in the process area. side assistance is necessary, such as
Unwanted incidental releases of high- through mutual aid agreements be-
ly hazardous chemicals in the process tween employers or local government
area must be addressed by the em- emergency response organizations,
ployer as to what actions employees these emergency responders are also
are to take. If the employer wants em- covered by HAZWOPER. The safety
ployees to evacuate the area, then the and health protections required for
emergency action plan will be acti- emergency responders are the responsi-
vated. For outdoor processes where bility of their employers and of the on-
wind direction is important for select- scene incident commander.
ing the safe route to a refuge area, the Responders may be working under
employer should place a wind direction very hazardous conditions and there-
indicator such as a wind sock or pen- fore the objective is to have them com-
nant at the highest point that can be petently led by an on-scene incident
seen throughout the process area. Em- commander and the commander’s staff,
ployees can move in the direction of properly equipped to do their assigned
cross wind to upwind to gain safe ac- work safely, and fully trained to carry
cess to the refuge area by knowing the out their duties safely before they re-
wind direction. spond to an emergency. Drills, training
If the employer wants specific em- exercises, or simulations with the local
ployees in the release area to control community emergency response plan-
or stop the minor emergency or inci- ners and responder organizations is one
dental release, these actions must be means to obtain better preparedness.
planned for in advance and procedures This close cooperation and coordina-
developed and implemented. tion between plant and local commu-
Preplanning for handling incidental re- nity emergency preparedness managers
leases for minor emergencies in the will also aid the employer in com-
process area needs to be done, appro- plying with the Environmental Protec-
priate equipment for the hazards must tion Agency’s Risk Management Plan
be provided, and training conducted for criteria.
those employees who will perform the One effective way for medium to
emergency work before they respond to large facilities to enhance coordination
handle an actual release. The employ- and communication during emer-
er’s training program, including the gencies for on plant operations and
Hazard Communication standard train- with local community organizations is
ing is to address the training needs for for employers to establish and equip an
employees who are expected to handle emergency control center. The emer-
incidental or minor releases. gency control center would be sited in
Preplanning for releases that are a safe zone area so that it could be oc-
more serious than incidental releases is cupied throughout the duration of an
another important line of defense to be emergency. The center would serve as
used by the employer. When a serious the major communication link between
release of a highly hazardous chemical the on-scene incident commander and

occurs, the employer through plant or corporate management as well
preplanning will have determined in as with the local community officials.
advance what actions employees are to The communication equipment in the
139
emergency control center should in- no requirements of the standard are

clude a network to receive and trans- omitted. This verification sheet format
mit information by telephone, radio or could also identify those elements that
other means. It is important to have a will require evaluation or a response to
backup communication network in correct deficiencies. This sheet could
case of power failure or one commu- also be used for developing the follow-
nication means fails. The center should up and documentation requirements.
also be equipped with the plant layout The selection of effective audit team
and community maps, utility drawings members is critical to the success of
including fire water, emergency light- the program. Team members should be
ing, appropriate reference materials chosen for their experience, knowledge,
such as a government agency notifica- and training and should be familiar
tion list, company personnel phone with the processes and with auditing
list, SARA Title III reports and mate- techniques, practices and procedures.
rial safety data sheets, emergency The size of the team will vary depend-
plans and procedures manual, a listing ing on the size and complexity of the
with the location of emergency re- process under consideration. For a
sponse equipment, mutual aid informa- large, complex, highly instrumented
tion, and access to meteorological or plant, it may be desirable to have team
weather condition data and any disper- members with expertise in process en-
sion modeling data. gineering and design, process chem-
14. Compliance Audits. Employers need istry, instrumentation and computer
to select a trained individual or assem- controls, electrical hazards and classi-
ble a trained team of people to audit fications, safety and health disciplines,
the process safety management system maintenance, emergency preparedness,
and program. A small process or plant warehousing or shipping, and process
may need only one knowledgeable per- safety auditing. The team may use
son to conduct an audit. The audit is to part-time members to provide for the
include an evaluation of the design and depth of expertise required as well as
effectiveness of the process safety man- for what is actually done or followed,
agement system and a field inspection compared to what is written.
of the safety and health conditions and An effective audit includes a review
practices to verify that the employer’s of the relevant documentation and
systems are effectively implemented. process safety information, inspection
The audit should be conducted or lead of the physical facilities, and inter-
by a person knowledgeable in audit views with all levels of plant personnel.
techniques and who is impartial to- Utilizing the audit procedure and
wards the facility or area being au- checklist developed in the preplanning
dited. The essential elements of an stage, the audit team can systemati-
audit program include planning, staff- cally analyze compliance with the pro-
ing, conducting the audit, evaluation visions of the standard and any other
and corrective action, follow-up and corporate policies that are relevant.
documentation. For example, the audit team will re-
Planning in advance is essential to view all aspects of the training pro-
the success of the auditing process. gram as part of the overall audit. The
Each employer needs to establish the team will review the written training
format, staffing, scheduling and program for adequacy of content, fre-
verification methods prior to con- quency of training, effectiveness of
ducting the audit. The format should training in terms of its goals and objec-
be designed to provide the lead auditor tives as well as to how it fits into
with a procedure or checklist which de- meeting the standard’s requirements,
tails the requirements of each section documentation, etc. Through inter-
of the standard. The names of the audit views, the team can determine the em-
team members should be listed as part ployee’s knowledge and awareness of
of the format as well. The checklist, if the safety procedures, duties, rules,
properly designed, could serve as the emergency response assignments, etc.

verification sheet which provides the During the inspection, the team can
auditor with the necessary information observe actual practices such as safety
to expedite the review and assure that and health policies, procedures, and
140
work authorization practices. This ap- employer. To control the corrective ac-
proach enables the team to identify de- tion process, the employer should con-
ficiencies and determine where correc- sider the use of a tracking system. This
tive actions or improvements are nec- tracking system might include periodic
essary. status reports shared with affected lev-
An audit is a technique used to gath- els of management, specific reports
er sufficient facts and information, in- such as completion of an engineering
cluding statistical information, to study, and a final implementation re-
verify compliance with standards. port to provide closure for audit find-
Auditors should select as part of their ings that have been through manage-
preplanning a sample size sufficient to ment of change, if appropriate, and
give a degree of confidence that the then shared with affected employees
audit reflects the level of compliance and management. This type of tracking
with the standard. The audit team, system provides the employer with the
through this systematic analysis, status of the corrective action. It also
should document areas which require provides the documentation required to
corrective action as well as those areas verify that appropriate corrective ac-
where the process safety management tions were taken on deficiencies identi-
system is effective and working in an fied in the audit.
effective manner. This provides a
record of the audit procedures and find- APPENDIX D TO § 1926.64—SOURCES OF
ings, and serves as a baseline of oper- FURTHER INFORMATION (NONMANDA-
ation data for future audits. It will as- TORY)
sist future auditors in determining
1. Center for Chemical Process Safe-
changes or trends from previous audits.
ty, American Institute of Chemical En-
Corrective action is one of the most
gineers, 345 East 47th Street, New
important parts of the audit. It in-
York, NY 10017, (212) 705-7319.
cludes not only addressing the identi-
fied deficiencies, but also planning, fol- 2. ‘‘Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation
lowup, and documentation. The correc- Procedures,’’ American Institute of
tive action process normally begins Chemical Engineers; 345 East 47th
with a management review of the audit Street, New York, NY 10017.
findings. The purpose of this review is 3. ‘‘Guidelines for Technical Manage-
to determine what actions are appro- ment of Chemical Process Safety,’’
priate, and to establish priorities, Center for Chemical Process Safety of
timetables, resource allocations and the American Institute of Chemical
requirements and responsibilities. In Engineers; 345 East 47th Street, New
some cases, corrective action may in- York, NY 10017.
volve a simple change in procedure or 4. ‘‘Evaluating Process Safety in the
minor maintenance effort to remedy Chemical Industry,’’ Chemical Manu-
the concern. Management of change facturers Association; 2501 M Street
procedures need to be used, as appro- NW, Washington, DC 20037.
priate, even for what may seem to be a 5. ‘‘Safe Warehousing of Chemicals,’’
minor change. Many of the deficiencies Chemical Manufacturers Association;
can be acted on promptly, while some 2501 M Street NW, Washington, DC
may require engineering studies or in- 20037.
depth review of actual procedures and 6. ‘‘Management of Process Hazards,’’
practices. There may be instances American Petroleum Institute (API
where no action is necessary and this is Recommended Practice 750); 1220 L
a valid response to an audit finding. All Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005.
actions taken, including an expla- 7. ‘‘Improving Owner and Contractor
nation where no action is taken on a Safety Performance,’’ American Petro-
finding, needs to be documented as to leum Institute (API Recommended
what was done and why. Practice 2220); API, 1220 L Street N.W.,
It is important to assure that each Washington, DC 20005.
deficiency identified is addressed, the 8. Chemical Manufacturers Associa-

corrective action to be taken noted, tion (CMA’s Manager Guide), First Edi-
and the audit person or team respon- tion, September 1991; CMA, 2501 M
sible be properly documented by the Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20037.
141
9. ‘‘Improving Construction Safety the reasonable possibility for employee

Performance,’’ Report A- 3, The Busi- exposure to safety or health hazards:
ness Roundtable; The Business Round- (i) Clean-up operations required by a
table, 200 Park Avenue, New York, NY governmental body, whether Federal,
10166. (Report includes criteria to state, local or other involving haz-
evaluate contractor safety perform- ardous substances that are conducted
ance and criteria to enhance con- at uncontrolled hazardous waste sites
tractor safety performance). (including, but not limited to, the
10. ‘‘Recommended Guidelines for EPA’s National Priority Site List
Contractor Safety and Health,’’ Texas (NPL), state priority site lists, sites
Chemical Council; Texas Chemical recommended for the EPA NPL, and
Council, 1402 Nueces Street, Austin, TX initial investigations of government
78701-1534. identified sites which are conducted be-
11. ‘‘Loss Prevention in the Process fore the presence or absence of haz-
Industries,’’ Volumes I and II; Frank P. ardous substances has been
Lees, Butterworth; London 1983. ascertained);
12. ‘‘Safety and Health Program Man- (ii) Corrective actions involving
agement Guidelines,’’ 1989; U.S. De- clean-up operations at sites covered by
partment of Labor, Occupational Safe- the Resource Conservation and Recov-
ty and Health Administration. ery Act of 1976 (RCRA) as amended (42
13. ‘‘Safety and Health Guide for the U.S.C. 6901 et seq.);
Chemical Industry,’’ 1986, (OSHA 3091); (iii) Voluntary clean-up operations at
U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa- sites recognized by Federal, state, local
tional Safety and Health Administra- or other governmental bodies as uncon-
tion; 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W., trolled hazardous waste sites;
Washington, DC 20210. (iv) Operations involving hazardous
14. ‘‘Review of Emergency Systems,’’ wastes that are conducted at treat-
June 1988; U.S. Environmental Protec- ment, storage, and disposal (TSD) fa-
tion Agency (EPA), Office of Solid cilities regulated by 40 CFR parts 264
Waste and Emergency Response, Wash- and 265 pursuant to RCRA; or by agen-
ington, DC 20460. cies under agreement with U.S.E.P.A.
15. ‘‘Technical Guidance for Hazards to implement RCRA regulations; and
Analysis, Emergency Planning for Ex- (v) Emergency response operations
tremely Hazardous Substances,’’ De- for releases of, or substantial threats of
cember 1987; U.S. Environmental Pro- releases of, hazardous substances with-
tection Agency (EPA), Federal Emer- out regard to the location of the haz-
gency Management Administration ard.
(FEMA) and U.S. Department of Trans- (2) Application. (i) All requirements of
portation (DOT), Washington, DC 20460. part 1910 and part 1926 of title 29 of the
16. ‘‘Accident Investigation...A New Code of Federal Regulations apply pur-
Approach,’’ 1983, National Safety Coun- suant to their terms to hazardous
cil; 444 North Michigan Avenue, Chi- waste and emergency response oper-
cago, IL 60611-3991. ations whether covered by this section
17. ‘‘Fire & Explosion Index Hazard or not. If there is a conflict or overlap,
Classification Guide,’’ 6th Edition, May the provision more protective of em-
1987, Dow Chemical Company; Midland, ployee safety and health shall apply
Michigan 48674. without regard to 29 CFR 1926.20(e)(1).
18. ‘‘Chemical Exposure Index,’’ May (ii) Hazardous substance clean-up op-
1988, Dow Chemical Company; Midland, erations within the scope of paragraphs
Michigan 48674. (a)(1)(i) through (a)(1)(iii) of this sec-
[58 FR 35115, June 30, 1993] tion must comply with all paragraphs
of this section except paragraphs (p)
§ 1926.65 Hazardous waste operations and (q).
and emergency response. (iii) Operations within the scope of
(a) Scope, application, and definitions— paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section
(1) Scope. This section covers the fol- must comply only with the require-
lowing operations, unless the employer ments of paragraph (p) of this section.
can demonstrate that the operation NOTES AND EXCEPTIONS: (A) All provisions
does not involve employee exposure or of paragraph (p) of this section cover any
142
treatment, storage or disposal (TSD) oper- site safer for people or the environ-
ation regulated by 40 CFR parts 264 and 265 ment.
or by state law authorized under RCRA, and
Decontamination means the removal
required to have a permit or interim status
from EPA pursuant to 40 CFR 270.1 or from of hazardous substances from employ-
a state agency pursuant to RCRA. ees and their equipment to the extent
(B) Employers who are not required to necessary to preclude the occurrence of
have a permit or interim status because they foreseeable adverse health affects.
are conditionally exempt small quantity Emergency response or responding to
generators under 40 CFR 261.5 or are genera- emergencies means a response effort by
tors who qualify under 40 CFR 262.34 for ex- employees from outside the immediate
emptions from regulation under 40 CFR parts
264, 265 and 270 (‘‘excepted employers’’) are
release area or by other designated re-
not covered by paragraphs (p)(1) through sponders (i.e., mutual-aid groups, local
(p)(7) of this section. Excepted employers fire departments, etc.) to an occurrence
who are required by the EPA or state agency which results, or is likely to result, in
to have their employees engage in emer- an uncontrolled release of a hazardous
gency response or who direct their employ- substance. Responses to incidental re-
ees to engage in emergency response are cov- leases of hazardous substances where
ered by paragraph (p)(8) of this section, and the substance can be absorbed, neutral-
cannot be exempted by (p)(8)(i) of this sec-
ized, or otherwise controlled at the
tion. Excepted employers who are not re-
quired to have employees engage in emer- time of release by employees in the im-
gency response, who direct their employees mediate release area, or by mainte-
to evacuate in the case of such emergencies nance personnel are not considered to
and who meet the requirements of paragraph be emergency responses within the
(p)(8)(i) of this section are exempt from the scope of this standard. Responses to re-
balance of paragraph (p)(8) of this section. leases of hazardous substances where
(C) If an area is used primarily for treat- there is no potential safety or health
ment, storage or disposal, any emergency re- hazard (i.e., fire, explosion, or chemical
sponse operations in that area shall comply
with paragraph (p)(8) of this section. In other
exposure) are not considered to be
areas not used primarily for treatment, stor- emergency responses.
age, or disposal, any emergency response op- Facility means (A) any building,
erations shall comply with paragraph (q) of structure, installation, equipment, pipe
this section. Compliance with the require- or pipeline (including any pipe into a
ments of paragraph (q) of this section shall sewer or publicly owned treatment
be deemed to be in compliance with the re- works), well, pit, pond, lagoon, im-
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this sec-
poundment, ditch, storage container,
tion.
motor vehicle, rolling stock, or air-
(iv) Emergency response operations craft, or (B) any site or area where a
for releases of, or substantial threats of hazardous substance has been depos-
releases of, hazardous substances which ited, stored, disposed of, or placed, or
are not covered by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) otherwise come to be located; but does
through (a)(1)(iv) of this section must not include any consumer product in
only comply with the requirements of consumer use or any water-borne ves-
paragraph (q) of this section. sel.
(3) Definitions—Buddy system means a Hazardous materials response
system of organizing employees into (HAZMAT) team means an organized
work groups in such a manner that group of employees, designated by the
each employee of the work group is employer, who are expected to perform
designated to be observed by at least work to handle and control actual or
one other employee in the work group. potential leaks or spills of hazardous
The purpose of the buddy system is to substances requiring possible close ap-
provide rapid assistance to employees proach to the substance. The team
in the event of an emergency. members perform responses to releases
Clean-up operation means an oper- or potential releases of hazardous sub-
ation where hazardous substances are stances for the purpose of control or
removed, contained, incinerated, neu- stabilization of the incident. A

tralized, stabilized, cleared-up, or in HAZMAT team is not a fire brigade nor
any other manner processed or handled is a typical fire brigade a HAZMAT
with the ultimate goal of making the team. A HAZMAT team, however, may
143
be a separate component of a fire bri- temperature extremes. Further defini-

gade or fire department. tion of the terms used above can be
Hazardous substance means any sub- found in appendix A to 29 CFR 1926.59.
stance designated or listed under para- IDLH or Immediately dangerous to life
graphs (A) through (D) of this defini- or health means an atmospheric con-
tion, exposure to which results or may centration of any toxic, corrosive or
result in adverse affects on the health asphyxiant substance that poses an im-
or safety of employees: mediate threat to life or would cause
(A) Any substance defined under sec- irreversible or delayed adverse health
tion 101(14) of CERCLA; effects or would interfere with an indi-
(B) Any biological agent and other vidual’s ability to escape from a dan-
disease-causing agent which after re- gerous atmosphere.
lease into the environment and upon Oxygen deficiency means that con-
exposure, ingestion, inhalation, or as- centration of oxygen by volume below
similation into any person, either di- which atmosphere supplying res-
rectly from the environment or indi- piratory protection must be provided.
rectly by ingestion through food It exists in atmospheres where the per-
chains, will or may reasonably be an- centage of oxygen by volume is less
ticipated to cause death, disease, be- than 19.5 percent oxygen.
havioral abnormalities, cancer, genetic Permissible exposure limit means the
mutation, physiological malfunctions
exposure, inhalation or dermal permis-
(including malfunctions in reproduc-
sible exposure limit specified either in
tion) or physical deformations in such
§ 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in
persons or their offspring;
other pertinent sections of this part.
(C) Any substance listed by the U.S.
Department of Transportation as haz- Published exposure level means the ex-
ardous materials under 49 CFR 172.101 posure limits published in ‘‘NIOSH
and appendices; and Recommendations for Occupational
(D) Hazardous waste as herein de- Health Standards’’ dated 1986 incor-
fined. porated by reference, or if none is spec-
Hazardous waste means—(A) A waste ified, the exposure limits published in
or combination of wastes as defined in the standards specified by the Amer-
40 CFR 261.3, or ican Conference of Governmental In-
(B) Those substances defined as haz- dustrial Hygienists in their publication
ardous wastes in 49 CFR 171.8. ‘‘Threshold Limit Values and Biologi-
Hazardous waste operation means any cal Exposure Indices for 1987–88’’ dated
operation conducted within the scope 1987 incorporated by reference.
of this standard. Post emergency response means that
Hazardous waste site or Site means portion of an emergency response per-
any facility or location within the formed after the immediate threat of a
scope of this standard at which haz- release has been stabilized or elimi-
ardous waste operations take place. nated and clean-up of the site has
Health hazard means a chemical, mix- begun. If post emergency response is
ture of chemicals or a pathogen for performed by an employer’s own em-
which there is statistically significant ployees who were part of the initial
evidence based on at least one study emergency response, it is considered to
conducted in accordance with estab- be part of the initial response and not
lished scientific principles that acute post emergency response. However, if a
or chronic health effects may occur in group of an employer’s own employees,
exposed employees. The term health separate from the group providing ini-
hazard includes chemicals which are tial response, performs the clean-up op-
carcinogens, toxic or highly toxic eration, then the separate group of em-
agents, reproductive toxins, irritants, ployees would be considered to be per-
corrosives, sensitizers, heptaotoxins, forming post-emergency response and
nephrotoxins, neurotoxins, agents subject to paragraph (q)(11) of this sec-
which act on the hematopoietic sys- tion.

tem, and agents which damage the Qualified person means a person with
lungs, skin, eyes, or mucous mem- specific training, knowledge and expe-
branes. It also includes stress due to rience in the area for which the person
144
has the responsibility and the author- (C) A site-specific safety and health
ity to control. plan which need not repeat the employ-
Site safety and health supervisor (or of- er’s standard operating procedures re-
ficial) means the individual located on quired in paragraph (b)(1)(ii)(F) of this
a hazardous waste site who is respon- section;
sible to the employer and has the au- (D) The safety and health training
thority and knowledge necessary to program;
implement the site safety and health (E) The medical surveillance pro-
plan and verify compliance with appli- gram;
cable safety and health requirements. (F) The employer’s standard oper-
Small quantity generator means a gen- ating procedures for safety and health;
erator of hazardous wastes who in any and
calendar month generates no more (G) Any necessary interface between
than 1,000 kilograms (2,205 pounds) of general program and site specific ac-
hazardous waste in that month. tivities.
Uncontrolled hazardous waste site, (iii) Site excavation. Site excavations
means an area identified as an uncon- created during initial site preparation
trolled hazardous waste site by a gov- or during hazardous waste operations
ernmental body, whether Federal, shall be shored or sloped as appropriate
state, local or other where an accumu- to prevent accidental collapse in ac-
lation of hazardous substances creates cordance with subpart P of 29 CFR part
a threat to the health and safety of in- 1926.
dividuals or the environment or both. (iv) Contractors and sub-contractors.
Some sites are found on public lands An employer who retains contractor or
such as those created by former munic- sub-contractor services for work in
ipal, county or state landfills where il- hazardous waste operations shall in-
legal or poorly managed waste disposal form those contractors, sub-contrac-
has taken place. Other sites are found tors, or their representatives of the
on private property, often belonging to site emergency response procedures
generators or former generators of haz- and any potential fire, explosion,
ardous substance wastes. Examples of health, safety or other hazards of the
such sites include, but are not limited hazardous waste operation that have
to, surface impoundments, landfills, been identified by the employer, in-
dumps, and tank or drum farms. Nor- cluding those identified in the employ-
mal operations at TSD sites are not er’s information program.
covered by this definition. (v) Program availability. The written
(b) Safety and health program. safety and health program shall be
NOTE TO (b): Safety and health programs made available to any contractor or
developed and implemented to meet other subcontractor or their representative
Federal, state, or local regulations are con- who will be involved with the haz-
sidered acceptable in meeting this require- ardous waste operation; to employees;
ment if they cover or are modified to cover to employee designated representa-
the topics required in this paragraph. An ad- tives; to OSHA personnel, and to per-
ditional or separate safety and health pro- sonnel of other Federal, state, or local
gram is not required by this paragraph.
agencies with regulatory authority
(1) General. (i) Employers shall de- over the site.
velop and implement a written safety (2) Organizational structure part of the
and health program for their employ- site program—(i) The organizationa1
ees involved in hazardous waste oper- structure part of the program shall es-
ations. The program shall be designed tablish the specific chain of command
to identify, evaluate, and control safe- and specify the overall responsibilities
ty and health hazards, and provide for of supervisors and employees. It shall
emergency response for hazardous include, at a minimum, the following
waste operations. elements:
(ii) The written safety and health (A) A general supervisor who has the
program shall incorporate the fol- responsibility and authority to direct

lowing: all hazardous waste operations.
(A) An organizational structure; (B) A site safety and health super-
(B) A comprehensive workplan; visor who has the responsibility and
145
authority to develop and implement (B) Employee training assignments

the site safety and health plan and to assure compliance with paragraph
verify compliance. (e) of this section.
(C) All other personnel needed for (C) Personal protective equipment to
hazardous waste site operations and be used by employees for each of the
emergency response and their general site tasks and operations being con-
functions and responsibilities. ducted as required by the personal pro-
(D) The lines of authority, responsi- tective equipment program in para-
bility, and communication. graph (g)(5) of this section.
(ii) The organizational structure (D) Medical surveillance require-
shall be reviewed and updated as nec- ments in accordance with the program
essary to reflect the current status of in paragraph (f) of this section.
waste site operations. (E) Frequency and types of air moni-
(3) Comprehensive workplan part of the toring, personnel monitoring, and envi-
site program. The comprehensive ronmental sampling techniques and in-
workplan part of the program shall ad- strumentation to be used, including
dress the tasks and objectives of the methods of maintenance and calibra-
site operations and the logistics and re- tion of monitoring and sampling equip-
sources required to reach those tasks ment to be used.
and objectives. (F) Site control measures in accord-
(i) The comprehensive workplan shall ance with the site control program re-
address anticipated clean-up activities quired in paragraph (d) of this section.
as well as normal operating procedures (G) Decontamination procedures in
which need not repeat the employer’s accordance with paragraph (k) of this
procedures available elsewhere. section.
(ii) The comprehensive workplan (H) An emergency response plan
shall define work tasks and objectives meeting the requirements of paragraph
and identify the methods for accom- (l) of this section for safe and effective
plishing those tasks and objectives. responses to emergencies, including
(iii) The comprehensive workplan the necessary PPE and other equip-
shall establish personnel requirements ment.
for implementing the plan. (I) Confined space entry procedures.
(iv) The comprehensive workplan (J) A spill containment program
shall provide for the implementation of meeting the requirements of paragraph
the training required in paragraph (e) (j) of this section.
of this section. (iii) Pre-entry briefing. The site spe-
(v) The comprehensive workplan cific safety and health plan shall pro-
shall provide for the implementation of vide for pre-entry briefings to be held
the required informational programs prior to initiating any site activity,
required in paragraph (i) of this sec- and at such other times as necessary to
tion. ensure that employees are apprised of
(vi) The comprehensive workplan the site safety and health plan and
shall provide for the implementation of that this plan is being followed. The in-
the medical surveillance program deformation and data obtained from site
scribed in paragraph (f) of this section. characterization and analysis work re-
(4) Site-specific safety and health plan quired in paragraph (c) of this section
part of the program—(i) General. The site shall be used to prepare and update the
safety and health plan, which must be site safety and health plan.
kept on site, shall address the safety (iv) Effectiveness of site safety and
and health hazards of each phase of site health plan. Inspections shall be con-
operation and include the requirements ducted by the site safety and health su-
and procedures for employee protec- pervisor or, in the absence of that indi-
tion. vidual, another individual who is
(ii) Elements. The site safety and knowledgeable in occupational safety
health plan, as a minimum, shall ad- and health, acting on behalf of the em-
dress the following: ployer as necessary to determine the

(A) A safety and health risk or haz- effectiveness of the site safety and
ard analysis for each site task and op- health plan. Any deficiencies in the ef-
eration found in the workplan. fectiveness of the site safety and
146
health plan shall be corrected by the would provide assistance to hazardous

employer. waste clean-up site employees at the
(c) Site characterization and analysis— time of an emergency.
(1) General. Hazardous waste sites shall (viii) Hazardous substances and
be evaluated in accordance with this health hazards involved or expected at
paragraph to identify specific site haz- the site, and their chemical and phys-
ards and to determine the appropriate ical properties.
safety and health control procedures (5) Personal protective equipment. Per-
needed to protect employees from the sonal protective equipment (PPE) shall
identified hazards. be provided and used during initial site
(2) Preliminary evaluation. A prelimi- entry in accordance with the following
nary evaluation of a site’s characteris- requirements:
tics shall be performed prior to site (i) Based upon the results of the pre-
entry by a qualified person in order to liminary site evaluation, an ensemble
aid in the selection of appropriate em- of PPE shall be selected and used dur-
ployee protection methods prior to site ing initial site entry which will provide
entry. Immediately after initial site protection to a level of exposure below
entry, a more detailed evaluation of permissible exposure limits and pub-
the site’s specific characteristics shall lished exposure levels for known or sus-
be performed by a qualified person in pected hazardous substances and
order to further identify existing site health hazards, and which will provide
hazards and to further aid in the selec- protection against other known and
tion of the appropriate engineering suspected hazards identified during the
controls and personal protective equip- preliminary site evaluation. If there is
ment for the tasks to be performed. no permissible exposure limit or pub-
(3) Hazard identification. All suspected lished exposure level, the employer
conditions that may pose inhalation or may use other published studies and in-
skin absorption hazards that are imme- formation as a guide to appropriate
diately dangerous to life or health personal protective equipment.
(IDLH), or other conditions that may (ii) If positive-pressure self-contained
cause death or serious harm, shall be breathing apparatus is not used as part
identified during the preliminary sur- of the entry ensemble, and if res-
vey and evaluated during the detailed piratory protection is warranted by the
survey. Examples of such hazards in- potential hazards identified during the
clude, but are not limited to, confined preliminary site evaluation, an escape
space entry, potentially explosive or self-contained breathing apparatus of
flammable situations, visible vapor at least five minute’s duration shall be
clouds, or areas where biological indi- carried by employees during initial site
cators such as dead animals or vegeta- entry.
tion are located. (iii) If the preliminary site evalua-
(4) Required information. The fol- tion does not produce sufficient infor-
lowing information to the extent avail- mation to identify the hazards or sus-
able shall be obtained by the employer pected hazards of the site, an ensemble
prior to allowing employees to enter a providing protection equivalent to
site: Level B PPE shall be provided as min-
(i) Location and approximate size of imum protection, and direct reading
the site. instruments shall be used as appro-
(ii) Description of the response activ- priate for identifying IDLH conditions.
ity and/or the job task to be performed. (See appendix B for a description of
(iii) Duration of the planned em- Level B hazards and the recommenda-
ployee activity. tions for Level B protective equip-
(iv) Site topography and accessibility ment.)
by air and roads. (iv) Once the hazards of the site have
(v) Safety and health hazards ex- been identified, the appropriate PPE
pected at the site. shall be selected and used in accord-
(vi) Pathways for hazardous sub- ance with paragraph (g) of this section.
stance dispersion. (6) Monitoring. The following moni-
(vii) Present status and capabilities toring shall be conducted during initial
of emergency response teams that site entry when the site evaluation
147
produces information that shows the (d) Site control—(1) General. Appro-
potential for ionizing radiation or priate site control procedures shall be
IDLH conditions, or when the site in- implemented to control employee expo-
formation is not sufficient reasonably sure to hazardous substances before
to eliminate these possible conditions: clean-up work begins.
(i) Monitoring with direct reading in- (2) Site control program. A site control
struments for hazardous levels of ion- program for protecting employees
izing radiation. which is part of the employer’s site
(ii) Monitoring the air with appro- safety and health program required in
priate direct reading test equipment paragraph (b) of this section shall be
(i.e., combustible gas meters, detector developed during the planning stages of
tubes) for IDLH and other conditions a hazardous waste clean-up operation
that may cause death or serious harm and modified as necessary as new infor-
(combustible or explosive atmospheres, mation becomes available.
oxygen deficiency, toxic substances). (3) Elements of the site control program.
(iii) Visually observing for signs of The site control program shall, as a
actual or potential IDLH or other dan- minimum, include: A site map; site
gerous conditions. work zones; the use of a ‘‘buddy sys-
(iv) An ongoing air monitoring pro- tem’’; site communications including
gram in accordance with paragraph (h) alerting means for emergencies; the
of this section shall be implemented standard operating procedures or safe
after site characterization has deter- work practices; and, identification of
mined the site is safe for the start-up the nearest medical assistance. Where
of operations. these requirements are covered else-
(7) Risk identification. Once the pres- where they need not be repeated.
ence and concentrations of specific (e) Training—(1) General. (i) All em-
hazardous substances and health haz- ployees working on site (such as but
ards have been established, the risks not limited to equipment operators,
associated with these substances shall general laborers and others) exposed to
be identified. Employees who will be hazardous substances, health hazards,
working on the site shall be informed or safety hazards and their supervisors
of any risks that have been identified. and management responsible for the
In situations covered by the Hazard site shall receive training meeting the
Communication Standard, 29 CFR requirements of this paragraph before
1926.59, training required by that stand- they are permitted to engage in haz-
ard need not be duplicated. ardous waste operations that could ex-
NOTE TO (c)(7). Risks to consider include, pose them to hazardous substances,
but are not limited to: safety, or health hazards, and they
(a) Exposures exceeding the permissible ex- shall receive review training as speci-
posure limits and published exposure levels.
fied in this paragraph.
(b) IDLH concentrations.
(c) Potential skin absorption and irritation (ii) Employees shall not be permitted
sources. to participate in or supervise field ac-
(d) Potential eye irritation sources. tivities until they have been trained to
(e) Explosion sensitivity and flammability a level required by their job function
ranges. and responsibility.
(f) Oxygen deficiency. (2) Elements to be covered. The train-
(8) Employee notification. Any infor- ing shall thoroughly cover the fol-
mation concerning the chemical, phys- lowing:
ical, and toxicologic properties of each (i) Names of personnel and alternates
substance known or expected to be responsible for site safety and health;
present on site that is available to the (ii) Safety, health and other hazards
employer and relevant to the duties an present on the site;
employee is expected to perform shall (iii) Use of personal protective equip-
be made available to the affected em- ment;
ployees prior to the commencement of (iv) Work practices by which the em-
their work activities. The employer ployee can minimize risks from haz-
may utilize information developed for ards;
the hazard communication standard for (v) Safe use of engineering controls
this purpose. and equipment on the site;
148
(vi) Medical surveillance require- 40 hours initial training, and three

ments, including recognition of symp- days of supervised field experience (the
toms and signs which might indicate training may be reduced to 24 hours
overexposure to hazards; and and one day if the only area of their re-
(vii) The contents of paragraphs (G) sponsibility is employees covered by
through (J) of the site safety and paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) and (e)(3)(iii)) and
health plan set forth in paragraph at least eight additional hours of spe-
(b)(4)(ii) of this section. cialized training at the time of job as-
(3) Initial training. (i) General site signment on such topics as, but not
workers (such as equipment operators, limited to, the employer’s safety and
general laborers and supervisory per- health program and the associated em-
sonnel) engaged in hazardous substance ployee training program, personal pro-
removal or other activities which ex- tective equipment program, spill con-
pose or potentially expose workers to tainment program, and health hazard
hazardous substances and health haz- monitoring procedure and techniques.
ards shall receive a minimum of 40 (5) Qualifications for trainers. Trainers
hours of instruction off the site, and a shall be qualified to instruct employees
minimum of three days actual field ex- about the subject matter that is being
perience under the direct supervision of presented in training. Such trainers
a trained, experienced supervisor. shall have satisfactorily completed a
(ii) Workers on site only occasionally training program for teaching the sub-
for a specific limited task (such as, but jects they are expected to teach, or
not limited to, ground water moni- they shall have the academic creden-
toring, land surveying, or geo-physical tials and instructional experience nec-
surveying) and who are unlikely to be essary for teaching the subjects. In-
exposed over permissible exposure lim- structors shall demonstrate competent
its and published exposure limits shall instructional skills and knowledge of
receive a minimum of 24 hours of in- the applicable subject matter.
struction off the site, and the min- (6) Training certification. Employees
imum of one day actual field experi- and supervisors that have received and
ence under the direct supervision of a successfully completed the training
trained, experienced supervisor. and field experience specified in para-
(iii) Workers regularly on site who graphs (e)(1) through (e)(4) of this sec-
work in areas which have been mon- tion shall be certified by their instruc-
itored and fully characterized indi- tor or the head instructor and trained
cating that exposures are under per- supervisor as having successfully com-
missible exposure limits and published pleted the necessary training. A writ-
exposure limits where respirators are ten certificate shall be given to each
not necessary, and the characterization person so certified. Any person who has
indicates that there are no health haz- not been so certified or who does not
ards or the possibility of an emergency meet the requirements of paragraph
developing, shall receive a minimum of (e)(9) of this section shall be prohibited
24 hours of instruction off the site and from engaging in hazardous waste oper-
the minimum of one day actual field ations.
experience under the direct supervision (7) Emergency response. Employees
of a trained, experienced supervisor. who are engaged in responding to haz-
(iv) Workers with 24 hours of training ardous emergency situations at haz-
who are covered by paragraphs (e)(3)(ii) ardous waste clean-up sites that may
and (e)(3)(iii) of this section, and who expose them to hazardous substances
become general site workers or who are shall be trained in how to respond to
required to wear respirators, shall have such expected emergencies.
the additional 16 hours and two days of (8) Refresher training. Employees spec-
training necessary to total the training ified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section,
specified in paragraph (e)(3)(i). and managers and supervisors specified
(4) Management and supervisor train- in paragraph (e)(4) of this section, shall
ing. On-site management and super- receive eight hours of refresher train-
visors directly responsible for, or who ing annually on the items specified in
supervise employees engaged in, haz- paragraph (e)(2) and/or (e)(4) of this
ardous waste operations shall receive section, any critique of incidents that
149
have occurred in the past year that can tions and consultations shall be made
serve as training examples of related available by the employer to each em-
work, and other relevant topics. ployee covered under paragraph (f)(2) of
(9) Equivalent training. Employers this section on the following schedules:
who can show by documentation or cer- (i) For employees covered under
tification that an employee’s work ex- paragraphs (f)(2)(i), (f)(2)(ii), and
perience and/or training has resulted in (f)(2)(iv):
training equivalent to that training re- (A) Prior to assignment;
quired in paragraphs (e)(1) through (B) At least once every twelve
(e)(4) of this section shall not be re- months for each employee covered un-
quired to provide the initial training less the attending physician believes a
requirements of those paragraphs to longer interval (not greater than bien-
such employees and shall provide a nially) is appropriate;
copy of the certification or documenta-
(C) At termination of employment or
tion to the employee upon request.
reassignment to an area where the em-
However, certified employees or em-
ployee would not be covered if the em-
ployees with equivalent training new
ployee has not had an examination
to a site shall receive appropriate, site
within the last six months;
specific training before site entry and
(D) As soon as possible upon notifica-
have appropriate supervised field expe-
tion by an employee that the employee
rience at the new site. Equivalent
has developed signs or symptoms indi-
training includes any academic train-
cating possible overexposure to haz-
ing or the training that existing em-
ardous substances or health hazards, or
ployees might have already received
that the employee has been injured or
from actual hazardous waste site work
exposed above the permissible exposure
experience.
limits or published exposure levels in
(f) Medical surveillance—(1) General.
an emergency situation;
Employers engaged in operations speci-
fied in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (E) At more frequent times, if the ex-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section and not cov- amining physician determines that an
ered by (a)(2)(iii) exceptions and em- increased frequency of examination is
ployers of employees specified in para- medically necessary.
graph (q)(9) shall institute a medical (ii) For employees covered under
surveillance program in accordance paragraph (f)(2)(iii) and for all employ-
with this paragraph. ees including those of employers cov-
(2) Employees covered. The medical ered by paragraph (a)(1)(v) who may
surveillance program shall be insti- have been injured, received a health
tuted by the employer for the following impairment, developed signs or symp-
employees: toms which may have resulted from ex-
(i) All employees who are or may be posure to hazardous substances result-
exposed to hazardous substances or ing from an emergency incident, or ex-
health hazards at or above the permis- posed during an emergency incident to
sible exposure limits or, if there is no hazardous substances at concentra-
permissible exposure limit, above the tions above the permissible exposure
published exposure levels for these sub- limits or the published exposure levels
stances, without regard to the use of without the necessary personal protec-
respirators, for 30 days or more a year; tive equipment being used:
(ii) All employees who wear a res- (A) As soon as possible following the
pirator for 30 days or more a year or as emergency incident or development of
required by § 1926.103; signs or symptoms;
(iii) All employees who are injured, (B) At additional times, if the exam-
become ill or develop signs or symp- ining physician determines that follow-
toms due to possible overexposure in- up examinations or consultations are
volving hazardous substances or health medically necessary.
hazards from an emergency response or (4) Content of medical examinations and
hazardous waste operation; and consultations. (i) Medical examinations

(iv) Members of HAZMAT teams. required by paragraph (f)(3) of this sec-
(3) Frequency of medical examinations tion shall include a medical and work
and consultations. Medical examina- history (or updated history if one is in
150
the employee’s file) with special em- (B) The physician’s recommended
phasis on symptoms related to the han- limitations upon the employee’s as-
dling of hazardous substances and signed work.
health hazards, and to fitness for duty (C) The results of the medical exam-
including the ability to wear any re- ination and tests if requested by the
quired PPE under conditions (i.e., tem- employee.
perature extremes) that may be ex- (D) A statement that the employee
pected at the work site. has been informed by the physician of
(ii) The content of medical examina- the results of the medical examination
tions or consultations made available and any medical conditions which re-
to employees pursuant to paragraph (f) quire further examination or treat-
shall be determined by the attending ment.
physician. The guidelines in the Occu- (ii) The written opinion obtained by
pational Safety and Health Guidance the employer shall not reveal specific
Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi- findings or diagnoses unrelated to oc-
ties (See appendix D, Reference #10) cupational exposures.
should be consulted. (8) Recordkeeping. (i) An accurate
(5) Examination bv a physician and record of the medical surveillance re-
costs. All medical examinations and quired by paragraph (f) of this section
procedures shall be performed by or shall be retained. This record shall be
under the supervision of a licensed phy- retained for the period specified and
sician, preferably one knowledgeable in meet the criteria of 29 CFR 1926.33.
occupational medicine, and shall be (ii) The record required in paragraph
provided without cost to the employee, (f)(8)(i) of this section shall include at
without loss of pay, and at a reason- least the following information:
able time and place. (A) The name and social security
(6) Information provided to the physi- number of the employee;
cian. The employer shall provide one (B) Physician’s written opinions, rec-
copy of this standard and its appen- ommended limitations, and results of
dices to the attending physician, and in examinations and tests;
addition the following for each em- (C) Any employee medical com-
ployee: plaints related to exposure to haz-
(i) A description of the employee’s ardous substances;
duties as they relate to the employee’s (D) A copy of the information pro-
exposures. vided to the examining physician by
(ii) The employee’s exposure levels or the employer, with the exception of the
anticipated exposure levels. standard and its appendices.
(iii) A description of any personal (g) Engineering controls, work prac-
protective equipment used or to be tices, and personal protective equipment
used. for employee protection. Engineering
(iv) Information from previous med- controls, work practices, personal pro-
ical examinations of the employee tective equipment, or a combination of
which is not readily available to the these shall be implemented in accord-
examining physician. ance with this paragraph to protect
(v) Information required by § 1926.103. employees from exposure to hazardous
(7) Physician’s written opinion. (i) The substances and safety and health haz-
employer shall obtain and furnish the ards.
employee with a copy of a written (1) Engineering controls, work practices
opinion from the attending physician and PPE for substances regulated either
containing the following: in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or in
(A) The physician’s opinion as to other pertinent sections of this part. (i)
whether the employee has any detected Engineering controls and work prac-
medical conditions which would place tices shall be instituted to reduce and
the employee at increased risk of ma- maintain employee exposure to or
terial impairment of the employee’s below the permissible exposure limits

health from work in hazardous waste for substances regulated either in
operations or emergency response, or § 1926.55 or other pertinent sections of
from respirator use. this part, except to the extent that
151
such controls and practices are not fea- ments and limitations of the site, the
sible. task-specific conditions and duration,
and the hazards and potential hazards
NOTE TO (g)(1)(i): Engineering controls
which may be feasible include the use of identified at the site.
pressurized cabs or control booths on equip- (iii) Positive pressure self-contained
ment, and/or the use of remotely operated breathing apparatus, or positive pres-
material handling equipment. Work prac- sure air-line respirators equipped with
tices which may be feasible are removing all an escape air supply, shall be used
non-essential employees from potential ex- when chemical exposure levels present
posure during opening of drums, wetting will create a substantial possibility of
down dusty operations and locating employ- immediate death, immediate serious
ees upwind of possible hazards.
illness or injury, or impair the ability
(ii) Whenever engineering controls and
work practices are not feasible or not re- to escape.
quired, any reasonable combination of engi- (iv) Totally-encapsulating chemical
neering controls, work practices and PPE protective suits (protection equivalent
shall be used to reduce and maintain em- to Level A protection as recommended
ployee exposures to or below the permissible in appendix B) shall be used in condi-
exposure limits or dose limits for substances tions where skin absorption of a haz-
regulated either in § 1926.55 or other perti- ardous substance may result in a sub-
nent sections of this part. stantial possibility of immediate
(iii) The employer shall not implement a
death, immediate serious illness or in-
schedule of employee rotation as a means of
compliance with permissible exposure limits jury, or impair the ability to escape.
or dose limits except when there is no other (v) The level of protection provided
feasible way of complying with the airborne by PPE selection shall be increased
or dermal dose limits for ionizing radiation. when additional information on site
(iv) The provisions of subpart D shall be conditions indicates that increased
followed. protection is necessary to reduce em-
(2) Engineering controls, work practices, ployee exposures below permissible ex-
and PPE for substances not regulated ei- posure limits and published exposure
ther in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, levels for hazardous substances and
or in other pertinent sections of this part. health hazards. (See appendix B for
An appropriate combination of engi- guidance on selecting PPE ensembles.)
neering controls, work practices and NOTE TO (g)(3): The level of employee pro-
personal protective equipment shall be tection provided may be decreased when ad-
used to reduce and maintain employee ditional information or site conditions show
exposure to or below published expo- that decreased protection will not result in
sure levels for hazardous substances hazardous exposures to employees.
and health hazards not regulated either (vi) Personal protective equipment
in § 1926.55, elsewhere in subpart D, or shall be selected and used to meet the
in other pertinent sections of this part. requirements of subpart E of this part
The employer may use the published and additional requirements specified
literature and MSDS as a guide in in this section.
making the employer’s determination (4) Totally-encapsulating chemical pro-
as to what level of protection the em- tective suits. (i) Totally-encapsulating
ployer believes is appropriate for haz- suits shall protect employees from the
ardous substances and health hazards particular hazards which are identified
for which there is no permissible expo- during site characterization and anal-
sure limit or published exposure limit. ysis.
(3) Personal protective equipment selec- (ii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
tion. (i) Personal protective equipment be capable of maintaining positive air
(PPE) shall be selected and used which pressure. (See appendix A for a test
will protect employees from the haz- method which may be used to evaluate
ards and potential hazards they are this requirement.)
likely to encounter as identified during (iii) Totally-encapsulating suits shall
the site characterization and analysis. be capable of preventing inward test
(ii) Personal protective equipment gas leakage of more than 0.5 percent.
selection shall be based on an evalua- (See appendix A for a test method
tion of the performance characteristics which may be used to evaluate this re-
of the PPE relative to the require- quirement.)
152
(5) Personal protective equipment (PPE) sure limits or published exposure lev-
program. A written personal protective els, exposure over a radioactive mate-
equipment program, which is part of rial’s dose limits or other dangerous
the employer’s safety and health pro- condition such as the presence of flam-
gram required in paragraph (b) of this mable atmospheres or oxygen-deficient
section or required in paragraph (p)(1) environments.
of this section and which is also a part (3) Periodic monitoring. Periodic moni-
of the site-specific safety and health toring shall be conducted when the pos-
plan shall be established. The PPE pro- sibility of an IDLH condition or flam-
gram shall address the elements listed mable atmosphere has developed or
below. When elements, such as donning when there is indication that exposures
and doffing procedures, are provided by may have risen over permissible expo-
the manufacturer of a piece of equip-
sure limits or published exposure levels
ment and are attached to the plan,
since prior monitoring. Situations
they need not be rewritten into the
where it shall be considered whether
plan as long as they adequately address
the possibility that exposures have
the procedure or element.
(i) PPE selection based upon site haz- risen are as follows:
ards, (i) When work begins on a different
(ii) PPE use and limitations of the portion of the site.
equipment, (ii) When contaminants other than
(iii) Work mission duration, those previously identified are being
(iv) PPE maintenance and storage, handled.
(v) PPE decontamination and dis- (iii) When a different type of oper-
posal, ation is initiated (e.g., drum opening as
(vi) PPE training and proper fitting, opposed to exploratory well drilling).
(vii) PPE donning and doffing proce- (iv) When employees are handling
dures, leaking drums or containers or work-
(viii) PPE inspection procedures ing in areas with obvious liquid con-
prior to, during, and after use, tamination (e.g., a spill or lagoon).
(ix) Evaluation of the effectiveness of (4) Monitoring of high-risk employees.
the PPE program, and After the actual clean-up phase of any
(x) Limitations during temperature hazardous waste operation commences;
extremes, heat stress, and other appro- for example, when soil, surface water
priate medical considerations. or containers are moved or disturbed;
(h) Monitoring—(1) General. (i) Moni- the employer shall monitor those em-
toring shall be performed in accord- ployees likely to have the highest ex-
ance with this paragraph where there posures to hazardous substances and
may be a question of employee expo- health hazards likely to be present
sure to hazardous concentrations of above permissible exposure limits or
hazardous substances in order to assure published exposure levels by using per-
proper selection of engineering con-
sonal sampling frequently enough to
trols, work practices and personal pro-
characterize employee exposures. If the
tective equipment so that employees
employees likely to have the highest
are not exposed to levels which exceed
exposure are over permissible exposure
permissible exposure limits, or pub-
limits or published exposure limits,
lished exposure levels if there are no
permissible exposure limits, for haz- then monitoring shall continue to de-
ardous substances. termine all employees likely to be
(ii) Air monitoring shall be used to above those limits. The employer may
identify and quantify airborne levels of utilize a representative sampling ap-
hazardous substances and safety and proach by documenting that the em-
health hazards in order to determine ployees and chemicals chosen for moni-
the appropriate level of employee pro- toring are based on the criteria stated
tection needed on site. above.
(2) Initial entry. Upon initial entry, NOTE TO (h): It is not required to monitor
representative air monitoring shall be employees engaged in site characterization
conducted to identify any IDLH condi- operations covered by paragraph (c) of this
tion, exposure over permissible expo- section.
153
(i) Informational programs. Employers health program required in paragraph

shall develop and implement a pro- (b) of this section, shall be imple-
gram, which is part of the employer’s mented to contain and isolate the en-
safety and health program required in tire volume of the hazardous substance
paragraph (b) of this section, to inform being transferred.
employees, contractors, and sub- (ix) Drums and containers that can-
contractors (or their representative) not be moved without rupture, leakage,
actually engaged in hazardous waste or spillage shall be emptied into a
operations of the nature, level and de- sound container using a device classi-
gree of exposure likely as a result of fied for the material being transferred.
participation in such hazardous waste (x) A ground-penetrating system or
operations. Employees, contractors and other type of detection system or de-
subcontractors working outside of the vice shall be used to estimate the loca-
operations part of a site are not cov- tion and depth of buried drums or con-
ered by this standard. tainers.
(j) Handling drums and containers—(1) (xi) Soil or covering material shall be
General. (i) Hazardous substances and removed with caution to prevent drum
contaminated soils, liquids, and other or container rupture.
residues shall be handled, transported, (xii) Fire extinguishing equipment
labeled, and disposed of in accordance meeting the requirements of subpart F
with this paragraph. of this part shall be on hand and ready
(ii) Drums and containers used dur- for use to control incipient fires.
ing the clean-up shall meet the appro- (2) Opening drums and containers. The
priate DOT, OSHA, and EPA regula- following procedures shall be followed
tions for the wastes that they contain. in areas where drums or containers are
(iii) When practical, drums and con- being opened:
tainers shall be inspected and their in- (i) Where an airline respirator system
tegrity shall be assured prior to being is used, connections to the source of air
moved. Drums or containers that can- supply shall be protected from con-
not be inspected before being moved tamination and the entire system shall
because of storage conditions (i.e., bur- be protected from physical damage.
ied beneath the earth, stacked behind (ii) Employees not actually involved
other drums, stacked several tiers high in opening drums or containers shall be
in a pile, etc.) shall be moved to an ac- kept a safe distance from the drums or
cessible location and inspected prior to containers being opened.
further handling. (iii) If employees must work near or
(iv) Unlabelled drums and containers adjacent to drums or containers being
shall be considered to contain haz- opened, a suitable shield that does not
ardous substances and handled accord- interfere with the work operation shall
ingly until the contents are positively be placed between the employee and
identified and labeled. the drums or containers being opened
(v) Site operations shall be organized to protect the employee in case of acci-
to minimize the amount of drum or dental explosion.
container movement. (iv) Controls for drum or container
(vi) Prior to movement of drums or opening equipment, monitoring equip-
containers, all employees exposed to ment, and fire suppression equipment
the transfer operation shall be warned shall be located behind the explosion-
of the potential hazards associated resistant barrier.
with the contents of the drums or con- (v) When there is a reasonable possi-
tainers. bility of flammable atmospheres being
(vii) U.S. Department of Transpor- present, material handling equipment
tation specified salvage drums or con- and hand tools shall be of the type to
tainers and suitable quantities of prop- prevent sources of ignition.
er absorbent shall be kept available (vi) Drums and containers shall be
and used in areas where spills, leaks, or opened in such a manner that excess
ruptures may occur. interior pressure will be safely re-

(viii) Where major spills may occur, a lieved. If pressure can not be relieved
spill containment program, which is from a remote location, appropriate
part of the employer’s safety and shielding shall be placed between the
154
employee and the drums or containers or explosive materials until they have
to reduce the risk of employee injury. been characterized.
(vii) Employees shall not stand upon
CAUTION: Shipping of shock sensitive wastes
or work from drums or containers.
may be prohibited under U.S. Department of
(3) Material handling equipment. Mate- Transportation regulations. Employers and
rial handiing equipment used to trans- their shippers should refer to 49 CFR 173.21
fer drums and containers shall be se- and 173.50.
lected, positioned and operated to min-
imize sources of ignition related to the (6) Laboratory waste packs. In addition
equipment from igniting vapors re- to the requirements of paragraph (j)(5)
leased from ruptured drums or con- of this section, the following pre-
tainers. cautions shall be taken, as a minimum,
(4) Radioactive wastes. Drums and con- in handling laboratory waste packs
tainers containing radioactive wastes (lab packs):
shall not be handled until such time as (i) Lab packs shall be opened only
their hazard to employees is properly when necessary and then only by an in-
assessed. dividual knowledgeable in the inspec-
(5) Shock sensitive wastes. As a min- tion, classification, and segregation of
imum, the following special pre- the containers within the pack accord-
cautions shall be taken when drums ing to the hazards of the wastes.
and containers containing or suspected (ii) If crystalline material is noted on
of containing shock-sensitive wastes any container, the contents shall be
are handled:
handled as a shock-sensitive waste
(i) All non-essential employees shall
until the contents are identified.
be evacuated from the area of transfer.
(ii) Material handling equipment (7) Sampling of drum and container
shall be provided with explosive con- contents. Sampling of containers and
tainment devices or protective shields drums shall be done in accordance with
to protect equipment operators from a sampling procedure which is part of
exploding containers. the site safety and health plan devel-
(iii) An employee alarm system capa- oped for and available to employees
ble of being perceived above sur- and others at the specific worksite.
rounding light and noise conditions (8) Shipping and transport. (i) Drums
shall be used to signal the commence- and containers shall be identified and
ment and completion of explosive classified prior to packaging for ship-
waste handling activities. ment.
(iv) Continuous communications (i.e., (ii) Drum or container staging areas
portable radios, hand signals, tele- shall be kept to the minimum number
phones, as appropriate) shall be main- necessary to identify and classify ma-
tained between the employee-in-charge terials safely and prepare them for
of the immediate handling area and transport.
both the site safety and health super- (iii) Staging areas shall be provided
visor and the command post until such with adequate access and egress routes.
time as the handling operation is com- (iv) Bulking of hazardous wastes
pleted. Communication equipment or
shall be permitted only after a thor-
methods that could cause shock sen-
ough characterization of the materials
sitive materials to explode shall not be
has been completed.
used.
(v) Drums and containers under pres- (9) Tank and vault procedures. (i)
sure, as evidenced by bulging or swell- Tanks and vaults containing hazardous
ing, shall not be moved until such time substances shall be handled in a man-
as the cause for excess pressure is de- ner similar to that for drums and con-
termined and appropriate containment tainers, taking into consideration the
procedures have been implemented to size of the tank or vault.
protect employees from explosive relief (ii) Appropriate tank or vault entry
of the drum. procedures as described in the employ-

(vi) Drums and containers containing er’s safety and health plan shall be fol-
packaged laboratory wastes shall be lowed whenever employees must enter
considered to contain shock-sensitive a tank or vault.
155
(k) Decontamination—(1) General. Pro- cleaning establishments that decon-

cedures for all phases of decontamina- taminate protective clothing or equip-
tion shall be developed and implement shall be informed of the poten-
mented in accordance with this para- tially harmful effects of exposures to
graph. hazardous substances.
(2) Decontamination procedures. (i) A (8) Showers and change rooms. Where
decontamination procedure shall be de- the decontamination procedure indi-
veloped, communicated to employees cates a need for regular showers and
and implemented before any employees change rooms outside of a contami-
or equipment may enter areas on site nated area, they shall be provided and
where potential for exposure to haz- meet the requirements of 29 CFR
ardous substances exists. 1910.141. If temperature conditions pre-
(ii) Standard operating procedures vent the effective use of water, then
shall be developed to minimize em- other effective means for cleansing
ployee contact with hazardous sub- shall be provided and used.
stances or with equipment that has (l) Emergency response by employees at
contacted hazardous substances. uncontrolled hazardous waste sites—(1)
(iii) All employees leaving a contami- Emergency response plan. (i) An emer-
nated area shall be appropriately de- gency response plan shall be developed
contaminated; all contaminated cloth- and implemented by all employers
ing and equipment leaving a contami- within the scope of paragraphs (a)(1)
nated area shall be appropriately dis- (i)–(ii) of this section to handle antici-
posed of or decontaminated. pated emergencies prior to the com-
(iv) Decontamination procedures mencement of hazardous waste oper-
shall be monitored by the site safety ations. The plan shall be in writing and
and health supervisor to determine available for inspection and copying by
their effectiveness. When such proce- employees, their representatives,
dures are found to be ineffective, ap- OSHA personnel and other govern-
propriate steps shall be taken to cor- mental agencies with relevant respon-
rect any deficiencies. sibilities.
(3) Location. Decontamination shall (ii) Employers who will evacuate
be performed in geographical areas their employees from the danger area
that will minimize the exposure of when an emergency occurs, and who do
uncontaminated employees or equip- not permit any of their employees to
ment to contaminated employees or assist in handling the emergency, are
equipment. exempt from the requirements of this
(4) Equipment and solvents. All equip- paragraph if they provide an emer-
ment and solvents used for decon- gency action plan complying with
tamination shall be decontaminated or § 1926.35 of this part.
disposed of properly. (2) Elements of an emergency response
(5) Personal protective clothing and plan. The employer shall develop an
equipment. (i) Protective clothing and emergency response plan for emer-
equipment shall be decontaminated, gencies which shall address, as a min-
cleaned, laundered, maintained or re- imum, the following:
placed as needed to maintain their ef- (i) Pre-emergency planning.
fectiveness. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(ii) Employees whose non-imper- ity, and communication.
meable clothing becomes wetted with (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
hazardous substances shall imme- vention.
diately remove that clothing and pro- (iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
ceed to shower. The clothing shall be uge.
disposed of or decontaminated before it (v) Site security and control.
is removed from the work zone. (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
(6) Unauthorized employees. Unauthor- dures.
ized employees shall not remove pro- (vii) Decontamination procedures
tective clothing or equipment from which are not covered by the site safe-
change rooms. ty and health plan.
(7) Commercial laundries or cleaning es- (viii) Emergency medical treatment
tablishments. Commercial laundries or and first aid.
156
(ix) Emergency alerting and response TABLE D–65.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION

procedures. INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES—Continued
(x) Critique of response and follow-
Foot-
up. can- Area or operations
(xi) PPE and emergency equipment. dles
(3) Procedures for handling emergency 3 ........ Excavation and waste areas, accessways, active
incidents. (i) In addition to the ele- storage areas, loading platforms, refueling, and
ments for the emergency response plan field maintenance areas.
required in paragraph (1)(2) of this sec- 5 ........ Indoors: Warehouses, corridors, hallways, and
exitways.
tion, the following elements shall be 5 ........ Tunnels, shafts, and general underground work
included for emergency response plans: areas. (Exception: Minimum of 10 foot-candles is
(A) Site topography, layout, and pre- required at tunnel and shaft heading during drilling
mucking, and scaling. Mine Safety and Health Ad-
vailing weather conditions. ministration approved cap lights shall be accept-
(B) Procedures for reporting inci- able for use in the tunnel heading.)
dents to local, state, and federal gov- 10 ...... General shops (e.g., mechanical and electrical
ernmental agencies. equipment rooms, active storerooms, barracks or
living quarters, locker or dressing rooms, dining
(ii) The emergency response plan areas, and indoor toilets and workrooms.)
shall be a separate section of the Site 30 ...... First aid stations, infirmaries, and offices.
Safety and Health Plan.
(iii) The emergency response plan (n) Sanitation at temporary work-
shall be compatible and integrated places—(1) Potable water. (i) An ade-
with the disaster, fire and/or emer- quate supply of potable water shall be
gency response plans of local, state, provided on the site.
and federal agencies. (ii) Portable containers used to dis-
(iv) The emergency response plan pense drinking water shall be capable
shall be rehearsed regularly as part of of being tightly closed, and equipped
the overall training program for site with a tap. Water shall not be dipped
operations. from containers.
(v) The site emergency response plan (iii) Any container used to distribute
shall be reviewed periodically and, as drinking water shall be clearly marked
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- as to the nature of its contents and not
rent with new or changing site condi- used for any other purpose.
tions or information. (iv) Where single service cups (to be
(vi) An employee alarm system shall used but once) are supplied, both a san-
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR itary container for the unused cups and
1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- a receptacle for disposing of the used
gency situation; to stop work activities cups shall be provided.
if necessary; to lower background noise (2) Nonpotable water. (i) Outlets for
in order to speed communication; and nonpotable water, such as water for
to begin emergency procedures. firefighting purposes, shall be identi-
(vii) Based upon the information fied to indicate clearly that the water
available at time of the emergency, the is unsafe and is not to be used for
employer shall evaluate the incident drinking, washing, or cooking pur-
and the site response capabilities and poses.
proceed with the appropriate steps to (ii) There shall be no cross-connec-
implement the site emergency response tion, open or potential, between a sys-
plan. tem furnishing potable water and a
(m) Illumination. Areas accessible to system furnishing nonpotable water.
employees shall be lighted to not less (3) Toilet facilities. (i) Toilets shall be
than the minimum illumination inten- provided for employees according to
sities listed in the following Table D– the following Table D–65.2.
65.1 while any work is in progress:
TABLE D–65.2—TOILET FACILITIES
TABLE D–65.1—MINIMUM ILLUMINATION Number of employees Minimum number of facilities
INTENSITIES IN FOOT-CANDLES
20 or fewer ............................. One.

Foot- More than 20, fewer than 200 One toilet seat and one uri-
can- Area or operations nal per 40 employees.
dles More than 200 ........................ One toilet seat and one uri-
nal per 50 employees.
5 ........ General site areas.
157
(ii) Under temporary field conditions, rated by the shower area required in
provisions shall be made to assure that paragraph (n)(7)(i) of this section. One
at least one toilet facility is available. change area, with an exit leading off
(iii) Hazardous waste sites not pro- the worksite, shall provide employees
vided with a sanitary sewer shall be with a clean area where they can re-
provided with the following toilet fa- move, store, and put on street clothing.
cilities unless prohibited by local The second area, with an exit to the
codes: worksite, shall provide employees with
(A) Chemical toilets; an area where they can put on, remove
(B) Recirculating toilets; and store work clothing and personal
(C) Combustion toilets; or protective equipment.
(D) Flush toilets.
(iii) Showers and change rooms shall
(iv) The requirements of this para-
graph for sanitation facilities shall not be located in areas where exposures are
apply to mobile crews having transpor- below the permissible exposure limits
tation readily available to nearby toi- and published exposure levels. If this
let facilities. cannot be accomplished, then a ven-
(v) Doors entering toilet facilities tilation system shall be provided that
shall be provided with entrance locks will supply air that is below the per-
controlled from inside the facility. missible exposure limits and published
(4) Food handling. All food service fa- exposure levels.
cilities and operations for employees (iv) Employers shall assure that em-
shall meet the applicable laws, ordi- ployees shower at the end of their work
nances, and regulations of the jurisdic- shift and when leaving the hazardous
tions in which they are located. waste site.
(5) Temporary sleeping quarters. When (o) New technology programs. (1) The
temporary sleeping quarters are pro- employer shall develop and implement
vided, they shall be heated, ventilated, procedures for the introduction of ef-
and lighted. fective new technologies and equip-
(6) Washing facilities. The employer ment developed for the improved pro-
shall provide adequate washing facili- tection of employees working with haz-
ties for employees engaged in oper-
ardous waste clean-up operations, and
ations where hazardous substances
the same shall be implemented as part
may be harmful to employees. Such fa-
of the site safety and health program
cilities shall be in near proximity to
the worksite; in areas where exposures to assure that employee protection is
are below permissible exposure limits being maintained.
and published exposure levels and (2) New technologies, equipment or
which are under the controls of the em- control measures available to the in-
ployer; and shall be so equipped as to dustry, such as the use of foams,
enable employees to remove hazardous absorbents, adsorbents, neutralizers, or
substances from themselves. other means to suppress the level of air
(7) Showers and change rooms. When contaminates while excavating the site
hazardous waste clean-up or removal or for spill control, shall be evaluated
operations commence on a site and the by employers or their representatives.
duration of the work will require six Such an evaluation shall be done to de-
months or greater time to complete, termine the effectiveness of the new
the employer shall provide showers and methods, materials, or equipment be-
change rooms for all employees ex- fore implementing their use on a large
posed to hazardous substances and scale for enhancing employee protec-
health hazards involved in hazardous tion. Information and data from manu-
waste clean-up or removal operations. facturers or suppliers may be used as
(i) Showers shall be provided and part of the employer’s evaluation ef-
shall meet the requirements of 29 CFR fort. Such evaluations shall be made
1926.51(f)(4).
available to OSHA upon request.

(ii) Change rooms shall be provided
and shall meet the requirements of 29 (p) Certain operations conducted under
CFR 1926.51(i). Change rooms shall con- the Resource Conservation and Recovery
sist of two separate change areas sepa-
158
Act of 1976 (RCRA). Employers con- as well as (j)(3) and (j)(8) of this section
ducting operations at treatment, stor- prior to starting such work.
age and disposal (TSD) facilities speci- (7) Training program—(i) New employ-
fied in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this sec- ees. The employer shall develop and im-
tion shall provide and implement the plement a training program, which is
programs specified in this paragraph. part of the employer’s safety and
See the ‘‘Notes and Exceptions’’ to health program, for employees exposed
paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section for to health hazards or hazardous sub-
employers not covered.)’’. stances at TSD operations to enable
(1) Safety and health program. The em- the employees to perform their as-
ployer shall develop and implement a signed duties and functions in a safe
written safety and health program for and healthful manner so as not endan-
employees involved in hazardous waste ger themselves or other employees. The
operations that shall be available for initial training shall be for 24 hours
inspection by employees, their rep-
and refresher training shall be for eight
resentatives and OSHA personnel. The
hours annually. Employees who have
program shall be designed to identify,
received the initial training required
evaluate and control safety and health
hazards in their facilities for the pur- by this paragraph shall be given a writ-
pose of employee protection, to provide ten certificate attesting that they have
for emergency response meeting the re- successfully completed the necessary
quirements of paragraph (p)(8) of this training.
section and to address as appropriate (ii) Current employees. Employers who
site analysis, engineering controls, can show by an employee’s previous
maximum exposure limits, hazardous work experience and/or training that
waste handling procedures and uses of the employee has had training equiva-
new technologies. lent to the initial training required by
(2) Hazard communication program. this paragraph, shall be considered as
The employer shall implement a haz- meeting the initial training require-
ard communication program meeting ments of this paragraph as to that em-
the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.59 as ployee. Equivalent training includes
part of the employer’s safety and pro- the training that existing employees
gram. might have already received from ac-
NOTE TO 1926.65: The exemption for haz-
tual site work experience. Current em-
ardous waste provided in § 1926.59 is applica- ployees shall receive eight hours of re-
ble to this section. fresher training annually.
(iii) Trainers. Trainers who teach ini-
(3) Medical surveillance program. The
tial training shall have satisfactorily
employer shall develop and implement
completed a training course for teach-
a medical surveillance program meet-
ing the requirements of paragraph (f) of ing the subjects they are expected to
this section. teach or they shall have the academic
(4) Decontamination program. The em- credentials and instruction experience
ployer shall develop and implement a necessary to demonstrate a good com-
decontamination procedure meeting mand of the subject matter of the
the requirements of paragraph (k) of courses and competent instructional
this section. skills.
(5) New technology program. The em- (8) Emergency response program—(i)
ployer shall develop and implement Emergency response plan. An emergency
procedures meeting the requirements response plan shall be developed and
of paragraph (o) of this section for in- implemented by all employers. Such
troducing new and innovative equip- plans need not duplicate any of the
ment into the workplace. subjects fully addressed in the employ-
(6) Material handling program. Where er’s contingency planning required by
employees will be handling drums or permits, such as those issued by the
containers, the employer shall develop U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-

and implement procedures meeting the cy, provided that the contingency plan
requirements of paragraphs (j)(1) (ii) is made part of the emergency response
through (viii) and (xi) of this section, plan. The emergency response plan
159
shall be a written portion of the em- that they are instructed in that case to
ployers safety and health program re- summon the fully trained employees and
quired in paragraph (p)(1) of this sec- not attempt control activities for which
they are not trained.
tion. Employers who will evacuate Exception #2: An employer need not train all
their employees from the worksite lo- employees to the degree specified if ar-
cation when an emergency occurs and rangements have been made in advance for
who do not permit any of their employ- an outside fully-trained emergency re-
ees to assist in handling the emergency sponse team to respond in a reasonable pe-
are exempt from the requirements of riod and all employees, who may come to
paragraph (p)(8) if they provide an the incident first, have sufficient aware-
emergency action plan complying with ness training to recognize that an emer-
gency response situation exists and they
§ 1926.35 of this part. have been instructed to call the designated
(ii) Elements of an emergency response outside fully-trained emergency response
plan. The employer shall develop an team for assistance.
emergency response plan for emer-
gencies which shall address, as a min- (B) Employee members of TSD facil-
imum, the following areas to the ex- ity emergency response organizations
tent that they are not addressed in any shall be trained to a level of com-
specific program required in this para- petence in the recognition of health
graph: and safety hazards to protect them-
(A) Pre-emergency planning and co- selves and other employees. This would
ordination with outside parties. include training in the methods used to
(B) Personnel roles, lines of author- minimize the risk from safety and
ity, and communication. health hazards; in the safe use of con-
(C) Emergency recognition and pre- trol equipment; in the selection and
vention. use of appropriate personal protective
(D) Safe distances and places of ref- equipment; in the safe operating proce-
uge. dures to be used at the incident scene;
(E) Site security and control. in the techniques of coordination with
(F) Evacuation routes and proce- other employees to minimize risks; in
dures. the appropriate response to over expo-
(G) Decontamination procedures. sure from health hazards or injury to
(H) Emergency medical treatment themselves and other employees; and
and first aid. in the recognition of subsequent symp-
(I) Emergency alerting and response toms which may result from over expo-
procedures. sures.
(J) Critique of response and follow- (C) The employer shall certify that
up. each covered employee has attended
(K) PPE and emergency equipment. and successfully completed the train-
(iii) Training. (A) Training for emer- ing required in paragraph (p)(8)(iii) of
gency response employees shall be this section, or shall certify the em-
completed before they are called upon ployee’s competency at least yearly.
to perform in real emergencies. Such The method used to demonstrate com-
training shall include the elements of petency for certification of training
shall be recorded and maintained by
the emergency response plan, standard
the employer.
operating procedures the employer has
(iv) Procedures for handling emergency
established for the job, the personal
incidents. (A) In addition to the ele-
protective equipment to be worn and
ments for the emergency response plan
procedures for handling emergency in-
required in paragraph (p)(8)(ii) of this
cidents.
section, the following elements shall be
Exception #1: An employer need not train all included for emergency response plans
employees to the degree specified if the to the extent that they do not repeat
employer divides the work force in a man- any information already contained in
ner such that a sufficient number of em- the emergency response plan:
ployees who have responsibility to control
(1) Site topography, layout, and pre-
emergencies have the training specified,

and all other employees, who may first re- vailing weather conditions.
spond to an emergency incident, have suffi- (2) Procedures for reporting incidents
cient awareness training to recognize that to local, state, and federal govern-
an emergency response situation exists and mental agencies.
160
(B) The emergency response plan ployees to assist in handling the emer-
shall be compatible and integrated gency, are exempt from the require-
with the disaster, fire and/or emer- ments of this paragraph if they provide
gency response plans of local, state, an emergency action plan in accord-
and federal agencies. ance with § 1926.35 of this part.
(C) The emergency response plan (2) Elements of an emergency response
shall be rehearsed regularly as part of plan. The employer shall develop an
the overall training program for site emergency response plan for emer-
operations. gencies which shall address, as a min-
(D) The site emergency response plan imum, the following to the extent that
shall be reviewed periodically and, as they are not addressed elsewhere:
necessary, be amended to keep it cur- (i) Pre-emergency planning and co-
rent with new or changing site condi- ordination with outside parties.
tions or information. (ii) Personnel roles, lines of author-
(E) An employee alarm system shall ity, training, and communication.
be installed in accordance with 29 CFR (iii) Emergency recognition and pre-
1926.159 to notify employees of an emer- vention.
gency situation; to stop work activities (iv) Safe distances and places of ref-
if necessary; to lower background noise uge.
in order to speed communication; and (v) Site security and control.
to begin emergency procedures. (vi) Evacuation routes and proce-
(F) Based upon the information avail- dures.
able at time of the emergency, the em- (vii) Decontamination.
ployer shall evaluate the incident and (viii) Emergency medical treatment
the site response capabilities and pro- and first aid.
ceed with the appropriate steps to im- (ix) Emergency alerting and response
plement the site emergency response procedures.
plan. (x) Critique of response and follow-
(q) Emerqency response to hazardous up.
substance releases. This paragraph cov- (xi) PPE and emergency equipment.
ers employers whose employees are en- (xii) Emergency response organiza-
gaged in emergency response no matter tions may use the local emergency re-
where it occurs except that it does not sponse plan or the state emergency re-
cover employees engaged in operations sponse plan or both, as part of their
specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through emergency response plan to avoid du-
(a)(1)(iv) of this section. Those emer- plication. Those items of the emer-
gency response organizations who have gency response plan that are being
developed and implemented programs properly addressed by the SARA Title
equivalent to this paragraph for han- III plans may be substituted into their
dling releases of hazardous substances emergency plan or otherwise kept to-
pursuant to section 303 of the Super- gether for the employer and employee’s
fund Amendments and Reauthorization use.
Act of 1986 (Emergency Planning and (3) Procedures for handling emergency
Community Right-to-Know Act of 1986, response. (i) The senior emergency re-
42 U.S.C. 11003) shall be deemed to have sponse official responding to an emer-
met the requirements of this para- gency shall become the individual in
graph. charge of a site-specific Incident Com-
(1) Emergency response plan. An emer- mand System (ICS). All emergency re-
gency response plan shall be developed sponders and their communications
and implemented to handle anticipated shall be coordinated and controlled
emergencies prior to the commence- through the individual in charge of the
ment of emergency response oper- ICS assisted by the senior official
ations. The plan shall be in writing and present for each employer.
available for inspection and copying by
NOTE TO (g)(3)(i): The senior official at an
employees, their representatives and
emergency response is the most senior offi-

OSHA personnel. Employers who will cial on the site who has the responsibility
evacuate their employees from the for controlling the operations at the site.
danger area when an emergency occurs, Initially it is the senior officer on the first-
and who do not permit any of their em- due piece of responding emergency apparatus
161
to arrive on the incident scene. As more sen- being implemented at the emergency
ior officers arrive (i.e., battalion chief, fire response site, with specific responsi-
chief, state law enforcement official, site co-
bility to identify and evaluate hazards
ordinator, etc.) the position is passed up the
line of authority which has been previously and to provide direction with respect
established. to the safety of operations for the
emergency at hand.
(ii) The individual in charge of the
ICS shall identify, to the extent pos- (viii) When activities are judged by
sible, all hazardous substances or con- the safety official to be an IDLH condi-
ditions present and shall address as ap- tion and/or to involve an imminent
propriate site analysis, use of engineer- danger condition, the safety official
ing controls, maximum exposure lim- shall have the authority to alter, sus-
its, hazardous substance handling pro- pend, or terminate those activities.
cedures, and use of any new tech- The safety official shall immediately
nologies. inform the individual in charge of the
(iii) Based on the hazardous sub- ICS of any actions needed to be taken
stances and/or conditions present, the to correct these hazards at the emer-
individual in charge of the ICS shall gency scene.
implement appropriate emergency op- (ix) After emergency operations have
erations, and assure that the personal terminated, the individual in charge of
protective equipment worn is appro- the ICS shall implement appropriate
priate for the hazards to be encoun-
decontamination procedures.
tered. However, personal protective
equipment shall meet, at a minimum, (x) When deemed necessary for meet-
the criteria contained in 29 CFR 1926.97 ing the tasks at hand, approved self-
when worn while performing fire fight- contained compressed air breathing ap-
ing operations beyond the incipient paratus may be used with approved cyl-
stage for any incident. inders from other approved self-con-
(iv) Employees engaged in emergency tained compressed air breathing appa-
response and exposed to hazardous sub- ratus provided that such cylinders are
stances presenting an inhalation haz- of the same capacity and pressure rat-
ard or potential inhalation hazard shall ing. All compressed air cylinders used
wear positive pressure self-contained with self-contained breathing appa-
breathing apparatus while engaged in ratus shall meet U.S. Department of
emergency response, until such time Transportation and National Institute
that the individual in charge of the ICS for Occupational Safety and Health cri-
determines through the use of air mon- teria.
itoring that a decreased level of res- (4) Skilled support personnel. Per-
piratory protection will not result in sonnel, not necessarily an employer’s
hazardous exposures to employees.
own employees, who are skilled in the
(v) The individual in charge of the
operation of certain equipment, such as
ICS shall limit the number of emer-
mechanized earth moving or digging
gency response personnel at the emer-
gency site, in those areas of potential equipment or crane and hoisting equip-
or actual exposure to incident or site ment, and who are needed temporarily
hazards, to those who are actively per- to perform immediate emergency sup-
forming emergency operations. How- port work that cannot reasonably be
ever, operations in hazardous areas performed in a timely fashion by an
shall be performed using the buddy sys- employer’s own employees, and who
tem in groups of two or more. will be or may be exposed to the haz-
(vi) Back-up personnel shall stand by ards at an emergency response scene,
with equipment ready to provide as- are not required to meet the training
sistance or rescue. Advance first aid required in this paragraph for the em-
support personnel, as a minimum, shall ployer’s regular employees. However,
also stand by with medical equipment these personnel shall be given an ini-
and transportation capability. tial briefing at the site prior to their

(vii) The individual in charge of the
ICS shall designate a safety official,
who is knowledgable in the operations
162
participation in any emergency re- (C) The ability to recognize the pres-
sponse. The initial briefing shall in- ence of hazardous substances in an
clude instruction in the wearing of ap- emergency.
propriate personal protective equip- (D) The ability to identify the haz-
ment, what chemical hazards are in- ardous substances, if possible.
volved, and what duties are to be per- (E) An understanding of the role of
formed. All other appropriate safety the first responder awareness indi-
and health precautions provided to the vidual in the employer’s emergency re-
employer’s own employees shall be sponse plan including site security and
used to assure the safety and health of control and the U.S. Department of
these personnel. Transportation’s Emergency Response
(5) Specialist employees. Employees Guidebook.
who, in the course of their regular job (F) The ability to realize the need for
duties, work with and are trained in additional resources, and to make ap-
the hazards of specific hazardous sub- propriate notifications to the commu-
stances, and who will be called upon to nication center.
provide technical advice or assistance (ii) First responder operations level.
at a hazardous substance release inci- First responders at the operations level
dent to the individual in charge, shall are individuals who respond to releases
receive training or demonstrate com- or potential releases of hazardous sub-
petency in the area of their specializa- stances as part of the initial response
tion annually. to the site for the purpose of protecting
(6) Training. Training shall be based nearby persons, property, or the envi-
on the duties and function to be per- ronment from the effects of the re-
formed by each responder of an emer- lease. They are trained to respond in a
gency response organization. The skill defensive fashion without actually try-
and knowledge levels required for all ing to stop the release. Their function
new responders, those hired after the is to contain the release from a safe
effective date of this standard, shall be distance, keep it from spreading, and
conveyed to them through training be- prevent exposures. First responders at
fore they are permitted to take part in the operational level shall have re-
actual emergency operations on an in- ceived at least eight hours of training
cident. Employees who participate, or or have had sufficient experience to ob-
are expected to participate, in emer- jectively demonstrate competency in
gency response, shall be given training the following areas in addition to those
in accordance with the following para- listed for the awareness level and the
graphs: employer shall so certify:
(i) First responder awareness level. (A) Knowledge of the basic hazard
First responders at the awareness level and risk assessment techniques.
are individuals who are likely to wit- (B) Know how to select and use prop-
ness or discover a hazardous substance er personal protective equipment pro-
release and who have been trained to vided to the first responder operational
initiate an emergency response se- level.
quence by notifying the proper authori- (C) An understanding of basic haz-
ties of the release. They would take no ardous materials terms.
further action beyond notifying the au- (D) Know how to perform basic con-
thorities of the release. First respond- trol, containment and/or confinement
ers at the awareness level shall have operations within the capabilities of
sufficient training or have had suffi- the resources and personal protective
cient experience to objectively dem- equipment available with their unit.
onstrate competency in the following (E) Know how to implement basic de-
areas: contamination procedures.
(A) An understanding of what haz- (F) An understanding of the relevant
ardous substances are, and the risks as- standard operating procedures and ter-
sociated with them in an incident. mination procedures.
(B) An understanding of the potential (iii) Hazardous materials technician.

outcomes associated with an emer- Hazardous materials technicians are
gency created when hazardous sub- individuals who respond to releases or
stances are present. potential releases for the purpose of
163
stopping the release. They assume a (A) Know how to implement the local
more aggressive role than a first re- emergency response plan.
sponder at the operations level in that (B) Understand classification, identi-
they will approach the point of release fication and verification of known and
in order to plug, patch or otherwise unknown materials by using advanced
stop the release of a hazardous sub- survey instruments and equipment.
stance. Hazardous materials techni- (C) Know of the state emergency re-
cians shall have received at least 24 sponse plan.
hours of training equal to the first re- (D) Be able to select and use proper
sponder operations level and in addi- specialized chemical personal protec-
tion have competency in the following tive equipment provided to the haz-
areas and the employer shall so certify: ardous materials specialist.
(A) Know how to implement the em- (E) Understand in-depth hazard and
ployer’s emergency response plan. risk techniques.
(B) Know the classification, identi- (F) Be able to perform specialized
fication and verification of known and control, containment, and/or confine-
unknown materials by using field sur- ment operations within the capabili-
vey instruments and equipment. ties of the resources and personal pro-
(C) Be able to function within an as- tective equipment available.
signed role in the Incident Command (G) Be able to determine and imple-
System. ment decontamination procedures.
(D) Know how to select and use prop- (H) Have the ability to develop a site
er specialized chemical personal pro- safety and control plan.
tective equipment provided to the haz- (I) Understand chemical, radiological
ardous materials technician. and toxicological terminology and be-
(E) Understand hazard and risk as- havior.
sessment techniques. (v) On scene incident commander. Inci-
(F) Be able to perform advance con- dent commanders, who will assume
trol, containment, and/or confinement control of the incident scene beyond
operations within the capabilities of the first responder awareness level,
the resources and personal protective shall receive at least 24 hours of train-
equipment available with the unit. ing equal to the first responder oper-
(G) Understand and implement de- ations level and in addition have com-
contamination procedures. petency in the following areas and the
(H) Understand termination proce- employer shall so certify:
dures. (A) Know and be able to implement
(I) Understand basic chemical and the employer’s incident command sys-
toxicological terminology and behav- tem.
ior. (B) Know how to implement the em-
(iv) Hazardous materials specialist. ployer’s emergency response plan.
Hazardous materials specialists are in- (C) Know and understand the hazards
dividuals who respond with and provide and risks associated with employees
support to hazardous materials techni- working in chemical protective cloth-
cians. Their duties parallel those of the ing.
hazardous materials technician, how- (D) Know how to implement the local
ever, those duties require a more di- emergency response plan.
rected or specific knowledge of the var- (E) Know of the state emergency re-
ious substances they may be called sponse plan and of the Federal Re-
upon to contain. The hazardous mate- gional Response Team.
rials specialist would also act as the (F) Know and understand the impor-
site liaison with Federal, state, local tance of decontamination procedures.
and other government authorities in (7) Trainers. Trainers who teach any
regards to site activities. Hazardous of the above training subjects shall
materials specialists shall have re- have satisfactorily completed a train-
ceived at least 24 hours of training ing course for teaching the subjects
equal to the technician level and in ad- they are expected to teach, such as the
dition have competency in the fol- courses offered by the U.S. National
lowing areas and the employer shall so Fire Academy, or they shall have the
certify: training and/or academic credentials
164
and instructional experience necessary (ii) Where the clean-up is done on

to demonstrate competent instruc- plant property using plant or work-
tional skills and a good command of place employees, such employees shall
the subject matter of the courses they have completed the training require-
are to teach. ments of the following: 29 CFR 1926.35,
(8) Refresher training. (i) Those em- 1926.59, and 1926.103, and other appro-
ployees who are trained in accordance priate safety and health training made
with paragraph (q)(6) of this section necessary by the tasks that they are
shall receive annual refresher training expected to be performed such as per-
of sufficient content and duration to sonal protective equipment and decon-
maintain their competencies, or shall tamination procedures. All equipment
demonstrate competency in those areas to be used in the performance of the
at least yearly. clean-up work shall be in serviceable
(ii) A statement shall be made of the condition and shall have been inspected
training or competency, and if a state- prior to use.
ment of competency is made, the em- APPENDICES TO § 1926.65—HAZARDOUS WASTE
ployer shall keep a record of the meth- OPERATIONS AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE
odology used to demonstrate com- NOTE: The following appendices serve as
petency. non-mandatory guidelines to assist employ-
(9) Medical surveillance and consulta- ees and employers in complying with the ap-
tion. (i) Members of an organized and propriate requirements of this section. How-
designated HAZMAT team and haz- ever § 1926.65(g) makes mandatory in certain
ardous materials specialists shall re- circumstances the use of Level A and Level
B PPE protection.
ceive a baseline physical examination
and be provided with medical surveil- APPENDIX A TO § 1926.65—PERSONAL
lance as required in paragraph (f) of PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT TEST METHODS
this section. This appendix sets forth the non-manda-
(ii) Any emergency response employ- tory examples of tests which may be used to
ees who exhibits signs or symptoms evaluate compliance with § 1926.65(g)(4) (ii)
which may have resulted from exposure and (iii). Other tests and other challenge
to hazardous substances during the agents may be used to evaluate compliance.
course of an emergency incident, either A. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective
immediately or subsequently, shall be suit pressure test
provided with medical consultation as 1.0—Scope
required in paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this 1.1 This practice measures the ability of a
section. gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
(10) Chemical protective clothing. protective suit material, seams, and closures
Chemical protective clothing and to maintain a fixed positive pressure. The re-
equipment to be used by organized and sults of this practice allow the gas tight in-
tegrity of a totally-encapsulating chemical
designated HAZMAT team members, or
protective suit to be evaluated.
to be used by hazardous materials spe- 1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to
cialists, shall meet the requirements of permeation, penetration, and degradation by
paragraphs (g) (3) through (5) of this specific hazardous substances is not deter-
section. mined by this test method.
(11) Post-emergency response oper- 2.0—Definition of terms
ations. Upon completion of the emer- 2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective
suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment
gency response, if it is determined that which is constructed of protective clothing
it is necessary to remove hazardous materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head,
substances, health hazards, and mate- arms, legs and respirator; may cover the
rials contaminated with them (such as wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at-
contaminated soil or other elements of tached gloves and boots; completely encloses
the natural environment) from the site the wearer and respirator by itself or in com-
of the incident, the employer con- bination with the wearer’s gloves and boots.
ducting the clean-up shall comply with 2.2 Protective clothing material means any
material or combination of materials used in

one of the following: an item of clothing for the purpose of iso-
(i) Meet all of the requirements of lating parts of the body from direct contact
paragraphs (b) through (o) of this sec- with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas-
tion; or eous chemicals.
165
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this gauge. The ending suit pressure (C) shall be
test method, the limited flow of a gas under no less than 80 percent of the test pressure
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to (B); i.e., the pressure drop shall not exceed 20
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and percent of the test pressure (B).
time interval. 6.1.5 Inflate the suit until the pressure in-
3.0—Summary of test method side is equal to pressure (A), the pre-test ex-
3.1 The TECP suit is visually inspected and pansion suit pressure. Allow at least one
modified for the test. The test apparatus is minute to fill out the wrinkles in the suit.
attached to the suit to permit inflation to Release sufficient air to reduce the suit pres-
the pre-test suit expansion pressure for re- sure to pressure (B), the suit test pressure.
moval of suit wrinkles and creases. The pres- Begin timing. At the end of three minutes,
sure is lowered to the test pressure and mon- record the suit pressure as pressure (C), the
itored for three minutes. If the pressure drop ending suit pressure. The difference between
is excessive, the TECP suit fails the test and the suit test pressure and the ending suit
is removed from service. The test is repeated test pressure (B-C) shall be defined as the
after leak location and repair. suit pressure drop.
4.0—Required Supplies 6.1.6 If the suit pressure drop is more than
4.1 Source of compressed air.
20 percent of the suit test pressure (B) during
4.2 Test apparatus for suit testing, includ-
the three-minute test period, the suit fails
ing a pressure measurement device with a
the test and shall be removed from service.
sensitivity of at least 1⁄4 inch water gauge.
4.3 Vent valve closure plugs or sealing 7.0—Retest Procedure
tape. 7.1 If the suit fails the test check for leaks
4.4 Soapy water solution and soft brush. by inflating the suit to pressure (A) and
4.5 Stop watch or appropriate timing de- brushing or wiping the entire suit (including
vice. seams, closures, lens gaskets, glove-to-sleeve
5.0—Safety Precautions joints, etc.) with a mild soap and water solu-
5.1 Care shall be taken to provide the cor- tion. Observe the suit for the formation of
rect pressure safety devices required for the soap bubbles, which is an indication of a
source of compressed air used. leak. Repair all identified leaks.
6.0—Test Procedure 7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in
6.1 Prior to each test, the tester shall per- Test procedure 6.0.
form a visual inspection of the suit. Check 8.0—Report
the suit for seam integrity by visually exam- 8.1 Each TECP suit tested by this practice
ining the seams and gently pulling on the shall have the following information re-
seams. Ensure that all air supply lines, fit- corded:
tings, visor, zippers, and valves are secure 8.1.1 Unique identification number, identi-
and show no signs of deterioration. fying brand name, date of purchase, material
6.1.1 Seal off the vent valves along with of construction, and unique fit features, e.g.,
any other normal inlet or exhaust points special breathing apparatus.
(such as umbilical air line fittings or face 8.1.2 The actual values for test pressures
piece opening) with tape or other appropriate (A), (B), and (C) shall be recorded along with
means (caps, plugs, fixture, etc.). Care should the specific observation times. If the ending
be exercised in the sealing process not to pressure (C) is less than 80 percent of the test
damage any of the suit components. pressure (B), the suit shall be identified as
6.1.2 Close all closure assemblies. failing the test. When possible, the specific
6.1.3 Prepare the suit for inflation by pro- leak location shall be identified in the test
viding an improvised connection point on the records. Retest pressure data shall be re-
suit for connecting an airline. Attach the corded as an additional test.
pressure test apparatus to the suit to permit 8.1.3 The source of the test apparatus used
suit inflation from a compressed air source shall be identified and the sensitivity of the
equipped with a pressure indicating regu- pressure gauge shall be recorded.
lator. The leak tightness of the pressure test
8.1.4 Records shall be kept for each pres-
apparatus should be tested before and after
sure test even if repairs are being made at
each test by closing off the end of the tubing
the test location.
attached to the suit and assuring a pressure
of three inches water gauge for three min- CAUTION
utes can be maintained. If a component is re-
moved for the test, that component shall be Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be
replaced and a second test conducted with sure they are positioned correctly and se-
another component removed to permit a cured tightly before putting the suit back
complete test of the ensemble. into service. Special care should be taken to
6.1.4 The pre-test expansion pressure (A) examine each exhaust valve to make sure it
and the suit test pressure (B) shall be sup- is not blocked.
plied by the suit manufacturer, but in no Care should also be exercised to assure
case shall they be less than: (A)=three inches that the inside and outside of the suit is
water gauge; and (B)=two inches water completely dry before it is put into storage.
166
B. Totally-encapsulating chemical protective before the test room concentration is meas-
suit qualitative leak test ured, using a high range ammonia length of
stain detector tube. When the ammonia
1.0—Scope
vapor reaches a concentration of between
1.1 This practice semi-qualitatively tests
1000 and 1200 ppm, the suited individual
gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical
starts a standardized exercise protocol to
protective suit integrity by detecting inward
stress and flex the suit. After this protocol is
leakage of ammonia vapor. Since no modi-
completed, the test room concentration is
fications are made to the suit to carry out measured again. The suited individual exits
this test, the results from this practice pro- the test room and his stand-by person meas-
vide a realistic test for the integrity of the ures the ammonia concentration inside the
entire suit. suit using a low range ammonia length of
1.2 Resistance of the suit materials to per- stain detector tube or other more sensitive
meation, penetration, and degradation is not ammonia detector. A stand-by person is re-
determined by this test method. ASTM test quired to observe the test individual during
methods are available to test suit materials the test procedure; aid the person in donning
for these characteristics and the tests are and doffing the TECP suit; and monitor the
usually conducted by the manufacturers of suit interior. The intrusion coefficient of the
the suits. suit can be calculated by dividing the aver-
2.0—Definition of terms age test area concentration by the interior
2.1 Totally-encapsulated chemical protective suit concentration. A colorimetric ammonia
suit (TECP suit) means a full body garment indicator strip of bromophenol blue or equiv-
which is constructed of protective clothing alent is placed on the inside of the suit face
materials; covers the wearer’s torso, head, piece lens so that the suited individual is
arms, legs and respirator; may cover the able to detect a color change and know if the
wearer’s hands and feet with tightly at- suit has a significant leak. If a color change
tached gloves and boots; completely encloses is observed the individual shall leave the test
the wearer and respirator by itself or in com- room immediately.
bination with the wearer’s gloves, and boots. 4.0—Required supplies
2.2 Protective clothing material means any 4.1 A supply of concentrated aqueous am-
material or combination of materials used in monium hydroxide (58% by weight).
an item of clothing for the purpose of iso- 4.2 A supply of bromophenol/blue indi-
lating parts of the body from direct contact cating paper or equivalent, sensitive to 5–10
with a potentially hazardous liquid or gas- ppm ammonia or greater over a two-minute
eous chemicals. period of exposure. [pH 3.0 (yellow) to pH 4.6
2.3 Gas tight means, for the purpose of this (blue)]
test method, the limited flow of a gas under 4.3 A supply of high range (0.5–10 volume
pressure from the inside of a TECP suit to percent) and low range (5–700 ppm) detector
atmosphere at a prescribed pressure and tubes for ammonia and the corresponding
time interval. sampling pump. More sensitive ammonia de-
2.4 Intrusion Coefficient means a number ex- tectors can be substituted for the low range
pressing the level of protection provided by a detector tubes to improve the sensitivity of
gas tight totally-encapsulating chemical this practice.
protective suit. The intrusion coefficient is 4.4 A shallow plastic pan (PVC) at least
calculated by dividing the test room chal- 12″:14″:1″ and a half pint plastic container
lenge agent concentration by the concentra- (PVC) with tightly closing lid.
tion of challenge agent found inside the suit. 4.5 A graduated cylinder or other volu-
The accuracy of the intrusion coefficient is metric measuring device of at least 50 milli-
dependent on the challenge agent monitoring liters in volume with an accuracy of at least
methods. The larger the intrusion coefficient ±1 milliliters.
the greater the protection provided by the
TECP suit. 5.0—SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
3.0—Summary of recommended practice 5.1 Concentrated aqueous ammonium hy-
3.1 The volume of concentrated aqueous droxide, NH4 OH, is a corrosive volatile liq-
ammonia solution (ammonia hydroxide NH4 uid requiring eye, skin, and respiratory pro-
OH) required to generate the test atmos- tection. The person conducting the test shall
phere is determined using the directions out- review the MSDS for aqueous ammonia.
lined in 6.1. The suit is donned by a person 5.2 Since the established permissible ex-
wearing the appropriate respiratory equip- posure limit for ammonia is 35 ppm as a 15
ment (either a positive pressure self-con- minute STEL, only persons wearing a posi-
tained breathing apparatus or a positive tive pressure self-contained breathing appa-
pressure supplied air respirator) and worn in- ratus or a positive pressure supplied air res-
side the enclosed test room. The con- pirator shall be in the chamber. Normally
centrated aqueous ammonia solution is only the person wearing the totally-encap-
taken by the suited individual into the test sulating suit will be inside the chamber. A
room and poured into an open plastic pan. A stand-by person shall have a positive pres-
two-minute evaporation period is observed sure self-contained breathing apparatus, or a
167
positive pressure supplied air respirator Wait two minutes to allow for adequate vola-
available to enter the test area should the tilization of the concentrated aqueous am-
suited individual need assistance. monia. A small mixing fan can be used near
5.3 A method to monitor the suited indi- the evaporation pan to increase the evapo-
vidual must be used during this test. Visual ration rate of the ammonia solution.
contact is the simplest but other methods 6.6 After two minutes a determination of
using communication devices are acceptable. the ammonia concentration within the
5.4 The test room shall be large enough to chamber should be made using the high
allow the exercise protocol to be carried out range colorimetric detector tube. A con-
and then to be ventilated to allow for easy centration of 1000 ppm ammonia or greater
exhaust of the ammonia test atmosphere shall be generated before the exercises are
after the test(s) are completed. started.
5.5 Individuals shall be medically 6.7 To test the integrity of the suit the
screened for the use of respiratory protection following four minute exercise protocol
and checked for allergies to ammonia before should be followed:
participating in this test procedure. 6.7.1 Raising the arms above the head
with at least 15 raising motions completed in
6.0—TEST PROCEDURE one minute.
6.1.1 Measure the test area to the nearest 6.7.2 Walking in place for one minute with
foot and calculate its volume in cubic feet. at least 15 raising motions of each leg in a
Multiply the test area volume by 0.2 milli- one-minute period.
liters of concentrated aqueous ammonia so- 6.7.3 Touching the toes with a least 10
lution per cubic foot of test area volume to complete motions of the arms from above
determine the approximate volume of con- the head to touching of the toes in a one-
centrated aqueous ammonia required to gen- minute period.
erate 1000 ppm in the test area. 6.7.4 Knee bends with at least 10 complete
6.1.2 Measure this volume from the supply standing and squatting motions in a one-
of concentrated aqueous ammonia and place minute period.
it into a closed plastic container. 6.8 If at any time during the test the col-
6.1.3 Place the container, several high orimetric indicating paper should change
range ammonia detector tubes, and the pump colors, the test should be stopped and section
in the clean test pan and locate it near the 6.10 and 6.12 initiated (See ¶ 4.2).
test area entry door so that the suited indi- 6.9 After completion of the test exercise,
vidual has easy access to these supplies. the test area concentration should be meas-
6.2.1 In a non-contaminated atmosphere, ured again using the high range colorimetric
open a pre-sealed ammonia indicator strip detector tube.
and fasten one end of the strip to the inside 6.10 Exit the test area.
of the suit face shield lens where it can be 6.11 The opening created by the suit zip-
seen by the wearer. Moisten the indicator per or other appropriate suit penetration
strip with distilled water. Care shall be should be used to determine the ammonia
taken not to contaminate the detector part concentration in the suit with the low range
of the indicator paper by touching it. A length of stain detector tube or other ammo-
small piece of masking tape or equivalent nia monitor. The internal TECP suit air
should be used to attach the indicator strip should be sampled far enough from the en-
to the interior of the suit face shield. closed test area to prevent a false ammonia
6.2.2 If problems are encountered with reading.
this method of attachment, the indicator 6.12 After completion of the measurement
strip can be attached to the outside of the of the suit interior ammonia concentration
respirator face piece lens being used during the test is concluded and the suit is doffed
the test. and the respirator removed.
6.3 Don the respiratory protective device 6.13 The ventilating fan for the test room
normally used with the suit, and then don should be turned on and allowed to run for
the TECP suit to be tested. Check to be sure enough time to remove the ammonia gas.
all openings which are intended to be sealed The fan shall be vented to the outside of the
(zippers, gloves, etc.) are completely sealed. building.
DO NOT, however, plug off any venting 6.14 Any detectable ammonia in the suit
valves. interior (five ppm ammonia (NH3) or more
6.4 Step into the enclosed test room such for the length of stain detector tube) indi-
as a closet, bathroom, or test booth, cates that the suit has failed the test. When
equipped with an exhaust fan. No air should other ammonia detectors are used a lower
be exhausted from the chamber during the level of detection is possible, and it should be
test because this will dilute the ammonia specified as the pass/fail criteria.
challenge concentrations. 6.15 By following this test method, an in-

6.5 Open the container with the pre-meas- trusion coefficient of approximately 200 or
ured volume of concentrated aqueous ammo- more can be measured with the suit in a
nia within the enclosed test room, and pour completely operational condition. If the in-
the liquid into the empty plastic test pan. trusion coefficient is 200 or more, then the
168
suit is suitable for emergency response and As required by the standard, PPE must be
field use. selected which will protect employees from
the specific hazards which they are likely to
7.0—Retest procedures encounter during their work on-site.
7.1 If the suit fails this test, check for Selection of the appropriate PPE is a com-
leaks by following the pressure test in test A plex process which should take into consider-
above. ation a variety of factors. Key factors in-
7.2 Retest the TECP suit as outlined in volved in this process are identification of
the test procedure 6.0. the hazards, or suspected hazards; their
routes of potential hazard to employees (in-
8.0—Report halation, skin absorption, ingestion, and eye
or skin contact); and the performance of the
8.1 Each gas tight totally-encapsulating
PPE materials (and seams) in providing a bar-
chemical protective suit tested by this prac-
rier to these hazards. The amount of protec-
tice shall have the following information re-
tion provided by PPE is material-hazard spe-
corded.
cific. That is, protective equipment mate-
8.1.1 Unique identification number, iden- rials will protect well against some haz-
tifying brand name, date of purchase, mate- ardous substances and poorly, or not at all,
rial of construction, and unique suit fea- against others. In many instances, protec-
tures; e.g., special breathing apparatus. tive equipment materials cannot be found
8.1.2 General description of test room which will provide continuous protection
used for test. from the particular hazardous substance. In
8.1.3 Brand name and purchase date of these cases the breakthrough time of the
ammonia detector strips and color change protective material should exceed the work
data. durations.
8.1.4 Brand name, sampling range, and ex- Other factors in this selection process to
piration date of the length of stain ammonia be considered are matching the PPE to the
detector tubes. The brand name and model of employee’s work requirements and task-spe-
the sampling pump should also be recorded. cific conditions. The durability of PPE mate-
If another type of ammonia detector is used, rials, such as tear strength and seam
it should be identified along with its min- strength, should be considered in relation to
imum detection limit for ammonia. the employee’s tasks. The effects of PPE in
8.1.5 Actual test results shall list the two relation to heat stress and task duration are
test area concentrations, their average, the a factor in selecting and using PPE. In some
interior suit concentration, and the cal- cases layers of PPE may be necessary to pro-
culated intrusion coefficient. Retest data vide sufficient protection, or to protect ex-
shall be recorded as an additional test. pensive PPE inner garments, suits or equip-
8.2 The evaluation of the data shall be ment.
specified as ‘‘suit passed’’ or ‘‘suit failed,’’
The more that is known about the hazards
and the date of the test. Any detectable am-
at the site, the easier the job of PPE selec-
monia (five ppm or greater for the length of
tion becomes. As more information about
stain detector tube) in the suit interior indi-
the hazards and conditions at the site be-
cates the suit has failed this test. When
comes available, the site supervisor can
other ammonia detectors are used, a lower
make decisions to up-grade or down-grade
level of detection is possible and it should be
the level of PPE protection to match the
specified as the pass fail criteria.
tasks at hand.
CAUTION The following are guidelines which an em-
ployer can use to begin the selection of the
Visually inspect all parts of the suit to be appropriate PPE. As noted above, the site in-
sure they are positioned correctly and se- formation may suggest the use of combina-
cured tightly before putting the suit back tions of PPE selected from the different pro-
into service. Special care should be taken to tection levels (i.e., A, B, C, or D) as being
examine each exhaust valve to make sure it more suitable to the hazards of the work. It
is not blocked. should be cautioned that the listing below
Care should also be exercised to assure does not fully address the performance of the
that the inside and outside of the suit is specific PPE material in relation to the spe-
completely dry before it is put into storage. cific hazards at the job site, and that PPE
selection, evaluation and re-selection is an
APPENDIX B TO § 1926.65—GENERAL DESCRIP-
ongoing process until sufficient information
TION AND DISCUSSION OF THE LEVELS OF
about the hazards and PPE performance is
PROTECTION AND PROTECTIVE GEAR
obtained.
This appendix sets forth information about Part A. Personal protective equipment is
personal protective equipment (PPE) protec- divided into four categories based on the de-
tion levels which may be used to assist em- gree of protection afforded. (See Part B of
ployers in complying with the PPE require- this appendix for further explanation of Lev-
ments of this section. els A, B, C, and D hazards.)
169
I. Level A— To be selected when the great- 8. Hard hat. 1
est level of skin, respiratory, and eye protec- 9. Escape mask. 1
tion is required. 10. Face shield. 1
The following constitute Level A equip- IV. Level D—A work uniform affording
ment; it may be used as appropriate; minimal protection, used for nuisance con-
1. Positive pressure, full face-piece self- tamination only.
contained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or The following constitute Level D equip-
positive pressure supplied air respirator with ment; it may be used as appropriate:
escape SCBA, approved by the National In- 1. Coveralls.
stitute for Occupational Safety and Health 2. Gloves. 1
(NIOSH). 3. Boots/shoes, chemical-resistant steel toe
2. Totally-encapsulating chemical-protec- and shank.
tive suit. 4. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant (dispos-
3. Coveralls. 1 able). 1
4. Long underwear. 1 5. Safety glasses or chemical splash
5. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. goggles*.
6. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. 6. Hard hat. 1
7. Boots, chemical-resistant, steel toe and 7. Escape mask. 1
shank. 8. Face shield. 1
8. Hard hat (under suit). 1 Part B. The types of hazards for which lev-
9. Disposable protective suit, gloves and els A, B, C, and D protection are appropriate
boots (depending on suit construction, may are described below:
be worn over totally-encapsulating suit). I. Level A—Level A protection should be
II. Level B—The highest level of res- used when:
piratory protection is necessary but a lesser 1. The hazardous substance has been iden-
level of skin protection is needed. tified and requires the highest level of pro-
The following constitute Level B equip- tection for skin, eyes, and the respiratory
ment; it may be used as appropriate. system based on either the measured (or po-
1. Positive pressure, full-facepiece self-con- tential for) high concentration of atmos-
tained breathing apparatus (SCBA), or posi- pheric vapors, gases, or particulates; or the
tive pressure supplied air respirator with es- site operations and work functions involve a
cape SCBA (NIOSH approved). high potential for splash, immersion, or ex-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing posure to unexpected vapors, gases, or par-
(overalls and long-sleeved jacket; coveralls; ticulates of materials that are harmful to
one or two-piece chemical-splash suit; dis- skin or capable of being absorbed through
posable chemical-resistant overalls). the skin;
2. Substances with a high degree of hazard
3. Coveralls. 1
to the skin are known or suspected to be
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant.
present, and skin contact is possible; or
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant.
3. Operations are being conducted in con-
6. Boots, outer, chemical-resistant steel
fined, poorly ventilated areas, and the ab-
toe and shank.
sence of conditions requiring Level A have
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant
not yet been determined.
(disposable). 1
II. Level B—Level B protection should be
8. Hard hat. 1
used when:
9. [Reserved]
1. The type and atmospheric concentration
10. Face shield. 1
of substances have been identified and re-
III. Level C—The concentration(s) and
quire a high level of respiratory protection,
type(s) of airborne substance(s) is known and
but less skin protection;
the criteria for using air purifying res-
2. The atmosphere contains less than 19.5
pirators are met.
percent oxygen; or
The following constitute Level C equip- 3. The presence of incompletely identified
ment; it may be used as appropriate. vapors or gases is indicated by a direct-read-
1. Full-face or half-mask, air purifying res- ing organic vapor detection instrument, but
pirators (NIOSH approved). vapors and gases are not suspected of con-
2. Hooded chemical-resistant clothing taining high levels of chemicals harmful to
(overalls; two-piece chemical-splash suit; skin or capable of being absorbed through
disposable chemical-resistant overalls). the skin.
3. Coveralls. 1
4. Gloves, outer, chemical-resistant. NOTE: This involves atmospheres with
5. Gloves, inner, chemical-resistant. IDLH concentrations of specific substances
6. Boots (outer), chemical-resistant steel that present severe inhalation hazards and
toe and shank. 1 that do not represent a severe skin hazard;
7. Boot-covers, outer, chemical-resistant or that do not meet the criteria for use of
(disposable) 1. air-purifying respirators.
III. Level C—Level C protection should be
1 Optional, as applicable. used when:
170
1. The atmospheric contaminants, liquid sponsible for the various activities which
splashes, or other direct contact will not ad- will take place at the site. It will provide the
versely affect or be absorbed through any ex- overall means for planning and imple-
posed skin; menting the needed safety and health train-
2. The types of air contaminants have been ing and job orientation of employees who
identified, concentrations measured, and an will be working at the site. The program will
air-purifying respirator is available that can provide the means for identifying and con-
remove the contaminants; and trolling worksite hazards and the means for
3. All criteria for the use of air-purifying monitoring program effectiveness. The pro-
respirators are met. gram will need to cover the responsibilities
IV. Level D—Level D protection should be and authority of the site coordinator or the
used when: employer’s manager on the site for the safe-
1. The atmosphere contains no known haz- ty and health of employees at the site, and
ard; and the relationships with contractors or support
2. Work functions preclude splashes, im- services as to what each employer’s safety
mersion, or the potential for unexpected in- and health responsibilities are for their em-
halation of or contact with hazardous levels ployees on the site. Each contractor on the
of any chemicals. site needs to have its own safety and health
program so structured that it will smoothly
NOTE: As stated before, combinations of
interface with the program of the site coor-
personal protective equipment other than
dinator or principal contractor.
those described for Levels A, B, C, and D pro- Also those employers involved with treat-
tection may be more appropriate and may be ing, storing or disposal of hazardous waste as
used to provide the proper level of protec- covered in paragraph (p) must have imple-
tion. mented a safety and health program for their
As an aid in selecting suitable chemical employees. This program is to include the
protective clothing, it should be noted that hazard communication program required in
the National Fire Protection Association paragraph (p)(1) and the training required in
(NFPA) has developed standards on chemical paragraphs (p)(7) and (p)(8) as parts of the
protective clothing. The standards that have employers comprehensive overall safety and
been adopted by include: health program. This program is to be in
NFPA 1991—Standard on Vapor-Protective writing.
Suits for Hazardous Chemical Emergencies Each site or workplace safety and health
(EPA Level A Protective Clothing). program will need to include the following:
NFPA 1992—Standard on Liquid Splash- (1) Policy statements of the line of authority
Protective Suits for Hazardous Chemical and accountability for implementing the
Emergencies (EPA Level B Protective Cloth- program, the objectives of the program and
ing). the role of the site safety and health super-
NFPA 1993—Standard on Liquid Splash- visor or manager and staff; (2) means or
Protective Suits for Non-emergency, Non- methods for the development of procedures
flammable Hazardous Chemical Situations for identifying and controlling workplace
(EPA Level B Protective Clothing). hazards at the site; (3) means or methods for
These standards apply documentation and the development and communication to em-
performance requirements to the manufac- ployees of the various plans, work rules,
ture of chemical protective suits. Chemical standard operating procedures and practices
protective suits meeting these requirements that pertain to individual employees and su-
are labelled as compliant with the appro- pervisors; (4) means for the training of super-
priate standard. It is recommended that visors and employees to develop the needed
chemical protective suits that meet these skills and knowledge to perform their work
standards be used. in a safe and healthful manner; (5) means to
anticipate and prepare for emergency situa-
APPENDIX C TO § 1926.65—COMPLIANCE
tions; and (6) means for obtaining informa-
GUIDELINES
tion feedback to aid in evaluating the pro-
1. Occupational Safety and Health Program. gram and for improving the effectiveness of
Each hazardous waste site clean-up effort the program. The management and employ-
will require an occupational safety and ees should be trying continually to improve
health program headed by the site coordi- the effectiveness of the program thereby en-
nator or the employer’s representative. The hancing the protection being afforded those
purpose of the program will be the protec- working on the site.
tion of employees at the site and will be an Accidents on the site or workplace should
extension of the employer’s overall safety be investigated to provide information on
and health program. The program will need how such occurrences can be avoided in the
to be developed before work begins on the future. When injuries or illnesses occur on
site and implemented as work proceeds as the site or workplace, they will need to be
stated in paragraph (b). The program is to fa- investigated to determine what needs to be
cilitate coordination and communication of done to prevent this incident from occurring
safety and health issues among personnel re- again. Such information will need to be used
171
as feedback on the effectiveness of the pro- mand system and other subjects. Hands-on
gram and the information turned into posi- training should be stressed whenever pos-
tive steps to prevent any reoccurrence. Re- sible. Critiques done after an incident which
ceipt of employee suggestions or complaints include an evaluation of what worked and
relating to safety and health issues involved what did not and how could the incident be
with site or workplace activities is also a better handled the next time may be counted
feedback mechanism that can be used effec- as training time.
tively to improve the program and may serve For hazardous materials specialists (usu-
in part as an evaluative tool(s). ally members of hazardous materials teams),
For the development and implementation the training should address the care, use and/
of the program to be the most effective, pro- or testing of chemical protective clothing in-
fessional safety and health personnel should cluding totally encapsulating suits, the med-
be used. Certified Safety Professionals, ical surveillance program, the standard oper-
Board Certified Industrial Hygienists or Reg- ating procedures for the hazardous materials
istered Professional Safety Engineers are team including the use of plugging and
good examples of professional stature for patching equipment and other subject areas.
safety and health managers who will admin- Officers and leaders who may be expected
ister the employer’s program. to be in charge at an incident should be fully
2. Training. The training programs for em- knowledgeable of their company’s incident
ployees subject to the requirements of para- command system. They should know where
graph (e) of this standard should address: the and how to obtain additional assistance and
safety and health hazards employees should be familiar with the local district’s emer-
expect to find on hazardous waste clean-up gency response plan and the state emergency
sites; what control measures or techniques response plan.
are effective for those hazards; what moni- Specialist employees such as technical ex-
toring procedures are effective in character- perts, medical experts or environmental ex-
izing exposure levels; what makes an effec- perts that work with hazardous materials in
tive employer’s safety and health program; their regular jobs, who may be sent to the
what a site safety and health plan should in- incident scene by the shipper, manufacturer
clude; hands on training with personal pro- or governmental agency to advise and assist
tective equipment and clothing they may be the person in charge of the incident should
expected to use; the contents of the OSHA have training on an annual basis. Their
standard relevant to the employee’s duties training should include the care and use of
and function; and, employee’s responsibil- personal protective equipment including res-
ities under OSHA and other regulations. Su- pirators; knowledge of the incident com-
pervisors will need training in their respon- mand system and how they are to relate to
sibilities under the safety and health pro- it; and those areas needed to keep them cur-
gram and its subject areas such as the spill rent in their respective field as it relates to
containment program, the personal protec- safety and health involving specific haz-
tive equipment program, the medical sur- ardous substances.
veillance program, the emergency response Those skilled support personnel, such as
plan and other areas. employees who work for public works depart-
The training programs for employees sub- ments or equipment operators who operate
ject to the requirements of paragraph (p) of bulldozers, sand trucks, backhoes, etc., who
this standard should address: the employers may be called to the incident scene to pro-
safety and health program elements impact- vide emergency support assistance, should
ing employees; the hazard communication have at least a safety and health briefing be-
program; the medical surveillance program; fore entering the area of potential or actual
the hazards and the controls for such hazards exposure. These skilled support personnel,
that employees need to know for their job who have not been a part of the emergency
duties and functions. All require annual re- response plan and do not meet the training
fresher training. requirements, should be made aware of the
The training programs for employees cov- hazards they face and should be provided all
ered by the requirements of paragraph (q) of necessary protective clothing and equipment
this standard should address those com- required for their tasks.
petencies required for the various levels of There are two National Fire Protection As-
response such as: the hazards associated with sociation standards, NFPA 472—‘‘Standard
hazardous substances; hazard identification for Professional Competence of Responders
and awareness; notification of appropriate to Hazardous Material Incidents’’ and NFPA
persons; the need for and use of personal pro- 471—‘‘Recommended Practice for Responding
tective equipment including respirators; the to Hazardous Material Incidents’’, which are
decontamination procedures to be used; excellent resource documents to aid fire de-
preplanning activities for hazardous sub- partments and other emergency response or-
stance incidents including the emergency ganizations in developing their training pro-
reponse plan; company standard operating gram materials. NFPA 472 provides guidance
procedures for hazardous substance emer- on the skills and knowledge needed for first
gency responses; the use of the incident com- responder awareness level, first responder
172
operations level, hazmat technicians, and The use of PPE can itself create significant
hazmat specialist. It also offers guidance for worker hazards, such as heat stress, physical
the officer corp who will be in charge of haz- and psychological stress, and impaired vi-
ardous substance incidents. sion, mobility, and communication. For any
3. Decontamination. Decontamination pro- given situation, equipment and clothing
cedures should be tailored to the specific should be selected that provide an adequate
hazards of the site, and may vary in com- level of protection. However, over-protec-
plexity and number of steps, depending on tion, as well as under-protection, can be haz-
the level of hazard and the employee’s expo- ardous and should be avoided where possible.
sure to the hazard. Decontamination proce- Two basic objectives of any PPE program
dures and PPE decontamination methods should be to protect the wearer from safety
will vary depending upon the specific sub- and health hazards, and to prevent injury to
stance, since one procedure or method may the wearer from incorrect use and/or mal-
not work for all substances. Evaluation of function of the PPE. To accomplish these
decontamination methods and procedures goals, a comprehensive PPE program should
should be performed, as necessary, to assure include hazard identification, medical moni-
that employees are not exposed to hazards toring, environmental surveillance, selec-
by re-using PPE. References in appendix D tion, use, maintenance, and decontamination
may be used for guidance in establishing an of PPE and its associated training.
effective decontamination program. In addi- The written PPE program should include
tion, the U.S. Coast Guard’s Manual, ‘‘Policy policy statements, procedures, and guide-
Guidance for Response to Hazardous Chem- lines. Copies should be made available to all
ical Releases,’’ U.S. Department of Transpor- employees, and a reference copy should be
tation, Washington, DC (COMDTINST made available at the worksite. Technical
M16465.30) is a good reference for establishing data on equipment, maintenance manuals,
an effective decontamination program. relevant regulations, and other essential in-
formation should also be collected and main-
4. Emergency response plans. States, along
tained.
with designated districts within the states,
6. Incident command system (ICS). Paragraph
will be developing or have developed local
1926.65(q)(3)(ii) requires the implementation
emergency response plans. These state and
of an ICS. The ICS is an organized approach
district plans should be utilized in the emer- to effectively control and manage operations
gency response plans called for in the stand- at an emergency incident. The individual in
ard. Each employer should assure that its charge of the ICS is the senior official re-
emergency response plan is compatible with sponding to the incident. The ICS is not
the local plan. The major reference being much different than the ‘‘command post’’ ap-
used to aid in developing the state and local proach used for many years by the fire serv-
district plans is the Hazardous Materials ice. During large complex fires involving sev-
Emergency Planning Guide, NRT–1. The cur- eral companies and many pieces of appa-
rent Emergency Response Guidebook from ratus, a command post would be established.
the U.S. Department of Transportation, This enabled one individual to be in charge of
CMA’s CHEMTREC and the Fire Service managing the incident, rather than having
Emergency Management Handbook may also several officers from different companies
be used as resources. making separate, and sometimes conflicting,
Employers involved with treatment, stor- decisions. The individual in charge of the
age, and disposal facilities for hazardous command post would delegate responsibility
waste, which have the required contingency for performing various tasks to subordinate
plan called for by their permit, would not officers. Additionally, all communications
need to duplicate the same planning ele- were routed through the command post to
ments. Those items of the emergency re- reduce the number of radio transmissions
sponse plan that are properly addressed in and eliminate confusion. However, strategy,
the contingency plan may be substituted tactics, and all decisions were made by one
into the emergency response plan required in individual.
1926.65 or otherwise kept together for em- The ICS is a very similar system, except it
ployer and employee use. is implemented for emergency response to
5. Personal protective equipment programs. all incidents, both large and small, that in-
The purpose of personal protective clothing volve hazardous substances.
and equipment (PPE) is to shield or isolate For a small incident, the individual in
individuals from the chemical, physical, and charge of the ICS may perform many tasks
biologic hazards that may be encountered at of the ICS. There may not be any, or little,
a hazardous substance site. delegation of tasks to subordinates. For ex-
As discussed in appendix B, no single com- ample, in response to a small incident, the
bination of protective equipment and cloth- individual in charge of the ICS, in addition
ing is capable of protecting against all haz- to normal command activities, may become
ards. Thus PPE should be used in conjunc- the safety officer and may designate only
tion with other protective methods and its one employee (with proper equipment) as a
effectiveness evaluated periodically. back-up to provide assistance if needed.
173
OSHA does recommend, however, that at and control plan could greatly assist those in
least two employees be designated as back- charge of assuring the safety and health of
up personnel since the assistance needed employees on the site.
may include rescue. A comprehensive site safety and control
To illustrate the operation of the ICS, the plan should include the following: summary
following scenario might develop during a analysis of hazards on the site and a risk
small incident, such as an overturned tank analysis of those hazards; site map or
truck with a small leak of flammable liquid. sketch; site work zones (clean zone, transi-
The first responding senior officer would tion or decontamination zone, work or hot
implement and take command of the ICS. zone); use of the buddy system; site commu-
That person would size-up the incident and nications; command post or command cen-
determine if additional personnel and appa- ter; standard operating procedures and safe
ratus were necessary; would determine what work practices; medical assistance and
actions to take to control the leak; and, de- triage area; hazard monitoring plan (air con-
termine the proper level of personal protec- taminate monitoring, etc.); decontamination
tive equipment. If additional assistance is procedures and area; and other relevant
not needed, the individual in charge of the areas. This plan should be a part of the em-
ICS would implement actions to stop and ployer’s emergency response plan or an ex-
control the leak using the fewest number of tension of it to the specific site.
personnel that can effectively accomplish 8. Medical surveillance programs. Workers
the tasks. The individual in charge of the handling hazardous substances may be ex-
ICS then would designate himself as the safe- posed to toxic chemicals, safety hazards, bio-
ty officer and two other employees as a logic hazards, and radiation. Therefore, a
back-up in case rescue may become nec- medical surveillance program is essential to
essary. In this scenario, decontamination assess and monitor workers’ health and fit-
procedures would not be necessary. ness for employment in hazardous waste op-
A large complex incident may require erations and during the course of work; to
many employees and difficult, time-con- provide emergency and other treatment as
suming efforts to control. In these situa- needed; and to keep accurate records for fu-
tions, the individual in charge of the ICS will ture reference.
want to delegate different tasks to subordi- The Occupational Safety and Health Guid-
nates in order to maintain a span of control ance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activi-
that will keep the number of subordinates, ties developed by the National Institute for
that are reporting, to a manageable level. Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH),
Delegation of task at large incidents may the Occupational Safety and Health Admin-
be by location, where the incident scene is istration (OSHA), the U.S. Coast Guard
divided into sectors, and subordinate officers (USCG), and the Environmental Protection
coordinate activities within the sector that Agency (EPA); October 1985 provides an ex-
they have been assigned. cellent example of the types of medical test-
Delegation of tasks can also be by func- ing that should be done as part of a medical
tion. Some of the functions that the indi- surveillance program.
vidual in charge of the ICS may want to del- 9. New Technology and Spill Containment
egate at a large incident are: medical serv- Programs. Where hazardous substances may
ices; evacuation; water supply; resources be released by spilling from a container that
(equipment, apparatus); media relations; will expose employees to the hazards of the
safety; and, site control (integrate activities materials, the employer will need to imple-
with police for crowd and traffic control). ment a program to contain and control the
Also for a large incident, the individual in spilled material. Diking and ditching, as well
charge of the ICS will designate several em- as use of absorbents like diatomaceous
ployees as back-up personnel; and a number earth, are traditional techniques which have
of safety officers to monitor conditions and proven to be effective over the years. How-
recommend safety precautions. ever, in recent years new products have come
Therefore, no matter what size or com- into the marketplace, the use of which com-
plexity an incident may be, by implementing plement and increase the effectiveness of
an ICS there will be one individual in charge these traditional methods. These new prod-
who makes the decisions and gives direc- ucts also provide emergency responders and
tions; and, all actions, and communications others with additional tools or agents to use
are coordinated through one central point of to reduce the hazards of spilled materials.
command. Such a system should reduce con- These agents can be rapidly applied over a
fusion, improve safety, organize and coordi- large area and can be uniformly applied or
nate actions, and should facilitate effective otherwise can be used to build a small dam,
management of the incident. thus improving the workers’ ability to con-
7. Site Safety and Control Plans. The safety trol spilled material. These application tech-
and security of response personnel and oth- niques enhance the intimate contact be-
ers in the area of an emergeny response inci- tween the agent and the spilled material al-
dent site should be of primary concern to the lowing for the quickest effect by the agent or
incident commander. The use of a site safety quickest control of the spilled material.
174
Agents are available to solidify liquid spilled °F so the resulting substance may be handled
materials, to suppress vapor generation from as a nonhazardous waste material if it meets
spilled materials, and to do both. Some spe- the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency’s
cial agents, which when applied as rec- 40 CFR part 261 requirements (See particu-
ommended by the manufacturer, will react larly § 261.21).
in a controlled manner with the spilled ma- All workers performing hazardous sub-
terial to neutralize acids or caustics, or stance spill control work are expected to
greatly reduce the level of hazard of the wear the proper protective clothing and
spilled material. equipment for the materials present and to
There are several modern methods and de- follow the employer’s established standard
vices for use by emergency response per- operating procedures for spill control. All in-
sonnel or others involved with spill control volved workers need to be trained in the es-
efforts to safely apply spill control agents to tablished operating procedures; in the use
control spilled material hazards. These in- and care of spill control equipment; and in
clude portable pressurized applicators simi- the associated hazards and control of such
lar to hand-held portable fire extinguishing hazards of spill containment work.
devices, and nozzle and hose systems similar These new tools and agents are the things
to portable fire fighting foam systems which that employers will want to evaluate as part
allow the operator to apply the agent with- of their new technology program. The treat-
out having to come into contact with the ment of spills of hazardous substances or
spilled material. The operator is able to wastes at an emergency incident as part of
apply the agent to the spilled material from the immediate spill containment and control
a remote position. efforts is sometimes acceptable to EPA and a
The solidification of liquids provides for permit exception is described in 40 CFR
rapid containment and isolation of haz- 264.1(g)(8) and 265.1(c)(11).
ardous substance spills. By directing the
agent at run-off points or at the edges of the APPENDIX D TO § 1926.65—REFERENCES
spill, the reactant solid will automatically
create a barrier to slow or stop the spread of The following references may be consulted
the material. Clean-up of hazardous sub- for further information on the subject of this
stances is greatly improved when solidifying standard:
agents, acid or caustic neutralizers, or acti- 1. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2.70—Janu-
vated carbon adsorbents are used. Properly ary 29, 1986, Special Emphasis Program: Haz-
applied, these agents can totally solidify liq- ardous Waste Sites.
uid hazardous substances or neutralize or ab- 2. OSHA Instruction DFO CPL 2–2.37A—
sorb them, which results in materials which January 29, 1986, Technical Assistance and
are less hazardous and easier to handle, Guidelines for Superfund and Other Hazardous
transport, and dispose of. The concept of Waste Site Activities.
spill treatment, to create less hazardous sub- 3. OSHA Instruction DTS CPL 2.74—Janu-
stances, will improve the safety and level of ary 29, 1986, Hazardous Waste Activity Form,
protection of employees working at spill OSHA 175.
clean-up operations or emergency response 4. Hazardous Waste Inspections Reference
operations to spills of hazardous substances. Manual, U.S. Department of Labor, Occupa-
The use of vapor suppression agents for tional Safety and Health Administration,
volatile hazardous substances, such as flam- 1986.
mable liquids and those substances which 5. Memorandum of Understanding Among
present an inhalation hazard, is important the National Institute for Occupational Safe-
for protecting workers. The rapid and unity and Health, the Occupational Safety and
form distribution of the agent over the sur- Health Administration, the United States
face of the spilled material can provide quick Coast Guard, and the United States Environ-
vapor knockdown. There are temporary and mental Protection Agency, Guidance for
long-term foam-type agents which are effec- Worker Protection During Hazardous Waste Site
tive on vapors and dusts, and activated car- Investigations and Clean-up and Hazardous
bon adsorption agents which are effective for Substance Emergencies. December 18, 1980.
vapor control and soaking-up of the liquid. 6. National Priorities List, 1st Edition, Octo-
The proper use of hose lines or hand-held ber 1984; U.S. Environmental Protection
portable pressurized applicators provides Agency, Revised periodically.
good mobility and permits the worker to de- 7. The Decontamination of Response Per-
liver the agent from a safe distance without sonnel, Field Standard Operating Procedures
having to step into the untreated spilled ma- (F.S.O.P.) 7; U.S. Environmental Protection
terial. Some of these systems can be re- Agency, Office of Emergency and Remedial
charged in the field to provide coverage of Response, Hazardous Response Support Divi-
larger spill areas than the design limits of a sion, December 1984.
single charged applicator unit. Some of the 8. Preparation of a Site Safety Plan, Field
more effective agents can solidify the liquid Standard Operating Procedures (F.S.O.P.) 9;
flammable hazardous substances and at the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Of-
same time elevate the flashpoint above 140 fice of Emergency and Remedial Response,
175
Hazardous Response Support Division, April APPENDIX TO § 1926.65—TRAINING CURRICULUM
1985. GUIDELINES
9. Standard Operating Safety Guidelines; U.S.
The following non-mandatory general cri-
Environmental Protection Agency, Office of
teria may be used for assistance in devel-
Emergency and Remedial Response, Haz-
ardous Response Support Division, Environ- oping site-specific training curriculum used
mental Response Team; November 1984. to meet the training requirements of 29 CFR
1926.65(e); 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(7), (p)(8)(iii); and
10. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance
29 CFR 1926.65(q)(6), (q)(7), and (q)(8). These
Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities,
are generic guidelines and they are not pre-
National Institute for Occupational Safety
sented as a complete training curriculum for
and Health (NIOSH), Occupational Safety
any specific employer. Site-specific training
and Health Administration (OSHA), U.S.
programs must be developed on the basis of
Coast Guard (USCG), and Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA); October 1985. a needs assessment of the hazardous waste
site, RCRA/TSDF, or emergency response op-
11. Protecting Health and Safety at Haz-
eration in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.65.
ardous Waste Sites: An Overview, U.S. Envi-
ronmental Protection Agency, EPA/625/9–85/ It is noted that the legal requirements are
006; September 1985. set forth in the regulatory text of § 1926.65.
12. Hazardous Waste Sites and Hazardous The guidance set forth here presents a highly
Substance Emergencies, NIOSH Worker Bul- effective program that in the areas covered
letin, U.S. Department of Health and Human would meet or exceed the regulatory require-
Services, Public Health Service, Centers for ments. In addition, other approaches could
Disease Control, National Institute for Occu- meet the regulatory requirements.
pational Safety and Health; December 1982. Suggested General Criteria
13. Personal Protective Equipment for Haz- Definitions:
ardous Materials Incidents: A Selection Guide; Competent means possessing the skills,
U.S. Department of Health and Human Serv- knowledge, experience, and judgment to per-
ices, Public Health Service, Centers for Dis- form assigned tasks or activities satisfac-
ease Control, National Institute for Occupa- torily as determined by the employer.
tional Safety and Health; October 1984. Demonstration means the showing by actual
14. Fire Service Emergency Management use of equipment or procedures.
Handbook, International Association of Fire Hands-on training means training in a sim-
Chiefs Foundation, 101 East Holly Avenue,
ulated work environment that permits each
Unit 10B, Sterling, VA 22170, January 1985.
student to have experience performing tasks,
15. Emergency Response Guidebook, U.S De- making decisions, or using equipment appro-
partment of Transportation, Washington, priate to the job assignment for which the
DC, 1987. training is being conducted.
16. Report to the Congress on Hazardous Ma- Initial training means training required
terials Training, Planning and Preparedness, prior to beginning work.
Federal Emergency Management Agency,
Lecture means an interactive discourse
Washington, DC, July 1986.
with a class lead by an instructor.
17. Workbook for Fire Command, Alan V.
Proficient means meeting a stated level of
Brunacini and J. David Beageron, National
Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch achievement.
Park, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. Site-specific means individual training di-
18. Fire Command, Alan V. Brunacini, Na- rected to the operations of a specific job site.
tional Fire Protection Association, Training hours means the number of hours
Batterymarch Park,, Quincy, MA 02269, 1985. devoted to lecture, learning activities, small
19. Incident Command System, Fire Protec- group work sessions, demonstration, evalua-
tion Publications, Oklahoma State Univer- tions, or hands-on experience.
sity, Stillwater, OK 74078, 1983. Suggested Core Criteria:
20. Site Emergency Response Planning, Chem- 1. Training facility. The training facility
ical Manufacturers Association, Washington, should have available sufficient resources,
DC 20037, 1986. equipment, and site locations to perform di-
21. Hazardous Materials Emergency Planning dactic and hands-on training when appro-
Guide, NRT–1, Environmental Protection priate. Training facilities should have suffi-
Agency, Washington, DC, March 1987. cient organization, support staff, and serv-
22. Community Teamwork: Working Together ices to conduct training in each of the
to Promote Hazardous Materials Transportation courses offered.
Safety. U.S. Department of Transportation, 2. Training Director. Each training program
Washington, DC, May 1983. should be under the direction of a training

23. Disaster Planning Guide for Business and director who is responsible for the program.
Industry, Federal Emergency Management The Training Director should have a min-
Agency, Publication No. FEMA 141, August imum of two years of employee education ex-
1987. perience.
176
3. Instructors. Instructors should be deem If a written test is used, there should be a
competent on the basis of previous docu- minimum of 50 questions. If a written test is
mented experience in their area of instruc- used in combination with a skills demonstra-
tion, successful completion of a ‘‘train-the- tion, a minimum of 25 questions should be
trainer’’ program specific to the topics they used. If a skills demonstration is used, the
will teach, and an evaluation of instruc- tasks chosen and the means to rate success-
tional competence by the Training Director. ful completion should be fully documented
Instructors should be required to maintain by the Training Director.
professional competency by participating in The content of the written test or of the
continuing education or professional devel- skill demonstration shall be relevant to the
opment programs or by completing success- objectives of the course. The written test
fully an annual refresher course and having and skill demonstration should be updated as
an annual review by the Training Director. necessary to reflect changes in the cur-
The annual review by the Training Direc- riculum and any update should be approved
tor should include observation of an instruc- by the Training Director.
tor’s delivery, a review of those observations The proficiency assessment methods, re-
with the trainer, and an analysis of any in- gardless of the approach or combination of
structor or class evaluations completed by approaches used, should be justified, docu-
the students during the previous year. ment and approved by the Training Director.
4. Course materials. The Training Director The proficiency of those taking the addi-
should approve all course materials to be tional courses for supervisors should be eval-
used by the training provider. Course mate- uated and document by using proficiency as-
rials should be reviewed and updated at least sessment methods acceptable to the Training
annually. Materials and equipment should be Director. These proficiency assessment
in good working order and maintained prop-
methods must reflect the additional respon-
erly.
sibilities borne by supervisory personnel in
All written and audio-visual materials in
hazardous waste operations or emergency re-
training curricula should be peer reviewed by
sponse.
technically competent outside reviewers or
8. Course certificate. Written documentation
by a standing advisory committee.
Reviews should possess expertise in the fol- should be provided to each student who sat-
lowing disciplines were applicable: occupa- isfactorily completes the training course.
tional health, industrial hygiene and safety, The documentation should include:
chemical/environmental engineering, em- a. Student’s name.
ployee education, or emergency response. b. Course title.
One or more of the peer reviewers should be c. Course date.
a employee experienced in the work activi- d. Statement that the student has success-
ties to which the training is directed. fully completed the course.
5. Students. The program for accepting stu- e. Name and address of the training pro-
dents should include: vider.
a. Assurance that the student is or will be f. An individual identification number for
involved in work where chemical exposures the certificate.
are likely and that the student possesses the g. List of the levels of personal protective
skills necessary to perform the work. equipment used by the student to complete
b. A policy on the necessary medical clear- the course.
ance. This documentation may include a certifi-
6. Ratios. Student-instructor ratios should cate and an appropriate wallet-sized lami-
not exceed 30 students per instructor. Hands- nated card with a photograph of the student
on activity requiring the use of personal pro- and the above information. When such
tective equipment should have the following course certificate cards are used, the indi-
student-instructor ratios. For Level C or vidual identification number for the training
Level D personal protective equipment the certificate should be shown on the card.
ratio should be 10 students per instructor. 9. Recordkeeping. Training providers should
For Level A or Level B personal protective maintain records listing the dates courses
equipment the ratio should be 5 students per were presented, the names of the individual
instructor. course attenders, the names of those stu-
7. Proficiency assessment. Proficiency should dents successfully completing each course,
be evaluated and documented by the use of a and the number of training certificates
written assessment and a skill demonstra- issued to each successful student. These
tion selected and developed by the Training records should be maintained for a minimum
Director and training staff. The assessment of five years after the date an individual par-
and demonstration should evaluate the ticipated in a training program offered by
knowledge and individual skills developed in the training provider. These records should
the course of training. The level of minimum be available and provided upon the student’s
achievement necessary for proficiency shall request or as mandated by law.
be specified in writing by the Training Direc- 10. Program quality control. The Training
tor. Director should conduct or direct an annual
177
written audit of the training program. Pro- b. Safety,
gram modifications to address deficiencies, if c. Personal protective equipment (PPE),
any, should be documented, approved, and d. Operational procedures,
implemented by the training provider. The e. Employee protection practices/proce-
audit and the program modification docu- dures.
ments should be maintained at the training 10. Appropriateness of management con-
facility. trols.
Suggested Program Quality Control Criteria 11. Adequacy of the organization and ap-
Factors listed here are suggested criteria propriate resources assigned to assure appro-
for determining the quality and appropriate- priate training.
ness of employee health and safety training 12. In the case of multiple-site training
for hazardous waste operations and emer- programs, adequacy of satellite centers man-
gency response. agement.
A. Training Plan. C. Training facilities and resources.
Adequacy and appropriateness of the train- Adequacy and appropriateness of the facili-
ing program’s curriculum development, in- ties and resources for supporting the train-
structor training, distribution of course ma- ing program should be considered, including,
terials, and direct student training should be
1. Space and equipment to conduct the
considered, including
training.
1. The duration of training, course content,
and course schedules/agendas; 2. Facilities for representative hands-on
2. The different training requirements of training.
the various target populations, as specified 3. In the case of multiple-site programs,
in the appropriate generic training cur- equipment and facilities at the satellite cen-
riculum; ters.
3. The process for the development of cur- 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
riculum, which includes appropriate tech- quality control and evaluations program to
nical input, outside review, evaluation, pro- account for instructor performance.
gram pretesting. 5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
4. The adequate and appropriate inclusion quality control and evaluation program to
of hands-on, demonstration, and instruction ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
methods; back, updating, and corrective action.
5. Adequate monitoring of student safety, 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
progress, and performance during the train- ciplines and expertise being used within the
ing. quality control and evaluation program.
B. Program management, Training Director, 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
staff, and consultants. role of student evaluations to provide feed-
Adequacy and appropriateness of staff per- back for training program improvement.
formance and delivering an effective training D. Quality control and evaluation.
program should be considered, including Adequacy and appropriateness of quality
1. Demonstration of the training director’s control and evaluation plans for training
leadership in assuring quality of health and programs should be considered, including:
safety training. 1. A balanced advisory committee and/or
2. Demonstration of the competency of the competent outside reviewers to give overall
staff to meet the demands of delivering high policy guidance;
quality hazardous waste employee health 2. Clear and adequate definition of the
and safety training. composition and active programmatic role of
3. Organization charts establishing clear the advisory committee or outside reviewers.
lines of authority. 3. Adequacy of the minutes or reports of
4. Clearly defined staff duties including the the advisory committee or outside reviewers’
relationship of the training staff to the over- meetings or written communication.
all program. 4. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
5. Evidence that the training organiza-
quality control and evaluations program to
tional structure suits the needs of the train-
account for instructor performance.
ing program.
5. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
6. Appropriateness and adequacy of the
quality control and evaluation program to
training methods used by the instructors.
ensure appropriate course evaluation, feed-
7. Sufficiency of the time committed by
back, updating, and corrective action.
the training director and staff to the train-
ing program. 6. Adequacy and appropriateness of dis-
8. Adequacy of the ratio of training staff to ciplines and expertise being used within the
quality control and evaluation program.
students.
9. Availability and commitment of the 7. Adequacy and appropriateness of the
training program of adequate human and role of student evaluations to provide feed-
equipment resources in the areas of back for training program improvement.
a. Health effects, E. Students
178
Adequacy and appropriateness of the pro- 1. Off-site training. Minimum training
gram for accepting students should be con- course content for hazardous waste oper-
sidered, including ations, required by 29 CFR 1926.65(e), should
1. Assurance that the student already pos- include the following topics or procedures:
sess the necessary skills for their job, includ- a. Regulatory knowledge.
ing necessary documentation. (1) A review of 29 CFR 1926.65 and the core
2. Appropriateness of methods the program elements of an occupational safety and
uses to ensure that recruits are capable of health program.
satisfactorily completing training. (2) The content of a medical surveillance
3. Review and compliance with any medical program as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.65(f).
clearance policy. (3) The content of an effective site safety
F. Institutional Environment and Administra- and health plan consistent with the require-
tive Support. The adequacy and appropriate- ments of 29 CFR 1926.65(b)(4)(ii).
ness of the institutional environment and (4) Emergency response plan and proce-
administrative support system for the train- dures as outlined in 29 CFR 1910.38 and 29
ing program should be considered, including CFR 1926.65(l).
1. Adequacy of the institutional commit- (5) Adequate illumination.
ment to the employee training program. (6) Sanitation recommendation and equip-
2. Adequacy and appropriateness of the ad- ment.
ministrative structure and administrative (7) Review and explanation of OSHA’s haz-
support. ard-communication standard (29 CFR
1910.1200) and lock-out-tag-out standard (29
G. Summary of Evaluation Questions. Key
CFR 1910.147).
questions for evaluating the quality and ap-
propriateness of an overall training program (8) Review of other applicable standards in-
should include the following: cluding but not limited to those in the con-
struction standards (29 CFR Part 1926).
1. Are the program objectives clearly stat-
ed? (9) Rights and responsibilities of employers
2. Is the program accomplishing its objec- and employees under applicable OSHA and
tives? EPA laws.
3. Are appropriate facilities and staff avail- b. Technical knowledge.
able? (1) Type of potential exposures to chem-
4. Is there an appropriate mix of classroom, ical, biological, and radiological hazards;
demonstration, and hands-on training? types of human responses to these hazards
and recognition of those responses; prin-
5. Is the program providing quality em-
ciples of toxicology and information about
ployee health and safety training that fully
acute and chronic hazards; health and safety
meets the intent of regulatory requirements?
considerations of new technology.
6. What are the program’s main strengths?
(2) Fundamentals of chemical hazards in-
7. What are the program’s main weak-
cluding but not limited to vapor pressure,
nesses?
boiling points, flash points, ph, other phys-
8. What is recommended to improve the
ical and chemical properties.
program?
(3) Fire and explosion hazards of chemi-
9. Are instructors instructing according to
cals.
their training outlines?
(4) General safety hazards such as but not
10. Is the evaluation tool current and ap-
limited to electrical hazards, powered equip-
propriate for the program content?
ment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, walk-
11. Is the course material current and rel-
ing-working surface hazards, excavation haz-
evant to the target group?
ards, and hazards associated with working in
Suggested Training Curriculum Guidelines hot and cold temperature extremes.
The following training curriculum guide- (5) Review and knowledge of confined space
lines are for those operations specifically entry procedures in 29 CFR 1910.146.
identified in 29 CFR 1926.65 as requiring (6) Work practices to minimize employee
training. Issues such as qualifications of in- risk from site hazards.
structors, training certification, and similar (7) Safe use of engineering controls, equip-
criteria appropriate to all categories of oper- ment, and any new relevant safety tech-
ations addressed in 1926.65 have been covered nology or safety procedures.
in the preceding section and are not re-ad- (8) Review and demonstration of com-
dressed in each of the generic guidelines. petency with air sampling and monitoring
Basic core requirements for training pro- equipment that may be used in a site moni-
grams that are addressed include toring program.
1. General Hazardous Waste Operations (9) Container sampling procedures and
2. RCRA operations—Treatment, storage,
safeguarding; general drum and container

and disposal facilities. handling procedures including special re-
3. Emergency Response. quirement for laboratory waste packs,
A. General Hazardous Waste Operations and shock-sensitive wastes, and radioactive
Site-specific Training wastes.
179
(10) The elements of a spill control pro- (d) Introduction of additional subject areas
gram. as appropriate.
(11) Proper use and limitations of material (e) Hands-on review of new or altered PPE
handling equipment. or decontamination equipment or proce-
(12) Procedures for safe and healthful prep- dures. Review of new developments in per-
aration of containers for shipping and trans- sonal protective equipment.
port. (f) Review of newly developed air and con-
(13) Methods of communication including taminant monitoring equipment.
those used while wearing respiratory protec- 3. On-site training. a. The employer should
tion. provide employees engaged in hazardous
c. Technical skills. (1) Selection, use main- waste site activities with information and
tenance, and limitations of personal protec- training prior to initial assignment into
tive equipment including the components their work area, as follows:
and procedures for carrying out a respirator (1) The requirements of the hazard commu-
program to comply with 29 CFR 1910.134. nication program including the location and
(2) Instruction in decontamination pro- availability of the written program, required
grams including personnel, equipment, and lists of hazardous chemicals, and material
hardware; hands-on training including level safety data sheets.
A, B, and C ensembles and appropriate de- (2) Activities and locations in their work
contamination lines; field activities includ- area where hazardous substance may be
ing the donning and doffing of protective present.
equipment to a level commensurate with the (3) Methods and observations that may be
employee’s anticipated job function and re- used to detect the present or release of a haz-
sponsibility and to the degree required by ardous chemical in the work area (such as
potential hazards. monitoring conducted by the employer, con-
(3) Sources for additional hazard informa- tinuous monitoring devices, visual appear-
tion; exercises using relevant manuals and ances, or other evidence (sight, sound or
hazard coding systems. smell) of hazardous chemicals being released,
and applicable alarms from monitoring de-
d. Additional suggested items.
vices that record chemical releases.
(1) A laminated, dated card or certificate
(4) The physical and health hazards of sub-
with photo, denoting limitations and level of
stances known or potentially present in the
protection for which the employee is trained
work area.
should be issued to those students success-
(5) The measures employees can take to
fully completing a course.
help protect themselves from work-site haz-
(2) Attendance should be required at all
ards, including specific procedures the em-
training modules, with successful comple-
ployer has implemented.
tion of exercises and a final written or oral (6) An explanation of the labeling system
examination with at least 50 questions. and material safety data sheets and how em-
(3) A minimum of one-third of the program ployees can obtain and use appropriate haz-
should be devoted to hands-on exercises. ard information.
(4) A curriculum should be established for (7) The elements of the confined space pro-
the 8-hour refresher training required by 29 gram including special PPE, permits, moni-
CFR 1926.65(e)(8), with delivery of such toring requirements, communication proce-
courses directed toward those areas of pre- dures, emergency response, and applicable
vious training that need improvement or re- lock-out procedures.
emphasis. b. The employer should provide hazardous
(5) A curriculum should be established for waste employees information and training
the required 8-hour training for supervisors. and should provide a review and access to
Demonstrated competency in the skills and the site safety and plan as follows:
knowledge provided in a 40-hour course (1) Names of personnel and alternate re-
should be a prerequisite for supervisor train- sponsible for site safety and health.
ing. (2) Safety and health hazards present on
2. Refresher training. The 8-hour annual re- the site.
fresher training required in 29 CFR (3) Selection, use, maintenance, and limi-
1926.65(e)(8) should be conducted by qualified tations of personal protective equipment
training providers. Refresher training should specific to the site.
include at a minimum the following topics (4) Work practices by which the employee
and procedures: can minimize risks from hazards.
(a) Review of and retraining on relevant (5) Safe use of engineering controls and
topics covered in the 40-hour program, as ap- equipment available on site.
propriate, using reports by the students on (6) Safe decontamination procedures estab-
their work experiences. lished to minimize employee contact with

(b) Update on developments with respect to hazardous substances, including:
material covered in the 40-hour course. (A) Employee decontamination,
(c) Review of changes to pertinent provi- (B) Clothing decontamination, and
sions of EPA or OSHA standards or laws. (C) Equipment decontamination.
180
(7) Elements of the site emergency re- (b) Review of relevant hazards such as, but
sponse plan, including: not limited to, chemical, biological, and ra-
(A) Pre-emergency planning. diological exposures; fire and explosion haz-
(B) Personnel roles and lines of authority ards; thermal extremes; and physical haz-
and communication. ards.
(C) Emergency recognition and prevention. (c) General safety hazards including those
(D) Safe distances and places of refuge. associated with electrical hazards, powered
(E) Site security and control. equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out proce-
(F) Evacuation routes and procedures. dures, motor vehicle hazards and walking-
(G) Decontamination procedures not cov- working surface hazards.
ered by the site safety and health plan. (d) Confined-space hazards and procedures.
(H) Emergency medical treatment and first (e) Work practices to minimize employee
aid. risk from workplace hazards.
(I) Emergency equipment and procedures (f) Emergency response plan and proce-
for handling emergency incidents. dures including first aid meeting the require-
c. The employer should provide hazardous ments of paragraph (p)(8).
waste employees information and training (g) A review of procedures to minimize ex-
on personal protective equipment used at the posure to hazardous waste and various type
site, such as the following: of waste streams, including the materials
(1) PPE to be used based upon known or an- handling program and spill containment pro-
ticipated site hazards. gram.
(2) PPE limitations of materials and con- (h) A review of hazard communication pro-
struction; limitations during temperature grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
extremes, heat stress, and other appropriate 1910.1200.
medical considerations; use and limitations (i) A review of medical surveillance pro-
of respirator equipment as well as docu- grams meeting the requirements of 29 CFR
mentation procedures as outlined in 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(3) including the recognition of
1910.134. signs and symptoms of overexposure to haz-
(3) PPE inspection procedures prior to, ardous substance including known syner-
during, and after use. gistic interactions.
(4) PPE donning and doffing procedures. (j) A review of decontamination programs
(5) PPE decontamination and disposal pro- and procedures meeting the requirements of
cedures. 29 CFR 1926.65(p)(4).
(6) PPE maintenance and storage. (k) A review of an employer’s requirements
(7) Task duration as related to PPE limita- to implement a training program and its ele-
tions. ments.
d. The employer should instruct the em- (l) A review of the criteria and programs
ployee about the site medical surveillance for proper selection and use of personal pro-
program relative to the particular site, in- tective equipment, including respirators.
cluding (m) A review of the applicable appendices
(1) Specific medical surveillance programs to 29 CFR 1926.65.
that have been adapted for the site. (n) Principles of toxicology and biological
(2) Specific signs and symptoms related to monitoring as they pertain to occupational
exposure to hazardous materials on the site. health.
(3) The frequency and extent of periodic (o) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
medical examinations that will be used on ees and employers under applicable OSHA
the site. and EPA laws.
(4) Maintenance and availability of (p) Hands-on exercises and demonstrations
records. of competency with equipment to illustrate
(5) Personnel to be contacted and proce- the basic equipment principles that may be
dures to be followed when signs and symp- used during the performance of work duties,
toms of exposures are recognized. including the donning and doffing of PPE.
e. The employees will review and discuss (q) Sources of reference, efficient use of
the site safety plan as part of the training relevant manuals, and knowledge of hazard
program. The location of the site safety plan coding systems to include information con-
and all written programs should be discussed tained in hazardous waste manifests.
with employees including a discussion of the (r) At least 8 hours of hands-on training.
mechanisms for access, review, and ref- (s) Training in the job skills required for
erences described. an employee’s job function and responsi-
B. RCRA Operations Training for Treatment, bility before they are permitted to partici-
Storage and Disposal Facilities. pate in or supervise field activities.
1. As a minimum, the training course re- 2. The individual employer should provide
quired in 29 CFR 1926.65 (p) should include hazardous waste employees with information
the following topics: and training prior to an employee’s initial
(a) Review of the applicable paragraphs of assignment into a work area. The training
29 CFR 1926.65 and the elements of the em- and information should cover the following
ployer’s occupational safety and health plan. topics:
181
(a) The Emergency response plan and pro- training at the community level between
cedures including first aid. emergency response organizations covered
(b) A review of the employer’s hazardous by Federal OSHA and those not covered di-
waste handling procedures including the ma- rectly by Federal OSHA can help ensure an
terials handling program and elements of the effective community response to the release
spill containment program, location of spill or potential release of hazardous substances
response kits or equipment, and the names of in the community.
those trained to respond to releases. a. General considerations. Emergency re-
(c) The hazardous communication program sponse organizations are required to consider
meeting the requirements of 29 CFR the topics listed in § 1926.65(q)(6). Emergency
1910.1200. response organizations may use some or all
(d) A review of the employer’s medical sur- of the following topics to supplement those
veillance program including the recognition mandatory topics when developing their re-
of signs and symptoms of exposure to rel- sponse training programs. Many of the topics
evant hazardous substance including known would require an interaction between the re-
synergistic interactions. sponse provider and the individuals respon-
(e) A review of the employer’s decon- sible for the site where the response would be
tamination program and procedures. expected.
(f) An review of the employer’s training (1) Hazard recognition, including:
program and the parties responsible for that
(A) Nature of hazardous substances
program.
present,
(g) A review of the employer’s personal
protective equipment program including the (B) Practical applications of hazard rec-
proper selection and use of PPE based upon ognition, including presentations on biology,
specific site hazards. chemistry, and physics.
(h) All relevant site-specific procedures ad- (2) Principles of toxicology, biological
dressing potential safety and health hazards. monitoring, and risk assessment.
This may include, as appropriate, biological (3) Safe work practices and general site
and radiological exposures, fire and explo- safety.
sion hazards, thermal hazards, and physical (4) Engineering controls and hazardous
hazards such as electrical hazards, powered waste operations.
equipment hazards, lock-out-tag-out haz- (5) Site safety plans and standard oper-
ards, motor vehicle hazards, and walking- ating procedures.
working surface hazards. (6) Decontamination procedures and prac-
(i) Safe use engineering controls and equip- tices.
ment on site. (7) Emergency procedures, first aid, and
(j) Names of personnel and alternates re- self-rescue.
sponsible for safety and health. (8) Safe use of field equipment.
C. Emergency response training. Federal (9) Storage, handling, use and transpor-
OSHA standards in 29 CFR 1926.65(q) are di- tation of hazardous substances.
rected toward private sector emergency re- (10) Use, care, and limitations of personal
sponders. Therefore, the guidelines provided protective equipment.
in this portion of the appendix are directed (11) Safe sampling techniques.
toward that employee population. However, (12) Rights and responsibilities of employ-
they also impact indirectly through State ees under OSHA and other related laws con-
OSHA or USEPA regulations some public cerning right-to-know, safety and health,
sector emergency responders. Therefore, the compensations and liability.
guidelines provided in this portion of the ap-
(13) Medical monitoring requirements.
pendix may be applied to both employee pop-
(14) Community relations.
ulations.
States with OSHA state plans must cover b. Suggested criteria for specific courses.
their employees with regulations at least as (1) First responder awareness level.
effective as the Federal OSHA standards. (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
Public employees in states without approved petency in performing the applicable skills
state OSHA programs covering hazardous of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
waste operations and emergency response (B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De-
are covered by the U.S. EPA under 40 CFR partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re-
311, a regulation virtually identical to sponse Guidebook (ERG) and familiarization
§ 1926.65. with OSHA standard 29 CFR 1926.60.
Since this is a non-mandatory appendix (C) Review of the principles and practices
and therefore not an enforceable standard, for analyzing an incident to determine both
OSHA recommends that those employers, the hazardous substances present and the
employees or volunteers in public sector basic hazard and response information for
emergency response organizations outside each hazardous substance present.
Federal OSHA jurisdiction consider the fol- (D) Review of procedures for implementing
lowing criteria in developing their own actions consistent with the local emergency
training programs. A unified approach to response plan, the organization’s standard
182
operating procedures, and the current edi- Emergency Response Guidebook (ERG), manu-
tion of DOT’s ERG including emergency no- facturer material safety data sheets,
tification procedures and follow-up commu- CHEMTREC/CANUTEC, shipper or manufac-
nications. turer contacts, computer data bases and re-
(E) Review of the expected hazards includ- sponse models, and other relevant sources of
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined information addressing hazardous substance
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered releases. Familiarization with 29 CFR 1926.60.
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, (C) Review of the principles and practices
and walking-working surface hazards. for analyzing an incident to determine the
(F) Awareness and knowledge of the com- hazardous substances present, their physical
petencies for the First Responder at the and chemical properties, the likely behavior
Awareness Level covered in the National of the hazardous substance and its container,
Fire Protection Association’s Standard No. the types of hazardous substance transpor-
472, Professional Competence of Responders to tation containers and vehicles involved in
Hazardous Materials Incidents. the release, the appropriate strategy for ap-
(2) First responder operations level. proaching release sites and containing the
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- release.
petency in performing the applicable skills (D) Review of procedures for implementing
of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). continuing response actions consistent with
(B) Hands-on experience with the U.S. De- the local emergency response plan, the orga-
partment of Transportation’s Emergency Re- nization’s standard operating procedures,
sponse Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer mate- and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in-
rial safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/ cluding extended emergency notification
CANUTEC, shipper or manufacturer contacts procedures and follow-up communications.
and other relevant sources of information (E) Review of the principles and practice
addressing hazardous substance releases. Fa- for proper selection and use of personal pro-
miliarization with OSHA standard 29 CFR tective equipment.
1926.60. (F) Review of the principles and practices
(C) Review of the principles and practices of establishing exposure zones, proper decon-
for analyzing an incident to determine the tamination and medical surveillance sta-
hazardous substances present, the likely be- tions and procedures.
havior of the hazardous substance and its (G) Review of the expected hazards includ-
container, the types of hazardous substance ing fire and explosions hazards, confined
transportation containers and vehicles, the space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
types and selection of the appropriate defen- equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
sive strategy for containing the release. and walking-working surface hazards.
(D) Review of procedures for implementing (H) Awareness and knowledge of the com-
continuing response actions consistent with petencies for the Hazardous Materials Tech-
the local emergency response plan, the orga- nician covered in the National Fire Protec-
nization’s standard operating procedures, tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes-
and the current edition of DOT’s ERG in- sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous
cluding extended emergency notification Materials Incidents.
procedures and follow-up communications. (4) Hazardous materials specialist.
(E) Review of the principles and practice (A) Review of and demonstration of com-
for proper selection and use of personal pro- petency in performing the applicable skills
tective equipment. of 29 CFR 1926.65(q).
(F) Review of the principles and practice of (B) Hands-on experience with retrieval and
personnel and equipment decontamination. use of written and electronic information
(G) Review of the expected hazards includ- relative to response decision making includ-
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined ing but not limited to the U.S. Department
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered of Transportation’s Emergency Response
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards, Guidebook (ERG), manufacturer material
and walking-working surface hazards. safety data sheets, CHEMTREC/CANUTEC,
(H) Awareness and knowledge of the com- shipper or manufacturer contacts, computer
petencies for the First Responder at the Op- data bases and response models, and other
erations Level covered in the National Fire relevant sources of information addressing
Protection Association’s Standard No. 472, hazardous substance releases. Familiariza-
Professional Competence of Responders to Haz- tion with 29 CFR 1926.60.
ardous Materials Incidents. (C) Review of the principles and practices
(3) Hazardous materials technician. for analyzing an incident to determine the
(A) Review of and demonstration of com- hazardous substances present, their physical
petency in performing the applicable skills and chemical properties, and the likely be-
of 29 CFR 1926.65(q). havior of the hazardous substance and its

(B) Hands-on experience with written and container, vessel, or vehicle.
electronic information relative to response (D) Review of the principles and practices
decision making including but not limited to for identification of the types of hazardous
the U.S. Department of Transportation’s substance transportation containers, vessels
183
and vehicles involved in the release; select- (C) Ability to implement a response to fa-
ing and using the various types of equipment vorably change the outcome of the incident
available for plugging or patching transpor- in a manner consistent with the local emer-
tation containers, vessels or vehicles; orga- gency response plan and the organization’s
nizing and directing the use of multiple standard operating procedures.
teams of hazardous material technicians and (D) Ability to evaluate the progress of the
selecting the appropriate strategy for ap- emergency response to ensure that the re-
proaching release sites and containing or sponse objectives are being met safely, effec-
stopping the release. tively, and efficiently.
(E) Review of procedures for implementing (E) Ability to adjust the response plan to
continuing response actions consistent with the conditions of the response and to notify
the local emergency response plan, the orga- higher levels of response when required by
nization’s standard operating procedures, in- the changes to the response plan.
cluding knowledge of the available public
and private response resources, establish- [58 FR 35129, June 30, 1993, as amended at 59
ment of an incident command post, direction FR 43275, Aug. 22, 1994: 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
of hazardous material technician teams, and 1996]
extended emergency notification procedures
and follow-up communications. § 1926.66 Criteria for design and con-
(F) Review of the principles and practice struction of spray booths.
for proper selection and use of personal pro-
(a) Definitions applicable to this sec-
tective equipment.
(G) Review of the principles and practices tion—(1) Aerated solid powders. Aerated
of establishing exposure zones and proper de- powders shall mean any powdered ma-
contamination, monitoring and medical sur- terial used as a coating material which
veillance stations and procedures. shall be fluidized within a container by
(H) Review of the expected hazards includ- passing air uniformly from below. It is
ing fire and explosions hazards, confined common practice to fluidize such mate-
space hazards, electrical hazards, powered
rials to form a fluidized powder bed and
equipment hazards, motor vehicle hazards,
and walking-working surface hazards. then dip the part to be coated into the
(I) Awareness and knowledge of the com- bed in a manner similar to that used in
petencies for the Off-site Specialist Em- liquid dipping. Such beds are also used
ployee covered in the National Fire Protec- as sources for powder spray operations.
tion Association’s Standard No. 472, Profes- (2) Spraying area. Any area in which
sional Competence of Responders to Hazardous dangerous quantities of flammable va-
Materials Incidents.
(5) Incident commander. The incident com-
pors or mists, or combustible residues,
mander is the individual who, at any one dusts, or deposits are present due to
time, is responsible for and in control of the the operation of spraying processes.
response effort. This individual is the person (3) Spray booth. A power-ventilated
responsible for the direction and coordina- structure provided to enclose or accom-
tion of the response effort. An incident com- modate a spraying operation to confine
mander’s position should be occupied by the and limit the escape of spray, vapor,
most senior, appropriately trained individual and residue, and to safely conduct or
present at the response site. Yet, as nec-
essary and appropriate by the level of re-
direct them to an exhaust system.
sponse provided, the position may be occu- (4) Waterwash spray booth. A spray
pied by many individuals during a particular booth equipped with a water washing
response as the need for greater authority, system designed to minimize dusts or
responsibility, or training increases. It is residues entering exhaust ducts and to
possible for the first responder at the aware- permit the recovery of overspray fin-
ness level to assume the duties of incident ishing material.
commander until a more senior and appro-
(5) Dry spray booth. A spray booth not
priately trained individual arrives at the re-
sponse site. equipped with a water washing system
Therefore, any emergency responder ex- as described in paragraph (a)(4) of this
pected to perform as an incident commander section. A dry spray booth may be
should be trained to fulfill the obligations of equipped with
the position at the level of response they will (i) Distribution or baffle plates to
be providing including the following: promote an even flow of air through
(A) Ability to analyze a hazardous sub-
the booth or cause the deposit of
stance incident to determine the magnitude

of the response problem. overspray before it enters the exhaust
(B) Ability to plan and implement an ap- duct; or
propriate response plan within the capabili- (ii) Overspray dry filters to minimize
ties of available personnel and equipment. dusts; or
184
(iii) Overspray dry filters to mini- overspray before it enters the exhaust
mize dusts or residues entering exhaust duct, shall be of noncombustible mate-
ducts; or rial and readily removable or acces-
(iv) Overspray dry filter rolls de- sible on both sides for cleaning. Such
signed to minimize dusts or residues plates shall not be located in exhaust
entering exhaust ducts; or ducts.
(v) Where dry powders are being (5) Dry type overspray collectors—(ex-
sprayed, with powder collection sys- haust air filters). In conventional dry
tems so arranged in the exhaust to cap- type spray booths, overspray dry filters
ture oversprayed material. or filter rolls, if installed, shall con-
(6) Fluidized bed. A container holding form to the following:
powder coating material which is aer- (i) The spraying operations except
ated from below so as to form an air- electrostatic spraying operations shall
supported expanded cloud of such ma- be so designed, installed and main-
terial through which the preheated obtained that the average air velocity
ject to be coated is immersed and over the open face of the booth (or
transported. booth cross section during spraying op-
(7) Electrostatic fluidized bed. A con- erations) shall be not less than 100 lin-
tainer holding powder coating material ear feet per minute. Electrostatic
which is aerated from below so as to spraying operations may be conducted
form an air-supported expanded cloud with an air velocity over the open face
of such material which is electrically of the booth of not less than 60 linear
charged with a charge opposite to the feet per minute, or more, depending on
charge of the object to be coated; such the volume of the finishing material
object is transported, through the con- being applied and its flammability and
tainer immediately above the charged explosion characteristics. Visible
and aerated materials in order to be gauges or audible alarm or pressure ac-
coated. tivated devices shall be installed to in-
(8) Approved. Shall mean approved dicate or insure that the required air
and listed by a nationally recognized velocity is maintained. Filter rolls
testing laboratory. shall be inspected to insure proper re-
(9) Listed. See ‘‘approved’’ in para- placement of filter media.
graph (a)(8) of this section. (ii) All discarded filter pads and filter
(b) Spray booths—(1) Construction. rolls shall be immediately removed to
Spray booths shall be substantially a safe, well-detached location or placed
constructed of steel, securely and rig- in a water-filled metal container and
idly supported, or of concrete or ma- disposed of at the close of the day’s op-
sonry except that aluminum or other eration unless maintained completely
substantial noncombustible material in water.
may be used for intermittent or low (iii) The location of filters in a spray
volume spraying. Spray booths shall be booth shall be so as to not reduce the
designed to sweep air currents toward effective booth enclosure of the arti-
the exhaust outlet. cles being sprayed.
(2) Interiors. The interior surfaces of (iv) Space within the spray booth on
spray booths shall be smooth and con- the downstream and upstream sides of
tinuous without edges and otherwise filters shall be protected with approved
designed to prevent pocketing of resi- automatic sprinklers.
dues and facilitate cleaning and wash- (v) Filters or filter rolls shall not be
ing without injury. used when applying a spray material
(3) Floors. The floor surface of a spray known to be highly susceptible to spon-
booth and operator’s working area, if taneous heating and ignition.
combustible, shall be covered with non- (vi) Clean filters or filter rolls shall
combustible material of such character be noncombustible or of a type having
as to facilitate the safe cleaning and a combustibility not in excess of class
removal of residues. 2 filters as listed by Underwriters’ Lab-
(4) Distribution or baffle plates. Dis- oratories, Inc. Filters and filter rolls
tribution or baffle plates, if installed shall not be alternately used for dif-
to promote an even flow of air through ferent types of coating materials,
the booth or cause the deposit of where the combination of materials
185
may be conducive to spontaneous igni- (2) Minimum separation. There shall be

tion. no open flame or spark producing
(6) Frontal area. Each spray booth equipment in any spraying area nor
having a frontal area larger than 9 within 20 feet (6.08 m) thereof, unless
square feet shall have a metal deflector separated by a partition.
or curtain not less than 2 1⁄2 inches (5.35 (3) Hot surfaces. Space-heating appli-
cm) deep installed at the upper outer ances, steampipes, or hot surfaces shall
edge of the booth over the opening. not be located in a spraying area where
(7) Conveyors. Where conveyors are deposits of combustible residues may
arranged to carry work into or out of readily accumulate.
spray booths, the openings therefor (4) Wiring conformance. Electrical wir-
shall be as small as practical. ing and equipment shall conform to the
(8) Separation of operations. Each provisions of this paragraph and shall
spray booth shall be separated from otherwise be in accordance with sub-
other operations by not less than 3 feet part S of this part.
(0.912 m), or by a greater distance, or (5) Combustible residues, areas. Unless
by such partition or wall as to reduce specifically approved for locations con-
the danger from juxtaposition of haz- taining both deposits of readily ignit-
ardous operations. See also paragraph able residue and explosive vapors, there
(c)(1) of this section. shall be no electrical equipment in any
(9) Cleaning. Spray booths shall be so spraying area, whereon deposits of
installed that all portions are readily combustible residues may readily accu-
accessible for cleaning. A clear space of mulate, except wiring in rigid conduit
not less than 3 feet (0.912 m) on all or in boxes or fittings containing no
sides shall be kept free from storage or taps, splices, or terminal connections.
combustible construction. (6) Wiring type approved. Electrical
(10) Illumination. When spraying areas wiring and equipment not subject to
are illuminated through glass panels or deposits of combustible residues but lo-
other transparent materials, only fixed cated in a spraying area as herein de-
lighting units shall be used as a source fined shall be of explosion-proof type
of illumination. Panels shall effec- approved for Class I, group D locations
tively isolate the spraying area from and shall otherwise conform to the pro-
the area in which the lighting unit is visions of subpart S of this part, for
located, and shall be of a noncombus- Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca-
tible material of such a nature or so tions. Electrical wiring, motors, and
protected that breakage will be un- other equipment outside of but within
likely. Panels shall be so arranged that 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spraying area,
normal accumulations of residue on and not separated therefrom by parti-
the exposed surface of the panel will tions, shall not produce sparks under
not be raised to a dangerous tempera- normal operating conditions and shall
ture by radiation or conduction from otherwise conform to the provisions of
the source of illumination. subpart S of this part for Class I, Divi-
(c) Electrical and other sources of igni- sion 2 Hazardous Locations.
tion—(1) Conformance. All electrical (7) Lamps. Electric lamps outside of,
equipment, open flames and other but within 20 feet (6.08 m) of any spray-
sources of ignition shall conform to the ing area, and not separated therefrom
requirements of this paragraph, except by a partition, shall be totally enclosed
as follows: to prevent the falling of hot particles
(i) Electrostatic apparatus shall con- and shall be protected from mechanical
form to the requirements of paragraphs injury by suitable guards or by loca-
(e) and (f) of this section; tion.
(ii) Drying, curing, and fusion appa- (8) Portable lamps. Portable electric
ratus shall conform to the require- lamps shall not be used in any spraying
ments of paragraph (g) of this section; area during spraying operations. Port-
(iii) [Reserved] able electric lamps, if used during

(iv) Powder coating equipment shall cleaning or repairing operations, shall
conform to the requirements of para- be of the type approved for hazardous
graph (c)(1) of this section. Class I locations.
186
(9) Grounding. (i) All metal parts of (5) Electric motors. Electric motors
spray booths, exhaust ducts, and piping driving exhaust fans shall not be placed
systems conveying flammable or com- inside booths or ducts. See also para-
bustible liquids or aerated solids shall graph (c) of this section.
be properly electrically grounded in an (6) Belts. Belts shall not enter the
effective and permanent manner. duct or booth unless the belt and pul-
(d) Ventilation—(1) Conformance. Ven- ley within the duct or booth are thor-
tilating and exhaust systems shall be oughly enclosed.
in accordance with the Standard for (7) Exhaust ducts. Exhaust ducts shall
Blower and Exhaust Systems for Vapor be constructed of steel and shall be
Removal, NFPA No. 91–1961, where ap- substantially supported. Exhaust ducts
plicable and shall also conform to the without dampers are preferred; how-
provisions of this section. ever, if dampers are installed, they
(2) General. All spraying areas shall shall be maintained so that they will
be provided with mechanical ventila- be in a full open position at all times
tion adequate to remove flammable va- the ventilating system is in operation.
pors, mists, or powders to a safe loca- (i) Exhaust ducts shall be protected
tion and to confine and control com- against mechanical damage and have a
bustible residues so that life is not en- clearance from unprotected combus-
dangered. Mechanical ventilation shall tible construction or other combustible
be kept in operation at all times while material of not less than 18 inches
spraying operations are being con- (45.72 cm).
ducted and for a sufficient time there- (ii) If combustible construction is
after to allow vapors from drying coat- provided with the following protection
ed articles and drying finishing mate- applied to all surfaces within 18 inches
rial residue to be exhausted. (45.72 cm), clearances may be reduced
(3) Independent exhaust. Each spray to the distances indicated:
(a) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/4-inch as- 12 inches (30.48
booth shall have an independent ex- bestos mill board. cm).
haust duct system discharging to the (b) 28-gage sheet metal on 1/8-inch as- 9 inches (22.86
exterior of the building, except that bestos mill board spaced out 1 inch cm).
multiple cabinet spray booths in which (2.54 cm) on noncombustible spacers.
(c) 22-gage sheet metal on 1-inch 3 inches (7.62
identical spray finishing material is rockwool batts reinforced with wire cm).
used with a combined frontal area of mesh or the equivalent.
not more than 18 square feet may have (d) Where ducts are protected with an ap-
a common exhaust. If more than one proved automatic sprinkler system,
properly maintained, the clearance re-
fan serves one booth, all fans shall be quired in paragraph (d)(7)(i) of this sec-
so interconnected that one fan cannot tion may be reduced to 6 inches (15.24
operate without all fans being oper- cm).
ated. (8) Discharge clearance. Unless the
(4) Fan-rotating element. The fan-ro- spray booth exhaust duct terminal is
tating element shall be nonferrous or from a water-wash spray booth, the
nonsparking or the casing shall consist terminal discharge point shall be not
of or be lined with such material. less than 6 feet from any combustible
There shall be ample clearance be- exterior wall or roof nor discharge in
tween the fan-rotating element and the the direction of any combustible con-
fan casing to avoid a fire by friction, struction or unprotected opening in
necessary allowance being made for or- any noncombustible exterior wall with-
dinary expansion and loading to pre- in 25 feet (7.6 m).
vent contact between moving parts and (9) Air exhaust. Air exhaust from
the duct or fan housing. Fan blades spray operations shall not be directed
shall be mounted on a shaft suffi- so that it will contaminate makeup air
ciently heavy to maintain perfect being introduced into the spraying area
alignment even when the blades of the or other ventilating intakes, nor di-
fan are heavily loaded, the shaft pref- rected so as to create a nuisance. Air
erably to have bearings outside the exhausted from spray operations shall
duct and booth. All bearings shall be of not be recirculated.
the self-lubricating type, or lubricated (10) Access doors. When necessary to
from the outside duct. facilitate cleaning, exhaust ducts shall
187
be provided with an ample number of tem when it is electrically deenergized

access doors. for any reason. All insulators shall be
(11) Room intakes. Air intake openings kept clean and dry.
to rooms containing spray finishing op- (6) Safe distance. A safe distance shall
erations shall be adequate for the effi- be maintained between goods being
cient operation of exhaust fans and painted and electrodes or electrostatic
shall be so located as to minimize the atomizing heads or conductors of at
creation of dead air pockets. least twice the sparking distance. A
(12) Drying spaces. Freshly sprayed suitable sign indicating this safe dis-
articles shall be dried only in spaces tance shall be conspicuously posted
provided with adequate ventilation to
near the assembly.
prevent the formation of explosive va-
pors. In the event adequate and reliable (7) Conveyors required. Goods being
ventilation is not provided such drying painted using this process are to be
spaces shall be considered a spraying supported on conveyors. The conveyors
area. shall be so arranged as to maintain
(e) Fixed electrostatic apparatus—(1) safe distances between the goods and
Conformance. Where installation and the electrodes or electrostatic atom-
use of electrostatic spraying equip- izing heads at all times. Any irregu-
ment is used, such installation and use larly shaped or other goods subject to
shall conform to all other paragraphs possible swinging or movement shall be
of this section, and shall also conform rigidly supported to prevent such
to the requirements of this paragraph. swinging or movement which would re-
(2) Type approval. Electrostatic appa- duce the clearance to less than that
ratus and devices used in connection specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this sec-
with coating operations shall be of ap- tion.
proved types. (8) Prohibition. This process is not ac-
(3) Location. Transformers, power ceptable where goods being coated are
packs, control apparatus, and all other manipulated by hand. When finishing
electrical portions of the equipment, materials are applied by electrostatic
with the exception of high-voltage equipment which is manipulated by
grids, electrodes, and electrostatic
hand, see paragraph (f) of this section
atomizing heads and their connections,
for applicable requirements.
shall be located outside of the spraying
area, or shall otherwise conform to the (9) Fail-safe controls. Electrostatic ap-
requirements of paragraph (c) of this paratus shall be equipped with auto-
section. matic controls which will operate with-
(4) Support. Electrodes and electro- out time delay to disconnect the power
static atomizing heads shall be ade- supply to the high voltage transformer
quately supported in permanent loca- and to signal the operator under any of
tions and shall be effectively insulated the following conditions:
from the ground. Electrodes and elec- (i) Stoppage of ventilating fans or
trostatic atomizing heads which are failure of ventilating equipment from
permanently attached to their bases, any cause.
supports, or reciprocators, shall be (ii) Stoppage of the conveyor car-
deemed to comply with this section. rying goods through the high voltage
Insulators shall be nonporous and non- field.
combustible. (iii) Occurrence of a ground or of an
(5) Insulators, grounding. High-voltage imminent ground at any point on the
leads to electrodes shall be properly in- high voltage system.
sulated and protected from mechanical
(iv) Reduction of clearance below
injury or exposure to destructive
that specified in paragraph (e)(6) of this
chemicals. Electrostatic atomizing
heads shall be effectively and perma- section.
nently supported on suitable insulators (10) Guarding. Adequate booths, fenc-
and shall be effectively guarded ing, railings, or guards shall be so

against accidental contact or ground- placed about the equipment that they,
ing. An automatic means shall be pro- either by their location or character or
vided for grounding the electrode sys- both, assure that a safe isolation of the
188
process is maintained from plant stor- the operator in normal operating posi-
age or personnel. Such railings, fenc- tion is in intimate electrical contact
ing, and guards shall be of conducting with the grounded handle.
material, adequately grounded. (6) Grounding-general. All electrically
(11) Ventilation. Where electrostatic conductive objects in the spraying area
atomization is used the spraying area shall be adequately grounded. This re-
shall be so ventilated as to insure safe quirement shall apply to paint con-
conditions from a fire and health tainers, wash cans, and any other ob-
standpoint. jects or devices in the area. The equip-
(12) Fire protection. All areas used for ment shall carry a prominent perma-
spraying, including the interior of the nently installed warning regarding the
booth, shall be protected by automatic necessity for this grounding feature.
sprinklers where this protection is (7) Maintenance of grounds. Objects
available. Where this protection is not being painted or coated shall be main-
available, other approved automatic tained in metallic contact with the
extinguishing equipment shall be pro- conveyor or other grounded support.
vided. Hooks shall be regularly cleaned to in-
(f) Electrostatic hand spraying equip- sure this contact and areas of contact
ment—(1) Application. This paragraph shall be sharp points or knife edges
shall apply to any equipment using where possible. Points of support of the
electrostatically charged elements for object shall be concealed from random
the atomization and/or, precipitation spray where feasible and where the ob-
of materials for coatings on articles, or jects being sprayed are supported from
for other similar purposes in which the a conveyor, the point of attachment to
atomizing device is hand held and ma- the conveyor shall be so located as to
nipulated during the spraying oper- not collect spray material during nor-
ation. mal operation.
(2) Conformance. Electrostatic hand (8) Interlocks. The electrical equip-
spraying equipment shall conform with ment shall be so interlocked with the
the other provisions of this section. ventilation of the spraying area that
(3) Equipment approval and specifica- the equipment cannot be operated un-
tions. Electrostatic hand spray appa- less the ventilation fans are in oper-
ratus and devices used in connection ation.
with coating operations shall be of ap- (9) Ventilation. The spraying oper-
proved types. The high voltage circuits ation shall take place within a spray
shall be designed so as to not produce area which is adequately ventilated to
a spark of sufficient intensity to ignite remove solvent vapors released from
any vapor-air mixtures nor result in the operation.
appreciable shock hazard upon coming (g) Drying, curing, or fusion appa-
in contact with a grounded object ratus—(1) Conformance. Drying, curing,
under all normal operating conditions. or fusion apparatus in connection with
The electrostatically charged exposed spray application of flammable and
elements of the handgun shall be capa- combustible finishes shall conform to
ble of being energized only by a switch the Standard for Ovens and Furnaces,
which also controls the coating mate- NFPA 86A–1969, where applicable and
rial supply. shall also conform with the following
(4) Electrical support equipment. Trans- requirements of this paragraph.
formers, powerpacks, control appa- (2) Alternate use prohibited. Spray
ratus, and all other electrical portions booths, rooms, or other enclosures used
of the equipment, with the exception of for spraying operations shall not alter-
the handgun itself and its connections nately be used for the purpose of dry-
to the power supply shall be located ing by any arrangement which will
outside of the spraying area or shall cause a material increase in the sur-
otherwise conform to the requirements face temperature of the spray booth,
of paragraph (c) of this section. room, or enclosure.
(5) Spray gun ground. The handle of (3) Adjacent system interlocked. Except
the spraying gun shall be electrically as specifically provided in paragraph
connected to ground by a metallic con- (g)(4) of this section, drying, curing, or
nection and to be so constructed that fusion units utilizing a heating system
189
having open flames or which may (v) The drying apparatus shall con-
produce sparks shall not be installed in tain a prominently located, perma-
a spraying area, but may be installed nently attached warning sign indi-
adjacent thereto when equipped with cating that ventilation should be main-
an interlocked ventilating system ar- tained during the drying period and
ranged to: that spraying should not be conducted
(i) Thoroughly ventilate the drying in the vicinity that spray will deposit
space before the heating system can be on apparatus.
started;
(ii) Maintain a safe atmosphere at [58 FR 35149, June 30, 1993]
any source of ignition;
(iii) Automatically shut down the Subpart E—Personal Protective
heating system in the event of failure and Life Saving Equipment
of the ventilating system.
(4) Alternate use permitted. Auto-
AUTHORITY: Section. 107, Contract Work
mobile refinishing spray booths or en-
Hours and Safety Standards Act (Construc-
closures, otherwise installed and main- tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Sections. 4,
tained in full conformity with this sec- 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety and
tion, may alternately be used for dry- Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657);
ing with portable electrical infrared Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR
drying apparatus when conforming 8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–
with the following: 90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111), 5–2002 (67 FR
(i) Interior (especially floors) of 65008), or 5–2007 (72 FR 31160) as applicable;
spray enclosures shall be kept free of and 29 CFR Part 1911.
overspray deposits.
(ii) During spray operations, the dry- § 1926.95 Criteria for personal protec-
ing apparatus and electrical connec- tive equipment.
tions and wiring thereto shall not be (a) Application. Protective equipment,
located within spray enclosure nor in including personal protective equip-
any other location where spray resi- ment for eyes, face, head, and extrem-
dues may be deposited thereon. ities, protective clothing, respiratory
(iii) The spraying apparatus, the dry- devices, and protective shields and bar-
ing apparatus, and the ventilating sys- riers, shall be provided, used, and
tem of the spray enclosure shall be maintained in a sanitary and reliable
equipped with suitable interlocks so ar- condition wherever it is necessary by
ranged that: reason of hazards of processes or envi-
(a) The spraying apparatus cannot be ronment, chemical hazards, radio-
operated while the drying apparatus is logical hazards, or mechanical irri-
inside the spray enclosure. tants encountered in a manner capable
(b) The spray enclosure will be of causing injury or impairment in the
purged of spray vapors for a period of function of any part of the body
not less than 3 minutes before the dry- through absorption, inhalation or
ing apparatus can be energized.
physical contact.
(c) The ventilating system will main-
(b) Employee-owned equipment. Where
tain a safe atmosphere within the en-
closure during the drying process and employees provide their own protective
the drying apparatus will automati- equipment, the employer shall be re-
cally shut off in the event of failure of sponsible to assure its adequacy, in-
the ventilating system. cluding proper maintenance, and sani-
(iv) All electrical wiring and equip- tation of such equipment.
ment of the drying apparatus shall con- (c) Design. All personal protective
form with the applicable sections of equipment shall be of safe design and
subpart S of this part. Only equipment construction for the work to be per-
of a type approved for Class I, Division formed.
2 hazardous locations shall be located (d) Payment for protective equipment.
within 18 inches (45.72 cm) of floor (1) Except as provided by paragraphs

level. All metallic parts of the drying (d)(2) through (d)(6) of this section, the
apparatus shall be properly electrically protective equipment, including per-
bonded and grounded. sonal protective equipment (PPE), used
190
to comply with this part, shall be pro- ard for Men’s Safety-Toe Footwear,
vided by the employer at no cost to Z41.1–1967.
employees. [58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993]
(2) The employer is not required to
pay for non-specialty safety-toe protec- §§ 1926.97–1926.98 [Reserved]
tive footwear (including steel-toe shoes
or steel-toe boots) and non-specialty § 1926.100 Head protection.
prescription safety eyewear, provided (a) Employees working in areas
that the employer permits such items where there is a possible danger of head
to be worn off the job-site. injury from impact, or from falling or
(3) When the employer provides flying objects, or from electrical shock
metatarsal guards and allows the em- and burns, shall be protected by protec-
ployee, at his or her request, to use tive helmets.
shoes or boots with built-in metatarsal (b) Helmets for the protection of em-
protection, the employer is not re- ployees against impact and penetration
quired to reimburse the employee for of falling and flying objects shall meet
the shoes or boots. the specifications contained in Amer-
(4) The employer is not required to ican National Standards Institute,
pay for: Z89.1–1969, Safety Requirements for In-
(i) Everyday clothing, such as long- dustrial Head Protection.
sleeve shirts, long pants, street shoes, (c) Helmets for the head protection of
and normal work boots; or employees exposed to high voltage
(ii) Ordinary clothing, skin creams, electrical shock and burns shall meet
or other items, used solely for protec- the specifications contained in Amer-
tion from weather, such as winter ican National Standards Institute,
coats, jackets, gloves, parkas, rubber Z89.2–1971.
boots, hats, raincoats, ordinary sun-
glasses, and sunscreen. § 1926.101 Hearing protection.
(5) The employer must pay for re- (a) Wherever it is not feasible to re-
placement PPE, except when the em- duce the noise levels or duration of ex-
ployee has lost or intentionally dam- posures to those specified in Table D–2,
aged the PPE. Permissible Noise Exposures, in
(6) Where an employee provides ade- § 1926.52, ear protective devices shall be
quate protective equipment he or she provided and used.
owns pursuant to paragraph (b) of this (b) Ear protective devices inserted in
section, the employer may allow the the ear shall be fitted or determined in-
employee to use it and is not required dividually by competent persons.
to reimburse the employee for that (c) Plain cotton is not an acceptable
equipment. The employer shall not re- protective device.
quire an employee to provide or pay for
his or her own PPE, unless the PPE is § 1926.102 Eye and face protection.
excepted by paragraphs (d)(2) through (a) General. (1) Employees shall be
(d)(5) of this section. provided with eye and face protection
(7) This section shall become effec- equipment when machines or oper-
tive on February 13, 2008. Employers ations present potential eye or face in-
must implement the PPE payment re- jury from physical, chemical, or radi-
quirements no later than May 15, 2008. ation agents.
NOTE TO § 1926.95(d): When the provisions of (2) Eye and face protection equip-
another OSHA standard specify whether or ment required by this Part shall meet
not the employer must pay for specific the requirements specified in American
equipment, the payment provisions of that National Standards Institute, Z87.1–
standard shall prevail. 1968, Practice for Occupational and
[58 FR 35152, June 30, 1993, as amended at 72 Educational Eye and Face Protection.
FR 64429, Nov. 15, 2007] (3) Employees whose vision requires
the use of corrective lenses in spec-
§ 1926.96 Occupational foot protection. tacles, when required by this regula-

Safety-toe footwear for employees tion to wear eye protection, shall be
shall meet the requirements and speci- protected by goggles or spectacles of
fications in American National Stand- one of the following types:
191
(i) Spectacles whose protective lenses (4) Face and eye protection equip-
provide optical correction; ment shall be kept clean and in good
(ii) Goggles that can be worn over repair. The use of this type equipment
corrective spectacles without dis- with structural or optical defects shall
turbing the adjustment of the spec- be prohibited.
tacles; (5) Table E–1 shall be used as a guide
(iii) Goggles that incorporate correc- in the selection of face and eye protec-
tive lenses mounted behind the protection for the hazards and operations
tive lenses. noted.
*Non-side shield spectacles are avail- **See Table E–2, in paragraph (b) of
able for limited hazard use requiring this section, Filter Lens Shade Num-
only frontal protection. bers for Protection Against Radiant
Energy.
APPLICATIONS
Recommended protectors: Bold type numbers signify pre-
Operation Hazards ferred protection
Acetylene—Burning, Acety- Sparks, harmful rays, molten 7, 8, 9.

lene—Cutting, Acetylene— metal, flying particles.
Welding.
Chemical Handling .................... Splash, acid burns, fumes ...... 2, 10 (For severe exposure add 10 over 2).
Chipping .................................... Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A.
Electric (arc) welding ................ Sparks, intense rays, molten 9, 11, (11 in combination with 4, 5, 6, in tinted lenses, advis-
metal. able).
Furnace operations ................... Glare, heat, molten metal ....... 7, 8, 9 (For severe exposure add 10).
Grinding—Light ......................... Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
Grinding—Heavy ....................... Flying particles ........................ 1 , 3, 7A, 8A (For severe exposure add 10).
Laboratory ................................. Chemical splash, glass break- 2 (10 when in combination with 4, 5, 6).
age.
EC30OC91.011</GPH>
Machining .................................. Flying particles ........................ 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
192
EC30OC91.010</GPH>
APPLICATIONS—Continued
Recommended protectors: Bold type numbers signify pre-
Operation Hazards ferred protection
Molten metals ........................... Heat, glare, sparks, splash ..... 7, 8, (10 in combination with 4, 5, 6, in tinted lenses).
Spot welding ............................. Flying particles, sparks ........... 1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
(6) Protectors shall meet the fol- TABLE E–2—FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR
lowing minimum requirements: PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY—
(i) They shall provide adequate pro- Continued
tection against the particular hazards
Shade
for which they are designed. Welding operation number
(ii) They shall be reasonably com-
fortable when worn under the des- Gas welding (medium), 1⁄8-inch to 1⁄2-inch .......... 5 or 6
Gas welding (heavy), over 1⁄2-inch ...................... 6 or 8
ignated conditions.
(iii) They shall fit snugly and shall
not unduly interfere with the move- (2) Laser protection. (i) Employees
ments of the wearer. whose occupation or assignment re-
(iv) They shall be durable. quires exposure to laser beams shall be
(v) They shall be capable of being dis- furnished suitable laser safety goggles
infected. which will protect for the specific
(vi) They shall be easily cleanable. wavelength of the laser and be of opti-
(7) Every protector shall be distinctly cal density (O.D.) adequate for the en-
marked to facilitate identification ergy involved. Table E–3 lists the max-
only of the manufacturer. imum power or energy density for
(8) When limitations or precautions which adequate protection is afforded
are indicated by the manufacturer, by glasses of optical densities from 5
they shall be transmitted to the user through 8.
and care taken to see that such limita-
TABLE E–3—SELECTING LASER SAFETY GLASS
tions and precautions are strictly ob-
served. Intensity, CW max- Attenuation
(b) Protection against radiant energy— imum power den- Optical density
(1) Selection of shade numbers for welding sity (watts/cm2) Attenuation factor
(O.D.)
filter. Table E–2 shall be used as a guide
10¥2 5 10 5
for the selection of the proper shade 10¥1 6 10 6
numbers of filter lenses or plates used 1.0 7 10 7
in welding. Shades more dense than 10.0 8 10 8
those listed may be used to suit the in-
dividual’s needs. Output levels falling between lines in
this table shall require the higher opti-
TABLE E–2—FILTER LENS SHADE NUMBERS FOR cal density.
PROTECTION AGAINST RADIANT ENERGY (ii) All protective goggles shall bear
Shade a label identifying the following data:
Welding operation number (a) The laser wavelengths for which
Shielded metal-arc welding 1⁄16-, 3⁄32-, 1⁄8-, 5⁄32- use is intended;
inch diameter electrodes .................................. 10 (b) The optical density of those wave-
Gas-shielded arc welding (nonferrous) 1⁄16-, 3⁄32- lengths;
, 1⁄8-, 5⁄32-inch diameter electrodes .................. 11
Gas-shielded arc welding (ferrous) 1⁄16-, 3⁄32-,
(c) The visible light transmission.
1⁄8-, 5⁄32-inch diameter electrodes .................... 12 [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
Shielded metal-arc welding 3⁄16-, 7⁄32-, 1⁄4-inch
diameter electrodes ......................................... 12
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35160, June 30, 1993]
5⁄16-, 3⁄8-inch diameter electrodes ........................ 14
Atomic hydrogen welding .................................... 10–14 § 1926.103 Respiratory protection.
Carbon-arc welding ............................................. 14
Soldering .............................................................. 2 NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
Torch brazing ....................................................... 3 or 4 struction work under this section are iden-
Light cutting, up to 1 inch .................................... 3 or 4 tical to those set forth at 29 CFR 1910.134 of
Medium cutting, 1 inch to 6 inches ..................... 4 or 5 this chapter.
Heavy cutting, over 6 inches ............................... 5 or 6
Gas welding (light), up to 1⁄8-inch ....................... 4 or 5 [63 FR 1297; Jan. 8, 1998]
193
§ 1926.104 Safety belts, lifelines, and stalled as close under the work surface
lanyards. as practical but in no case more than
(a) Lifelines, safety belts, and lan- 25 feet below such work surface. Nets
yards shall be used only for employee shall be hung with sufficient clearance
safeguarding. Any lifeline, safety belt, to prevent user’s contact with the sur-
or lanyard actually subjected to in- faces or structures below. Such clear-
service loading, as distinguished from ances shall be determined by impact
static load testing, shall be imme- load testing.
diately removed from service and shall (2) It is intended that only one level
not be used again for employee safe- of nets be required for bridge construc-
guarding. tion.
(b) Lifelines shall be secured above (d) The mesh size of nets shall not ex-
the point of operation to an anchorage ceed 6 inches by 6 inches. All new nets
or structural member capable of sup- shall meet accepted performance
porting a minimum dead weight of 5,400 standards of 17,500 foot-pounds min-
pounds. imum impact resistance as determined
(c) Lifelines used on rock-scaling op- and certified by the manufacturers,
erations, or in areas where the lifeline and shall bear a label of proof test.
may be subjected to cutting or abra- Edge ropes shall provide a minimum
sion, shall be a minimum of 7⁄8-inch breaking strength of 5,000 pounds.
wire core manila rope. For all other (e) Forged steel safety hooks or
lifeline applications, a minimum of 3⁄4- shackles shall be used to fasten the net
inch manila or equivalent, with a min- to its supports.
imum breaking strength of 5,400 (f) Connections between net panels
pounds, shall be used. shall develop the full strength of the
(d) Safety belt lanyard shall be a net.
minimum of 1⁄2-inch nylon, or equiva-
lent, with a maximum length to pro- § 1926.106 Working over or near water.
vide for a fall of no greater than 6 feet. (a) Employees working over or near
The rope shall have a nominal breaking water, where the danger of drowning
strength of 5,400 pounds. exists, shall be provided with U.S.
(e) All safety belt and lanyard hard- Coast Guard-approved life jacket or
ware shall be drop forged or pressed buoyant work vests.
steel, cadmium plated in accordance (b) Prior to and after each use, the
with type 1, Class B plating specified in buoyant work vests or life preservers
Federal Specification QQ-P-416. Sur- shall be inspected for defects which
face shall be smooth and free of sharp would alter their strength or buoy-
edges. ancy. Defective units shall not be used.
(f) All safety belt and lanyard hard- (c) Ring buoys with at least 90 feet of
ware, except rivets, shall be capable of line shall be provided and readily avail-
withstanding a tensile loading of 4,000 able for emergency rescue operations.
pounds without cracking, breaking, or Distance between ring buoys shall not
taking a permanent deformation. exceed 200 feet.
(d) At least one lifesaving skiff shall
§ 1926.105 Safety nets. be immediately available at locations
(a) Safety nets shall be provided where employees are working over or
when workplaces are more than 25 feet adjacent to water.
above the ground or water surface, or
other surfaces where the use of ladders, § 1926.107 Definitions applicable to
scaffolds, catch platforms, temporary this subpart.
floors, safety lines, or safety belts is (a) Contaminant means any material
impractical. which by reason of its action upon,
(b) Where safety net protection is re- within, or to a person is likely to cause
quired by this part, operations shall physical harm.
not be undertaken until the net is in (b) Lanyard means a rope, suitable
place and has been tested. for supporting one person. One end is
(c)(1) Nets shall extend 8 feet beyond fastened to a safety belt or harness and
the edge of the work surface where em- the other end is secured to a substan-
ployees are exposed and shall be in- tial object or a safety line.
194
(c) Lifeline means a rope, suitable for quired to properly operate the fire-
supporting one person, to which a lan- fighting equipment shall be made
yard or safety belt (or harness) is at- available as soon as combustible mate-
tached. rials accumulate.
(d) O.D. means optical density and (2) Where underground water mains
refers to the light refractive character- are to be provided, they shall be in-
istics of a lens. stalled, completed, and made available
(e) Radiant energy means energy that for use as soon as practicable.
travels outward in all directions from (c) Portable firefighting equipment—(1)
its sources. Fire extinguishers and small hose lines. (i)
(f) Safety belt means a device, usually A fire extinguisher, rated not less than
worn around the waist which, by rea- 2A, shall be provided for each 3,000
son of its attachment to a lanyard and square feet of the protected building
lifeline or a structure, will prevent a area, or major fraction thereof. Travel
worker from falling. distance from any point of the pro-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979] tected area to the nearest fire extin-
guisher shall not exceed 100 feet.
(ii) One 55-gallon open drum of water
Subpart F—Fire Protection and with two fire pails may be substituted
Prevention for a fire extinguisher having a 2A rat-
ing.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours (iii) A 1⁄2-inch diameter garden-type
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); hose line, not to exceed 100 feet in
secs. 4, 6, and 8, Occupational Safety and
length and equipped with a nozzle, may
Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657);
Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR be substituted for a 2A-rated fire extin-
8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or guisher, providing it is capable of dis-
6–96 (62 FR 111) as applicable; and 29 CFR charging a minimum of 5 gallons per
part 1911. minute with a minimum hose stream
range of 30 feet horizontally. The gar-
§ 1926.150 Fire protection. den-type hose lines shall be mounted
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- on conventional racks or reels. The
ployer shall be responsible for the de- number and location of hose racks or
velopment of a fire protection program reels shall be such that at least one
to be followed throughout all phases of hose stream can be applied to all points
the construction and demolition work, in the area.
and he shall provide for the firefighting (iv) One or more fire extinguishers,
equipment as specified in this subpart. rated not less than 2A, shall be pro-
As fire hazards occur, there shall be no vided on each floor. In multistory
delay in providing the necessary equip- buildings, at least one fire extinguisher
ment. shall be located adjacent to stairway.
(2) Access to all available firefighting (v) Extinguishers and water drums,
equipment shall be maintained at all subject to freezing, shall be protected
times. from freezing.
(3) All firefighting equipment, pro- (vi) A fire extinguisher, rated not less
vided by the employer, shall be con- than 10B, shall be provided within 50
spicuously located. feet of wherever more than 5 gallons of
(4) All firefighting equipment shall flammable or combustible liquids or 5
be periodically inspected and main- pounds of flammable gas are being used
tained in operating condition. Defec- on the jobsite. This requirement does
tive equipment shall be immediately not apply to the integral fuel tanks of
replaced. motor vehicles.
(5) As warranted by the project, the (vii) Carbon tetrachloride and other
employer shall provide a trained and toxic vaporizing liquid fire extin-
equipped firefighting organization guishers are prohibited.
(Fire Brigade) to assure adequate pro- (viii) Portable fire extinguishers
tection to life. shall be inspected periodically and

(b) Water supply. (1) A temporary or maintained in accordance with Mainte-
permanent water supply, of sufficient nance and Use of Portable Fire Extin-
volume, duration, and pressure, re- guishers, NFPA No. 10A–1970.
195
(ix) Fire extinguishers which have (x) Table F–1 may be used as a guide
been listed or approved by a nationally for selecting the appropriate portable
recognized testing laboratory, shall be fire extinguishers.
used to meet the requirements of this
subpart.
(2) Fire hose and connections. (i) One service as soon as applicable laws per-
hundred feet, or less, of 11⁄2-inch hose, mit following completion of each story.
with a nozzle capable of discharging (ii) During demolition or alterations,
water at 25 gallons or more per minute, existing automatic sprinkler installa-
may be substituted for a fire extin- tions shall be retained in service as
guisher rated not more than 2A in the long as reasonable. The operation of
designated area provided that the hose sprinkler control valves shall be per-
line can reach all points in the area. mitted only by properly authorized
(ii) If fire hose connections are not persons. Modification of sprinkler sys-
compatible with local firefighting tems to permit alterations or addi-
equipment, the contractor shall pro- tional demolition should be expedited
vide adapters, or equivalent, to permit so that the automatic protection may
connections. be returned to service as quickly as
(iii) During demolition involving possible. Sprinkler control valves shall
combustible materials, charged hose be checked daily at close of work to as-
lines, supplied by hydrants, water tank certain that the protection is in serv-
trucks with pumps, or equivalent, shall ice.
be made available. (2) Standpipes. In all structures in
(d) Fixed firefighting equipment—(1) which standpipes are required, or
Sprinkler protection. (i) If the facility where standpipes exist in structures
being altered, they shall be brought up
being constructed includes the instal-
as soon as applicable laws permit, and

lation of automatic sprinkler protec-
shall be maintained as construction
tion, the installation shall closely fol-
progresses in such a manner that they
low the construction and be placed in
are always ready for fire protection
196
EC30OC91.012</GPH>
use. The standpipes shall be provided centrations of flammable gases or va-

with Siamese fire department connec- pors, shall be bonded to the tank or
tions on the outside of the structure, at vessel shell. Bonding devices shall not
the street level, which shall be con- be attached or detached in hazardous
spicuously marked. There shall be at concentrations of flammable gases or
least one standard hose outlet at each vapors.
floor. (b) Temporary buildings. (1) No tem-
(e) Fire alarm devices. (1) An alarm porary building shall be erected where
system, e.g., telephone system, siren, it will adversely affect any means of
etc., shall be established by the em- exit.
ployer whereby employees on the site (2) Temporary buildings, when lo-
and the local fire department can be cated within another building or struc-
alerted for an emergency. ture, shall be of either noncombustible
(2) The alarm code and reporting in- construction or of combustible con-
structions shall be conspicuously post- struction having a fire resistance of
ed at phones and at employee en- not less than 1 hour.
trances. (3) Temporary buildings, located
(f) Fire cutoffs. (1) Fire walls and exit other than inside another building and
stairways, required for the completed not used for the storage, handling, or
buildings, shall be given construction use of flammable or combustible liq-
priority. Fire doors, with automatic uids, flammable gases, explosives, or
closing devices, shall be hung on open- blasting agents, or similar hazardous
ings as soon as practicable. occupancies, shall be located at a dis-
(2) Fire cutoffs shall be retained in tance of not less than 10 feet from an-
buildings undergoing alterations or other building or structure. Groups of
demolition until operations necessitate temporary buildings, not exceeding
their removal. 2,000 square feet in aggregate, shall, for
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, the purposes of this part, be considered
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; a single temporary building.
61 FR 31432, June 20, 1996] (c) Open yard storage. (1) Combustible
materials shall be piled with due re-
§ 1926.151 Fire prevention. gard to the stability of piles and in no
(a) Ignition hazards. (1) Electrical wir- case higher than 20 feet.
ing and equipment for light, heat, or (2) Driveways between and around
power purposes shall be installed in combustible storage piles shall be at
compliance with the requirements of least 15 feet wide and maintained free
subpart K of this part. from accumulation of rubbish, equip-
(2) Internal combustion engine pow- ment, or other articles or materials.
ered equipment shall be so located that Driveways shall be so spaced that a
the exhausts are well away from com- maximum grid system unit of 50 feet
bustible materials. When the exhausts by 150 feet is produced.
are piped to outside the building under (3) The entire storage site shall be
construction, a clearance of at least 6 kept free from accumulation of unnec-
inches shall be maintained between essary combustible materials. Weeds
such piping and combustible material. and grass shall be kept down and a reg-
(3) Smoking shall be prohibited at or ular procedure provided for the peri-
in the vicinity of operations which con- odic cleanup of the entire area.
stitute a fire hazard, and shall be con- (4) When there is a danger of an un-
spicuously posted: ‘‘No Smoking or derground fire, that land shall not be
Open Flame.’’ used for combustible or flammable
(4) Portable battery powered lighting storage.
equipment, used in connection with the (5) Method of piling shall be solid
storage, handling, or use of flammable wherever possible and in orderly and
gases or liquids, shall be of the type ap- regular piles. No combustible material
proved for the hazardous locations. shall be stored outdoors within 10 feet
(5) The nozzle of air, inert gas, and of a building or structure.

steam lines or hoses, when used in the (6) Portable fire extinguishing equip-
cleaning or ventilation of tanks and ment, suitable for the fire hazard in-
vessels that contain hazardous con- volved, shall be provided at convenient,
197
conspicuously accessible locations in (2) Flammable or combustible liquids

the yard area. Portable fire extin- shall not be stored in areas used for
guishers, rated not less than 2A, shall exits, stairways, or normally used for
be placed so that maximum travel dis- the safe passage of people.
tance to the nearest unit shall not ex- (b) Indoor storage of flammable and
ceed 100 feet. combustible liquids. (1) No more than 25
(d) Indoor storage. (1) Storage shall gallons of flammable or combustible
not obstruct, or adversely affect, liquids shall be stored in a room out-
means of exit. side of an approved storage cabinet.
(2) All materials shall be stored, han- For storage of liquefied petroleum gas,
dled, and piled with due regard to their see § 1926.153.
fire characteristics. (2) Quantities of flammable and com-
(3) Noncompatible materials, which bustible liquid in excess of 25 gallons
may create a fire hazard, shall be seg- shall be stored in an acceptable or ap-
regated by a barrier having a fire re- proved cabinet meeting the following
sistance of at least 1 hour. requirements:
(4) Material shall be piled to mini- (i) Acceptable wooden storage cabi-
mize the spread of fire internally and nets shall be constructed in the fol-
to permit convenient access for fire- lowing manner, or equivalent: The bot-
fighting. Stable piling shall be main- tom, sides, and top shall be constructed
tained at all times. Aisle space shall be of an exterior grade of plywood at least
maintained to safely accommodate the 1 inch in thickness, which shall not
widest vehicle that may be used within break down or delaminate under stand-
the building for firefighting purposes. ard fire test conditions. All joints shall
(5) Clearance of at least 36 inches be rabbeted and shall be fastened in
shall be maintained between the top two directions with flathead wood
level of the stored material and the screws. When more than one door is
sprinkler deflectors. used, there shall be a rabbeted overlap
(6) Clearance shall be maintained of not less than 1 inch. Steel hinges
around lights and heating units to pre- shall be mounted in such a manner as
vent ignition of combustible materials. to not lose their holding capacity due
(7) A clearance of 24 inches shall be to loosening or burning out of the
maintained around the path of travel screws when subjected to fire. Such
of fire doors unless a barricade is pro- cabinets shall be painted inside and out
vided, in which case no clearance is with fire retardant paint.
needed. Material shall not be stored (ii) Approved metal storage cabinets
within 36 inches of a fire door opening. will be acceptable.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (iii) Cabinets shall be labeled in con-
1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] spicuous lettering, ‘‘Flammable—Keep
Fire Away.’’
§ 1926.152 Flammable and combustible (3) Not more than 60 gallons of flam-
liquids. mable or 120 gallons of combustible liq-
(a) General requirements. (1) Only ap- uids shall be stored in any one storage
proved containers and portable tanks cabinet. Not more than three such
shall be used for storage and handling cabinets may be located in a single
of flammable and combustible liquids. storage area. Quantities in excess of
Approved safety cans or Department of this shall be stored in an inside storage
Transportation approved containers room.
shall be used for the handling and use (4)(i) Inside storage rooms shall be
of flammable liquids in quantities of 5 constructed to meet the required fire-
gallons or less, except that this shall resistive rating for their use. Such con-
not apply to those flammable liquid struction shall comply with the test
materials which are highly viscid (ex- specifications set forth in Standard
tremely hard to pour), which may be Methods of Fire Test of Building Con-
used and handled in original shipping struction and Material, NFPA 251–1969.
containers. For quantities of one gal- (ii) Where an automatic extin-

lon or less, the original container may guishing system is provided, the sys-
be used, for storage, use and handling tem shall be designed and installed in
of flammable liquids. an approved manner. Openings to other
198
rooms or buildings shall be provided pilot light shall be installed adjacent

with noncombustible liquid-tight to the switch if flammable liquids are
raised sills or ramps at least 4 inches in dispensed within the room. Where grav-
height, or the floor in the storage area ity ventilation is provided, the fresh
shall be at least 4 inches below the sur- air intake, as well as the exhausting
rounding floor. Openings shall be pro- outlet from the room, shall be on the
vided with approved self-closing fire exterior of the building in which the
doors. The room shall be liquid-tight room is located.
where the walls join the floor. A per- (vii) In every inside storage room
missible alternate to the sill or ramp is there shall be maintained one clear
an open-grated trench, inside of the aisle at least 3 feet wide. Containers
room, which drains to a safe location. over 30 gallons capacity shall not be
Where other portions of the building or stacked one upon the other.
other buildings are exposed, windows (viii) Flammable and combustible
shall be protected as set forth in the liquids in excess of that permitted in
Standard for Fire Doors and Windows, inside storage rooms shall be stored
NFPA No. 80–1970, for Class E or F outside of buildings in accordance with
openings. Wood of at least 1-inch nomi- paragraph (c) of this section.
nal thickness may be used for shelving, (5) Quantity. The quantity of flam-
racks, dunnage, scuffboards, floor over- mable or combustible liquids kept in
lay, and similar installations. the vicinity of spraying operations
(iii) Materials which will react with shall be the minimum required for op-
water and create a fire hazard shall not erations and should ordinarily not ex-
be stored in the same room with flam- ceed a supply for 1 day or one shift.
mable or combustible liquids. Bulk storage of portable containers of
(iv) Storage in inside storage rooms flammable or combustible liquids shall
shall comply with Table F–2 following: be in a separate, constructed building
detached from other important build-
TABLE F–2
ings or cut off in a standard manner.
Total al- (c) Storage outside buildings. (1) Stor-
lowable
Fire protection Fire resist- quantities age of containers (not more than 60
Maximum size
provided ance gals./sq. gallons each) shall not exceed 1,100 gal-
ft./floor
area lons in any one pile or area. Piles or
groups of containers shall be separated
Yes ................ 2 hrs ............. 500 sq. ft ...... 10 by a 5-foot clearance. Piles or groups of
No .................. 2 hrs ............. 500 sq. ft ...... 4
Yes ................ 1 hr ............... 150 sq. ft ...... 5 containers shall not be nearer than 20
No .................. 1 hr ............... 150 sq. ft ...... 2 feet to a building.
NOTE: Fire protection system shall be sprinkler, water spray, (2) Within 200 feet of each pile of con-
carbon dioxide or other system approved by a nationally rec- tainers, there shall be a 12-foot-wide
ognized testing laboratory for this purpose.
access way to permit approach of fire
(v) Electrical wiring and equipment control apparatus.
located in inside storage rooms shall be (3) The storage area shall be graded
approved for Class I, Division 1, Haz- in a manner to divert possible spills
ardous Locations. For definition of away from buildings or other expo-
Class I, Division 1, Hazardous Loca- sures, or shall be surrounded by a curb
tions, see § 1926.449. or earth dike at least 12 inches high.
(vi) Every inside storage room shall When curbs or dikes are used, provi-
be provided with either a gravity or a sions shall be made for draining off ac-
mechanical exhausting system. Such cumulations of ground or rain water,
system shall commence not more than or spills of flammable or combustible
12 inches above the floor and be de- liquids. Drains shall terminate at a
signed to provide for a complete safe location and shall be accessible to
change of air within the room at least operation under fire conditions.
6 times per hour. If a mechanical ex- (4) Outdoor portable tank storage: (i)
hausting system is used, it shall be Portable tanks shall not be nearer than
controlled by a switch located outside 20 feet from any building. Two or more
of the door. The ventilating equipment portable tanks, grouped together, hav-
and any lighting fixtures shall be oper- ing a combined capacity in excess of
ated by the same switch. An electric 2,200 gallons, shall be separated by a 5-
199
foot-clear area. Individual portable to maintain the concentration of flam-

tanks exceeding 1,100 gallons shall be mable vapor at or below 10 percent of
separated by a 5-foot-clear area. the lower flammable limit.
(ii) Within 200 feet of each portable (2) Transfer of flammable liquids
tank, there shall be a 12-foot-wide ac- from one container to another shall be
cess way to permit approach of fire done only when containers are elec-
control apparatus. trically interconnected (bonded).
(5) Storage areas shall be kept free of (3) Flammable or combustible liquids
weeds, debris, and other combustible shall be drawn from or transferred into
material not necessary to the storage. vessels, containers, or tanks within a
(6) Portable tanks, not exceeding 660 building or outside only through a
gallons, shall be provided with emer- closed piping system, from safety cans,
gency venting and other devices, as re- by means of a device drawing through
quired by chapters III and IV of NFPA the top, or from a container, or port-
30–1969, The Flammable and Combus- able tanks, by gravity or pump,
tible Liquids Code. through an approved self-closing valve.
(7) Portable tanks, in excess of 660 Transferring by means of air pressure
gallons, shall have emergency venting on the container or portable tanks is
and other devices, as required by chap- prohibited.
ters II and III of The Flammable and (4) The dispensing units shall be pro-
Combustible Liquids Code, NFPA 30– tected against collision damage.
1969. (5) Dispensing devices and nozzles for
(d) Fire control for flammable or com- flammable liquids shall be of an ap-
bustible liquid storage. (1) At least one proved type.
portable fire extinguisher, having a (f) Handling liquids at point of final
rating of not less than 20–B units, shall use. (1) Flammable liquids shall be kept
be located outside of, but not more in closed containers when not actually
than 10 feet from, the door opening in use.
into any room used for storage of more (2) Leakage or spillage of flammable
than 60 gallons of flammable or com- or combustible liquids shall be disposed
bustible liquids. of promptly and safely.
(2) At least one portable fire extin- (3) Flammable liquids may be used
guisher having a rating of not less than only where there are no open flames or
20–B units shall be located not less other sources of ignition within 50 feet
than 25 feet, nor more than 75 feet, of the operation, unless conditions war-
from any flammable liquid storage rant greater clearance.
area located outside. (g) Service and refueling areas. (1)
(3) When sprinklers are provided, Flammable or combustible liquids
they shall be installed in accordance shall be stored in approved closed con-
with the Standard for the Installation tainers, in tanks located underground,
of Sprinkler Systems, NFPA 13–1969. or in aboveground portable tanks.
(4) At least one portable fire extin- (2) The tank trucks shall comply
guisher having a rating of not less than with the requirements covered in the
20–B:C units shall be provided on all Standard for Tank Vehicles for Flam-
tank trucks or other vehicles used for mable and Combustible Liquids, NFPA
transporting and/or dispensing flam- No. 385–1966.
mable or combustible liquids. (3) The dispensing hose shall be an
(e) Dispensing liquids. (1) Areas in approved type.
which flammable or combustible liq- (4) The dispensing nozzle shall be an
uids are transferred at one time, in approved automatic-closing type with-
quantities greater than 5 gallons from out a latch-open device.
one tank or container to another tank (5) Underground tanks shall not be
or container, shall be separated from abandoned.
other operations by 25-feet distance or (6) Clearly identified and easily ac-
by construction having a fire resist- cessible switch(es) shall be provided at
ance of at least 1 hour. Drainage or a location remote from dispensing de-

other means shall be provided to con- vices to shut off the power to all dis-
trol spills. Adequate natural or me- pensing devices in the event of an
chanical ventilation shall be provided emergency.
200
(7)(i) Heating equipment of an ap- (D) Unlined concrete tanks may be

proved type may be installed in the lu- used for storing flammable or combus-
brication or service area where there is tible liquids having a gravity of 40° API
no dispensing or transferring of flam- or heavier. Concrete tanks with special
mable liquids, provided the bottom of lining may be used for other services
the heating unit is at least 18 inches provided the design is in accordance
above the floor and is protected from with sound engineering practice.
physical damage. (E) [Reserved]
(ii) Heating equipment installed in (F) Special engineering consideration
lubrication or service areas, where shall be required if the specific gravity
flammable liquids are dispensed, shall of the liquid to be stored exceeds that
be of an approved type for garages, and of water or if the tanks are designed to
shall be installed at least 8 feet above contain flammable or combustible liq-
the floor. uids at a liquid temperature below 0 °F.
(8) There shall be no smoking or open (ii) Fabrication. (A) [Reserved]
flames in the areas used for fueling, (B) Metal tanks shall be welded, riv-
servicing fuel systems for internal eted, and caulked, brazed, or bolted, or
combustion engines, receiving or dis- constructed by use of a combination of
pensing of flammable or combustible these methods. Filler metal used in
liquids. brazing shall be nonferrous metal or an
(9) Conspicuous and legible signs pro- alloy having a melting point above 1000
hibiting smoking shall be posted. °F. and below that of the metal joined.
(10) The motors of all equipment (iii) Atmospheric tanks. (A) Atmos-
being fueled shall be shut off during pheric tanks shall be built in accord-
the fueling operation. ance with acceptable good standards of
design. Atmospheric tanks may be
(11) Each service or fueling area shall
built in accordance with:
be provided with at least one fire extin-
(1) Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc.,
guisher having a rating of not less than
Subjects No. 142, Standard for Steel
20–B:C located so that an extinguisher
Aboveground Tanks for Flammable and
will be within 75 feet of each pump, dis-
Combustible Liquids, 1968; No. 58,
penser, underground fill pipe opening,
Standard for Steel Underground Tanks
and lubrication or service area.
for Flammable and Combustible Liq-
(h) Scope. This section applies to the
uids, Fifth Edition, December 1961; or
handling, storage, and use of flam-
No. 80, Standard for Steel Inside Tanks
mable and combustible liquids with a
for Oil-Burner Fuel, September 1963.
flashpoint below 200 °F (93.33 °C). This
(2) American Petroleum Institute
section does not apply to:
Standards No. 12A, Specification for
(1) Bulk transportation of flammable Oil Storage Tanks with Riveted Shells,
and combustible liquids; and Seventh Edition, September 1951, or
(2) Storage, handling, and use of fuel No. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil
oil tanks and containers connected Storage, Third Edition, 1966.
with oil burning equipment. (3) American Petroleum Institute
(i) Tank storage—(1) Design and con- Standards No. 12B, Specification for
struction of tanks—(i) Materials. (A) Bolted Production Tanks, Eleventh
Tanks shall be built of steel except as Edition, May 1958, and Supplement 1,
provided in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) (B) March 1962; No. 12D, Specification for
through (E) of this section. Large Welded Production Tanks, Sev-
(B) Tanks may be built of materials enth Edition, August 1957; or No. 12F,
other than steel for installation under- Specification for Small Welded Produc-
ground or if required by the properties tion Tanks, Fifth Edition, March 1961.
of the liquid stored. Tanks located Tanks built in accordance with these
above ground or inside buildings shall standards shall be used only as produc-
be of noncombustible construction. tion tanks for storage of crude petro-
(C) Tanks built of materials other leum in oil-producing areas.
than steel shall be designed to speci- (B) Tanks designed for underground
fications embodying principles recog- service not exceeding 2,500 gallons
nized as good engineering design for (9,462.5 L) capacity may be used above-
the material used. ground.
201
(C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure (ii) Spacing (shell-to-shell) between

vessels may be used as atmospheric aboveground tanks. (A) The distance be-
tanks. tween any two flammable or combus-
(D) Atmospheric tanks shall not be tible liquid storage tanks shall not be
used for the storage of a flammable or less than 3 feet (0.912 m).
combustible liquid at a temperature at (B) Except as provided in paragraph
or above its boiling point. (i)(2)(ii)(C) of this section, the distance
(iv) Low pressure tanks. (A) The nor- between any two adjacent tanks shall
mal operating pressure of the tank not be less than one-sixth the sum of
shall not exceed the design pressure of their diameters. When the diameter of
the tank. one tank is less than one-half the di-
(B) Low-pressure tanks shall be built ameter of the adjacent tank, the dis-
in accordance with acceptable stand- tance between the two tanks shall not
ards of design. Low-pressure tanks may be less than one-half the diameter of
be built in accordance with: the smaller tank.
(1) American Petroleum Institute (C) Where crude petroleum in con-
Standard No. 620. Recommended Rules junction with production facilities are
for the Design and Construction of located in noncongested areas and have
Large, Welded, Low-Pressure Storage capacities not exceeding 126,000 gallons
Tanks, Third Edition, 1966. (3,000 barrels), the distance between
(2) The principles of the Code for such tanks shall not be less than 3 feet
Unfired Pressure Vessels, Section VIII (0.912 m).
of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Ves- (D) Where unstable flammable or
sels Code, 1968. combustible liquids are stored, the dis-
(C) Atmospheric tanks built accord- tance between such tanks shall not be
ing to Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., less than one-half the sum of their di-
requirements in paragraph (i)(1)(iii)(A) ameters.
of this section and shall be limited to (E) When tanks are compacted in
2.5 p.s.i.g. under emergency venting three or more rows or in an irregular
conditions. pattern, greater spacing or other
means shall be provided so that inside
This paragraph may be used for oper- tanks are accessible for firefighting
ating pressures not exceeding 1 p.s.i.g. purposes.
(D) Pressure vessels may be used as (F) The minimum separation between
low-pressure tanks. a liquefied petroleum gas container
(v) Pressure vessels. (A) The normal and a flammable or combustible liquid
operating pressure of the vessel shall storage tank shall be 20 feet (6.08 m),
not exceed the design pressure of the except in the case of flammable or
vessel. combustible liquid tanks operating at
(B) Pressure vessels shall be built in pressures exceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. or
accordance with the Code for Unfired equipped with emergency venting
Pressure Vessels, Section VIII of the which will permit pressures to exceed
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 2.5 p.s.i.g. in which case the provisions
1968. of paragraphs (i)(2)(ii) (A) and (B) of
(vi) Provisions for internal corrosion. this section shall apply. Suitable
When tanks are not designed in accord- means shall be taken to prevent the ac-
ance with the American Petroleum In- cumulation of flammable or combus-
stitute, American Society of Mechan- tible liquids under adjacent liquefied
ical Engineers, or the Underwriters’ petroleum gas containers such as by di-
Laboratories, Inc.’s, standards, or if version curbs or grading. When flam-
corrosion is anticipated beyond that mable or combustible liquid storage
provided for in the design formulas tanks are within a diked area, the liq-
used, additional metal thickness or uefied petroleum gas containers shall
suitable protective coatings or linings be outside the diked area and at least
shall be provided to compensate for the 10 feet (3.04 m) away from the center-
corrosion loss expected during the de- line of the wall of the diked area. The
sign life of the tank. foregoing provisions shall not apply
(2) Installation of outside aboveground when liquefied petroleum gas con-
tanks. (i) [Reserved] tainers of 125 gallons (473.125 L) or less
202
capacity are installed adjacent to fuel shall be normally closed except when
oil supply tanks of 550 gallons (2,081.75 venting under pressure or vacuum con-
L) or less capacity. ditions, or with approved flame arrest-
(iii) [Reserved] ers.
(iv) Normal venting for aboveground Exemption: Tanks of 3,000 bbls. (84 m3)
tanks. (A) Atmospheric storage tanks capacity or less containing crude pe-
shall be adequately vented to prevent troleum in crude-producing areas; and,
the development of vacuum or pressure outside aboveground atmospheric
sufficient to distort the roof of a cone tanks under 1,000 gallons (3,785 L) ca-
roof tank or exceeding the design pres- pacity containing other than Class IA
sure in the case of other atmospheric flammable liquids may have open
tanks, as a result of filling or vents. (See paragraph (i)(2)(vi)(B) of
emptying, and atmospheric tempera- this section.)
ture changes. (G) Flame arresters or venting de-
(B) Normal vents shall be sized either vices required in paragraph (i)(2)(iv)(F)
in accordance with: (1) The American of this section may be omitted for
Petroleum Institute Standard 2000 Class IB and IC liquids where condi-
(1968), Venting Atmospheric and Low- tions are such that their use may, in
Pressure Storage Tanks; or (2) other case of obstruction, result in tank
accepted standard; or (3) shall be at damage.
least as large as the filling or with- (v) Emergency relief venting for fire ex-
drawal connection, whichever is larger posure for aboveground tanks. (A) Every
but in no case less than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 aboveground storage tank shall have
cm) nominal inside diameter. some form of construction or device
(C) Low-pressure tanks and pressure that will relieve excessive internal
vessels shall be adequately vented to pressure caused by exposure fires.
prevent development of pressure or (B) In a vertical tank the construc-
vacuum, as a result of filling or tion referred to in paragraph
emptying and atmospheric tempera- (i)(2)(v)(A) of this section may take the
ture changes, from exceeding the de- form of a floating roof, lifter roof, a
sign pressure of the tank or vessel. weak roof-to-shell seam, or other ap-
Protection shall also be provided to proved pressure relieving construction.
prevent overpressure from any pump The weak roof-to-shell seam shall be
discharging into the tank or vessel constructed to fail preferential to any
when the pump discharge pressure can other seam.
exceed the design pressure of the tank (C) Where entire dependence for
or vessel. emergency relief is placed upon pres-
(D) If any tank or pressure vessel has sure relieving devices, the total vent-
more than one fill or withdrawal con- ing capacity of both normal and emer-
nection and simultaneous filling or gency vents shall be enough to prevent
withdrawal can be made, the vent size rupture of the shell or bottom of the
shall be based on the maximum antici- tank if vertical, or of the shell or heads
pated simultaneous flow. if horizontal. If unstable liquids are
(E) Unless the vent is designed to stored, the effects of heat or gas result-
limit the internal pressure 2.5 p.s.i. or ing from polymerization, decomposi-
less, the outlet of vents and vent drains tion, condensation, or self-reactivity
shall be arranged to discharge in such shall be taken into account. The total
a manner as to prevent localized over- capacity of both normal and emergency
heating of any part of the tank in the venting devices shall be not less than
event vapors from such vents are ig- that derived from Table F–10 except as
nited. provided in paragraph (i)(2)(v) (E) or
(F) Tanks and pressure vessels stor- (F) of this section. Such device may be
ing Class IA liquids shall be equipped a self-closing manhole cover, or one
with venting devices which shall be using long bolts that permit the cover
normally closed except when venting to lift under internal pressure, or an
to pressure or vacuum conditions. additional or larger relief valve or

Tanks and pressure vessels storing valves. The wetted area of the tank
Class IB and IC liquids shall be shall be calculated on the basis of 55
equipped with venting devices which percent of the total exposed area of a
203
sphere or spheroid, 75 percent of the grade of the exposed shell area of a

total exposed area of a horizontal tank vertical tank.
and the first 30 feet (9.12 m) above
TABLE F–10—WETTED AREA VERSUS CUBIC FEET (METERS) FREE AIR PER HOUR
[14.7 psia and 60 °F. (15.55 °C)]
Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H) Square feet (m2) CFH (m3H)
20 (1.84) 21,100 (590.8) 200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672)
30 (2.76) 31,600 (884.8) 250 (23) 239,000 (6,692) 1,200 (110.4) 557,000 (15,596)
40 (3.68) 42,100 (1,178.8) 300 (27.6) 265,000 (7,420) 1,400 (128.8) 587,000 (16,436)
50 (4.6) 52,700 (1,475.6) 350 (32.2) 288,000 (8,064) 1,600 (147.2) 614,000 (17,192)
60 (5.52) 63,200 (1,769.6) 400 (36.8) 312,000 (8,736) 1,800 (165.6) 639,000 (17,892)
70 (6.44) 73,700 (2,063.6) 500 (46) 354,000 (9,912) 2,000 (180.4) 662,000 (18,536)
80 (7.36) 84,200 (2,357.6) 600 (55.2) 392,000 (10,976) 2,400 (220.8) 704,000 (19,712)
90 (8.28) 94,800 (2,654.4) 700 (64.4) 428,000 (11,984) 2,800 (257.6) 742,000 (20,776)
100 (9.2) 105,000 (2,940) 800 (73.6) 462,000 (12,936) and
120 (11.04) 126,000 (3,528) 900 (82.8) 493,000 (13,804) over
140 (12.88) 147,000 (4,116) 1,000 (90.2) 524,000 (14,672)
160 (14.72) 168,000 (4,704)
180 (16.56) 190,000 (5,320)
200 (18.4) 211,000 (5,908)
(D) For tanks and storage vessels de- 0.5 for drainage in accordance with para-
signed for pressure over 1 p.s.i.g., the graph (i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section for tanks
total rate of venting shall be deter- over 200 square feet (18.4 m2) of wetted area.
0.3 for approved water spray.
mined in accordance with Table F–10,
0.3 for approved insulation.
except that when the exposed wetted
0.15 for approved water spray with approved
area of the surface is greater than 2,800 insulation.
square feet (257.6 m2), the total rate of
venting shall be calculated by the fol- (G) The outlet of all vents and vent
lowing formula: drains on tanks equipped with emer-
gency venting to permit pressures ex-
CFH = 1,107A0.82 ceeding 2.5 p.s.i.g. shall be arranged to
Where: discharge in such a way as to prevent
CFH = Venting requirement, in cubic feet localized overheating of any part of the
(meters) of free air per hour. tank, in the event vapors from such
A = Exposed wetted surface, in square feet vents are ignited.
(m2). (H) Each commercial tank venting
NOTE: The foregoing formula is based on
device shall have stamped on it the
Q=21,000A0.82. opening pressure, the pressure at which
the valve reaches the full open posi-
(E) The total emergency relief vent- tion, and the flow capacity at the lat-
ing capacity for any specific stable liq- ter pressure, expressed in cubic feet
uid may be determined by the fol- (meters) per hour of air at 60 °F. (15.55
lowing formula: °C) and at a pressure of 14.7 p.s.i.a.
V = 1337÷L√ M (I) The flow capacity of tank venting
devices 12 inches (30.48 cm) and smaller
V = Cubic feet (meters) of free air per hour in nominal pipe size shall be deter-
from Table F–10. mined by actual test of each type and
L = Latent heat of vaporization of specific
size of vent. These flow tests may be
liquid in B.t.u. per pound.
conducted by the manufacturer if cer-
M = Molecular weight of specific liquids.
tified by a qualified impartial observer,
(F) The required airflow rate of para- or may be conducted by an outside
graph (i)(2)(v) (C) or (E) of this section agency. The flow capacity of tank
may be multiplied by the appropriate venting devices larger than 12 inches
factor listed in the following schedule (30.48 cm) nominal pipe size, including
when protection is provided as indi- manhole covers with long bolts or
cated. Only one factor may be used for equivalent, may be calculated provided
any one tank. that the opening pressure is actually
204
measured, the rating pressure and cor- (C) Diked areas. Where protection of
responding free orifice area are stated, adjoining property or waterways is ac-
the word ‘‘calculated’’ appears on the complished by retaining the liquid
nameplate, and the computation is around the tank by means of a dike,
based on a flow coefficient of 0.5 ap- the volume of the diked area shall
plied to the rated orifice area. comply with the following require-
(vi) Vent piping for aboveground tanks. ments:
(A) Vent piping shall be constructed in (1) Except as provided in paragraph
accordance with paragraph (c) of this (i)(2)(vii)(C)(2) of this section, the volu-
section. metric capacity of the diked area shall
(B) Where vent pipe outlets for tanks not be less than the greatest amount of
storing Class I liquids are adjacent to liquid that can be released from the
buildings or public ways, they shall be largest tank within the diked area, as-
located so that the vapors are released suming a full tank. The capacity of the
at a safe point outside of buildings and diked area enclosing more than one
not less than 12 feet (3.648 m) above the tank shall be calculated by deducting
adjacent ground level. In order to aid the volume of the tanks other than the
their dispersion, vapors shall be dis- largest tank below the height of the
charged upward or horizontally away dike.
from closely adjacent walls. Vent out- (2) For a tank or group of tanks with
lets shall be located so that flammable fixed roofs containing crude petroleum
vapors will not be trapped by eaves or with boilover characteristics, the volu-
other obstructions and shall be at least metric capacity of the diked area shall
5 feet (1.52 m) from building openings. be not less than the capacity of the
(C) When tank vent piping is largest tank served by the enclosure,
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as assuming a full tank. The capacity of
to discharge, within the pressure limi- the diked enclosure shall be calculated
tations of the system, the vapors they by deducting the volume below the
may be required to handle when height of the dike of all tanks within
manifolded tanks are subject to the the enclosure.
same fire exposure. (3) Walls of the diked area shall be of
(vii) Drainage, dikes, and walls for earth, steel, concrete or solid masonry
aboveground tanks—(A) Drainage and designed to be liquidtight and to with-
diked areas. The area surrounding a stand a full hydrostatic head. Earthen
tank or a group of tanks shall be pro- walls 3 feet (0.912 m) or more in height
vided with drainage as in paragraph shall have a flat section at the top not
(i)(2)(vii)(B) of this section, or shall be less than 2 feet (0.608 m) wide. The
diked as provided in (i)(2)(vii)(C) of this slope of an earthen wall shall be con-
section, to prevent accidental dis- sistent with the angle of repose of the
charge of liquid from endangering ad- material of which the wall is con-
joining property or reaching water- structed.
ways. (4) The walls of the diked area shall
(B) Drainage. Where protection of ad- be restricted to an average height of 6
joining property or waterways is by feet (1.824 m) above interior grade.
means of a natural or manmade drain- (5) [Reserved]
age system, such systems shall comply (6) No loose combustible material,
with the following: empty or full drum or barrel, shall be
(1) [Reserved] permitted within the diked area.
(2) The drainage system shall termi- (viii) Tank openings other than vents
nate in vacant land or other area or in for aboveground tanks.
an impounding basin having a capacity (A)–(C) [Reserved]
not smaller than that of the largest (D) Openings for gaging shall be pro-
tank served. This termination area and vided with a vaportight cap or cover.
the route of the drainage system shall (E) For Class IB and Class IC liquids
be so located that, if the flammable or other than crude oils, gasolines, and
combustible liquids in the drainage asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de-
system are ignited, the fire will not se- signed and installed as to minimize the
riously expose tanks or adjoining prop- possibility of generating static elec-
erty. tricity. A fill pipe entering the top of a
205
tank shall terminate within 6 inches shall be protected against damage from
(15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank vehicles passing over them by at least
and shall be installed to avoid exces- 3 feet (0.912 m) of earth cover, or 18
sive vibration. inches (45.72 cm) of well-tamped earth,
(F) Filling and emptying connections plus 6 inches (15.24 cm) of reinforced
which are made and broken shall be lo- concrete or 8 inches (20.32 cm) of as-
cated outside of buildings at a location phaltic concrete. When asphaltic or re-
free from any source of ignition and inforced concrete paving is used as part
not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from of the protection, it shall extend at
any building opening. Such connection least 1 foot (0.304 m) horizontally be-
shall be closed and liquidtight when yond the outline of the tank in all di-
not in use. The connection shall be rections.
properly identified. (iii) Corrosion protection. Corrosion
(3) Installation of underground tanks— protection for the tank and its piping
(i) Location. Excavation for under- shall be provided by one or more of the
ground storage tanks shall be made following methods:
with due care to avoid undermining of (A) Use of protective coatings or
foundations of existing structures. Un- wrappings;
derground tanks or tanks under build- (B) Cathodic protection; or,
ings shall be so located with respect to (C) Corrosion resistant materials of
existing building foundations and sup- construction.
ports that the loads carried by the lat- (iv) Vents. (A) Location and arrange-
ter cannot be transmitted to the tank. ment of vents for Class I liquids. Vent
The distance from any part of a tank pipes from tanks storing Class I liquids
storing Class I liquids to the nearest shall be so located that the discharge
wall of any basement or pit shall be point is outside of buildings, higher
not less than 1 foot (0.304 m), and to than the fill pipe opening, and not less
any property line that may be built than 12 feet (3.648 m) above the adja-
upon, not less than 3 feet (0.912 m). The cent ground level. Vent pipes shall dis-
distance from any part of a tank stor- charge only upward in order to disperse
ing Class II or Class III liquids to the vapors. Vent pipes 2 inches (5.08 cm) or
nearest wall of any basement, pit or less in nominal inside diameter shall
property line shall be not less than 1 not be obstructed by devices that will
foot (0.304 m). cause excessive back pressure. Vent
(ii) Depth and cover. Underground pipe outlets shall be so located that
tanks shall be set on firm foundations flammable vapors will not enter build-
and surrounded with at least 6 inches ing openings, or be trapped under eaves
(15.24 cm) of noncorrosive, inert mate- or other obstructions. If the vent pipe
rials such as clean sand, earth, or grav- is less than 10 feet (3.04 m) in length, or
el well tamped in place. The tank shall greater than 2 inches (5.08 cm) in nomi-
be placed in the hole with care since nal inside diameter, the outlet shall be
dropping or rolling the tank into the provided with a vacuum and pressure
hole can break a weld, puncture or relief device or there shall be an ap-
damage the tank, or scrape off the pro- proved flame arrester located in the
tective coating of coated tanks. Tanks vent line at the outlet or within the
shall be covered with a minimum of 2 approved distance from the outlet.
feet (0.608 m) of earth, or shall be cov- (B) Size of vents. Each tank shall be
ered with not less than 1 foot (0.304 m) vented through piping adequate in size
of earth, on top of which shall be to prevent blow-back of vapor or liquid
placed a slab of reinforced concrete not at the fill opening while the tank is
less than 4 inches (10.16 cm) thick. being filled. Vent pipes shall be not less
When underground tanks are, or are than 11⁄4 inch (3.175 cm) nominal inside
likely to be, subject to traffic, they diameter.
TABLE F–11—VENT LINE DIAMETERS
Pipe length 1
Maximum flow GPM (L)
50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m)
Inches (cm) Inches (cm) Inches (cm)
206
TABLE F–11—VENT LINE DIAMETERS—Continued

Pipe length 1
Maximum flow GPM (L)
50 feet (15.2 m) 100 feet (30.4 m) 200 feet (60.8 m)
100 (378.5) ...................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175)

200 (757) ......................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175)
300 (1,135.5) ................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81)
400 (1,514) ...................................................................................... 11⁄4 (3.175) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08)
500 (1,892.5) ................................................................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08)
600 (2,271) ...................................................................................... 11⁄2 (3.81) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
700 (2,649.5) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08)
800 (3,028) ...................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
900 (3,406.5) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
1,000 (3,785) ................................................................................... 2 (5.08) 2 (5.08) 3 (7.62)
1 Vent lines of 50 ft. (15.2 m), 100 ft. (30.4 m), and 200 ft. (60.8 m) of pipe plus 7 ells.
(C) Location and arrangement of signed and installed as to minimize the

vents for Class II or Class III liquids. possibility of generating static elec-
Vent pipes from tanks storing Class II tricity by terminating within 6 inches
or Class III flammable liquids shall ter- (15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank.
minate outside of the building and (E) Filling and emptying connections
higher than the fill pipe opening. Vent which are made and broken shall be lo-
outlets shall be above normal snow cated outside of buildings at a location
level. They may be fitted with return free from any source of ignition and
bends, coarse screens or other devices not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away from
to minimize ingress of foreign mate- any building opening. Such connection
rial. shall be closed and liquidtight when
(D) Vent piping shall be constructed not in use. The connection shall be
in accordance with paragraph (3)(iv)(C) properly identified.
of this section. Vent pipes shall be so (4) Installation of tanks inside of build-
laid as to drain toward the tank with- ings—(i) Location. Tanks shall not be
out sags or traps in which liquid can permitted inside of buildings except as
collect. They shall be located so that provided in paragraphs (e), (g), (h), or
they will not be subjected to physical (i) of this section.
damage. The tank end of the vent pipe (ii) Vents. Vents for tanks inside of
shall enter the tank through the top.
buildings shall be as provided in para-
(E) When tank vent piping is
graphs (i)(2) (iv), (v), (vi)(B), and (3)(iv)
manifolded, pipe sizes shall be such as
of this section, except that emergency
to discharge, within the pressure limi-
venting by the use of weak roof seams
tations of the system, the vapors they
on tanks shall not be permitted. Vents
may be required to handle when
shall discharge vapors outside the
manifolded tanks are filled simulta-
buildings.
neously.
(v) Tank openings other than vents. (A) (iii) Vent piping. Vent piping shall be
Connections for all tank openings shall constructed in accordance with para-
be vapor or liquid tight. graph (c) of this section.
(B) Openings for manual gaging, if (iv) Tank openings other than vents.
independent of the fill pipe, shall be (A) Connections for all tank openings
provided with a liquid-tight cap or shall be vapor or liquidtight. Vents are
cover. If inside a building, each such covered in paragraph (i)(4)(ii) of this
opening shall be protected against liq- section.
uid overflow and possible vapor release (B) Each connection to a tank inside
by means of a spring loaded check of buildings through which liquid can
valve or other approved device. normally flow shall be provided with
(C) Fill and discharge lines shall an internal or an external valve lo-
enter tanks only through the top. Fill cated as close as practical to the shell
lines shall be sloped toward the tank. of the tank. Such valves, when exter-
(D) For Class IB and Class IC liquids nal, and their connections to the tank
other than crude oils, gasolines, and shall be of steel except when the chem-
asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de- ical characteristics of the liquid stored
207
are incompatible with steel. When ma- cribbing) laid horizontally may be used
terials other than steel are necessary, for outside aboveground tanks if not
they shall be suitable for the pressures, more than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at
structural stresses, and temperatures their lowest point.
involved, including fire exposures. (ii) Fire resistance. Steel supports or
(C) Flammable or combustible liquid exposed piling shall be protected by
tanks located inside of buildings, ex- materials having a fire resistance rat-
cept in one-story buildings designed ing of not less than 2 hours, except that
and protected for flammable or com- steel saddles need not be protected if
bustible liquid storage, shall be pro- less than 12 inches (30.48 cm) high at
vided with an automatic-closing heat- their lowest point. Water spray protec-
actuated valve on each withdrawal con- tion or its equivalent may be used in
nection below the liquid level, except lieu of fire-resistive materials to pro-
for connections used for emergency dis- tect supports.
posal, to prevent continued flow in the (iii) Spheres. The design of the sup-
event of fire in the vicinity of the tank. porting structure for tanks such as
This function may be incorporated in spheres shall receive special engineer-
the valve required in paragraph ing consideration.
(i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section, and if a sep- (iv) Load distribution. Every tank
arate valve, shall be located adjacent shall be so supported as to prevent the
to the valve required in paragraph excessive concentration of loads on the
(i)(4)(iv)(B) of this section. supporting portion of the shell.
(D) Openings for manual gaging, if (v) Foundations. Tanks shall rest on
independent of the fill pipe (see para- the ground or on foundations made of
graph (i)(4)(iv)(F) of this section), shall concrete, masonry, piling, or steel.
be provided with a vaportight cap or Tank foundations shall be designed to
cover. Each such opening shall be pro- minimize the possibility of uneven set-
tected against liquid overflow and pos- tling of the tank and to minimize cor-
sible vapor release by means of a spring rosion in any part of the tank resting
loaded check valve or other approved on the foundation.
device. (vi) Flood areas. Where a tank is lo-
(E) For Class IB and Class IC liquids cated in an area that may be subjected
other than crude oils, gasolines, and to flooding, the applicable precautions
asphalts, the fill pipe shall be so de- outlined in this subdivision shall be ob-
signed and installed as to minimize the served.
possibility of generating static elec- (A) No aboveground vertical storage
tricity by terminating within 6 inches tank containing a flammable or com-
(15.24 cm) of the bottom of the tank. bustible liquid shall be located so that
(F) The fill pipe inside of the tank the allowable liquid level within the
shall be installed to avoid excessive vi- tank is below the established max-
bration of the pipe. imum flood stage, unless the tank is
(G) The inlet of the fill pipe shall be provided with a guiding structure such
located outside of buildings at a loca- as described in paragraphs (i)(5)(vi)
tion free from any source of ignition (M), (N), and (O) of this section.
and not less than 5 feet (1.52 m) away (B) Independent water supply facili-
from any building opening. The inlet of ties shall be provided at locations
the fill pipe shall be closed and where there is no ample and dependable
liquidtight when not in use. The fill public water supply available for load-
connection shall be properly identified. ing partially empty tanks with water.
(H) Tanks inside buildings shall be (C) In addition to the preceding re-
equipped with a device, or other means quirements, each tank so located that
shall be provided, to prevent overflow more than 70 percent, but less than 100
into the building. percent, of its allowable liquid storage
(5) Supports, foundations, and anchor- capacity will be submerged at the es-
age for all tank locations—(i) General. tablished maximum flood stage, shall
Tank supports shall be installed on be safeguarded by one of the following

firm foundations. Tank supports shall methods: Tank shall be raised, or its
be of concrete, masonry, or protected height shall be increased, until its top
steel. Single wood timber supports (not extends above the maximum flood
208
stage a distance equivalent to 30 per- being stored. Cast iron shall not be per-
cent or more of its allowable liquid mitted.
storage capacity: Provided, however, (I) At locations where an independent
That the submerged part of the tank water supply is required, it shall be en-
shall not exceed two and one-half times tirely independent of public power and
the diameter. Or, as an alternative to water supply. Independent source of
the foregoing, adequate noncombus- water shall be available when flood wa-
tible structural guides, designed to per- ters reach a level not less than 10 feet
mit the tank to float vertically with- (3.04 m) below the bottom of the lowest
out loss of product, shall be provided. tank on a property.
(D) Each horizontal tank so located (J) The self-contained power and
that more than 70 percent of its stor- pumping unit shall be so located or so
age capacity will be submerged at the designed that pumping into tanks may
established flood stage, shall be an- be carried on continuously throughout
chored, attached to a foundation of the rise in flood waters from a level 10
concrete or of steel and concrete, of feet (3.04 m) below the lowest tank to
sufficient weight to provide adequate the level of the potential flood stage.
load for the tank when filled with flam- (K) Capacity of the pumping unit
mable or combustible liquid and sub- shall be such that the rate of rise of
merged by flood waters to the estab- water in all tanks shall be equivalent
lished flood stage, or adequately se- to the established potential average
cured by other means. rate of rise of flood waters at any
(E) [Reserved] stage.
(F) At locations where there is no (L) Each independent pumping unit
ample and dependable water supply, or shall be tested periodically to insure
where filling of underground tanks that it is in satisfactory operating con-
with liquids is impracticable because of dition.
the character of their contents, their (M) Structural guides for holding
use, or for other reasons, each tank floating tanks above their foundations
shall be safeguarded against movement shall be so designed that there will be
when empty and submerged by high no resistance to the free rise of a tank,
ground water or flood waters by an- and shall be constructed of noncombus-
choring, weighting with concrete or tible material.
other approved solid loading material, (N) The strength of the structure
or securing by other means. Each such shall be adequate to resist lateral
tank shall be so constructed and in- movement of a tank subject to a hori-
stalled that it will safely resist exter- zontal force in any direction equivalent
nal pressures due to high ground water to not less than 25 pounds per square
or flood waters. foot (1.05 kg m2) acting on the pro-
(G) At locations where there is an jected vertical cross-sectional area of
ample and dependable water supply the tank.
available, underground tanks con- (O) Where tanks are situated on ex-
taining flammable or combustible liq- posed points or bends in a shoreline
uids, so installed that more than 70 where swift currents in flood waters
percent of their storage capacity will will be present, the structures shall be
be submerged at the maximum flood designed to withstand a unit force of
stage, shall be so anchored, weighted, not less than 50 pounds per square foot
or secured by other means, as to pre- (2.1 kg m2).
vent movement of such tanks when (P) The filling of a tank to be pro-
filled with flammable or combustible tected by water loading shall be start-
liquids, and submerged by flood waters ed as soon as flood waters reach a dan-
to the established flood stage. gerous flood stage. The rate of filling
(H) Pipe connections below the allow- shall be at least equal to the rate of
able liquid level in a tank shall be pro- rise of the floodwaters (or the estab-
vided with valves or cocks located as lished average potential rate of rise).
closely as practicable to the tank shell. (Q) Sufficient fuel to operate the
Such valves and their connections to water pumps shall be available at all
tanks shall be of steel or other mate- times to insure adequate power to fill
rial suitable for use with the liquid all tankage with water.
209
(R) All valves on connecting pipe- (7) Testing—(i) General. All tanks,
lines shall be closed and locked in whether shop built or field erected,
closed position when water loading has shall be strength tested before they are
been completed. placed in service in accordance with
(S) Where structural guides are pro- the applicable paragraphs of the code
vided for the protection of floating under which they were built. The
tanks, all rigid connections between American Society of Mechanical Engi-
tanks and pipelines shall be discon- neers (ASME) code stamp, American
nected and blanked off or blinded be- Petroleum Institute (API) monogram,
fore the floodwaters reach the bottom or the label of the Underwriters’ Lab-
of the tank, unless control valves and oratories, Inc., on a tank shall be evi-
their connections to the tank are of a dence of compliance with this strength
type designed to prevent breakage be- test. Tanks not marked in accordance
tween the valve and the tank shell. with the above codes shall be strength
(T) All valves attached to tanks tested before they are placed in service
other than those used in connection in accordance with good engineering
with water loading operations shall be principles and reference shall be made
closed and locked. to the sections on testing in the codes
(U) If a tank is equipped with a swing listed in paragraphs (i)(1) (iii)(A),
line, the swing pipe shall be raised to (iv)(B), or (v)(B) of this section.
and secured at its highest position. (ii) Strength. When the vertical
(V) Inspections. The Assistant Sec- length of the fill and vent pipes is such
retary or his designated representative that when filled with liquid the static
shall make periodic inspections of all head imposed upon the bottom of the
plants where the storage of flammable tank exceeds 10 pounds per square inch
or combustible liquids is such as to re- (68.94 kPa), the tank and related piping
quire compliance with the foregoing re- shall be tested hydrostatically to a
quirements, in order to assure the fol- pressure equal to the static head thus
lowing: imposed.
(1) That all flammable or combus-
(iii) Tightness. In addition to the
tible liquid storage tanks are in com-
strength test called for in paragraphs
pliance with these requirements and so
(i)(7) (i) and (ii) of this section, all
maintained.
(2) That detailed printed instructions tanks and connections shall be tested
of what to do in flood emergencies are for tightness. Except for underground
properly posted. tanks, this tightness test shall be made
(3) That station operators and other at operating pressure with air, inert
employees depended upon to carry out gas, or water prior to placing the tank
such instructions are thoroughly in- in service. In the case of field-erected
formed as to the location and operation tanks the strength test may be consid-
of such valves and other equipment ered to be the test for tank tightness.
necessary to effect these requirements. Underground tanks and piping, before
(vii) Earthquake areas. In areas sub- being covered, enclosed, or placed in
ject to earthquakes, the tank supports use, shall be tested for tightness
and connections shall be designed to hydrostatically, or with air pressure at
resist damage as a result of such not less than 3 pounds per square inch
shocks. (20.68 kPa) and not more than 5 pounds
(6) Sources of ignition. In locations per square inch (34.47 kPa).
where flammable vapors may be (iv) Repairs. All leaks or deforma-
present, precautions shall be taken to tions shall be corrected in an accept-
prevent ignition by eliminating or con- able manner before the tank is placed
trolling sources of ignition. Sources of in service. Mechanical caulking is not
ignition may include open flames, permitted for correcting leaks in weld-
lightning, smoking, cutting and welded tanks except pinhole leaks in the
ing, hot surfaces, frictional heat, roof.
sparks (static, electrical, and mechan- (v) Derated operations. Tanks to be op-
ical), spontaneous ignition, chemical erated at pressures below their design
and physical-chemical reactions, and pressure may be tested by the applica-
radiant heat. ble provisions of paragraphs (i)(7) (i) or
210
(ii) of this section, based upon the pres- iron, are necessary, special consider-
sure developed under full emergency ation shall be given to their behavior
venting of the tank. on fire exposure. If such materials are
(j) Piping, valves, and fittings—(1) Gen- used in above ground piping systems or
eral—(i) Design. The design (including inside buildings, they shall be suitably
selection of materials) fabrication, as- protected against fire exposure or so
sembly, test, and inspection of piping located that any spill resulting from
systems containing flammable or com- the failure of these materials could not
bustible liquids shall be suitable for unduly expose persons, important
the expected working pressures and buildings or structures or can be read-
structural stresses. Conformity with ily controlled by remote valves.
the applicable provisions of Pressure (3) Pipe joints. Joints shall be made
Piping, ANSI B31 series and the provi- liquid tight. Welded or screwed joints
sions of this paragraph, shall be consid- or approved connectors shall be used.
ered prima facie evidence of compli- Threaded joints and connections shall
ance with the foregoing provisions. be made up tight with a suitable lubri-
(ii) Exceptions. This paragraph does cant or piping compound. Pipe joints
not apply to any of the following: dependent upon the friction character-
(A) Tubing or casing on any oil or gas istics of combustible materials for me-
wells and any piping connected directly chanical continuity of piping shall not
thereto. be used inside buildings. They may be
(B) Motor vehicle, aircraft, boat, or used outside of buildings above or
portable or stationary engines. below ground. If used above ground, the
(C) Piping within the scope of any ap- piping shall either be secured to pre-
plicable boiler and pressures vessel vent disengagement at the fitting or
code. the piping system shall be so designed
(iii) Definitions. As used in this para- that any spill resulting from such dis-
graph, piping systems consist of pipe, engagement could not unduly expose
tubing, flanges, bolting, gaskets, persons, important buildings or struc-
valves, fittings, the pressure con-
tures, and could be readily controlled
taining parts of other components such
by remote valves.
as expansion joints and strainers, and
(4) Supports. Piping systems shall be
devices which serve such purposes as
mixing, separating, snubbing, distrib- substantially supported and protected
uting, metering, or controlling flow. against physical damage and excessive
(2) Materials for piping, valves, and fit- stresses arising from settlement, vibra-
tings—(i) Required materials. Materials tion, expansion, or contraction.
for piping, valves, or fittings shall be (5) Protection against corrosion. All
steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron, piping for flammable or combustible
except as provided in paragraphs (j)(2) liquids, both aboveground and under-
(ii), (iii) and (iv) of this section. ground, where subject to external cor-
(ii) Exceptions. Materials other than rosion, shall be painted or otherwise
steel, nodular iron, or malleable iron protected.
may be used underground, or if re- (6) Valves. Piping systems shall con-
quired by the properties of the flam- tain a sufficient number of valves to
mable or combustible liquid handled. operate the system properly and to
Material other than steel, nodular iron, protect the plant. Piping systems in
or malleable iron shall be designed to connection with pumps shall contain a
specifications embodying principles sufficient number of valves to control
recognized as good engineering prac- properly the flow of liquid in normal
tices for the material used. operation and in the event of physical
(iii) Linings. Piping, valves, and fit- damage. Each connection to pipelines,
tings may have combustible or non- by which equipments such as tankcars
combustible linings. or tank vehicles discharge liquids by
(iv) Low-melting materials. When low- means of pumps into storage tanks,
melting point materials such as alu- shall be provided with a check valve for
minum and brass or materials that automatic protection against backflow
soften on fire exposure such as plastics, if the piping arrangement is such that
or non-ductile materials such as cast backflow from the system is possible.
211
(7) Testing. All piping before being (ii) Where shore location would re-
covered, enclosed, or placed in use quire excessively long supply lines to
shall be hydrostatically tested to 150 dispensers, tanks may be installed on a
percent of the maximum anticipated pier provided that applicable portions
pressure of the system, or pneumati- of paragraph (b) of this section relative
cally tested to 110 percent of the max- to spacing, diking, and piping are com-
imum anticipated pressure of the sys- plied with and the quantity so stored
tem, but not less than 5 pounds per does not exceed 1,100 gallons (4,163.5 L)
square inch gage at the highest point aggregate capacity.
of the system. This test shall be main- (iii) Shore tanks supplying marine
tained for a sufficient time to complete service stations may be located above
visual inspection of all joints and con- ground, where rock ledges or high
nections, but for at least 10 minutes. water table make underground tanks
(k) Marine service stations—(1) Dis- impractical.
pensing. (i) The dispensing area shall be
(iv) Where tanks are at an elevation
located away from other structures so
which would produce gravity head on
as to provide room for safe ingress and
the dispensing unit, the tank outlet
egress of craft to be fueled. Dispensing
units shall in all cases be at least 20 shall be equipped with a pressure con-
feet (6.08 m) from any activity involv- trol valve positioned adjacent to and
ing fixed sources of ignition. outside the tank block valve specified
(ii) Dispensing shall be by approved in § 1926.152(c)(8) of this section, so ad-
dispensing units with or without inte- justed that liquid cannot flow by grav-
gral pumps and may be located on open ity from the tank in case of piping or
piers, wharves, or floating docks or on hose failure.
shore or on piers of the solid fill type. (3) Piping. (i) Piping between shore
(iii) Dispensing nozzles shall be auto- tanks and dispensing units shall be as
matic-closing without a hold-open described in paragraph (k)(2)(iii) of this
latch. section, except that, where dispensing
(2) Tanks and pumps. (i) Tanks, and is from a floating structure, suitable
pumps not integral with the dispensing lengths of oil-resistant flexible hose
unit, shall be on shore or on a pier of may be employed between the shore
the solid fill type, except as provided in piping and the piping on the floating
paragraphs (k)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this structure as made necessary by change
section. in water level or shoreline.
TABLE F–19—ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREAS—SERVICE STATIONS
Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
Underground tank:
Fill opening ...................................................... 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level, any part of which is
within the Division 1 or 2 classified area.
2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade level within a hori-
zontal radius of 10 feet (3.04 m) from a loose fill connection
and within a horizontal radius of 5 feet (1.52 m) from a tight
fill connection.
Vent—Discharging upward .............................. 1 Within 3 feet (0.912 m) of open end of vent, extending in all
directions.
2 Area between 3 feet (0.912 m) and 5 feet (1.52 m) of open
end of vent, extending in all directions.
Dispenser:
Pits ................................................................... 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level, any part of which is
within the Division 1 or 2 classified area.
Dispenser enclosure ........................................ 1 The area 4 feet (1.216 m) vertically above base within the en-
closure and 18 inches (45.72 cm) horizontally in all direc-
tions.
Outdoor ............................................................ 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade level within 20 feet
(6.08 m) horizontally of any edge of enclosure.
Indoor:
With mechanical ventilation ............................. 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade or floor level within
20 feet (6.08 m) horizontally of any edge of enclosure.
With gravity ventilation .................................... 2 Up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade or floor level within
25 feet (7.6 m) horizontally of any edge of enclosure.
212
TABLE F–19—ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREAS—SERVICE STATIONS—Continued

Class I
Location Group D Extent of classified area
division
Remote pump—Outdoor ................................. 1 Any pit, box or space below grade level if any part is within a
horizontal distance of 10 feet (3.04 m) from any edge of
pump.
2 Within 3 feet (0.912 m) of any edge of pump, extending in all
directions. Also up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above grade
level within 10 feet (3.04 m) horizontally from any edge of
pump.
Remote pump—Indoor .................................... 1 Entire area within any pit.
2 Within 5 feet (1.52 m) of any edge of pump, extending in all
directions. Also up to 3 feet (3.04 m) above floor or grade
level within 25 feet (6.08 m) horizontally from any edge of
pump.
Lubrication or service room ............................. 1 Entire area within any pit.
2 Area up to 18 inches (45.72 cm) above floor or grade level
within entire lubrication room.
Dispenser for Class I liquids ........................... 2 Within 3 feet (0.912 m) of any fill or dispensing point, extend-
ing in all directions.
Special enclosure inside building per 1 Entire enclosure.
§ 1910.106(f)(1)(ii).
Sales, storage and rest rooms ........................ (1 ) If there is any opening to these rooms within the extent of a
Division 1 area, the entire room shall be classified as Divi-
sion 1.
1 Ordinary.
(ii) A readily accessible valve to shut tion identification requirements pub-

off the supply from shore shall be pro- lished in 49 CFR Part 178, Shipping
vided in each pipeline at or near the Container Specifications.
approach to the pier and at the shore (3) Definition. As used in this section,
end of each pipeline adjacent to the Containers—All vessels, such as tanks,
point where flexible hose is attached. cylinders, or drums, used for transpor-
(iii) Piping shall be located so as to tation or storing liquefied petroleum
be protected from physical damage. gases.
(iv) Piping handling Class I liquids (b) Welding on LP-Gas containers.
shall be grounded to control stray cur- Welding is prohibited on containers.
rents. (c) Container valves and container ac-
(4) Definition; as used in this section: cessories. (1) Valves, fittings, and acces-
Marine service station shall mean that sories connected directly to the con-
portion of a property where flammable tainer, including primary shut off
or combustible liquids used as fuels are valves, shall have a rated working pres-
stored and dispensed from fixed equip- sure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. and shall be
ment on shore, piers, wharves, or float- of material and design suitable for LP-
ing docks into the fuel tanks of self- Gas service.
propelled craft, and shall include all fa- (2) Connections to containers, except
cilities used in connection therewith. safety relief connections, liquid level
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, gauging devices, and plugged openings,
1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; shall have shutoff valves located as
58 FR 35162, June 30, 1993; 63 FR 33469, June close to the container as practicable.
18, 1998] (d) Safety devices. (1) Every container
and every vaporizer shall be provided
§ 1926.153 Liquefied petroleum gas with one or more approved safety relief
(LP-Gas). valves or devices. These valves shall be
(a) Approval of equipment and systems. arranged to afford free vent to the
(1) Each system shall have containers, outer air with discharge not less than 5
valves, connectors, manifold valve as- feet horizontally away from any open-
semblies, and regulators of an approved ing into a building which is below such
type. discharge.
(2) All cylinders shall meet the De- (2) Shutoff valves shall not be in-
partment of Transportation specifica- stalled between the safety relief device
213
and the container, or the equipment or (3) Systems utilizing containers hav-
piping to which the safety relief device ing a water capacity greater than 21⁄2
is connected, except that a shutoff pounds (nominal 1 pound LP-Gas ca-
valve may be used where the arrange- pacity) shall be equipped with excess
ment of this valve is such that full re- flow valves. Such excess flow valves
quired capacity flow through the safety shall be either integral with the con-
relief device is always afforded. tainer valves or in the connections to
(3) Container safety relief devices and the container valve outlets.
regulator relief vents shall be located (4) Regulators shall be either directly
not less than 5 feet in any direction connected to the container valves or to
from air openings into sealed combus- manifolds connected to the container
tion system appliances or mechanical valves. The regulator shall be suitable
ventilation air intakes. for use with LP-Gas. Manifolds and fit-
tings connecting containers to pressure
(e) Dispensing. (1) Filling of fuel con-
regulator inlets shall be designed for at
tainers for trucks or motor vehicles
least 250 p.s.i.g. service pressure.
from bulk storage containers shall be
(5) Valves on containers having water
performed not less than 10 feet from
capacity greater than 50 pounds (nomi-
the nearest masonry-walled building, nal 20 pounds LP-Gas capacity) shall be
or not less than 25 feet from the near- protected from damage while in use or
est building or other construction and, storage.
in any event, not less than 25 feet from (6) Aluminum piping or tubing shall
any building opening. not be used.
(2) Filling of portable containers or (7) Hose shall be designed for a work-
containers mounted on skids from storing pressure of at least 250 p.s.i.g. De-
age containers shall be performed not sign, construction, and performance of
less than 50 feet from the nearest build- hose, and hose connections shall have
ing. their suitability determined by listing
(f) Requirements for appliances. (1) LP- by a nationally recognized testing
Gas consuming appliances shall be ap- agency. The hose length shall be as
proved types. short as practicable. Hoses shall be
(2) Any appliance that was originally long enough to permit compliance with
manufactured for operation with a gas- spacing provisions of paragraphs (h)(1)
eous fuel other than LP-Gas, and is in through (13) of this section, without
good condition, may be used with LP- kinking or straining, or causing hose
Gas only after it is properly converted, to be so close to a burner as to be dam-
adapted, and tested for performance aged by heat.
with LP-Gas before the appliance is (8) Portable heaters, including sala-
placed in use. manders, shall be equipped with an ap-
(g) Containers and regulating equip- proved automatic device to shut off the
ment installed outside of buildings or flow of gas to the main burner, and
structures. Containers shall be upright pilot if used, in the event of flame fail-
upon firm foundations or otherwise ure. Such heaters, having inputs above
firmly secured. The possible effect on 50,000 B.t.u. per hour, shall be equipped
the outlet piping of settling shall be with either a pilot, which must be
guarded against by a flexible connec- lighted and proved before the main
tion or special fitting. burner can be turned on, or an elec-
(h) Containers and equipment used in- trical ignition system.
side of buildings or structures. (1) When NOTE: The provisions of this subparagraph
operational requirements make port- do not apply to portable heaters under 7,500
able use of containers necessary, and B.t.u. per hour input when used with con-
their location outside of buildings or tainers having a maximum water capacity of
structures is impracticable, containers 21⁄2 pounds.
and equipment shall be permitted to be (9) Container valves, connectors, reg-
used inside of buildings or structures in ulators, manifolds, piping, and tubing
accordance with paragraphs (h)(2) shall not be used as structural supports

through (11) of this section. for heaters.
(2) Containers in use means connected (10) Containers, regulating equip-
for use. ment, manifolds, pipe, tubing, and hose
214
shall be located to minimize exposure er unit. Cylinder connectors shall be

to high temperatures or physical dam- provided with an excess flow valve to
age. minimize the flow of gas in the event
(11) Containers having a water capac- the fuel line becomes ruptured.
ity greater than 21⁄2 pounds (nominal 1 (3) Regulators and low-pressure relief
pound LP-Gas capacity) connected for devices shall be rigidly attached to the
use shall stand on a firm and substan- cylinder valves, clyinders, supporting
tially level surface and, when nec- standards, the building walls, or other-
essary, shall be secured in an upright wise rigidly secured, and shall be so in-
position. stalled or protected from the elements.
(12) The maximum water capacity of (j) Storage of LPG containers. Storage
individual containers shall be 245 of LPG within buildings is prohibited.
pounds (nominal 100 pounds LP-Gas ca- (k) Storage outside of buildings. (1)
pacity). Storage outside of buildings, for con-
(13) For temporary heating, heaters tainers awaiting use, shall be located
(other than integral heater-container from the nearest building or group of
units) shall be located at least 6 feet buildings, in accordance with the fol-
from any LP-Gas container. This shall lowing:
not prohibit the use of heaters specifi-
cally designed for attachment to the TABLE F–3
container or to a supporting standard, Distance
provided they are designed and in- Quantity of LP-Gas stored (feet)
stalled so as to prevent direct or radi-
500 lbs. or less .................................................... 0
ant heat application from the heater 501 to 6,000 lbs ................................................... 10
onto the containers. Blower and radi- 6,001 to 10,000 lbs .............................................. 20
ant type heaters shall not be directed Over 10,000 lbs ................................................... 25
toward any LP-Gas container within 20
feet. (2) Containers shall be in a suitable
(14) If two or more heater-container ventilated enclosure or otherwise pro-
units, of either the integral or non- tected against tampering.
integral type, are located in an (l) Fire protection. Storage locations
unpartitioned area on the same floor, shall be provided with at least one ap-
the container or containers of each proved portable fire extinguisher hav-
unit shall be separated from the con- ing a rating of not less than 20–B:C.
tainer or containers of any other unit (m) Systems utilizing containers other
by at least 20 feet. than DOT containers—(1) Application.
(15) When heaters are connected to This paragraph applies specifically to
containers for use in an unpartitioned systems utilizing storage containers
area on the same floor, the total water other than those constructed in accord-
capacity of containers, manifolded to- ance with DOT specifications. Para-
gether for connection to a heater or graph (b) of this section applies to this
heaters, shall not be greater than 735 paragraph unless otherwise noted in
pounds (nominal 300 pounds LP-Gas ca- paragraph (b) of this section.
pacity). Such manifolds shall be sepa- (2) Design pressure and classification of
rated by at least 20 feet. storage containers. Storage containers
(16) Storage of containers awaiting shall be designed and classified in ac-
use shall be in accordance with para- cordance with Table F–31.
graphs (j) and (k) of this section.
TABLE F–31
(i) Multiple container systems. (1)
Valves in the assembly of multiple con- Minimum design pressure of con-
tainer systems shall be arranged so tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage
For gases
that replacement of containers can be with vapor 1949 edition of ASME
made without shutting off the flow of press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200,
Con- to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952,
gas in the system. This provision is not tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962,
type
to be construed as requiring an auto- in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi-
100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of

matic changeover device. (37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi-
(2) Heaters shall be equipped with an 69) tions of API-ASME
Code 3
approved regulator in the supply line
between the fuel cylinder and the heat- 1 80 1 80 1 80 1 100
215
TABLE F–31—Continued (vi) Skids, or lugs for attachment of

skids, shall be secured to the container
Minimum design pressure of con-
tainer, lb. per sq. in. gage in accordance with the code or rules
For gases under which the container is designed
with vapor 1949 edition of ASME
Con- press. Not 1949 and Code (Par. U–200, and built (with a minimum factor of
to exceed earlier edi- U–201); 1950, 1952,
tainer lb. per sq. tions of 1956, 1959, 1962, safety of four) to withstand loading in
type in. gage at ASME 1965, and 1968 (Divi- any direction equal to four times the
100 °F. Code (Par. sion 1) editions of
(37.8 °C.) U–68, U– ASME Code; All edi- weight of the container and attach-
69) tions of API-ASME ments when filled to the maximum per-
Code 3
missible loaded weight.
100 100 100 125 (4) Field welding where necessary
125 125 125 156
150 150 150 187 shall be made only on saddle plates or
175 175 175 219 brackets which were applied by the
2 200 215 200 250 manufacturer of the tank.
1 New storage containers of the 80 type have not been au-
(n) When LP-Gas and one or more
thorized since Dec. 31, 1947.
2 Container type may be increased by increments of 25. other gases are stored or used in the
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 100% of same area, the containers shall be
the container type designation when constructed under 1949
or earlier editions of the ASME Code (Par. U–68 and U–69). marked to identify their content.
The minimum design pressure of containers shall be 125% of
the container type designation when constructed under: (1) Marking shall be in compliance with
the 1949 ASME Code (Par. U–200 and U–201), (2) 1950, American National Standard Z48.1–
1952, 1956, 1959, 1962, 1965, and 1968 (Division 1) editions
of the ASME Code, and (3) all editions of the API-ASME 1954, ‘‘Method of Marking Portable
Code. Compressed Gas Containers To Identify
3 Construction of containers under the API-ASME Code is
not authorized after July 1, 1961. the Material Contained.’’
(3) Containers with foundations at- (o) Damage from vehicles. When dam-
tached (portable or semiportable b con- age to LP-Gas systems from vehicular
tainers with suitable steel ‘‘runners’’ traffic is a possibility, precautions
or ‘‘skids’’ and popularly known in the against such damage shall be taken.
industry as ‘‘skid tanks’’) shall be de- [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
signed, installed, and used in accord- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35170, June 30, 1993]
ance with these rules subject to the fol-
lowing provisions: § 1926.154 Temporary heating devices.
(i) If they are to be used at a given
general location for a temporary period (a) Ventilation. (1) Fresh air shall be
not to exceed 6 months they need not supplied in sufficient quantities to
have fire-resisting foundations or sad- maintain the health and safety of
dles but shall have adequate ferrous workmen. Where natural means of
metal supports. fresh air supply is inadequate, mechan-
(ii) They shall not be located with ical ventilation shall be provided.
the outside bottom of the container (2) When heaters are used in confined
shell more than 5 feet (1.52 m) above spaces, special care shall be taken to
the surface of the ground unless fire-re- provide sufficient ventilation in order
sisting supports are provided. to ensure proper combustion, maintain
(iii) The bottom of the skids shall not the health and safety of workmen, and
be less than 2 inches (5.08 cm) or more limit temperature rise in the area.
than 12 inches (30.48 cm) below the out- (b) Clearance and mounting. (1) Tem-
side bottom of the container shell. porary heating devices shall be in-
(iv) Flanges, nozzles, valves, fittings,
stalled to provide clearance to combus-
and the like, having communication
tible material not less than the
with the interior of the container, shall
amount shown in Table F–4.
be protected against physical damage.
(v) When not permanently located on (2) Temporary heating devices, which
fire-resisting foundations, piping con- are listed for installation with lesser
nections shall be sufficiently flexible clearances than specified in Table F–4,
to minimize the possibility of breakage may be installed in accordance with

or leakage of connections if the con- their approval.
tainer settles, moves, or is otherwise
displaced.
216
TABLE F–4 Mines, or U.S. Coast Guard, which

issue approvals for such equipment.
Minimum clearance, (inches)
(b) Closed container means a container
Heating appliances Chimney so sealed by means of a lid or other de-
Sides Rear con-
nector vice that neither liquid nor vapor will
escape from it at ordinary tempera-
Room heater, circulating
type .................................. 12 12 18 tures.
Room heater, radiant type .. 36 36 18 (c) Combustible liquids mean any liq-
uid having a flash point at or above 140
(3) Heaters not suitable for use on °F. (60 °C.), and below 200 °F. (93.4 °C.).
wood floors shall not be set directly (d) Combustion means any chemical
upon them or other combustible mate- process that involves oxidation suffi-
rials. When such heaters are used, they cient to produce light or heat.
shall rest on suitable heat insulating (e) Fire brigade means an organized
material or at least 1-inch concrete, or group of employees that are knowl-
equivalent. The insulating material edgeable, trained, and skilled in the
shall extend beyond the heater 2 feet or safe evacuation of employees during
more in all directions. emergency situations and in assisting
(4) Heaters used in the vicinity of in fire fighting operations.
combustible tarpaulins, canvas, or
(f) Fire resistance means so resistant
similar coverings shall be located at
to fire that, for specified time and
least 10 feet from the coverings. The
under conditions of a standard heat in-
coverings shall be securely fastened to
tensity, it will not fail structurally and
prevent ignition or upsetting of the
will not permit the side away from the
heater due to wind action on the cov-
fire to become hotter than a specified
ering or other material.
temperature. For purposes of this part,
(c) Stability. Heaters, when in use,
fire resistance shall be determined by
shall be set horizontally level, unless
the Standard Methods of Fire Tests of
otherwise permitted by the manufac-
Building Construction and Materials,
turer’s markings.
NFPA 251–1969.
(d) Solid fuel salamanders. Solid fuel
salamanders are prohibited in buildings (g) Flammable means capable of being
and on scaffolds. easily ignited, burning intensely, or
(e) Oil-fired heaters. (1) Flammable having a rapid rate of flame spread.
liquid-fired heaters shall be equipped (h) Flammable liquids means any liq-
with a primary safety control to stop uid having a flash point below 140 °F.
the flow of fuel in the event of flame and having a vapor pressure not ex-
failure. Barometric or gravity oil feed ceeding 40 pounds per square inch (ab-
shall not be considered a primary safe- solute) at 100 °F.
ty control. (i) Flash point of the liquid means the
(2) Heaters designed for barometric temperature at which it gives off vapor
or gravity oil feed shall be used only sufficient to form an ignitable mixture
with the integral tanks. with the air near the surface of the liq-
(3) [Reserved] uid or within the vessel used as deter-
(4) Heaters specifically designed and mined by appropriate test procedure
approved for use with separate supply and apparatus as specified below.
tanks may be directly connected for (1) The flash point of liquids having a
gravity feed, or an automatic pump, viscosity less than 45 Saybolt Uni-
from a supply tank. versal Second(s) at 100 °F. (37.8 °C.) and
a flash point below 175 °F. (79.4 °C.)
§ 1926.155 Definitions applicable to shall be determined in accordance with
this subpart. the Standard Method of Test for Flash
(a) Approved, for the purpose of this Point by the Tag Closed Tester, ASTM
subpart, means equipment that has D–56–69.
been listed or approved by a nationally (2) The flash point of liquids having a
recognized testing laboratory such as viscosity of 45 Saybolt Universal Sec-

Factory Mutual Engineering Corp., or ond(s) or more at 175 °F. (79.4 °C.) or
Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc., or higher shall be determined in accord-
Federal agencies such as Bureau of ance with the Standard Method of Test
217
for Flash Point by the Pensky Martens warn against potential hazards or to
Closed Tester, ASTM D–93–69. caution against unsafe practices.
(j) Liquefied petroleum gases, LPG and (2) Caution signs shall have yellow as
LP Gas mean and include any material the predominating color; black upper
which is composed predominantly of panel and borders: yellow lettering of
any of the following hydrocarbons, or ‘‘caution’’ on the black panel; and the
mixtures of them, such as propane, pro- lower yellow panel for additional sign
pylene, butane (normal butane or iso- wording. Black lettering shall be used
butane), and butylenes. for additional wording.
(k) Portable tank means a closed con-
tainer having a liquid capacity more
than 60 U.S. gallons, and not intended
for fixed installation.
(l) Safety can means an approved
closed container, of not more than 5
gallons capacity, having a flash-arrest-
ing screen, spring-closing lid and spout
cover and so designed that it will safe-
ly relieve internal pressure when sub-
jected to fire exposure.
(m) Vapor pressure means the pres-
sure, measured in pounds per square
inch (absolute), exerted by a volatile
liquid as determined by the ‘‘Standard
Method of Test for Vapor Pressure of
Petroleum Products (Reid Method).’’
(3) Standard color of the background
(ASTM D–323–58).
shall be yellow; and the panel, black
with yellow letters. Any letters used
Subpart G—Signs, Signals, and against the yellow background shall be
Barricades black. The colors shall be those of
opaque glossy samples as specified in
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours Table 1 of American National Standard
and Safety Standards Act (Construction Z53.1–1967.
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); sections 4, 6, 8, (d) Exit signs. Exit signs, when re-
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 quired, shall be lettered in legible red
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s letters, not less than 6 inches high, on
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR a white field and the principal stroke
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 3–2000 (65 FR
of the letters shall be at least three-
50017) as applicable, 29 CFR part 1911.
fourths inch in width.
§ 1926.200 Accident prevention signs (e) Safety instruction signs. Safety in-
and tags. struction signs, when used, shall be
white with green upper panel with
(a) General. Signs and symbols re- white letters to convey the principal
quired by this subpart shall be visible message. Any additional wording on
at all times when work is being per- the sign shall be black letters on the
formed, and shall be removed or cov- white background.
ered promptly when the hazards no (f) Directional signs. Directional signs,
longer exist. other than automotive traffic signs
(b) Danger signs. (1) Danger signs (see specified in paragraph (g) of this sec-
Figure G–1) shall be used only where an tion, shall be white with a black panel
immediate hazard exists. and a white directional symbol. Any
(2) Danger signs shall have red as the additional wording on the sign shall be
predominating color for the upper black letters on the white background.
panel; black outline on the borders; (g) Traffic signs. (1) Construction
and a white lower panel for additional areas shall be posted with legible traf-
sign wording. fic signs at points of hazard.
(c) Caution signs. (1) Caution signs (2) All traffic control signs or devices
(see Figure G–2) shall be used only to used for protection of construction
218
EC30OC91.013</GPH>
workers shall conform to Part VI of downloading at http://

the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov/kno-millennium.
Devices (AMUTCD’’), 1988 Edition, Re- Electronic copies of the 1988 Edition
vision 3, September 3, 1993, FHWA-SA– MUTCD, Revision 3, are available for
94–027 or Part VI of the Manual on Uni- downloading at http://www.osha.gov/doc/
form Traffic Control Devices, Millen- highwaylworkzones. Both documents
nium Edition, December 2000, FHWA, are available for inspection at the
which are incorporated by reference. OSHA Docket Office, Room N2625, U.S.
The Director of the Federal Register Department of Labor, 200 Constitution
approves this incorporation by ref- Avenue, NW., Washington, DC 20210 or
erence in accordance with 5 U.S.C. at the National Archives and Records
552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. You may ob- Administration (NARA). For informa-
tain a copy of the Millennium Edition tion on the availability of this mate-
from the following organizations: rial at NARA, call 202–741–6030, or go
American Traffic Safety Services Asso- to: http://www.archives.gov/
ciation, 15 Riverside Parkway, Suite federallregister/
100, Fredericksburg, VA 22406–1022; codeloflfederallregulations/
Telephone: 1–800–231–3475; FAX: (540) ibrllocations.html.
368–1722; www.atssa.com; Institute of (h) Accident prevention tags. (1) Acci-
Transportation Engineers, 1099 14th dent prevention tags shall be used as a
Street, NW., Suite 300 West, Wash- temporary means of warning employ-
ington, DC 20005–3438; FAX: (202) 289– ees of an existing hazard, such as defec-
7722; www.ite.org; and American Asso- tive tools, equipment, etc. They shall
ciation of State Highway and Trans- not be used in place of, or as a sub-
portation Officials; www.aashto.org; stitute for, accident prevention signs.
Telephone: 1–800–231–3475; FAX: 1–800– (2) Specifications for accident pre-
525–5562. Electronic copies of the vention tags similar to those in Table
MUTCD 2000 are available for G–1 shall apply.
219
(i) Additional rules. American Na- rules not specifically prescribed in this
tional Standards Institute (ANSI) subpart.
Z35.1–1968, Specifications for Accident
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
Prevention Signs, and Z35.2–1968, Speci- 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993;
fications for Accident Prevention Tags, 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002; 69 FR 18803, Apr.
contain rules which are additional to 9, 2004]
the rules prescribed in this section.
The employer shall comply with ANSI § 1926.201 Signaling.
Z35.1–1968 and Z35.2–1968 with respect to (a) Flaggers. Signaling by flaggers
and the use of flaggers, including warn-
ing garments worn by flaggers shall

conform to Part VI of the Manual on
Uniform Traffic Control Devices, (1988
Edition, Revision 3 or the Millennium
220
EC30OC91.014</GPH>
Edition), which are incorporated by (2) Maximum safe load limits of

reference in § 1926.200(g)(2). floors within buildings and structures,
(b) Crane and hoist signals. Regula- in pounds per square foot, shall be con-
tions for crane and hoist signaling will spicuously posted in all storage areas,
be found in applicable American Na- except for floor or slab on grade. Max-
tional Standards Institute standards. imum safe loads shall not be exceeded.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (3) Aisles and passageways shall be
1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, kept clear to provide for the free and
2002] safe movement of material handling
equipment or employees. Such areas
§ 1926.202 Barricades. shall be kept in good repair.
Barricades for protection of employ- (4) When a difference in road or work-
ees shall conform to Part VI of the ing levels exist, means such as ramps,
Manual on Uniform Traffic Control De- blocking, or grading shall be used to
vices (1988 Edition, Revision 3 or Mil- ensure the safe movement of vehicles
lennium Edition), which are incor- between the two levels.
porated by reference in § 1926.200(g)(2). (b) Material storage. (1) Material
stored inside buildings under construc-
[67 FR 57736, Sept. 12, 2002]
tion shall not be placed within 6 feet of
§ 1926.203 Definitions applicable to any hoistway or inside floor openings,
this subpart. nor within 10 feet of an exterior wall
which does not extend above the top of
(a) Barricade means an obstruction to
the material stored.
deter the passage of persons or vehi-
(2) Each employee required to work
cles.
(b) Signs are the warnings of hazard, on stored material in silos, hoppers,
temporarily or permanently affixed or tanks, and similar storage areas shall
placed, at locations where hazards be equipped with personal fall arrest
exist. equipment meeting the requirements
(c) Signals are moving signs, provided of subpart M of this part.
by workers, such as flaggers, or by de- (3) Noncompatible materials shall be
vices, such as flashing lights, to warn segregated in storage.
of possible or existing hazards. (4) Bagged materials shall be stacked
(d) Tags are temporary signs, usually by stepping back the layers and cross-
attached to a piece of equipment or keying the bags at least every 10 bags
part of a structure, to warn of existing high.
or immediate hazards. (5) Materials shall not be stored on
scaffolds or runways in excess of sup-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, plies needed for immediate operations.
1979, as amended at 67 FR 57736, Sept. 12,
(6) Brick stacks shall not be more
2002]
than 7 feet in height. When a loose
brick stack reaches a height of 4 feet,
Subpart H—Materials Handling, it shall be tapered back 2 inches in
Storage, Use, and Disposal every foot of height above the 4-foot
level.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours (7) When masonry blocks are stacked
and Safety Standards Act (Construction higher than 6 feet, the stack shall be
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- tapered back one-half block per tier
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 above the 6-foot level.
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR (8) Lumber:
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (50 FR 9033), (i) Used lumber shall have all nails
as applicable. Section 1926.250 also issued withdrawn before stacking.
under 29 CFR Part 1911. (ii) Lumber shall be stacked on level
and solidly supported sills.
§ 1926.250 General requirements for (iii) Lumber shall be so stacked as to
storage. be stable and self-supporting.
(a) General. (1) All materials stored in (iv) Lumber piles shall not exceed 20
tiers shall be stacked, racked, blocked, feet in height provided that lumber to
interlocked, or otherwise secured to be handled manually shall not be
prevent sliding, falling or collapse. stacked more than 16 feet high.
221
(9) Structural steel, poles, pipe, bar (5) Scope. This section applies to
stock, and other cylindrical materials, slings used in conjunction with other
unless racked, shall be stacked and material handling equipment for the
blocked so as to prevent spreading or movement of material by hoisting, in
tilting. employments covered by this part. The
(c) Housekeeping. Storage areas shall types of slings covered are those made
be kept free from accumulation of ma- from alloy steel chain, wire rope, metal
terials that constitute hazards from mesh, natural or synthetic fiber rope
tripping, fire, explosion, or pest harbor- (conventional three strand construc-
age. Vegetation control will be exer- tion), and synthetic web (nylon, poly-
cised when necessary. ester, and polypropylene).
(d) Dockboards (bridge plates). (1) Port- (6) Inspections. Each day before being
able and powered dockboards shall be used, the sling and all fastenings and
strong enough to carry the load im- attachments shall be inspected for
posed on them. damage or defects by a competent per-
(2) Portable dockboards shall be se- son designated by the employer. Addi-
cured in position, either by being an- tional inspections shall be performed
chored or equipped with devices which during sling use, where service condi-
will prevent their slipping. tions warrant. Damaged or defective
(3) Handholds, or other effective slings shall be immediately removed
means, shall be provided on portable from service.
dockboards to permit safe handling. (b) Alloy steel chains. (1) Welded alloy
steel chain slings shall have perma-
(4) Positive protection shall be pro-
nently affixed durable identification
vided to prevent railroad cars from
stating size, grade, rated capacity, and
being moved while dockboards or
sling manufacturer.
bridge plates are in position.
(2) Hooks, rings, oblong links, pear-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, shaped links, welded or mechanical
1979, as amended at 49 FR 18295, Apr. 30, 1984; coupling links, or other attachments,
54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR 35173, June 30, when used with alloy steel chains, shall
1993; 59 FR 40729, Aug. 9, 1994; 61 FR 5510, Feb. have a rated capacity at least equal to
13, 1996]
that of the chain.
§ 1926.251 Rigging equipment for ma- (3) Job or shop hooks and links, or
terial handling. makeshift fasteners, formed from
bolts, rods, etc., or other such attach-
(a) General. (1) Rigging equipment for ments, shall not be used.
material handling shall be inspected (4) Rated capacity (working load
prior to use on each shift and as nec- limit) for alloy steel chain slings shall
essary during its use to ensure that it conform to the values shown in Table
is safe. Defective rigging equipment H–1.
shall be removed from service. (5) Whenever wear at any point of
(2) Rigging equipment shall not be any chain link exceeds that shown in
loaded in excess of its recommended Table H–2, the assembly shall be re-
safe working load, as prescribed in Ta- moved from service.
bles H–1 through H–20 in this subpart, (6) Inspections. (i) In addition to the
following § 1926.252(e) for the specific inspection required by other para-
equipment. graphs of this section, a thorough peri-
(3) Rigging equipment, when not in odic inspection of alloy steel chain
use, shall be removed from the imme- slings in use shall be made on a regular
diate work area so as not to present a basis, to be determined on the basis of
hazard to employees. (A) frequency of sling use; (B) severity
(4) Special custom design grabs, of service conditions; (C) nature of lifts
hooks, clamps, or other lifting acces- being made; and (D) experience gained
sories, for such units as modular pan- on the service life of slings used in
els, prefabricated structures and simi- similar circumstances. Such inspec-
lar materials, shall be marked to indi- tions shall in no event be at intervals

cate the safe working loads and shall greater than once every 12 months.
be proof-tested prior to use to 125 per- (ii) The employer shall make and
cent of their rated load. maintain a record of the most recent
222
month in which each alloy steel chain (8) Slings used in a basket hitch shall
sling was thoroughly inspected, and have the loads balanced to prevent slip-
shall make such record available for page.
examination. (9) Slings shall be padded or pro-
(c) Wire rope. (1) Tables H–3 through tected from the sharp edges of their
H–14 shall be used to determine the loads.
safe working loads of various sizes and (10) Hands or fingers shall not be
classifications of improved plow steel placed between the sling and its load
wire rope and wire rope slings with var- while the sling is being tightened
ious types of terminals. For sizes, clas- around the load.
sifications, and grades not included in (11) Shock loading is prohibited.
these tables, the safe working load rec- (12) A sling shall not be pulled from
ommended by the manufacturer for under a load when the load is resting
specific, identifiable products shall be on the sling.
followed, provided that a safety factor (13) Minimum sling lengths. (i) Cable
of not less than 5 is maintained. laid and 6 × 19 and 6 × 37 slings shall
(2) Protruding ends of strands in have a minimum clear length of wire
splices on slings and bridles shall be rope 10 times the component rope di-
covered or blunted. ameter between splices, sleeves or end
(3) Wire rope shall not be secured by fittings.
knots, except on haul back lines on
(ii) Braided slings shall have a min-
scrapers.
imum clear length of wire rope 40 times
(4) The following limitations shall
the component rope diameter between
apply to the use of wire rope:
the loops or end fittings.
(i) An eye splice made in any wire
rope shall have not less than three full (iii) Cable laid grommets, strand laid
tucks. However, this requirement shall grommets and endless slings shall have
not operate to preclude the use of an- a minimum circumferential length of
other form of splice or connection 96 times their body diameter.
which can be shown to be as efficient (14) Safe operating temperatures. Fiber
and which is not otherwise prohibited. core wire rope slings of all grades shall
(ii) Except for eye splices in the ends be permanently removed from service
of wires and for endless rope slings, if they are exposed to temperatures in
each wire rope used in hoisting or low- excess of 200 °F (93.33 °C). When
ering, or in pulling loads, shall consist nonfiber core wire rope slings of any
of one continuous piece without knot grade are used at temperatures above
or splice. 400 °F (204.44 °C) or below minus 60 °F
(iii) Eyes in wire rope bridles, slings, (15.55 °C), recommendations of the sling
or bull wires shall not be formed by manufacturer regarding use at that
wire rope clips or knots. temperature shall be followed.
(iv) Wire rope shall not be used if, in (15) End attachments. (i) Welding of
any length of eight diameters, the end attachments, except covers to
total number of visible broken wires thimbles, shall be performed prior to
exceeds 10 percent of the total number the assembly of the sling.
of wires, or if the rope shows other (ii) All welded end attachments shall
signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or not be used unless proof tested by the
defect. manufacturer or equivalent entity at
(5) When U-bolt wire rope clips are twice their rated capacity prior to ini-
used to form eyes, Table H–20 shall be tial use. The employer shall retain a
used to determine the number and certificate of the proof test, and make
spacing of clips. it available for examination.
(i) When used for eye splices, the U- (d) Natural rope, and synthetic fiber—
bolt shall be applied so that the ‘‘U’’ (1) General. When using natural or syn-
section is in contact with the dead end thetic fiber rope slings, Tables H–15, 16,
of the rope. 17, and 18 shall apply.
(6) Slings shall not be shortened with (2) All splices in rope slings provided
knots or bolts or other makeshift de- by the employer shall be made in ac-
vices. cordance with fiber rope manufacturers
(7) Sling legs shall not be kinked. recommendations.
223
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall tucks, and short splices shall consist of
contain at least three full tucks, and at least eight full tucks, four on each
short splices shall contain at least six side of the center line.
full tucks (three on each side of the (iii) Strand end tails shall not be
centerline of the splice). trimmed flush with the surface of the
(ii) In layed synthetic fiber rope, eye rope immediately adjacent to the full
splices shall contain at least four full tucks. This applies to all types of fiber
tucks, and short splices shall contain rope and both eye and short splices.
at least eight full tucks (four on each For fiber rope under 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
side of the centerline of the splice). diameter, the tail shall project at least
(iii) Strand end tails shall not be six rope diameters beyond the last full
trimmed short (flush with the surface tuck. For fiber rope 1 inch (2.54 cm) in
of the rope) immediately adjacent to diameter and larger, the tail shall
the full tucks. This precaution applies project at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) be-
to both eye and short splices and all yond the last full tuck. Where a pro-
types of fiber rope. For fiber ropes jecting tail interferes with the use of
under 1-inch diameter, the tails shall the sling, the tail shall be tapered and
project at least six rope diameters be- spliced into the body of the rope using
yond the last full tuck. For fiber ropes at least two additional tucks (which
1-inch diameter and larger, the tails will require a tail length of approxi-
shall project at least 6 inches beyond mately six rope diameters beyond the
the last full tuck. In applications last full tuck).
where the projecting tails may be ob- (iv) Fiber rope slings shall have a
jectionable, the tails shall be tapered minimum clear length of rope between
and spliced into the body of the rope eye splices equal to 10 times the rope
using at least two additional tucks diameter.
(which will require a tail length of ap- (v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of
proximately six rope diameters beyond splices.
the last full tuck). (vi) Clamps not designed specifically
(iv) For all eye splices, the eye shall for fiber ropes shall not be used for
be sufficiently large to provide an in- splicing.
cluded angle of not greater than 60° at (vii) For all eye splices, the eye shall
the splice when the eye is placed over be of such size to provide an included
the load or support. angle of not greater than 60 degrees at
(v) Knots shall not be used in lieu of the splice when the eye is placed over
splices. the load or support.
(3) Safe operating temperatures. Nat- (5) End attachments. Fiber rope slings
ural and synthetic fiber rope slings, ex- shall not be used if end attachments in
cept for wet frozen slings, may be used contact with the rope have sharp edges
in a temperature range from minus 20 or projections.
°F (¥28.88 °C) to plus 180 °F (82.2 °C)
(6) Removal from service. Natural and
without decreasing the working load
synthetic fiber rope slings shall be im-
limit. For operations outside this tem-
mediately removed from service if any
perature range and for wet frozen
of the following conditions are present:
slings, the sling manufacturer’s rec-
(i) Abnormal wear.
ommendations shall be followed.
(4) Splicing. Spliced fiber rope slings (ii) Powdered fiber between strands.
shall not be used unless they have been (iii) Broken or cut fibers.
spliced in accordance with the fol- (iv) Variations in the size or round-
lowing minimum requirements and in ness of strands.
accordance with any additional rec- (v) Discoloration or rotting.
ommendations of the manufacturer: (vi) Distortion of hardware in the
(i) In manila rope, eye splices shall sling.
consist of at least three full tucks, and (e) Synthetic webbing (nylon, polyester,
short splices shall consist of at least and polypropylene). (1) The employer
six full tucks, three on each side of the shall have each synthetic web sling
splice center line. marked or coded to show:
(ii) In synthetic fiber rope, eye (i) Name or trademark of manufac-
splices shall consist of at least four full turer.
224
(ii) Rated capacities for the type of (7) Safe operating temperatures. Syn-
hitch. thetic web slings of polyester and
(iii) Type of material. nylon shall not be used at tempera-
(2) Rated capacity shall not be ex- tures in excess of 180 °F (82.2 °C). Poly-
ceeded. propylene web slings shall not be used
(3) Webbing. Synthetic webbing shall at temperatures in excess of 200 °F
be of uniform thickness and width and (93.33 °C).
selvage edges shall not be split from (8) Removal from service. Synthetic
the webbing’s width. web slings shall be immediately re-
(4) Fittings. Fittings shall be: moved from service if any of the fol-
(i) Of a minimum breaking strength lowing conditions are present:
equal to that of the sling; and (i) Acid or caustic burns;
(ii) Free of all sharp edges that could (ii) Melting or charring of any part of
in any way damage the webbing. the sling surface;
(5) Attachment of end fittings to web- (iii) Snags, punctures, tears or cuts;
bing and formation of eyes. Stitching (iv) Broken or worn stitches; or
shall be the only method used to at- (v) Distortion of fittings.
tach end fittings to webbing and to (f) Shackles and hooks. (1) Table H–19
form eyes. The thread shall be in an shall be used to determine the safe
even pattern and contain a sufficient working loads of various sizes of shack-
number of stitches to develop the full les, except that higher safe working
breaking strength of the sling. loads are permissible when rec-
(6) Environmental conditions. When ommended by the manufacturer for
synthetic web slings are used, the fol- specific, identifiable products, provided
lowing precautions shall be taken: that a safety factor of not less than 5 is
(i) Nylon web slings shall not be used maintained.
where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or (2) The manufacturer’s recommenda-
liquids of acids or phenolics are tions shall be followed in determining
present. the safe working loads of the various
(ii) Polyester and polypropylene web sizes and types of specific and identifi-
slings shall not be used where fumes, able hooks. All hooks for which no ap-
vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of plicable manufacturer’s recommenda-
caustics are present. tions are available shall be tested to
(iii) Web slings with aluminum fit- twice the intended safe working load
tings shall not be used where fumes, before they are initially put into use.
vapors, sprays, mists or liquids of The employer shall maintain a record
caustics are present. of the dates and results of such tests.
TABLE H–1—RATED CAPACITY (WORKING LOAD LIMIT), FOR ALLOY STEEL CHAIN SLINGS 1
Rated Capacity (Working Load Limit), Pounds
[Horizontal angles shown in parentheses] (2)
Single Double sling vertical angle (1) Triple and quadruple sling
branch vertical angle (1)
Chain size (inches) sling— 30° 45° 60°
90° 30° 45° 60°
(60°) (45°) (30°)
loading (60°) (45°) (30°)
⁄ .............................................................................
14 3,250 5,560 4,550 3,250 8,400 6,800 4,900
⁄ .............................................................................
38 6,600 11,400 9,300 6,600 17,000 14,000 9,900
⁄ .............................................................................
12 11,250 19,500 15,900 11,250 29,000 24,000 17,000
5⁄8 ............................................................................. 16,500 28,500 23,300 16,500 43,000 35,000 24,500
3⁄4 ............................................................................. 23,000 39,800 32,500 23,000 59,500 48,500 34,500
7⁄8 ............................................................................. 28,750 49,800 40,600 28,750 74,500 61,000 43,000
1 .............................................................................. 38,750 67,100 54,800 38,750 101,000 82,000 58,000
11⁄8 ........................................................................... 44,500 77,000 63,000 44,500 115,500 94,500 66,500
11⁄4 ........................................................................... 57,500 99,500 81,000 57,500 149,000 121,500 86,000
13⁄8 ........................................................................... 67,000 116,000 94,000 67,000 174,000 141,000 100,500
11⁄2 ........................................................................... 80,000 138,000 112,500 80,000 207,000 169,000 119,500
13⁄4 ........................................................................... 100,000 172,000 140,000 100,000 258,000 210,000 150,000
1 Other grades of proof tested steel chain include Proof Coil, BBB Coil and Hi-Test Chain. These grades are not recommended
for overhead lifting and therefore are not covered by this code.
(1) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading measured as the included angle between the inclined leg and the
vertical.
(2) Rating of multileg slings adjusted for angle of loading between the inclined leg and the horizontal plane of the load.
225
TABLE H–2—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT TABLE H–2—MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE WEAR AT

ANY POINT OF LINK ANY POINT OF LINK—Continued
Maximum Maximum
Chain size (inches) allowable Chain size (inches) allowable
wear (inch) wear (inch)
⁄
14 ......................................................................... ⁄
3 64 1 ........................................................................... ⁄
3 16
⁄
38 ......................................................................... ⁄
5 64 11⁄8 ....................................................................... ⁄
7 32
1⁄2 ......................................................................... 7⁄64 11⁄4 ....................................................................... ⁄

14
5⁄8 13⁄8 ....................................................................... ⁄9 32

......................................................................... 9⁄64
3⁄4
11⁄2 ....................................................................... ⁄5 16
......................................................................... 5⁄32
7⁄8
13⁄4 ....................................................................... 11⁄32
......................................................................... 11⁄64
TABLE H–3—RATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE LEG SLINGS

6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope with Fiber Core (FC)
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)
Vertical Choker Vertical basket 1

Dia. Constr.
(inches) HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
14 ⁄ 6×19 0.49 0.51 0.55 0.37 0.38 0.41 0.99 1.0 1.1
⁄
5 16 6×19 0.76 0.79 0.85 0.57 0.59 0.64 1.5 1.6 1.7
38 ⁄ 6×19 1.1 1.1 1.2 0.80 0.85 0.91 2.1 2.2 2.4
⁄
7 16 6×19 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 1.2 2.9 3.0 3.3
12 ⁄ 6×19 1.8 2.0 2.1 1.4 1.5 1.6 3.7 3.9 4.3
⁄
9 16 6×19 2.3 2.5 2.7 1.7 1.9 2.0 4.6 5.0 5.4
⁄
58 6×19 2.8 3.1 3.3 2.1 2.3 2.5 5.6 6.2 6.7
⁄
34 6×19 3.9 4.4 4.8 2.9 3.3 3.6 7.8 8.8 9.5
⁄
78 6×19 5.1 5.9 6.4 3.9 4.5 4.8 10.0 12.0 13.0
1 6×19 6.7 7.7 8.4 5.0 5.8 6.3 13.0 15.0 17.0
11⁄8 6×19 8.4 9.5 10.0 6.3 7.1 7.9 17.0 19.0 21.0
1 ⁄4
1 6×37 9.8 11.0 12.0 7.4 8.3 9.2 20.0 22.0 25.0
13⁄8 6×37 12.0 13.0 15.0 8.9 10.0 11.0 24.0 27.0 30.0
11⁄2 6×37 14.0 16.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 13.0 28.0 32.0 35.0
15⁄8 6×37 16.0 18.0 21.0 12.0 14.0 15.0 33.0 37.0 41.0
13⁄4 6×37 19.0 21.0 24.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 38.0 43.0 48.0
2 6×37 25.0 28.0 31.0 18.0 21.0 23.0 49.0 55.0 62.0
1 These
values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S Slings is 20 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent. d=Diameter of rope.
HT=Hand Tucked Splice and Hidden Tuck Splice. For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use values in HT columns.
MS=Mechanical Splice.
S=Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.

6×19 AND 6×37 CLASSIFICATION IMPROVED PLOW STEEL GRADE ROPE WITH INDEPENDENT WIRE ROPE CORE (IWRC)
Vertical Choker Vertical basket 1

Dia. Constr.
(inches)
HT MS S HT MS S HT MS S
14 ⁄ 6×19 0.53 0.56 0.59 0.40 0.42 0.44 1.0 1.1 1.2
⁄
5 16 6×19 0.81 0.87 0.92 0.61 0.65 0.69 1.6 1.7 1.8
38 ⁄ 6×19 1.1 1.2 1.3 0.86 0.93 0.98 2.3 2.5 2.6
⁄
7 16 6×19 1.5 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3 1.3 3.1 3.4 3.5
12 ⁄ 6×19 2.0 2.2 2.3 1.5 1.6 1.7 3.9 4.4 4.6
⁄
9 16 6×19 2.5 2.7 2.9 1.8 2.1 2.2 4.9 5.5 5.8
⁄
58 6×19 3.0 3.4 3.6 2.2 2.5 2.7 6.0 6.8 7.2
⁄
34 6×19 4.2 4.9 5.1 3.1 3.6 3.8 8.4 9.7 10.0
⁄
78 6×19 5.5 6.6 6.9 4.1 4.9 5.2 11.0 13.0 14.0
1 6×19 7.2 8.5 9.0 5.4 6.4 6.7 14.0 17.0 18.0
11⁄8 6×19 9.0 10.0 11.0 6.8 7.8 8.5 18.0 21.0 23.0
11⁄4 6×37 10.0 12.0 13.0 7.9 9.2 9.9 21.0 24.0 26.0
13⁄8 6×37 13.0 15.0 16.0 9.6 11.0 12.0 25.0 29.0 32.0
11⁄2 6×37 15.0 17.0 19.0 11.0 13.0 14.0 30.0 35.0 38.0
15⁄8 6×37 18.0 20.0 22.0 13.0 15.0 17.0 35.0 41.0 44.0
13⁄4 6×37 20.0 24.0 26.0 15.0 18.0 19.0 41.0 47.0 51.0
2 6×37 26.0 30.0 33.0 20.0 23.0 25.0 53.0 61.0 66.0
1 These
values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for MS and S Slings is 20 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent. d=Diameter of rope.
HT=Hand Tucked Splice: For hidden tuck splice (IWRC) use Table H–3 values in HT column.
226
S=Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.
TABLE H–5—RATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE TABLE H–5—RATED CAPACITIES FOR SINGLE
LEG SLINGS LEG SLINGS—Continued
Cable Laid Rope—Mechanical Splice Only Cable Laid Rope—Mechanical Splice Only
7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade 7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade
Rope Rope
7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope 7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Rope Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)
Dia. Vertical Dia. Vertical
Constr. Vertical Choker Constr. Vertical Choker
(inches) basket 1 (inches) basket 1
⁄14 7×7×7 0.50 0.38 1.0 78⁄ 2 7×6×19 5.0 3.8 10.0
⁄38 7×7×7 1.1 0.81 2.2 1 2 7×6×19 6.4 4.8 13.0
⁄12 7×7×7 1.8 1.4 3.7 1 ⁄
18 2 7×6×19 7.7 5.8 15.0
5⁄8 7×7×7 2.8 2.1 5.5 1 ⁄4
1 2 7×6×19 9.2 6.9 18.0
3⁄4 7×7×7 3.8 2.9 7.6
15⁄16 2 7×6×19 10.0 7.5 20.0
5⁄8 7×7×19 2.9 2.2 5.8
13⁄8 2 7×6×19 11.0 8.2 22.0
3⁄4 7×7×19 4.1 3.0 8.1
11⁄2 2 7×6×19 13.0 9.6 26.0
7⁄8 7×7×19 5.4 4.0 11.0
1 7×7×19 6.9 5.1 14.0 1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio in 10 or great-
11⁄8 7×7×19 8.2 6.2 16.0 er where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of
1 ⁄4
1 7×7×19 9.9 7.4 20.0 the sling is bent. d=Diameter of rope.
3⁄4 2 7×6×19 3.8 2.8 7.6 2 IWRC.

8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope
6×7 and 6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
Component ropes Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)
Basket vertical
Vertical Choker to 30° 1
Diameter (inches) Constr.
8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part
⁄ .........................................................................................
3 32 6×7 0.42 0.32 0.32 0.24 0.74 0.55
⁄ ...........................................................................................
18 6×7 0.76 0.57 0.57 0.42 1.3 0.98
⁄ .........................................................................................
3 16 6×7 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.94 2.9 2.2
3⁄32 ......................................................................................... 7×7 0.51 0.39 0.38 0.29 0.89 0.67
1⁄8 ........................................................................................... 7×7 0.95 0.71 0.71 0.53 1.6 1.2
3⁄16 ......................................................................................... 7×7 2.1 1.5 1.5 1.2 3.6 2.7
3⁄16 ......................................................................................... 6×19 1.7 1.3 1.3 0.98 3.0 2.2
1⁄4 ........................................................................................... 6×19 3.1 2.3 2.3 1.7 5.3 4.0
5⁄16 ......................................................................................... 6×19 4.8 3.6 3.6 2.7 8.3 6.2
3⁄8 ........................................................................................... 6×19 6.8 5.1 5.1 3.8 12.0 8.9
7⁄16 ......................................................................................... 6×19 9.3 6.9 6.9 5.2 16.0 12.0
1⁄2 ........................................................................................... 6×19 12.0 9.0 9.0 6.7 21.0 15.0
9⁄16 ......................................................................................... 6×19 15.0 11.0 11.0 8.5 26.0 20.0
5⁄8 ........................................................................................... 6×19 19.0 14.0 14.0 10.0 32.0 24.0
3⁄4 ........................................................................................... 6×19 27.0 20.0 20.0 15.0 46.0 35.0
7⁄8 ........................................................................................... 6×19 36.0 27.0 27.0 20.0 62.0 47.0
1 ............................................................................................ 6×19 47.0 35.0 35.0 26.0 81.0 61.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 20 or greater where: D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the
sling is bent. d=Diameter of component rope.
TABLE H–7—RATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS

6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core (FC)
2-leg bridle slings 3-leg bridle slings

Dia. Constr. 30° 1 (60°) 2 45° angle 60° 1 (30°) 2 30° 1 (60°) 2 45° angle 60° 1 (30°) 2
(inches)
HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS HT MS
14 ⁄ 6×19 0.85 0.88 0.70 0.72 0.49 0.51 1.3 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.74 0.7
⁄
5 16 6×19 1.3 1.4 1.1 1.1 0.76 0.79 2.0 2.0 1.6 1.7 1.1 1.2
38 ⁄ 6×19 1.8 1.9 1.5 1.6 1.1 1.1 2.8 2.9 2.3 2.4 1.6 1.7
⁄
7 16 6×19 2.5 2.6 2.0 2.2 1.4 1.5 3.7 4.0 3.0 3.2 2.1 2.3
12 ⁄ 6×19 3.2 3.4 2.6 2.8 1.8 2.0 4.8 5.1 3.9 4.2 2.8 3.0
⁄
9 16 6×19 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.5 2.3 2.5 6.0 6.5 4.9 5.3 3.4 3.7
227
TABLE H–7—RATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS—Continued

6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core (FC)

(inches)
⁄
58 6×19 4.8 5.3 4.0 4.4 2.8 3.1 7.3 8.0 5.9 6.5 4.2 4.6
⁄
34 6×19 6.8 7.6 5.5 6.2 3.9 4.4 10.0 11.0 8.3 9.3 5.8 6.6
⁄
78 6×19 8.9 10.0 7.3 8.4 5.1 5.9 13.0 15.0 11.0 13.0 7.7 8.9
1 6×19 11.0 13.0 9.4 11.0 6.7 7.7 17.0 20.0 14.0 16.0 10.0 11.0
11⁄8 6×19 14.0 16.0 12.0 13.0 8.4 9.5 22.0 24.0 18.0 20.0 13.0 14.0
11⁄4 6×37 17.0 19.0 14.0 16.0 9.8 11.0 25.0 29.0 21.0 23.0 15.0 17.0
13⁄8 6×37 20.0 23.0 17.0 19.0 12.0 13.0 31.0 35.0 25.0 28.0 18.0 20.0
11⁄2 6×37 24.0 27.0 20.0 22.0 14.0 16.0 36.0 41.0 30.0 33.0 21.0 24.0
15⁄8 6×37 28.0 32.0 23.0 26.0 16.0 18.0 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0
13⁄4 6×37 33.0 37.0 27.0 30.0 19.0 21.0 49.0 56.0 40.0 45.0 28.0 32.0
2 6×37 43.0 48.0 35.0 39.0 25.0 28.0 64.0 72.0 52.0 59.0 37.0 41.0
HT=Hand Tucked Splice.
1 Vertical angles.
2 Horizontal angles.

6×19 and 6×37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)

(inches)
14 ⁄ 6×19 0.92 0.97 0.75 0.79 0.53 0.56 1.4 1.4 1.1 1.2 0.79 0.84
⁄
5 16 6×19 1.4 1.5 1.1 1.2 1.81 0.87 2.1 2.3 1.7 1.8 1.2 1.3
38 ⁄ 6×19 2.0 2.1 1.6 1.8 1.1 1.2 3.0 3.2 2.4 2.6 1.7 1.9
⁄
7 16 6×19 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.5 1.7 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.3 2.5
12 ⁄ 6×19 3.4 3.8 2.8 3.1 2.0 2.2 5.1 5.7 4.2 4.6 3.0 3.3
⁄
9 16 6×19 4.3 4.8 3.5 3.9 2.5 2.7 6.4 7.1 5.2 5.8 3.7 4.1
⁄
58 6×19 5.2 5.9 4.2 4.8 3.0 3.4 7.8 8.8 6.4 7.2 4.5 5.1
⁄
34 6×19 7.3 8.4 5.9 6.9 4.2 4.9 11.0 13.0 8.9 10.0 6.3 7.3
⁄
78 6×19 9.6 11.0 7.8 9.3 5.5 6.6 14.0 17.0 12.0 14.0 8.3 9.9
1 6×19 12.0 15.0 10.0 12.0 7.2 8.5 19.0 22.0 15.0 18.0 11.0 13.0
1 ⁄8
1 6×19 16.0 18.0 13.0 15.0 9.0 10.0 23.0 27.0 19.0 22.0 13.0 16.0
1 ⁄4
1 6×37 18.0 21.0 15.0 17.0 10.0 12.0 27.0 32.0 22.0 26.0 16.0 18.0
13⁄8 6×37 22.0 25.0 18.0 21.0 13.0 15.0 33.0 38.0 27.0 31.0 19.0 22.0
11⁄2 6×37 26.0 30.0 21.0 25.0 15.0 17.0 39.0 45.0 32.0 37.0 23.0 26.0
15⁄8 6×37 31.0 35.0 25.0 29.0 18.0 20.0 46.0 53.0 38.0 43.0 27.0 31.0
13⁄4 6×37 35.0 41.0 29.0 33.0 20.0 24.0 53.0 61.0 43.0 50.0 31.0 35.0
2 6×37 46.0 53.0 37.0 43.0 26.0 30.0 68.0 79.0 56.0 65.0 40.0 46.0
HT=Hand Tucked Splice.
1 Vertical angles.

Cable Laid Rope—Mechanical Splice Only
7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
2-leg bridle sling 3-leg bridle sling

Dia. (inches) Constr. 30° 1 45° 60° 1 30° 1 45° 60° 1
(60°) 2 angle (30°) 2 (60°) 2 angle (30°) 2
⁄
14 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 0.87 0.71 0.50 1.3 1.1 0.75
⁄
38 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 1.9 1.5 1.1 2.8 2.3 1.6
⁄
12 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 3.2 2.6 1.8 4.8 3.9 2.8
5⁄8 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 4.8 3.9 2.8 7.2 5.9 4.2
3⁄4 ................................... 7×7×7 ......................................................... 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.1 5.7
228
TABLE H–9—RATED CAPACITIES FOR 2-LEG AND 3-LEG BRIDLE SLINGS—Continued

Cable Laid Rope—Mechanical Splice Only
7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
2-leg bridle sling 3-leg bridle sling

Dia. (inches) Constr. 30° 1 45° 60° 1 30° 1 45° 60° 1
(60°) 2 angle (30°) 2 (60°) 2 angle (30°) 2
⁄ ...................................
58 7×7×19 ....................................................... 5.0 4.1 2.9 7.5 6.1 4.3
⁄ ...................................
34 7×7×19 ....................................................... 7.0 5.7 4.1 10.0 8.6 6.1
⁄ ...................................
78 7×7×19 ....................................................... 9.3 7.6 5.4 14.0 11.0 8.1
1 .................................... 7×7×19 ....................................................... 12.0 9.7 6.9 18.0 14.0 10.0
11⁄8 ................................. 7×7×19 ....................................................... 14.0 12.0 8.2 21.0 17.0 12.0
11⁄4 ................................. 7×7×19 ....................................................... 17.0 14.0 9.9 26.0 21.0 15.0
3⁄4 ................................... 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 6.6 5.4 3.8 9.9 8.0 5.7
7⁄8 ................................... 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 8.7 7.1 5.0 13.0 11.0 7.5
1 .................................... 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 11.0 9.0 6.4 17.0 13.0 9.6
11⁄8 ................................. 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 13.0 11.0 7.7 20.0 16.0 11.0
11⁄4 ................................. 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 16.0 13.0 9.2 24.0 20.0 14.0
15⁄16 ............................... 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 17.0 14.0 10.0 26.0 21.0 15.0
13⁄8 ................................. 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 19.0 15.0 11.0 28.0 23.0 16.0
11⁄2 ................................. 7×6×19 IWRC ............................................ 22.0 18.0 13.0 33.0 27.0 19.0
1 Vertical angles.

8-Part and 6-Part Braided Rope
6×7 and 6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope

(inches)
8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part 8-Part 6-Part
⁄
3 32 6×7 0.74 0.55 0.60 0.45 0.42 0.32 1.1 0.83 0.90 0.68 0.64 0.48
18 ⁄ 6×7 1.3 0.98 1.1 0.80 0.76 0.57 2.0 1.5 1.6 1.2 1.1 0.85
⁄
3 16 6×7 2.9 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.4 3.3 3.6 2.7 2.5 1.9
⁄
3 32 7×7 0.89 0.67 0.72 0.55 0.51 0.39 1.3 1.0 1.1 0.82 0.77 0.58
18 ⁄ 7×7 1.6 1.2 1.3 1.0 0.95 0.71 2.5 1.8 2.0 1.5 1.4 1.1
⁄
3 16 7×7 3.6 2.7 2.9 2.2 2.1 1.5 5.4 4.0 4.4 3.3 3.1 2.3
⁄
3 16 6×19 3.0 2.2 2.4 1.8 1.7 1.3 4.5 3.4 3.7 2.8 2.6 1.9
14 ⁄ 6×19 5.3 4.0 4.3 3.2 3.1 2.3 8.0 6.0 6.5 4.9 4.6 3.4
⁄
5 16 6×19 8.3 6.2 6.7 5.0 4.8 3.6 12.0 9.3 10.0 7.6 7.1 5.4
38 ⁄ 6×19 12.0 8.9 9.7 7.2 6.8 5.1 18.0 13.0 14.0 11.0 10.0 7.7
⁄
7 16 6×19 16.0 12.0 13.0 9.8 9.3 6.9 24.0 18.0 20.0 15.0 14.0 10.0
12 ⁄ 6×19 21.0 15.0 17.0 13.0 12.0 9.0 31.0 23.0 25.0 19.0 18.0 13.0
⁄
9 16 6×19 26.0 20.0 21.0 16.0 15.0 11.0 39.0 29.0 32.0 24.0 23.0 17.0
58 ⁄ 6×19 32.0 24.0 26.0 20.0 19.0 14.0 48.0 36.0 40.0 30.0 28.0 21.0
34 ⁄ 6×19 46.0 35.0 38.0 28.0 27.0 20.0 69.0 52.0 56.0 42.0 40.0 30.0
78 ⁄ 6×19 62.0 47.0 51.0 38.0 36.0 27.0 94.0 70.0 76.0 57.0 54.0 40.0
1 6×19 81.0 61.0 66.0 50.0 47.0 35.0 22.0 91.0 99.0 74.0 70.0 53.0
1 Vertical angles.
TABLE H–11—RATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND TABLE H–11—RATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND
LAID GROMMET—HAND TUCKED LAID GROMMET—HAND TUCKED—Continued
Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)

14 ⁄ 7×19 0.85 0.64 1.7 ⁄

7 16 7×19 2.6 1.9 5.2
5 16⁄ 7×19 1.3 1.0 2.6 12 ⁄ 7×19 3.3 2.5 6.7
38 ⁄ 7×19 1.9 1.4 3.8 ⁄
9 16 7×19 4.2 3.1 8.4
229
TABLE H–11—RATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND TABLE H–13—RATED CAPACITIES FOR STRAND
LAID GROMMET—HAND TUCKED—Continued LAID ENDLESS SLINGS-MECHANICAL JOINT
Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) Rope body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)

⁄
58 7×19 5.2 3.9 10.00 ⁄
14 2 6×19 0.92 0.69 1.8
⁄
34 7×19 7.4 5.6 15.0 ⁄
38 2 6×19 2.0 1.5 4.1
7⁄8 7×19 10.0 7.5 20.0 1⁄2 2 6×19 3.6 2.7 7.2
1 7×19 13.0 9.7 26.0 5⁄8 2 6×19 5.6 4.2 11.0
11⁄8 7×19 16.0 12.0 32.0 3⁄4 2 6×19 8.0 6.0 16.0
11⁄4 7×37 18.0 14.0 37.0 7⁄8 2 6×19 11.0 8.1 21.0
1 2 6×19 14.0 10.0 28.0
13⁄8 7×37 22.0 16.0 44.0
11⁄8 2 6×19 18.0 13.0 35.0
11⁄2 7×37 26.0 19.0 52.0
11⁄4 2 6×37 21.0 15.0 41.0
1 Thesevalues only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater 13⁄8 2 6×37 25.0 19.0 50.0
where: D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent. 2 6×37
d=Diameter of rope body. 11⁄2 29.0 22.0 59.0
1 These
values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater
TABLE H–12—RATED CAPACITIES FOR CABLE where: D=Diameter of curvature around which rope is bent.
d=Diameter of rope body.
LAID GROMMET—HAND TUCKED 2 IWRC.
7×6×7 and 7×6×19 Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade

Rope
TABLE H–14—RATED CAPACITIES FOR CABLE
7×7×7 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope
LAID ENDLESS SLINGS-MECHANICAL JOINT
Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.) 7×7×7 and 7×7×19 Construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade
Rope 7×6×19 IWRC Construction Improved Plow Steel
Dia. Vertical Grade Rope
Constr. Vertical Choker
(inches) basket 1
Cable body Rated capacities, tons (2,000 lb.)
38 ⁄ 7×6×7 1.3 0.95 2.5
Dia. Vertical
⁄
9 16 7×6×7 2.8 2.1 5.6 Constr. Vertical Choker
(inches) basket 1
⁄
58 7×6×7 3.8 2.8 7.6
3⁄8 7×7×7 1.6 1.2 3.2 14⁄ 7×7×7 0.83 0.62 1.6
9⁄16 7×7×7 3.5 2.6 6.9 38⁄ 7×7×7 1.8 1.3 3.5
5⁄8 7×7×7 4.5 3.4 9.0 12⁄ 7×7×7 3.0 2.3 6.1
5⁄8 5⁄8 7×7×7 4.5 3.4 9.1
7×6×19 3.9 3.0 7.9
3⁄4 7×7×7 6.3 4.7 12.0
3⁄4 7×6×19 5.1 3.8 10.0
5⁄8 7×7×19 4.7 3.5 9.5
15⁄16 7×6×19 7.9 5.9 16.0 3⁄4 7×7×19 6.7 5.0 13.0
11⁄8 7×6×19 11.0 8.4 22.0 7⁄8 7×7×19 8.9 6.6 18.0
15⁄16 7×6×19 15.0 11.0 30.0
1 7×7×19 11.0 8.5 22.0
11⁄2 7×6×19 19.0 14.0 39.0 1 ⁄8
1 7×7×19 14.0 10.0 28.0
111⁄16 7×6×19 24.0 18.0 49.0 1 ⁄4
1 7×7×19 17.0 12.0 33.0
17⁄8 7×6×19 30.0 22.0 60.0 3⁄4 2 7×6×19 6.2 4.7 12.0
21⁄4 7×6×19 42.0 31.0 84.0 7⁄8 2 7×6×19 8.3 6.2 16.0
25⁄8 7×6×19 56.0 42.0 112.0 1 2 7×6×19 10.0 7.9 21.0
11⁄8 2 7×6×19 13.0 9.7 26.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d ratio is 5 or greater
11⁄4 2 7×6×19 16.0 12.0 31.0
where: D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body is
13⁄8 2 7×6×19 18.0 14.0 37.0
bent. d=Diameter of cable body.
11⁄2 2 7×6×19 22.0 16.0 43.0
1 These values only apply when the D/d value is 5 or great-
er where: D=Diameter of curvature around which cable body
is bent. d=Diameter of cable body.
2 IWRC.
230
VerDate Nov<24>2008
TABLE H–15—MANILA ROPE SLINGS
[Angle of rope to vertical shown in parentheses]
14:57 Aug 03, 2009

Rated capacity in pounds (safety factor=5)
Rope di- Nominal Minimum Eye and eye sling Endless sling
ameter weight per breaking
nominal in 100 ft. in strength Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal Basket hitch; angle of rope to horizontal
inches pounds in pounds Vertical Choker Vertical Choker
Jkt 217116
hitch hitch hitch hitch
90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°) 90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°)
12 ⁄ 7.5 2,650 550 250 1,100 900 750 550 950 500 1,900 1,700 1,400 950
9 16
⁄ 10.4 3,450 700 350 1,400 1,200 1,000 700 1,200 600 2,500 2,200 1,800 1,200
58
⁄ 13.3 4,400 900 450 1,800 1,500 1,200 900 1,600 800 3,200 2,700 2,200 1,600
PO 00000
3⁄4 16.7 5,400 1,100 550 2,200 1,900 1,500 1,100 2,000 950 3,900 3,400 2,800 2,000
13⁄16 19.5 6,500 1,300 650 2,600 2,300 1,800 1,300 2,300 1,200 4,700 4,100 3,300 2,300
7⁄8 22.5 7,700 1,500 750 3,100 2,700 2,200 1,500 2,800 1,400 5,600 4,800 3,900 2,800
1 27.0 9,000 1,800 900 3,600 3,100 2,600 1,800 3,200 1,600 6,500 5,600 4,600 3,200
1
1 ⁄16 31.3 10,500 2,100 1,100 4,200 3,600 3,000 2,100 3,800 1,900 7,600 6,600 5,400 3,800
11⁄8 36.0 12,000 2,400 1,200 4,800 4,200 3,400 2,400 4,300 2,200 8,600 7,500 6,100 4,300
Frm 00241
11⁄4 41.7 13,500 2,700 1,400 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700 4,900 2,400 9,700 8,400 6,900 4,900
15⁄16 47.9 15,000 3,000 1,500 6,000 5,200 4,300 3,000 5,400 2,700 11,000 9,400 7,700 5,400
11⁄2 59.9 18,500 3,700 1,850 7,400 6,400 5,200 3,700 6,700 3,300 13,500 11,500 9,400 6,700
15⁄8 74.6 22,500 4,500 2,300 9,000 7,800 6,400 4,500 8,100 4,100 16,000 14,000 11,500 8,000
13⁄4 89.3 26,500 5,300 2,700 10,500 9,200 7,500 5,300 9,500 4,800 19,000 16,500 13,500 9,500
Fmt 8010
2 107.5 31,000 6,200 3,100 12,500 10,500 8,800 6,200 11,000 5,600 22,500 19,500 16,000 11,000
231
21⁄3 125.0 36,000 7,200 3,600 14,500 12,500 10,000 7,200 13,000 6,500 26,000 22,500 18,500 13,000
21⁄4 146.0 41,000 8,200 4,100 16,500 14,000 11,500 8,200 15,000 7,400 29,500 25,500 21,000 15,000
21⁄2 166.7 46.500 9,300 4,700 18,500 16,000 13,000 9,300 16,500 8,400 33,500 29,000 23,500 16,500
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor
25⁄8 190.8 52,000 10,500 5,200 21,000 18,000 14,500 10,500 18,500 9,500 37,500 32,500 26,500 18,500
Sfmt 8010
TABLE H–16—NYLON ROPE SLINGS

Y:\SGML\217116.XXX
90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°) 90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°)
12 ⁄ 6.5 6,080 700 350 1,400 1,200 950 700 1,200 600 2,400 2,100 1,700 1,200
9 16
⁄ 8.3 7,600 850 400 1,700 1,500 1,200 850 1,500 750 3,000 2,600 2,200 1,500
217116
58 ⁄ 10.5 9,880 1,100 550 2,200 1,900 1,600 1,100 2,000 1,000 4,000 3,400 2,800 2,000
34 ⁄ 14.5 13,490 1,500 750 3,000 2,600 2,100 1,500 2,700 1,400 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700
13 16
⁄ 17.0 16,150 1,800 900 3,600 3,100 2,600 1,800 3,200 1,600 6,400 5,600 4,600 3,200
78
⁄ 20.0 19,000 2,100 1,100 4,200 3,700 3,000 2,100 3,800 1,900 7,600 6,600 5,400 3,800
1 26.0 23,750 2,600 1,300 5,300 4,600 3,700 2,600 4,800 2,400 9,500 8,200 6,700 4,800
§ 1926.251
11⁄16 29.0 27,360 3,000 1,500 6,100 5,300 4,300 3,000 5,500 2,700 11,000 9,500 7,700 5,500
VerDate Nov<24>2008
TABLE H–16—NYLON ROPE SLINGS—Continued
14:57 Aug 03, 2009

§ 1926.251
Jkt 217116
90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°) 90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°)
18
1 ⁄ 34.0 31,350 3,500 1,700 7,000 6,000 5,000 3,500 6,300 3,100 12,500 11,000 8,900 6,300
11⁄4 40.0 35,625 4,000 2,000 7,900 6,900 5,600 4,000 7,100 3,600 14,500 12,500 10,000 7,100
15⁄16 45.0 40,850 4,500 2,300 9,100 7,900 6,400 4,500 8,200 4,100 16,500 14,000 12,000 8,200
PO 00000
11⁄2 55.0 50,350 5,600 2,800 11,000 9,700 7,900 5,600 10,000 5,000 20,000 17,500 14,000 10,000
15⁄8 68.0 61,750 6,900 3,400 13,500 12,000 9,700 6,900 12,500 6,200 24,500 21,500 17,500 12,500
13⁄4 83.0 74,100 8,200 4,100 16,500 14,500 11,500 8,200 15,000 7,400 29,500 27,500 21,000 15,000
2 95.0 87,400 9,700 4,900 19,500 17,000 13,500 9,700 17,500 8,700 35,000 30,500 24,500 17,500
21⁄8 109.0 100,700 11,000 5,600 22,500 19,500 16,000 11,000 20,000 10,000 40,500 35,000 28,500 20,000
21⁄4 129.0 118,750 13,000 6,600 26,500 23,000 18,500 13,000 24,000 12,000 47,500 41,000 33,500 24,000
Frm 00242
21⁄2 149.0 133,000 15,000 7,400 29,500 25,500 21,000 15,000 26,500 13,500 53,000 46,000 37,500 26,500
25⁄8 168.0 153,900 17,100 8,600 34,000 29,500 24,000 17,000 31,000 15,500 61,500 53,500 43,500 31,000
TABLE H–17—POLYESTER ROPE SLINGS
Fmt 8010
232
Sfmt 8010
90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°) 90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°)
12 ⁄ 8.0 6,080 700 350 1,400 1,200 950 700 1,200 600 2,400 2,100 1,700 1,200
9 16
⁄ 10.2 7,600 850 400 1,700 1,500 1,200 850 1,500 750 3,000 2,600 2,200 1,500
58 ⁄ 13.0 9,500 1,100 550 2,100 1,800 1,500 1,100 1,900 950 3,800 3,300 2,700 1,900
34 ⁄ 17.5 11,875 1,300 650 2,600 2,300 1,900 1,300 2,400 1,200 4,800 4,100 3,400 2,400
13 16
⁄ 21.0 14,725 1,600 800 3,300 2,800 2,300 1,600 2,900 1,500 5,900 5,100 4,200 2,900
78
⁄ 25.0 17,100 1,900 950 3,800 3,300 2,700 1,900 3,400 1,700 6,800 5,900 4,800 3,400
Y:\SGML\217116.XXX
1 30.5 20,900 2,300 1,200 4,600 4,000 3,300 2,300 4,200 2,100 8,400 7,200 5,900 4,200
11⁄16 34.5 24,225 2,700 1,300 5,400 4,700 3,800 2,700 4,800 2,400 9,700 8,400 6,900 4,800
11⁄8 40.0 28,025 3,100 1,600 6,200 5,400 4,400 3,100 5,600 2,800 11,000 9,700 7,900 5,600
11⁄4 46.3 31,540 3,500 1,800 7,000 6,100 5,000 3,500 6,300 3,200 12,500 11,000 8,900 6,300
217116
15⁄16 52.5 35,625 4,000 2,000 7,900 6,900 5,600 4,000 7,100 3,600 14,500 12,500 10,000 7,100
11⁄2 66.8 44,460 4,900 2,500 9,900 8,600 7,000 4,900 8,900 4,400 18,000 15,500 12,500 8,900
15⁄8 82.0 54,150 6,000 3,000 12,000 10,400 8,500 6,000 11,000 5,400 21,500 19,000 15,500 11,000
13⁄4 98.0 64,410 7,200 3,600 14,500 12,500 10,000 7,200 13,000 6,400 26,000 22,500 18,000 13,000
2 118.0 76,000 8,400 4,200 17,000 14,500 12,000 8,400 15,000 7,600 30,500 26,500 21,500 15,000
29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
21⁄8 135.0 87,400 9,700 4,900 19,500 17,000 13,500 9,700 17,500 8,700 35,000 30,500 24,500 17,500
VerDate Nov<24>2008
21⁄4 157.0 101,650 11,500 5,700 22,500 19,500 16,000 11,500 20,500 10,000 40,500 35,000 29,000 20,500
21⁄2 181.0 115,900 13,000 6,400 26,000 22,500 18,000 13,000 23,000 11,500 46,500 40,000 33,000 23,000
25⁄8 205.0 130,150 14,500 7,200 29,000 25,000 20,500 14,500 26,000 13,000 52,000 45,000 37,000 26,000
14:57 Aug 03, 2009

TABLE H–18—POLYPROPYLENE ROPE SLINGS
Jkt 217116
PO 00000
90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°) 90° (0°) 60° (30°) 45° (45°) 30° (60°)
12 ⁄ 4.7 3,990 650 350 1,300 1,200 950 650 1,200 600 2,400 2,100 1,700 1,200
9 16
⁄ 6.1 4,845 800 400 1,600 1,400 1,100 800 1,500 750 2,900 2,500 2,100 1,500
58 ⁄ 7.5 5,890 1,000 500 2,000 1,700 1,400 1,000 1,800 900 3,500 3,100 2,500 1,800
34 ⁄ 10.7 8,075 1,300 700 2,700 2,300 1,900 1,300 2,400 1,200 4,900 4,200 3,400 2,400
Frm 00243
13 16
⁄ 12.7 9,405 1,600 800 3,100 2,700 2,200 1,600 2,800 1,400 5,600 4,900 4,000 2,800
78 ⁄ 15.0 10,925 1,800 900 3,600 3,200 2,600 1,800 3,300 1,600 6,600 5,700 4,600 3,300
1 18.0 13,300 2,200 1,100 4,400 3,800 3,100 2,200 4,000 2,000 8,000 6,900 5,600 4,000
1 16
1 ⁄ 20.4 15,200 2,500 1,300 5,100 4,400 3,600 2,500 4,600 2,300 9,100 7,900 6,500 4,600
Fmt 8010
11⁄8 23.7 17,385 2,900 1,500 5,800 5,000 4,100 2,900 5,200 2,600 10,500 9,000 7,400 5,200
233
11⁄4 27.0 19,950 3,300 1,700 6,700 5,800 4,700 3,300 6,000 3,000 12,000 10,500 8,500 6,000
15⁄16 30.5 22,325 3,700 1,900 7,400 6,400 5,300 3,700 6,700 3,400 13,500 11,500 9,500 6,700
11⁄2 38.5 28,215 4,700 2,400 9,400 8,100 6,700 4,700 8,500 4,200 17,000 14,500 12,000 8,500
15⁄8 47.5 34,200 5,700 2,900 11,500 9,900 8,100 5,700 10,500 5,100 20,500 18,000 14,500 10,500
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor
Sfmt 8010
13⁄4 57.0 40,850 6,800 3,400 13,500 12,000 9,600 6,800 12,500 6,100 24,500 21,000 17,500 12,500
2 69.0 49,400 8,200 4,100 16,500 14,500 11,500 8,200 15,000 7,400 29,500 25,500 21,000 15,000
21⁄8 80.0 57,950 9,700 4,800 19,500 16,500 13,500 9,700 17,500 8,700 35,000 30,100 24,500 17,500
1
2 ⁄4 92.0 65,550 11,000 5,500 22,000 19,000 15,500 11,000 19,500 9,900 39,500 34,000 28,000 19,500
21⁄2 107.0 76,000 12,500 6,300 25,500 22,000 18,000 12,500 23,000 11,500 45,500 39,500 32,500 23,000
25⁄8 120.0 85,500 14,500 7,100 28,500 24,500 20,000 14,500 25,500 13,000 51,500 44,500 36,500 25,500
Y:\SGML\217116.XXX
217116
§ 1926.251
TABLE H–19—SAFE WORKING LOADS FOR (d) Disposal of waste material or de-
SHACKLES bris by burning shall comply with local
[In tons of 2,000 pounds] fire regulations.
(e) All solvent waste, oily rags, and
Pin diame- Safe work-
Material size (inches ter (inches) ing load flammable liquids shall be kept in fire
resistant covered containers until re-
⁄ ...................................................
12 ⁄
58 1.4
⁄ ...................................................
58 ⁄
34 2.2
moved from worksite.
⁄ ...................................................
34 ⁄
78 3.2
7⁄8 ...................................................
1 .....................................................
1
11⁄8
4.3
5.6
Subpart I—Tools—Hand and
11⁄8 ................................................. 1 ⁄4
1 6.7 Power
11⁄4 ................................................. 13⁄8 8.2
13⁄8 ................................................. 11⁄2 10.0
11⁄2 ................................................. 15⁄8 11.9 AUTHORITY: Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
13⁄4 ................................................. 2 16.2 pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
2 ..................................................... 21⁄4 21.2 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or
TABLE H–20—NUMBER AND SPACING OF U-
5–2002 (67 FR 65008), as applicable; and 29 CFR
BOLT WIRE ROPE CLIPS part 1911. Section 1926.307 also issued under 5
Number of clips U.S.C. 553.
Minimum
Improved plow steel, rope spacing
diameter (inches) Drop Other (inches) § 1926.300 General requirements.
forged material
(a) Condition of tools. All hand and
⁄ .....................................
12 3 4 3
⁄ .....................................
58 3 4 33⁄4
power tools and similar equipment,
⁄ .....................................
34 4 5 4 ⁄2
1 whether furnished by the employer or
7⁄8 ..................................... 4 5 51⁄4 the employee, shall be maintained in a
1 ....................................... 5 6 6 safe condition.
11⁄8 ................................... 6 6 63⁄4
11⁄4 ................................... 6 7 71⁄2 (b) Guarding. (1) When power operated
13⁄8 ................................... 7 7 81⁄4 tools are designed to accommodate
11⁄2 ................................... 7 8 9 guards, they shall be equipped with
such guards when in use.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (2) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35173, June 30, 1993] sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels,
chains, or other reciprocating, rotating
§ 1926.252 Disposal of waste materials. or moving parts of equipment shall be
(a) Whenever materials are dropped guarded if such parts are exposed to
more than 20 feet to any point lying contact by employees or otherwise cre-
outside the exterior walls of the build- ate a hazard. Guarding shall meet the
ing, an enclosed chute of wood, or requirements as set forth in American
equivalent material, shall be used. For National Standards Institute, B15.1–
the purpose of this paragraph, an en- 1953 (R1958), Safety Code for Mechan-
closed chute is a slide, closed in on all ical Power-Transmission Apparatus.
sides, through which material is moved (3) Types of guarding. One or more
from a high place to a lower one. methods of machine guarding shall be
(b) When debris is dropped through provided to protect the operator and
holes in the floor without the use of other employees in the machine area
chutes, the area onto which the mate- from hazards such as those created by
rial is dropped shall be completely en- point of operation, ingoing nip points,
closed with barricades not less than 42 rotating parts, flying chips and sparks.
inches high and not less than 6 feet Examples of guarding methods are—
back from the projected edge of the barrier guards, two-hand tripping de-
opening above. Signs warning of the vices, electronic safety devices, etc.
hazard of falling materials shall be (4) Point of operation guarding. (i)
posted at each level. Removal shall not Point of operation is the area on a ma-
be permitted in this lower area until chine where work is actually performed
debris handling ceases above. upon the material being processed.
(c) All scrap lumber, waste material, (ii) The point of operation of ma-
and rubbish shall be removed from the chines whose operation exposes an em-
immediate work area as the work pro- ployee to injury, shall be guarded. The
gresses. guarding device shall be in conformity
234
with any appropriate standards there-

for, or, in the absence of applicable spe-
cific standards, shall be so designed
and constructed as to prevent the oper-
ator from having any part of his body
in the danger zone during the operating
cycle.
(iii) Special handtools for placing and Figure I–1 Figure I–2
removing material shall be such as to Correct
permit easy handling of material with- Showing adjustable tongue giving required
out the operator placing a hand in the angle protection for all sizes of wheel used.
danger zone. Such tools shall not be in
lieu of other guarding required by this
section, but can only be used to supple-
ment protection provided.
(iv) The following are some of the
machines which usually require point
of operation guarding:
(a) Guillotine cutters. Figure I–3 Figure I–4
(b) Shears. Correct
(c) Alligator shears. Showing movable guard with opening small
(d) Power presses. enough to give required protection for the
smallest size wheel used.
(e) Milling machines.
(f) Power saws.
(g) Jointers.
(h) Portable power tools.
(i) Forming rolls and calenders.
(5) Exposure of blades. When the pe-
riphery of the blades of a fan is less
than 7 feet (2.128 m) above the floor or Figure I–5 Figure I–6
working level, the blades shall be
Incorrect
guarded. The guard shall have openings
Showing movable guard with size of opening
no larger than 1/2 inch (1.27 cm). correct for full size wheel but too large for
(6) Anchoring fixed machinery. Ma- smaller wheel.
chines designed for a fixed location
(8) Bench and floor stands. The angu-
shall be securely anchored to prevent
lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe-
walking or moving.
riphery and sides for safety guards used
(7) Guarding of abrasive wheel machin- on machines known as bench and floor
ery—exposure adjustment. Safety guards stands should not exceed 90° or one-
of the types described in paragraphs (b) fourth of the periphery. This exposure
(8) and (9) of this section, where the op- shall begin at a point not more than 65°
erator stands in front of the opening, above the horizontal plane of the wheel
shall be constructed so that the periph- spindle. (See Figures I–7 and I–8 and
eral protecting member can be ad- paragraph (b)(7) of this section.) ER07MR96.003</GPH>
justed to the constantly decreasing di-

ameter of the wheel. The maximum an-
gular exposure above the horizontal
plane of the wheel spindle as specified
in paragraphs (b) (8) and (9) of this sec-
ER07MR96.002</GPH>
tion shall never be exceeded, and the

distance between the wheel periphery
and the adjustable tongue or the end of
the peripheral member at the top shall Figure I–7 Figure I–8
never exceed 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm). (See
ER07MR96.001</GPH>
Wherever the nature of the work requires

Figures I–1 through I–6.) contact with the wheel below the hori-
zontal plane of the spindle, the exposure
235
ER07MR96.000</GPH>
shall not exceed 125° (See Figures I–9 and I– accomplished by a single motion of the
10.) same finger or fingers that turn it on.
(3) All other hand-held powered tools,
such as circular saws, chain saws, and
percussion tools without positive ac-
cessory holding means, shall be
equipped with a constant pressure
switch that will shut off the power
when the pressure is released.
(4) The requirements of this para-
Figure I–9 Figure I–10 graph shall become effective on July
15, 1972.
(9) Cylindrical grinders. The maximum (5) Exception: This paragraph does
angular exposure of the grinding wheel not apply to concrete vibrators, con-
periphery and sides for safety guards
crete breakers, powered tampers, jack
used on cylindrical grinding machines
hammers, rock drills, and similar hand
shall not exceed 180°. This exposure
operated power tools.
shall begin at a point not more than 65°
above the horizontal plane of the wheel [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
spindle. (See Figures I–11 and I–12 and 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993;
paragraph (b)(7) of this section.) 61 FR 9250, Mar. 7, 1996]
§ 1926.301 Hand tools.

(a) Employers shall not issue or per-
mit the use of unsafe hand tools.
(b) Wrenches, including adjustable,
pipe, end, and socket wrenches shall
not be used when jaws are sprung to
the point that slippage occurs.
Figure I–11 Figure I–12 (c) Impact tools, such as drift pins,
(c) Personal protective equipment. Em- wedges, and chisels, shall be kept free
ployees using hand and power tools and of mushroomed heads.
exposed to the hazard of falling, flying, (d) The wooden handles of tools shall
abrasive, and splashing objects, or ex- be kept free of splinters or cracks and
posed to harmful dusts, fumes, mists, shall be kept tight in the tool.
vapors, or gases shall be provided with
the particular personal protective § 1926.302 Power-operated hand tools.
equipment necessary to protect them (a) Electric power-operated tools. (1)
from the hazard. All personal protec- Electric power operated tools shall ei-
tive equipment shall meet the require- ther be of the approved double-insu-
ments and be maintained according to lated type or grounded in accordance
subparts D and E of this part. with subpart K of this part.
(d) Switches. (1) All hand-held pow- (2) The use of electric cords for hoist-
ered platen sanders, grinders with ing or lowering tools shall not be per-
wheels 2-inch diameter or less, routers, mitted.
planers, laminate trimmers, nibblers, (b) Pneumatic power tools. (1) Pneu-
shears, scroll saws, and jigsaws with matic power tools shall be secured to
blade shanks one-fourth of an inch the hose or whip by some positive
wide or less may be equipped with only means to prevent the tool from becom-
a positive ‘‘on-off’’ control. ing accidentally disconnected.
(2) All hand-held powered drills, tap- (2) Safety clips or retainers shall be
pers, fastener drivers, horizontal, securely installed and maintained on
vertical, and angle grinders with pneumatic impact (percussion) tools to
wheels greater than 2 inches in diame- prevent attachments from being acci-
ter, disc sanders, belt sanders, recipro- dentally expelled.
cating saws, saber saws, and other (3) All pneumatically driven nailers,
similar operating powered tools shall staplers, and other similar equipment
be equipped with a momentary contact provided with automatic fastener feed,
ER07MR96.005</GPH>
‘‘on-off’’ control and may have a lock- which operate at more than 100 p.s.i.
on control provided that turnoff can be pressure at the tool shall have a safety
236
ER07MR96.004</GPH>
device on the muzzle to prevent the (d) Hydraulic power tools. (1) The fluid
tool from ejecting fasteners, unless the used in hydraulic powered tools shall
muzzle is in contact with the work sur- be fire-resistant fluids approved under
face. Schedule 30 of the U.S. Bureau of
(4) Compressed air shall not be used Mines, Department of the Interior, and
for cleaning purposes except where re- shall retain its operating characteris-
duced to less than 30 p.s.i. and then tics at the most extreme temperatures
only with effective chip guarding and to which it will be exposed.
personal protective equipment which (2) The manufacturer’s safe operating
meets the requirements of subpart E of pressures for hoses, valves, pipes, fil-
this part. The 30 p.s.i. requirement does ters, and other fittings shall not be ex-
not apply for concrete form, mill scale ceeded.
and similar cleaning purposes. (e) Powder-actuated tools. (1) Only em-
(5) The manufacturer’s safe operating ployees who have been trained in the
pressure for hoses, pipes, valves, filters, operation of the particular tool in use
and other fittings shall not be exceed- shall be allowed to operate a powder-
ed, actuated tool.
(6) The use of hoses for hoisting or (2) The tool shall be tested each day
lowering tools shall not be permitted. before loading to see that safety de-
(7) All hoses exceeding 1⁄2-inch inside vices are in proper working condition.
diameter shall have a safety device at The method of testing shall be in ac-
the source of supply or branch line to cordance with the manufacturer’s rec-
reduce pressure in case of hose failure. ommended procedure.
(8) Airless spray guns of the type (3) Any tool found not in proper
which atomize paints and fluids at high working order, or that develops a de-
pressures (1,000 pounds or more per fect during use, shall be immediately
square inch) shall be equipped with removed from service and not used
automatic or visible manual safety de- until properly repaired.
vices which will prevent pulling of the (4) Personal protective equipment
trigger to prevent release of the paint shall be in accordance with subpart E
or fluid until the safety device is of this part.
manually released.
(5) Tools shall not be loaded until
(9) In lieu of the above, a diffuser nut just prior to the intended firing time.
which will prevent high pressure, high Neither loaded nor empty tools are to
velocity release, while the nozzle tip is
be pointed at any employees. Hands
removed, plus a nozzle tip guard which
shall be kept clear of the open barrel
will prevent the tip from coming into
end.
contact with the operator, or other
equivalent protection, shall be pro- (6) Loaded tools shall not be left un-
vided. attended.
(10) Abrasive blast cleaning nozzles. (7) Fasteners shall not be driven into
The blast cleaning nozzles shall be very hard or brittle materials includ-
equipped with an operating valve which ing, but not limited to, cast iron,
must be held open manually. A support glazed tile, surface-hardened steel,
shall be provided on which the nozzle glass block, live rock, face brick, or
may be mounted when it is not in use. hollow tile.
(c) Fuel powered tools. (1) All fuel pow- (8) Driving into materials easily pen-
ered tools shall be stopped while being etrated shall be avoided unless such
refueled, serviced, or maintained, and materials are backed by a substance
fuel shall be transported, handled, and that will prevent the pin or fastener
stored in accordance with subpart F of from passing completely through and
this part. creating a flying missile hazard on the
(2) When fuel powered tools are used other side.
in enclosed spaces, the applicable re- (9) No fastener shall be driven into a
quirements for concentrations of toxic spalled area caused by an unsatisfac-

gases and use of personal protective tory fastening.
equipment, as outlined in subparts D (10) Tools shall not be used in an ex-
and E of this part, shall apply. plosive or flammable atmosphere.
237
(11) All tools shall be used with the shall be strong enough to withstand
correct shield, guard, or attachment the effect of a bursting wheel.
recommended by the manufacturer. (2) Floor and bench-mounted grinders
(12) Powder-actuated tools used by shall be provided with work rests
employees shall meet all other applica- which are rigidly supported and readily
ble requirements of American National adjustable. Such work rests shall be
Standards Institute, A10.3–1970, Safety kept at a distance not to exceed one-
Requirements for Explosive-Actuated eighth inch from the surface of the
Fastening Tools. wheel.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, (3) Cup type wheels used for external
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] grinding shall be protected by either a
revolving cup guard or a band type
§ 1926.303 Abrasive wheels and tools. guard in accordance with the provi-
(a) Power. All grinding machines sions of the American National Stand-
shall be supplied with sufficient power ards Institute, B7.1–1970 Safety Code
to maintain the spindle speed at safe for the Use, Care, and Protection of Ab-
levels under all conditions of normal rasive Wheels. All other portable abra-
operation. sive wheels used for external grinding,
(b) Guarding. (1) Grinding machines shall be provided with safety guards
shall be equipped with safety guards in (protection hoods) meeting the require-
conformance with the requirements of ments of paragraph (c)(5) of this sec-
American National Standards Insti- tion, except as follows:
tute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the Use, (i) When the work location makes it
Care and Protection of Abrasive impossible, a wheel equipped with safe-
Wheels, and paragraph (d) of this sec- ty flanges, as described in paragraph
tion. (c)(6) of this section, shall be used;
(2) Guard design. The safety guard (ii) When wheels 2 inches or less in
shall cover the spindle end, nut, and diameter which are securely mounted
flange projections. The safety guard on the end of a steel mandrel are used.
shall be mounted so as to maintain
(4) Portable abrasive wheels used for
proper alignment with the wheel, and
internal grinding shall be provided
the strength of the fastenings shall ex-
with safety flanges (protection flanges)
ceed the strength of the guard, except:
meeting the requirements of paragraph
(i) Safety guards on all operations
(c)(6) of this section, except as follows:
where the work provides a suitable
measure of protection to the operator, (i) When wheels 2 inches or less in di-
may be so constructed that the spindle ameter which are securely mounted on
end, nut, and outer flange are exposed; the end of a steel mandrel are used;
and where the nature of the work is (ii) If the wheel is entirely within the
such as to entirely cover the side of the work being ground while in use.
wheel, the side covers of the guard may (5) When safety guards are required,
be omitted; and they shall be so mounted as to main-
(ii) The spindle end, nut, and outer tain proper alignment with the wheel,
flange may be exposed on machines de- and the guard and its fastenings shall
signed as portable saws. be of sufficient strength to retain frag-
(c) Use of abrasive wheels. (1) Floor ments of the wheel in case of acci-
stand and bench mounted abrasive dental breakage. The maximum angu-
wheels, used for external grinding, lar exposure of the grinding wheel pe-
shall be provided with safety guards riphery and sides shall not exceed 180°.
(protection hoods). The maximum an- (6) When safety flanges are required,
gular exposure of the grinding wheel they shall be used only with wheels de-
periphery and sides shall be not more signed to fit the flanges. Only safety
than 90°, except that when work re- flanges, of a type and design and prop-
quires contact with the wheel below erly assembled so as to ensure that the
the horizontal plane of the spindle, the pieces of the wheel will be retained in
angular exposure shall not exceed 125°. case of accidental breakage, shall be
In either case, the exposure shall begin used.
not more than 65° above the horizontal (7) All abrasive wheels shall be close-
plane of the spindle. Safety guards ly inspected and ring-tested before
238
mounting to ensure that they are free the feed rolls or other moving parts
from cracks or defects. covered or guarded so as to protect the
(8) Grinding wheels shall fit freely on operator from hazardous points.
the spindle and shall not be forced on. (d) Guarding. All portable, power-
The spindle nut shall be tightened only driven circular saws shall be equipped
enough to hold the wheel in place. with guards above and below the base
(9) All employees using abrasive plate or shoe. The upper guard shall
wheels shall be protected by eye pro- cover the saw to the depth of the teeth,
tection equipment in accordance with except for the minimum arc required
the requirements of subpart E of this to permit the base to be tilted for bevel
part, except when adequate eye protec- cuts. The lower guard shall cover the
tion is afforded by eye shields which saw to the depth of the teeth, except
are permanently attached to the bench for the minimum arc required to allow
or floor stand. proper retraction and contact with the
(d) Other requirements. All abrasive work. When the tool is withdrawn from
wheels and tools used by employees the work, the lower guard shall auto-
shall meet other applicable require- matically and instantly return to the
ments of American National Standards covering position.
Institute, B7.1–1970, Safety Code for the (e) Personal protective equipment. All
Use, Care and Protection of Abrasive personal protective equipment pro-
Wheels. vided for use shall conform to subpart
(e) Work rests. On offhand grinding E of this part.
machines, work rests shall be used to (f) Other requirements. All wood-
support the work. They shall be of working tools and machinery shall
rigid construction and designed to be meet other applicable requirements of
adjustable to compensate for wheel American National Standards Insti-
wear. Work rests shall be kept adjusted tute, 01.1–1961, Safety Code for Wood-
closely to the wheel with a maximum working Machinery.
opening of 1⁄8 inch (0.3175 cm) to pre- (g) Radial saws. (1) The upper hood
vent the work from being jammed be- shall completely enclose the upper por-
tween the wheel and the rest, which tion of the blade down to a point that
may cause wheel breakage. The work will include the end of the saw arbor.
rest shall be securely clamped after The upper hood shall be constructed in
each adjustment. The adjustment shall such a manner and of such material
not be made with the wheel in motion. that it will protect the operator from
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, flying splinters, broken saw teeth, etc.,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993] and will deflect sawdust away from the
operator. The sides of the lower ex-
§ 1926.304 Woodworking tools. posed portion of the blade shall be
(a) Disconnect switches. All fixed guarded to the full diameter of the
power driven woodworking tools shall blade by a device that will automati-
be provided with a disconnect switch cally adjust itself to the thickness of
that can either be locked or tagged in the stock and remain in contact with
the off position. stock being cut to give maximum pro-
(b) Speeds. The operating speed shall tection possible for the operation being
be etched or otherwise permanently performed.
marked on all circular saws over 20 (h) Hand-fed crosscut table saws. (1)
inches in diameter or operating at over Each circular crosscut table saw shall
10,000 peripheral feet per minute. Any be guarded by a hood which shall meet
saw so marked shall not be operated at all the requirements of paragraph (i)(1)
a speed other than that marked on the of this section for hoods for circular
blade. When a marked saw is reten- ripsaws.
sioned for a different speed, the mark- (i) Hand-fed ripsaws. (1) Each circular
ing shall be corrected to show the new hand-fed ripsaw shall be guarded by a
speed. hood which shall completely enclose
(c) Self-feed. Automatic feeding de- that portion of the saw above the table
vices shall be installed on machines and that portion of the saw above the
whenever the nature of the work will material being cut. The hood and
permit. Feeder attachments shall have mounting shall be arranged so that the
239
hood will automatically adjust itself to (b) For jacks sent out of shop for spe-
the thickness of and remain in contact cial work, when sent out and when re-
with the material being cut but it shall turned,
not offer any considerable resistance to (c) For a jack subjected to abnormal
insertion of material to saw or to pas- load or shock, immediately before and
sage of the material being sawed. The immediately thereafter.
hood shall be made of adequate (v) Repair or replacement parts shall
strength to resist blows and strains in- be examined for possible defects.
cidental to reasonable operation, ad- (vi) Jacks which are out of order
justing, and handling, and shall be so shall be tagged accordingly, and shall
designed as to protect the operator not be used until repairs are made.
from flying splinters and broken saw [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
teeth. It shall be made of material that 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
is soft enough so that it will be un- 58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993]
likely to cause tooth breakage. The
hood shall be so mounted as to insure § 1926.306 Air receivers.
that its operation will be positive, reli- (a) General requirements—(1) Applica-
able, and in true alignment with the tion. This section applies to compressed
saw; and the mounting shall be ade- air receivers, and other equipment used
quate in strength to resist any reason- in providing and utilizing compressed
able side thrust or other force tending air for performing operations such as
to throw it out of line. cleaning, drilling, hoisting, and chip-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
ping. On the other hand, however, this
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35175, June 30, 1993; section does not deal with the special
61 FR 9251, Mar. 7, 1996] problems created by using compressed
air to convey materials nor the prob-
§ 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, lems created when men work in com-
screw, and hydraulic. pressed air as in tunnels and caissons.
(a) General requirements. (1) The man- This section is not intended to apply to
ufacturer’s rated capacity shall be leg- compressed air machinery and equip-
ibly marked on all jacks and shall not ment used on transportation vehicles
be exceeded. such as steam railroad cars, electric
(2) All jacks shall have a positive railway cars, and automotive equip-
stop to prevent overtravel. ment.
(2) New and existing equipment. (i) All
(b) [Reserved]
new air receivers installed after the ef-
(c) Blocking. When it is necessary to fective date of these regulations shall
provide a firm foundation, the base of be constructed in accordance with the
the jack shall be blocked or cribbed. 1968 edition of the A.S.M.E. Boiler and
Where there is a possibility of slippage Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII.
of the metal cap of the jack, a wood (ii) All safety valves used shall be
block shall be placed between the cap constructed, installed, and maintained
and the load. in accordance with the A.S.M.E. Boiler
(d)(1) Operation and maintenance. (i) and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII
After the load has been raised, it shall Edition 1968.
be cribbed, blocked, or otherwise se- (b) Installation and equipment require-
cured at once. ments—(1) Installation. Air receivers
(ii) Hydraulic jacks exposed to freez- shall be so installed that all drains,
ing temperatures shall be supplied with handholes, and manholes therein are
an adequate antifreeze liquid. easily accessible. Under no cir-
(iii) All jacks shall be properly lubri- cumstances shall an air receiver be
cated at regular intervals. buried underground or located in an in-
(iv) Each jack shall be thoroughly inaccessible place.
spected at times which depend upon (2) Drains and traps. A drain pipe and
the service conditions. Inspections valve shall be installed at the lowest
shall be not less frequent than the fol- point of every air receiver to provide
lowing: for the removal of accumulated oil and
(a) For constant or intermittent use water. Adequate automatic traps may
at one locality, once every 6 months, be installed in addition to drain valves.
240
The drain valve on the air receiver of nip-point belt and pulley guards are
shall be opened and the receiver com- required, provided the guard shall ex-
pletely drained frequently and at such tend at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) beyond
intervals as to prevent the accumula- the rim of the pulley on the in-running
tion of excessive amounts of liquid in and off-running sides of the belt and at
the receiver. least 2 inches (5.08 cm) away from the
(3) Gages and valves. (i) Every air re- rim and face of the pulley in all other
ceiver shall be equipped with an indi- directions.
cating pressure gage (so located as to (4) This section covers the principal
be readily visible) and with one or features with which power trans-
more spring-loaded safety valves. The mission safeguards shall comply.
total relieving capacity of such safety (b) Prime-mover guards—(1) Flywheels.
valves shall be such as to prevent pres- Flywheels located so that any part is 7
sure in the receiver from exceeding the
feet (2.128 m) or less above floor or
maximum allowable working pressure
platform shall be guarded in accord-
of the receiver by more than 10 per-
ance with the requirements of this sub-
cent.
paragraph:
(ii) No valve of any type shall be
placed between the air receiver and its (i) With an enclosure of sheet, per-
safety valve or valves. forated, or expanded metal, or woven
(iii) Safety appliances, such as safety wire;
valves, indicating devices and control- (ii) With guard rails placed not less
ling devices, shall be constructed, lo- than 15 inches (38.1 cm) nor more than
cated, and installed so that they can- 20 inches (50.8 cm) from rim. When
not be readily rendered inoperative by flywheel extends into pit or is within 12
any means, including the elements. inches (30.48 cm) of floor, a standard
(iv) All safety valves shall be tested toeboard shall also be provided;
frequently and at regular intervals to (iii) When the upper rim of flywheel
determine whether they are in good op- protrudes through a working floor, it
erating condition. shall be entirely enclosed or sur-
[58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993] rounded by a guardrail and toeboard.
(iv) For flywheels with smooth rims 5
§ 1926.307 Mechanical power-trans- feet (1.52 m) or less in diameter, where
mission apparatus. the preceding methods cannot be ap-
(a) General requirements. (1) This sec- plied, the following may be used: A
tion covers all types and shapes of disk attached to the flywheel in such
power-transmission belts, except the manner as to cover the spokes of the
following when operating at two hun- wheel on the exposed side and present a
dred and fifty (250) feet per minute or smooth surface and edge, at the same
less: (i) Flat belts 1 inch (2.54 cm) or time providing means for periodic in-
less in width, (ii) flat belts 2 inches spection. An open space, not exceeding
(5.08 cm) or less in width which are free 4 inches (10.16 cm) in width, may be left
from metal lacings or fasteners, (iii) between the outside edge of the disk
round belts 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) or less in and the rim of the wheel if desired, to
diameter; and (iv) single strand V- facilitate turning the wheel over.
belts, the width of which is thirteen Where a disk is used, the keys or other
thirty-seconds (13⁄32) inch or less. dangerous projections not covered by
(2) Vertical and inclined belts (para- disk shall be cut off or covered. This
graphs (e) (3) and (4) of this section) if subdivision does not apply to flywheels
not more than 21⁄2 inches (6.35 cm) wide with solid web centers.
and running at a speed of less than one (v) Adjustable guard to be used for
thousand (1,000) feet per minute, and if starting engine or for running adjust-
free from metal lacings or fastenings ment may be provided at the flywheel
may be guarded with a nip-point belt of gas or oil engines. A slot opening for
and pulley guard. jack bar will be permitted.
(3) For the Textile Industry, because (vi) Wherever flywheels are above
of the presence of excessive deposits of working areas, guards shall be in-
lint, which constitute a serious fire stalled having sufficient strength to
hazard, the sides and face sections only hold the weight of the flywheel in the
241
event of a shaft or wheel mounting fail- unless guarded by nonrotating caps or

ure. safety sleeves.
(2) Cranks and connecting rods. Cranks (ii) Unused keyways shall be filled up
and connecting rods, when exposed to or covered.
contact, shall be guarded in accordance (5) Power-transmission apparatus lo-
with paragraphs (m) and (n) of this sec- cated in basements. All mechanical
tion, or by a guardrail as described in power transmission apparatus located
paragraph (o)(5) of this section. in basements, towers, and rooms used
(3) Tail rods or extension piston rods. exclusively for power transmission
Tail rods or extension piston rods shall equipment shall be guarded in accord-
be guarded in accordance with para- ance with this section, except that the
graphs (m) and (o) of this section, or by requirements for safeguarding belts,
a guardrail on sides and end, with a pulleys, and shafting need not be com-
clearance of not less than 15 (38.1 cm) plied with when the following require-
nor more than 20 inches (50.8 cm) when ments are met:
rod is fully extended. (i) The basement, tower, or room oc-
(c) Shafting—(1) Installation. (i) Each cupied by transmission equipment is
continuous line of shafting shall be se- locked against unauthorized entrance.
cured in position against excessive end- (ii) The vertical clearance in passage-
ways between the floor and power
wise movement.
transmission beams, ceiling, or any
(ii) Inclined and vertical shafts, par-
other objects, is not less than 5 ft. 6 in.
ticularly inclined idler shafts, shall be
(1.672 m).
securely held in position against end- (iii) The intensity of illumination
wise thrust. conforms to the requirements of ANSI
(2) Guarding horizontal shafting. (i) All A11.1–1965 (R–1970).
exposed parts of horizontal shafting 7 (iv) [Reserved]
feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or (v) The route followed by the oiler is
working platform, excepting runways protected in such manner as to prevent
used exclusively for oiling, or running accident.
adjustments, shall be protected by a (d) Pulleys—(1) Guarding. Pulleys, any
stationary casing enclosing shafting parts of which are 7 feet (2.128 m) or
completely or by a trough enclosing less from the floor or working plat-
sides and top or sides and bottom of form, shall be guarded in accordance
shafting as location requires. with the standards specified in para-
(ii) Shafting under bench machines graphs (m) and (o) of this section. Pul-
shall be enclosed by a stationary cas- leys serving as balance wheels (e.g.,
ing, or by a trough at sides and top or punch presses) on which the point of
sides and bottom, as location requires. contact between belt and pulley is
The sides of the trough shall come more than 6 ft. 6 in. (1.976 m) from the
within at least 6 inches (15.24 cm) of floor or platform may be guarded with
the underside of table, or if shafting is a disk covering the spokes.
located near floor within 6 inches (15.24 (2) Location of pulleys. (i) Unless the
cm) of floor. In every case the sides of distance to the nearest fixed pulley,
trough shall extend at least 2 inches clutch, or hanger exceeds the width of
(5.08 cm) beyond the shafting or protu- the belt used, a guide shall be provided
berance. to prevent the belt from leaving the
(3) Guarding vertical and inclined pulley on the side where insufficient
shafting. Vertical and inclined shafting clearance exists.
7 feet (2.128 m) or less from floor or (ii) [Reserved]
working platform, excepting mainte- (3) Broken pulleys. Pulleys with
nance runways, shall be enclosed with cracks, or pieces broken out of rims,
a stationary casing in accordance with shall not be used.
requirements of paragraphs (m) and (o) (4) Pulley speeds. Pulleys intended to
of this section. operate at rim speed in excess of manu-
(4) Projecting shaft ends. (i) Projecting facturers normal recommendations

shaft ends shall present a smooth edge shall be specially designed and care-
and end and shall not project more fully balanced for the speed at which
than one-half the diameter of the shaft they are to operate.
242
(e) Belt, rope, and chain drives—(1) ards in paragraphs (m) and (o) of this
Horizontal belts and ropes. (i) Where section.
both runs of horizontal belts are 7 feet (ii) All guards for inclined belts shall
(2.128 m) or less from the floor level, be arranged in such a manner that a
the guard shall extend to at least 15 minimum clearance of 7 feet (2.128 m)
inches (38.1 cm) above the belt or to a is maintained between belt and floor at
standard height except that where both any point outside of guard.
runs of a horizontal belt are 42 inches (4) Vertical belts. Vertical belts run-
(106.68 cm) or less from the floor, the ning over a lower pulley more than 7
belt shall be fully enclosed. feet (2.128 m) above floor or platform
(ii) In powerplants or power-develop- shall be guarded at the bottom in the
ment rooms, a guardrail may be used same manner as horizontal overhead
in lieu of the guard required by para- belts, if conditions are as stated in
graph (e)(1)(i) of this section. paragraphs (e)(2)(ii) (a) and (c) of this
(2) Overhead horizontal belts. (i) Over- section.
head horizontal belts, with lower parts (5) Cone-pulley belts. (i) The cone belt
7 feet (2.128 m) or less from the floor or and pulley shall be equipped with a belt
platform, shall be guarded on sides and shifter so constructed as to adequately
bottom in accordance with paragraph guard the nip point of the belt and pul-
(o)(3) of this section. ley. If the frame of the belt shifter does
(ii) Horizontal overhead belts more not adequately guard the nip point of
than 7 feet (2.128 m) above floor or plat- the belt and pulley, the nip point shall
form shall be guarded for their entire be further protected by means of a
length under the following conditions: vertical guard placed in front of the
(a) If located over passageways or pulley and extending at least to the top
work places and traveling 1,800 feet or of the largest step of the cone.
more per minute. (ii) If the belt is of the endless type
or laced with rawhide laces, and a belt
(b) If center to center distance be-
shifter is not desired, the belt will be
tween pulleys is 10 feet (3.04 m) or
considered guarded if the nip point of
more.
the belt and pulley is protected by a
(c) If belt is 8 inches (20.32 cm) or
nip point guard located in front of the
more in width.
cone extending at least to the top of
(iii) Where the upper and lower runs the largest step of the cone, and formed
of horizontal belts are so located that to show the contour of the cone in
passage of persons between them would order to give the nip point of the belt
be possible, the passage shall be either: and pulley the maximum protection.
(a) Completely barred by a guardrail (iii) If the cone is located less than 3
or other barrier in accordance with feet (0.912 m) from the floor or working
paragraphs (m) and (o) of this section; platform, the cone pulley and belt shall
or be guarded to a height of 3 feet (0.912
(b) Where passage is regarded as nec- m) regardless of whether the belt is
essary, there shall be a platform over endless or laced with rawhide.
the lower run guarded on either side by (6) Belt tighteners. (i) Suspended
a railing completely filled in with wire counterbalanced tighteners and all
mesh or other filler, or by a solid bar- parts thereof shall be of substantial
rier. The upper run shall be so guarded construction and securely fastened; the
as to prevent contact therewith either bearings shall be securely capped.
by the worker or by objects carried by Means must be provided to prevent
him. In powerplants only the lower run tightener from falling, in case the belt
of the belt need be guarded. breaks.
(iv) Overhead chain and link belt (ii) Where suspended counterweights
drives are governed by the same rules are used and not guarded by location,
as overhead horizontal belts and shall they shall be so encased as to prevent
be guarded in the same manner as accident.
belts. (f) Gears, sprockets, and chains—(1)

(3) Vertical and inclined belts. (i) Gears. Gears shall be guarded in accord-
Vertical and inclined belts shall be en- ance with one of the following meth-
closed by a guard conforming to stand- ods:
243
(i) By a complete enclosure; or ter where they are within the plane of
(ii) By a standard guard as described the rim of the pulley.
in paragraph (o) of this section, at (2) It is recommended, however, that
least 7 feet (2.128 m) high extending 6 no projecting setscrews or oilcups be
inches (15.24 cm) above the mesh point used in any revolving pulley or part of
of the gears; or machinery.
(iii) By a band guard covering the (i) Collars and couplings—(1) Collars.
face of gear and having flanges ex- All revolving collars, including split
tended inward beyond the root of the collars, shall be cylindrical, and screws
teeth on the exposed side or sides. or bolts used in collars shall not
Where any portion of the train of gears project beyond the largest periphery of
guarded by a band guard is less than 6 the collar.
feet (1.824 m) from the floor a disk (2) Couplings. Shaft couplings shall be
guard or a complete enclosure to the so constructed as to present no hazard
height of 6 feet (1.824 m) shall be re- from bolts, nuts, setscrews, or revolv-
quired. ing surfaces. Bolts, nuts, and setscrews
(2) Hand-operated gears. Paragraph will, however, be permitted where they
(f)(1) of this section does not apply to are covered with safety sleeves or
hand-operated gears used only to ad- where they are used parallel with the
just machine parts and which do not shafting and are countersunk or else do
not extend beyond the flange of the
continue to move after hand power is
coupling.
removed. However, the guarding of
(j) Bearings and facilities for oiling. All
these gears is highly recommended.
drip cups and pans shall be securely
(3) Sprockets and chains. All sprocket fastened.
wheels and chains shall be enclosed un- (k) Guarding of clutches, cutoff cou-
less they are more than 7 feet (2.128 m) plings, and clutch pulleys—(1) Guards.
above the floor or platform. Where the Clutches, cutoff couplings, or clutch
drive extends over other machine or pulleys having projecting parts, where
working areas, protection against fall- such clutches are located 7 feet (2.128
ing shall be provided. This subpara- m) or less above the floor or working
graph does not apply to manually oper- platform, shall be enclosed by a sta-
ated sprockets. tionary guard constructed in accord-
(4) Openings for oiling. When frequent ance with this section. A ‘‘U’’ type
oiling must be done, openings with guard is permissible.
hinged or sliding self-closing covers (2) Engine rooms. In engine rooms a
shall be provided. All points not read- guardrail, preferably with toeboard,
ily accessible shall have oil feed tubes may be used instead of the guard re-
if lubricant is to be added while ma- quired by paragraph (k)(1) of this sec-
chinery is in motion. tion, provided such a room is occupied
(g) Guarding friction drives. The driv- only by engine room attendants.
ing point of all friction drives when ex- (l) Belt shifters, clutches, shippers,
posed to contact shall be guarded, all poles, perches, and fasteners—(1) Belt
arm or spoke friction drives and all shifters. (i) Tight and loose pulleys on
web friction drives with holes in the all new installations made on or after
web shall be entirely enclosed, and all August 31, 1971, shall be equipped with
projecting belts on friction drives a permanent belt shifter provided with
where exposed to contact shall be mechanical means to prevent belt from
guarded. creeping from loose to tight pulley. It
(h) Keys, setscrews, and other projec- is recommended that old installations
tions. (1) All projecting keys, setscrews, be changed to conform to this rule.
and other projections in revolving (ii) Belt shifter and clutch handles
parts shall be removed or made flush or shall be rounded and be located as far
guarded by metal cover. This subpara- as possible from danger of accidental
graph does not apply to keys or contact, but within easy reach of the
setscrews within gear or sprocket cas- operator. Where belt shifters are not
ings or other enclosures, nor to keys, directly located over a machine or
setscrews, or oilcups in hubs of pulleys bench, the handles shall be cut off 6 ft.
less than 20 inches (50.8 cm) in diame- 6 in. (1.976 m) above floor level.
244
(2) Belt shippers and shipper poles. The (3) Guards for horizontal overhead
use of belt poles as substitutes for me- belts. (i) Guards for horizontal overhead
chanical shifters is not recommended. belts shall run the entire length of the
(3) Belt perches. Where loose pulleys belt and follow the line of the pulley to
or idlers are not practicable, belt the ceiling or be carried to the nearest
perches in form of brackets, rollers, wall, thus enclosing the belt effec-
etc., shall be used to keep idle belts tively. Where belts are so located as to
away from the shafts. make it impracticable to carry the
(4) Belt fasteners. Belts which of ne- guard to wall or ceiling, construction
cessity must be shifted by hand and of guard shall be such as to enclose
belts within 7 feet (2.128 m) of the floor completely the top and bottom runs of
or working platform which are not belt and the face of pulleys.
guarded in accordance with this sec- (ii) [Reserved]
tion shall not be fastened with metal in (iii) Suitable reinforcement shall be
any case, nor with any other fastening provided for the ceiling rafters or over-
which by construction or wear will head floor beams, where such is nec-
constitute an accident hazard. essary, to sustain safely the weight and
(m) Standard guards—general require- stress likely to be imposed by the
ments—(1) Materials. (i) Standard condi- guard. The interior surface of all
tions shall be secured by the use of the guards, by which is meant the surface
following materials. Expanded metal, of the guard with which a belt will
perforated or solid sheet metal, wire come in contact, shall be smooth and
mesh on a frame of angle iron, or iron free from all projections of any char-
pipe securely fastened to floor or to acter, except where construction de-
frame of machine. mands it; protruding shallow round-
head rivets may be used. Overhead belt
(ii) All metal should be free from
guards shall be at least one-quarter
burrs and sharp edges.
wider than belt which they protect, ex-
(2) Methods of manufacture. (i) Ex- cept that this clearance need not in
panded metal, sheet or perforated any case exceed 6 inches (15.24 cm) on
metal, and wire mesh shall be securely each side. Overhead rope drive and
fastened to frame. block and roller-chain-drive guards
(n) [Reserved] shall be not less than 6 inches (15.24
(o) Approved materials—(1) Minimum cm) wider than the drive on each side.
requirements. The materials and dimen- In overhead silent chain-drive guards
sions specified in this paragraph shall where the chain is held from lateral
apply to all guards, except horizontal displacement on the sprockets, the side
overhead belts, rope, cable, or chain clearances required on drives of 20 inch
guards more than 7 feet (2.128 m) above (50.8 cm) centers or under shall be not
floor, or platform. less than 1⁄4 inch (0.635 cm) from the
(i) [Reserved] nearest moving chain part, and on
(a) All guards shall be rigidly braced drives of over 20 inch (50.8 cm) centers
every 3 feet (0.912 m) or fractional part a minimum of 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) from
of their height to some fixed part of the nearest moving chain part.
machinery or building structure. (4) Guards for horizontal overhead rope
Where guard is exposed to contact with and chain drives. Overhead-rope and
moving equipment additional strength chain-drive guard construction shall
may be necessary. conform to the rules for overhead-belt
(2) Wood guards. (i) Wood guards may guard.
be used in the woodworking and chem- (5) Guardrails and toeboards. (i) Guard-
ical industries, in industries where the rail shall be 42 inches (106.68 cm) in
presence of fumes or where manufac- height, with midrail between top rail
turing conditions would cause the and floor.
rapid deterioration of metal guards; (ii) Posts shall be not more than 8
also in construction work and in loca- feet (2.432 m) apart; they are to be per-
tions outdoors where extreme cold or manent and substantial, smooth, and
extreme heat make metal guards and free from protruding nails, bolts, and
railings undesirable. In all other indus- splinters. If made of pipe, the post shall
tries, wood guards shall not be used. be 11⁄4 inches (3.175 cm) inside diameter,
245
or larger. If made of metal shapes or pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
bars, their section shall be equal in U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
strength to that of 11⁄2 (3.81 cm) by 11⁄2 Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable.
(3.81 cm) by 3⁄16 inch angle iron. If made
of wood, the posts shall be two by four § 1926.350 Gas welding and cutting.
(2 × 4) inches or larger. The upper rail
shall be two by four (2 × 4) inches, or (a) Transporting, moving, and storing
two one by four (1 × 4) strips, one at the compressed gas cylinders. (1) Valve pro-
top and one at the side of posts. The tection caps shall be in place and se-
midrail may be one by four (1 × 4) cured.
inches or more. Where panels are fitted (2) When cylinders are hoisted, they
with expanded metal or wire mesh the shall be secured on a cradle,
middle rails may be omitted. Where slingboard, or pallet. They shall not be
guard is exposed to contact with mov- hoisted or transported by means of
ing equipment, additional strength magnets or choker slings.
may be necessary. (3) Cylinders shall be moved by tilt-
(iii) Toeboards shall be 4 inches (10.16 ing and rolling them on their bottom
cm) or more in height, of wood, metal, edges. They shall not be intentionally
or of metal grill not exceeding 1 inch dropped, struck, or permitted to strike
(2.54 cm) mesh. each other violently.
(p) Care of equipment—(1) General. All (4) When cylinders are transported by
power-transmission equipment shall be powered vehicles, they shall be secured
inspected at intervals not exceeding 60 in a vertical position.
days and be kept in good working con- (5) Valve protection caps shall not be
dition at all times. used for lifting cylinders from one
(2) Shafting. (i) Shafting shall be kept vertical position to another. Bars shall
in alignment, free from rust and excess not be used under valves or valve pro-
oil or grease. tection caps to pry cylinders loose
(ii) Where explosives, explosive dusts, when frozen. Warm, not boiling, water
flammable vapors or flammable liquids shall be used to thaw cylinders loose.
exist, the hazard of static sparks from (6) Unless cylinders are firmly se-
shafting shall be carefully considered. cured on a special carrier intended for
(3) Bearings. Bearings shall be kept in this purpose, regulators shall be re-
alignment and properly adjusted. moved and valve protection caps put in
(4) Hangers. Hangers shall be in- place before cylinders are moved.
spected to make certain that all sup- (7) A suitable cylinder truck, chain,
porting bolts and screws are tight and or other steadying device shall be used
to keep cylinders from being knocked
that supports of hanger boxes are ad-
over while in use.
justed properly.
(8) When work is finished, when cyl-
(5) Pulleys. (i) Pulleys shall be kept in
inders are empty, or when cylinders are
proper alignment to prevent belts from
moved at any time, the cylinder valve
running off.
shall be closed.
(6) Care of belts.
(9) Compressed gas cylinders shall be
(i) [Reserved]
secured in an upright position at all
(ii) Inspection shall be made of belts,
times except, if necessary, for short pe-
lacings, and fasteners and such equip-
riods of time while cylinders are actu-
ment kept in good repair.
ally being hoisted or carried.
(7) Lubrication. The regular oilers
(10) Oxygen cylinders in storage shall
shall wear tight-fitting clothing. Ma-
be separated from fuel-gas cylinders or
chinery shall be oiled when not in mo-
combustible materials (especially oil
tion, wherever possible.
or grease), a minimum distance of 20
[58 FR 35176, June 30, 1993, as amended at 69 feet (6.1 m) or by a noncombustible bar-
FR 31882, June 8, 2004] rier at least 5 feet (1.5 m) high having
a fire-resistance rating of at least one-
Subpart J—Welding and Cutting half hour.
(11) Inside of buildings, cylinders

AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours shall be stored in a well-protected,
and Safety Standards Act (Construction well-ventilated, dry location, at least
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- 20 feet (6.1 m) from highly combustible
246
materials such as oil or excelsior. Cyl- opened slightly and closed imme-
inders should be stored in definitely as- diately. (This action is generally
signed places away from elevators, termed ‘‘cracking’’ and is intended to
stairs, or gangways. Assigned storage clear the valve of dust or dirt that
places shall be located where cylinders might otherwise enter the regulator.)
will not be knocked over or damaged The person cracking the valve shall
by passing or falling objects, or subject stand to one side of the outlet, not in
to tampering by unauthorized persons. front of it. The valve of a fuel gas cyl-
Cylinders shall not be kept in inder shall not be cracked where the
unventilated enclosures such as lockers gas would reach welding work, sparks,
and cupboards. flame, or other possible sources of igni-
(12) The in-plant handling, storage, tion.
and utilization of all compressed gases
(2) The cylinder valve shall always be
in cylinders, portable tanks, rail
opened slowly to prevent damage to
tankcars, or motor vehicle cargo tanks
the regulator. For quick closing, valves
shall be in accordance with Compressed
on fuel gas cylinders shall not be
Gas Association Pamphlet P–1–1965.
(b) Placing cylinders. (1) Cylinders opened more than 11⁄2 turns. When a
shall be kept far enough away from the special wrench is required, it shall be
actual welding or cutting operation so left in position on the stem of the valve
that sparks, hot slag, or flame will not while the cylinder is in use so that the
reach them. When this is impractical, fuel gas flow can be shut off quickly in
fire resistant shields shall be provided. case of an emergency. In the case of
(2) Cylinders shall be placed where manifolded or coupled cylinders, at
they cannot become part of an elec- least one such wrench shall always be
trical circuit. Electrodes shall not be available for immediate use. Nothing
struck against a cylinder to strike an shall be placed on top of a fuel gas cyl-
arc. inder, when in use, which may damage
(3) Fuel gas cylinders shall be placed the safety device or interfere with the
with valve end up whenever they are in quick closing of the valve.
use. They shall not be placed in a loca- (3) Fuel gas shall not be used from
tion where they would be subject to cylinders through torches or other de-
open flame, hot metal, or other sources vices which are equipped with shutoff
of artificial heat. valves without reducing the pressure
(4) Cylinders containing oxygen or through a suitable regulator attached
acetylene or other fuel gas shall not be to the cylinder valve or manifold.
taken into confined spaces. (4) Before a regulator is removed
(c) Treatment of cylinders. (1) Cyl- from a cylinder valve, the cylinder
inders, whether full or empty, shall not valve shall always be closed and the
be used as rollers or supports. gas released from the regulator.
(2) No person other than the gas sup-
(5) If, when the valve on a fuel gas
plier shall attempt to mix gases in a
cylinder. No one except the owner of cylinder is opened, there is found to be
the cylinder or person authorized by a leak around the valve stem, the valve
him, shall refill a cylinder. No one shall be closed and the gland nut tight-
shall use a cylinder’s contents for pur- ened. If this action does not stop the
poses other than those intended by the leak, the use of the cylinder shall be
supplier. All cylinders used shall meet discontinued, and it shall be properly
the Department of Transportation re- tagged and removed from the work
quirements published in 49 CFR part area. In the event that fuel gas should
178, subpart C, Specification for Cyl- leak from the cylinder valve, rather
inders. than from the valve stem, and the gas
(3) No damaged or defective cylinder cannot be shut off, the cylinder shall
shall be used. be properly tagged and removed from
(d) Use of fuel gas. The employer shall the work area. If a regulator attached
thoroughly instruct employees in the to a cylinder valve will effectively stop

safe use of fuel gas, as follows: a leak through the valve seat, the cyl-
(1) Before a regulator to a cylinder inder need not be removed from the
valve is connected, the valve shall be work area.
247
(6) If a leak should develop at a fuse (5) Hose couplings shall be of the type
plug or other safety device, the cyl- that cannot be unlocked or discon-
inder shall be removed from the work nected by means of a straight pull
area. without rotary motion.
(e) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds. (1) (6) Boxes used for the storage of gas
Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall hose shall be ventilated.
bear the name of the substance they (7) Hoses, cables, and other equip-
contain in letters at least 1-inch high ment shall be kept clear of passage-
which shall be either painted on the ways, ladders and stairs.
manifold or on a sign permanently at- (g) Torches. (1) Clogged torch tip
tached to it. openings shall be cleaned with suitable
(2) Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds cleaning wires, drills, or other devices
shall be placed in safe, well ventilated, designed for such purpose.
and accessible locations. They shall (2) Torches in use shall be inspected
not be located within enclosed spaces. at the beginning of each working shift
(3) Manifold hose connections, infor leaking shutoff valves, hose cou-
cluding both ends of the supply hose plings, and tip connections. Defective
that lead to the manifold, shall be such torches shall not be used.
that the hose cannot be interchanged (3) Torches shall be lighted by fric-
between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds tion lighters or other approved devices,
and supply header connections. Adapt- and not by matches or from hot work.
ers shall not be used to permit the (h) Regulators and gauges. Oxygen and
interchange of hose. Hose connections fuel gas pressure regulators, including
shall be kept free of grease and oil. their related gauges, shall be in proper
(4) When not in use, manifold and working order while in use.
header hose connections shall be (i) Oil and grease hazards. Oxygen cyl-
capped. inders and fittings shall be kept away
(5) Nothing shall be placed on top of from oil or grease. Cylinders, cylinder
a manifold, when in use, which will caps and valves, couplings, regulators,
damage the manifold or interfere with hose, and apparatus shall be kept free
the quick closing of the valves. from oil or greasy substances and shall
(f) Hose. (1) Fuel gas hose and oxygen not be handled with oily hands or
hose shall be easily distinguishable gloves. Oxygen shall not be directed at
from each other. The contrast may be oily surfaces, greasy clothes, or within
made by different colors or by surface a fuel oil or other storage tank or ves-
characteristics readily distinguishable sel.
by the sense of touch. Oxygen and fuel (j) Additional rules. For additional de-
gas hoses shall not be interchangeable. tails not covered in this subpart, appli-
A single hose having more than one gas cable technical portions of American
passage shall not be used. National Standards Institute, Z49.1–
(2) When parallel sections of oxygen 1967, Safety in Welding and Cutting,
and fuel gas hose are taped together, shall apply.
not more than 4 inches out of 12 inches
shall be covered by tape. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(3) All hose in use, carrying acety- 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
lene, oxygen, natural or manufactured 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993]
fuel gas, or any gas or substance which
§ 1926.351 Arc welding and cutting.
may ignite or enter into combustion,
or be in any way harmful to employees, (a) Manual electrode holders. (1) Only
shall be inspected at the beginning of manual electrode holders which are
each working shift. Defective hose specifically designed for arc welding
shall be removed from service. and cutting, and are of a capacity capa-
(4) Hose which has been subject to ble of safely handling the maximum
flashback, or which shows evidence of rated current required by the elec-
severe wear or damage, shall be tested trodes, shall be used.
to twice the normal pressure to which (2) Any current-carrying parts pass-
it is subject, but in no case less than ing through the portion of the holder
300 p.s.i. Defective hose, or hose in which the arc welder or cutter grips in
doubtful condition, shall not be used. his hand, and the outer surfaces of the
248
jaws of the holder, shall be fully insu- (3) When a structure or pipeline is
lated against the maximum voltage en- employed as a ground return circuit, it
countered to ground. shall be determined that the required
(b) Welding cables and connectors. (1) electrical contact exists at all joints.
All arc welding and cutting cables shall The generation of an arc, sparks, or
be of the completely insulated, flexible heat at any point shall cause rejection
type, capable of handling the max- of the structures as a ground circuit.
imum current requirements of the (4) When a structure or pipeline is
work in progress, taking into account continuously employed as a ground re-
the duty cycle under which the arc turn circuit, all joints shall be bonded,
welder or cutter is working. and periodic inspections shall be con-
(2) Only cable free from repair or ducted to ensure that no condition of
splices for a minimum distance of 10 electrolysis or fire hazard exists by vir-
feet from the cable end to which the tue of such use.
electrode holder is connected shall be (5) The frames of all arc welding and
used, except that cables with standard cutting machines shall be grounded ei-
insulated connectors or with splices ther through a third wire in the cable
whose insulating quality is equal to containing the circuit conductor or
that of the cable are permitted. through a separate wire which is
(3) When it becomes necessary to con- grounded at the source of the current.
nect or splice lengths of cable one to Grounding circuits, other than by
another, substantial insulated connec- means of the structure, shall be
tors of a capacity at least equivalent to checked to ensure that the circuit be-
that of the cable shall be used. If con- tween the ground and the grounded
nections are effected by means of cable power conductor has resistance low
lugs, they shall be securely fastened to- enough to permit sufficient current to
gether to give good electrical contact, flow to cause the fuse or circuit break-
and the exposed metal parts of the lugs er to interrupt the current.
shall be completely insulated. (6) All ground connections shall be
(4) Cables in need of repair shall not inspected to ensure that they are me-
be used. When a cable, other than the chanically strong and electrically ade-
cable lead referred to in paragraph quate for the required current.
(b)(2) of this section, becomes worn to (d) Operating instructions. Employers
the extent of exposing bare conductors, shall instruct employees in the safe
the portion thus exposed shall be pro- means of arc welding and cutting as
tected by means of rubber and friction follows:
tape or other equivalent insulation. (1) When electrode holders are to be
(c) Ground returns and machine left unattended, the electrodes shall be
grounding. (1) A ground return cable removed and the holders shall be so
shall have a safe current carrying ca- placed or protected that they cannot
pacity equal to or exceeding the speci- make electrical contact with employ-
fied maximum output capacity of the ees or conducting objects.
arc welding or cutting unit which it (2) Hot electrode holders shall not be
services. When a single ground return dipped in water; to do so may expose
cable services more than one unit, its the arc welder or cutter to electric
safe current-carrying capacity shall shock.
equal or exceed the total specified (3) When the arc welder or cutter has
maximum output capacities of all the occasion to leave his work or to stop
units which it services. work for any appreciable length of
(2) Pipelines containing gases or time, or when the arc welding or cut-
flammable liquids, or conduits con- ting machine is to be moved, the power
taining electrical circuits, shall not be supply switch to the equipment shall
used as a ground return. For welding be opened.
on natural gas pipelines, the technical (4) Any faulty or defective equipment
portions of regulations issued by the shall be reported to the supervisor.
Department of Transportation, Office (5) See § 1926.406(c) for additional re-

of Pipeline Safety, 49 CFR Part 192, quirements.
Minimum Federal Safety Standards for (e) Shielding. Whenever practicable,
Gas Pipelines, shall apply. all arc welding and cutting operations
249
shall be shielded by noncombustible or to the torch shall be positively shut off

flameproof screens which will protect at some point outside the enclosed
employees and other persons working space whenever the torch is not to be
in the vicinity from the direct rays of used or whenever the torch is left unat-
the arc. tended for a substantial period of time,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, such as during the lunch period. Over-
1979, as amended at 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986] night and at the change of shifts, the
torch and hose shall be removed from
§ 1926.352 Fire prevention. the confined space. Open end fuel gas
(a) When practical, objects to be and oxygen hoses shall be immediately
welded, cut, or heated shall be moved removed from enclosed spaces when
to a designated safe location or, if the they are disconnected from the torch
objects to be welded, cut, or heated or other gas-consuming device.
cannot be readily moved, all movable (h) Except when the contents are
fire hazards in the vicinity shall be being removed or transferred, drums,
taken to a safe place, or otherwise pro- pails, and other containers which con-
tected. tain or have contained flammable liq-
(b) If the object to be welded, cut, or uids shall be kept closed. Empty con-
heated cannot be moved and if all the tainers shall be removed to a safe area
fire hazards cannot be removed, posi- apart from hot work operations or open
tive means shall be taken to confine flames.
the heat, sparks, and slag, and to pro- (i) Drums containers, or hollow
tect the immovable fire hazards from structures which have contained toxic
them. or flammable substances shall, before
(c) No welding, cutting, or heating welding, cutting, or heating is under-
shall be done where the application of taken on them, either be filled with
flammable paints, or the presence of water or thoroughly cleaned of such
other flammable compounds, or heavy substances and ventilated and tested.
dust concentrations creates a hazard. For welding, cutting and heating on
(d) Suitable fire extinguishing equip- steel pipelines containing natural gas,
ment shall be immediately available in the pertinent portions of regulations
the work area and shall be maintained issued by the Department of Transpor-
in a state of readiness for instant use. tation, Office of Pipeline Safety, 49
(e) When the welding, cutting, or CFR Part 192, Minimum Federal Safety
heating operation is such that normal Standards for Gas Pipelines, shall
fire prevention precautions are not suf- apply.
ficient, additional personnel shall be (j) Before heat is applied to a drum,
assigned to guard against fire while the container, or hollow structure, a vent
actual welding, cutting, or heating op- or opening shall be provided for the re-
eration is being performed, and for a lease of any built-up pressure during
sufficient period of time after comple- the application of heat.
tion of the work to ensure that no pos-
sibility of fire exists. Such personnel § 1926.353 Ventilation and protection
shall be instructed as to the specific in welding, cutting, and heating.
anticipated fire hazards and how the (a) Mechanical ventilation. For pur-
firefighting equipment provided is to poses of this section, mechanical ven-
be used. tilation shall meet the following re-
(f) When welding, cutting, or heating quirements:
is performed on walls, floors, and ceil- (1) Mechanical ventilation shall con-
ings, since direct penetration of sparks sist of either general mechanical ven-
or heat transfer may introduce a fire tilation systems or local exhaust sys-
hazard to an adjacent area, the same tems.
precautions shall be taken on the oppo- (2) General mechanical ventilation
site side as are taken on the side on shall be of sufficient capacity and so
which the welding is being performed. arranged as to produce the number of
(g) For the elimination of possible air changes necessary to maintain

fire in enclosed spaces as a result of gas welding fumes and smoke within safe
escaping through leaking or improp- limits, as defined in subpart D of this
erly closed torch valves, the gas supply part.
250
(3) Local exhaust ventilation shall subparagraph shall be performed with

consist of freely movable hoods in- either general mechanical or local ex-
tended to be placed by the welder or haust ventilation meeting the require-
burner as close as practicable to the ments of paragraph (a) of this section:
work. This system shall be of sufficient (i) Zinc-bearing base or filler metals
capacity and so arranged as to remove or metals coated with zinc-bearing ma-
fumes and smoke at the source and terials;
keep the concentration of them in the (ii) Lead base metals;
breathing zone within safe limits as de- (iii) Cadmium-bearing filler mate-
fined in subpart D of this part. rials;
(4) Contaminated air exhausted from
(iv) Chromium-bearing metals or
a working space shall be discharged
metals coated with chromium-bearing
into the open air or otherwise clear of
materials.
the source of intake air.
(5) All air replacing that withdrawn (2) Welding, cutting, or heating in
shall be clean and respirable. any enclosed spaces involving the met-
(6) Oxygen shall not be used for ven- als specified in this subparagraph shall
tilation purposes, comfort cooling, be performed with local exhaust ven-
blowing dust from clothing, or for tilation in accordance with the require-
cleaning the work area. ments of paragraph (a) of this section,
(b) Welding, cutting, and heating in or employees shall be protected by air
confined spaces. (1) Except as provided line respirators in accordance with the
in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, and requirements of subpart E of this part:
paragraph (c)(2) of this section, either (i) Metals containing lead, other than
general mechanical or local exhaust as an impurity, or metals coated with
ventilation meeting the requirements lead-bearing materials;
of paragraph (a) of this section shall be (ii) Cadmium-bearing or cadmium-
provided whenever welding, cutting, or coated base metals;
heating is performed in a confined (iii) Metals coated with mercury-
space. bearing metals;
(2) When sufficient ventilation can- (iv) Beryllium-containing base or
not be obtained without blocking the filler metals. Because of its high tox-
means of access, employees in the con- icity, work involving beryllium shall
fined space shall be protected by air be done with both local exhaust ven-
line respirators in accordance with the tilation and air line respirators.
requirements of subpart E of this part, (3) Employees performing such oper-
and an employee on the outside of such ations in the open air shall be pro-
a confined space shall be assigned to
tected by filter-type respirators in ac-
maintain communication with those
cordance with the requirements of sub-
working within it and to aid them in
part E of this part, except that employ-
an emergency.
ees performing such operations on be-
(3) Lifelines. Where a welder must
ryllium-containing base or filler met-
enter a confined space through a man-
hole or other small opening, means als shall be protected by air line res-
shall be provided for quickly removing pirators in accordance with the re-
him in case of emergency. When safety quirements of subpart E of this part.
belts and lifelines are used for this pur- (4) Other employees exposed to the
pose they shall be so attached to the same atmosphere as the welders or
welder’s body that his body cannot be burners shall be protected in the same
jammed in a small exit opening. An at- manner as the welder or burner.
tendant with a pre-planned rescue pro- (d) Inert-gas metal-arc welding. (1)
cedure shall be stationed outside to ob- Since the inert-gas metal-arc welding
serve the welder at all times and be ca- process involves the production of
pable of putting rescue operations into ultra-violet radiation of intensities of 5
effect. to 30 times that produced during
(c) Welding, cutting, or heating of met- shielded metal-arc welding, the decom-
als of toxic significance. (1) Welding, cut- position of chlorinated solvents by ul-
ting, or heating in any enclosed spaces traviolet rays, and the liberation of
involving the metals specified in this toxic fumes and gases, employees shall
251
not be permitted to engage in, or be ex- § 1926.354 Welding, cutting, and heat-
posed to the process until the following ing in way of preservative coatings.
special precautions have been taken: (a) Before welding, cutting, or heat-
(i) The use of chlorinated solvents ing is commenced on any surface cov-
shall be kept at least 200 feet, unless ered by a preservative coating whose
shielded, from the exposed arc, and sur- flammability is not known, a test shall
faces prepared with chlorinated sol- be made by a competent person to de-
vents shall be thoroughly dry before termine its flammability. Preservative
welding is permitted on such surfaces. coatings shall be considered to be high-
(ii) Employees in the area not pro- ly flammable when scrapings burn with
tected from the arc by screening shall extreme rapidity.
be protected by filter lenses meeting (b) Precautions shall be taken to pre-
the requirements of subpart E of this vent ignition of highly flammable
part. When two or more welders are ex- hardened preservative coatings. When
posed to each other’s arc, filter lens coatings are determined to be highly
goggles of a suitable type, meeting the flammable, they shall be stripped from
requirements of subpart E of this part, the area to be heated to prevent igni-
shall be worn under welding helmets. tion.
Hand shields to protect the welder (c) Protection against toxic preserva-
against flashes and radiant energy tive coatings: (1) In enclosed spaces, all
shall be used when either the helmet is surfaces covered with toxic preserva-
lifted or the shield is removed. tives shall be stripped of all toxic coat-
(iii) Welders and other employees ings for a distance of at least 4 inches
who are exposed to radiation shall be from the area of heat application, or
suitably protected so that the skin is the employees shall be protected by air
covered completely to prevent burns line respirators, meeting the require-
and other damage by ultraviolet rays. ments of subpart E of this part.
Welding helmets and hand shields shall (2) In the open air, employees shall be
be free of leaks and openings, and free protected by a respirator, in accord-
of highly reflective surfaces. ance with requirements of subpart E of
(iv) When inert-gas metal-arc weld- this part.
ing is being performed on stainless (d) The preservative coatings shall be
steel, the requirements of paragraph removed a sufficient distance from the
(c)(2) of this section shall be met to area to be heated to ensure that the
protect against dangerous concentra- temperature of the unstripped metal
tions of nitrogen dioxide. will not be appreciably raised. Artifi-
cial cooling of the metal surrounding
(e) General welding, cutting, and heat-
the heating area may be used to limit
ing. (1) Welding, cutting, and heating,
the size of the area required to be
not involving conditions or materials
cleaned.
described in paragraph (b), (c), or (d) of
this section, may normally be done
without mechanical ventilation or res- Subpart K—Electrical
piratory protective equipment, but
where, because of unusual physical or AUTHORITY: Sections 6 and 8 of the Occupa-
atmospheric conditions, an unsafe ac- tional Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
cumulation of contaminants exists, U.S.C. 655 and 657); sec. 107, Contract Work
Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C.
suitable mechanical ventilation or res- 333); Secretary of Labor’s Order No. 9–83 (48
piratory protective equipment shall be FR 35736) or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), as applicable;
provided. 29 CFR part 1911.
(2) Employees performing any type of
SOURCE: 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, unless
welding, cutting, or heating shall be otherwise noted.
protected by suitable eye protective
equipment in accordance with the re- GENERAL
quirements of subpart E of this part.

§ 1926.400 Introduction.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990; This subpart addresses electrical
58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993] safety requirements that are necessary
252
for the practical safeguarding of em- (b) Not covered. Sections 1926.402
ployees involved in construction work through 1926.408 do not cover installa-
and is divided into four major divisions tions used for the generation, trans-
and applicable definitions as follows: mission, and distribution of electric
(a) Installation safety requirements. In- energy, including related communica-
stallation safety requirements are con- tion, metering, control, and trans-
tained in §§ 1926.402 through 1926.408. In- formation installations. (However,
cluded in this category are electric these regulations do cover portable and
equipment and installations used to vehicle-mounted generators used to
provide electric power and light on provide power for equipment used at
jobsites. the jobsite.) See subpart V of this part
(b) Safety-related work practices. Safe- for the construction of power distribu-
ty-related work practices are contained tion and transmission lines.
in §§ 1926.416 and 1926.417. In addition to § 1926.403 General requirements.
covering the hazards arising from the
use of electricity at jobsites, these reg- (a) Approval. All electrical conduc-
ulations also cover the hazards arising tors and equipment shall be approved.
from the accidental contact, direct or (b) Examination, installation, and use
of equipment—(1) Examination. The em-
indirect, by employees with all ener-
ployer shall ensure that electrical
gized lines, above or below ground,
equipment is free from recognized haz-
passing through or near the jobsite.
ards that are likely to cause death or
(c) Safety-related maintenance and en- serious physical harm to employees.
vironmental considerations. Safety-re- Safety of equipment shall be deter-
lated maintenance and environmental mined on the basis of the following
considerations are contained in considerations:
§§ 1926.431 and 1926.432. (i) Suitability for installation and
(d) Safety requirements for special use in conformity with the provisions
equipment. Safety requirements for spe- of this subpart. Suitability of equip-
cial equipment are contained in ment for an identified purpose may be
§ 1926.441. evidenced by listing, labeling, or cer-
(e) Definitions. Definitions applicable tification for that identified purpose.
to this subpart are contained in (ii) Mechanical strength and dura-
§ 1926.449. bility, including, for parts designed to
enclose and protect other equipment,
§ 1926.401 [Reserved] the adequacy of the protection thus
provided.
INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS (iii) Electrical insulation.
(iv) Heating effects under conditions
§ 1926.402 Applicability. of use.
(a) Covered. Sections 1926.402 through (v) Arcing effects.
1926.408 contain installation safety re- (vi) Classification by type, size, volt-
quirements for electrical equipment age, current capacity, specific use.
and installations used to provide elec- (vii) Other factors which contribute
tric power and light at the jobsite. to the practical safeguarding of em-
These sections apply to installations, ployees using or likely to come in con-
both temporary and permanent, used tact with the equipment.
on the jobsite; but these sections do (2) Installation and use. Listed, la-
not apply to existing permanent instal- beled, or certified equipment shall be
lations that were in place before the installed and used in accordance with
construction activity commenced. instructions included in the listing, la-
beling, or certification.
NOTE: If the electrical installation is made (c) Interrupting rating. Equipment in-
in accordance with the National Electrical
tended to break current shall have an
Code ANSI/NFPA 70–1984, exclusive of For-
interrupting rating at system voltage
mal Interpretations and Tentative Interim

Amendments, it will be deemed to be in com- sufficient for the current that must be
pliance with §§ 1926.403 through 1926.408, ex- interrupted.
cept for §§ 1926.404(b)(1) and 1926.405(a)(2)(ii) (d) Mounting and cooling of equip-
(E), (F), (G), and (J). ment—(1) Mounting. Electric equipment
253
shall be firmly secured to the surface branch circuit, at its disconnecting

on which it is mounted. Wooden plugs means or overcurrent device, shall be
driven into holes in masonry, concrete, legibly marked to indicate its purpose,
plaster, or similar materials shall not unless located and arranged so the pur-
be used. pose is evident. These markings shall
(2) Cooling. Electrical equipment be of sufficient durability to withstand
which depends upon the natural cir- the environment involved.
culation of air and convection prin- (i) 600 Volts, nominal, or less. This
ciples for cooling of exposed surfaces paragraph applies to equipment oper-
shall be installed so that room air flow ating at 600 volts, nominal, or less.
over such surfaces is not prevented by (1) Working space about electric equip-
walls or by adjacent installed equipment. Sufficient access and working
ment. For equipment designed for floor space shall be provided and maintained
mounting, clearance between top sur- about all electric equipment to permit
faces and adjacent surfaces shall be ready and safe operation and mainte-
provided to dissipate rising warm air. nance of such equipment.
Electrical equipment provided with (i) Working clearances. Except as re-
ventilating openings shall be installed quired or permitted elsewhere in this
so that walls or other obstructions do subpart, the dimension of the working
not prevent the free circulation of air space in the direction of access to live
through the equipment. parts operating at 600 volts or less and
(e) Splices. Conductors shall be likely to require examination, adjust-
spliced or joined with splicing devices ment, servicing, or maintenance while
designed for the use or by brazing, alive shall not be less than indicated in
welding, or soldering with a fusible Table K–1. In addition to the dimen-
metal or alloy. Soldered splices shall sions shown in Table K–1, workspace
first be so spliced or joined as to be me- shall not be less than 30 inches (762
chanically and electrically secure mm) wide in front of the electric equip-
without solder and then soldered. All ment. Distances shall be measured
splices and joints and the free ends of from the live parts if they are exposed,
conductors shall be covered with an in- or from the enclosure front or opening
sulation equivalent to that of the con- if the live parts are enclosed. Walls
ductors or with an insulating device constructed of concrete, brick, or tile
designed for the purpose. are considered to be grounded. Working
(f) Arcing parts. Parts of electric space is not required in back of assem-
equipment which in ordinary operation blies such as dead-front switchboards
produce arcs, sparks, flames, or molten or motor control centers where there
metal shall be enclosed or separated are no renewable or adjustable parts
and isolated from all combustible ma- such as fuses or switches on the back
terial. and where all connections are acces-
(g) Marking. Electrical equipment sible from locations other than the
shall not be used unless the manufac- back.
turer’s name, trademark, or other de-
scriptive marking by which the organi- TABLE K–1—WORKING CLEARANCES
zation responsible for the product may
be identified is placed on the equip- Minimum clear distance
for conditions 1
ment and unless other markings are Nominal voltage to ground
provided giving voltage, current, watt- (a) (b) (c)
age, or other ratings as necessary. The Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2
marking shall be of sufficient dura- 0–150 ......................................... 3 3 3
bility to withstand the environment in- 151–600 ..................................... 3 31⁄2 4
volved. 1 Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live
(h) Identification of disconnecting parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other
side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides
means and circuits. Each disconnecting effectively guarded by insulating material. Insulated wire or in-
means required by this subpart for mo- sulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not con-
sidered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and
tors and appliances shall be legibly grounded parts on the other side. (c) Exposed live parts on
marked to indicate its purpose, unless both sides of the workspace [not guarded as provided in Con-
dition (a)] with the operator between.
located and arranged so the purpose is 2 Note: For International System of Units (SI): one
evident. Each service, feeder, and foot=0.3048m.
254
(ii) Clear spaces. Working space re- (j) Over 600 volts, nominal—(1) General.
quired by this subpart shall not be used Conductors and equipment used on cir-
for storage. When normally enclosed cuits exceeding 600 volts, nominal,
live parts are exposed for inspection or shall comply with all applicable provi-
servicing, the working space, if in a sions of paragraphs (a) through (g) of
passageway or general open space, this section and with the following pro-
shall be guarded. visions which supplement or modify
(iii) Access and entrance to working those requirements. The provisions of
space. At least one entrance shall be paragraphs (j)(2), (j)(3), and (j)(4) of this
provided to give access to the working section do not apply to equipment on
space about electric equipment. the supply side of the service conduc-
(iv) Front working space. Where there
tors.
are live parts normally exposed on the
front of switchboards or motor control (2) Enclosure for electrical installations.
centers, the working space in front of Electrical installations in a vault,
such equipment shall not be less than 3 room, closet or in an area surrounded
feet (914 mm). by a wall, screen, or fence, access to
(v) Headroom. The minimum head- which is controlled by lock and key or
room of working spaces about service other equivalent means, are considered
equipment, switchboards, panelboards, to be accessible to qualified persons
or motor control centers shall be 6 feet only. A wall, screen, or fence less than
3 inches (1.91 m). 8 feet (2.44 m) in height is not consid-
(2) Guarding of live parts. (i) Except as ered adequate to prevent access unless
required or permitted elsewhere in this it has other features that provide a de-
subpart, live parts of electric equip- gree of isolation equivalent to an 8-foot
ment operating at 50 volts or more (2.44-m) fence. The entrances to all
shall be guarded against accidental buildings, rooms or enclosures con-
contact by cabinets or other forms of taining exposed live parts or exposed
enclosures, or by any of the following conductors operating at over 600 volts,
means: nominal, shall be kept locked or shall
(A) By location in a room, vault, or be under the observation of a qualified
similar enclosure that is accessible person at all times.
only to qualified persons.
(i) Installations accessible to qualified
(B) By partitions or screens so ar-
persons only. Electrical installations
ranged that only qualified persons will
having exposed live parts shall be ac-
have access to the space within reach
of the live parts. Any openings in such cessible to qualified persons only and
partitions or screens shall be so sized shall comply with the applicable provi-
and located that persons are not likely sions of paragraph (j)(3) of this section.
to come into accidental contact with (ii) Installations accessible to unquali-
the live parts or to bring conducting fied persons. Electrical installations
objects into contact with them. that are open to unqualified persons
(C) By location on a balcony, gallery, shall be made with metal-enclosed
or platform so elevated and arranged as equipment or shall be enclosed in a
to exclude unqualified persons. vault or in an area, access to which is
(D) By elevation of 8 feet (2.44 m) or controlled by a lock. Metal-enclosed
more above the floor or other working switchgear, unit substations, trans-
surface and so installed as to exclude formers, pull boxes, connection boxes,
unqualified persons. and other similar associated equipment
(ii) In locations where electric equip- shall be marked with appropriate cau-
ment would be exposed to physical tion signs. If equipment is exposed to
damage, enclosures or guards shall be physical damage from vehicular traffic,
so arranged and of such strength as to guards shall be provided to prevent
prevent such damage. such damage. Ventilating or similar
(iii) Entrances to rooms and other
openings in metal-enclosed equipment

guarded locations containing exposed
shall be designed so that foreign ob-
live parts shall be marked with con-
jects inserted through these openings
spicuous warning signs forbidding un-
qualified persons to enter. will be deflected from energized parts.
255
2 NOTE: For SI units: one foot=0.3048 m.
(3) Workspace about equipment. Suffi-
cient space shall be provided and main- (ii) Lighting outlets and points of con-
tained about electric equipment to per- trol. The lighting outlets shall be so ar-
mit ready and safe operation and main- ranged that persons changing lamps or
tenance of such equipment. Where en- making repairs on the lighting system
ergized parts are exposed, the min- will not be endangered by live parts or
imum clear workspace shall not be less other equipment. The points of control
than 6 feet 6 inches (1.98 m) high (meas- shall be so located that persons are not
ured vertically from the floor or plat- likely to come in contact with any live
form), or less than 3 feet (914 mm) wide part or moving part of the equipment
(measured parallel to the equipment). while turning on the lights.
The depth shall be as required in Table (iii) Elevation of unguarded live parts.
K–2. The workspace shall be adequate Unguarded live parts above working
to permit at least a 90-degree opening space shall be maintained at elevations
of doors or hinged panels. not less than specified in Table K–3.
(i) Working space. The minimum clear
working space in front of electric TABLE K–3—ELEVATION OF UNGUARDED
equipment such as switchboards, con- ENERGIZED PARTS ABOVE WORKING SPACE
trol panels, switches, circuit breakers,
motor controllers, relays, and similar Nominal voltage between Minimum elevation
phases
equipment shall not be less than speci-
fied in Table K–2 unless otherwise spec- 601–7,500 .............................. 8 feet 6 inches. 1
7,501–35,000 ......................... 9 feet.
ified in this subpart. Distances shall be Over 35kV .............................. 9 feet+0.37 inches per kV
measured from the live parts if they above 35kV.
are exposed, or from the enclosure 1 NOTE: For SI units: one inch=25.4 mm; one foot=0.3048
front or opening if the live parts are m.
enclosed. However, working space is
not required in back of equipment such (4) Entrance and access to workspace.
as deadfront switchboards or control At least one entrance not less than 24
assemblies where there are no renew- inches (610 mm) wide and 6 feet 6 inches
able or adjustable parts (such as fuses (1.98 m) high shall be provided to give
or switches) on the back and where all access to the working space about elec-
connections are accessible from loca- tric equipment. On switchboard and
tions other than the back. Where rear control panels exceeding 48 inches (1.22
access is required to work on de-ener- m) in width, there shall be one en-
gized parts on the back of enclosed trance at each end of such board where
equipment, a minimum working space practicable. Where bare energized parts
of 30 inches (762 mm) horizontally shall at any voltage or insulated energized
be provided. parts above 600 volts are located adja-
cent to such entrance, they shall be
TABLE K–2—MINIMUM DEPTH OF CLEAR WORK- guarded.
ING SPACE IN FRONT OF ELECTRIC EQUIP- [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
MENT FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
Conditions 1
Nominal voltage to ground § 1926.404 Wiring design and protec-
(a) (b) (c) tion.
Feet 2 Feet 2 Feet 2 (a) Use and identification of grounded
601 to 2,500 .............................. 3 4 5 and grounding conductors—(1) Identifica-
2,501 to 9,000 ........................... 4 5 6 tion of conductors. A conductor used as
9,001 to 25,000 ......................... 5 6 9
25,001 to 75 kV ......................... 6 8 10
a grounded conductor shall be identifi-
Above 75kV ............................... 8 10 12 able and distinguishable from all other
1Conditions (a), (b), and (c) are as follows: (a) Exposed live conductors. A conductor used as an
parts on one side and no live or grounded parts on the other equipment grounding conductor shall
side of the working space, or exposed live parts on both sides be identifiable and distinguishable
effectively guarded by insulating materials. Insulated wire or
insulated busbars operating at not over 300 volts are not con- from all other conductors.
sidered live parts. (b) Exposed live parts on one side and (2) Polarity of connections. No ground-
grounded parts on the other side. Walls constructed of con-
crete, brick, or tile are considered to be grounded surfaces. ed conductor shall be attached to any
(c) Exposed live parts on both sides of the workspace [not terminal or lead so as to reverse des-
guarded as provided in Condition (a)] with the operator be-
tween. ignated polarity.
256
(3) Use of grounding terminals and de- plug, except cord sets and receptacles
vices. A grounding terminal or ground- which are fixed and not exposed to
ing-type device on a receptacle, cord damage, shall be visually inspected be-
connector, or attachment plug shall fore each day’s use for external defects,
not be used for purposes other than such as deformed or missing pins or in-
grounding. sulation damage, and for indications of
(b) Branch circuits—(1) Ground-fault possible internal damage. Equipment
protection—(i) General. The employer found damaged or defective shall not
shall use either ground fault circuit in- be used until repaired.
terrupters as specified in paragraph (D) The following tests shall be per-
(b)(1)(ii) of this section or an assured formed on all cord sets, receptacles
equipment grounding conductor pro- which are not a part of the permanent
gram as specified in paragraph wiring of the building or structure, and
(b)(1)(iii) of this section to protect em- cord- and plug-connected equipment re-
ployees on construction sites. These required to be grounded:
quirements are in addition to any (1) All equipment grounding conduc-
other requirements for equipment tors shall be tested for continuity and
grounding conductors. shall be electrically continuous.
(ii) Ground-fault circuit interrupters. (2) Each receptacle and attachment
All 120-volt, single-phase, 15- and 20- cap or plug shall be tested for correct
ampere receptacle outlets on construc- attachment of the equipment ground-
tion sites, which are not a part of the ing conductor. The equipment ground-
permanent wiring of the building or ing conductor shall be connected to its
structure and which are in use by em- proper terminal.
ployees, shall have approved ground- (E) All required tests shall be per-
fault circuit interrupters for personnel formed:
protection. Receptacles on a two-wire, (1) Before first use;
single-phase portable or vehicle- (2) Before equipment is returned to
mounted generator rated not more service following any repairs;
than 5kW, where the circuit conductors (3) Before equipment is used after
of the generator are insulated from the any incident which can be reasonably
generator frame and all other grounded suspected to have caused damage (for
surfaces, need not be protected with example, when a cord set is run over);
ground-fault circuit interrupters. and
(iii) Assured equipment grounding con- (4) At intervals not to exceed 3
ductor program. The employer shall es- months, except that cord sets and re-
tablish and implement an assured ceptacles which are fixed and not ex-
equipment grounding conductor proposed to damage shall be tested at in-
gram on construction sites covering all tervals not exceeding 6 months.
cord sets, receptacles which are not a (F) The employer shall not make
part of the building or structure, and available or permit the use by employ-
equipment connected by cord and plug ees of any equipment which has not
which are available for use or used by met the requirements of this paragraph
employees. This program shall comply (b)(1)(iii) of this section.
with the following minimum require- (G) Tests performed as required in
ments: this paragraph shall be recorded. This
(A) A written description of the pro- test record shall identify each recep-
gram, including the specific procedures tacle, cord set, and cord- and plug-con-
adopted by the employer, shall be nected equipment that passed the test
available at the jobsite for inspection and shall indicate the last date it was
and copying by the Assistant Secretary tested or the interval for which it was
and any affected employee. tested. This record shall be kept by
(B) The employer shall designate one means of logs, color coding, or other ef-
or more competent persons (as defined fective means and shall be maintained
in § 1926.32(f)) to implement the pro- until replaced by a more current
gram. record. The record shall be made avail-

(C) Each cord set, attachment cap, able on the jobsite for inspection by
plug and receptacle of cord sets, and the Assistant Secretary and any af-
any equipment connected by cord and fected employee.
257
(2) Outlet devices. Outlet devices shall (A) 10 feet (3.05 m)—above finished
have an ampere rating not less than grade, sidewalks, or from any platform
the load to be served and shall comply or projection from which they might be
with the following: reached.
(i) Single receptacles. A single recep- (B) 12 feet (3.66 m)—over areas sub-
tacle installed on an individual branch ject to vehicular traffic other than
circuit shall have an ampere rating of truck traffic.
not less than that of the branch cir- (C) 15 feet (4.57 m)—over areas other
cuit. than those specified in paragraph
(ii) Two or more receptacles. Where (c)(1)(ii)(D) of this section that are sub-
connected to a branch circuit sup- ject to truck traffic.
plying two or more receptacles or out- (D) 18 feet (5.49 m)—over public
lets, receptacle ratings shall conform streets, alleys, roads, and driveways.
to the values listed in Table K–4. (iii) Clearance from building openings.
(iii) Receptacles used for the connection Conductors shall have a clearance of at
of motors. The rating of an attachment least 3 feet (914 mm) from windows,
plug or receptacle used for cord- and doors, fire escapes, or similar loca-
plug-connection of a motor to a branch tions. Conductors run above the top
circuit shall not exceed 15 amperes at level of a window are considered to be
125 volts or 10 amperes at 250 volts if out of reach from that window and,
individual overload protection is omit- therefore, do not have to be 3 feet (914
ted. mm) away.
(iv) Clearance over roofs. Conductors
TABLE K–4—RECEPTACLE RATINGS FOR above roof space accessible to employ-
VARIOUS SIZE CIRCUITS ees on foot shall have a clearance from
the highest point of the roof surface of
Receptacle
Circuit rating amperes rating amperes not less than 8 feet (2.44 m) vertical
clearance for insulated conductors, not
15 ................................................................... Not over 15. less than 10 feet (3.05 m) vertical or di-
20 ................................................................... 15 or 20.
30 ................................................................... 30. agonal clearance for covered conduc-
40 ................................................................... 40 or 50. tors, and not less than 15 feet (4.57 m)
50 ................................................................... 50. for bare conductors, except that:
(A) Where the roof space is also ac-
(c) Outside conductors and lamps—(1) cessible to vehicular traffic, the
600 volts, nominal, or less. Paragraphs vertical clearance shall not be less
(c)(1)(i) through (c)(1)(iv) of this sec- than 18 feet (5.49 m), or
tion apply to branch circuit, feeder, (B) Where the roof space is not nor-
and service conductors rated 600 volts, mally accessible to employees on foot,
nominal, or less and run outdoors as fully insulated conductors shall have a
open conductors. vertical or diagonal clearance of not
(i) Conductors on poles. Conductors less than 3 feet (914 mm), or
supported on poles shall provide a hori- (C) Where the voltage between con-
zontal climbing space not less than the ductors is 300 volts or less and the roof
following: has a slope of not less than 4 inches (102
(A) Power conductors below commu- mm) in 12 inches (305 mm), the clear-
nication conductors—30 inches (762 ance from roofs shall be at least 3 feet
mm) . (914 mm), or
(B) Power conductors alone or above (D) Where the voltage between con-
communication conductors: 300 volts or ductors is 300 volts or less and the con-
less—24 inches (610 mm); more than 300 ductors do not pass over more than 4
volts—30 inches (762 mm). feet (1.22 m) of the overhang portion of
(C) Communication conductors below the roof and they are terminated at a
power conductors: with power conduc- through-the-roof raceway or support,
tors 300 volts or less—24 inches (610 the clearance from roofs shall be at
mm); more than 300 volts—30 inches least 18 inches (457 mm).
(762 mm). (2) Location of outdoor lamps. Lamps

(ii) Clearance from ground. Open con- for outdoor lighting shall be located
ductors shall conform to the following below all live conductors, trans-
minimum clearances: formers, or other electric equipment,
258
unless such equipment is controlled by disconnecting means shall be installed

a disconnecting means that can be so that the fuse or thermal cutout can
locked in the open position or unless be disconnected from its supply with-
adequate clearances or other safe- out disrupting service to equipment
guards are provided for relamping oper- and circuits unrelated to those pro-
ations. tected by the overcurrent device.
(d) Services—(1) Disconnecting means— (iv) Location in or on premises. Over-
(i) General. Means shall be provided to current devices shall be readily acces-
disconnect all conductors in a building sible. Overcurrent devices shall not be
or other structure from the service-en- located where they could create an em-
trance conductors. The disconnecting ployee safety hazard by being exposed
means shall plainly indicate whether it to physical damage or located in the
is in the open or closed position and vicinity of easily ignitible material.
shall be installed at a readily acces- (v) Arcing or suddenly moving parts.
sible location nearest the point of en- Fuses and circuit breakers shall be so
trance of the service-entrance conduc- located or shielded that employees will
tors. not be burned or otherwise injured by
(ii) Simultaneous opening of poles. their operation.
Each service disconnecting means shall (vi) Circuit breakers—(A) Circuit
simultaneously disconnect all breakers shall clearly indicate whether
ungrounded conductors. they are in the open (off) or closed (on)
(2) Services over 600 volts, nominal. The position.
following additional requirements (B) Where circuit breaker handles on
apply to services over 600 volts, nomi- switchboards are operated vertically
nal. rather than horizontally or
(i) Guarding. Service-entrance con- rotationally, the up position of the
ductors installed as open wires shall be handle shall be the closed (on) position.
guarded to make them accessible only (C) If used as switches in 120-volt, flu-
to qualified persons. orescent lighting circuits, circuit
(ii) Warning signs. Signs warning of breakers shall be marked ‘‘SWD.’’
high voltage shall be posted where un- (2) Over 600 volts, nominal. Feeders
authorized employees might come in and branch circuits over 600 volts,
contact with live parts. nominal, shall have short-circuit pro-
(e) Overcurrent protection—(1) 600 tection.
volts, nominal, or less. The following re- (f) Grounding. Paragraphs (f)(1)
quirements apply to overcurrent pro- through (f)(11) of this section contain
tection of circuits rated 600 volts, grounding requirements for systems,
nominal, or less. circuits, and equipment.
(i) Protection of conductors and equip- (1) Systems to be grounded. The fol-
ment. Conductors and equipment shall lowing systems which supply premises
be protected from overcurrent in ac- wiring shall be grounded:
cordance with their ability to safely (i) Three-wire DC systems. All 3-wire
conduct current. Conductors shall have DC systems shall have their neutral
sufficient ampacity to carry the load. conductor grounded.
(ii) Grounded conductors. Except for (ii) Two-wire DC systems. Two-wire DC
motor-running overload protection, systems operating at over 50 volts
overcurrent devices shall not interrupt through 300 volts between conductors
the continuity of the grounded con- shall be grounded unless they are rec-
ductor unless all conductors of the cir- tifier-derived from an AC system com-
cuit are opened simultaneously. plying with paragraphs (f)(1)(iii),
(iii) Disconnection of fuses and thermal (f)(1)(iv), and (f)(1)(v) of this section.
cutouts. Except for devices provided for (iii) AC circuits, less than 50 volts. AC
current-limiting on the supply side of circuits of less than 50 volts shall be
the service disconnecting means, all grounded if they are installed as over-
cartridge fuses which are accessible to head conductors outside of buildings or
other than qualified persons and all if they are supplied by transformers
fuses and thermal cutouts on circuits and the transformer primary supply
over 150 volts to ground shall be pro- system is ungrounded or exceeds 150
vided with disconnecting means. This volts to ground.
259
(iv) AC systems, 50 volts to 1000 volts. (B) The noncurrent-carrying metal

AC systems of 50 volts to 1000 volts parts of equipment and the equipment
shall be grounded under any of the fol- grounding conductor terminals of the
lowing conditions, unless exempted by receptacles are bonded to the generator
paragraph (f)(1)(v) of this section: frame.
(A) If the system can be so grounded (ii) Vehicle-mounted generators. Under
that the maximum voltage to ground the following conditions the frame of a
on the ungrounded conductors does not vehicle may serve as the grounding
exceed 150 volts; electrode for a system supplied by a
(B) If the system is nominally rated generator located on the vehicle:
480Y/277 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which
(A) The frame of the generator is
the neutral is used as a circuit con-
ductor; bonded to the vehicle frame, and
(C) If the system is nominally rated (B) The generator supplies only
240/120 volt, 3-phase, 4-wire in which equipment located on the vehicle and/
the midpoint of one phase is used as a or cord- and plug-connected equipment
circuit conductor; or through receptacles mounted on the
(D) If a service conductor is vehicle or on the generator, and
uninsulated. (C) The noncurrent-carrying metal
(v) Exceptions. AC systems of 50 volts parts of equipment and the equipment
to 1000 volts are not required to be grounding conductor terminals of the
grounded if the system is separately receptacles are bonded to the generator
derived and is supplied by a trans- frame, and
former that has a primary voltage rat- (D) The system complies with all
ing less than 1000 volts, provided all of other provisions of this section.
the following conditions are met: (iii) Neutral conductor bonding. A neu-
(A) The system is used exclusively tral conductor shall be bonded to the
for control circuits, generator frame if the generator is a
(B) The conditions of maintenance
component of a separately derived sys-
and supervision assure that only quali-
tem. No other conductor need be bond-
fied persons will service the installa-
tion, ed to the generator frame.
(C) Continuity of control power is re- (4) Conductors to be grounded. For AC
quired, and premises wiring systems the identified
(D) Ground detectors are installed on conductor shall be grounded.
the control system. (5) Grounding connections—(i) Ground-
(2) Separately derived systems. Where ed system. For a grounded system, a
paragraph (f)(1) of this section requires grounding electrode conductor shall be
grounding of wiring systems whose used to connect both the equipment
power is derived from generator, trans- grounding conductor and the grounded
former, or converter windings and has circuit conductor to the grounding
no direct electrical connection, includ- electrode. Both the equipment ground-
ing a solidly connected grounded cir- ing conductor and the grounding elec-
cuit conductor, to supply conductors trode conductor shall be connected to
originating in another system, para- the grounded circuit conductor on the
graph (f)(5) of this section shall also supply side of the service disconnecting
apply. means, or on the supply side of the sys-
(3) Portable and vehicle-mounted gen- tem disconnecting means or overcur-
erators—(i) Portable generators. Under rent devices if the system is separately
the following conditions, the frame of a derived.
portable generator need not be ground-
(ii) Ungrounded systems. For an
ed and may serve as the grounding
electrode for a system supplied by the ungrounded service-supplied system,
generator: the equipment grounding conductor
(A) The generator supplies only shall be connected to the grounding
equipment mounted on the generator electrode conductor at the service

and/or cord- and plug-connected equip- equipment. For an ungrounded sepa-
ment through receptacles mounted on rately derived system, the equipment
the generator, and
260
grounding conductor shall be con- equipment and accessible to qualified

nected to the grounding electrode con- persons only;
ductor at, or ahead of, the system dis- (2) Metal frames of electrically heat-
connecting means or overcurrent de- ed appliances which are permanently
vices. and effectively insulated from ground;
(6) Grounding path. The path to and
ground from circuits, equipment, and (3) The cases of distribution appa-
enclosures shall be permanent and con- ratus such as transformers and capaci-
tinuous. tors mounted on wooden poles at a
(7) Supports, enclosures, and equipment height exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above
to be grounded—(i) Supports and enclo- ground or grade level.
sures for conductors. Metal cable trays, (iv) Equipment connected by cord and
metal raceways, and metal enclosures plug. Under any of the conditions de-
for conductors shall be grounded, ex- scribed in paragraphs (f)(7)(iv)(A)
cept that: through (f)(7)(iv)(C) of this section, ex-
(A) Metal enclosures such as sleeves posed noncurrent-carrying metal parts
that are used to protect cable assem- of cord- and plug-connected equipment
blies from physical damage need not be which may become energized shall be
grounded; and grounded:
(B) Metal enclosures for conductors (A) If in a hazardous (classified) loca-
added to existing installations of open tion (see § 1926.407).
wire, knob-and-tube wiring, and non- (B) If operated at over 150 volts to
metallic-sheathed cable need not be ground, except for guarded motors and
grounded if all of the following condi- metal frames of electrically heated ap-
tions are met: pliances if the appliance frames are
(1) Runs are less than 25 feet (7.62 m); permanently and effectively insulated
(2) Enclosures are free from probable from ground.
contact with ground, grounded metal,
(C) If the equipment is one of the
metal laths, or other conductive mate-
types listed in paragraphs
rials; and
(f)(7)(iv)(C)(1) through (f)(7)(iv)(C)(5) of
(3) Enclosures are guarded against
this section. However, even though the
employee contact.
equipment may be one of these types,
(ii) Service equipment enclosures. Metal
it need not be grounded if it is exempt-
enclosures for service equipment shall
ed by paragraph (f)(7)(iv)(C)(6).
be grounded.
(iii) Fixed equipment. Exposed noncur- (1) Hand held motor-operated tools;
rent-carrying metal parts of fixed (2) Cord- and plug-connected equip-
equipment which may become ener- ment used in damp or wet locations or
gized shall be grounded under any of by employees standing on the ground
the following conditions: or on metal floors or working inside of
(A) If within 8 feet (2.44 m) vertically metal tanks or boilers;
or 5 feet (1.52 m) horizontally of ground (3) Portable and mobile X-ray and as-
or grounded metal objects and subject sociated equipment;
to employee contact. (4) Tools likely to be used in wet and/
(B) If located in a wet or damp loca- or conductive locations; and
tion and subject to employee contact. (5) Portable hand lamps.
(C) If in electrical contact with (6) Tools likely to be used in wet and/
metal. or conductive locations need not be
(D) If in a hazardous (classified) loca- grounded if supplied through an iso-
tion. lating transformer with an ungrounded
(E) If supplied by a metal-clad, secondary of not over 50 volts. Listed
metal-sheathed, or grounded metal or labeled portable tools and appli-
raceway wiring method. ances protected by a system of double
(F) If equipment operates with any insulation, or its equivalent, need not
terminal at over 150 volts to ground; be grounded. If such a system is em-
however, the following need not be ployed, the equipment shall be distinc-
grounded: tively marked to indicate that the tool
(1) Enclosures for switches or circuit or appliance utilizes a system of double
breakers used for other than service insulation.
261
(v) Nonelectrical equipment. The metal than 6 feet (1.83 m) to the first elec-
parts of the following nonelectrical trode.
equipment shall be grounded: Frames (11) Grounding of systems and circuits
and tracks of electrically operated of 1000 volts and over (high voltage)—(i)
cranes; frames of nonelectrically driv- General. If high voltage systems are
en elevator cars to which electric con- grounded, they shall comply with all
ductors are attached; hand-operated applicable provisions of paragraphs
metal shifting ropes or cables of elec- (f)(1) through (f)(10) of this section as
tric elevators, and metal partitions, supplemented and modified by this
grill work, and similar metal enclo- paragraph (f)(11).
sures around equipment of over IkV be- (ii) Grounding of systems supplying
tween conductors. portable or mobile equipment. Systems
(8) Methods of grounding equipment— supplying portable or mobile high volt-
(i) With circuit conductors. Noncurrent- age equipment, other than substations
carrying metal parts of fixed equip- installed on a temporary basis, shall
ment, if required to be grounded by comply with the following:
this subpart, shall be grounded by an (A) Portable and mobile high voltage
equipment grounding conductor which equipment shall be supplied from a sys-
is contained within the same raceway, tem having its neutral grounded
cable, or cord, or runs with or encloses through an impedance. If a delta-con-
the circuit conductors. For DC circuits
nected high voltage system is used to
only, the equipment grounding con-
supply the equipment, a system neu-
ductor may be run separately from the
tral shall be derived.
circuit conductors.
(ii) Grounding conductor. A conductor (B) Exposed noncurrent-carrying
used for grounding fixed or movable metal parts of portable and mobile
equipment shall have capacity to con- equipment shall be connected by an
duct safely any fault current which equipment grounding conductor to the
may be imposed on it. point at which the system neutral im-
(iii) Equipment considered effectively pedance is grounded.
grounded. Electric equipment is consid- (C) Ground-fault detection and relay-
ered to be effectively grounded if it is ing shall be provided to automatically
secured to, and in electrical contact de-energize any high voltage system
with, a metal rack or structure that is component which has developed a
provided for its support and the metal ground fault. The continuity of the
rack or structure is grounded by the equipment grounding conductor shall
method specified for the noncurrent- be continuously monitored so as to de-
carrying metal parts of fixed equip- energize automatically the high volt-
ment in paragraph (f)(8)(i) of this sec- age feeder to the portable equipment
tion. Metal car frames supported by upon loss of continuity of the equip-
metal hoisting cables attached to or ment grounding conductor.
running over metal sheaves or drums of (D) The grounding electrode to which
grounded elevator machines are also the portable or mobile equipment sys-
considered to be effectively grounded. tem neutral impedance is connected
(9) Bonding. If bonding conductors are shall be isolated from and separated in
used to assure electrical continuity, the ground by at least 20 feet (6.1 m)
they shall have the capacity to conduct from any other system or equipment
any fault current which may be im- grounding electrode, and there shall be
posed. no direct connection between the
(10) Made electrodes. If made elec- grounding electrodes, such as buried
trodes are used, they shall be free from pipe, fence or like objects.
nonconductive coatings, such as paint (iii) Grounding of equipment. All non-
or enamel; and, if practicable, they current-carrying metal parts of port-
shall be embedded below permanent able equipment and fixed equipment in-
moisture level. A single electrode con- cluding their associated fences,
sisting of a rod, pipe or plate which has housings, enclosures, and supporting
a resistance to ground greater than 25 structures shall be grounded. However,
ohms shall be augmented by one addi- equipment which is guarded by loca-
tional electrode installed no closer tion and isolated from ground need not
262
be grounded. Additionally, pole-mount- tors shall be run as multiconductor

ed distribution apparatus at a height cord or cable assemblies or open con-
exceeding 8 feet (2.44 m) above ground ductors, or shall be run in raceways.
or grade level need not be grounded. All conductors shall be protected by
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 54
overcurrent devices at their ampacity.
FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, Runs of open conductors shall be lo-
1996] cated where the conductors will not be
subject to physical damage, and the
§ 1926.405 Wiring methods, compo- conductors shall be fastened at inter-
nents, and equipment for general vals not exceeding 10 feet (3.05 m). No
use. branch-circuit conductors shall be laid
(a) Wiring methods. The provisions of on the floor. Each branch circuit that
this paragraph do not apply to conduc- supplies receptacles or fixed equipment
tors which form an integral part of shall contain a separate equipment
equipment such as motors, controllers, grounding conductor if the branch cir-
motor control centers and like equip- cuit is run as open conductors.
ment. (C) Receptacles shall be of the
(1) General requirements—(i) Electrical grounding type. Unless installed in a
continuity of metal raceways and enclo- complete metallic raceway, each
sures. Metal raceways, cable armor, and branch circuit shall contain a separate
other metal enclosures for conductors equipment grounding conductor, and
shall be metallically joined together all receptacles shall be electrically
into a continuous electric conductor connected to the grounding conductor.
and shall be so connected to all boxes, Receptacles for uses other than tem-
fittings, and cabinets as to provide ef- porary lighting shall not be installed
fective electrical continuity. on branch circuits which supply tem-
(ii) Wiring in ducts. No wiring systems porary lighting. Receptacles shall not
of any type shall be installed in ducts be connected to the same ungrounded
used to transport dust, loose stock or conductor of multiwire circuits which
flammable vapors. No wiring system of supply temporary lighting.
any type shall be installed in any duct (D) Disconnecting switches or plug
used for vapor removal or in any shaft connectors shall be installed to permit
containing only such ducts. the disconnection of all ungrounded
(2) Temporary wiring—(i) Scope. The conductors of each temporary circuit.
provisions of paragraph (a)(2) of this (E) All lamps for general illumina-
section apply to temporary electrical tion shall be protected from accidental
power and lighting wiring methods contact or breakage. Metal-case sock-
which may be of a class less than would ets shall be grounded.
be required for a permanent installa- (F) Temporary lights shall not be
tion. Except as specifically modified in suspended by their electric cords unless
paragraph (a)(2) of this section, all cords and lights are designed for this
other requirements of this subpart for means of suspension.
permanent wiring shall apply to tem- (G) Portable electric lighting used in
porary wiring installations. Temporary wet and/or other conductive locations,
wiring shall be removed immediately as for example, drums, tanks, and ves-
upon completion of construction or the sels, shall be operated at 12 volts or
purpose for which the wiring was in- less. However, 120-volt lights may be
stalled. used if protected by a ground-fault cir-
(ii) General requirements for temporary cuit interrupter.
wiring—(A) Feeders shall originate in a (H) A box shall be used wherever a
distribution center. The conductors change is made to a raceway system or
shall be run as multiconductor cord or a cable system which is metal clad or
cable assemblies or within raceways; metal sheathed.
or, where not subject to physical dam- (I) Flexible cords and cables shall be
age, they may be run as open conduc- protected from damage. Sharp corners
tors on insulators not more than 10 feet and projections shall be avoided. Flexi-
(3.05 m) apart. ble cords and cables may pass through
(B) Branch circuits shall originate in doorways or other pinch points, if pro-
a power outlet or panelboard. Conduc- tection is provided to avoid damage.
263
(J) Extension cord sets used with the box cover and shall be readily visi-
portable electric tools and appliances ble and legible.
shall be of three-wire type and shall be (c) Knife switches. Single-throw knife
designed for hard or extra-hard usage. switches shall be so connected that the
Flexible cords used with temporary and blades are dead when the switch is in
portable lights shall be designed for the open position. Single-throw knife
hard or extra-hard usage. switches shall be so placed that gravity
will not tend to close them. Single-
NOTE: The National Electrical Code, ANSI/
NFPA 70, in Article 400, Table 400–4, lists throw knife switches approved for use
various types of flexible cords, some of which in the inverted position shall be pro-
are noted as being designed for hard or extra- vided with a locking device that will
hard usage. Examples of these types of flexi- ensure that the blades remain in the
ble cords include hard service cord (types S, open position when so set. Double-
ST, SO, STO) and junior hard service cord throw knife switches may be mounted
(types SJ, SJO, SJT, SJTO). so that the throw will be either
(iii) Guarding. For temporary wiring vertical or horizontal. However, if the
over 600 volts, nominal, fencing, bar- throw is vertical, a locking device shall
riers, or other effective means shall be be provided to ensure that the blades
provided to prevent access of other remain in the open position when so
than authorized and qualified per- set.
sonnel. (d) Switchboards and panelboards.
(b) Cabinets, boxes, and fittings—(1) Switchboards that have any exposed
Conductors entering boxes, cabinets, or live parts shall be located in perma-
fittings. Conductors entering boxes, nently dry locations and accessible
cabinets, or fittings shall be protected only to qualified persons. Panelboards
from abrasion, and openings through shall be mounted in cabinets, cutout
which conductors enter shall be effec- boxes, or enclosures designed for the
tively closed. Unused openings in cabi- purpose and shall be dead front. How-
nets, boxes, and fittings shall also be ever, panelboards other than the dead
effectively closed. front externally-operable type are per-
(2) Covers and canopies. All pull boxes, mitted where accessible only to quali-
junction boxes, and fittings shall be fied persons. Exposed blades of knife
provided with covers. If metal covers switches shall be dead when open.
are used, they shall be grounded. In en- (e) Enclosures for damp or wet loca-
ergized installations each outlet box tions—(1) Cabinets, fittings, and boxes.
shall have a cover, faceplate, or fixture Cabinets, cutout boxes, fittings, boxes,
canopy. Covers of outlet boxes having and panelboard enclosures in damp or
holes through which flexible cord pend- wet locations shall be installed so as to
ants pass shall be provided with bush- prevent moisture or water from enter-
ings designed for the purpose or shall ing and accumulating within the enclo-
have smooth, well-rounded surfaces on sures. In wet locations the enclosures
which the cords may bear. shall be weatherproof.
(3) Pull and junction boxes for systems (2) Switches and circuit breakers.
over 600 volts, nominal. In addition to Switches, circuit breakers, and switch-
other requirements in this section for boards installed in wet locations shall
pull and junction boxes, the following be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures.
shall apply to these boxes for systems (f) Conductors for general wiring. All
over 600 volts, nominal: conductors used for general wiring
(i) Complete enclosure. Boxes shall shall be insulated unless otherwise per-
provide a complete enclosure for the mitted in this subpart. The conductor
contained conductors or cables. insulation shall be of a type that is
(ii) Covers. Boxes shall be closed by suitable for the voltage, operating tem-
covers securely fastened in place. Un- perature, and location of use. Insulated
derground box covers that weigh over conductors shall be distinguishable by
100 pounds (43.6 kg) meet this require- appropriate color or other means as
ment. Covers for boxes shall be perma- being grounded conductors,
nently marked ‘‘HIGH VOLTAGE.’’ ungrounded conductors, or equipment
The marking shall be on the outside of grounding conductors.
264
(g) Flexible cords and cables—(1) Use of insulation, outer sheath properties,
flexible cords and cables—(i) Permitted and usage characteristics of the cord
uses. Flexible cords and cables shall be being spliced.
suitable for conditions of use and loca- (iv) Strain relief. Flexible cords shall
tion. Flexible cords and cables shall be be connected to devices and fittings so
used only for: that strain relief is provided which will
(A) Pendants; prevent pull from being directly trans-
(B) Wiring of fixtures; mitted to joints or terminal screws.
(C) Connection of portable lamps or (v) Cords passing through holes. Flexi-
appliances; ble cords and cables shall be protected
(D) Elevator cables; by bushings or fittings where passing
(E) Wiring of cranes and hoists;
through holes in covers, outlet boxes,
(F) Connection of stationary equip-
or similar enclosures.
ment to facilitate their frequent inter-
change; (h) Portable cables over 600 volts, nomi-
(G) Prevention of the transmission of nal. Multiconductor portable cable for
noise or vibration; or use in supplying power to portable or
(H) Appliances where the fastening mobile equipment at over 600 volts,
means and mechanical connections are nominal, shall consist of No. 8 or larger
designed to permit removal for mainte- conductors employing flexible strand-
nance and repair. ing. Cables operated at over 2000 volts
(ii) Attachment plugs for cords. If used shall be shielded for the purpose of con-
as permitted in paragraphs (g)(1)(i)(C), fining the voltage stresses to the insu-
(g)(1)(i)(F), or (g)(1)(i)(H) of this sec- lation. Grounding conductors shall be
tion, the flexible cord shall be equipped provided. Connectors for these cables
with an attachment plug and shall be shall be of a locking type with provi-
energized from a receptacle outlet. sions to prevent their opening or clos-
(iii) Prohibited uses. Unless necessary ing while energized. Strain relief shall
for a use permitted in paragraph be provided at connections and termi-
(g)(1)(i) of this section, flexible cords nations. Portable cables shall not be
and cables shall not be used: operated with splices unless the splices
(A) As a substitute for the fixed wir- are of the permanent molded, vulcan-
ing of a structure; ized, or other equivalent type. Termi-
(B) Where run through holes in walls, nation enclosures shall be marked with
ceilings, or floors; a high voltage hazard warning, and ter-
(C) Where run through doorways, minations shall be accessible only to
windows, or similar openings, except as authorized and qualified personnel.
permitted in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(1) of (i) Fixture wires—(1) General. Fixture
this section; wires shall be suitable for the voltage,
(D) Where attached to building sur- temperature, and location of use. A fix-
faces; or ture wire which is used as a grounded
(E) Where concealed behind building conductor shall be identified.
walls, ceilings, or floors. (2) Uses permitted. Fixture wires may
(2) Identification, splices, and termi- be used:
nations—(i) Identification. A conductor
(i) For installation in lighting, fix-
of a flexible cord or cable that is used
tures and in similar equipment where
as a grounded conductor or an equip-
enclosed or protected and not subject
ment grounding conductor shall be dis-
tinguishable from other conductors. to bending or twisting in use; or
(ii) Marking. Type SJ, SJO, SJT, (ii) For connecting lighting fixtures
SJTO, S, SO, ST, and STO cords shall to the branch-circuit conductors sup-
not be used unless durably marked on plying the fixtures.
the surface with the type designation, (3) Uses not permitted. Fixture wires
size, and number of conductors. shall not be used as branch-circuit con-
(iii) Splices. Flexible cords shall be ductors except as permitted for Class 1
used only in continuous lengths with- power-limited circuits.

out splice or tap. Hard service flexible (j) Equipment for general use—(1)
cords No. 12 or larger may be repaired Lighting fixtures, lampholders, lamps,
if spliced so that the splice retains the and receptacles—(i) Live parts. Fixtures,
265
lampholders, lamps, rosettes, and re- circuits having different voltages, fre-
ceptacles shall have no live parts nor- quencies, or types of current (ac or dc)
mally exposed to employee contact. on the same premises shall be of such
However, rosettes and cleat-type design that the attachment plugs used
lampholders and receptacles located at on these circuits are not interchange-
least 8 feet (2.44 m) above the floor may able.
have exposed parts. (ii) Damp and wet locations. A recep-
(ii) Support. Fixtures, lampholders, tacle installed in a wet or damp loca-
rosettes, and receptacles shall be se- tion shall be designed for the location.
curely supported. A fixture that weighs (3) Appliances—(i) Live parts. Appli-
more than 6 pounds (2.72 kg) or exceeds ances, other than those in which the
16 inches (406 mm) in any dimension current-carrying parts at high tem-
shall not be supported by the screw peratures are necessarily exposed, shall
shell of a lampholder. have no live parts normally exposed to
(iii) Portable lamps. Portable lamps employee contact.
shall be wired with flexible cord and an (ii) Disconnecting means. A means
attachment plug of the polarized or shall be provided to disconnect each
grounding type. If the portable lamp appliance.
uses an Edison-based lampholder, the (iii) Rating. Each appliance shall be
grounded conductor shall be identified marked with its rating in volts and
and attached to the screw shell and the amperes or volts and watts.
identified blade of the attachment (4) Motors. This paragraph applies to
plug. In addition, portable handlamps motors, motor circuits, and control-
shall comply with the following: lers.
(A) Metal shell, paperlined (i) In sight from. If specified that one
lampholders shall not be used; piece of equipment shall be ‘‘in sight
(B) Handlamps shall be equipped with from’’ another piece of equipment, one
a handle of molded composition or shall be visible and not more than 50
other insulating material; feet (15.2 m) from the other.
(C) Handlamps shall be equipped with (ii) Disconnecting means—(A) A dis-
a substantial guard attached to the connecting means shall be located in
lampholder or handle; sight from the controller location. The
(D) Metallic guards shall be grounded controller disconnecting means for
by the means of an equipment ground- motor branch circuits over 600 volts,
ing conductor run within the power nominal, may be out of sight of the
supply cord. controller, if the controller is marked
(iv) Lampholders. Lampholders of the with a warning label giving the loca-
screw-shell type shall be installed for tion and identification of the dis-
use as lampholders only. Lampholders connecting means which is to be locked
installed in wet or damp locations shall in the open position.
be of the weatherproof type. (B) The disconnecting means shall
(v) Fixtures. Fixtures installed in wet disconnect the motor and the con-
or damp locations shall be identified troller from all ungrounded supply con-
for the purpose and shall be installed ductors and shall be so designed that
so that water cannot enter or accumu- no pole can be operated independently.
late in wireways, lampholders, or other (C) If a motor and the driven machin-
electrical parts. ery are not in sight from the controller
(2) Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- location, the installation shall comply
tachment plugs (caps)—(i) Configuration. with one of the following conditions:
Receptacles, cord connectors, and at- (1) The controller disconnecting
tachment plugs shall be constructed so means shall be capable of being locked
that no receptacle or cord connector in the open position.
will accept an attachment plug with a (2) A manually operable switch that
different voltage or current rating than will disconnect the motor from its
that for which the device is intended. source of supply shall be placed in
However, a 20-ampere T-slot receptacle sight from the motor location.

or cord connector may accept a 15-am- (D) The disconnecting means shall
pere attachment plug of the same volt- plainly indicate whether it is in the
age rating. Receptacles connected to open (off) or closed (on) position.
266
(E) The disconnecting means shall be (B) Where live parts of motors or con-
readily accessible. If more than one trollers operating at over 150 volts to
disconnect is provided for the same ground are guarded against accidental
equipment, only one need be readily contact only by location, and where ad-
accessible. justment or other attendance may be
(F) An individual disconnecting necessary during the operation of the
means shall be provided for each apparatus, insulating mats or plat-
motor, but a single disconnecting forms shall be provided so that the at-
means may be used for a group of mo- tendant cannot readily touch live parts
tors under any one of the following unless standing on the mats or plat-
conditions: forms.
(1) If a number of motors drive spe- (5) Transformers—(i) Application. The
cial parts of a single machine or piece following paragraphs cover the instal-
of apparatus, such as a metal or wood- lation of all transformers, except:
working machine, crane, or hoist; (A) Current transformers;
(2) If a group of motors is under the (B) Dry-type transformers installed
protection of one set of branch-circuit as a component part of other appa-
protective devices; or ratus;
(C) Transformers which are an inte-
(3) If a group of motors is in a single
gral part of an X-ray, high frequency,
room in sight from the location of the
or electrostatic-coating apparatus;
disconnecting means.
(D) Transformers used with Class 2
(iii) Motor overload, short-circuit, and and Class 3 circuits, sign and outline
ground-fault protection. Motors, motor- lighting, electric discharge lighting,
control apparatus, and motor branch- and power-limited fire-protective sig-
circuit conductors shall be protected naling circuits.
against overheating due to motor over- (ii) Operating voltage. The operating
loads or failure to start, and against voltage of exposed live parts of trans-
short-circuits or ground faults. These former installations shall be indicated
provisions do not require overload pro- by warning signs or visible markings
tection that will stop a motor where a on the equipment or structure.
shutdown is likely to introduce addi- (iii) Transformers over 35 kV. Dry-
tional or increased hazards, as in the type, high fire point liquid-insulated,
case of fire pumps, or where continued and askarel-insulated transformers in-
operation of a motor is necessary for a stalled indoors and rated over 35 kV
safe shutdown of equipment or process shall be in a vault.
and motor overload sensing devices are (iv) Oil-insulated transformers. If they
connected to a supervised alarm. present a fire hazard to employees, oil-
(iv) Protection of live parts—all insulated transformers installed in-
voltages—(A) Stationary motors having doors shall be in a vault.
commutators, collectors, and brush (v) Fire protection. Combustible mate-
rigging located inside of motor end rial, combustible buildings and parts of
brackets and not conductively con- buildings, fire escapes, and door and
nected to supply circuits operating at window openings shall be safeguarded
more than 150 volts to ground need not from fires which may originate in oil-
have such parts guarded. Exposed live insulated transformers attached to or
parts of motors and controllers oper- adjacent to a building or combustible
ating at 50 volts or more between ter- material.
minals shall be guarded against acci- (vi) Transformer vaults. Transformer
dental contact by any of the following: vaults shall be constructed so as to
(1) By installation in a room or en- contain fire and combustible liquids
closure that is accessible only to quali- within the vault and to prevent unau-
fied persons; thorized access. Locks and latches
(2) By installation on a balcony, gal- shall be so arranged that a vault door
lery, or platform, so elevated and ar- can be readily opened from the inside.
ranged as to exclude unqualified per- (vii) Pipes and ducts. Any pipe or duct
sons; or system foreign to the vault installa-
(3) By elevation 8 feet (2.44 m) or tion shall not enter or pass through a
more above the floor. transformer vault.
267
(viii) Material storage. Materials shall (B) The additional disconnect may be
not be stored in transformer vaults. omitted if a monorail hoist or hand-
(6) Capacitors—(i) Drainage of stored propelled crane bridge installation
charge. All capacitors, except surge ca- meets all of the following:
pacitors or capacitors included as a (1) The unit is floor controlled;
component part of other apparatus, (2) The unit is within view of the
shall be provided with an automatic power supply disconnecting means; and
means of draining the stored charge
(3) No fixed work platform has been
and maintaining the discharged state
provided for servicing the unit.
after the capacitor is disconnected
from its source of supply. (2) Control. A limit switch or other
(ii) Over 600 volts. Capacitors rated device shall be provided to prevent the
over 600 volts, nominal, shall comply load block from passing the safe upper
with the following additional require- limit of travel of any hoisting mecha-
ments: nism.
(A) Isolating or disconnecting switch- (3) Clearance. The dimension of the
es (with no interrupting rating) shall working space in the direction of ac-
be interlocked with the load inter- cess to live parts which may require
rupting device or shall be provided examination, adjustment, servicing, or
with prominently displayed caution maintenance while alive shall be a
signs to prevent switching load cur- minimum of 2 feet 6 inches (762 mm).
rent. Where controls are enclosed in cabi-
(B) For series capacitors the proper nets, the door(s) shall open at least 90
switching shall be assured by use of at degrees or be removable, or the instal-
least one of the following: lation shall provide equivalent access.
(1) Mechanically sequenced isolating (4) Grounding. All exposed metal
and bypass switches, parts of cranes, monorail hoists, hoists
(2) Interlocks, or and accessories including pendant con-
(3) Switching procedure prominently trols shall be metallically joined to-
displayed at the switching location.
gether into a continuous electrical con-
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61 ductor so that the entire crane or hoist
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] will be grounded in accordance with
§ 1926.404(f). Moving parts, other than
§ 1926.406 Specific purpose equipment
and installations. removable accessories or attachments,
having metal-to-metal bearing surfaces
(a) Cranes and hoists. This paragraph shall be considered to be electrically
applies to the installation of electric connected to each other through the
equipment and wiring used in connec- bearing surfaces for grounding pur-
tion with cranes, monorail hoists, poses. The trolley frame and bridge
hoists, and all runways. frame shall be considered as elec-
(1) Disconnecting means—(i) Runway
trically grounded through the bridge
conductor disconnecting means. A readily
and trolley wheels and its respective
accessible disconnecting means shall
tracks unless conditions such as paint
be provided between the runway con-
or other insulating materials prevent
tact conductors and the power supply.
(ii) Disconnecting means for cranes and reliable metal-to-metal contact. In this
monorail hoists. A disconnecting means, case a separate bonding conductor
capable of being locked in the open po- shall be provided.
sition, shall be provided in the leads (b) Elevators, escalators, and moving
from the runway contact conductors or walks—(1) Disconnecting means. Ele-
other power supply on any crane or vators, escalators, and moving walks
monorail hoist. shall have a single means for dis-
(A) If this additional disconnecting connecting all ungrounded main power
means is not readily accessible from supply conductors for each unit.
the crane or monorail hoist operating (2) Control panels. If control panels
station, means shall be provided at the are not located in the same space as
operating station to open the power the drive machine, they shall be lo-
circuit to all motors of the crane or cated in cabinets with doors or panels
monorail hoist. capable of being locked closed.
268
(c) Electric welders—disconnecting ered individually in determining its

means—(1) Motor-generator, AC trans- classification. These hazardous (classi-
former, and DC rectifier arc welders. A fied) locations are assigned six designa-
disconnecting means shall be provided tions as follows:
in the supply circuit for each motor-
Class I, Division 1
generator arc welder, and for each AC Class I, Division 2
transformer and DC rectifier arc welder Class II, Division 1
which is not equipped with a dis- Class II, Division 2
connect mounted as an integral part of Class III, Division l
the welder. Class III, Division 2
(2) Resistance welders. A switch or cir- For definitions of these locations see
cuit breaker shall be provided by which § 1926.449. All applicable requirements
each resistance welder and its control in this subpart apply to all hazardous
equipment can be isolated from the (classified) locations, unless modified
supply circuit. The ampere rating of by provisions of this section.
this disconnecting means shall not be (b) Electrical installations. Equipment,
less than the supply conductor wiring methods, and installations of
ampacity. equipment in hazardous (classified) lo-
(d) X-Ray equipment—(1) Disconnecting cations shall be approved as intrinsi-
means—(i) General. A disconnecting cally safe or approved for the haz-
means shall be provided in the supply ardous (classified) location or safe for
circuit. The disconnecting means shall the hazardous (classified) location. Re-
be operable from a location readily ac- quirements for each of these options
cessible from the X-ray control. For are as follows:
equipment connected to a 120-volt (1) Intrinsically safe. Equipment and
branch circuit of 30 amperes or less, a associated wiring approved as intrinsi-
grounding-type attachment plug cap cally safe is permitted in any haz-
and receptacle of proper rating may ardous (classified) location included in
serve as a disconnecting means. its listing or labeling.
(ii) More than one piece of equipment. (2) Approved for the hazardous (classi-
If more than one piece of equipment is fied) location—(i) General. Equipment
operated from the same high-voltage shall be approved not only for the class
circuit, each piece or each group of of location but also for the ignitible or
equipment as a unit shall be provided combustible properties of the specific
with a high-voltage switch or equiva- gas, vapor, dust, or fiber that will be
lent disconnecting means. This dis- present.
connecting means shall be constructed,
enclosed, or located so as to avoid con- NOTE: NFPA 70, the National Electrical
tact by employees with its live parts. Code, lists or defines hazardous gases, va-
(2) Control—Radiographic and pors, and dusts by ‘‘Groups’’ characterized by
their ignitible or combustible properties.
fluoroscopic types. Radiographic and
fluoroscopic-type equipment shall be (ii) Marking. Equipment shall not be
effectively enclosed or shall have inter- used unless it is marked to show the
locks that deenergize the equipment class, group, and operating tempera-
automatically to prevent ready access ture or temperature range, based on
to live current-carrying parts. operation in a 40-degree C ambient, for
which it is approved. The temperature
§ 1926.407 Hazardous (classified) loca- marking shall not exceed the ignition
tions. temperature of the specific gas, vapor,
(a) Scope. This section sets forth re- or dust to be encountered. However,
quirements for electric equipment and the following provisions modify this
wiring in locations which are classified marking requirement for specific
depending on the properties of the equipment:
flammable vapors, liquids or gases, or (A) Equipment of the non-heat-pro-
combustible dusts or fibers which may ducing type (such as junction boxes,
be present therein and the likelihood conduit, and fitting) and equipment of
that a flammable or combustible con- the heat-producing type having a max-
centration or quantity is present. Each imum temperature of not more than
room, section or area shall be consid- 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) need not
269
have a marked operating temperature § 1926.408 Special systems.

or temperature range. (a) Systems over 600 volts, nominal.
(B) Fixed lighting fixtures marked Paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(4) of this
for use only in Class I, Division 2 loca- section contain general requirements
tions need not be marked to indicate for all circuits and equipment operated
the group. at over 600 volts.
(C) Fixed general-purpose equipment (1) Wiring methods for fixed installa-
in Class I locations, other than lighting tions—(i) Above ground. Above-ground
fixtures, which is acceptable for use in conductors shall be installed in rigid
Class I, Division 2 locations need not be metal conduit, in intermediate metal
marked with the class, group, division, conduit, in cable trays, in cablebus, in
or operating temperature. other suitable raceways, or as open
(D) Fixed dust-tight equipment, runs of metal-clad cable designed for
other than lighting fixtures, which is the use and purpose. However, open
runs of non-metallic-sheathed cable or
acceptable for use in Class II, Division
of bare conductors or busbars may be
2 and Class III locations need not be installed in locations which are acces-
marked with the class, group, division, sible only to qualified persons. Metallic
or operating temperature. shielding components, such as tapes,
(3) Safe for the hazardous (classified) wires, or braids for conductors, shall be
location. Equipment which is safe for grounded. Open runs of insulated wires
the location shall be of a type and de- and cables having a bare lead sheath or
sign which the employer demonstrates a braided outer covering shall be sup-
will provide protection from the haz- ported in a manner designed to prevent
ards arising from the combustibility physical damage to the braid or sheath.
and flammability of vapors, liquids, (ii) Installations emerging from the
gases, dusts, or fibers. ground. Conductors emerging from the
ground shall be enclosed in raceways.
NOTE: The National Electrical Code, NFPA Raceways installed on poles shall be of
70, contains guidelines for determining the rigid metal conduit, intermediate
type and design of equipment and installa-
metal conduit, PVC schedule 80 or
tions which will meet this requirement. The
equivalent extending from the ground
guidelines of this document address electric
wiring, equipment, and systems installed in
line up to a point 8 feet (2.44 m) above
hazardous (classified) locations and contain finished grade. Conductors entering a
specific provisions for the following: wiring building shall be protected by an enclo-
methods, wiring connections, conductor insure from the ground line to the point
sulation, flexible cords, sealing and drainage, of entrance. Metallic enclosures shall
transformers, capacitors, switches, circuit be grounded.
breakers, fuses, motor controllers, recep- (2) Interrupting and isolating devices—
tacles, attachment plugs, meters, relays, in- (i) Circuit breakers. Circuit breakers lo-
struments, resistors, generators, motors, cated indoors shall consist of metal-en-
lighting fixtures, storage battery charging closed or fire-resistant, cell-mounted
equipment, electric cranes, electric hoists units. In locations accessible only to
and similar equipment, utilization equip- qualified personnel, open mounting of
ment, signaling systems, alarm systems, re- circuit breakers is permitted. A means
mote control systems, local loud speaker and
of indicating the open and closed posi-
communication systems, ventilation piping,
live parts, lightning surge protection, and
tion of circuit breakers shall be pro-
grounding. Compliance with these guidelines vided.
will constitute one means, but not the only (ii) Fused cutouts. Fused cutouts in-
means, of compliance with this paragraph. stalled in buildings or transformer
vaults shall be of a type identified for
(c) Conduits. All conduits shall be the purpose. They shall be readily ac-
threaded and shall be made wrench- cessible for fuse replacement.
tight. Where it is impractical to make (iii) Equipment isolating means. A
a threaded joint tight, a bonding jump- means shall be provided to completely
er shall be utilized. isolate equipment for inspection and

repairs. Isolating means which are not
[51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
designed to interrupt the load current
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
of the circuit shall be either
270
interlocked with a circuit interrupter An equipment grounding conductor

or provided with a sign warning shall be run with circuit conductors in-
against opening them under load. side the metal raceway or inside the
(3) Mobile and portable equipment—(i) multiconductor cable jacket. The
Power cable connections to mobile ma- equipment grounding conductor may
chines. A metallic enclosure shall be be insulated or bare.
provided on the mobile machine for en- (iii) Guarding live parts. Bare termi-
closing the terminals of the power nals of transformers, switches, motor
cable. The enclosure shall include pro- controllers, and other equipment shall
visions for a solid connection for the be enclosed to prevent accidental con-
ground wire(s) terminal to ground ef- tact with energized parts. Enclosures
fectively the machine frame. The for use in tunnels shall be drip-proof,
method of cable termination used shall weatherproof, or submersible as re-
prevent any strain or pull on the cable quired by the environmental condi-
from stressing the electrical connections.
tions. The enclosure shall have provi- (iv) Disconnecting means. A dis-
sion for locking so only authorized connecting means that simultaneously
qualified persons may open it and shall opens all ungrounded conductors shall
be marked with a sign warning of the be installed at each transformer or
presence of energized parts. motor location.
(ii) Guarding live parts. All energized (v) Grounding and bonding. All non-
switching and control parts shall be en- energized metal parts of electric equip-
closed in effectively grounded metal ment and metal raceways and cable
cabinets or enclosures. Circuit break- sheaths shall be grounded and bonded
ers and protective equipment shall to all metal pipes and rails at the por-
have the operating means projecting tal and at intervals not exceeding 1000
through the metal cabinet or enclosure feet (305 m) throughout the tunnel.
so these units can be reset without (b) Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote
locked doors being opened. Enclosures control, signaling, and power-limited cir-
and metal cabinets shall be locked so cuits—(1) Classification. Class 1, Class 2,
that only authorized qualified persons or Class 3 remote control, signaling, or
have access and shall be marked with a power-limited circuits are character-
sign warning of the presence of ener- ized by their usage and electrical power
gized parts. Collector ring assemblies limitation which differentiates them
on revolving-type machines (shovels, from light and power circuits. These
draglines, etc.) shall be guarded. circuits are classified in accordance
(4) Tunnel installations—(i) Applica- with their respective voltage and power
tion. The provisions of this paragraph limitations as summarized in para-
apply to installation and use of high- graphs (b)(1)(i) through (b)(1)(iii) of
voltage power distribution and utiliza- this section.
tion equipment which is associated (i) Class 1 circuits—(A) A Class 1
with tunnels and which is portable and/ power-limited circuit is supplied from
or mobile, such as substations, trailers, a source having a rated output of not
cars, mobile shovels, draglines, hoists, more than 30 volts and 1000 volt-am-
drills, dredges, compressors, pumps, peres.
conveyors, and underground exca- (B) A Class 1 remote control circuit
vators. or a Class 1 signaling circuit has a volt-
(ii) Conductors. Conductors in tunnels age which does not exceed 600 volts;
shall be installed in one or more of the however, the power output of the
following: source need not be limited.
(A) Metal conduit or other metal (ii) Class 2 and Class 3 circuits—(A)
raceway, Power for Class 2 and Class 3 circuits is
(B) Type MC cable, or limited either inherently (in which no
(C) Other suitable multiconductor overcurrent protection is required) or
cable. by a combination of a power source and
Conductors shall also be so located or overcurrent protection.

guarded as to protect them from phys- (B) The maximum circuit voltage is
ical damage. Multiconductor portable 150 volts AC or DC for a Class 2 inher-
cable may supply mobile equipment. ently limited power source, and 100
271
volts AC or DC for a Class 3 inherently be located below the light or power

limited power source. conductors. Communications conduc-
(C) The maximum circuit voltage is tors shall not be attached to a cross-
30 volts AC and 60 volts DC for a Class arm that carries light or power conduc-
2 power source limited by overcurrent tors.
protection, and 150 volts AC or DC for (iii) Inside of buildings. Indoor anten-
a Class 3 power source limited by over- nas, lead-ins, and other communication
current protection. conductors attached as open conduc-
(iii) Application. The maximum cir- tors to the inside of buildings shall be
cuit voltages in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) and located at least 2 inches (50.8 mm) from
(b)(1)(ii) of this section apply to sinus-
conductors of any light or power or
oidal AC or continuous DC power
Class 1 circuits unless a special and
sources, and where wet contact occur-
rence is not likely. equally protective method of conductor
(2) Marking. A Class 2 or Class 3 separation is employed.
power supply unit shall not be used un- (4) Equipment location. Outdoor metal
less it is durably marked where plainly structures supporting antennas, as well
visible to indicate the class of supply as self-supporting antennas such as
and its electrical rating. vertical rods or dipole structures, shall
(c) Communications systems—(1) Scope. be located as far away from overhead
These provisions for communication conductors of electric light and power
systems apply to such systems as cen- circuits of over 150 volts to ground as
tral-station-connected and non-cen- necessary to avoid the possibility of
tral-station-connected telephone cir- the antenna or structure falling into or
cuits, radio receiving and transmitting making accidental contact with such
equipment, and outside wiring for fire circuits.
and burglar alarm, and similar central (5) Grounding—(i) Lead-in conductors.
station systems. These installations If exposed to contact with electric
need not comply with the provisions of light or power conductors, the metal
§§ 1926.403 through 1926.408(b), except sheath of aerial cables entering build-
§ 1926.404(c)(1)(ii) and § 1926.407. ings shall be grounded or shall be inter-
(2) Protective devices—(i) Circuits ex-
rupted close to the entrance to the
posed to power conductors. Communica-
building by an insulating joint or
tion circuits so located as to be ex-
equivalent device. Where protective de-
posed to accidental contact with light
or power conductors operating at over vices are used, they shall be grounded.
300 volts shall have each circuit so ex- (ii) Antenna structures. Masts and
posed provided with an approved pro- metal structures supporting antennas
tector. shall be permanently and effectively
(ii) Antenna lead-ins. Each conductor grounded without splice or connection
of a lead-in from an outdoor antenna in the grounding conductor.
shall be provided with an antenna dis- (iii) Equipment enclosures. Transmit-
charge unit or other means that will ters shall be enclosed in a metal frame
drain static charges from the antenna or grill or separated from the operating
system. space by a barrier, all metallic parts of
(3) Conductor location—(i) Outside of which are effectively connected to
buildings—(A) Receiving distribution ground. All external metal handles and
lead-in or aerial-drop cables attached controls accessible to the operating
to buildings and lead-in conductors to personnel shall be effectively grounded.
radio transmitters shall be so installed Unpowered equipment and enclosures
as to avoid the possibility of accidental shall be considered grounded where
contact with electric light or power connected to an attached coaxial cable
conductors. with an effectively grounded metallic
(B) The clearance between lead-in
shield.
conductors and any lightning protec-
tion conductors shall not be less than 6 [51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986, as amended at 61
feet (1.83 m). FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996]
(ii) On poles. Where practicable, com-
munication conductors on poles shall
272
§§ 1926.409–1926.415 [Reserved] (e) Cords and cables. (1) Worn or

frayed electric cords or cables shall not
SAFETY-RELATED WORK PRACTICES be used.
(2) Extension cords shall not be fas-
§ 1926.416 General requirements. tened with staples, hung from nails, or
(a) Protection of employees—(1) No em- suspended by wire.
ployer shall permit an employee to [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
work in such proximity to any part of 1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
an electric power circuit that the em- 58 FR 35179, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7,
ployee could contact the electric power 1996; 61 FR 41738, Aug. 12, 1996]
circuit in the course of work, unless
§ 1926.417 Lockout and tagging of cir-
the employee is protected against elec- cuits.
tric shock by deenergizing the circuit
and grounding it or by guarding it ef- (a) Controls. Controls that are to be
fectively by insulation or other means. deactivated during the course of work
on energized or deenergized equipment
(2) In work areas where the exact lo-
or circuits shall be tagged.
cation of underground electric
(b) Equipment and circuits. Equipment
powerlines is unknown, employees
or circuits that are deenergized shall
using jack-hammers, bars, or other be rendered inoperative and shall have
hand tools which may contact a line tags attached at all points where such
shall be provided with insulated protec- equipment or circuits can be energized.
tive gloves. (c) Tags. Tags shall be placed to iden-
(3) Before work is begun the em- tify plainly the equipment or circuits
ployer shall ascertain by inquiry or di- being worked on.
rect observation, or by instruments,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
whether any part of an energized elec-
1979, as amended at 55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990;
tric power circuit, exposed or con- 58 FR 35181, June 30, 1993; 61 FR 9251, Mar. 7,
cealed, is so located that the perform- 1996; 61 FR 41739, Aug. 12, 1996]]
ance of the work may bring any person,
tool, or machine into physical or elec- §§ 1926.418–1926.430 [Reserved]
trical contact with the electric power
circuit. The employer shall post and SAFETY-RELATED MAINTENANCE AND
maintain proper warning signs where ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS
such a circuit exists. The employer
§ 1926.431 Maintenance of equipment.
shall advise employees of the location
of such lines, the hazards involved, and The employer shall ensure that all
the protective measures to be taken. wiring components and utilization
(b) Passageways and open spaces—-(1) equipment in hazardous locations are
Barriers or other means of guarding maintained in a dust-tight, dust-igni-
shall be provided to ensure that work- tion-proof, or explosion-proof condi-
space for electrical equipment will not tion, as appropriate. There shall be no
loose or missing screws, gaskets,
be used as a passageway during periods
threaded connections, seals, or other
when energized parts of electrical
impairments to a tight condition.
equipment are exposed.
(2) Working spaces, walkways, and § 1926.432 Environmental deteriora-
similar locations shall be kept clear of tion of equipment.
cords so as not to create a hazard to (a) Deteriorating agents—(1) Unless
employees. identified for use in the operating envi-
(c) Load ratings. In existing installa- ronment, no conductors or equipment
tions, no changes in circuit protection shall be located:
shall be made to increase the load in (i) In damp or wet locations;
excess of the load rating of the circuit (ii) Where exposed to gases, fumes,
wiring. vapors, liquids, or other agents having
(d) Fuses. When fuses are installed or a deteriorating effect on the conduc-
removed with one or both terminals en- tors or equipment; or
ergized, special tools insulated for the (iii) Where exposed to excessive tem-
voltage shall be used. peratures.
273
§§ 1926.433–1926.440 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
(2) Control equipment, utilization §§ 1926.442–1926.448 [Reserved]

equipment, and busways approved for
use in dry locations only shall be pro- DEFINITIONS
tected against damage from the weath-
er during building construction. § 1926.449 Definitions applicable to
this subpart.
(b) Protection against corrosion. Metal
raceways, cable armor, boxes, cable The definitions given in this section
sheathing, cabinets, elbows, couplings, apply to the terms used in subpart K.
fittings, supports, and support hard- The definitions given here for ‘‘ap-
ware shall be of materials appropriate proved’’ and ‘‘qualified person’’ apply,
for the environment in which they are instead of the definitions given in
to be installed. § 1926.32, to the use of these terms in
subpart K.
§§ 1926.433–1926.440 [Reserved] Acceptable. An installation or equip-
ment is acceptable to the Assistant
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR SPECIAL Secretary of Labor, and approved with-
EQUIPMENT in the meaning of this subpart K:
(a) If it is accepted, or certified, or
§ 1926.441 Batteries and battery charg- listed, or labeled, or otherwise deter-
ing.
mined to be safe by a qualified testing
(a) General requirements—(1) Batteries laboratory capable of determining the
of the unsealed type shall be located in suitability of materials and equipment
enclosures with outside vents or in well for installation and use in accordance
ventilated rooms and shall be arranged with this standard; or
so as to prevent the escape of fumes, (b) With respect to an installation or
gases, or electrolyte spray into other equipment of a kind which no qualified
areas. testing laboratory accepts, certifies,
(2) Ventilation shall be provided to lists, labels, or determines to be safe, if
ensure diffusion of the gases from the it is inspected or tested by another
battery and to prevent the accumula- Federal agency, or by a State, munic-
tion of an explosive mixture. ipal, or other local authority respon-
(3) Racks and trays shall be substan- sible for enforcing occupational safety
tial and shall be treated to make them provisions of the National Electrical
resistant to the electrolyte. Code, and found in compliance with
(4) Floors shall be of acid resistant those provisions; or
construction unless protected from (c) With respect to custom-made
acid accumulations. equipment or related installations
which are designed, fabricated for, and
(5) Face shields, aprons, and rubber
intended for use by a particular cus-
gloves shall be provided for workers
tomer, if it is determined to be safe for
handling acids or batteries.
its intended use by its manufacturer on
(6) Facilities for quick drenching of the basis of test data which the em-
the eyes and body shall be provided ployer keeps and makes available for
within 25 feet (7.62 m) of battery han- inspection to the Assistant Secretary
dling areas. and his authorized representatives.
(7) Facilities shall be provided for Accepted. An installation is ‘‘accept-
flushing and neutralizing spilled elec- ed’’ if it has been inspected and found
trolyte and for fire protection. to be safe by a qualified testing labora-
(b) Charging—(1) Battery charging in- tory.
stallations shall be located in areas Accessible. (As applied to wiring
designated for that purpose. methods.) Capable of being removed or
(2) Charging apparatus shall be pro- exposed without damaging the building
tected from damage by trucks. structure or finish, or not permanently
(3) When batteries are being charged, closed in by the structure or finish of
the vent caps shall be kept in place to the building. (See ‘‘concealed’’ and ‘‘ex-
avoid electrolyte spray. Vent caps shall posed.’’)
be maintained in functioning condi- Accessible. (As applied to equipment.)
tion. Admitting close approach; not guarded
274
by locked doors, elevation, or other ef- Building. A structure which stands

fective means. (See‘‘Readily acces- alone or which is cut off from adjoining
sible.’’) structures by fire walls with all open-
Ampacity. The current in amperes a ings therein protected by approved fire
conductor can carry continuously doors.
under the conditions of use without ex- Cabinet. An enclosure designed either
ceeding its temperature rating. for surface or flush mounting, and pro-
Appliances. Utilization equipment, vided with a frame, mat, or trim in
generally other than industrial, nor- which a swinging door or doors are or
mally built in standardized sizes or may be hung.
types, which is installed or connecetcd Certified. Equipment is ‘‘certified’’ if
as a unit to perform one or more func- it:
tions. (a) Has been tested and found by a
Approved. Acceptable to the author- qualified testing laboratory to meet
ity enforcing this subpart. The author- applicable test standards or to be safe
ity enforcing this subpart is the Assist- for use in a specified manner, and
ant Secretary of Labor for Occupa- (b) Is of a kind whose production is
tional Safety and Health. The defini- periodically inspected by a qualified
tion of ‘‘acceptable’’ indicates what is testing laboratory. Certified equipment
acceptable to the Assistant Secretary must bear a label, tag, or other record
of Labor, and therefore approved with- of certification.
in the meaning of this subpart. Circuit breaker—(a) (600 volts nomi-
Askarel. A generic term for a group of nal, or less.) A device designed to open
nonflammable synthetic chlorinated and close a circuit by nonautomatic
hydrocarbons used as electrical insu- means and to open the circuit auto-
lating media. Askarels of various matically on a predetermined overcur-
compositional types are used. Under rent without injury to itself when
arcing conditions the gases produced, properly applied within its rating.
while consisting predominantly of non- (b) (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A
combustible hydrogen chloride, can in- switching device capable of making,
clude varying amounts of combustible carrying, and breaking currents under
gases depending upon the askarel type. normal circuit conditions, and also
Attachment plug (Plug cap)(Cap). A de- making, carrying for a specified time,
vice which, by insertion in a recep- and breaking currents under specified
tacle, establishes connection between abnormal circuit conditions, such as
the conductors of the attached flexible those of short circuit.
cord and the conductors connected per- Class I locations. Class I locations are
manently to the receptacle. those in which flammable gases or va-
Automatic. Self-acting, operating by pors are or may be present in the air in
its own mechanism when actuated by quantities sufficient to produce explo-
some impersonal influence, as for ex- sive or ignitible mixtures. Class I loca-
ample, a change in current strength, tions include the following:
pressure, temperature, or mechanical (a) Class I, Division 1. A Class I, Divi-
configuration. sion 1 location is a location:
Bare conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ (1) In which ignitible concentrations
Bonding. The permanent joining of of flammable gases or vapors may exist
metallic parts to form an electrically under normal operating conditions; or
conductive path which will assure elec- (2) In which ignitible concentrations
trical continuity and the capacity to of such gases or vapors may exist fre-
conduct safely any current likely to be quently because of repair or mainte-
imposed. nance operations or because of leakage;
Bonding jumper. A reliable conductor or
to assure the required electrical con- (3) In which breakdown or faulty op-
ductivity between metal parts required eration of equipment or processes
to be electrically connected. might release ignitible concentrations

Branch circuit. The circuit conductors of flammable gases or vapors, and
between the final overcurrent device might also cause simultaneous failure
protecting the circuit and the outlet(s). of electric equipment.
275
NOTE: This classification usually includes of liquefied or compressed gases in sealed
locations where volatile flammable liquids containers would not normally be considered
or liquefied flammable gases are transferred hazardous unless also subject to other haz-
from one container to another; interiors of ardous conditions.
spray booths and areas in the vicinity of Electrical conduits and their associated
spraying and painting operations where vola- enclosures separated from process fluids by a
tile flammable solvents are used; locations single seal or barrier are classed as a Divi-
containing open tanks or vats of volatile sion 2 location if the outside of the conduit
flammable liquids; drying rooms or compart- and enclosures is a nonhazardous location.
ments for the evaporation of flammable sol-
vents; inadequately ventilated pump rooms Class II locations. Class II locations
for flammable gas or for volatile flammable are those that are hazardous because of
liquids; and all other locations where ignit- the presence of combustible dust. Class
ible concentrations of flammable vapors or II locations include the following:
gases are likely to occur in the course of nor- (a) Class II, Division 1. A Class II, Di-
mal operations. vision 1 location is a location:
(b) Class I, Division 2. A Class I, Divi- (1) In which combustible dust is or
sion 2 location is a location: may be in suspension in the air under
(1) In which volatile flammable liq- normal operating conditions, in quan-
uids or flammable gases are handled, tities sufficient to produce explosive or
processed, or used, but in which the ignitible mixtures; or
hazardous liquids, vapors, or gases will (2) Where mechanical failure or ab-
normally be confined within closed normal operation of machinery or
containers or closed systems from equipment might cause such explosive
which they can escape only in case of or ignitible mixtures to be produced,
accidental rupture or breakdown of and might also provide a source of igni-
such containers or systems, or in case tion through simultaneous failure of
of abnormal operation of equipment; or electric equipment, operation of pro-
(2) In which ignitible concentrations tection devices, or from other causes,
of gases or vapors are normally pre- or
vented by positive mechanical ventila- (3) In which combustible dusts of an
tion, and which might become haz- electrically conductive nature may be
ardous through failure or abnormal op- present.
erations of the ventilating equipment; NOTE: Combustible dusts which are elec-
or trically nonconductive include dusts pro-
(3) That is adjacent to a Class I, Divi- duced in the handling and processing of grain
sion 1 location, and to which ignitible and grain products, pulverized sugar and
concentrations of gases or vapors cocoa, dried egg and milk powders, pulver-
might occasionally be communicated ized spices, starch and pastes, potato and
unless such communication is pre- woodflour, oil meal from beans and seed,
vented by adequate positive-pressure dried hay, and other organic materials which
may produce combustible dusts when proc-
ventilation from a source of clean air, essed or handled. Dusts containing magne-
and effective safeguards against ven- sium or aluminum are particularly haz-
tilation failure are provided. ardous and the use of extreme caution is nec-
NOTE: This classification usually includes essary to avoid ignition and explosion.
locations where volatile flammable liquids (b) Class II, Division 2. A Class II, Di-
or flammable gases or vapors are used, but vision 2 location is a location in which:
which would become hazardous only in case
(1) Combustible dust will not nor-
of an accident or of some unusual operating
condition. The quantity of flammable mate- mally be in suspension in the air in
rial that might escape in case of accident, quantities sufficient to produce explo-
the adequacy of ventilating equipment, the sive or ignitible mixtures, and dust ac-
total area involved, and the record of the in- cumulations are normally insufficient
dustry or business with respect to explosions to interfere with the normal operation
or fires are all factors that merit consider- of electrical equipment or other appa-
ation in determining the classification and ratus; or
extent of each location.
(2) Dust may be in suspension in the
Piping without valves, checks, meters, and

similar devices would not ordinarily intro- air as a result of infrequent malfunc-
duce a hazardous condition even though used tioning of handling or processing
for flammable liquids or gases. Locations equipment, and dust accumulations re-
used for the storage of flammable liquids or sulting therefrom may be ignitible by
276
abnormal operation or failure of elec- (c) Insulated. A conductor encased

trical equipment or other apparatus. within material of composition and
thickness that is recognized as elec-
NOTE: This classification includes loca-
tions where dangerous concentrations of sus-
trical insulation.
pended dust would not be likely but where Controller. A device or group of de-
dust accumulations might form on or in the vices that serves to govern, in some
vicinity of electric equipment. These areas predetermined manner, the electric
may contain equipment from which appre- power delivered to the apparatus to
ciable quantities of dust would escape under which it is connected.
abnormal operating conditions or be adja- Covered conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’
cent to a Class II Division 1 location, as de-
scribed above, into which an explosive or ig-
Cutout. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An
nitible concentration of dust may be put into assembly of a fuse support with either
suspension under abnormal operating condi- a fuseholder, fuse carrier, or dis-
tions. connecting blade. The fuseholder or
fuse carrier may include a conducting
Class III locations. Class III locations element (fuse link), or may act as the
are those that are hazardous because of disconnecting blade by the inclusion of
the presence of easily ignitible fibers a nonfusible member.
or flyings but in which such fibers or Cutout box. An enclosure designed for
flyings are not likely to be in suspen- surface mounting and having swinging
sion in the air in quantities sufficient doors or covers secured directly to and
to produce ignitible mixtures. Class 111 telescoping with the walls of the box
locations include the following: proper. (See ‘‘Cabinet.’’)
(a) Class III, Division 1. A Class III, Damp location. See ‘‘Location.’’
Division 1 location is a location in Dead front. Without live parts ex-
which easily ignitible fibers or mate- posed to a person on the operating side
rials producing combustible flyings are of the equipment.
handled, manufactured, or used. Device. A unit of an electrical system
NOTE: Easily ignitible fibers and flyings in- which is intended to carry but not uti-
clude rayon, cotton (including cotton linters lize electric energy.
and cotton waste), sisal or henequen, istle, Disconnecting means. A device, or
jute, hemp, tow, cocoa fiber, oakum, baled group of devices, or other means by
waste kapok, Spanish moss, excelsior, saw- which the conductors of a circuit can
dust, woodchips, and other material of simi-
lar nature.
be disconnected from their source of
supply.
(b) Class III, Division 2. A Class III, Disconnecting (or Isolating) switch.
Division 2 location is a location in (Over 600 volts, nominal.) A mechanical
which easily ignitible fibers are stored switching device used for isolating a
or handled, except in process of manu- circuit or equipment from a source of
facture. power.
Collector ring. A collector ring is an Dry location. See ‘‘Location.’’
assembly of slip rings for transferring Enclosed. Surrounded by a case, hous-
electrical energy from a stationary to ing, fence or walls which will prevent
a rotating member. persons from accidentally contacting
Concealed. Rendered inaccessible by energized parts.
the structure or finish of the building. Enclosure. The case or housing of ap-
Wires in concealed raceways are con- paratus, or the fence or walls sur-
sidered concealed, even though they rounding an installation to prevent
may become accessible by withdrawing personnel from accidentally contacting
them. [See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to energized parts, or to protect the
wiring methods.)’’] equipment from physical damage.
Conductor—(a) Bare. A conductor hav- Equipment. A general term including
ing no covering or electrical insulation material, fittings, devices, appliances,
whatsoever. fixtures, apparatus, and the like, used
(b) Covered. A conductor encased as a part of, or in connection with, an

within material of composition or electrical installation.
thickness that is not recognized as Equipment grounding conductor. See
electrical insulation. ‘‘Grounding conductor, equipment.’’
277
Explosion-proof apparatus. Apparatus ducting body that serves in place of the

enclosed in a case that is capable of earth.
withstanding an explosion of a speci- Grounded. Connected to earth or to
fied gas or vapor which may occur some conducting body that serves in
within it and of preventing the ignition place of the earth.
of a specified gas or vapor surrounding Grounded, effectively (Over 600 volts,
the enclosure by sparks, flashes, or ex- nominal.) Permanently connected to
plosion of the gas or vapor within, and earth through a ground connection of
which operates at such an external sufficiently low impedance and having
temperature that it will not ignite a sufficient ampacity that ground fault
surrounding flammable atmosphere. current which may occur cannot build
Exposed. (As applied to live parts.) up to voltages dangerous to personnel.
Capable of being inadvertently touched Grounded conductor. A system or cir-
or approached nearer than a safe dis- cuit conductor that is intentionally
tance by a person. It is applied to parts grounded.
not suitably guarded, isolated, or insu- Grounding conductor. A conductor
lated. (See ‘‘Accessible and ‘‘Con- used to connect equipment or the
cealed.’’) grounded circuit of a wiring system to
Exposed. (As applied to wiring meth- a grounding electrode or electrodes.
ods.) On or attached to the surface or Grounding conductor, equipment. The
behind panels designed to allow access. conductor used to connect the noncur-
[See ‘‘Accessible. (As applied to wiring rent-carrying metal parts of equip-
methods.)’’] ment, raceways, and other enclosures
Exposed. (For the purposes of to the system grounded conductor and/
§ 1926.408(d), Communications systems.) or the grounding electrode conductor
Where the circuit is in such a position at the service equipment or at the
that in case of failure of supports or in- source of a separately derived system.
sulation, contact with another circuit Grounding electrode conductor. The
may result. conductor used to connect the ground-
Externally operable. Capable of being ing electrode to the equipment ground-
operated without exposing the operator ing conductor and/or to the grounded
to contact with live parts. conductor of the circuit at the service
Feeder. All circuit conductors be- equipment or at the source of a sepa-
tween the service equipment, or the rately derived system.
generator switchboard of an isolated Ground-fault circuit interrupter. A de-
plant, and the final branch-circuit vice for the protection of personnel
overcurrent device. that functions to deenergize a circuit
Festoon lighting. A string of outdoor or portion thereof within an estab-
lights suspended between two points lished period of time when a current to
more than 15 feet (4.57 m) apart. ground exceeds some predetermined
Fitting. An accessory such as a lock- value that is less than that required to
nut, bushing, or other part of a wiring operate the overcurrent protective de-
system that is intended primarily to vice of the supply circuit.
perform a mechanical rather than an Guarded. Covered, shielded, fenced,
electrical function. enclosed, or otherwise protected by
Fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.) An means of suitable covers, casings, bar-
overcurrent protective device with a riers, rails, screens, mats, or platforms
circuit opening fusible part that is to remove the likelihood of approach
heated and severed by the passage of to a point of danger or contact by per-
overcurrent through it. A fuse com- sons or objects.
prises all the parts that form a unit ca- Hoistway. Any shaftway, hatchway,
pable of performing the prescribed well hole, or other vertical opening or
functions. It may or may not be the space in which an elevator or dumb-
complete device necessary to connect waiter is designed to operate.
it into an electrical circuit. Identified (conductors or terminals).
Ground. A conducting connection, Identified, as used in reference to a

whether intentional or accidental, be- conductor or its terminal, means that
tween an electrical circuit or equip- such conductor or terminal can be rec-
ment and the earth, or to some con- ognized as grounded.
278
Identified (for the use). Recognized as temporarily subject to dampness or

suitable for the specific purpose, func- wetness, as in the case of a building
tion, use, environment, application, under construction.
etc. where described as a requirement (c) Wet location. Installations under-
in this standard. Suitability of equip- ground or in concrete slabs or masonry
ment for a specific purpose, environ- in direct contact with the earth, and
ment, or application is determined by a locations subject to saturation with
qualified testing laboratory where such water or other liquids, such as loca-
identification includes labeling or list- tions exposed to weather and unpro-
ing. tected.
Insulated conductor. See ‘‘Conductor.’’ Mobile X-ray. X-ray equipment
Interrupter switch. (Over 600 volts, mounted on a permanent base with
nominal.) A switch capable of making, wheels and/or casters for moving while
carrying, and interrupting specified completely assembled.
currents. Motor control center. An assembly of
Intrinsically safe equipment and associ- one or more enclosed sections having a
ated wiring. Equipment and associated common power bus and principally con-
wiring in which any spark or thermal taining motor control units.
effect, produced either normally or in Outlet. A point on the wiring system
specified fault conditions, is incapable, at which current is taken to supply
under certain prescribed test condi- utilization equipment.
tions, of causing ignition of a mixture Overcurrent. Any current in excess of
of flammable or combustible material the rated current of equipment or the
in air in its most easily ignitible con- ampacity of a conductor. It may result
centration. from overload (see definition), short
Isolated. Not readily accessible to circuit, or ground fault. A current in
persons unless special means for access excess of rating may be accommodated
are used. by certain equipment and conductors
Isolated power system. A system com- for a given set of conditions. Hence the
prising an isolating transformer or its rules for overcurrent protection are
equivalent, a line isolation monitor, specific for particular situations.
and its ungrounded circuit conductors. Overload. Operation of equipment in
Labeled. Equipment or materials to excess of normal, full load rating, or of
which has been attached a label, sym- a conductor in excess of rated
bol or other identifying mark of a ampacity which, when it persists for a
qualified testing laboratory which indi- sufficient length of time, would cause
cates compliance with appropriate damage or dangerous overheating. A
standards or performance in a specified fault, such as a short circuit or ground
manner. fault, is not an overload.
Lighting outlet. An outlet intended for (See‘‘Overcurrent.’’)
the direct connection of a lampholder, Panelboard. A single panel or group of
a lighting fixture, or a pendant cord panel units designed for assembly in
terminating in a lampholder. the form of a single panel; including
Listed. Equipment or materials in- buses, automatic overcurrent devices,
cluded in a list published by a qualified and with or without switches for the
testing laboratory whose listing states control of light, heat, or power cir-
either that the equipment or material cuits; designed to be placed in a cabi-
meets appropriate standards or has net or cutout box placed in or against
been tested and found suitable for use a wall or partition and accessible only
in a specified manner. from the front. (See ‘‘Switchboard.’’)
Location—(a) Damp location. Partially Portable X-ray. X-ray equipment de-
protected locations under canopies, signed to be hand-carried.
marquees, roofed open porches, and Power fuse. (Over 600 volts, nominal.)
like locations, and interior locations See ‘‘Fuse.’’
subject to moderate degrees of mois- Power outlet. An enclosed assembly
ture, such as some basements. which may include receptacles, circuit

(b) Dry location. A location not nor- breakers, fuseholders, fused switches,
mally subject to dampness or wetness. buses and watt-hour meter mounting
A location classified as dry may be means; intended to serve as a means
279
for distributing power required to oper- cellular metal floor raceways, surface
ate mobile or temporarily installed raceways, wireways, and busways.
equipment. Readily accessible. Capable of being
Premises wiring system. That interior reached quickly for operation, renewal,
and exterior wiring, including power, or inspections, without requiring those
lighting, control, and signal circuit to whom ready access is requisite to
wiring together with all of its associ- climb over or remove obstacles or to
ated hardware, fittings, and wiring de- resort to portable ladders, chairs, etc.
vices, both permanently and tempo- (See ‘‘Accessible.’’)
rarily installed, which extends from Receptacle. A receptacle is a contact
the load end of the service drop, or load device installed at the outlet for the
end of the service lateral conductors to connection of a single attachment
the outlet(s). Such wiring does not in- plug. A single receptacle is a single
clude wiring internal to appliances, fix- contact device with no other contact
tures, motors, controllers, motor con- device on the same yoke. A multiple
trol centers, and similar equipment. receptacle is a single device containing
Qualified person. One familiar with two or more receptacles.
the construction and operation of the Receptacle outlet. An outlet where one
equipment and the hazards involved. or more receptacles are installed.
Qualified testing laboratory. A prop- Remote-control circuit. Any electric
erly equipped and staffed testing lab- circuit that controls any other circuit
oratory which has capabilities for and through a relay or an equivalent de-
which provides the following services: vice.
(a) Experimental testing for safety of Sealable equipment. Equipment en-
specified items of equipment and mate- closed in a case or cabinet that is pro-
rials referred to in this standard to de- vided with a means of sealing or lock-
termine compliance with appropriate ing so that live parts cannot be made
test standards or performance in a accessible without opening the enclo-
specified manner; sure. The equipment may or may not
(b) Inspecting the run of such items be operable without opening the enclo-
of equipment and materials at fac- sure.
tories for product evaluation to assure Separately derived system. A premises
compliance with the test standards; wiring system whose power is derived
(c) Service-value determinations from generator, transformer, or con-
through field inspections to monitor verter windings and has no direct elec-
the proper use of labels on products trical connection, including a solidly
and with authority for recall of the connected grounded circuit conductor,
label in the event a hazardous product to supply conductors originating in an-
is installed; other system.
(d) Employing a controlled procedure Service. The conductors and equip-
for identifying the listed and/or labeled ment for delivering energy from the
equipment or materials tested; and electricity supply system to the wiring
(e) Rendering creditable reports or system of the premises served.
findings that are objective and without Service conductors. The supply con-
bias of the tests and test methods em- ductors that extend from the street
ployed. main or from transformers to the serv-
Raceway. A channel designed ex- ice equipment of the premises supplied.
pressly for holding wires, cables, or Service drop. The overhead service
busbars, with additional functions as conductors from the last pole or other
permitted in this subpart. Raceways aerial support to and including the
may be of metal or insulating material, splices, if any, connecting to the serv-
and the term includes rigid metal con- ice-entrance conductors at the building
duit, rigid nonmetallic conduit, inter- or other structure.
mediate metal conduit, liquidtight Service-entrance conductors, overhead
flexible metal conduit, flexible metal- system. The service conductors between
lic tubing, flexible metal conduit, elec- the terminals of the service equipment
trical metallic tubing, underfloor race- and a point usually outside the build-
ways, cellular concrete floor raceways, ing, clear of building walls, where
280
joined by tap or splice to the service and/or open one or more electric cir-
drop. cuits. Included in this category are cir-
Service-entrance conductors, under- cuit breakers, cutouts, disconnecting
ground system. The service conductors (or isolating) switches, disconnecting
between the terminals of the service means, and interrupter switches.
equipment and the point of connection Transportable X-ray. X-ray equipment
to the service lateral. Where service installed in a vehicle or that may read-
equipment is located outside the build- ily be disassembled for transport in a
ing walls, there may be no service-en- vehicle.
trance conductors, or they may be en- Utilization equipment. Utilization
tirely outside the building. equipment means equipment which uti-
Service equipment. The necessary lizes electric energy for mechanical,
equipment, usually consisting of a cir- chemical, heating, lighting, or similar
cuit breaker or switch and fuses, and useful purpose.
their accessories, located near the Utilization system. A utilization sys-
point of entrance of supply conductors tem is a system which provides electric
to a building or other structure, or an power and light for employee work-
otherwise defined area, and intended to places, and includes the premises wir-
constitute the main control and means ing system and utilization equipment.
of cutoff of the supply. Ventilated. Provided with a means to
Service raceway. The raceway that en- permit circulation of air sufficient to
closes the service-entrance conductors. remove an excess of heat, fumes, or va-
Signaling circuit. Any electric circuit pors.
that energizes signaling equipment. Volatile flammable liquid. A flammable
Switchboard. A large single panel, liquid having a flash point below 38 de-
frame, or assembly of panels which grees C (100 degrees F) or whose tem-
have switches, buses, instruments, perature is above its flash point, or a
overcurrent and other protective de- Class II combustible liquid having a
vices mounted on the face or back or vapor pressure not exceeding 40 psia
both. Switchboards are generally ac- (276 kPa) at 38 °C (100 °F) whose tem-
cessible from the rear as well as from perature is above its flash point.
the front and are not intended to be in- Voltage. (Of a circuit.) The greatest
stalled in cabinets. (See ‘‘Panelboard.’’) root-mean-square (effective) difference
Switches—(a) General-use switch. A of potential between any two conduc-
switch intended for use in general dis- tors of the circuit concerned.
tribution and branch circuits. It is Voltage, nominal. A nominal value as-
rated in amperes, and it is capable of signed to a circuit or system for the
interrupting its rated current at its purpose of conveniently designating its
rated voltage. voltage class (as 120/240, 480Y/277, 600,
(b) General-use snap switch. A form of etc.). The actual voltage at which a cir-
general-use switch so constructed that cuit operates can vary from the nomi-
it can be installed in flush device boxes nal within a range that permits satis-
or on outlet box covers, or otherwise factory operation of equipment.
used in conjunction with wiring sys- Voltage to ground. For grounded cir-
tems recognized by this subpart. cuits, the voltage between the given
(c) Isolating switch. A switch intended conductor and that point or conductor
for isolating an electric circuit from of the circuit that is grounded; for
the source of power. It has no inter- ungrounded circuits, the greatest volt-
rupting rating, and it is intended to be age between the given conductor and
operated only after the circuit has been any other conductor of the circuit.
opened by some other means. Watertight. So constructed that mois-
(d) Motor-circuit switch. A switch, ture will not enter the enclosure.
rated in horsepower, capable of inter- Weatherproof. So constructed or pro-
rupting the maximum operating over- tected that exposure to the weather
load current of a motor of the same will not interfere with successful oper-
horsepower rating as the switch at the ation. Rainproof, raintight, or water-

rated voltage. tight equipment can fulfill the require-
Switching devices. (Over 600 volts, ments for weatherproof where varying
nominal.) Devices designed to close weather conditions other than wetness,
281
such as snow, ice, dust, or temperature Bricklayers’ square scaffold means a

extremes, are not a factor. supported scaffold composed of framed
Wet location. See ‘‘Location.’’ squares which support a platform.
Carpenters’ bracket scaffold means a
Subpart L—Scaffolds supported scaffold consisting of a plat-
form supported by brackets attached to
building or structural walls.
AUTHORITY: Section 107, Contract Work Catenary scaffold means a suspension
scaffold consisting of a platform sup-
tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8,
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 ported by two essentially horizontal
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s and parallel ropes attached to struc-
Order No. 1–90 (55 FR 9033); and 29 CFR Part tural members of a building or other
1911. structure. Additional support may be
provided by vertical pickups.
SOURCE: 61 FR 46104, Aug. 30, 1996, unless
otherwise noted. Chimney hoist means a multi-point
adjustable suspension scaffold used to
§ 1926.450 Scope, application and defi- provide access to work inside chim-
nitions applicable to this subpart. neys. (See ‘‘Multi-point adjustable sus-
pension scaffold’’.)
(a) Scope and application. This sub-
Cleat means a structural block used
part applies to all scaffolds used in
at the end of a platform to prevent the
workplaces covered by this part. It
platform from slipping off its supports.
does not apply to crane or derrick sus-
Cleats are also used to provide footing
pended personnel platforms, which are
on sloped surfaces such as crawling
covered by § 1926.550(g). The criteria for
boards.
aerial lifts are set out exclusively in
Competent person means one who is
§ 1926.453.
capable of identifying existing and pre-
(b) Definitions. Adjustable suspension dictable hazards in the surroundings or
scaffold means a suspension scaffold working conditions which are unsani-
equipped with a hoist(s) that can be op- tary, hazardous, or dangerous to em-
erated by an employee(s) on the scaf- ployees, and who has authorization to
fold. take prompt corrective measures to
Bearer (putlog) means a horizontal eliminate them.
transverse scaffold member (which Continuous run scaffold (Run scaffold)
may be supported by ledgers or run- means a two- point or multi-point ad-
ners) upon which the scaffold platform justable suspension scaffold con-
rests and which joins scaffold uprights, structed using a series of inter-
posts, poles, and similar members. connected braced scaffold members or
Boatswains’ chair means a single- supporting structures erected to form a
point adjustable suspension scaffold continuous scaffold.
consisting of a seat or sling designed to Coupler means a device for locking
support one employee in a sitting posi- together the tubes of a tube and cou-
tion. pler scaffold.
Body belt (safety belt) means a strap Crawling board (chicken ladder) means
with means both for securing it about a supported scaffold consisting of a
the waist and for attaching it to a lan- plank with cleats spaced and secured to
yard, lifeline, or deceleration device. provide footing, for use on sloped sur-
Body harness means a design of straps faces such as roofs.
which may be secured about the em- Deceleration device means any mecha-
ployee in a manner to distribute the nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch
fall arrest forces over at least the lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear-
thighs, pelvis, waist, chest and shoul- ing or deforming lanyard, or automatic
ders, with means for attaching it to self-retracting lifeline lanyard, which
other components of a personal fall ar- dissipates a substantial amount of en-
rest system. ergy during a fall arrest or limits the
Brace means a rigid connection that energy imposed on an employee during

holds one scaffold member in a fixed fall arrest.
position with respect to another mem- Double pole (independent pole) scaffold
ber, or to a building or structure. means a supported scaffold consisting
282
of a platform(s) resting on cross beams Independent pole scaffold (see ‘‘Double

(bearers) supported by ledgers and a pole scaffold’’).
double row of uprights independent of Interior hung scaffold means a suspen-
support (except ties, guys, braces) from sion scaffold consisting of a platform
any structure. suspended from the ceiling or roof
Equivalent means alternative designs, structure by fixed length supports.
materials or methods to protect Ladder jack scaffold means a sup-
against a hazard which the employer ported scaffold consisting of a platform
can demonstrate will provide an equal resting on brackets attached to lad-
or greater degree of safety for employ- ders.
ees than the methods, materials or de- Ladder stand means a mobile, fixed-
signs specified in the standard. size, self-supporting ladder consisting
Exposed power lines means electrical of a wide flat tread ladder in the form
power lines which are accessible to em- of stairs.
ployees and which are not shielded Landing means a platform at the end
from contact. Such lines do not include of a flight of stairs.
extension cords or power tool cords.
Large area scaffold means a pole scaf-
Eye or Eye splice means a loop with or
fold, tube and coupler scaffold, systems
without a thimble at the end of a wire
scaffold, or fabricated frame scaffold
rope.
erected over substantially the entire
Fabricated decking and planking work area. For example: a scaffold
means manufactured platforms made
erected over the entire floor area of a
of wood (including laminated wood, and
room.
solid sawn wood planks), metal or
other materials. Lean-to scaffold means a supported
scaffold which is kept erect by tilting
Fabricated frame scaffold (tubular
it toward and resting it against a
welded frame scaffold) means a scaffold
building or structure.
consisting of a platform(s) supported
on fabricated end frames with integral Lifeline means a component con-
posts, horizontal bearers, and inter- sisting of a flexible line that connects
mediate members. to an anchorage at one end to hang
Failure means load refusal, breakage, vertically (vertical lifeline), or that
or separation of component parts. Load connects to anchorages at both ends to
refusal is the point where the ultimate stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
strength is exceeded. line), and which serves as a means for
Float (ship) scaffold means a suspen- connecting other components of a per-
sion scaffold consisting of a braced sonal fall arrest system to the anchor-
platform resting on two parallel bear- age.
ers and hung from overhead supports Lower levels means areas below the
by ropes of fixed length. level where the employee is located
Form scaffold means a supported scaf- and to which an employee can fall.
fold consisting of a platform supported Such areas include, but are not limited
by brackets attached to formwork. to, ground levels, floors, roofs, ramps,
Guardrail system means a vertical bar- runways, excavations, pits, tanks, ma-
rier, consisting of, but not limited to, terials, water, and equipment.
toprails, midrails, and posts, erected to Masons’ adjustable supported scaffold
prevent employees from falling off a (see ‘‘Self-contained adjustable scaf-
scaffold platform or walkway to lower fold’’).
levels. Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen-
Hoist means a manual or power-oper- sion scaffold means a continuous run
ated mechanical device to raise or suspension scaffold designed and used
lower a suspended scaffold. for masonry operations.
Horse scaffold means a supported scaf- Maximum intended load means the
fold consisting of a platform supported total load of all persons, equipment,
by construction horses (saw horses). tools, materials, transmitted loads,

Horse scaffolds constructed of metal and other loads reasonably anticipated
are sometimes known as trestle scaf- to be applied to a scaffold or scaffold
folds. component at any one time.
283
Mobile scaffold means a powered or fall. It consists of an anchorage, con-

unpowered, portable, caster or wheel- nectors, a body belt or body harness
mounted supported scaffold. and may include a lanyard, decelera-
Multi-level suspended scaffold means a tion device, lifeline, or combinations of
two-point or multi-point adjustable these.
suspension scaffold with a series of Platform means a work surface ele-
platforms at various levels resting on vated above lower levels. Platforms
common stirrups. can be constructed using individual
Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- wood planks, fabricated planks, fab-
fold means a suspension scaffold con- ricated decks, and fabricated plat-
sisting of a platform(s) which is sus- forms.
pended by more than two ropes from Pole scaffold (see definitions for
overhead supports and equipped with ‘‘Single-pole scaffold’’ and ‘‘Double
means to raise and lower the platform (independent) pole scaffold’’).
to desired work levels. Such scaffolds Power operated hoist means a hoist
include chimney hoists. which is powered by other than human
Needle beam scaffold means a platform energy.
suspended from needle beams. Pump jack scaffold means a supported
Open sides and ends means the edges scaffold consisting of a platform sup-
of a platform that are more than 14 ported by vertical poles and movable
inches (36 cm) away horizontally from support brackets.
a sturdy, continuous, vertical surface Qualified means one who, by posses-
(such as a building wall) or a sturdy, sion of a recognized degree, certificate,
continuous horizontal surface (such as or professional standing, or who by ex-
a floor), or a point of access. Exception: tensive knowledge, training, and expe-
For plastering and lathing operations rience, has successfully demonstrated
the horizontal threshold distance is 18 his/her ability to solve or resolve prob-
inches (46 cm). lems related to the subject matter, the
Outrigger means the structural mem- work, or the project.
ber of a supported scaffold used to in- Rated load means the manufacturer’s
crease the base width of a scaffold in specified maximum load to be lifted by
order to provide support for and in- a hoist or to be applied to a scaffold or
creased stability of the scaffold. scaffold component.
Outrigger beam (Thrustout) means the Repair bracket scaffold means a sup-
structural member of a suspension ported scaffold consisting of a platform
scaffold or outrigger scaffold which supported by brackets which are se-
provides support for the scaffold by ex- cured in place around the circum-
tending the scaffold point of attach- ference or perimeter of a chimney,
ment to a point out and away from the stack, tank or other supporting struc-
structure or building. ture by one or more wire ropes placed
Outrigger scaffold means a supported around the supporting structure.
scaffold consisting of a platform rest- Roof bracket scaffold means a rooftop
ing on outrigger beams (thrustouts) supported scaffold consisting of a plat-
projecting beyond the wall or face of form resting on angular-shaped sup-
the building or structure, the inboard ports.
ends of which are secured inside the Runner (ledger or ribbon) means the
building or structure. lengthwise horizontal spacing or brac-
Overhand bricklaying means the proc- ing member which may support the
ess of laying bricks and masonry units bearers.
such that the surface of the wall to be Scaffold means any temporary ele-
jointed is on the opposite side of the vated platform (supported or sus-
wall from the mason, requiring the pended) and its supporting structure
mason to lean over the wall to com- (including points of anchorage), used
plete the work. It includes mason tend- for supporting employees or materials
ing and electrical installation incor- or both.
porated into the brick wall during the Self-contained adjustable scaffold
overhand bricklaying process. means a combination supported and
Personal fall arrest system means a suspension scaffold consisting of an ad-
system used to arrest an employee’s justable platform(s) mounted on an
284
independent supporting frame(s) not a points that accept runners, bearers,

part of the object being worked on, and and diagonals that can be inter-
which is equipped with a means to per- connected at predetermined levels.
mit the raising and lowering of the Tank builders’ scaffold means a sup-
platform(s). Such systems include roll- ported scaffold consisting of a platform
ing roof rigs, rolling outrigger systems, resting on brackets that are either di-
and some masons’ adjustable supported rectly attached to a cylindrical tank or
scaffolds. attached to devices that are attached
Shore scaffold means a supported scaf- to such a tank.
fold which is placed against a building Top plate bracket scaffold means a
or structure and held in place with scaffold supported by brackets that
props. hook over or are attached to the top of
Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- a wall. This type of scaffold is similar
fold means a suspension scaffold con- to carpenters’ bracket scaffolds and
sisting of a platform suspended by one form scaffolds and is used in residen-
rope from an overhead support and tial construction for setting trusses.
equipped with means to permit the Tube and coupler scaffold means a sup-
movement of the platform to desired ported or suspended scaffold consisting
work levels. of a platform(s) supported by tubing,
Single-pole scaffold means a supported erected with coupling devices con-
scaffold consisting of a platform(s) necting uprights, braces, bearers, and
resting on bearers, the outside ends of runners.
which are supported on runners secured Tubular welded frame scaffold (see
to a single row of posts or uprights, and ‘‘Fabricated frame scaffold’’).
the inner ends of which are supported Two-point suspension scaffold (swing
on or in a structure or building wall. stage) means a suspension scaffold con-
Stair tower (Scaffold stairway/tower) sisting of a platform supported by
means a tower comprised of scaffold hangers (stirrups) suspended by two
components and which contains inter- ropes from overhead supports and
nal stairway units and rest platforms. equipped with means to permit the
These towers are used to provide access raising and lowering of the platform to
to scaffold platforms and other ele- desired work levels.
vated points such as floors and roofs.
Unstable objects means items whose
Stall load means the load at which
strength, configuration, or lack of sta-
the prime-mover of a power-operated
bility may allow them to become dis-
hoist stalls or the power to the prime-
located and shift and therefore may
mover is automatically disconnected.
not properly support the loads imposed
Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf-
on them. Unstable objects do not con-
fold means a platform resting directly
stitute a safe base support for scaf-
on the rungs of step ladders or trestle
folds, platforms, or employees. Exam-
ladders.
ples include, but are not limited to,
Stilts means a pair of poles or similar
barrels, boxes, loose brick, and con-
supports with raised footrests, used to
crete blocks.
permit walking above the ground or
working surface. Vertical pickup means a rope used to
Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable sus- support the horizontal rope in catenary
pension scaffold means a continuous run scaffolds.
suspension scaffold designed and used Walkway means a portion of a scaf-
for stonesetters’ operations. fold platform used only for access and
Supported scaffold means one or more not as a work level.
platforms supported by outrigger Window jack scaffold means a plat-
beams, brackets, poles, legs, uprights, form resting on a bracket or jack
posts, frames, or similar rigid support. which projects through a window open-
Suspension scaffold means one or ing.
more platforms suspended by ropes or
other non-rigid means from an over- § 1926.451 General requirements.

head structure(s). This section does not apply to aerial
System scaffold means a scaffold con- lifts, the criteria for which are set out
sisting of posts with fixed connection exclusively in § 1926.453.
285
(a) Capacity. (1) Except as provided in to fit around uprights when side brack-
paragraphs (a)(2), (a)(3), (a)(4), (a)(5) ets are used to extend the width of the
and (g) of this section, each scaffold platform).
and scaffold component shall be capa- (ii) Where the employer makes the
ble of supporting, without failure, its demonstration provided for in para-
own weight and at least 4 times the graph (b)(1)(i) of this section, the plat-
maximum intended load applied or form shall be planked or decked as
transmitted to it. fully as possible and the remaining
(2) Direct connections to roofs and open space between the platform and
floors, and counterweights used to bal- the uprights shall not exceed 91⁄2 inches
ance adjustable suspension scaffolds, (24.1 cm).
shall be capable of resisting at least 4 Exception to paragraph (b)(1): The re-
times the tipping moment imposed by quirement in paragraph (b)(1) to pro-
the scaffold operating at the rated load vide full planking or decking does not
of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times apply to platforms used solely as walk-
the tipping moment imposed by the ways or solely by employees per-
scaffold operating at the stall load of forming scaffold erection or disman-
the hoist, whichever is greater. tling. In these situations, only the
(3) Each suspension rope, including planking that the employer establishes
connecting hardware, used on non-ad- is necessary to provide safe working
justable suspension scaffolds shall be conditions is required.
capable of supporting, without failure, (2) Except as provided in paragraphs
at least 6 times the maximum intended (b)(2)(i) and (b)(2)(ii) of this section,
load applied or transmitted to that each scaffold platform and walkway
rope. shall be at least 18 inches (46 cm) wide.
(4) Each suspension rope, including (i) Each ladder jack scaffold, top
connecting hardware, used on adjust- plate bracket scaffold, roof bracket
able suspension scaffolds shall be capa- scaffold, and pump jack scaffold shall
ble of supporting, without failure, at be at least 12 inches (30 cm) wide.
least 6 times the maximum intended There is no minimum width require-
load applied or transmitted to that ment for boatswains’ chairs.
rope with the scaffold operating at ei-
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(i): Pursuant to
ther the rated load of the hoist, or 2 an administrative stay effective November
(minimum) times the stall load of the 29, 1996 and published in the FEDERAL REG-
hoist, whichever is greater. ISTER on November 25, 1996, the requirement
(5) The stall load of any scaffold hoist in paragraph (b)(2)(i) that roof bracket scaf-
shall not exceed 3 times its rated load. folds be at least 12 inches wide is stayed
(6) Scaffolds shall be designed by a until November 25, 1997 or until rulemaking
qualified person and shall be con- regarding the minimum width of roof brack-
structed and loaded in accordance with et scaffolds has been completed, whichever is
later.
that design. Non-mandatory Appendix
A to this subpart contains examples of (ii) Where scaffolds must be used in
criteria that will enable an employer areas that the employer can dem-
to comply with paragraph (a) of this onstrate are so narrow that platforms
section. and walkways cannot be at least 18
(b) Scaffold platform construction. (1) inches (46 cm) wide, such platforms and
Each platform on all working levels of walkways shall be as wide as feasible,
scaffolds shall be fully planked or and employees on those platforms and
decked between the front uprights and walkways shall be protected from fall
the guardrail supports as follows: hazards by the use of guardrails and/or
(i) Each platform unit (e.g., scaffold personal fall arrest systems.
plank, fabricated plank, fabricated (3) Except as provided in paragraphs
deck, or fabricated platform) shall be (b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section, the
installed so that the space between ad- front edge of all platforms shall not be
jacent units and the space between the more than 14 inches (36 cm) from the
platform and the uprights is no more face of the work, unless guardrail sys-
than 1 inch (2.5 cm) wide, except where tems are erected along the front edge
the employer can demonstrate that a and/or personal fall arrest systems are
wider space is necessary (for example, used in accordance with paragraph (g)
286
of this section to protect employees may be coated periodically with wood

from falling. preservatives, fire-retardant finishes,
(i) The maximum distance from the and slip-resistant finishes; however,
face for outrigger scaffolds shall be 3 the coating may not obscure the top or
inches (8 cm); bottom wood surfaces.
(ii) The maximum distance from the (10) Scaffold components manufac-
face for plastering and lathing oper- tured by different manufacturers shall
ations shall be 18 inches (46 cm). not be intermixed unless the compo-
(4) Each end of a platform, unless nents fit together without force and
cleated or otherwise restrained by the scaffold’s structural integrity is
hooks or equivalent means, shall ex- maintained by the user. Scaffold com-
tend over the centerline of its support ponents manufactured by different
at least 6 inches (15 cm). manufacturers shall not be modified in
(5)(i) Each end of a platform 10 feet or order to intermix them unless a com-
less in length shall not extend over its petent person determines the resulting
support more than 12 inches (30 cm) un- scaffold is structurally sound.
less the platform is designed and in- (11) Scaffold components made of dis-
stalled so that the cantilevered portion similar metals shall not be used to-
of the platform is able to support em- gether unless a competent person has
ployees and/or materials without tip- determined that galvanic action will
ping, or has guardrails which block em- not reduce the strength of any compo-
ployee access to the cantilevered end. nent to a level below that required by
(ii) Each platform greater than 10 paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
feet in length shall not extend over its (c) Criteria for supported scaffolds. (1)
support more than 18 inches (46 cm), Supported scaffolds with a height to
unless it is designed and installed so base width (including outrigger sup-
that the cantilevered portion of the ports, if used) ratio of more than four
platform is able to support employees to one (4:1) shall be restrained from tip-
without tipping, or has guardrails ping by guying, tying, bracing, or
which block employee access to the equivalent means, as follows:
cantilevered end. (i) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in-
(6) On scaffolds where scaffold planks stalled at locations where horizontal
are abutted to create a long platform, members support both inner and outer
each abutted end shall rest on a sepa- legs.
rate support surface. This provision (ii) Guys, ties, and braces shall be in-
does not preclude the use of common stalled according to the scaffold manu-
support members, such as ‘‘T’’ sec- facturer’s recommendations or at the
tions, to support abutting planks, or closest horizontal member to the 4:1
hook on platforms designed to rest on height and be repeated vertically at lo-
common supports. cations of horizontal members every 20
(7) On scaffolds where platforms are feet (6.1 m) or less thereafter for scaf-
overlapped to create a long platform, folds 3 feet (0.91 m) wide or less, and
the overlap shall occur only over sup- every 26 feet (7.9 m) or less thereafter
ports, and shall not be less than 12 for scaffolds greater than 3 feet (0.91 m)
inches (30 cm) unless the platforms are wide. The top guy, tie or brace of com-
nailed together or otherwise restrained pleted scaffolds shall be placed no fur-
to prevent movement. ther than the 4:1 height from the top.
(8) At all points of a scaffold where Such guys, ties and braces shall be in-
the platform changes direction, such as stalled at each end of the scaffold and
turning a corner, any platform that at horizontal intervals not to exceed 30
rests on a bearer at an angle other than feet (9.1 m) (measured from one end
a right angle shall be laid first, and [not both] towards the other).
platforms which rest at right angles (iii) Ties, guys, braces, or outriggers
over the same bearer shall be laid sec- shall be used to prevent the tipping of
ond, on top of the first platform. supported scaffolds in all cir-
(9) Wood platforms shall not be cov- cumstances where an eccentric load,
ered with opaque finishes, except that such as a cantilevered work platform,
platform edges may be covered or is applied or is transmitted to the scaf-
marked for identification. Platforms fold.
287
(2) Supported scaffold poles, legs, suspension scaffold connections shall

posts, frames, and uprights shall bear be designed by an engineer experienced
on base plates and mud sills or other in such scaffold design.
adequate firm foundation. (ii) Counterweights shall be made of
(i) Footings shall be level, sound, non-flowable material. Sand, gravel
rigid, and capable of supporting the and similar materials that can be eas-
loaded scaffold without settling or dis- ily dislocated shall not be used as
placement. counterweights.
(ii) Unstable objects shall not be used (iii) Only those items specifically de-
to support scaffolds or platform units. signed as counterweights shall be used
(iii) Unstable objects shall not be to counterweight scaffold systems.
used as working platforms. Construction materials such as, but
(iv) Front-end loaders and similar not limited to, masonry units and rolls
pieces of equipment shall not be used of roofing felt, shall not be used as
to support scaffold platforms unless counterweights.
they have been specifically designed by (iv) Counterweights shall be secured
the manufacturer for such use. by mechanical means to the outrigger
(v) Fork-lifts shall not be used to beams to prevent accidental displace-
support scaffold platforms unless the ment.
entire platform is attached to the fork (v) Counterweights shall not be re-
and the fork-lift is not moved hori- moved from an outrigger beam until
zontally while the platform is occu- the scaffold is disassembled.
pied. (vi) Outrigger beams which are not
(3) Supported scaffold poles, legs, stabilized by bolts or other direct con-
posts, frames, and uprights shall be nections to the floor or roof deck shall
plumb and braced to prevent swaying be secured by tiebacks.
and displacement.
(vii) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in
(d) Criteria for suspension scaffolds. (1)
strength to the suspension ropes.
All suspension scaffold support devices,
such as outrigger beams, cornice (viii) Outrigger beams shall be placed
hooks, parapet clamps, and similar de- perpendicular to its bearing support
vices, shall rest on surfaces capable of (usually the face of the building or
supporting at least 4 times the load im- structure). However, where the em-
posed on them by the scaffold oper- ployer can demonstrate that it is not
ating at the rated load of the hoist (or possible to place an outrigger beam
at least 1.5 times the load imposed on perpendicular to the face of the build-
them by the scaffold at the stall capac- ing or structure because of obstruc-
ity of the hoist, whichever is greater). tions that cannot be moved, the out-
(2) Suspension scaffold outrigger rigger beam may be placed at some
beams, when used, shall be made of other angle, provided opposing angle
structural metal or equivalent tiebacks are used.
strength material, and shall be re- (ix) Tiebacks shall be secured to a
strained to prevent movement. structurally sound anchorage on the
(3) The inboard ends of suspension building or structure. Sound anchor-
scaffold outrigger beams shall be sta- ages include structural members, but
bilized by bolts or other direct connec- do not include standpipes, vents, other
tions to the floor or roof deck, or they piping systems, or electrical conduit.
shall have their inboard ends stabilized (x) Tiebacks shall be installed per-
by counterweights, except masons’ pendicular to the face of the building
multi-point adjustable suspension scaf- or structure, or opposing angle
fold outrigger beams shall not be sta- tiebacks shall be installed. Single
bilized by counterweights. tiebacks installed at an angle are pro-
(i) Before the scaffold is used, direct hibited.
connections shall be evaluated by a (4) Suspension scaffold outrigger
competent person who shall confirm, beams shall be:
based on the evaluation, that the sup- (i) Provided with stop bolts or shack-
porting surfaces are capable of sup- les at both ends;
porting the loads to be imposed. In ad- (ii) Securely fastened together with
dition, masons’ multi-point adjustable the flanges turned out when channel
288
iron beams are used in place of I- rity. Ropes shall be replaced if any of
beams; the following conditions exist:
(iii) Installed with all bearing sup- (i) Any physical damage which im-
ports perpendicular to the beam center pairs the function and strength of the
line; rope.
(iv) Set and maintained with the web (ii) Kinks that might impair the
in a vertical position; and tracking or wrapping of rope around
(v) When an outrigger beam is used, the drum(s) or sheave(s).
the shackle or clevis with which the (iii) Six randomly distributed broken
rope is attached to the outrigger beam wires in one rope lay or three broken
shall be placed directly over the center wires in one strand in one rope lay.
line of the stirrup. (iv) Abrasion, corrosion, scrubbing,
(5) Suspension scaffold support de- flattening or peening causing loss of
vices such as cornice hooks, roof more than one-third of the original di-
hooks, roof irons, parapet clamps, or ameter of the outside wires.
similar devices shall be: (v) Heat damage caused by a torch or
(i) Made of steel, wrought iron, or any damage caused by contact with
materials of equivalent strength; electrical wires.
(ii) Supported by bearing blocks; and (vi) Evidence that the secondary
(iii) Secured against movement by brake has been activated during an
tiebacks installed at right angles to overspeed condition and has engaged
the face of the building or structure, or the suspension rope.
opposing angle tiebacks shall be in- (11) Swaged attachments or spliced
stalled and secured to a structurally eyes on wire suspension ropes shall not
sound point of anchorage on the build- be used unless they are made by the
ing or structure. Sound points of an- wire rope manufacturer or a qualified
chorage include structural members, person.
but do not include standpipes, vents, (12) When wire rope clips are used on
other piping systems, or electrical con- suspension scaffolds:
duit. (i) There shall be a minimum of 3
(iv) Tiebacks shall be equivalent in wire rope clips installed, with the clips
strength to the hoisting rope. a minimum of 6 rope diameters apart;
(6) When winding drum hoists are (ii) Clips shall be installed according
used on a suspension scaffold, they to the manufacturer’s recommenda-
shall contain not less than four wraps tions;
of the suspension rope at the lowest (iii) Clips shall be retightened to the
point of scaffold travel. When other manufacturer’s recommendations after
types of hoists are used, the suspension the initial loading;
ropes shall be long enough to allow the (iv) Clips shall be inspected and re-
scaffold to be lowered to the level tightened to the manufacturer’s rec-
below without the rope end passing ommendations at the start of each
through the hoist, or the rope end shall workshift thereafter;
be configured or provided with means (v) U-bolt clips shall not be used at
to prevent the end from passing the point of suspension for any scaffold
through the hoist. hoist;
(7) The use of repaired wire rope as (vi) When U-bolt clips are used, the
suspension rope is prohibited. U-bolt shall be placed over the dead
(8) Wire suspension ropes shall not be end of the rope, and the saddle shall be
joined together except through the use placed over the live end of the rope.
of eye splice thimbles connected with (13) Suspension scaffold power-oper-
shackles or coverplates and bolts. ated hoists and manual hoists shall be
(9) The load end of wire suspension tested by a qualified testing labora-
ropes shall be equipped with proper size tory.
thimbles and secured by eyesplicing or (14) Gasoline-powered equipment and
equivalent means. hoists shall not be used on suspension
(10) Ropes shall be inspected for de- scaffolds.

fects by a competent person prior to (15) Gears and brakes of power-oper-
each workshift and after every occur- ated hoists used on suspension scaf-
rence which could affect a rope’s integ- folds shall be enclosed.
289
(16) In addition to the normal oper- (iii) When hook-on and attachable
ating brake, suspension scaffold power- ladders are used on a supported scaffold
operated hoists and manually operated more than 35 feet (10.7 m) high, they
hoists shall have a braking device or shall have rest platforms at 35-foot
locking pawl which engages automati- (10.7 m) maximum vertical intervals.
cally when a hoist makes either of the (iv) Hook-on and attachable ladders
following uncontrolled movements: an shall be specifically designed for use
instantaneous change in momentum or with the type of scaffold used;
an accelerated overspeed. (v) Hook-on and attachable ladders
(17) Manually operated hoists shall shall have a minimum rung length of
require a positive crank force to de- 111⁄2 inches (29 cm); and
scend. (vi) Hook-on and attachable ladders
(18) Two-point and multi-point sus- shall have uniformly spaced rungs with
pension scaffolds shall be tied or other- a maximum spacing between rungs of
wise secured to prevent them from 163⁄4 inches.
swaying, as determined to be necessary (3) Stairway-type ladders shall:
based on an evaluation by a competent (i) Be positioned such that their bot-
person. Window cleaners’ anchors shall tom step is not more than 24 inches (61
not be used for this purpose. cm) above the scaffold supporting
(19) Devices whose sole function is to level;
provide emergency escape and rescue (ii) Be provided with rest platforms
shall not be used as working platforms. at 12 foot (3.7 m) maximum vertical in-
This provision does not preclude the tervals;
use of systems which are designed to (iii) Have a minimum step width of 16
function both as suspension scaffolds inches (41 cm), except that mobile scaf-
and emergency systems. fold stairway-type ladders shall have a
(e) Access. This paragraph applies to minimum step width of 111⁄2 inches (30
scaffold access for all employees. Ac- cm); and
cess requirements for employees erect- (iv) Have slip-resistant treads on all
ing or dismantling supported scaffolds steps and landings.
are specifically addressed in paragraph (4) Stairtowers (scaffold stairway/
(e)(9) of this section. towers) shall be positioned such that
(1) When scaffold platforms are more their bottom step is not more than 24
than 2 feet (0.6 m) above or below a inches (61 cm.) above the scaffold sup-
point of access, portable ladders, hook- porting level.
on ladders, attachable ladders, stair (i) A stairrail consisting of a toprail
towers (scaffold stairways/towers), and a midrail shall be provided on each
stairway-type ladders (such as ladder side of each scaffold stairway.
stands), ramps, walkways, integral pre- (ii) The toprail of each stairrail sys-
fabricated scaffold access, or direct ac- tem shall also be capable of serving as
cess from another scaffold, structure, a handrail, unless a separate handrail
personnel hoist, or similar surface is provided.
shall be used. Crossbraces shall not be (iii) Handrails, and toprails that
used as a means of access. serve as handrails, shall provide an
(2) Portable, hook-on, and attachable adequate handhold for employees
ladders (Additional requirements for grasping them to avoid falling.
the proper construction and use of (iv) Stairrail systems and handrails
portable ladders are contained in sub- shall be surfaced to prevent injury to
part X of this part—Stairways and employees from punctures or lacera-
Ladders): tions, and to prevent snagging of cloth-
(i) Portable, hook-on, and attachable ing.
ladders shall be positioned so as not to (v) The ends of stairrail systems and
tip the scaffold; handrails shall be constructed so that
(ii) Hook-on and attachable ladders they do not constitute a projection
shall be positioned so that their bot- hazard.

tom rung is not more than 24 inches (61 (vi) Handrails, and toprails that are
cm) above the scaffold supporting used as handrails, shall be at least 3
level; inches (7.6 cm) from other objects.
290
(vii) Stairrails shall be not less than (v) Be provided with rest platforms at
28 inches (71 cm) nor more than 37 35-foot (10.7 m) maximum vertical in-
inches (94 cm) from the upper surface tervals on all supported scaffolds more
of the stairrail to the surface of the than 35 feet (10.7 m) high; and
tread, in line with the face of the riser (vi) Have a maximum spacing be-
at the forward edge of the tread. tween rungs of 163⁄4 inches (43 cm). Non-
(viii) A landing platform at least 18 uniform rung spacing caused by joining
inches (45.7 cm) wide by at least 18 end frames together is allowed, pro-
inches (45.7 cm) long shall be provided vided the resulting spacing does not ex-
at each level. ceed 163⁄4 inches (43 cm).
(ix) Each scaffold stairway shall be at (7) Steps and rungs of ladder and
least 18 inches (45.7 cm) wide between stairway type access shall line up
stairrails. vertically with each other between rest
(x) Treads and landings shall have platforms.
slip-resistant surfaces. (8) Direct access to or from another
(xi) Stairways shall be installed be- surface shall be used only when the
tween 40 degrees and 60 degrees from scaffold is not more than 14 inches (36
the horizontal. cm) horizontally and not more than 24
(xii) Guardrails meeting the require- inches (61 cm) vertically from the other
ments of paragraph (g)(4) of this sec- surface.
tion shall be provided on the open sides (9) Effective September 2, 1997, access
and ends of each landing. for employees erecting or dismantling
(xiii) Riser height shall be uniform, supported scaffolds shall be in accord-
within 1⁄4 inch, (0.6 cm) for each flight ance with the following:
of stairs. Greater variations in riser (i) The employer shall provide safe
height are allowed for the top and bot- means of access for each employee
tom steps of the entire system, not for erecting or dismantling a scaffold
each flight of stairs. where the provision of safe access is
(xiv) Tread depth shall be uniform, feasible and does not create a greater
within 1⁄4 inch, for each flight of stairs. hazard. The employer shall have a com-
(5) Ramps and walkways. (i) Ramps petent person determine whether it is
and walkways 6 feet (1.8 m) or more feasible or would pose a greater hazard
above lower levels shall have guardrail to provide, and have employees use a
systems which comply with subpart M safe means of access. This determina-
of this part—Fall Protection; tion shall be based on site conditions
(ii) No ramp or walkway shall be in- and the type of scaffold being erected
clined more than a slope of one (1) or dismantled.
vertical to three (3) horizontal (20 de- (ii) Hook-on or attachable ladders
grees above the horizontal). shall be installed as soon as scaffold
(iii) If the slope of a ramp or a walk- erection has progressed to a point that
way is steeper than one (1) vertical in permits safe installation and use.
eight (8) horizontal, the ramp or walk- (iii) When erecting or dismantling tu-
way shall have cleats not more than bular welded frame scaffolds, (end)
fourteen (14) inches (35 cm) apart which frames, with horizontal members that
are securely fastened to the planks to are parallel, level and are not more
provide footing. than 22 inches apart vertically may be
(6) Integral prefabricated scaffold ac- used as climbing devices for access,
cess frames shall: provided they are erected in a manner
(i) Be specifically designed and con- that creates a usable ladder and pro-
structed for use as ladder rungs; vides good hand hold and foot space.
(ii) Have a rung length of at least 8 (iv) Cross braces on tubular welded
inches (20 cm); frame scaffolds shall not be used as a
(iii) Not be used as work platforms means of access or egress.
when rungs are less than 111⁄2 inches in (f) Use. (1) Scaffolds and scaffold com-
length, unless each affected employee ponents shall not be loaded in excess of
uses fall protection, or a positioning their maximum intended loads or rated

device, which complies with § 1926.502; capacities, whichever is less.
(iv) Be uniformly spaced within each (2) The use of shore or lean-to scaf-
frame section; folds is prohibited.
291
(3) Scaffolds and scaffold components unless they have been designed by a
shall be inspected for visible defects by registered professional engineer spe-
a competent person before each work cifically for such movement or, for mo-
shift, and after any occurrence which bile scaffolds, where the provisions of
could affect a scaffold’s structural in- § 1926.452(w) are followed.
tegrity. (6) The clearance between scaffolds
(4) Any part of a scaffold damaged or and power lines shall be as follows:
weakened such that its strength is less Scaffolds shall not be erected, used,
than that required by paragraph (a) of
dismantled, altered, or moved such
this section shall be immediately re-
paired or replaced, braced to meet that they or any conductive material
those provisions, or removed from serv- handled on them might come closer to
ice until repaired. exposed and energized power lines than
(5) Scaffolds shall not be moved hori- as follows:
zontally while employees are on them,
Insulated lines Minimum distance Alternatives
voltage
Less than 300 volts .......................... 3 feet (0.9 m).

300 volts to 50 kv ............................ 10 feet (3.1m).
More than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but
each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).
Uninsulated lines Minimum distance Alternatives

voltage
Less than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m).

More than 50 kv ............................... 10 feet (3.1 m) plus 0.4 inches (1.0 cm) for 2 times the length of the line insulator, but
each 1 kv over 50 kv. never less than 10 feet (3.1 m).
EXCEPTION TO PARAGRAPH (f)(6): Scaffolds (10) Suspension ropes supporting ad-

and materials may be closer to power lines justable suspension scaffolds shall be of
than specified above where such clearance is a diameter large enough to provide suf-
necessary for performance of work, and only
ficient surface area for the functioning
after the utility company, or electrical sys-
tem operator, has been notified of the need
of brake and hoist mechanisms.
to work closer and the utility company, or (11) Suspension ropes shall be shield-
electrical system operator, has deenergized ed from heat-producing processes.
the lines, relocated the lines, or installed When acids or other corrosive sub-
protective coverings to prevent accidental stances are used on a scaffold, the
contact with the lines. ropes shall be shielded, treated to pro-
(7) Scaffolds shall be erected, moved, tect against the corrosive substances,
dismantled, or altered only under the or shall be of a material that will not
supervision and direction of a com- be damaged by the substance being
petent person qualified in scaffold erec- used.
tion, moving, dismantling or alter- (12) Work on or from scaffolds is pro-
ation. Such activities shall be per- hibited during storms or high winds
formed only by experienced and trained unless a competent person has deter-
employees selected for such work by mined that it is safe for employees to
the competent person. be on the scaffold and those employees
(8) Employees shall be prohibited are protected by a personal fall arrest
from working on scaffolds covered with system or wind screens. Wind screens
snow, ice, or other slippery material shall not be used unless the scaffold is
except as necessary for removal of such secured against the anticipated wind
materials. forces imposed.
(9) Where swinging loads are being (13) Debris shall not be allowed to ac-
hoisted onto or near scaffolds such that cumulate on platforms.

the loads might contact the scaffold, (14) Makeshift devices, such as but
tag lines or equivalent measures to not limited to boxes and barrels, shall
control the loads shall be used. not be used on top of scaffold platforms
292
to increase the working level height of (v) If the scaffold grounding lead is
employees. disconnected at any time, the welding
(15) Ladders shall not be used on scaf- machine shall be shut off; and
folds to increase the working level (vi) An active welding rod or
height of employees, except on large uninsulated welding lead shall not be
area scaffolds where employers have allowed to contact the scaffold or its
satisfied the following criteria: suspension system.
(i) When the ladder is placed against (g) Fall protection. (1) Each employee
a structure which is not a part of the on a scaffold more than 10 feet (3.1 m)
scaffold, the scaffold shall be secured above a lower level shall be protected
against the sideways thrust exerted by from falling to that lower level. Para-
the ladder; graphs (g)(1) (i) through (vii) of this
(ii) The platform units shall be se- section establish the types of fall pro-
cured to the scaffold to prevent their tection to be provided to the employees
movement; on each type of scaffold. Paragraph
(iii) The ladder legs shall be on the (g)(2) of this section addresses fall pro-
same platform or other means shall be tection for scaffold erectors and dis-
provided to stabilize the ladder against mantlers.
unequal platform deflection, and NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (g)(1): The fall protec-
(iv) The ladder legs shall be secured tion requirements for employees installing
to prevent them from slipping or being suspension scaffold support systems on
pushed off the platform. floors, roofs, and other elevated surfaces are
(16) Platforms shall not deflect more set forth in subpart M of this part.
than 1⁄60 of the span when loaded. (i) Each employee on a boatswains’
(17) To reduce the possibility of weld- chair, catenary scaffold, float scaffold,
ing current arcing through the suspen- needle beam scaffold, or ladder jack
sion wire rope when performing weld- scaffold shall be protected by a per-
ing from suspended scaffolds, the fol- sonal fall arrest system;
lowing precautions shall be taken, as (ii) Each employee on a single-point
applicable: or two-point adjustable suspension
(i) An insulated thimble shall be used scaffold shall be protected by both a
to attach each suspension wire rope to personal fall arrest system and guard-
its hanging support (such as cornice rail system;
hook or outrigger). Excess suspension (iii) Each employee on a crawling
wire rope and any additional inde- board (chicken ladder) shall be pro-
pendent lines from grounding shall be tected by a personal fall arrest system,
insulated; a guardrail system (with minimum 200
(ii) The suspension wire rope shall be pound toprail capacity), or by a three-
covered with insulating material ex- fourth inch (1.9 cm) diameter grabline
tending at least 4 feet (1.2 m) above the or equivalent handhold securely fas-
hoist. If there is a tail line below the tened beside each crawling board;
hoist, it shall be insulated to prevent (iv) Each employee on a self-con-
contact with the platform. The portion tained adjustable scaffold shall be pro-
of the tail line that hangs free below tected by a guardrail system (with
the scaffold shall be guided or retained, minimum 200 pound toprail capacity)
or both, so that it does not become when the platform is supported by the
grounded; frame structure, and by both a per-
(iii) Each hoist shall be covered with sonal fall arrest system and a guardrail
insulated protective covers; system (with minimum 200 pound top-
(iv) In addition to a work lead at- rail capacity) when the platform is sup-
tachment required by the welding proc- ported by ropes;
ess, a grounding conductor shall be (v) Each employee on a walkway lo-
connected from the scaffold to the cated within a scaffold shall be pro-
structure. The size of this conductor tected by a guardrail system (with
shall be at least the size of the welding minimum 200 pound toprail capacity)
process work lead, and this conductor installed within 91⁄2 inches (24.1 cm) of
shall not be in series with the welding and along at least one side of the walk-
process or the work piece; way.
293
(vi) Each employee performing (iii) When lanyards are connected to

overhand bricklaying operations from horizontal lifelines or structural mem-
a supported scaffold shall be protected bers on a single-point or two-point ad-
from falling from all open sides and justable suspension scaffold, the scaf-
ends of the scaffold (except at the side fold shall be equipped with additional
next to the wall being laid) by the use independent support lines and auto-
of a personal fall arrest system or matic locking devices capable of stop-
guardrail system (with minimum 200 ping the fall of the scaffold in the event
pound toprail capacity). one or both of the suspension ropes
(vii) For all scaffolds not otherwise fail. The independent support lines
specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through shall be equal in number and strength
(g)(1)(vi) of this section, each employee to the suspension ropes.
shall be protected by the use of per- (iv) Vertical lifelines, independent
sonal fall arrest systems or guardrail support lines, and suspension ropes
systems meeting the requirements of shall not be attached to each other, nor
paragraph (g)(4) of this section. shall they be attached to or use the
(2) Effective September 2, 1997, the same point of anchorage, nor shall they
employer shall have a competent per- be attached to the same point on the
son determine the feasibility and safe- scaffold or personal fall arrest system.
ty of providing fall protection for em- (4) Guardrail systems installed to
ployees erecting or dismantling sup- meet the requirements of this section
ported scaffolds. Employers are re- shall comply with the following provi-
quired to provide fall protection for sions (guardrail systems built in ac-
employees erecting or dismantling sup- cordance with Appendix A to this sub-
ported scaffolds where the installation part will be deemed to meet the re-
and use of such protection is feasible quirements of paragraphs (g)(4) (vii),
and does not create a greater hazard. (viii), and (ix) of this section):
(i) Guardrail systems shall be in-
(3) In addition to meeting the re-
stalled along all open sides and ends of
quirements of § 1926.502(d), personal fall
platforms. Guardrail systems shall be
arrest systems used on scaffolds shall
installed before the scaffold is released
be attached by lanyard to a vertical for use by employees other than erec-
lifeline, horizontal lifeline, or scaffold tion/dismantling crews.
structural member. Vertical lifelines (ii) The top edge height of toprails or
shall not be used when overhead com- equivalent member on supported scaf-
ponents, such as overhead protection folds manufactured or placed in service
or additional platform levels, are part after January 1, 2000 shall be installed
of a single-point or two-point adjust- between 38 inches (0.97 m) and 45 inches
able suspension scaffold. (1.2 m) above the platform surface. The
(i) When vertical lifelines are used, top edge height on supported scaffolds
they shall be fastened to a fixed safe manufactured and placed in service be-
point of anchorage, shall be inde- fore January 1, 2000, and on all sus-
pendent of the scaffold, and shall be pended scaffolds where both a guardrail
protected from sharp edges and abra- and a personal fall arrest system are
sion. Safe points of anchorage include required shall be between 36 inches (0.9
structural members of buildings, but m) and 45 inches (1.2 m). When condi-
do not include standpipes, vents, other tions warrant, the height of the top
piping systems, electrical conduit, out- edge may exceed the 45-inch height,
rigger beams, or counterweights. provided the guardrail system meets
(ii) When horizontal lifelines are all other criteria of paragraph (g)(4).
used, they shall be secured to two or (iii) When midrails, screens, mesh,
more structural members of the scaf- intermediate vertical members, solid
fold, or they may be looped around panels, or equivalent structural mem-
both suspension and independent sus- bers are used, they shall be installed
pension lines (on scaffolds so equipped) between the top edge of the guardrail
above the hoist and brake attached to system and the scaffold platform.
the end of the scaffold. Horizontal life- (iv) When midrails are used, they
lines shall not be attached only to the shall be installed at a height approxi-
suspension ropes. mately midway between the top edge of
294
the guardrail system and the platform (xiii) Steel or plastic banding shall
surface. not be used as a toprail or midrail.
(v) When screens and mesh are used, (xiv) Manila or plastic (or other syn-
they shall extend from the top edge of thetic) rope being used for toprails or
the guardrail system to the scaffold midrails shall be inspected by a com-
platform, and along the entire opening petent person as frequently as nec-
between the supports. essary to ensure that it continues to
(vi) When intermediate members meet the strength requirements of
(such as balusters or additional rails) paragraph (g) of this section.
are used, they shall not be more than (xv) Crossbracing is acceptable in
19 inches (48 cm) apart. place of a midrail when the crossing
(vii) Each toprail or equivalent mem- point of two braces is between 20 inches
ber of a guardrail system shall be capa- (0.5 m) and 30 inches (0.8 m) above the
ble of withstanding, without failure, a work platform or as a toprail when the
force applied in any downward or hori- crossing point of two braces is between
zontal direction at any point along its 38 inches (0.97 m) and 48 inches (1.3 m)
top edge of at least 100 pounds (445 n) above the work platform. The end
for guardrail systems installed on sin- points at each upright shall be no more
gle-point adjustable suspension scaf- than 48 inches (1.3 m) apart.
folds or two-point adjustable suspen- (h) Falling object protection. (1) In ad-
sion scaffolds, and at least 200 pounds dition to wearing hardhats each em-
(890 n) for guardrail systems installed ployee on a scaffold shall be provided
on all other scaffolds. with additional protection from falling
(viii) When the loads specified in hand tools, debris, and other small ob-
paragraph (g)(4)(vii) of this section are jects through the installation of
applied in a downward direction, the toeboards, screens, or guardrail sys-
top edge shall not drop below the tems, or through the erection of debris
height above the platform surface that nets, catch platforms, or canopy struc-
is prescribed in paragraph (g)(4)(ii) of tures that contain or deflect the falling
this section. objects. When the falling objects are
(ix) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- too large, heavy or massive to be con-
mediate vertical members, solid pan- tained or deflected by any of the above-
els, and equivalent structural members listed measures, the employer shall
of a guardrail system shall be capable place such potential falling objects
of withstanding, without failure, a away from the edge of the surface from
force applied in any downward or hori- which they could fall and shall secure
zontal direction at any point along the those materials as necessary to prevent
midrail or other member of at least 75 their falling.
pounds (333 n) for guardrail systems (2) Where there is a danger of tools,
with a minimum 100 pound toprail ca- materials, or equipment falling from a
pacity, and at least 150 pounds (666 n) scaffold and striking employees below,
for guardrail systems with a minimum the following provisions apply:
200 pound toprail capacity. (i) The area below the scaffold to
(x) Suspension scaffold hoists and which objects can fall shall be barri-
non-walk-through stirrups may be used caded, and employees shall not be per-
as end guardrails, if the space between mitted to enter the hazard area; or
the hoist or stirrup and the side guard- (ii) A toeboard shall be erected along
rail or structure does not allow passage the edge of platforms more than 10 feet
of an employee to the end of the scaf- (3.1 m) above lower levels for a distance
fold. sufficient to protect employees below,
(xi) Guardrails shall be surfaced to except on float (ship) scaffolds where
prevent injury to an employee from an edging of 3⁄4 × 11⁄2 inch (2 × 4 cm)
punctures or lacerations, and to pre- wood or equivalent may be used in lieu
vent snagging of clothing. of toeboards;
(xii) The ends of all rails shall not (iii) Where tools, materials, or equip-
overhang the terminal posts except ment are piled to a height higher than
when such overhang does not con- the top edge of the toeboard, paneling
stitute a projection hazard to employ- or screening extending from the
ees. toeboard or platform to the top of the
295
guardrail shall be erected for a dis- § 1926.452 Additional requirements ap-

tance sufficient to protect employees plicable to specific types of scaf-
below; or folds.
(iv) A guardrail system shall be in- In addition to the applicable require-
stalled with openings small enough to ments of § 1926.451, the following re-
prevent passage of potential falling ob- quirements apply to the specific types
jects; or of scaffolds indicated. Scaffolds not
(v) A canopy structure, debris net, or specifically addressed by § 1926.452, such
catch platform strong enough to with- as but not limited to systems scaffolds,
stand the impact forces of the poten- must meet the requirements of
tial falling objects shall be erected § 1926.451.
over the employees below. (a) Pole scaffolds. (1) When platforms
are being moved to the next level, the
(3) Canopies, when used for falling ob-
existing platform shall be left undis-
ject protection, shall comply with the
turbed until the new bearers have been
following criteria: set in place and braced, prior to receiv-
(i) Canopies shall be installed being the new platforms.
tween the falling object hazard and the (2) Crossbracing shall be installed be-
employees. tween the inner and outer sets of poles
(ii) When canopies are used on sus- on double pole scaffolds.
pension scaffolds for falling object pro- (3) Diagonal bracing in both direc-
tection, the scaffold shall be equipped tions shall be installed across the en-
with additional independent support tire inside face of double-pole scaffolds
lines equal in number to the number of used to support loads equivalent to a
points supported, and equivalent in uniformly distributed load of 50 pounds
strength to the strength of the suspen- (222 kg) or more per square foot (929
sion ropes. square cm).
(iii) Independent support lines and (4) Diagonal bracing in both direc-
suspension ropes shall not be attached tions shall be installed across the en-
to the same points of anchorage. tire outside face of all double- and sin-
gle-pole scaffolds.
(4) Where used, toeboards shall be:
(5) Runners and bearers shall be in-
(i) Capable of withstanding, without stalled on edge.
failure, a force of at least 50 pounds (6) Bearers shall extend a minimum
(222 n) applied in any downward or hor- of 3 inches (7.6 cm) over the outside
izontal direction at any point along the edges of runners.
toeboard (toeboards built in accord- (7) Runners shall extend over a min-
ance with Appendix A to this subpart imum of two poles, and shall be sup-
will be deemed to meet this require- ported by bearing blocks securely at-
ment); and tached to the poles.
(ii) At least three and one-half inches (8) Braces, bearers, and runners shall
(9 cm) high from the top edge of the not be spliced between poles.
toeboard to the level of the walking/ (9) Where wooden poles are spliced,
working surface. Toeboards shall be se- the ends shall be squared and the upper
curely fastened in place at the outer- section shall rest squarely on the lower
most edge of the platform and have not section. Wood splice plates shall be
more than 1⁄4 inch (0.7 cm) clearance provided on at least two adjacent sides,
above the walking/working surface. and shall extend at least 2 feet (0.6 m)
Toeboards shall be solid or with open- on either side of the splice, overlap the
ings not over one inch (2.5 cm) in the abutted ends equally, and have at least
greatest dimension. the same cross-sectional areas as the
pole. Splice plates of other materials of
[61 FR 46107, Aug. 30, 1996, as corrected and equivalent strength may be used.
amended at 61 FR 59831, 59832, Nov. 25, 1996] (10) Pole scaffolds over 60 feet in
EFFECTIVE DATE NOTE: At 61 FR 59832, Nov. height shall be designed by a registered
25, 1996, § 1926.451(b)(2)(i) was amended and professional engineer, and shall be con-
certain requirements stayed until Nov. 25, structed and loaded in accordance with
1997, or until further rulemaking has been that design. Non-mandatory Appendix
completed, whichever is later. A to this subpart contains examples of
296
criteria that will enable an employer both the inside and outside posts at
to comply with design and loading re- level heights (when tube and coupler
quirements for pole scaffolds under 60 guardrails and midrails are used on
feet in height. outside posts, they may be used in lieu
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. (1) of outside runners).
When platforms are being moved to the (8) Runners shall be interlocked on
next level, the existing platform shall straight runs to form continuous
be left undisturbed until the new bear- lengths, and shall be coupled to each
ers have been set in place and braced post. The bottom runners and bearers
prior to receiving the new platforms. shall be located as close to the base as
(2) Transverse bracing forming an possible.
‘‘X’’ across the width of the scaffold (9) Couplers shall be of a structural
shall be installed at the scaffold ends metal, such as drop-forged steel, malle-
and at least at every third set of posts able iron, or structural grade alu-
horizontally (measured from only one minum. The use of gray cast iron is
end) and every fourth runner prohibited.
vertically. Bracing shall extend diago- (10) Tube and coupler scaffolds over
nally from the inner or outer posts or 125 feet in height shall be designed by
runners upward to the next outer or a registered professional engineer, and
inner posts or runners. Building ties shall be constructed and loaded in ac-
shall be installed at the bearer levels cordance with such design. Non-manda-
between the transverse bracing and tory Appendix A to this subpart con-
shall conform to the requirements of tains examples of criteria that will en-
§ 1926.451(c)(1). able an employer to comply with de-
(3) On straight run scaffolds, longitu- sign and loading requirements for tube
dinal bracing across the inner and and coupler scaffolds under 125 feet in
outer rows of posts shall be installed height.
diagonally in both directions, and shall (c) Fabricated frame scaffolds (tubular
extend from the base of the end posts welded frame scaffolds). (1) When mov-
upward to the top of the scaffold at ap- ing platforms to the next level, the ex-
proximately a 45 degree angle. On scaf- isting platform shall be left undis-
folds whose length is greater than their turbed until the new end frames have
height, such bracing shall be repeated been set in place and braced prior to re-
beginning at least at every fifth post. ceiving the new platforms.
On scaffolds whose length is less than (2) Frames and panels shall be braced
their height, such bracing shall be in- by cross, horizontal, or diagonal
stalled from the base of the end posts braces, or combination thereof, which
upward to the opposite end posts, and secure vertical members together lat-
then in alternating directions until erally. The cross braces shall be of such
reaching the top of the scaffold. Brac- length as will automatically square
ing shall be installed as close as pos- and align vertical members so that the
sible to the intersection of the bearer erected scaffold is always plumb, level,
and post or runner and post. and square. All brace connections shall
(4) Where conditions preclude the at- be secured.
tachment of bracing to posts, bracing (3) Frames and panels shall be joined
shall be attached to the runners as together vertically by coupling or
close to the post as possible. stacking pins or equivalent means.
(5) Bearers shall be installed trans- (4) Where uplift can occur which
versely between posts, and when cou- would displace scaffold end frames or
pled to the posts, shall have the in- panels, the frames or panels shall be
board coupler bear directly on the run- locked together vertically by pins or
ner coupler. When the bearers are cou- equivalent means.
pled to the runners, the couplers shall (5) Brackets used to support canti-
be as close to the posts as possible. levered loads shall:
(6) Bearers shall extend beyond the (i) Be seated with side-brackets par-
posts and runners, and shall provide allel to the frames and end-brackets at
full contact with the coupler. 90 degrees to the frames;
(7) Runners shall be installed along (ii) Not be bent or twisted from these
the length of the scaffold, located on positions; and
297
(iii) Be used only to support perform wales either bolted to the form or
sonnel, unless the scaffold has been de- secured by snap ties or tie bolts ex-
signed for other loads by a qualified en- tending through the form and securely
gineer and built to withstand the tip- anchored; or, for carpenters’ bracket
ping forces caused by those other loads scaffolds only, by a bolt extending
being placed on the bracket-supported through to the opposite side of the
section of the scaffold. structure’s wall.
(6) Scaffolds over 125 feet (38.0 m) in (2) Wooden bracket-form scaffolds
height above their base plates shall be shall be an integral part of the form
designed by a registered professional panel.
engineer, and shall be constructed and (3) Folding type metal brackets,
loaded in accordance with such design. when extended for use, shall be either
(d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large bolted or secured with a locking-type
area scaffolds. Scaffolds shall be con- pin.
structed in accordance with paragraphs
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (1) Scaffold
(a), (b), or (c) of this section, as appro-
brackets shall be constructed to fit the
priate.
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds pitch of the roof and shall provide a
(squares). (1) Scaffolds made of wood level support for the platform.
shall be reinforced with gussets on (2) Brackets (including those pro-
both sides of each corner. vided with pointed metal projections)
(2) Diagonal braces shall be installed shall be anchored in place by nails un-
on all sides of each square. less it is impractical to use nails. When
(3) Diagonal braces shall be installed nails are not used, brackets shall be se-
between squares on the rear and front cured in place with first-grade manila
sides of the scaffold, and shall extend rope of at least three-fourth inch (1.9
from the bottom of each square to the cm) diameter, or equivalent.
top of the next square. (i) Outrigger scaffolds. (1) The inboard
(4) Scaffolds shall not exceed three end of outrigger beams, measured from
tiers in height, and shall be so con- the fulcrum point to the extreme point
structed and arranged that one square of anchorage, shall be not less than one
rests directly above the other. The and one-half times the outboard end in
upper tiers shall stand on a continuous length.
row of planks laid across the next (2) Outrigger beams fabricated in the
lower tier, and shall be nailed down or shape of an I-beam or channel shall be
otherwise secured to prevent displace- placed so that the web section is
ment. vertical.
(f) Horse scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall (3) The fulcrum point of outrigger
not be constructed or arranged more beams shall rest on secure bearings at
than two tiers or 10 feet (3.0 m) in least 6 inches (15.2 cm) in each hori-
height, whichever is less. zontal dimension.
(2) When horses are arranged in tiers, (4) Outrigger beams shall be secured
each horse shall be placed directly over
in place against movement, and shall
the horse in the tier below.
be securely braced at the fulcrum point
(3) When horses are arranged in tiers,
against tipping.
the legs of each horse shall be nailed
down or otherwise secured to prevent (5) The inboard ends of outrigger
displacement. beams shall be securely anchored ei-
(4) When horses are arranged in tiers, ther by means of braced struts bearing
each tier shall be crossbraced. against sills in contact with the over-
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ head beams or ceiling, or by means of
bracket scaffolds. (1) Each bracket, extension members secured to the floor
cept those for wooden bracket-form joists underfoot, or by both.
scaffolds, shall be attached to the sup- (6) The entire supporting structure
porting formwork or structure by shall be securely braced to prevent any
means of one or more of the following: horizontal movement.

nails; a metal stud attachment device; (7) To prevent their displacement,
welding; hooking over a secured struc- platform units shall be nailed, bolted,
tural supporting member, with the or otherwise secured to outriggers.
298
(8) Scaffolds and scaffold components (4) Ladders used to support ladder
shall be designed by a registered pro- jacks shall be placed, fastened, or
fessional engineer and shall be con- equipped with devices to prevent slip-
structed and loaded in accordance with ping.
such design. (5) Scaffold platforms shall not be
(j) Pump jack scaffolds. (1) Pump jack bridged one to another.
brackets, braces, and accessories shall (l) Window jack scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds
be fabricated from metal plates and an- shall be securely attached to the win-
gles. Each pump jack bracket shall dow opening.
have two positive gripping mechanisms (2) Scaffolds shall be used only for
to prevent any failure or slippage. the purpose of working at the window
(2) Poles shall be secured to the opening through which the jack is
structure by rigid triangular bracing or placed.
equivalent at the bottom, top, and (3) Window jacks shall not be used to
other points as necessary. When the support planks placed between one win-
pump jack has to pass bracing already dow jack and another, or for other ele-
installed, an additional brace shall be ments of scaffolding.
installed approximately 4 feet (1.2 m) (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
above the brace to be passed, and shall (1) Crawling boards shall extend from
be left in place until the pump jack has the roof peak to the eaves when used in
been moved and the original brace re- connection with roof construction, re-
installed. pair, or maintenance.
(3) When guardrails are used for fall (2) Crawling boards shall be secured
protection, a workbench may be used to the roof by ridge hooks or by means
as the toprail only if it meets all the that meet equivalent criteria (e.g.,
requirements in paragraphs (g)(4) (ii), strength and durability).
(vii), (viii), and (xiii) of § 1926.451. (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder
scaffolds. (1) Scaffold platforms shall
(4) Work benches shall not be used as
not be placed any higher than the sec-
scaffold platforms.
ond highest rung or step of the ladder
(5) When poles are made of wood, the supporting the platform.
pole lumber shall be straight-grained, (2) All ladders used in conjunction
free of shakes, large loose or dead with step, platform and trestle ladder
knots, and other defects which might scaffolds shall meet the pertinent re-
impair strength. quirements of subpart X of this part—
(6) When wood poles are constructed Stairways and Ladders, except that
of two continuous lengths, they shall job-made ladders shall not be used to
be joined together with the seam par- support such scaffolds.
allel to the bracket. (3) Ladders used to support step, plat-
(7) When two by fours are spliced to form, and trestle ladder scaffolds shall
make a pole, mending plates shall be be placed, fastened, or equipped with
installed at all splices to develop the devices to prevent slipping.
full strength of the member. (4) Scaffolds shall not be bridged one
(k) Ladder jack scaffolds. (1) Platforms to another.
shall not exceed a height of 20 feet (6.1 (o) Single-point adjustable suspension
m). scaffolds. (1) When two single-point ad-
(2) All ladders used to support ladder justable suspension scaffolds are com-
jack scaffolds shall meet the require- bined to form a two-point adjustable
ments of subpart X of this part—Stair- suspension scaffold, the resulting two-
ways and Ladders, except that job- point scaffold shall comply with the re-
made ladders shall not be used to sup- quirements for two-point adjustable
port ladder jack scaffolds. suspension scaffolds in paragraph (p) of
(3) The ladder jack shall be so de- this section.
signed and constructed that it will bear (2) The supporting rope between the
on the side rails and ladder rungs or on scaffold and the suspension device shall
the ladder rungs alone. If bearing on be kept vertical unless all of the fol-
rungs only, the bearing area shall in- lowing conditions are met:
clude a length of at least 10 inches (25.4 (i) The rigging has been designed by a
cm) on each rung. qualified person, and
299
(ii) The scaffold is accessible to res- of all blocks shall fit the size of the
cuers, and rope used.
(iii) The supporting rope is protected (4) Platforms shall be of the ladder-
to ensure that it will not chafe at any type, plank-type, beam-type, or light-
point where a change in direction oc- metal type. Light metal-type plat-
curs, and forms having a rated capacity of 750
(iv) The scaffold is positioned so that pounds or less and platforms 40 feet
swinging cannot bring the scaffold into (12.2 m) or less in length shall be tested
contact with another surface. and listed by a nationally recognized
(3) Boatswains’ chair tackle shall testing laboratory.
consist of correct size ball bearings or (5) Two-point scaffolds shall not be
bushed blocks containing safety hooks bridged or otherwise connected one to
and properly ‘‘eye-spliced’’ minimum another during raising and lowering
five-eighth (5⁄8) inch (1.6 cm) diameter operations unless the bridge connec-
first-grade manila rope, or other rope tions are articulated (attached), and
which will satisfy the criteria (e.g., the hoists properly sized.
strength and durability) of manila (6) Passage may be made from one
rope. platform to another only when the
(4) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall platforms are at the same height, are
be reeved through four corner holes in abutting, and walk-through stirrups
the seat; shall cross each other on the specifically designed for this purpose
underside of the seat; and shall be are used.
rigged so as to prevent slippage which
(q) Multi-point adjustable suspension
could cause an out-of-level condition.
scaffolds, stonesetters’ multi-point adjust-
(5) Boatswains’ chair seat slings shall
able suspension scaffolds, and masons’
be a minimum of five-eight (5⁄8) inch
multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
(1.6 cm) diameter fiber, synthetic, or
folds. (1) When two or more scaffolds
other rope which will satisfy the cri-
are used they shall not be bridged one
teria (e.g., strength, slip resistance, du-
to another unless they are designed to
rability, etc.) of first grade manila
be bridged, the bridge connections are
rope.
articulated, and the hoists are properly
(6) When a heat-producing process
sized.
such as gas or arc welding is being con-
ducted, boatswains’ chair seat slings (2) If bridges are not used, passage
shall be a minimum of three-eight (3⁄8) may be made from one platform to an-
inch (1.0 cm) wire rope. other only when the platforms are at
(7) Non-cross-laminated wood boat- the same height and are abutting.
swains’ chairs shall be reinforced on (3) Scaffolds shall be suspended from
their underside by cleats securely fas- metal outriggers, brackets, wire rope
tened to prevent the board from split- slings, hooks, or means that meet
ting. equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du-
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension rability).
scaffolds (swing stages). The following (r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) No more
requirements do not apply to two-point than one platform shall be placed be-
adjustable suspension scaffolds used as tween consecutive vertical pickups,
masons’ or stonesetters’ scaffolds. and no more than two platforms shall
Such scaffolds are covered by para- be used on a catenary scaffold.
graph (q) of this section. (2) Platforms supported by wire ropes
(1) Platforms shall not be more than shall have hook-shaped stops on each
36 inches (0.9 m) wide unless designed end of the platforms to prevent them
by a qualified person to prevent unsta- from slipping off the wire ropes. These
ble conditions. hooks shall be so placed that they will
(2) The platform shall be securely fas- prevent the platform from falling if
tened to hangers (stirrups) by U-bolts one of the horizontal wire ropes breaks.
or by other means which satisfy the re- (3) Wire ropes shall not be tightened
quirements of § 1926.451(a). to the extent that the application of a

(3) The blocks for fiber or synthetic scaffold load will overstress them.
ropes shall consist of at least one dou- (4) Wire ropes shall be continuous
ble and one single block. The sheaves and without splices between anchors.
300
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) The plat- support the scaffold in the event the
form shall be supported by a minimum suspension rope(s) fail.
of two bearers, each of which shall (2) Independent support lines and sus-
project a minimum of 6 inches (15.2 cm) pension ropes shall not be attached to
beyond the platform on both sides. the same points of anchorage.
Each bearer shall be securely fastened (3) Supports for platforms shall be at-
to the platform. tached directly to the support stirrup
(2) Rope connections shall be such and not to any other platform.
that the platform cannot shift or slip. (w) Mobile scaffolds. (1) Scaffolds shall
(3) When only two ropes are used be braced by cross, horizontal, or di-
with each float: agonal braces, or combination thereof,
(i) They shall be arranged so as to to prevent racking or collapse of the
provide four ends which are securely scaffold and to secure vertical mem-
fastened to overhead supports. bers together laterally so as to auto-
(ii) Each supporting rope shall be matically square and align the vertical
hitched around one end of the bearer members. Scaffolds shall be plumb,
and pass under the platform to the level, and squared. All brace connec-
other end of the bearer where it is tions shall be secured.
hitched again, leaving sufficient rope (i) Scaffolds constructed of tube and
at each end for the supporting ties. coupler components shall also comply
(t) Interior hung scaffolds. (1) Scaf- with the requirements of paragraph (b)
folds shall be suspended only from the of this section;
roof structure or other structural (ii) Scaffolds constructed of fab-
member such as ceiling beams. ricated frame components shall also
(2) Overhead supporting members comply with the requirements of para-
(roof structure, ceiling beams, or other graph (c) of this section.
structural members) shall be inspected (2) Scaffold casters and wheels shall
and checked for strength before the be locked with positive wheel and/or
scaffold is erected. wheel and swivel locks, or equivalent
(3) Suspension ropes and cables shall means, to prevent movement of the
be connected to the overhead sup- scaffold while the scaffold is used in a
porting members by shackles, clips, stationary manner.
thimbles, or other means that meet (3) Manual force used to move the
equivalent criteria (e.g., strength, du- scaffold shall be applied as close to the
rability). base as practicable, but not more than
(u) Needle beam scaffolds. (1) Scaffold 5 feet (1.5 m) above the supporting sur-
support beams shall be installed on face.
edge. (4) Power systems used to propel mo-
(2) Ropes or hangers shall be used for bile scaffolds shall be designed for such
supports, except that one end of a nee- use. Forklifts, trucks, similar motor
dle beam scaffold may be supported by vehicles or add-on motors shall not be
a permanent structural member. used to propel scaffolds unless the scaf-
(3) The ropes shall be securely at- fold is designed for such propulsion sys-
tached to the needle beams. tems.
(4) The support connection shall be (5) Scaffolds shall be stabilized to
arranged so as to prevent the needle prevent tipping during movement.
beam from rolling or becoming dis- (6) Employees shall not be allowed to
placed. ride on scaffolds unless the following
(5) Platform units shall be securely conditions exist:
attached to the needle beams by bolts (i) The surface on which the scaffold
or equivalent means. Cleats and over- is being moved is within 3 degrees of
hang are not considered to be adequate level, and free of pits, holes, and ob-
means of attachment. structions;
(v) Multi-level suspended scaffolds. (1) (ii) The height to base width ratio of
Scaffolds shall be equipped with addi- the scaffold during movement is two to
tional independent support lines, equal one or less, unless the scaffold is de-
in number to the number of points sup- signed and constructed to meet or ex-
ported, and of equivalent strength to ceed nationally recognized stability
the suspension ropes, and rigged to test requirements such as those listed
301
in paragraph (x) of Appendix A to this protected from damage due to contact

subpart (ANSI/SIA A92.5 and A92.6); with edges, corners, protrusions, or
(iii) Outrigger frames, when used, are other discontinuities of the supporting
installed on both sides of the scaffold; structure or scaffold components.
(iv) When power systems are used, (7) Tensioning of each wire rope used
the propelling force is applied directly for securing brackets in place or as an
to the wheels, and does not produce a anchorage for personal fall arrest sys-
speed in excess of 1 foot per second (.3 tems shall be by means of a turnbuckle
mps); and at least 1 inch (2.54 cm) in diameter, or
(v) No employee is on any part of the by equivalent means.
scaffold which extends outward beyond (8) Each turnbuckle shall be con-
the wheels, casters, or other supports. nected to the other end of its rope by
(7) Platforms shall not extend out- use of an eyesplice thimble of a size ap-
ward beyond the base supports of the propriate to the turnbuckle to which it
scaffold unless outrigger frames or is attached.
equivalent devices are used to ensure (9) U-bolt wire rope clips shall not be
stability. used on any wire rope used to secure
(8) Where leveling of the scaffold is brackets or to serve as an anchor for
necessary, screw jacks or equivalent personal fall arrest systems.
means shall be used. (10) The employer shall ensure that
(9) Caster stems and wheel stems materials shall not be dropped to the
shall be pinned or otherwise secured in outside of the supporting structure.
scaffold legs or adjustment screws. (11) Scaffold erection shall progress
(10) Before a scaffold is moved, each in only one direction around any struc-
employee on the scaffold shall be made ture.
aware of the move. (y) Stilts. Stilts, when used, shall be
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds. (1) Brack- used in accordance with the following
ets shall be secured in place by at least requirements:
one wire rope at least 1⁄2 inch (1.27 cm) (1) An employee may wear stilts on a
in diameter. scaffold only if it is a large area scaf-
(2) Each bracket shall be attached to fold.
the securing wire rope (or ropes) by a (2) When an employee is using stilts
positive locking device capable of pre- on a large area scaffold where a guard-
venting the unintentional detachment rail system is used to provide fall pro-
of the bracket from the rope, or by tection, the guardrail system shall be
equivalent means. increased in height by an amount equal
(3) Each bracket, at the contact point to the height of the stilts being used by
between the supporting structure and the employee.
the bottom of the bracket, shall be pro- (3) Surfaces on which stilts are used
vided with a shoe (heel block or foot) shall be flat and free of pits, holes and
capable of preventing the lateral move- obstructions, such as debris, as well as
ment of the bracket. other tripping and falling hazards.
(4) Platforms shall be secured to the (4) Stilts shall be properly main-
brackets in a manner that will prevent tained. Any alteration of the original
the separation of the platforms from equipment shall be approved by the
the brackets and the movement of the manufacturer.
platforms or the brackets on a com-
pleted scaffold. § 1926.453 Aerial lifts.
(5) When a wire rope is placed around (a) General requirements. (1) Unless
the structure in order to provide a safe otherwise provided in this section, aer-
anchorage for personal fall arrest sys- ial lifts acquired for use on or after
tems used by employees erecting or January 22, 1973 shall be designed and
dismantling scaffolds, the wire rope constructed in conformance with the
shall meet the requirements of subpart applicable requirements of the Amer-
M of this part, but shall be at least 5⁄16 ican National Standards for ‘‘Vehicle
inch (0.8 cm) in diameter. Mounted Elevating and Rotating Work

(6) Each wire rope used for securing Platforms,’’ ANSI A92.2–1969, including
brackets in place or as an anchorage appendix. Aerial lifts acquired before
for personal fall arrest systems shall be January 22, 1973 which do not meet the
302
requirements of ANSI A92.2–1969, may NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b)(2)(v): As of Janu-

not be used after January 1, 1976, un- ary 1, 1998, subpart M of this part
less they shall have been modified so as (§ 1926.502(d)) provides that body belts are not
to conform with the applicable design acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest
system. The use of a body belt in a tethering
and construction requirements of ANSI system or in a restraint system is acceptable
A92.2–1969. Aerial lifts include the fol- and is regulated under § 1926.502(e).
lowing types of vehicle-mounted aerial
devices used to elevate personnel to (vi) Boom and basket load limits
job-sites above ground: specified by the manufacturer shall not
(i) Extensible boom platforms; be exceeded.
(ii) Aerial ladders; (vii) The brakes shall be set and when
(iii) Articulating boom platforms; outriggers are used, they shall be posi-
(iv) Vertical towers; and tioned on pads or a solid surface. Wheel
(v) A combination of any such de- chocks shall be installed before using
vices. Aerial equipment may be made an aerial lift on an incline, provided
of metal, wood, fiberglass reinforced they can be safely installed.
plastic (FRP), or other material; may (viii) An aerial lift truck shall not be
be powered or manually operated; and moved when the boom is elevated in a
are deemed to be aerial lifts whether or working position with men in the bas-
not they are capable of rotating about ket, except for equipment which is spe-
a substantially vertical axis. cifically designed for this type of oper-
(2) Aerial lifts may be ‘‘field modi- ation in accordance with the provisions
fied’’ for uses other than those in- of paragraphs (a) (1) and (2) of this sec-
tended by the manufacturer provided tion.
the modification has been certified in (ix) Articulating boom and extensible
writing by the manufacturer or by any boom platforms, primarily designed as
other equivalent entity, such as a na- personnel carriers, shall have both
tionally recognized testing laboratory, platform (upper) and lower controls.
to be in conformity with all applicable Upper controls shall be in or beside the
provisions of ANSI A92.2–1969 and this platform within easy reach of the oper-
section and to be at least as safe as the ator. Lower controls shall provide for
equipment was before modification. overriding the upper controls. Controls
(b) Specific requirements—(1) Ladder shall be plainly marked as to their
trucks and tower trucks. Aerial ladders function. Lower level controls shall not
shall be secured in the lower traveling be operated unless permission has been
position by the locking device on top of obtained from the employee in the lift,
the truck cab, and the manually oper-
except in case of emergency.
ated device at the base of the ladder be-
(x) Climbers shall not be worn while
fore the truck is moved for highway
performing work from an aerial lift.
travel.
(2) Extensible and articulating boom (xi) The insulated portion of an aerial
platforms. (i) Lift controls shall be test- lift shall not be altered in any manner
ed each day prior to use to determine that might reduce its insulating value.
that such controls are in safe working (xii) Before moving an aerial lift for
condition. travel, the boom(s) shall be inspected
(ii) Only authorized persons shall op- to see that it is properly cradled and
erate an aerial lift. outriggers are in stowed position ex-
(iii) Belting off to an adjacent pole, cept as provided in paragraph
structure, or equipment while working (b)(2)(viii) of this section.
from an aerial lift shall not be per- (3) Electrical tests. All electrical tests
mitted. shall conform to the requirements of
(iv) Employees shall always stand ANSI A92.2–1969 section 5. However
firmly on the floor of the basket, and equivalent d.c.; voltage tests may be
shall not sit or climb on the edge of the used in lieu of the a.c. voltage specified
basket or use planks, ladders, or other in A92.2–1969; d.c. voltage tests which
devices for a work position. are approved by the equipment manu-

(v) A body belt shall be worn and a facturer or equivalent entity shall be
lanyard attached to the boom or bas- considered an equivalent test for the
ket when working from an aerial lift. purpose of this paragraph (b)(3).
303
(4) Bursting safety factor. The provi- the procedures to control or minimize
sions of the American National Stand- those hazards. The training shall in-
ards Institute standard ANSI A92.2– clude the following areas, as applica-
1969, section 4.9 Bursting Safety Factor ble:
shall apply to all critical hydraulic and (1) The nature of any electrical haz-
pneumatic components. Critical com- ards, fall hazards and falling object
ponents are those in which a failure hazards in the work area;
would result in a free fall or free rota- (2) The correct procedures for dealing
tion of the boom. All noncritical com- with electrical hazards and for erect-
ponents shall have a bursting safety ing, maintaining, and disassembling
factor of at least 2 to 1.
the fall protection systems and falling
(5) Welding standards. All welding
object protection systems being used;
shall conform to the following stand-
ards as applicable: (3) The proper use of the scaffold, and
(i) Standard Qualification Procedure, the proper handling of materials on the
AWS B3.0–41. scaffold;
(ii) Recommended Practices for (4) The maximum intended load and
Automotive Welding Design, AWS the load-carrying capacities of the
D8.4–61. scaffolds used; and
(iii) Standard Qualification of Weld- (5) Any other pertinent requirements
ing Procedures and Welders for Piping of this subpart.
and Tubing, AWS D10.9–69. (b) The employer shall have each em-
(iv) Specifications for Welding High- ployee who is involved in erecting, dis-
way and Railway Bridges, AWS D2.0–69. assembling, moving, operating, repair-
NOTE TO § 1926.453: Non-mandatory Appen- ing, maintaining, or inspecting a scaf-
dix C to this subpart lists examples of na- fold trained by a competent person to
tional consensus standards that are consid- recognize any hazards associated with
ered to provide employee protection equiva- the work in question. The training
lent to that provided through the application shall include the following topics, as
of ANSI A92.2–1969, where appropriate. This applicable:
incorporation by reference was approved by
the Director of the Federal Register in ac- (1) The nature of scaffold hazards;
cordance with 5 U.S.C. 552(a) and 1 CFR part (2) The correct procedures for erect-
51. Copies may be obtained from the Amer- ing, disassembling, moving, operating,
ican National Standards Institute. Copies repairing, inspecting, and maintaining
may be inspected at the Docket Office, Occu- the type of scaffold in question;
pational Safety and Health Administration,
U.S. Department of Labor, 200 Constitution
(3) The design criteria, maximum in-
Avenue, NW., room N2634, Washington, DC or tended load-carrying capacity and in-
at the National Archives and Records Ad- tended use of the scaffold;
ministration (NARA). For information on (4) Any other pertinent requirements
the availability of this material at NARA, of this subpart.
call 202–741–6030, or go to: http://
(c) When the employer has reason to
www.archives.gov/federallregister/
codeloflfederallregulations/ believe that an employee lacks the
ibrllocations.html. skill or understanding needed for safe
work involving the erection, use or dis-
[61 FR 46116, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov.
25, 1996, as amended at 69 FR 18803, Apr. 9, mantling of scaffolds, the employer
2004] shall retrain each such employee so
that the requisite proficiency is re-
§ 1926.454 Training requirements. gained. Retraining is required in at
This section supplements and clari- least the following situations:
fies the requirements of § 1926.21(b)(2) (1) Where changes at the worksite
as these relate to the hazards of work present a hazard about which an em-
on scaffolds. ployee has not been previously trained;
(a) The employer shall have each em- or
ployee who performs work while on a (2) Where changes in the types of
scaffold trained by a person qualified scaffolds, fall protection, falling object

in the subject matter to recognize the protection, or other equipment present
hazards associated with the type of a hazard about which an employee has
scaffold being used and to understand not been previously trained; or
304
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A
(3) Where inadequacies in an affected (r) Catenary scaffolds.

employee’s work involving scaffolds in- (s) Float (ship) scaffolds.
dicate that the employee has not re- (t) Interior hung scaffolds.
tained the requisite proficiency. (u) Needle beam scaffolds.
(v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds.
NON-MANDATORY APPENDICES (w) Mobile scaffolds.
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds.
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX A TO SUB- (y) Stilts.
PART L OF PART 1926—SCAFFOLD (z) Tank builders’ scaffolds.
SPECIFICATIONS 1. GENERAL GUIDELINES AND TABLES
This Appendix provides non-mandatory (a) The following tables, and the tables in
guidelines to assist employers in complying Part 2—Specific guidelines and tables, as-
with the requirements of subpart L of this sume that all load-carrying timber members
part. An employer may use these guidelines (except planks) of the scaffold are a min-
and tables as a starting point for designing imum of 1,500 lb-f/in2 (stress grade) construc-
scaffold systems. However, the guidelines do tion grade lumber. All dimensions are nomi-
not provide all the information necessary to nal sizes as provided in the American
build a complete system, and the employer is Softwood Lumber Standards, dated January
still responsible for designing and assem- 1970, except that, where rough sizes are
bling these components in such a way that noted, only rough or undressed lumber of the
the completed system will meet the require- size specified will satisfy minimum require-
ments of § 1926.451(a). Scaffold components ments.
which are not selected and loaded in accord- (b) Solid sawn wood used as scaffold planks
ance with this Appendix, and components for shall be selected for such use following the
which no specific guidelines or tables are grading rules established by a recognized
given in this Appendix (e.g., joints, ties, lumber grading association or by an inde-
components for wood pole scaffolds more pendent lumber grading inspection agency.
than 60 feet in height, components for heavy- Such planks shall be identified by the grade
duty horse scaffolds, components made with stamp of such association or agency. The as-
other materials, and components with other sociation or agency and the grading rules
dimensions, etc.) must be designed and con- under which the wood is graded shall be cer-
structed in accordance with the capacity re- tified by the Board of Review, American
quirements of § 1926.451(a), and loaded in ac- Lumber Standard Committee, as set forth in
cordance with § 1926.451(d)(1). the American Softwood Lumber Standard of
the U.S. Department of Commerce.
Index to Appendix A for Subpart L (i) Allowable spans shall be determined in
1. General guidelines and tables. compliance with the National Design Speci-
2. Specific guidelines and tables. fication for Wood Construction published by
(a) Pole scaffolds: the National Forest Products Association;
Single-pole wood pole scaffolds. paragraph 5 of ANSI A10.8–1988 Scaffolding-
Independent wood pole scaffolds. Safety Requirements published by the Amer-
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds. ican National Standards Institute; or for 2×10
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. inch (nominal) or 2×9 inch (rough) solid sawn
(d) Plasterers’, decorators’ and large area wood planks, as shown in the following table:
scaffolds.
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. Maximum per- Maximum per-
missible span
(f) Horse scaffolds. Maximum intended nominal using full thick- missible span
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket using nominal
load ness un- thickness
scaffolds. (lb/ft2) dressed lumber
lumber
(h) Roof bracket scaffolds. (ft) (ft)
(i) Outrigger scaffolds (one level).
(j) Pump jack scaffolds. 25 ....................................... 10 8
(k) Ladder jack scaffolds. 50 ....................................... 8 6
(l) Window jack scaffolds. 75 ....................................... 6
(m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
(n) Step, platform and trestle ladder scaf- (ii) The maximum permissible span for 11⁄4
folds. × 9-inch or wider wood plank of full thick-
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf- ness with a maximum intended load of 50 lb/
folds. ft.2 shall be 4 feet.
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaf- (c) Fabricated planks and platforms may
folds. be used in lieu of solid sawn wood planks.

(q)(1) Stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable Maximum spans for such units shall be as
suspension scaffolds. recommended by the manufacturer based on
(2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspen- the maximum intended load being calculated
sion scaffolds. as follows:
305
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
Rated load Intended load

capacity
Light-duty ................... • 25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Medium-duty .............. • 50 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
Heavy-duty ................. • 75 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
One-person ................ • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span (total 250 pounds).
Two-person ................ • 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span (total 500 pounds).
Three-person ............. • 250 pounds placed at the center of the span and 250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of
the center of the span (total 750 pounds).
NOTE: Platform units used to make scaf- 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch structural angle iron; or
fold platforms intended for light-duty use 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
shall be capable of supporting at least 25 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub-
pounds per square foot applied uniformly ing.
over the entire unit-span area, or a 250-pound (iv) Posts shall be equivalent in strength
point load placed on the unit at the center of to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or
the span, whichever load produces the great- 11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 structural angle
er shear force. iron; or
(d) Guardrails shall be as follows: 1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or
(i) Toprails shall be equivalent in strength 1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub-
to 2 inch by 4 inch lumber; or ing.
11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle iron; or
(v) Distance between posts shall not exceed
1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or 1.990
8 feet.
inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tubing.
(e) Overhead protection shall consist of 2
(ii) Midrails shall be equivalent in strength
inch nominal planking laid tight, or 3⁄4-inch
to 1 inch by 6 inch lumber; or
plywood.
11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural
angle iron; or (f) Screen installed between toeboards and
1 inch × .070 inch wall steel tubing; or midrails or toprails shall consist of No. 18
1.990 inch × .058 inch wall aluminum tub- gauge U.S. Standard wire one inch mesh.
ing.
2. SPECIFIC GUIDELINES AND TABLES.
(iii) Toeboards shall be equivalent in
strength to 1 inch by 4 inch lumber; or (a) Pole Scaffolds.
SINGLE POLE WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Light duty up to Light duty up to Medium duty up to Heavy duty up to
20 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high 60 feet high
Maximum intended load (lbs/ft 2) ................... 25 ......................... 25 ......................... 50 ......................... 75

Poles or uprights ........................................... 2×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×6 in.
Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ............ 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 6 feet
Maximum pole spacing (transverse) ............. 5 feet ................... 5 feet ................... 5 feet ................... 5 feet
Runners ......................................................... 1×4 in ................... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers:
3 feet ............................................... 2×4 in ................... 2×4 in ................... 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in.
5 feet ............................................... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×6 in. or 3×4 in. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in.
(rough).
6 feet ............................................... .............................. .............................. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in 2×10 in. or 3×5 in.
8 feet ............................................... .............................. .............................. 2×10 in. or 3×4 in
Planking ......................................................... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ................... 9 feet ................... 7 feet ................... 6 ft. 6 in.
members.
Bracing horizontal .......................................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×6 in. or 11⁄4×4 in 2×4 in.
Bracing diagonal ............................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 2×4 in.
Tie-ins ............................................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in.
NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3⁄16×2 inch steel strip, or the
equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
INDEPENDENT WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS

Maximum intended load ................................ 25 lbs/ft2 .............. 25 lbs/ft2 .............. 50 lbs/ft2 .............. 75 lbs/ft2.
Poles or uprights ........................................... 2×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×4 in ................... 4×4 in.
Maximum pole spacing (longitudinal) ............ 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 6 feet.
Maximum (transverse) ................................... 6 feet ................... 10 feet ................. 8 feet ................... 8 feet.
Runners ......................................................... 11⁄4×4 in ............... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers:
306
INDEPENDENT WOOD POLE SCAFFOLDS—Continued

3 feet ............................................... 2×4 in ................... 2×4 in ................... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in. (rough).
6 feet ............................................... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in. (rough).
3×8 in.
8 feet ............................................... 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or 2×10 in .................
3×8 in.
10 feet ............................................. 2×6 in. or 3×4 in .. 2×10 in. (rough) or ..............................
3×3 in.
Planking ......................................................... 11⁄4×9 in ............... 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in ................. 2×10 in.
Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal 7 feet ................... 7 feet ................... 6 feet ................... 6 feet.
members.
Bracing horizontal .......................................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×6 in. or 11⁄4×4 in 2×4 in.
Bracing diagonal ............................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 2×4 in.
Tie-ins ............................................................ 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in ................... 1×4 in.
NOTE: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3⁄16×2 inch steel strip, or the
equivalent, secured to the lower edges for the entire length of the bearer.
(b) Tube and coupler scaffolds.
MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS

Light duty Medium duty Heavy duty
Maximum intended load .......... 25 lbs/ft2

................................. 50 lbs/ft2................................. 75 lbs/ft2.
Posts, runners and braces ...... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches)
OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe. OD steel tube or pipe.
Bearers .................................... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches) .... Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).
OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a OD steel tube or pipe and a
maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 4 maximum post spacing of 6
ft.×10 ft.. ft.×7 ft. or. ft.×6 ft.
Nominal 21⁄2 in. (2.375 in.).
OD steel tube or pipe and a
maximum post spacing of 6
ft.×8 ft.*.
Maximum runner spacing 6 ft. 6 in .................................. 6 ft. 6 in .................................. 6 ft. 6 in.
vertically.
* Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension.
NOTE: Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45° (±5°).
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF PLANKED LEVELS

Maximum number of addi-
tional planked levels Maximum
height of
Me- scaffold
Light Heavy
dium (in feet)
duty duty
duty
Number of Working Levels:

1 ...................................................................................................................... 16 11 6 125
2 ...................................................................................................................... 11 1 0 125
3 ...................................................................................................................... 6 0 0 125
4 ...................................................................................................................... 1 0 0 125
(c) Fabricated frame scaffolds. Because of Maximum intended load: 50 lb/ft.2*

their prefabricated nature, no additional Maximum width: 5 ft.
guidelines or tables for these scaffolds are Maximum height: 5 ft.
being adopted in this Appendix. Gussets: 1 × 6 in.
(d) Plasterers’, decorators’, and large area Braces: 1 × 8 in.
scaffolds. The guidelines for pole scaffolds or Legs: 2 × 6 in.
tube and coupler scaffolds (Appendix A (a)
and (b)) may be applied. * The squares shall be set not more than 8
(e) Bricklayers’ square scaffolds. feet apart for light duty scaffolds and not
more than 5 feet apart for medium duty scaf-
folds.
307
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
Bearers (horizontal members): 2 × 6 in. (h) Roof bracket scaffolds. No specific guide-
(f) Horse scaffolds. lines or tables are given.
Maximum intended load (light duty): 25 lb/ (i) Outrigger scaffolds (single level). No spe-
ft.2 ** cific guidelines or tables are given.
Maximum intended load (medium duty): 50 (j) Pump jack scaffolds. Wood poles shall not
lb/ft.2 ** exceed 30 feet in height. Maximum intended
Horizontal members or bearers: load—500 lbs between poles; applied at the
Light duty: 2 × 4 in. center of the span. Not more than two em-
Medium duty: 3 × 4 in. ployees shall be on a pump jack scaffold at
Legs: 2 × 4 in. one time between any two supports. When 2
Longitudinal brace between legs: 1 × 6 in. × 4’s are spliced together to make a 4 × 4 inch
Gusset brace at top of legs: 1 × 8 in. wood pole, they shall be spliced with ‘‘10
Half diagonal braces: 2 × 4 in. penny’’ common nails no more than 12 inches
(g) Form scaffolds and carpenters’ bracket center to center, staggered uniformly from
scaffolds. the opposite outside edges.
(1) Brackets shall consist of a triangular- (k) Ladder jack scaffolds. Maximum in-
shaped frame made of wood with a cross-sec- tended load—25 lb/ft2. However, not more
tion not less than 2 inches by 3 inches, or of than two employees shall occupy any plat-
11⁄4 inch × 11⁄4 inch × 1⁄8 inch structural angle form at any one time. Maximum span be-
iron. tween supports shall be 8 feet.
(2) Bolts used to attach brackets to struc- (l) Window jack scaffolds. Not more than
tures shall not be less than 5⁄8 inches in di- one employee shall occupy a window jack
ameter. scaffold at any one time.
(3) Maximum bracket spacing shall be 8 (m) Crawling boards (chicken ladders).
feet on centers. Crawling boards shall be not less than 10
(4) No more than two employees shall oc- inches wide and 1 inch thick, with cleats
cupy any given 8 feet of a bracket or form having a minimum 1 × 11⁄2 inch cross-sec-
scaffold at any one time. Tools and materials tional area. The cleats shall be equal in
shall not exceed 75 pounds in addition to the length to the width of the board and spaced
occupancy. at equal intervals not to exceed 24 inches.
(5) Wooden figure-four scaffolds: (n) Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaf-
folds. No additional guidelines or tables are
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 given.
Uprights: 2 × 4 in. or 2 × 6 in.
(o) Single-point adjustable suspension scaf-
Bearers (two): 1 × 6 in.
folds. Maximum intended load—250 lbs. Wood
Braces: 1 × 6 in.
seats for boatswains’ chairs shall be not less
Maximum length of bearers (unsupported): 3 than 1 inch thick if made of non-laminated
ft. 6 in. wood, or 5⁄8 inches thick if made of marine
(i) Outrigger bearers shall consist of two quality plywood.
pieces of 1 × 6 inch lumber nailed on opposite
(p) Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds.
sides of the vertical support.
(1) In addition to direct connections to build-
(ii) Bearers for wood figure-four brackets
ings (except window cleaners’ anchors) ac-
shall project not more than 3 feet 6 inches
ceptable ways to prevent scaffold sway in-
from the outside of the form support, and
clude angulated roping and static lines. An-
shall be braced and secured to prevent tip-
gulated roping is a system of platform sus-
ping or turning. The knee or angle brace
pension in which the upper wire rope sheaves
shall intersect the bearer at least 3 feet from
or suspension points are closer to the plane
the form at an angle of approximately 45 de-
of the building face than the corresponding
grees, and the lower end shall be nailed to a
attachment points on the platform, thus
vertical support.
causing the platform to press against the
(6) Metal bracket scaffolds: face of the building. Static lines are separate
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 ropes secured at their top and bottom ends
Uprights: 2 × 4 inch closer to the plane of the building face than
Bearers: As designed. the outermost edge of the platform. By draw-
Braces: As designed. ing the static line taut, the platform is
(7) Wood bracket scaffolds: drawn against the face of the building.
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2 (2) On suspension scaffolds designed for a
Uprights: 2 × 4 in or 2 × 6 in working load of 500 pounds, no more than
Bearers: 2 × 6 in two employees shall be permitted on the
Maximum scaffold width: 3 ft 6 in scaffold at one time. On suspension scaffolds
Braces: 1 × 6 in with a working load of 750 pounds, no more
than three employees shall be permitted on

the scaffold at one time.
** Horses shall be spaced not more than 8 (3) Ladder-type platforms. The side string-
feet apart for light duty loads, and not more er shall be of clear straight-grained spruce.
than 5 feet apart for medium duty loads. The rungs shall be of straight-grained oak,
308
ash, or hickory, at least 11⁄8 inches in diame- washers on both ends. The flooring strips
ter, with 7⁄8 inch tenons mortised into the shall be spaced not more than 5⁄8 inch apart,
side stringers at least 7⁄8 inch. The stringers except at the side rails where the space may
shall be tied together with tie rods not less be 1 inch. Ladder-type platforms shall be
than 1⁄4 inch in diameter, passing through constructed in accordance with the following
the stringers and riveted up tight against table:
SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of Platform ................................ 12 feet .............. 14 & 16 feet ...... 18 & 20 feet.
Side stringers, minimum cross section
(finished sizes):
At ends .......................................... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 23⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 3 in.
At middle ....................................... 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 33⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 4 in.
Reinforcing strip (minimum) ................. A1⁄8 × 7⁄8 inch steel reinforcing strip shall be attached
to the side or underside, full length.
Rungs ................................................... Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum diameter with at
least 7⁄8 inch in diameter tenons, and the maximum
spacing shall be 12 inches to center.
Tie rods:
Number (minimum) ........................ 3 ....................... 4 ....................... 4
Diameter (minimum) ...................... ⁄ inch ..............
14 ⁄ inch ..............
14 ⁄ inch
14
Flooring, minimum finished size ........... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.
SCHEDULE FOR LADDER-TYPE PLATFORMS
Length of Platform ............................................................... 22 & 24 ft .......... 28 & 30 ft.

Side stringers, minimum cross section (finished sizes):
At ends ......................................................................... 13⁄4×3 in ............ 13⁄4 × 31⁄2 in.
At middle ...................................................................... 13⁄4 × 41⁄4 in ...... 13⁄4 × 5 in.
Reinforcing strip (minimum) ................................................ A1⁄8 × 7⁄8-inch steel reinforcing strip
shall be attached to the side or
underside, full length.
Rungs .................................................................................. Rungs shall be 11⁄8 inch minimum
diameter with at least 7⁄8 inch in
diameter tenons, and the max-
imum spacing shall be 12 inches
to center. Tie rods.
Number (minimum) ....................................................... 5 ....................... 6.
Diameter (minimum) ..................................................... 1⁄4 in .................. 1⁄4 in.
Flooring, minimum finished size .......................................... 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in ........ 1⁄2 × 23⁄4 in.
(4) Plank-Type Platforms. Plank-type plat- flat and set into the upper edge of the string-
forms shall be composed of not less than ers with a snug fit, at intervals of not more
nominal 2 × 8 inch unspliced planks, con- than 4 feet, securely nailed to the cross
nected together on the underside with cleats beams. Floor-boards shall not be spaced
at intervals not exceeding 4 feet, starting 6 more than 1⁄2 inch apart.
inches from each end. A bar or other effec- (q)(1) Multi-point adjustable suspension scaf-
tive means shall be securely fastened to the folds and stonesetters’ multi-point adjustable
platform at each end to prevent the platform suspension scaffolds. No specific guidelines or
from slipping off the hanger. The span be- tables are given for these scaffolds.
tween hangers for plank-type platforms shall (2) Masons’ multi-point adjustable suspension
not exceed 10 feet. scaffolds. Maximum intended load—50 lb/ft2.
(5) Beam-Type Platforms. Beam platforms Each outrigger beam shall be at least a
shall have side stringers of lumber not less standard 7 inch, 15.3 pound steel I-beam, at
than 2 × 6 inches set on edge. The span be- least 15 feet long. Such beams shall not
tween hangers shall not exceed 12 feet when project more than 6 feet 6 inches beyond the
beam platforms are used. The flooring shall bearing point. Where the overhang exceeds 6
be supported on 2 × 6 inch cross beams, laid
309
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
feet 6 inches, outrigger beams shall be com- (3) A taut wire or synthetic rope supported
posed of stronger beams or multiple beams. on the scaffold brackets shall be installed at
(r) Catenary scaffolds. (1) Maximum in- the scaffold plank level between the inner-
tended load—500 lbs. most edge of the scaffold platform and the
(2) Not more than two employees shall be curved plate structure of the tank shell to
permitted on the scaffold at one time. serve as a safety line in lieu of an inner
(3) Maximum capacity of come-along shall guardrail assembly where the space between
be 2,000 lbs. the scaffold platform and the tank exceeds 12
(4) Vertical pickups shall be spaced not inches (30.48 cm). In the event the open space
more than 50 feet apart. on either side of the rope exceeds 12 inches
(5) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to (30.48 cm), a second wire or synthetic rope
at least 1⁄2 inch (1.3 cm) diameter improved appropriately placed, or guardrails in ac-
plow steel wire rope.
cordance with § 1926.451(e)(4), shall be in-
(s) Float (ship) scaffolds. (1) Maximum in-
stalled in order to reduce that open space to
tended load—750 lbs.
less than 12 inches (30.48 cm).
(2) Platforms shall be made of 3⁄4 inch ply-
wood, equivalent in rating to American Ply- (4) Scaffold planks of rough full-dimen-
wood Association Grade B-B, Group I, Exte- sioned 2-inch (5.1 cm)×12-inch (30.5 cm) Doug-
rior. las Fir or Southern Yellow Pine of Select
(3) Bearers shall be made from 2×4 inch, or Structural Grade shall be used. Douglas Fir
1×10 inch rough lumber. They shall be free of planks shall have a fiber stress of at least
knots and other flaws. 1900 lb/in2 (130,929 n/cm2) and a modulus of
(4) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to elasticity of at least 1,900,000 lb/in2
at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade (130,929,000 n/cm2), while Yellow Pine planks
manila rope. shall have a fiber stress of at least 2500 lb/in2
(t) Interior hung scaffolds. (172,275 n/cm2) and a modulus of elasticity of
Bearers (use on edge): 2×10 in. at least 2,000,000 lb/in2 (137,820,000 n/cm2).
Maximum intended load: Maximum span (5) Guardrails shall be constructed of a
25 lb/ft.2: 10 ft. taut wire or synthetic rope, and shall be sup-
50 lb/ft.2: 10 ft. ported by angle irons attached to brackets
75 lb/ft.2: 7 ft. welded to the steel plates. These guardrails
(u) Needle beam scaffolds. shall comply with § 1926.451(e)(4). Guardrail
supports shall be located at no greater than
Maximum intended load: 25 lb/ft.2
10 feet 6 inch intervals.
Beams: 4×6 in.
Maximum platform span: 8 ft.
Maximum beam span: 10 ft.
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX B TO SUB-
(1) Ropes shall be attached to the needle PART L OF PART 1926—CRITERIA FOR
beams by a scaffold hitch or an eye splice. DETERMINING THE FEASIBILITY OF
The loose end of the rope shall be tied by a PROVIDING SAFE ACCESS AND FALL
bowline knot or by a round turn and a half PROTECTION FOR SCAFFOLD EREC-
hitch. TORS AND DISMANTLERS [RE-
(2) Ropes shall be equivalent in strength to
SERVED]
at least 1 inch (2.5 cm) diameter first grade
manila rope.
(v) Multi-level suspension scaffolds. No addi- (NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX C TO SUB-
tional guidelines or tables are being given PART L OF PART 1926—LIST OF NA-
for these scaffolds. TIONAL CONSENSUS STANDARDS
(w) Mobile Scaffolds. Stability test as de-
scribed in the ANSI A92 series documents, as ANSI/SIA A92.2–1990 Vehicle-Mounted Ele-
appropriate for the type of scaffold, can be vating and Rotating Aerial Devices
used to establish stability for the purpose of ANSI/SIA A92.3–1990 Manually Propelled Ele-
§ 1926.452(w)(6). vating Aerial Platforms
(x) Repair bracket scaffolds. No additional ANSI/SIA A92.5–1990 Boom Supported Ele-
guidelines or tables are being given for these vating Work Platforms
scaffolds. ANSI/SIA A92.6–1990 Self-Propelled Elevating
(y) Stilts. No specific guidelines or tables Work Platforms
are given. ANSI/SIA A92.7–1990 Airline Ground Support
(z) Tank builder’s scaffold.
Vehicle-Mounted Vertical Lift Devices
(1) The maximum distance between brack-
ANSI/SIA A92.8–1993 Vehicle-Mounted Bridge
ets to which scaffolding and guardrail sup-
Inspection and Maintenance Devices
ports are attached shall be no more than 10

feet 6 inches. ANSI/SIA A92.9–1993 Mast-Climbing Work
(2) Not more than three employees shall Platforms
occupy a 10 feet 6 inch span of scaffold plank-
ing at any time.
310
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX D TO SUB- • erection/dismantling procedures

PART L OF PART 1926—LIST OF • rolling scaffold assembly
TRAINING TOPICS FOR SCAFFOLD • putlogs
ERECTORS AND DISMANTLERS • Tube and Clamp Scaffolds
• specific regulations and standards
This Appendix D is provided to serve as a • components
guide to assist employers when evaluating • parts inspection
the training needs of employees erecting or • erection/dismantling planning
dismantling supported scaffolds.
• guys, ties and braces
The Agency believes that employees erect-
• fall protection
ing or dismantling scaffolds should be
trained in the following topics: • general safety
• General Overview of Scaffolding • access and platforms
• regulations and standards • erection/dismantling procedures
• erection/dismantling planning • buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
• PPE and proper procedures • System Scaffolds
• fall protection • specific regulations and standards
• materials handling • components
• access • parts inspection
• working platforms • erection/dismantling planning
• foundations • guys, ties and braces
• guys, ties and braces • fall protection
• Tubular Welded Frame Scaffolds • general safety
• specific regulations and standards • access and platforms
• components • erection/dismantling procedures
• parts inspection
• buttresses, cantilevers, & bridges
• erection/dismantling planning
• guys, ties and braces Scaffold erectors and dismantlers should
• fall protection all receive the general overview, and, in ad-
• general safety dition, specific training for the type of sup-
• access and platforms ported scaffold being erected or dismantled.
(NON-MANDATORY) APPENDIX E TO SUBPART L OF PART 1926—DRAWINGS AND

ILLUSTRATIONS
This Appendix provides drawings of particular types of scaffolds and scaffold components,
and graphic illustrations of bracing patterns and tie spacing patterns.
This Appendix is intended to provide visual guidance to assist the user in complying with
the requirements of subpart L, part 1926.
311
Pt. 1926, Subpt. L, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
312
ER30au96.000</GPH>
HOISTS MUST BE ELECTRONICALLY ISOLATED FROM SCAFFOLD

313
ER30au96.001
314
ER30au96.002</GPH>
315
ER30au96.003</GPH>
316
ER30au96.004</GPH>
317
ER30au96.005</GPH>
318
ER30au96.006</GPH>
319
ER30au96.007</GPH>
[61 FR 46122, Aug. 30, 1996; 61 FR 59832, Nov. 25, 1996]
Subpart M—Fall Protection § 1926.500 Scope, application, and defi-

nitions applicable to this subpart.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours (a) Scope and application. (1) This sub-
and Safety Standards Act (Construction part sets forth requirements and cri-
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Sec. 4, 6, 8, Occu- teria for fall protection in construction
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 workplaces covered under 29 CFR part
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s Or- 1926. Exception: The provisions of this
ders Nos. 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–96 (62 FR 111);
subpart do not apply when employees
and 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), as applicable, and 29
CFR Part 1911. are making an inspection, investiga-
tion, or assessment of workplace condi-

SOURCE: 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, unless tions prior to the actual start of con-
otherwise noted.
struction work or after all construc-
tion work has been completed.
320
ER30au96.008</GPH>
(2) Section 1926.501 sets forth those belts, lanyards and lifelines used for
workplaces, conditions, operations, and fall protection during tank and com-
circumstances for which fall protection munication and broadcast tower erec-
shall be provided except as follows: tion. Paragraphs (b),(c) and (f) of
(i) Requirements relating to fall pro- § 1926.107 provide definitions for the
tection for employees working on scaf- pertinent terms.)
folds are provided in subpart L of this (4) Section 1926.503 sets forth require-
part. ments for training in the installation
(ii) Requirements relating to fall pro- and use of fall protection systems, ex-
tection for employees working on cer- cept in relation to steel erection ac-
tain cranes and derricks are provided tivities.
in subpart N of this part. (b) Definitions.
(iii) Fall protection requirements for Anchorage means a secure point of at-
employees performing steel erection tachment for lifelines, lanyards or de-
work (except for towers and tanks) are celeration devices.
provided in subpart R of this part. Body belt (safety belt) means a strap
(iv) Requirements relating to fall with means both for securing it about
protection for employees working on the waist and for attaching it to a lan-
certain types of equipment used in tun- yard, lifeline, or deceleration device.
neling operations are provided in sub- Body harness means straps which
part S of this part. may be secured about the employee in
(v) Requirements relating to fall pro- a manner that will distribute the fall
tection for employees engaged in the arrest forces over at least the thighs,
erection of tanks and communication pelvis, waist, chest and shoulders with
and broadcast towers are provided in means for attaching it to other compo-
§ 1926.105. nents of a personal fall arrest system.
(vi) Requirements relating to fall Buckle means any device for holding
protection for employees engaged in the body belt or body harness closed
the construction of electric trans- around the employee’s body.
mission and distribution lines and Connector means a device which is
equipment are provided in subpart V of used to couple (connect) parts of the
this part. personal fall arrest system and posi-
(vii) Requirements relating to fall tioning device systems together. It
protection for employees working on may be an independent component of
stairways and ladders are provided in the system, such as a carabiner, or it
subpart X of this part. may be an integral component of part
(3) Section 1926.502 sets forth the re- of the system (such as a buckle or dee-
quirements for the installation, con- ring sewn into a body belt or body har-
struction, and proper use of fall protec- ness, or a snap-hook spliced or sewn to
tion required by part 1926, except as a lanyard or self-retracting lanyard).
follows: Controlled access zone (CAZ) means an
(i) Performance requirements for area in which certain work (e.g.,
guardrail systems used on scaffolds and overhand bricklaying) may take place
performance requirements for falling without the use of guardrail systems,
object protection used on scaffolds are personal fall arrest systems, or safety
provided in subpart L of this part. net systems and access to the zone is
(ii) Performance requirements for controlled.
stairways, stairrail systems, and hand- Dangerous equipment means equip-
rails are provided in subpart X of this ment (such as pickling or galvanizing
part. tanks, degreasing units, machinery,
(iii) Additional performance require- electrical equipment, and other units)
ments for personal climbing equip- which, as a result of form or function,
ment, lineman’s body belts, safety may be hazardous to employees who
straps, and lanyards are provided in fall onto or into such equipment.
subpart V of this part. Deceleration device means any mecha-
(iv) Section 1926.502 does not apply to nism, such as a rope grab, rip-stitch
the erection of tanks and communica- lanyard, specially-woven lanyard, tear-
tion and broadcast towers. (Note: Sec- ing or deforming lanyards, automatic
tion 1926.104 sets the criteria for body self-retracting lifelines/lanyards, etc.,
321
which serves to dissipate a substantial Lanyard means a flexible line of rope,

amount of energy during a fall arrest, wire rope, or strap which generally has
or otherwise limit the energy imposed a connector at each end for connecting
on an employee during fall arrest. the body belt or body harness to a de-
Deceleration distance means the addi- celeration device, lifeline, or anchor-
tional vertical distance a falling em- age.
ployee travels, excluding lifeline elon- Leading edge means the edge of a
gation and free fall distance, before floor, roof, or formwork for a floor or
stopping, from the point at which the other walking/working surface (such as
deceleration device begins to operate. the deck) which changes location as ad-
It is measured as the distance between ditional floor, roof, decking, or
the location of an employee’s body belt formwork sections are placed, formed,
or body harness attachment point at or constructed. A leading edge is con-
the moment of activation (at the onset sidered to be an ‘‘unprotected side and
of fall arrest forces) of the deceleration edge’’ during periods when it is not ac-
device during a fall, and the location of tively and continuously under con-
that attachment point after the em- struction.
ployee comes to a full stop. Lifeline means a component con-
Equivalent means alternative designs, sisting of a flexible line for connection
materials, or methods to protect to an anchorage at one end to hang
against a hazard which the employer vertically (vertical lifeline), or for con-
can demonstrate will provide an equal nection to anchorages at both ends to
or greater degree of safety for employ- stretch horizontally (horizontal life-
ees than the methods, materials or de- line), and which serves as a means for
signs specified in the standard. connecting other components of a per-
Failure means load refusal, breakage, sonal fall arrest system to the anchor-
or separation of component parts. Load age.
refusal is the point where the ultimate
Low-slope roof means a roof having a
strength is exceeded.
slope less than or equal to 4 in 12
Free fall means the act of falling be-
(vertical to horizontal).
fore a personal fall arrest system be-
gins to apply force to arrest the fall. Lower levels means those areas or sur-
Free fall distance means the vertical faces to which an employee can fall.
displacement of the fall arrest attach- Such areas or surfaces include, but are
ment point on the employee’s body belt not limited to, ground levels, floors,
or body harness between onset of the platforms, ramps, runways, exca-
fall and just before the system begins vations, pits, tanks, material, water,
to apply force to arrest the fall. This equipment, structures, or portions
distance excludes deceleration dis- thereof.
tance, and lifeline/lanyard elongation, Mechanical equipment means all
but includes any deceleration device motor or human propelled wheeled
slide distance or self-retracting life- equipment used for roofing work, ex-
line/lanyard extension before they op- cept wheelbarrows and mopcarts.
erate and fall arrest forces occur. Opening means a gap or void 30
Guardrail system means a barrier inches (76 cm) or more high and 18
erected to prevent employees from fall- inches (48 cm) or more wide, in a wall
ing to lower levels. or partition, through which employees
Hole means a gap or void 2 inches (5.1 can fall to a lower level.
cm) or more in its least dimension, in Overhand bricklaying and related work
a floor, roof, or other walking/working means the process of laying bricks and
surface. masonry units such that the surface of
Infeasible means that it is impossible the wall to be jointed is on the opposite
to perform the construction work using side of the wall from the mason, requir-
a conventional fall protection system ing the mason to lean over the wall to
(i.e., guardrail system, safety net sys- complete the work. Related work in-
tem, or personal fall arrest system) or cludes mason tending and electrical in-
that it is technologically impossible to stallation incorporated into the brick
use any one of these systems to provide wall during the overhand bricklaying
fall protection. process.
322
Personal fall arrest system means a (2) The non-locking type with a self-
system used to arrest an employee in a closing keeper which remains closed
fall from a working level. It consists of until pressed open for connection or
an anchorage, connectors, a body belt disconnection. As of January 1, 1998,
or body harness and may include a lan- the use of a non-locking snaphook as
yard, deceleration device, lifeline, or part of personal fall arrest systems and
suitable combinations of these. As of positioning device systems is prohib-
January 1, 1998, the use of a body belt ited.
for fall arrest is prohibited. Steep roof means a roof having a slope
Positioning device system means a body greater than 4 in 12 (vertical to hori-
belt or body harness system rigged to zontal).
allow an employee to be supported on Toeboard means a low protective bar-
an elevated vertical surface, such as a rier that will prevent the fall of mate-
wall, and work with both hands free rials and equipment to lower levels and
while leaning. provide protection from falls for per-
Rope grab means a deceleration de- sonnel.
vice which travels on a lifeline and Unprotected sides and edges means any
automatically, by friction, engages the side or edge (except at entrances to
lifeline and locks so as to arrest the points of access) of a walking/working
fall of an employee. A rope grab usu- surface, e.g., floor, roof, ramp, or run-
ally employs the principle of inertial way where there is no wall or guardrail
locking, cam/level locking, or both. system at least 39 inches (1.0 m) high.
Roof means the exterior surface on Walking/working surface means any
the top of a building. This does not in- surface, whether horizontal or vertical
clude floors or formwork which, be- on which an employee walks or works,
cause a building has not been com- including, but not limited to, floors,
pleted, temporarily become the top roofs, ramps, bridges, runways,
surface of a building. formwork and concrete reinforcing
Roofing work means the hoisting, steel but not including ladders, vehi-
storage, application, and removal of cles, or trailers, on which employees
roofing materials and equipment, in- must be located in order to perform
cluding related insulation, sheet metal, their job duties.
and vapor barrier work, but not includ- Warning line system means a barrier
ing the construction of the roof deck. erected on a roof to warn employees
Safety-monitoring system means a safe- that they are approaching an unpro-
ty system in which a competent person tected roof side or edge, and which des-
is responsible for recognizing and warn- ignates an area in which roofing work
ing employees of fall hazards. may take place without the use of
Self-retracting lifeline/lanyard means a guardrail, body belt, or safety net sys-
deceleration device containing a drum- tems to protect employees in the area.
wound line which can be slowly ex- Work area means that portion of a
tracted from, or retracted onto, the walking/working surface where job du-
drum under slight tension during nor- ties are being performed.
mal employee movement, and which, [59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994, as amended at 60
after onset of a fall, automatically FR 39255, Aug. 2, 1995; 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18,
locks the drum and arrests the fall. 2001]
Snaphook means a connector com-
prised of a hook-shaped member with a § 1926.501 Duty to have fall protection.
normally closed keeper, or similar ar- (a) General. (1) This section sets forth
rangement, which may be opened to requirements for employers to provide
permit the hook to receive an object fall protection systems. All fall protec-
and, when released, automatically tion required by this section shall con-
closes to retain the object. Snaphooks form to the criteria set forth in
are generally one of two types: § 1926.502 of this subpart.
(1) The locking type with a self-clos- (2) The employer shall determine if
ing, self-locking keeper which remains the walking/working surfaces on which

closed and locked until unlocked and its employees are to work have the
pressed open for connection or dis- strength and structural integrity to
connection; or support employees safely. Employees
323
shall be allowed to work on those sur- opening or out over the edge of the ac-
faces only when the surfaces have the cess opening (to receive or guide equip-
requisite strength and structural integ- ment and materials, for example), that
rity. employee shall be protected from fall
(b)(1) Unprotected sides and edges. hazards by a personal fall arrest sys-
Each employee on a walking/working tem.
surface (horizontal and vertical sur- (4) Holes. (i) Each employee on walk-
face) with an unprotected side or edge ing/working surfaces shall be protected
which is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above a from falling through holes (including
lower level shall be protected from fall- skylights) more than 6 feet (1.8 m)
ing by the use of guardrail systems, above lower levels, by personal fall ar-
safety net systems, or personal fall arrest systems, covers, or guardrail sys-
rest systems. tems erected around such holes.
(2) Leading edges. (i) Each employee (ii) Each employee on a walking/
who is constructing a leading edge 6 working surface shall be protected
feet (1.8 m) or more above lower levels from tripping in or stepping into or
shall be protected from falling by through holes (including skylights) by
guardrail systems, safety net systems, covers.
or personal fall arrest systems. Excep-
(iii) Each employee on a walking/
tion: When the employer can dem-
working surface shall be protected
onstrate that it is infeasible or creates
from objects falling through holes (in-
a greater hazard to use these systems,
cluding skylights) by covers.
the employer shall develop and imple-
ment a fall protection plan which (5) Formwork and reinforcing steel.
meets the requirements of paragraph Each employee on the face of formwork
(k) of § 1926.502. or reinforcing steel shall be protected
NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea- from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to
sible and will not create a greater hazard to lower levels by personal fall arrest sys-
implement at least one of the above-listed tems, safety net systems, or posi-
fall protection systems. Accordingly, the tioning device systems.
employer has the burden of establishing that (6) Ramps, runways, and other walk-
it is appropriate to implement a fall protec- ways. Each employee on ramps, run-
tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k) ways, and other walkways shall be pro-
for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
of implementing any of those systems.
tected from falling 6 feet (1.8 m) or
(ii) Each employee on a walking/ more to lower levels by guardrail sys-
working surface 6 feet (1.8 m) or more tems.
above a lower level where leading edges (7) Excavations. (i) Each employee at
are under construction, but who is not the edge of an excavation 6 feet (1.8 m)
engaged in the leading edge work, shall or more in depth shall be protected
be protected from falling by a guard- from falling by guardrail systems,
rail system, safety net system, or per- fences, or barricades when the exca-
sonal fall arrest system. If a guardrail vations are not readily seen because of
system is chosen to provide the fall plant growth or other visual barrier;
protection, and a controlled access (ii) Each employee at the edge of a
zone has already been established for well, pit, shaft, and similar excavation
leading edge work, the control line 6 feet (1.8 m) or more in depth shall be
may be used in lieu of a guardrail along protected from falling by guardrail sys-
the edge that parallels the leading tems, fences, barricades, or covers.
edge. (8) Dangerous equipment. (i) Each em-
(3) Hoist areas. Each employee in a ployee less than 6 feet (1.8 m) above
hoist area shall be protected from fall- dangerous equipment shall be pro-
ing 6 feet (1.8 m) or more to lower lev- tected from falling into or onto the
els by guardrail systems or personal dangerous equipment by guardrail sys-
fall arrest systems. If guardrail systems or by equipment guards.
tems, [or chain, gate, or guardrail] or (ii) Each employee 6 feet (1.8 m) or
portions thereof, are removed to facili- more above dangerous equipment shall
tate the hoisting operation (e.g., dur- be protected from fall hazards by
ing landing of materials), and an em- guardrail systems, personal fall arrest
ployee must lean through the access systems, or safety net systems.
324
(9) Overhand bricklaying and related graph (b) of this section provides for an
work. (i) Except as otherwise provided alternative fall protection measure.
in paragraph (b) of this section, each Exception: When the employer can
employee performing overhand brick- demonstrate that it is infeasible or cre-
laying and related work 6 feet (1.8 m) ates a greater hazard to use these sys-
or more above lower levels, shall be tems, the employer shall develop and
protected from falling by guardrail sys- implement a fall protection plan which
tems, safety net systems, personal fall meets the requirements of paragraph
arrest systems, or shall work in a con- (k) of § 1926.502.
trolled access zone. NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea-
(ii) Each employee reaching more sible and will not create a greater hazard to
than 10 inches (25 cm) below the level implement at least one of the above-listed
of the walking/working surface on fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
which they are working, shall be pro- employer has the burden of establishing that
tected from falling by a guardrail sys- it is appropriate to implement a fall protec-
tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k)
tem, safety net system, or personal fall for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
arrest system. of implementing any of those systems.
NOTE: Bricklaying operations performed on (13) Residential construction. Each em-
scaffolds are regulated by subpart L—Scaf-
folds of this part.
ployee engaged in residential construc-
(10) Roofing work on Low-slope roofs. tion activities 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
Except as otherwise provided in para- above lower levels shall be protected
graph (b) of this section, each employee by guardrail systems, safety net sys-
engaged in roofing activities on low- tem, or personal fall arrest system un-
slope roofs, with unprotected sides and less another provision in paragraph (b)
edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower of this section provides for an alter-
levels shall be protected from falling native fall protection measure. Excep-
by guardrail systems, safety net sys- tion: When the employer can dem-
tems, personal fall arrest systems, or a onstrate that it is infeasible or creates
combination of warning line system a greater hazard to use these systems,
and guardrail system, warning line sys- the employer shall develop and imple-
tem and safety net system, or warning ment a fall protection plan which
line system and personal fall arrest meets the requirements of paragraph
system, or warning line system and (k) of § 1926.502.
safety monitoring system. Or, on roofs NOTE: There is a presumption that it is fea-
50-feet (15.25 m) or less in width (see sible and will not create a greater hazard to
implement at least one of the above-listed
Appendix A to subpart M of this part),
fall protection systems. Accordingly, the
the use of a safety monitoring system employer has the burden of establishing that
alone [i.e. without the warning line it is appropriate to implement a fall protec-
system] is permitted. tion plan which complies with § 1926.502(k)
(11) Steep roofs. Each employee on a for a particular workplace situation, in lieu
steep roof with unprotected sides and of implementing any of those systems.
edges 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above lower (14) Wall openings. Each employee
levels shall be protected from falling working on, at, above, or near wall
by guardrail systems with toeboards, openings (including those with chutes
safety net systems, or personal fall ar- attached) where the outside bottom
rest systems. edge of the wall opening is 6 feet (1.8 m)
(12) Precast concrete erection. Each em- or more above lower levels and the in-
ployee engaged in the erection of pre- side bottom edge of the wall opening is
cast concrete members (including, but less than 39 inches (1.0 m) above the
not limited to the erection of wall pan- walking/working surface, shall be pro-
els, columns, beams, and floor and roof tected from falling by the use of a
‘‘tees’’) and related operations such as guardrail system, a safety net system,
grouting of precast concrete members, or a personal fall arrest system.
who is 6 feet (1.8 m) or more above (15) Walking/working surfaces not oth-
lower levels shall be protected from erwise addressed. Except as provided in

falling by guardrail systems, safety net § 1926.500(a)(2) or in § 1926.501 (b)(1)
systems, or personal fall arrest sys- through (b)(14), each employee on a
tems, unless another provision in para- walking/working surface 6 feet (1.8 m)
325
or more above lower levels shall be proof the guardrail system and the walk-
tected from falling by a guardrail sys- ing/working surface when there is no
tem, safety net system, or personal fall wall or parapet wall at least 21 inches
arrest system. (53 cm) high.
(c) Protection from falling objects. (i) Midrails, when used, shall be in-
When an employee is exposed to falling stalled at a height midway between the
objects, the employer shall have each top edge of the guardrail system and
employee wear a hard hat and shall im- the walking/working level.
plement one of the following measures: (ii) Screens and mesh, when used,
(1) Erect toeboards, screens, or shall extend from the top rail to the
guardrail systems to prevent objects walking/working level and along the
from falling from higher levels; or, entire opening between top rail sup-
(2) Erect a canopy structure and keep
ports.
potential fall objects far enough from
the edge of the higher level so that (iii) Intermediate members (such as
those objects would not go over the balusters), when used between posts,
edge if they were accidentally dis- shall be not more than 19 inches (48
placed; or, cm) apart.
(3) Barricade the area to which ob- (iv) Other structural members (such
jects could fall, prohibit employees as additional midrails and architec-
from entering the barricaded area, and tural panels) shall be installed such
keep objects that may fall far enough that there are no openings in the
away from the edge of a higher level so guardrail system that are more than 19
that those objects would not go over inches (.5 m) wide.
the edge if they were accidentally dis- (3) Guardrail systems shall be capa-
placed. ble of withstanding, without failure, a
force of at least 200 pounds (890 N) ap-
§ 1926.502 Fall protection systems cri- plied within 2 inches (5.1 cm) of the top
teria and practices. edge, in any outward or downward di-
(a) General. (1) Fall protection sys- rection, at any point along the top
tems required by this part shall comply edge.
with the applicable provisions of this (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test
section. load specified in paragraph (b)(3) of
(2) Employers shall provide and in- this section is applied in a downward
stall all fall protection systems re- direction, the top edge of the guardrail
quired by this subpart for an employee, shall not deflect to a height less than
and shall comply with all other perti- 39 inches (1.0 m) above the walking/
nent requirements of this subpart be- working level. Guardrail system com-
fore that employee begins the work ponents selected and constructed in ac-
that necessitates the fall protection. cordance with the Appendix B to sub-
(b) Guardrail systems. Guardrail sys- part M of this part will be deemed to
tems and their use shall comply with meet this requirement.
the following provisions: (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter-
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or mediate vertical members, solid pan-
equivalent guardrail system members, els, and equivalent structural members
shall be 42 inches (1.1 m) plus or minus shall be capable of withstanding, with-
3 inches (8 cm) above the walking/ out failure, a force of at least 150
working level. When conditions war- pounds (666 N) applied in any downward
rant, the height of the top edge may or outward direction at any point
exceed the 45-inch height, provided the along the midrail or other member.
guardrail system meets all other cri-
(6) Guardrail systems shall be so sur-
teria of this paragraph.
NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the
faced as to prevent injury to an em-
top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent ployee from punctures or lacerations,
member, shall be increased an amount equal and to prevent snagging of clothing.
to the height of the stilts. (7) The ends of all top rails and
(2) Midrails, screens, mesh, inter- midrails shall not overhang the ter-
mediate vertical members, or equiva- minal posts, except where such over-
lent intermediate structural members hang does not constitute a projection
shall be installed between the top edge hazard.
326
(8) Steel banding and plastic banding Minimum required horizontal

Vertical distance from working distance of outer edge of net
shall not be used as top rails or level to horizontal plane of net from the edge of the working
midrails. surface
(9) Top rails and midrails shall be at Up to 5 feet ............................ 8 feet.
least one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal More than 5 feet up to 10 feet 10 feet.
diameter or thickness to prevent cuts More than 10 feet ................... 13 feet.
and lacerations. If wire rope is used for
top rails, it shall be flagged at not (3) Safety nets shall be installed with
more than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with sufficient clearance under them to pre-
high-visibility material. vent contact with the surface or struc-
(10) When guardrail systems are used tures below when subjected to an im-
at hoisting areas, a chain, gate or re- pact force equal to the drop test speci-
movable guardrail section shall be fied in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
placed across the access opening be- (4) Safety nets and their installations
tween guardrail sections when hoisting shall be capable of absorbing an impact
operations are not taking place. force equal to that produced by the
(11) When guardrail systems are used drop test specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i)
at holes, they shall be erected on all of this section.
unprotected sides or edges of the hole. (i) Except as provided in paragraph
(c)(4)(ii) of this section, safety nets and
(12) When guardrail systems are used
safety net installations shall be drop-
around holes used for the passage of
tested at the jobsite after initial in-
materials, the hole shall have not more
stallation and before being used as a
than two sides provided with remov-
fall protection system, whenever relo-
able guardrail sections to allow the
cated, after major repair, and at 6-
passage of materials. When the hole is
month intervals if left in one place.
not in use, it shall be closed over with
The drop-test shall consist of a 400
a cover, or a guardrail system shall be
pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30 ±2 inches
provided along all unprotected sides or
(76 ±5 cm) in diameter dropped into the
edges.
net from the highest walking/working
(13) When guardrail systems are used surface at which employees are exposed
around holes which are used as points to fall hazards, but not from less than
of access (such as ladderways), they 42 inches (1.1 m) above that level.
shall be provided with a gate, or be so (ii) When the employer can dem-
offset that a person cannot walk di- onstrate that it is unreasonable to per-
rectly into the hole. form the drop-test required by para-
(14) Guardrail systems used on ramps graph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the em-
and runways shall be erected along ployer (or a designated competent per-
each unprotected side or edge. son) shall certify that the net and net
(15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope installation is in compliance with the
being used for top rails or midrails provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and
shall be inspected as frequently as nec- (c)(4)(i) of this section by preparing a
essary to ensure that it continues to certification record prior to the net
meet the strength requirements of being used as a fall protection system.
paragraph (b)(3) of this section. The certification record must include
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net sys- an identification of the net and net in-
tems and their use shall comply with stallation for which the certification
the following provisions: record is being prepared; the date that
(1) Safety nets shall be installed as it was determined that the identified
close as practicable under the walking/ net and net installation were in com-
working surface on which employees pliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this
are working, but in no case more than section and the signature of the person
30 feet (9.1 m) below such level. When making the determination and certifi-
nets are used on bridges, the potential cation. The most recent certification
fall area from the walking/working sur- record for each net and net installation
face to the net shall be unobstructed. shall be available at the jobsite for in-
(2) Safety nets shall extend outward spection.
from the outermost projection of the (5) Defective nets shall not be used.
work surface as follows: Safety nets shall be inspected at least
327
once a week for wear, damage, and locking type snaphook designed and
other deterioration. Defective compo- used to prevent disengagement of the
nents shall be removed from service. snaphook by the contact of the
Safety nets shall also be inspected snaphook keeper by the connected
after any occurrence which could affect member. Effective January 1, 1998, only
the integrity of the safety net system. locking type snaphooks shall be used.
(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equip- (6) Unless the snaphook is a locking
ment, and tools which have fallen into type and designed for the following
the safety net shall be removed as soon connections, snaphooks shall not be en-
as possible from the net and at least gaged:
before the next work shift. (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire
(7) The maximum size of each safety rope;
net mesh opening shall not exceed 36 (ii) to each other;
square inches (230 cm 2) nor be longer (iii) to a Dee-ring to which another
than 6 inches (15 cm) on any side, and snaphook or other connector is at-
the opening, measured center-to-center tached;
of mesh ropes or webbing, shall not be (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or
longer than 6 inches (15 cm). All mesh
(v) to any object which is incom-
crossings shall be secured to prevent
patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela-
enlargement of the mesh opening.
tion to the snaphook such that unin-
(8) Each safety net (or section of it)
tentional disengagement could occur
shall have a border rope for webbing
by the connected object being able to
with a minimum breaking strength of
depress the snaphook keeper and re-
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
lease itself.
(9) Connections between safety net
panels shall be as strong as integral (7) On suspended scaffolds or similar
net components and shall be spaced not work platforms with horizontal life-
more than 6 inches (15 cm) apart. lines which may become vertical life-
(d) Personal fall arrest systems. Per- lines, the devices used to connect to a
sonal fall arrest systems and their use horizontal lifeline shall be capable of
shall comply with the provisions set locking in both directions on the life-
forth below. Effective January 1, 1998, line.
body belts are not acceptable as part of (8) Horizontal lifelines shall be de-
a personal fall arrest system. Note: The signed, installed, and used, under the
use of a body belt in a positioning de- supervision of a qualified person, as
vice system is acceptable and is regu- part of a complete personal fall arrest
lated under paragraph (e) of this sec- system, which maintains a safety fac-
tion. tor of at least two.
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines
pressed or formed steel, or made of shall have a minimum breaking
equivalent materials. strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN).
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion- (10) (i) Except as provided in para-
resistant finish, and all surfaces and graph (d)(10)(ii) of this section, when
edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- vertical lifelines are used, each em-
age to interfacing parts of the system. ployee shall be attached to a separate
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall lifeline.
have a minimum tensile strength of (ii) During the construction of eleva-
5,000 pounds (22.2 kN). tor shafts, two employees may be at-
(4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be tached to the same lifeline in the
proof-tested to a minimum tensile load hoistway, provided both employees are
of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- working atop a false car that is
ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- equipped with guardrails; the strength
formation. of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000
(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be pounds per employee attached] (44.4
compatible with the member to which kN); and all other criteria specified in
they are connected to prevent uninten- this paragraph for lifelines have been
tional disengagement of the snaphook met.
by depression of the snaphook keeper (11) Lifelines shall be protected
by the connected member, or shall be a against being cut or abraded.
328
(12) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- bined person and tool weight of less than 310
yards which automatically limit free pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid-
fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less ered to be in compliance with the provisions
shall be capable of sustaining a min- of paragraph (d)(16) of this section. If the
system is used by an employee having a com-
imum tensile load of 3,000 pounds (13.3
bined tool and body weight of 310 pounds (140
kN) applied to the device with the life- kg) or more, then the employer must appro-
line or lanyard in the fully extended priately modify the criteria and protocols of
position. the Appendix to provide proper protection
(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lan- for such heavier weights, or the system will
yards which do not limit free fall dis- not be deemed to be in compliance with the
tance to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less, ripstitch requirements of paragraph (d)(16) of this sec-
lanyards, and tearing and deforming tion.
lanyards shall be capable of sustaining (17) The attachment point of the
a minimum tensile load of 5,000 pounds body belt shall be located in the center
(22.2 kN) applied to the device with the of the wearer’s back. The attachment
lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended point of the body harness shall be lo-
position. cated in the center of the wearer’s back
(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used near shoulder level, or above the wear-
in lanyards, lifelines, and strength er’s head.
components of body belts and body har- (18) Body belts, harnesses, and com-
nesses shall be made from synthetic fi- ponents shall be used only for em-
bers. ployee protection (as part of a personal
(15) Anchorages used for attachment fall arrest system or positioning device
of personal fall arrest equipment shall system) and not to hoist materials.
be independent of any anchorage being
(19) Personal fall arrest systems and
used to support or suspend platforms
components subjected to impact load-
and capable of supporting at least 5,000
ing shall be immediately removed from
pounds (22.2 kN) per employee at-
service and shall not be used again for
tached, or shall be designed, installed,
and used as follows: employee protection until inspected
(i) as part of a complete personal fall and determined by a competent person
arrest system which maintains a safety to be undamaged and suitable for
factor of at least two; and reuse.
(ii) under the supervision of a quali- (20) The employer shall provide for
fied person. prompt rescue of employees in the
(16) Personal fall arrest systems, event of a fall or shall assure that em-
when stopping a fall, shall: ployees are able to rescue themselves.
(i) limit maximum arresting force on (21) Personal fall arrest systems shall
an employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when be inspected prior to each use for wear,
used with a body belt; damage and other deterioration, and
(ii) limit maximum arresting force defective components shall be removed
on an employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) from service.
when used with a body harness; (22) Body belts shall be at least one
(iii) be rigged such that an employee and five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm)
can neither free fall more than 6 feet wide.
(1.8 m), nor contact any lower level; (23) Personal fall arrest systems shall
(iv) bring an employee to a complete not be attached to guardrail systems,
stop and limit maximum deceleration nor shall they be attached to hoists ex-
distance an employee travels to 3.5 feet cept as specified in other subparts of
(1.07 m); and, this part.
(v) have sufficient strength to with-
(24) When a personal fall arrest sys-
stand twice the potential impact en-
tem is used at hoist areas, it shall be
ergy of an employee free falling a dis-
rigged to allow the movement of the
tance of 6 feet (1.8 m), or the free fall
employee only as far as the edge of the
distance permitted by the system,
walking/working surface.
whichever is less.
NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system (e) Positioning device systems. Posi-
meets the criteria and protocols contained in tioning device systems and their use
Appendix C to subpart M, and if the system shall conform to the following provi-
is being used by an employee having a com- sions:
329
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged (10) Body belts, harnesses, and com-
such that an employee cannot free fall ponents shall be used only for em-
more than 2 feet (.6 m). ployee protection (as part of a personal
(2) Positioning devices shall be se- fall arrest system or positioning device
cured to an anchorage capable of sup- system) and not to hoist materials.
porting at least twice the potential im- (f) Warning line systems. Warning line
pact load of an employee’s fall or 3,000 systems [See § 1926.501(b)(10)] and their
pounds (13.3 kN), whichever is greater. use shall comply with the following
(3) Connectors shall be drop forged, provisions:
pressed or formed steel, or made of (1) The warning line shall be erected
equivalent materials. around all sides of the roof work area.
(4) Connectors shall have a corrosion- (i) When mechanical equipment is
resistant finish, and all surfaces and not being used, the warning line shall
edges shall be smooth to prevent dam- be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m)
age to interfacing parts of this system. from the roof edge.
(5) Connecting assemblies shall have (ii) When mechanical equipment is
a minimum tensile strength of 5,000 being used, the warning line shall be
pounds (22.2 kN) erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) from
(6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be the roof edge which is parallel to the
proof-tested to a minimum tensile load direction of mechanical equipment op-
of 3,600 pounds (16 kN) without crack- eration, and not less than 10 feet (3.1
ing, breaking, or taking permanent de- m) from the roof edge which is perpen-
formation. dicular to the direction of mechanical
equipment operation.
(7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be
(iii) Points of access, materials han-
compatible with the member to which
dling areas, storage areas, and hoisting
they are connected to prevent uninten-
areas shall be connected to the work
tional disengagement of the snaphook
area by an access path formed by two
by depression of the snaphook keeper
warning lines.
by the connected member, or shall be a
(iv) When the path to a point of ac-
locking type snaphook designed and
cess is not in use, a rope, wire, chain,
used to prevent disengagement of the
or other barricade, equivalent in
snaphook by the contact of the
strength and height to the warning
snaphook keeper by the connected
line, shall be placed across the path at
member. As of January 1, 1998, only
the point where the path intersects the
locking type snaphooks shall be used.
warning line erected around the work
(8) Unless the snaphook is a locking
area, or the path shall be offset such
type and designed for the following
that a person cannot walk directly into
connections, snaphooks shall not be en-
the work area.
gaged:
(2) Warning lines shall consist of
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire ropes, wires, or chains, and supporting
rope; stanchions erected as follows:
(ii) to each other; (i) The rope, wire, or chain shall be
(iii) to a Dee-ring to which another flagged at not more than 6-foot (1.8 m)
snaphook or other connector is at- intervals with high-visibility material;
tached; (ii) The rope, wire, or chain shall be
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or rigged and supported in such a way
(v) to any object which is incom- that its lowest point (including sag) is
patibly shaped or dimensioned in rela- no less than 34 inches (.9 m) from the
tion to the snaphook such that unin- walking/working surface and its high-
tentional disengagement could occur est point is no more than 39 inches (1.0
by the connected object being able to m) from the walking/working surface;
depress the snaphook keeper and re- (iii) After being erected, with the
lease itself. rope, wire, or chain attached, stan-
(9) Positioning device systems shall chions shall be capable of resisting,
be inspected prior to each use for wear, without tipping over, a force of at least
damage, and other deterioration, and 16 pounds (71 N) applied horizontally
defective components shall be removed against the stanchion, 30 inches (.8 m)
from service. above the walking/working surface,
330
perpendicular to the warning line, and (2) When used to control access to
in the direction of the floor, roof, or areas where overhand bricklaying and
platform edge; related work are taking place:
(iv) The rope, wire, or chain shall (i) The controlled access zone shall
have a minimum tensile strength of 500 be defined by a control line erected not
pounds (2.22 kN), and after being at- less than 10 feet (3.1 m) nor more than
tached to the stanchions, shall be capa- 15 feet (4.5 m) from the working edge.
ble of supporting, without breaking, (ii) The control line shall extend for
the loads applied to the stanchions as a distance sufficient for the controlled
prescribed in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of access zone to enclose all employees
this section; and performing overhand bricklaying and
(v) The line shall be attached at each related work at the working edge and
stanchion in such a way that pulling on shall be approximately parallel to the
one section of the line between stan- working edge.
chions will not result in slack being (iii) Additional control lines shall be
taken up in adjacent sections before erected at each end to enclose the con-
the stanchion tips over. trolled access zone.
(3) No employee shall be allowed in (iv) Only employees engaged in
the area between a roof edge and a overhand bricklaying or related work
warning line unless the employee is shall be permitted in the controlled ac-
performing roofing work in that area. cess zone.
(4) Mechanical equipment on roofs (3) Control lines shall consist of
shall be used or stored only in areas ropes, wires, tapes, or equivalent mate-
where employees are protected by a rials, and supporting stanchions as fol-
warning line system, guardrail system, lows:
or personal fall arrest system. (i) Each line shall be flagged or oth-
erwise clearly marked at not more
(g) Controlled access zones. Controlled
than 6-foot (1.8 m) intervals with high-
access zones [See § 1926.501(b)(9) and
visibility material.
§ 1926.502(k)] and their use shall con-
form to the following provisions. (ii) Each line shall be rigged and sup-
ported in such a way that its lowest
(1) When used to control access to
point (including sag) is not less than 39
areas where leading edge and other op-
inches (1 m) from the walking/working
erations are taking place the con- surface and its highest point is not
trolled access zone shall be defined by more than 45 inches (1.3 m) [50 inches
a control line or by any other means (1.3 m) when overhand bricklaying op-
that restricts access. erations are being performed] from the
(i) When control lines are used, they walking/working surface.
shall be erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 (iii) Each line shall have a minimum
m) nor more than 25 feet (7.7 m) from breaking strength of 200 pounds (.88
the unprotected or leading edge, except kN).
when erecting precast concrete mem- (4) On floors and roofs where guard-
bers. rail systems are not in place prior to
(ii) When erecting precast concrete the beginning of overhand bricklaying
members, the control line shall be operations, controlled access zones
erected not less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor shall be enlarged, as necessary, to en-
more than 60 feet (18 m) or half the close all points of access, material han-
length of the member being erected, dling areas, and storage areas.
whichever is less, from the leading (5) On floors and roofs where guard-
edge. rail systems are in place, but need to
(iii) The control line shall extend be removed to allow overhand brick-
along the entire length of the unpro- laying work or leading edge work to
tected or leading edge and shall be ap- take place, only that portion of the
proximately parallel to the unpro- guardrail necessary to accomplish that
tected or leading edge. day’s work shall be removed.

(iv) The control line shall be con- (h) Safety monitoring systems. Safety
nected on each side to a guardrail sys- monitoring systems [See
tem or wall. §§ 1926.501(b)(10) and 1926.502(k)] and
331
their use shall comply with the fol- displacement by the wind, equipment,
lowing provisions: or employees.
(1) The employer shall designate a (4) All covers shall be color coded or
competent person to monitor the safe- they shall be marked with the word
ty of other employees and the em- ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to provide warn-
ployer shall ensure that the safety ing of the hazard.
monitor complies with the following NOTE: This provision does not apply to cast
requirements: iron manhole covers or steel grates used on
streets or roadways.
(i) The safety monitor shall be com-
(j) Protection from falling objects. Fall-
petent to recognize fall hazards;
ing object protection shall comply with
(ii) The safety monitor shall warn the following provisions:
the employee when it appears that the (1) Toeboards, when used as falling
employee is unaware of a fall hazard or object protection, shall be erected
is acting in an unsafe manner; along the edge of the overhead walking/
(iii) The safety monitor shall be on working surface for a distance suffi-
the same walking/working surface and cient to protect employees below.
within visual sighting distance of the (2) Toeboards shall be capable of
employee being monitored; withstanding, without failure, a force
(iv) The safety monitor shall be close of at least 50 pounds (222 N) applied in
enough to communicate orally with any downward or outward direction at
the employee; and any point along the toeboard.
(v) The safety monitor shall not have (3) Toeboards shall be a minimum of
other responsibilities which could take 31⁄2 inches (9 cm) in vertical height
the monitor’s attention from the moni- from their top edge to the level of the
toring function. walking/working surface. They shall
(2) Mechanical equipment shall not have not more than 1⁄4 inch (0.6 cm)
be used or stored in areas where safety clearance above the walking/working
monitoring systems are being used to surface. They shall be solid or have
monitor employees engaged in roofing openings not over 1 inch (2.5 cm) in
operations on low-slope roofs. greatest dimension.
(3) No employee, other than an em- (4) Where tools, equipment, or mate-
ployee engaged in roofing work [on rials are piled higher than the top edge
low-sloped roofs] or an employee cov- of a toeboard, paneling or screening
ered by a fall protection plan, shall be shall be erected from the walking/
allowed in an area where an employee working surface or toeboard to the top
is being protected by a safety moni- of a guardrail system’s top rail or
toring system. midrail, for a distance sufficient to
(4) Each employee working in a con- protect employees below.
(5) Guardrail systems, when used as
trolled access zone shall be directed to
falling object protection, shall have all
comply promptly with fall hazard
openings small enough to prevent pas-
warnings from safety monitors.
sage of potential falling objects.
(i) Covers. Covers for holes in floors, (6) During the performance of
roofs, and other walking/working sur- overhand bricklaying and related work:
faces shall meet the following require- (i) No materials or equipment except
ments: masonry and mortar shall be stored
(1) Covers located in roadways and within 4 feet (1.2 m) of the working
vehicular aisles shall be capable of sup- edge.
porting, without failure, at least twice (ii) Excess mortar, broken or scat-
the maximum axle load of the largest tered masonry units, and all other ma-
vehicle expected to cross over the terials and debris shall be kept clear
cover. from the work area by removal at reg-
(2) All other covers shall be capable ular intervals.
of supporting, without failure, at least (7) During the performance of roofing
twice the weight of employees, equip- work:
ment, and materials that may be im- (i) Materials and equipment shall not
posed on the cover at any one time. be stored within 6 feet (1.8 m) of a roof
(3) All covers shall be secured when edge unless guardrails are erected at
installed so as to prevent accidental the edge.
332
(ii) Materials which are piled, and the employer must comply with
grouped, or stacked near a roof edge the criteria in paragraph (g) of this sec-
shall be stable and self-supporting. tion.
(8) Canopies, when used as falling ob- (8) Where no other alternative meas-
ject protection, shall be strong enough ure has been implemented, the em-
to prevent collapse and to prevent pen- ployer shall implement a safety moni-
etration by any objects which may fall toring system in conformance with
onto the canopy. § 1926.502(h).
(k) Fall protection plan. This option is (9) The fall protection plan must in-
available only to employees engaged in clude a statement which provides the
leading edge work, precast concrete name or other method of identification
erection work, or residential construc- for each employee who is designated to
tion work (See § 1926.501(b)(2), (b)(12), work in controlled access zones. No
and (b)(13)) who can demonstrate that other employees may enter controlled
it is infeasible or it creates a greater access zones.
hazard to use conventional fall protec- (10) In the event an employee falls, or
tion equipment. The fall protection some other related, serious incident oc-
plan must conform to the following curs, (e.g., a near miss) the employer
provisions. shall investigate the circumstances of
(1) The fall protection plan shall be the fall or other incident to determine
prepared by a qualified person and de- if the fall protection plan needs to be
veloped specifically for the site where changed (e.g. new practices, proce-
the leading edge work, precast concrete dures, or training) and shall implement
work, or residential construction work those changes to prevent similar types
is being performed and the plan must of falls or incidents.
be maintained up to date.
(2) Any changes to the fall protection § 1926.503 Training requirements.
plan shall be approved by a qualified The following training provisions
person. supplement and clarify the require-
(3) A copy of the fall protection plan ments of § 1926.21 regarding the hazards
with all approved changes shall be addressed in subpart M of this part.
maintained at the job site. (a) Training Program. (1) The em-
(4) The implementation of the fall ployer shall provide a training program
protection plan shall be under the su- for each employee who might be ex-
pervision of a competent person. posed to fall hazards. The program
(5) The fall protection plan shall doc- shall enable each employee to recog-
ument the reasons why the use of con- nize the hazards of falling and shall
ventional fall protection systems train each employee in the procedures
(guardrail systems, personal fall arrest to be followed in order to minimize
systems, or safety nets systems) are in- these hazards.
feasible or why their use would create (2) The employer shall assure that
a greater hazard. each employee has been trained, as
(6) The fall protection plan shall in- necessary, by a competent person
clude a written discussion of other qualified in the following areas:
measures that will be taken to reduce (i) The nature of fall hazards in the
or eliminate the fall hazard for workers work area;
who cannot be provided with protec- (ii) The correct procedures for erect-
tion from the conventional fall protec- ing, maintaining, disassembling, and
tion systems. For example, the em- inspecting the fall protection systems
ployer shall discuss the extent to to be used;
which scaffolds, ladders, or vehicle (iii) The use and operation of guard-
mounted work platforms can be used to rail systems, personal fall arrest sys-
provide a safer working surface and tems, safety net systems, warning line
thereby reduce the hazard of falling. systems, safety monitoring systems,
(7) The fall protection plan shall controlled access zones, and other pro-
identify each location where conven- tection to be used;

tional fall protection methods cannot (iv) The role of each employee in the
be used. These locations shall then be safety monitoring system when this
classified as controlled access zones system is used;
333
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
(v) The limitations on the use of me- NOTE: The following appendices to subpart
chanical equipment during the per- M of this part serve as non-mandatory guide-
formance of roofing work on low-sloped lines to assist employers in complying with
the appropriate requirements of subpart M of
roofs;
this part.
(vi) The correct procedures for the
handling and storage of equipment and APPENDIX A TO SUBPART M OF PART
materials and the erection of overhead 1926—DETERMINING ROOF WIDTHS
protection; and
(vii) The role of employees in fall Non-mandatory Guidelines for Complying With
protection plans; § 1926.501(b)(10)
(viii) The standards contained in this (1) This Appendix serves as a guideline to
subpart. assist employers complying with the require-
(b) Certification of training. (1) The ments of § 1926.501(b)(10). Section
employer shall verify compliance with 1910.501(b)(10) allows the use of a safety mon-
itoring system alone as a means of providing
paragraph (a) of this section by pre-
fall protection during the performance of
paring a written certification record. roofing operations on low-sloped roofs 50 feet
The written certification record shall (15.25 m) or less in width. Each example in
contain the name or other identity of the appendix shows a roof plan or plans and
the employee trained, the date(s) of the indicates where each roof or roof area is to
training, and the signature of the per- be measured to determine its width. Section
son who conducted the training or the views or elevation views are shown where ap-
signature of the employer. If the em- propriate. Some examples show ‘‘correct’’
and ‘‘incorrect’’ subdivisions of irregularly
ployer relies on training conducted by
shaped roofs divided into smaller, regularly
another employer or completed prior to shaped areas. In all examples, the dimension
the effective date of this section, the selected to be the width of an area is the
certification record shall indicate the lesser of the two primary dimensions of the
date the employer determined the prior area, as viewed from above. Example A
training was adequate rather than the shows that on a simple rectangular roof,
date of actual training. width is the lesser of the two primary overall
(2) The latest training certification dimensions. This is also the case with roofs
shall be maintained. which are sloped toward or away from the
roof center, as shown in Example B.
(c) Retraining. When the employer has (2) Many roofs are not simple rectangles.
reason to believe that any affected em- Such roofs may be broken down into sub-
ployee who has already been trained areas as shown in Example C. The process of
does not have the understanding and dividing a roof area can produce many dif-
skill required by paragraph (a) of this ferent configurations. Example C gives the
section, the employer shall retrain general rule of using dividing lines of min-
each such employee. Circumstances imum length to minimize the size and num-
where retraining is required include, ber of the areas which are potentially less
than 50 feet (15.25 m) wide. The intent is to
but are not limited to, situations
minimize the number of roof areas where
where: safety monitoring systems alone are suffi-
(1) Changes in the workplace render cient protection.
previous training obsolete; or (3) Roofs which are comprised of several
(2) Changes in the types of fall pro- separate, non-contiguous roof areas, as in
tection systems or equipment to be Example D, may be considered as a series of
used render previous training obsolete; individual roofs. Some roofs have pent-
or houses, additional floors, courtyard open-
ings, or similar architectural features; Ex-
(3) Inadequacies in an affected em- ample E shows how the rule for dividing
ployee’s knowledge or use of fall pro- roofs into subareas is applied to such con-
tection systems or equipment indicate figurations. Irregular, non-rectangular roofs
that the employee has not retained the must be considered on an individual basis, as
requisite understanding or skill. shown in Example F.
334
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A
EXAMPLE A: RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
EXAMPLE B: SLOPED RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
EXAMPLE C: IRREGULARLY SHAPED ROOFS the size of roof areas where the safety moni-
WITH RECTANGULAR SHAPED SECTIONS toring system alone can be used
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
by using dividing lines of minimum length to examples to show the location of dividing
minimize the size and number of the areas lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of
which are potentially less than or equal to 50 width.
feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit
ER09AU94.001</GPH>
335
ER09AU94.000</GPH>
336
ER09AU94.002</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. A
EXAMPLE D: SEPARATE, NON-CONTIGUOUS ROOF AREAS
EXAMPLE E: ROOFS WITH PENTHOUSES, OPEN feet (15.25 meters) in width, in order to limit
COURTYARDS, ADDITIONAL FLOORS, ETC. the size of roof areas where the safety moni-
Such roofs are to be divided into sub-areas toring system alone can be used
by using dividing lines of minimum length to [1926.502(b)(10)]. Dotted lines are used in the
minimize the size and number of the areas examples to show the location of dividing
which are potentially less than or equal to 50
337
ER09AU94.003</GPH>
lines. W denotes incorrect measurements of
width.
338
ER09AU94.004</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. B
EXAMPLE F: IRREGULAR, NON-RECTANGULAR SHAPED ROOFS
APPENDIX B TO SUBPART M OF PART plying with these requirements. An employer

1926—GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS may use these guidelines as a starting point
for designing guardrail systems. However,
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying with the guidelines do not provide all the infor-
§ 1926.502(b) mation necessary to build a complete sys-
tem, and the employer is still responsible for
The standard requires guardrail systems

and components to be designed and built to designing and assembling these components
meet the requirements of § 1926.502 (b) (3), (4), in such a way that the completed system
and (5). This Appendix serves as a non-man- will meet the requirements of § 1926.502(b) (3),
datory guideline to assist employers in com- (4), and (5). Components for which no specific
339
ER09AU94.005</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
guidelines are given in this Appendix (e.g., of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96 cm
joints, base connections, components made plus or minus 10 cm).
with other materials, and components with (5) The lanyard or lifeline used to create
other dimensions) must also be designed and the free fall distance should be supplied with
constructed in such a way that the com- the system, or in its absence, the least elas-
pleted system meets the requirements of tic lanyard or lifeline available to be used
§ 1926.502. with the system.
(1) For wood railings: Wood components (6) The test weight for each test should be
shall be minimum 1500 lb-ft/in2 fiber (stress hoisted to the required level and should be
grade) construction grade lumber; the posts quickly released without having any appre-
shall be at least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm×10 ciable motion imparted to it.
cm) lumber spaced not more than 8 feet (2.4 (7) The system’s performance should be
m) apart on centers; the top rail shall be at evaluated taking into account the range of
least 2-inch by 4-inch (5 cm×10 cm) lumber, environmental conditions for which it is de-
the intermediate rail shall be at least 1-inch signed to be used.
by 6-inch (2.5 cm×15 cm) lumber. All lumber (8) Following the test, the system need not
dimensions are nominal sizes as provided by be capable of further operation.
the American Softwood Lumber Standards, (c) Strength test. (1) During the testing of
dated January 1970. all systems, a test weight of 300 pounds plus
or minus 5 pounds (135 kg plus or minus 2.5
(2) For pipe railings: posts, top rails, and
kg) should be used. (See paragraph (b)(4) of
intermediate railings shall be at least one
this section.)
and one-half inches nominal diameter
(2) The test consists of dropping the test
(schedule 40 pipe) with posts spaced not more
weight once. A new unused system should be
than 8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. used for each test.
(3) For structural steel railings: posts, top (3) For lanyard systems, the lanyard
rails, and intermediate rails shall be at least length should be 6 feet plus or minus 2 inches
2-inch by 2-inch (5 cm×10 cm) by 3⁄8-inch (1.1 (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) as measured from
cm) angles, with posts spaced not more than the fixed anchorage to the attachment on
8 feet (2.4 m) apart on centers. the body belt or body harness.
(4) For rope-grab-type deceleration sys-
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART M OF PART tems, the length of the lifeline above the
1926—PERSONAL FALL ARREST SYSTEMS centerline of the grabbing mechanism to the
lifeline’s anchorage point should not exceed
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With 2 feet (0.61 m).
§ 1926.502(d) (5) For lanyard systems, for systems with
deceleration devices which do not automati-
I. Test methods for personal fall arrest systems
cally limit free fall distance to 2 feet (0.61 m)
and positioning device systems—(a) General.
or less, and for systems with deceleration de-
This appendix serves as a non-mandatory
vices which have a connection distance in ex-
guideline to assist employers comply with
cess of 1 foot (0.3 m) (measured between the
the requirements in § 1926.502(d). Paragraphs
centerline of the lifeline and the attachment
(b), (c), (d) and (e) of this Appendix describe
point to the body belt or harness), the test
test procedures which may be used to deter-
weight should be rigged to free fall a dis-
mine compliance with the requirements in
tance of 7.5 feet (2.3 m) from a point that is
§ 1926.502 (d)(16). As noted in Appendix D of
1.5 feet (.46 m) above the anchorage point, to
this subpart, the test methods listed here in
its hanging location (6 feet below the anchor-
Appendix C can also be used to assist em-
age). The test weight should fall without in-
ployers comply with the requirements in
terference, obstruction, or hitting the floor
§ 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) for positioning device
or ground during the test. In some cases a
systems.
non-elastic wire lanyard of sufficient length
(b) General conditions for all tests in the Ap- may need to be added to the system (for test
pendix to § 1926.502(d). (1) Lifelines, lanyards purposes) to create the necessary free fall
and deceleration devices should be attached distance.
to an anchorage and connected to the body- (6) For deceleration device systems with
belt or body harness in the same manner as integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
they would be when used to protect employ- matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet
ees. (0.61 m) or less, the test weight should be
(2) The anchorage should be rigid, and rigged to free fall a distance of 4 feet (1.22
should not have a deflection greater than m).
0.04 inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 (7) Any weight which detaches from the
pounds (10 kN) is applied. belt or harness has failed the strength test.
(3) The frequency response of the load (d) Force test—(1) General. The test consists
measuring instrumentation should be 500 Hz. of dropping the respective test weight once
(4) The test weight used in the strength as specified in paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (d)(3)(i)
and force tests should be a rigid, metal, cy- of this section. A new, unused system should
lindrical or torso-shaped object with a girth be used for each test.
340
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C
(2) For lanyard systems. (i) A test weight of (3) Other self-activating-type deceleration de-
220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg vices. The locking mechanisms of other self-
plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See activating-type deceleration devices de-
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix). signed for more than one arrest should lock
(ii) Lanyard length should be 6 feet plus or each of 1,000 times as they would in normal
minus two inches (1.83 m plus or minus 5 cm) service.
as measured from the fixed anchorage to the II. Additional non-mandatory guidelines for
attachment on the body belt or body har- personal fall arrest systems. The following in-
ness. formation constitutes additional guidelines
(iii) The test weight should fall free from for use in complying with requirements for a
the anchorage level to its hanging location personal fall arrest system.
(a total of 6 feet (1.83 m) free fall distance) (a) Selection and use considerations. (1) The
without interference, obstruction, or hitting kind of personal fall arrest system selected
the floor or ground during the test. should match the particular work situation,
(3) For all other systems. (i) A test weight of and any possible free fall distance should be
220 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds (100 kg kept to a minimum. Consideration should be
plus or minus 1.6 kg) should be used. (See given to the particular work environment.
paragraph (b)(4) of this appendix) For example, the presence of acids, dirt,
(ii) The free fall distance to be used in the moisture, oil, grease, etc., and their effect on
test should be the maximum fall distance the system, should be evaluated. Hot or cold
physically permitted by the system during environments may also have an adverse ef-
normal use conditions, up to a maximum fect on the system. Wire rope should not be
free fall distance for the test weight of 6 feet
used where an electrical hazard is antici-
(1.83 m), except as follows:
pated. As required by the standard, the em-
(A) For deceleration systems which have a ployer must plan to have means available to
connection link or lanyard, the test weight
promptly rescue an employee should a fall
should free fall a distance equal to the con-
occur, since the suspended employee may not
nection distance (measured between the cen-
be able to reach a work level independently.
terline of the lifeline and the attachment
point to the body belt or harness). (2) Where lanyards, connectors, and life-
lines are subject to damage by work oper-
(B) For deceleration device systems with
ations such as welding, chemical cleaning,
integral lifelines or lanyards which auto-
and sandblasting, the component should be
matically limit free fall distance to 2 feet
(0.61 m) or less, the test weight should free protected, or other securing systems should
fall a distance equal to that permitted by the be used. The employer should fully evaluate
system in normal use. (For example, to test the work conditions and environment (in-
a system with a self-retracting lifeline or cluding seasonal weather changes) before se-
lanyard, the test weight should be supported lecting the appropriate personal fall protec-
and the system allowed to retract the life- tion system. Once in use, the system’s effec-
line or lanyard as it would in normal use. tiveness should be monitored. In some cases,
The test weight would then be released and a program for cleaning and maintenance of
the force and deceleration distance meas- the system may be necessary.
ured). (b) Testing considerations. Before pur-
(4) A system fails the force test if the re- chasing or putting into use a personal fall
corded maximum arresting force exceeds arrest system, an employer should obtain
1,260 pounds (5.6 kN) when using a body belt, from the supplier information about the sys-
and/or exceeds 2,520 pounds (11.2 kN) when tem based on its performance during testing
using a body harness. so that the employer can know if the system
(5) The maximum elongation and decelera- meets this standard. Testing should be done
tion distance should be recorded during the using recognized test methods. This Appen-
force test. dix contains test methods recognized for
(e) Deceleration device tests—(1) General. The evaluating the performance of fall arrest
device should be evaluated or tested under systems. Not all systems may need to be in-
the environmental conditions, (such as rain, dividually tested; the performance of some
ice, grease, dirt, type of lifeline, etc.), for systems may be based on data and calcula-
which the device is designed. tions derived from testing of similar sys-
(2) Rope-grab-type deceleration devices. (i) tems, provided that enough information is
Devices should be moved on a lifeline 1,000 available to demonstrate similarity of func-
times over the same length of line a distance tion and design.
of not less than 1 foot (30.5 cm), and the (c) Component compatibility considerations.
mechanism should lock each time. Ideally, a personal fall arrest system is de-
(ii) Unless the device is permanently signed, tested, and supplied as a complete
marked to indicate the type(s) of lifeline system. However, it is common practice for
which must be used, several types (different lanyards, connectors, lifelines, deceleration
diameters and different materials), of life- devices, body belts and body harnesses to be
lines should be used to test the device. interchanged since some components wear
341
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
out before others. The employer and em- can rescue themselves should a fall occur.
ployee should realize that not all compo- The availability of rescue personnel, ladders
nents are interchangeable. For instance, a or other rescue equipment should be evalu-
lanyard should not be connected between a ated. In some situations, equipment which
body belt (or harness) and a deceleration de- allows employees to rescue themselves after
vice of the self-retracting type since this can the fall has been arrested may be desirable,
result in additional free fall for which the such as devices which have descent capa-
system was not designed. Any substitution bility.
or change to a personal fall arrest system (g) Inspection considerations. As required by
should be fully evaluated or tested by a com- § 1926.502(d)(21), personal fall arrest systems
petent person to determine that it meets the must be regularly inspected. Any component
standard, before the modified system is put with any significant defect, such as cuts,
in use. tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching;
(d) Employee training considerations. Thor- alterations or additions which might affect
ough employee training in the selection and its efficiency; damage due to deterioration;
use of personal fall arrest systems is impera- contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives;
tive. Employees must be trained in the safe distorted hooks or faulty hook springs;
use of the system. This should include the tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles;
following: application limits; proper anchor- loose or damaged mountings; non-func-
ing and tie-off techniques; estimation of free tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio-
fall distance, including determination of de- ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from
celeration distance, and total fall distance to service immediately, and should be tagged or
prevent striking a lower level; methods of marked as unusable, or destroyed.
use; and inspection and storage of the sys- (h) Tie-off considerations. (1) One of the
tem. Careless or improper use of the equip- most important aspects of personal fall pro-
ment can result in serious injury or death. tection systems is fully planning the system
Employers and employees should become fa- before it is put into use. Probably the most
miliar with the material in this Appendix, as overlooked component is planning for suit-
well as manufacturer’s recommendations, able anchorage points. Such planning should
before a system is used. Of uppermost impor- ideally be done before the structure or build-
tance is the reduction in strength caused by ing is constructed so that anchorage points
certain tie-offs (such as using knots, tying can be incorporated during construction for
around sharp edges, etc.) and maximum per- use later for window cleaning or other build-
mitted free fall distance. Also, to be stressed ing maintenance. If properly planned, these
are the importance of inspections prior to anchorage points may be used during con-
use, the limitations of the equipment, and struction, as well as afterwards.
unique conditions at the worksite which may (i) Properly planned anchorages should be
be important in determining the type of sys- used if they are available. In some cases, an-
tem to use. chorages must be installed immediately
(e) Instruction considerations. Employers prior to use. In such cases, a registered pro-
should obtain comprehensive instructions fessional engineer with experience in design-
from the supplier as to the system’s proper ing fall protection systems, or another quali-
use and application, including, where appli- fied person with appropriate education and
cable: experience should design an anchor point to
(1) The force measured during the sample be installed.
force test; (ii) In other cases, the Agency recognizes
(2) The maximum elongation measured for that there will be a need to devise an anchor
lanyards during the force test; point from existing structures. Examples of
(3) The deceleration distance measured for what might be appropriate anchor points are
deceleration devices during the force test; steel members or I-beams if an acceptable
(4) Caution statements on critical use limi- strap is available for the connection (do not
tations; use a lanyard with a snaphook clipped onto
(5) Application limits; itself); large eye-bolts made of an appro-
(6) Proper hook-up, anchoring and tie-off priate grade steel; guardrails or railings if
techniques, including the proper dee-ring or they have been designed for use as an anchor
other attachment point to use on the body point; or masonry or wood members only if
belt and harness for fall arrest; the attachment point is substantial and pre-
(7) Proper climbing techniques; cautions have been taken to assure that
(8) Methods of inspection, use, cleaning, bolts or other connectors will not pull
and storage; and through. A qualified person should be used to
(9) Specific lifelines which may be used. evaluate the suitable of these ‘‘make shift’’
This information should be provided to em- anchorages with a focus on proper strength.
ployees during training. (2) Employers and employees should at all

(f) Rescue considerations. As required by times be aware that the strength of a per-
§ 1926.502(d)(20), when personal fall arrest sys- sonal fall arrest system is based on its being
tems are used, the employer must assure attached to an anchoring system which does
that employees can be promptly rescued or not reduce the strength of the system (such
342
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. C
as a properly dimensioned eye-bolt/snap- greatly reduced if the force is applied at an
hook anchorage). Therefore, if a means of at- angle to this axis (in the direction of shear).
tachment is used that will reduce the Also, care should be exercised in selecting
strength of the system, that component the proper diameter of the eye to avoid acci-
should be replaced by a stronger one, but one dental disengagement of snap-hooks not de-
that will also maintain the appropriate max- signed to be compatible for the connection.
imum arrest force characteristics. (8) Due to the significant reduction in the
(3) Tie-off using a knot in a rope lanyard or strength of the lifeline/lanyard (in some
lifeline (at any location) can reduce the life- cases, as much as a 70 percent reduction), the
line or lanyard strength by 50 percent or sliding hitch knot (prusik) should not be
more. Therefore, a stronger lanyard or life- used for lifeline/lanyard connections except
line should be used to compensate for the in emergency situations where no other
weakening effect of the knot, or the lanyard available system is practical. The ‘‘one-and-
length should be reduced (or the tie-off loca- one’’ sliding hitch knot should never be used
tion raised) to minimize free fall distance, or because it is unreliable in stopping a fall.
the lanyard or lifeline should be replaced by The ‘‘two-and-two,’’ or ‘‘three-and-three’’
one which has an appropriately incorporated knot (preferable) may be used in emergency
connector to eliminate the need for a knot. situations; however, care should be taken to
(4) Tie-off of a rope lanyard or lifeline limit free fall distance to a minimum be-
around an ‘‘H’’ or ‘‘I’’ beam or similar sup- cause of reduced lifeline/lanyard strength.
port can reduce its strength as much as 70 (i) Vertical lifeline considerations. As re-
percent due to the cutting action of the quired by the standard, each employee must
beam edges. Therefore, use should be made of have a separate lifeline [except employees
a webbing lanyard or wire core lifeline engaged in constructing elevator shafts who
around the beam; or the lanyard or lifeline are permitted to have two employees on one
should be protected from the edge; or free lifeline] when the lifeline is vertical. The
fall distance should be greatly minimized. reason for this is that in multiple tie-offs to
(5) Tie-off where the line passes over or a single lifeline, if one employee falls, the
around rough or sharp surfaces reduces movement of the lifeline during the arrest of
strength drastically. Such a tie-off should be the fall may pull other employees’ lanyards,
avoided or an alternative tie-off rigging causing them to fall as well.
should be used. Such alternatives may in- (j) Snap-hook considerations. (1) Although
clude use of a snap-hook/dee ring connection, not required by this standard for all connec-
wire rope tie-off, an effective padding of the tions until January 1, 1998, locking
surfaces, or an abrasion-resistance strap snaphooks designed for connection to suit-
around or over the problem surface. able objects (of sufficient strength) are high-
(6) Horizontal lifelines may, depending on ly recommended in lieu of the nonlocking
their geometry and angle of sag, be subjected type. Locking snaphooks incorporate a posi-
to greater loads than the impact load im- tive locking mechanism in addition to the
posed by an attached component. When the spring loaded keeper, which will not allow
angle of horizontal lifeline sag is less than 30 the keeper to open under moderate pressure
degrees, the impact force imparted to the without someone first releasing the mecha-
lifeline by an attached lanyard is greatly nism. Such a feature, properly designed, ef-
amplified. For example, with a sag angle of fectively prevents roll-out from occurring.
15 degrees, the force amplification is about (2) As required by § 1926.502(d)(6), the fol-
2:1 and at 5 degrees sag, it is about 6:1. De- lowing connections must be avoided (unless
pending on the angle of sag, and the line’s properly designed locking snaphooks are
elasticity, the strength of the horizontal life- used) because they are conditions which can
line and the anchorages to which it is at- result in roll-out when a nonlocking
tached should be increased a number of snaphook is used:
times over that of the lanyard. Extreme care (i) Direct connection of a snaphook to a
should be taken in considering a horizontal horizontal lifeline.
lifeline for multiple tie-offs. The reason for (ii) Two (or more) snaphooks connected to
this is that in multiple tie-offs to a hori- one dee-ring.
zontal lifeline, if one employee falls, the (iii) Two snaphooks connected to each
movement of the falling employee and the other.
horizontal lifeline during arrest of the fall (iv) A snaphook connected back on its inte-
may cause other employees to fall also. Hori- gral lanyard.
zontal lifeline and anchorage strength should (v) A snaphook connected to a webbing
be increased for each additional employee to loop or webbing lanyard.
be tied off. For these and other reasons, the (vi) Improper dimensions of the dee-ring,
design of systems using horizontal lifelines rebar, or other connection point in relation
must only be done by qualified persons. Test- to the snaphook dimensions which would
ing of installed lifelines and anchors prior to allow the snaphook keeper to be depressed
use is recommended. by a turning motion of the snaphook.
(7) The strength of an eye-bolt is rated (k) Free fall considerations. The employer
along the axis of the bolt and its strength is and employee should at all times be aware
343
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
that a system’s maximum arresting force is be considered. In addition, when a body belt
evaluated under normal use conditions es- is used, the employee’s body will go through
tablished by the manufacturer, and in no a horizontal position to a jack-knifed posi-
case using a free fall distance in excess of 6 tion during the arrest of all falls. Thus, ob-
feet (1.8 m). A few extra feet of free fall can structions which might interfere with this
significantly increase the arresting force on motion should be avoided or a severe injury
the employee, possibly to the point of caus- could occur.
ing injury. Because of this, the free fall dis- (n) Other considerations. Because of the de-
tance should be kept at a minimum, and, as sign of some personal fall arrest systems, ad-
required by the standard, in no case greater ditional considerations may be required for
than 6 feet (1.8 m). To help assure this, the proper tie-off. For example, heavy decelera-
tie-off attachment point to the lifeline or an- tion devices of the self-retracting type
chor should be located at or above the con- should be secured overhead in order to avoid
nection point of the fall arrest equipment to the weight of the device having to be sup-
belt or harness. (Since otherwise additional
ported by the employee. Also, if self- retract-
free fall distance is added to the length of
ing equipment is connected to a horizontal
the connecting means (i.e. lanyard)). Attach-
lifeline, the sag in the lifeline should be
ing to the working surface will often result
minimized to prevent the device from sliding
in a free fall greater than 6 feet (1.8 m). For
down the lifeline to a position which creates
instance, if a 6 foot (1.8 m) lanyard is used,
a swing hazard during fall arrest. In all
the total free fall distance will be the dis-
tance from the working level to the body cases, manufacturer’s instructions should be
belt (or harness) attachment point plus the 6 followed.
feet (1.8 m) of lanyard length. Another im-
portant consideration is that the arresting APPENDIX D TO SUBPART M OF PART
force which the fall system must withstand 1926—POSITIONING DEVICE SYSTEMS
also goes up with greater distances of free
fall, possibly exceeding the strength of the Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With
system. § 1926.502(e)
(l) Elongation and deceleration distance con- I. Testing Methods For Positioning Device
siderations. Other factors involved in a proper Systems. This appendix serves as a non-man-
tie-off are elongation and deceleration dis- datory guideline to assist employers comply
tance. During the arresting of a fall, a lan- with the requirements for positioning device
yard will experience a length of stretching or systems in § 1926.502(e). Paragraphs (b), (c),
elongation, whereas activation of a decelera- (d) and (e) of Appendix C of subpart M relat-
tion device will result in a certain stopping ing to § 1926.502(d)—Personal Fall Arrest Sys-
distance. These distances should be available tems—set forth test procedures which may
with the lanyard or device’s instructions and
be used, along with the procedures listed
must be added to the free fall distance to ar-
below, to determine compliance with the re-
rive at the total fall distance before an em-
quirements for positioning device systems in
ployee is fully stopped. The additional stop-
§ 1926.502(e) (3) and (4) of subpart M.
ping distance may be very significant if the
lanyard or deceleration device is attached (a) General. (1) Single strap positioning de-
near or at the end of a long lifeline, which vices shall have one end attached to a fixed
may itself add considerable distance due to anchorage and the other end connected to a
its own elongation. As required by the stand- body belt or harness in the same manner as
ard, sufficient distance to allow for all of they would be used to protect employees.
these factors must also be maintained be- Double strap positioning devices, similar to
tween the employee and obstructions below, window cleaner’s belts, shall have one end of
to prevent an injury due to impact before the the strap attached to a fixed anchorage and
system fully arrests the fall. In addition, a the other end shall hang free. The body belt
minimum of 12 feet (3.7 m) of lifeline should or harness shall be attached to the strap in
be allowed below the securing point of a rope the same manner as it would be used to pro-
grab type deceleration device, and the end tect employees. The two strap ends shall be
terminated to prevent the device from slid- adjusted to their maximum span.
ing off the lifeline. Alternatively, the lifeline (2) The fixed anchorage shall be rigid, and
should extend to the ground or the next shall not have a deflection greater than .04
working level below. These measures are inches (1 mm) when a force of 2,250 pounds
suggested to prevent the worker from inad- (10 kN) is applied.
vertently moving past the end of the lifeline (3) During the testing of all systems, a test
and having the rope grab become disengaged weight of 250 pounds plus or minus 3 pounds
from the lifeline. (113 kg plus or minus 1.6 kg) shall be used.
(m) Obstruction considerations. The location The weight shall be a rigid object with a
of the tie-off should also consider the hazard girth of 38 inches plus or minus 4 inches (96
of obstructions in the potential fall path of cm plus or minus 10 cm).
the employee. Tie-offs which minimize the (4) Each test shall consist of dropping the
possibilities of exaggerated swinging should specified weight one time without failure of
344
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E
the system being tested. A new system shall SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLANS
be used for each test.
(5) The test weight for each test shall be Fall Protection Plan For Precast/Prestress
Concrete Structures
hoisted exactly 4 feet (1.2 m above its ‘‘at
rest’’ position), and shall be dropped so as to This Fall Protection Plan is specific for
permit a vertical free fall of 4 feet (1.2 m). the following project:
(6) The test is failed whenever any break- Location of Job lllllllllllllll
age or slippage occurs which permits the Erecting Company lllllllllllll
weight to fall free of the system. Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll
(7) Following the test, the system need not Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll
be capable of further operation; however, all Plan Approved By llllllllllllll
such incapacities shall be readily apparent. Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll
The following Fall Protection Plan is a
II. Inspection Considerations. As required in
sample program prepared for the prevention
§ 1926.502 (e)(5), positioning device systems of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro-
must be regularly inspected. Any component tection Plan must be developed and evalu-
with any significant defect, such as cuts, ated on a site by site basis. It is rec-
tears, abrasions, mold, or undue stretching; ommended that erectors discuss the written
alterations or additions which might affect Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area
its efficiency; damage due to deterioration; Office prior to going on a jobsite.
contact with fire, acids, or other corrosives;
distorted hooks or faulty hook springs; I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY
tongues unfitted to the shoulder of buckles; (Company Name) is dedicated to the pro-
loose or damaged mountings; non-func- tection of its employees from on-the-job in-
tioning parts; or wearing or internal deterio- juries. All employees of (Company Name)
ration in the ropes must be withdrawn from have the responsibility to work safely on the
service immediately, and should be tagged or job. The purpose of this plan is: (a) To sup-
marked as unusable, or destroyed. plement our standard safety policy by pro-
viding safety standards specifically designed
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART M OF PART to cover fall protection on this job and; (b) to
1926—SAMPLE FALL PROTECTION PLAN ensure that each employee is trained and
made aware of the safety provisions which
Non-Mandatory Guidelines for Complying With are to be implemented by this plan prior to
§ 1926.502(k) the start of erection.
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the
Employers engaged in leading edge work, use of other than conventional fall protec-
precast concrete construction work and resi- tion at a number of areas on the project, as
dential construction work who can dem- well as identifying specific activities that re-
onstrate that it is infeasible or creates a quire non-conventional means of fall protec-
greater hazard to use conventional fall pro- tion. These areas include:
tection systems must develop and follow a a. Connecting activity (point of erection).
fall protection plan. Below are sample fall b. Leading edge work.
protection plans developed for precast con- c. Unprotected sides or edge.
crete construction and residential work that d. Grouting.
could be tailored to be site specific for other This plan is designed to enable employers
precast concrete or residential jobsite. This and employees to recognize the fall hazards
sample plan can be modified to be used for on this job and to establish the procedures
that are to be followed in order to prevent
other work involving leading edge work. The
falls to lower levels or through holes and
sample plan outlines the elements that must
openings in walking/working surfaces. Each
be addressed in any fall protection plan. The employee will be trained in these procedures
reasons outlined in this sample fall protec- and strictly adhere to them except when
tion plan are for illustrative purposes only doing so would expose the employee to a
and are not necessarily a valid, acceptable greater hazard. If, in the employee’s opinion,
rationale (unless the conditions at the job this is the case, the employee is to notify the
site are the same as those covered by these foreman of the concern and the concern ad-
sample plans) for not using conventional fall dressed before proceeding.
protection systems for a particular precast Safety policy and procedure on any one
concrete or residential construction work- project cannot be administered, imple-
site. However, the sample plans provide guid- mented, monitored and enforced by any one
ance to employers on the type of information individual. The total objective of a safe, ac-
that is required to be discussed in fall pro- cident free work environment can only be ac-
tection plans. complished by a dedicated, concerted effort
by every individual involved with the project
from management down to the last em-
ployee. Each employee must understand
345
Pt. 1926, Subpt. M, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
their value to the company; the costs of acci- Only individuals with the appropriate experi-
dents, both monetary, physical, and emo- ence, skills, and training will be authorized
tional; the objective of the safety policy and as designated erectors. All employees that
procedures; the safety rules that apply to the will be working as designated erectors under
safety policy and procedures; and what their the safety monitoring system shall have
individual role is in administering, imple- been trained and instructed in the following
menting, monitoring, and compliance of areas:
their safety policy and procedures. This al- 1. Recognition of the fall hazards in the
lows for a more personal approach to compli- work area (at the leading edge and when
ance through planning, training, under- making initial connections—point of erec-
standing and cooperative effort, rather than tion).
by strict enforcement. If for any reason an 2. Avoidance of fall hazards using estab-
unsafe act persists, strict enforcement will lished work practices which have been made
be implemented. known to the employees.
It is the responsibility of (name of com- 3. Recognition of unsafe practices or work-
petent person) to implement this Fall Pro- ing conditions that could lead to a fall, such
tection Plan. (Name of Competent Person) is as windy conditions.
responsible for continual observational safe- 4. The function, use, and operation of safe-
ty checks of their work operations and to en- ty monitoring systems, guardrail systems,
force the safety policy and procedures. The body belt/harness systems, control zones and
foreman also is responsible to correct any other protection to be used.
unsafe acts or conditions immediately. It is 5. The correct procedure for erecting,
the responsibility of the employee to under- maintaining, disassembling and inspecting
stand and adhere to the procedures of this the system(s) to be used.
plan and to follow the instructions of the 6. Knowledge of construction sequence or
foreman. It is also the responsibility of the the erection plan.
employee to bring to management’s atten- A conference will take place prior to start-
tion any unsafe or hazardous conditions or ing work involving all members of the erec-
acts that may cause injury to either them- tion crew, crane crew and supervisors of any
selves or any other employees. Any changes other concerned contractors. This conference
to this Fall Protection Plan must be ap- will be conducted by the precast concrete
proved by (name of Qualified Person). erection supervisor in charge of the project.
During the pre-work conference, erection
II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON procedures and sequences pertinent to this
THIS PROJECT job will be thoroughly discussed and safety
Where conventional fall protection is in- practices to be used throughout the project
feasible or creates a greater hazard at the will be specified. Further, all personnel will
leading edge and during initial connecting be informed that the controlled access zones
activity, we plan to do this work using a are off limits to all personnel other than
safety monitoring system and expose only a those designated erectors specifically
minimum number of employees for the time trained to work in that area.
necessary to actually accomplish the job.
Safety Monitoring System
The maximum number of workers to be mon-
itored by one safety monitor is six (6). We A safety monitoring system means a fall
are designating the following trained em- protection system in which a competent per-
ployees as designated erectors and they are son is responsible for recognizing and warn-
permitted to enter the controlled access ing employees of fall hazards. The duties of
zones and work without the use of conven- the safety monitor are to:
tional fall protection. 1. Warn by voice when approaching the
Safety monitor: open edge in an unsafe manner.
Designated erector: 2. Warn by voice if there is a dangerous sit-
Designated erector: uation developing which cannot be seen by
another person involved with product place-
Designated erector:
ment, such as a member getting out of con-
Designated erector:
trol.
Designated erector:
3. Make the designated erectors aware they
Designated erector: are in a dangerous area.
The safety monitor shall be identified by 4. Be competent in recognizing fall haz-
wearing an orange hard hat. The designated ards.
erectors will be identified by one of the fol- 5. Warn employees when they appear to be
lowing methods: unaware of a fall hazard or are acting in an
1. They will wear a blue colored arm band, unsafe manner.

or 6. Be on the same walking/working surface
2. They will wear a blue colored hard hat, as the monitored employees and within vis-
or ual sighting distance of the monitored em-
3. They will wear a blue colored vest. ployees.
346
7. Be close enough to communicate orally ers will not be removed without the approval
with the employees. of the erection foreman.
8. Not allow other responsibilities to en- Precast concrete column erection through
cumber monitoring. If the safety monitor be- the existing deck requires that many holes
comes too encumbered with other respon- be provided through this deck. These are to
sibilities, the monitor shall (1) stop the erec- be covered and protected. Except for the
tion process; and (2) turn over other respon- opening being currently used to erect a col-
sibilities to a designated erector; or (3) turn umn, all opening protection is to be left un-
over the safety monitoring function to an- disturbed. The opening being uncovered to
other designated, competent person. The erect a column will become part of the point
safety monitoring system shall not be used of erection and will be addressed as part of
when the wind is strong enough to cause this Fall Protection Plan. This uncovering is
loads with large surface areas to swing out of to be done at the erection foreman’s direc-
radius, or result in loss of control of the tion and will only occur immediately prior
load, or when weather conditions cause the to ‘‘feeding’’ the column through the open-
walking-working surfaces to become icy or ing. Once the end of the column is through
slippery. the slab opening, there will no longer exist a
fall hazard at this location.
Control Zone System
III. IMPLEMENTATION OF FALL PROTECTION
A controlled access zone means an area PLAN
designated and clearly marked, in which
leading edge work may take place without The structure being erected is a multistory
the use of guardrail, safety net or personal total precast concrete building consisting of
fall arrest systems to protect the employees columns, beams, wall panels and hollow core
in the area. Control zone systems shall com- slabs and double tee floor and roof members.
ply with the following provisions: The following is a list of the products and
1. When used to control access to areas erection situations on this job:
where leading edge and other operations are
Columns
taking place the controlled access zone shall
be defined by a control line or by any other For columns 10 ft to 36 ft long, employees
means that restricts access. disconnecting crane hooks from columns will
When control lines are used, they shall be work from a ladder and wear a body belt/har-
erected not less than 6 feet (l.8 m) nor more ness with lanyard and be tied off when both
than 60 feet (18 m) or half the length of the hands are needed to disconnect. For tying
member being erected, whichever is less, off, a vertical lifeline will be connected to
from the leading edge. the lifting eye at the top of the column,
2. The control line shall extend along the prior to lifting, to be used with a manually
entire length of the unprotected or leading operated or mobile rope grab. For columns
edge and shall be approximately parallel to too high for the use of a ladder, 36 ft and
the unprotected or leading edge. higher, an added cable will be used to reduce
3. The control line shall be connected on the height of the disconnecting point so that
each side to a guardrail system or wall. a ladder can be used. This cable will be left
4. Control lines shall consist of ropes, in place until a point in erection that it can
wires, tapes, or equivalent materials, and be removed safely. In some cases, columns
supporting stanchions as follows: will be unhooked from the crane by using an
5. Each line shall be flagged or otherwise erection tube or shackle with a pull pin
clearly marked at not more than 6-foot (1.8 which is released from the ground after the
m) intervals with high- visibility material. column is stabilized.
6. Each line shall be rigged and supported The column will be adequately connected
in such a way that its lowest point (includ- and/or braced to safely support the weight of
ing sag) is not less than 39 inches (1 m) from a ladder with an employee on it.
the walking/working surface and its highest
point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from Inverted Tee Beams
the walking/working surface. Employees erecting inverted tee beams, at
7. Each line shall have a minimum break- a height of 6 to 40 ft, will erect the beam,
ing strength of 200 pounds (.88 kN). make initial connections, and final align-
ment from a ladder. If the employee needs to
Holes
reach over the side of the beam to bar or
All openings greater than 12 in.×12 in. will make an adjustment to the alignment of the
have perimeter guarding or covering. All beam, they will mount the beam and be tied
predetermined holes will have the plywood off to the lifting device in the beam after en-
covers made in the precasters’ yard and suring the load has been stabilized on its
shipped with the member to the jobsite. bearing. To disconnect the crane from the
Prior to cutting holes on the job, proper pro- beam an employee will stand a ladder
tection for the hole must be provided to pro- against the beam. Because the use of ladders
tect the workers. Perimeter guarding or cov- is not practical at heights above 40 ft, beams
347
will be initially placed with the use of tag under the control of the safety monitor for
lines and their final alignment made by a fall protection and are directed to stay a
person on a manlift or similar employee po- minimum of six (6) ft from the edge. In the
sitioning systems. event a designated erector must move from
one end of a member, which has just been
Spandrel Beams placed at the leading edge, they must first
Spandrel beams at the exterior of the move away from the leading edge a min-
building will be aligned as closely as possible imum of six (6) ft and then progress to the
with the use of tag lines with the final place- other end while maintaining the minimum
ment of the spandrel beam made from a lad- distance of six (6) ft at all times.
der at the open end of the structure. A ladder Erection of double tees, where conditions
will be used to make the initial connections require bearing of one end into a closed
and a ladder will be used to disconnect the pocket and the other end on a beam ledge,
crane. The other end of the beam will be restricting the tee legs from going directly
placed by the designated erector from the into the pockets, require special consider-
double tee deck under the observation of the ations. The tee legs that are to bear in the
safety monitor. closed pocket must hang lower than those at
The beams will be adequately connected the beam bearing. The double tee will be
and/or braced to safely support the weight of ‘‘two-lined’’ in order to elevate one end high-
er than the other to allow for the low end to
a ladder with an employee on it.
be ducked into the closed pocket using the
Floor and Roof Members following procedure.
The double tee will be rigged with a stand-
During installation of the precast concrete ard four-way spreader off of the main load
floor and/or roof members, the work deck line. An additional choker will be attached
continuously increases in area as more and to the married point of the two-legged
more units are being erected and positioned. spreader at the end of the tee that is to be
Thus, the unprotected floor/roof perimeter is elevated. The double tee will be hoisted with
constantly modified with the leading edge the main load line and swung into a position
changing location as each member is in- as close as possible to the tee’s final bearing
stalled. The fall protection for workers at elevation. When the tee is in this position
the leading edge shall be assured by properly and stabilized, the whip line load block will
constructed and maintained control zone be lowered to just above the tee deck. At this
lines not more than 60 ft away from the lead- time, two erectors will walk out on the sus-
ing edge supplemented by a safety moni- pended tee deck at midspan of the tee mem-
toring system to ensure the safety of all des- ber and pull the load block to the end of the
ignated erectors working within the area de- tee to be elevated and attach the additional
fined by the control zone lines. choker to the load block. The possibility of
The hollow core slabs erected on the ma- entanglement with the crane lines and other
sonry portion of the building will be erected obstacles during this two lining process
and grouted using the safety monitoring sys- while raising and lowering the crane block
tem. Grout will be placed in the space be- on that second line could be hazardous to an
tween the end of the slab and face shell of encumbered employee. Therefore, the des-
the concrete masonry by dumping from a ignated erectors will not tie off during any
wheelbarrow. The grout in the keyways be- part of this process. While the designated
tween the slabs will be dumped from a wheel- erectors are on the double tee, the safety
barrow and then spread with long handled monitoring system will be used. After at-
tools, allowing the worker to stand erect fac- taching the choker, the two erectors then
ing toward the unprotected edge and back step back on the previously erected tee deck
from any work deck edge. and signal the crane operator to hoist the
Whenever possible, the designated erectors load with the whip line to the elevation that
will approach the incoming member at the will allow for enough clearance to let the low
leading edge only after it is below waist end tee legs slide into the pockets when the
height so that the member itself provides main load line is lowered. The erector, who
protection against falls. is handling the lowered end of the tee at the
Except for the situations described below, closed pocket bearing, will step out on the
when the arriving floor or roof member is suspended tee. An erection bar will then be
within 2 to 3 inches of its final position, the placed between the end of the tee leg and the
designated erectors can then proceed to their inside face of the pocketed spandrel member.
position of erection at each end of the mem- The tee is barred away from the pocketed
ber under the control of the safety monitor. member to reduce the friction and lateral
Crane hooks will be unhooked from double force against the pocketed member. As the
tee members by designated erectors under tee is being lowered, the other erector re-
the direction and supervision of the safety mains on the tee which was previously erect-
monitor. ed to handle the other end. At this point the
Designated erectors, while waiting for the tee is slowly lowered by the crane to a point
next floor or roof member, will be constantly where the tee legs can freely slide into the
348
pockets. The erector working the lowered IV. CONVENTIONAL FALL PROTECTION CONSID-
end of the tee must keep pressure on the bar ERED FOR THE POINT OF ERECTION OR LEAD-
between the tee and the face of the pocketed ING EDGE ERECTION OPERATIONS
spandrel member to very gradually let the
A. Personal Fall Arrest Systems
tee legs slide into the pocket to its proper
bearing dimension. The tee is then slowly In this particular erection sequence and
lowered into its final erected position. procedure, personal fall arrest systems re-
The designated erector should be allowed quiring body belt/harness systems, lifelines
onto the suspended double tee, otherwise and lanyards will not reduce possible hazards
there is no control over the horizontal move- to workers and will create offsetting hazards
ment of the double tee and this movement during their usage at the leading edge of pre-
cast/prestressed concrete construction.
could knock the spandrel off of its bearing or
Leading edge erection and initial connec-
the column out of plumb. The control nections are conducted by employees who are
essary to prevent hitting the spandrel can specifically trained to do this type of work
only be done safely from the top of the dou- and are trained to recognize the fall hazards.
ble tee being erected. The nature of such work normally exposes
Loadbearing Wall Panels: The erection of the employee to the fall hazard for a short
the loadbearing wall panels on the elevated period of time and installation of fall protec-
decks requires the use of a safety monitor tion systems for a short duration is not fea-
and a controlled access zone that is a min- sible because it exposes the installers of the
imum of 25 ft and a maximum of 1⁄2 the system to the same fall hazard, but for a
length of the wall panels away from the un- longer period of time.
protected edge, so that designated erectors 1. It is necessary that the employee be able
can move freely and unencumbered when re- to move freely without encumbrance in order
ceiving the panels. Bracing, if required for to guide the sections of precast concrete into
their final position without having lifelines
stability, will be installed by ladder. After
attached which will restrict the employee’s
the braces are secured, the crane will be dis-
ability to move about at the point of erec-
connected from the wall by using a ladder. tion.
The wall to wall connections will also be per- 2. A typical procedure requires 2 or more
formed from a ladder. workers to maneuver around each other as a
Non-Loadbearing Panels (Cladding): The concrete member is positioned to fit into the
locating of survey lines, panel layout and structure. If they are each attached to a life-
other installation prerequisites (prewelding, line, part of their attention must be diverted
etc.) for non-loadbearing panels (cladding) from their main task of positioning a mem-
will not commence until floor perimeter and ber weighing several tons to the task of
floor openings have been protected. In some avoiding entanglements of their lifelines or
areas, it is necessary because of panel con- avoiding tripping over lanyards. Therefore, if
figuration to remove the perimeter protec- these workers are attached to lanyards,
tion as the cladding is being installed. Re- more fall potential would result than from
moval of perimeter protection will be per- not using such a device.
In this specific erection sequence and pro-
formed on a bay to bay basis, just ahead of
cedure, retractable lifelines do not solve the
cladding erection to minimize temporarily
problem of two workers becoming tangled. In
unprotected floor edges. Those workers with- fact, such a tangle could prevent the lifeline
in 6 ft of the edge, receiving and positioning from retracting as the worker moved, thus
the cladding when the perimeter protection potentially exposing the worker to a fall
is removed shall be tied off. greater than 6 ft. Also, a worker crossing
over the lifeline of another worker can cre-
Detailing ate a hazard because the movement of one
Employees exposed to falls of six (6) feet or person can unbalance the other. In the event
more to lower levels, who are not actively of a fall by one person there is a likelihood
engaged in leading edge work or connecting that the other person will be caused to fall
as well. In addition, if contamination such as
activity, such as welding, bolting, cutting,
grout (during hollow core grouting) enters
bracing, guying, patching, painting or other
the retractable housing it can cause exces-
operations, and who are working less than
sive wear and damage to the device and
six (6) ft from an unprotected edge will be could clog the retracting mechanism as the
tied off at all times or guardrails will be in- lanyard is dragged across the deck. Obstruct-
stalled. Employees engaged in these activi- ing the cable orifice can defeat the device’s
ties but who are more than six (6) ft from an shock absorbing function, produce cable
unprotected edge as defined by the control
slack and damage, and adversely affect cable

zone lines, do not require fall protection but extraction and retraction.
a warning line or control lines must be erect- 3. Employees tied to a lifeline can be
ed to remind employees they are approach- trapped and crushed by moving structural
ing an area where fall protection is required. members if the employee becomes restrained
349
by the lanyard or retractable lifeline and ation of erectors’ position is done before the
cannot get out of the path of the moving members are cast. Any hole or other attach-
load. ment must be approved by the engineer who
The sudden movement of a precast con- designed the member. It is possible that
crete member being raised by a crane can be some design restrictions will not allow a
caused by a number of factors. When this member to be weakened by an additional
happens, a connector may immediately have hole; however, it is anticipated that such sit-
to move a considerable distance to avoid in- uations would be the exception, not the rule.
jury. If a tied off body belt/harness is being Attachment points, other than on the deck
used, the connector could be trapped. There- surface, will require removal and/or
fore, there is a greater risk of injury if the patching. In order to remove and/or patch
connector is tied to the structure for this these points, requires the employee to be ex-
specific erection sequence and procedure. posed to an additional fall hazard at an un-
When necessary to move away from a re- protected perimeter. The fact that attach-
tractable device, the worker cannot move at ment points could be available anywhere on
a rate greater than the device locking speed the structure does not eliminate the hazards
typically 3.5 to 4.5 ft/sec. When moving to- of using these points for tying off as dis-
ward the device it is necessary to move at a cussed above. A logical point for tying off on
rate which does not permit cable slack to double tees would be using the lifting loops,
build up. This slack may cause cable retrac- except that they must be cut off to eliminate
tion acceleration and cause a worker to lose a tripping hazard at an appropriate time.
their balance by applying a higher than nor- 5. Providing attachment at a point above
mal jerking force on the body when the cable the walking/working surface would also cre-
suddenly becomes taut after building up mo- ate fall exposures for employees installing
mentum. This slack can also cause damage their devices. Final positioning of a precast
to the internal spring-loaded drum, uneven concrete member requires it to be moved in
coiling of cable on the drum, and possible such a way that it must pass through the
cable damage. area that would be occupied by the lifeline
The factors causing sudden movements for and the lanyards attached to the point
this location include: above. Resulting entanglements of lifelines
and lanyards on a moving member could pull
(a) Cranes employees from the work surface. Also, the
structure is being created and, in most cases,
(1) Operator error. there is no structure above the members
(2) Site conditions (soft or unstable being placed.
ground). (a) Temporary structural supports, in-
(3) Mechanical failure. stalled to provide attaching points for life-
(4) Structural failure. lines limit the space which is essential for
(5) Rigging failure. orderly positioning, alignment and place-
(6) Crane signal/radio communication fail- ment of the precast concrete members. To
ure. keep the lanyards a reasonable and manage-
(b) Weather Conditions able length, lifeline supports would nec-
essarily need to be in proximity to the posi-
(1) Wind (strong wind/sudden gusting)—par- tioning process. A sudden shift of the precast
ticularly a problem with the large surface concrete member being positioned because of
areas of precast concrete members. wind pressure or crane movement could
(2) Snow/rain (visibility). make it strike the temporary supporting
(3) Fog (visibility). structure, moving it suddenly and causing
(4) Cold—causing slowed reactions or me- tied off employees to fall.
chanical problems. (b) The time in manhours which would be
(c) Structure/Product Conditions. expended in placing and maintaining tem-
(1) Lifting Eye failure. porary structural supports for lifeline at-
(2) Bearing failure or slippage. taching points could exceed the expended
(3) Structure shifting. manhours involved in placing the precast
(4) Bracing failure. concrete members. No protection could be
(5) Product failure. provided for the employees erecting the tem-
(d) Human Error. porary structural supports and these sup-
(1) Incorrect tag line procedure. ports would have to be moved for each suc-
(2) Tag line hang-up. cessive step in the construction process, thus
(3) Incorrect or misunderstood crane sig- greatly increasing the employee’s exposure
nals. to the fall hazard.
(4) Misjudged elevation of member. (c) The use of a cable strung horizontally
(5) Misjudged speed of member. between two columns to provide tie off lines
(6) Misjudged angle of member. for erecting or walking a beam for con-
4. Anchorages or special attachment points necting work is not feasible and creates a
could be cast into the precast concrete mem- greater hazard on this multi-story building
bers if sufficient preplanning and consider- for the following reasons:
350
(1) If a connector is to use such a line, it ty block/retractable lifeline anchored to the
must be installed between the two columns. walking-working surface; and the potential
To perform this installation requires an for swing hazards is increased.
erector to have more fall exposure time at- Manufacturers also require that workers
taching the cable to the columns than would not work at a level where the point of
be spent to make the beam to column con- snaphook attachment to the body harness is
nection itself. above the device because this will increase
(2) If such a line is to be installed so that the free fall distance and the deceleration
an erector can walk along a beam, it must be distance and will cause higher forces on the
overhead or below him. For example, if a body in the event of an accidental fall.
connector must walk along a 24 in. wide Manufacturers recommend an anchorage
beam, the presence of a line next to the con- for the retractable lifeline which is immov-
nector at waist level, attached directly to ably fixed in space and is independent of the
the columns, would prevent the connector user’s support systems. A moveable anchor-
from centering their weight over the beam age is one which can be moved around (such
and balancing themselves. Installing the line as equipment or wheeled vehicles) or which
above the connector might be possible on the can deflect substantially under shock load-
first level of a two-story column; however, ing (such as a horizontal cable or very flexi-
the column may extend only a few feet above ble beam). In the case of a very flexible an-
the floor level at the second level or be flush chorage, a shock load applied to the anchor-
with the floor level. Attaching the line to age during fall arrest can cause oscillation of
the side of the beam could be a solution; the flexible anchorage such that the retract-
however, it would require the connector to
able brake mechanism may undergo one or
attach the lanyard below foot level which
more cycles of locking/unlocking/locking
would most likely extend a fall farther than
(ratchet effect) until the anchorage deflec-
6 ft.
tion is dampened. Therefore, use of a move-
(3) When lines are strung over every beam,
able anchorage involves critical engineering
it becomes more and more difficult for the
and safety factors and should only be consid-
crane operator to lower a precast concrete
ered after fixed anchorage has been deter-
member into position without the member
mined to be not feasible.
becoming fouled. Should the member become
entangled, it could easily dislodge the line Horizontal cables used as an anchorage
from a column. If a worker is tied to it at present an additional hazard due to amplifi-
the time, a fall could be caused. cation of the horizontal component of max-
6. The ANSI A10.14–1991 American National imum arrest force (of a fall) transmitted to
Standard for Construction and Demolition the points where the horizontal cable is at-
Operations—Requirements for Safety Belts, tached to the structure. This amplification
Harnesses, Lanyards and Lifelines for Con- is due to the angle of sag of a horizontal
struction and Demolition Use, states that cable and is most severe for small angles of
the anchor point of a lanyard or deceleration sag. For a cable sag angle of 2 degrees the
device should, if possible, be located above horizontal force on the points of cable at-
the wearer’s belt or harness attachment. tachment can be amplified by a factor of 15.
ANSI A10.14 also states that a suitable an- It is also necessary to install the retract-
chorage point is one which is located as high able device vertically overhead to minimize
as possible to prevent contact with an ob- swing falls. If an object is in the worker’s
struction below should the worker fall. Most swing path (or that of the cable) hazardous
manufacturers also warn in the user’s hand- situations exist: (1) due to the swing, hori-
book that the safety block/retractable life- zontal speed of the user may be high enough
line must be positioned above the D-ring to cause injury when an obstacle in the
(above the work space of the intended user) swing fall path is struck by either the user
and OSHA recommends that fall arrest and or the cable; (2) the total vertical fall dis-
restraint equipment be used in accordance tance of the user may be much greater than
with the manufacturer’s instructions. if the user had fallen only vertically without
Attachment of a retractable device to a a swing fall path.
horizontal cable near floor level or using the With retractable lines, overconfidence may
inserts in the floor or roof members may re- cause the worker to engage in inappropriate
sult in increased free fall due to the dorsal behavior, such as approaching the perimeter
D-ring of the full-body harness riding higher of a floor or roof at a distance appreciably
than the attachment point of the snaphook greater than the shortest distance between
to the cable or insert (e.g., 6 foot tall worker the anchorage point and the leading edge.
with a dorsal D-ring at 5 feet above the floor Though the retractable lifeline may arrest a
or surface, reduces the working length to worker’s fall before he or she has fallen a few
only one foot, by placing the anchorage five feet, the lifeline may drag along the edge of
feet away from the fall hazard). In addition, the floor or beam and swing the worker like
impact loads may exceed maximum fall ar- a pendulum until the line has moved to a po-
rest forces (MAF) because the fall arrest D- sition where the distance between the an-
ring would be 4 to 5 feet higher than the safe- chorage point and floor edge is the shortest
351
distance between those two points. Accom- time necessary to position and secure the
panying this pendulum swing is a lowering of concrete member.
the worker, with the attendant danger that 4. Use of safety nets on exposed perimeter
he or she may violently impact the floor or wall openings and opensided floors, causes
some obstruction below. attachment points to be left in architectural
The risk of a cable breaking is increased if concrete which must be patched and filled
a lifeline is dragged sideways across the with matching material after the net sup-
rough surface or edge of a concrete member porting hardware is removed. In order to
at the same moment that the lifeline is patch these openings, additional numbers of
being subjected to a maximum impact load- employees must be suspended by swing
ing during a fall. The typical 3⁄16 in. cable in stages, boatswain chairs or other devices,
a retractable lifeline has a breaking strength thereby increasing the amount of fall expo-
of from 3000 to 3700 lbs. sure time to employees.
7. The competent person, who can take 5. Installed safety nets pose an additional
into account the specialized operations being hazard at the perimeter of the erected struc-
performed on this project, should determine ture where limited space is available in
when and where a designated erector cannot which members can be turned after being
use a personal fall arrest system. lifted from the ground by the crane. There
B. Safety Net Systems would be a high probability that the member
being lifted could become entangled in net
The nature of this particular precast con- hardware, cables, etc.
crete erection worksite precludes the safe 6. The use of safety nets where structural
use of safety nets where point of erection or wall panels are being erected would prevent
leading edge work must take place. movement of panels to point of installation.
1. To install safety nets in the interior To be effective, nets would necessarily have
high bay of the single story portion of the to provide protection across the area where
building poses rigging attachment problems. structural supporting wall panels would be
Structural members do not exist to which set and plumbed before roof units could be
supporting devices for nets can be attached placed.
in the area where protection is required. As 7. Use of a tower crane for the erection of
the erection operation advances, the loca- the high rise portion of the structure poses a
tion of point of erection or leading edge work particular hazard in that the crane operator
changes constantly as each member is at- cannot see or judge the proximity of the load
tached to the structure. Due to this constant in relation to the structure or nets. If the
change it is not feasible to set net sections signaler is looking through nets and sup-
and build separate structures to support the porting structural devices while giving in-
nets. structions to the crane operator, it is not
2. The nature of the erection process for possible to judge precise relationships be-
the precast concrete members is such that tween the load and the structure itself or to
an installed net would protect workers as nets and supporting structural devices. This
they position and secure only one structural could cause the load to become entangled in
member. After each member is stabilized the the net or hit the structure causing poten-
net would have to be moved to a new loca- tial damage.
tion (this could mean a move of 8 to 10 ft or
the possibility of a move to a different level C. Guardrail Systems
or area of the structure) to protect workers
placing the next piece in the construction se- On this particular worksite, guardrails,
quence. The result would be the installation barricades, ropes, cables or other perimeter
and dismantling of safety nets repeatedly guarding devices or methods on the erection
throughout the normal work day. As the floor will pose problems to safe erection pro-
time necessary to install a net, test, and re- cedures. Typically, a floor or roof is erected
move it is significantly greater than the by placing 4 to 10 ft wide structural members
time necessary to position and secure a pre- next to one another and welding or grouting
cast concrete member, the exposure time for them together. The perimeter of a floor and
the worker installing the safety net would be roof changes each time a new member is
far longer than for the workers whom the net placed into position. It is unreasonable and
is intended to protect. The time exposure re- virtually impossible to erect guardrails and
peats itself each time the nets and sup- toe boards at the ever changing leading edge
porting hardware must be moved laterally or of a floor or roof.
upward to provide protection at the point of 1. To position a member safely it is nec-
erection or leading edge. essary to remove all obstructions extending
3. Strict interpretation of § 1926.502(c) re- above the floor level near the point of erec-
quires that operations shall not be under- tion. Such a procedure allows workers to
taken until the net is in place and has been swing a new member across the erected sur-
tested. With the point of erection constantly face as necessary to position it properly
changing, the time necessary to install and without worrying about knocking material
test a safety net significantly exceeds the off of this surface.
352
Hollow core slab erection on the masonry area that could be erected more safely by the
wall requires installation of the perimeter use of these fall protection measures, the
protection where the masonry wall has to be foreman should be notified.
constructed. This means the guardrail is in- A. Scaffolds are not used because:
stalled then subsequently removed to con- 1. The leading edge of the building is con-
tinue the masonry construction. The erector stantly changing and the scaffolding would
will be exposed to a fall hazard for a longer have to be moved at very frequent intervals.
period of time while installing and removing Employees erecting and dismantling the
perimeter protection than while erecting the scaffolding would be exposed to fall hazards
slabs. for a greater length of time than they would
In hollow core work, as in other precast by merely erecting the precast concrete
concrete erection, others are not typically member.
on the work deck until the precast concrete 2. A scaffold tower could interfere with the
erection is complete. The deck is not com- safe swinging of a load by the crane.
plete until the leveling, aligning, and grout- 3. Power lines, terrain and site do not
ing of the joints is done. It is normal prac- allow for the safe use of scaffolding.
tice to keep others off the deck until at least B. Vehicle mounted platforms are not used
the next day after the installation is com- because:
plete to allow the grout to harden. 1. A vehicle mounted platform will not
2. There is no permanent boundary until reach areas on the deck that are erected over
all structural members have been placed in other levels.
the floor or roof. At the leading edge, work- 2. The leading edge of the building is usu-
ers are operating at the temporary edge of ally over a lower level of the building and
the structure as they work to position the this lower level will not support the weight
next member in the sequence. Compliance of a vehicle mounted platform.
with the standard would require a guardrail 3. A vehicle mounted platform could inter-
and toe board be installed along this edge. fere with the safe swinging of a load by the
However, the presence of such a device would crane, either by the crane swinging the load
prevent a new member from being swung over or into the equipment.
over the erected surface low enough to allow 4. Power lines and surrounding site work
workers to control it safely during the posi- do not allow for the safe use of a vehicle
tioning process. Further, these employees mounted platform.
would have to work through the guardrail to C. Crane suspended personnel platforms are
align the new member and connect it to the not used because:
structure. The guardrail would not protect 1. A second crane close enough to suspend
an employee who must lean through it to do any employee in the working and erecting
the necessary work, rather it would hinder area could interfere with the safe swinging of
the employee to such a degree that a greater a load by the crane hoisting the product to
hazard is created than if the guardrail were be erected.
absent. 2. Power lines and surrounding site work
3. Guardrail requirements pose a hazard at do not allow for the safe use of a second
the leading edge of installed floor or roof crane on the job.
sections by creating the possibility of em-
ployees being caught between guardrails and VI. ENFORCEMENT
suspended loads. The lack of a clear work
area in which to guide the suspended load Constant awareness of and respect for fall
into position for placement and welding of hazards, and compliance with all safety rules
members into the existing structure creates are considered conditions of employment.
still further hazards. The jobsite Superintendent, as well as indi-
4. Where erection processes require precast viduals in the Safety and Personnel Depart-
concrete stairways or openings to be in- ment, reserve the right to issue disciplinary
stalled as an integral part of the overall warnings to employees, up to and including
erection process, it must also be recognized termination, for failure to follow the guide-
that guardrails or handrails must not project lines of this program.
above the surface of the erection floor. Such
guardrails should be terminated at the level VII. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS
of the erection floor to avoid placing haz- All accidents that result in injury to work-
ardous obstacles in the path of a member ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves-
being positioned. tigated and reported. It is an integral part of
any safety program that documentation take
V. OTHER FALL PROTECTION MEASURES place as soon as possible so that the cause
CONSIDERED FOR THIS JOB
and means of prevention can be identified to
The following is a list and explanation of prevent a reoccurrence.

other fall protection measures available and In the event that an employee falls or
an explanation of limitations for use on this there is some other related, serious incident
particular jobsite. If during the course of occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de-
erecting the building the employee sees an termine if additional practices, procedures,
353
or training need to be implemented to pre- In these cases, conventional fall protection
vent similar types of falls or incidents from systems may not be the safest choice for
occurring. builders. This plan is designed to enable em-
ployers and employees to recognize the fall
VIII. CHANGES TO PLAN hazards associated with this job and to es-
Any changes to the plan will be approved tablish the safest procedures that are to be
by (name of the qualified person). This plan followed in order to prevent falls to lower
shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the levels or through holes and openings in walk-
job progresses to determine if additional ing/working surfaces.
practices, procedures or training needs to be Each employee will be trained in these pro-
implemented by the competent person to im- cedures and will strictly adhere to them ex-
prove or provide additional fall protection. cept when doing so would expose the em-
Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec- ployee to a greater hazard. If, in the employ-
essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this ee’s opinion, this is the case, the employee is
plan and all approved changes shall be main- to notify the competent person of their con-
tained at the jobsite. cern and have the concern addressed before
proceeding.
Sample Fall Protection Plan for Residential It is the responsibility of (name of com-
Construction petent person) to implement this Fall Pro-
tection Plan. Continual observational safety
(INSERT COMPANY NAME) checks of work operations and the enforce-
This Fall Protection Plan Is Specific For ment of the safety policy and procedures
The Following Project: shall be regularly enforced. The crew super-
Location of Job lllllllllllllll visor or foreman (insert name) is responsible
Date Plan Prepared or Modified llllll for correcting any unsafe practices or condi-
Plan Prepared By llllllllllllll tions immediately.
Plan Approved By llllllllllllll It is the responsibility of the employer to
Plan Supervised By lllllllllllll ensure that all employees understand and
The following Fall Protection Plan is a adhere to the procedures of this plan and to
sample program prepared for the prevention follow the instructions of the crew super-
of injuries associated with falls. A Fall Pro- visor. It is also the responsibility of the em-
tection Plan must be developed and evalu- ployee to bring to management’s attention
ated on a site by site basis. It is rec- any unsafe or hazardous conditions or prac-
ommended that builders discuss the written tices that may cause injury to either them-
Fall Protection Plan with their OSHA Area selves or any other employees. Any changes
Office prior to going on a jobsite. to the Fall Protection Plan must be ap-
proved by (name of qualified person).
I. STATEMENT OF COMPANY POLICY
II. FALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS TO BE USED ON
(Your company name here) is dedicated to THIS JOB
the protection of its employees from on-the-
job injuries. All employees of (Your company Installation of roof trusses/rafters, exterior
name here) have the responsibility to work wall erection, roof sheathing, floor sheathing
safely on the job. The purpose of the plan is and joist/truss activities will be conducted
to supplement our existing safety and health by employees who are specifically trained to
program and to ensure that every employee do this type of work and are trained to rec-
who works for (Your company name here) ognize the fall hazards. The nature of such
recognizes workplace fall hazards and takes work normally exposes the employee to the
the appropriate measures to address those fall hazard for a short period of time. This
hazards. Plan details how (Your company name here)
This Fall Protection Plan addresses the will minimize these hazards.
use of conventional fall protection at a num-
Controlled Access Zones
ber of areas on the project, as well as identi-
fies specific activities that require non-con- When using the Plan to implement the fall
ventional means of fall protection. During protection options available, workers must
the construction of residential buildings be protected through limited access to high
under 48 feet in height, it is sometimes infea- hazard locations. Before any non-conven-
sible or it creates a greater hazard to use tional fall protection systems are used as
conventional fall protection systems at spe- part of the work plan, a controlled access
cific areas or for specific tasks. The areas or zone (CAZ) shall be clearly defined by the
tasks may include, but are not limited to: competent person as an area where a recog-
a. Setting and bracing of roof trusses and nized hazard exists. The demarcation of the
rafters; CAZ shall be communicated by the com-

b. Installation of floor sheathing and petent person in a recognized manner, either
joists; through signs, wires, tapes, ropes or chains.
c. Roof sheathing operations; and (Your company name here) shall take the
d. Erecting exterior walls. following steps to ensure that the CAZ is
354
clearly marked or controlled by the com- exposed to fall hazards while working from
petent person: the top plate installing trusses/rafters:
• All access to the CAZ must be restricted • Only the following trained workers will
to authorized entrants; be allowed to work on the top plate during
• All workers who are permitted in the roof truss or rafter installation:
CAZ shall be listed in the appropriate sec- llllllllllllllllllllllll
tions of the Plan (or be visibly identifiable llllllllllllllllllllllll
by the competent person) prior to implemen- llllllllllllllllllllllll
tation;
• Workers shall have no other duties to
• The competent person shall ensure that
perform during truss/rafter erection proce-
all protective elements of the CAZ be imple-
dures;
mented prior to the beginning of work.
• All trusses/rafters will be adequately
Installation Procedures for Roof Truss and braced before any worker can use the truss/
Rafter Erection rafter as a support;
• Workers will remain on the top plate
During the erection and bracing of roof using the previously stabilized truss/rafter as
trusses/rafters, conventional fall protection a support while other trusses/rafters are
may present a greater hazard to workers. On being erected;
this job, safety nets, guardrails and personal • Workers will leave the area of the se-
fall arrest systems will not provide adequate cured trusses only when it is necessary to se-
fall protection because the nets will cause cure another truss/rafter;
the walls to collapse, while there are no suit- • The first two trusses/rafters will be set
able attachment or anchorage points for from ladders leaning on side walls at points
guardrails or personal fall arrest systems. where the walls can support the weight of
On this job, requiring workers to use a lad- the ladder; and
der for the entire installation process will • A worker will climb onto the interior top
cause a greater hazard because the worker plate via a ladder to secure the peaks of the
must stand on the ladder with his back or first two trusses/rafters being set.
side to the front of the ladder. While erecting
The workers responsible for detaching
the truss or rafter the worker will need both
trusses from cranes and/or securing trusses
hands to maneuver the truss and therefore
at the peaks traditionally are positioned at
cannot hold onto the ladder. In addition, lad-
the peak of the trusses/rafters. There are
ders cannot be adequately protected from
also situations where workers securing
movement while trusses are being maneu-
rafters to ridge beams will be positioned on
vered into place. Many workers may experi-
top of the ridge beam.
ence additional fatigue because of the in-
(Your company name here) shall take the
crease in overhead work with heavy mate-
following steps to protect workers who are
rials, which can also lead to a greater haz-
exposed to fall hazards while securing truss-
ard.
es/rafters at the peak of the trusses/ridge
Exterior scaffolds cannot be utilized on
beam:
this job because the ground, after recent
• Only the following trained workers will
backfilling, cannot support the scaffolding.
be allowed to work at the peak during roof
In most cases, the erection and dismantling
truss or rafter installation:
of the scaffold would expose workers to a
greater fall hazard than erection of the llllllllllllllllllllllll
trusses/rafters. llllllllllllllllllllllll
On all walls eight feet or less, workers will llllllllllllllllllllllll
install interior scaffolds along the interior • Once truss or rafter installation begins,
wall below the location where the trusses/ workers not involved in that activity shall
rafters will be erected. ‘‘Sawhorse’’ scaffolds not stand or walk below or adjacent to the
constructed of 46 inch sawhorses and 2×10 roof opening or exterior walls in any area
planks will often allow workers to be ele- where they could be struck by falling ob-
vated high enough to allow for the erection jects;
of trusses and rafters without working on • Workers shall have no other duties than
the top plate of the wall. securing/bracing the trusses/ridge beam;
In structures that have walls higher than • Workers positioned at the peaks or in the
eight feet and where the use of scaffolds and webs of trusses or on top of the ridge beam
ladders would create a greater hazard, safe shall work from a stable position, either by
working procedures will be utilized when sitting on a ‘‘ridge seat’’ or other equivalent
working on the top plate and will be mon- surface that provides additional stability or
itored by the crew supervisor. During all by positioning themselves in previously sta-
stages of truss/rafter erection the stability of bilized trusses/rafters and leaning into and
the trusses/rafters will be ensured at all reaching through the trusses/rafters;
times. • Workers shall not remain on or in the
(Your company name here) shall take the peak/ridge any longer than necessary to safe-
following steps to protect workers who are ly complete the task.
355
Roof Sheathing Operations are installed. For roofs with pitches in ex-
cess of 9-in-12, slide guards will be installed
Workers typically install roof sheathing
at four-foot intervals.
after all trusses/rafters and any permanent
truss bracing is in place. Roof structures are • When wet weather (rain, snow, or sleet)
unstable until some sheathing is installed, so are present, roof sheathing operations shall
workers installing roof sheathing cannot be be suspended unless safe footing can be as-
protected from fall hazards by conventional sured for those workers installing sheathing.
fall protection systems until it is determined • When strong winds (above 40 miles per
that the roofing system can be used as an an- hour) are present, roof sheathing operations
chorage point. At that point, employees are to be suspended unless wind breakers are
shall be protected by a personal fall arrest erected.
system.
Trusses/rafters are subject to collapse if a Installation of Floor Joists and Sheathing
worker falls while attached to a single truss During the installation of floor sheathing/
with a belt/harness. Nets could also cause joists (leading edge construction), the fol-
collapse, and there is no place to attach lowing steps shall be taken to protect work-
guardrails. ers:
All workers will ensure that they have se- • Only the following trained workers will
cure footing before they attempt to walk on
be allowed to install floor joists or sheath-
the sheathing, including cleaning shoes/boots
ing:
of mud or other slip hazards.
To minimize the time workers must be ex- llllllllllllllllllllllll
posed to a fall hazard, materials will be llllllllllllllllllllllll
staged to allow for the quickest installation llllllllllllllllllllllll
of sheathing. • Materials for the operations shall be con-
(Your company name here) shall take the veniently staged to allow for easy access to
following steps to protect workers who are workers;
exposed to fall hazards while installing roof • The first floor joists or trusses will be
sheathing: rolled into position and secured either from
• Once roof sheathing installation begins, the ground, ladders or sawhorse scaffolds;
workers not involved in that activity shall • Each successive floor joist or truss will
not stand or walk below or adjacent to the be rolled into place and secured from a plat-
roof opening or exterior walls in any area form created from a sheet of plywood laid
where they could be struck by falling ob- over the previously secured floor joists or
jects; trusses;
• The competent person shall determine
• Except for the first row of sheathing
the limits of this area, which shall be clearly
which will be installed from ladders or the
communicated to workers prior to place-
ground, workers shall work from the estab-
ment of the first piece of roof sheathing;
lished deck; and
• The competent person may order work
on the roof to be suspended for brief periods • Any workers not assisting in the leading
as necessary to allow other workers to pass edge construction while leading edges still
through such areas when this would not cre- exist (e.g. cutting the decking for the install-
ate a greater hazard; ers) shall not be permitted within six feet of
• Only qualified workers shall install roof the leading edge under construction.
sheathing;
Erection of Exterior Walls
• The bottom row of roof sheathing may be
installed by workers standing in truss webs; During the construction and erection of ex-
• After the bottom row of roof sheathing is terior walls, employers shall take the fol-
installed, a slide guard extending the width lowing steps to protect workers:
of the roof shall be securely attached to the • Only the following trained workers will
roof. Slide guards are to be constructed of no be allowed to erect exterior walls:
less than nominal 4’’ height capable of lim-
llllllllllllllllllllllll
iting the uncontrolled slide of workers.
Workers should install the slide guard while llllllllllllllllllllllll
standing in truss webs and leaning over the llllllllllllllllllllllll
sheathing; • A painted line six feet from the perim-
• Additional rows of roof sheathing may be eter will be clearly marked prior to any wall
installed by workers positioned on pre- erection activities to warn of the approach-
viously installed rows of sheathing. A slide ing unprotected edge;
guard can be used to assist workers in re- • Materials for operations shall be conven-
taining their footing during successive iently staged to minimize fall hazards; and
sheathing operations; and • Workers constructing exterior walls
• Additional slide guards shall be securely shall complete as much cutting of materials
attached to the roof at intervals not to ex- and other preparation as possible away from
ceed 13 feet as successive rows of sheathing the edge of the deck.
356
III. ENFORCEMENT minations of a qualified engineer com-
Constant awareness of and respect for fall petent in this field and such determina-
hazards, and compliance with all safety rules tions will be appropriately documented
are considered conditions of employment. and recorded. Attachments used with
The crew supervisor or foreman, as well as cranes shall not exceed the capacity,
individuals in the Safety and Personnel De- rating, or scope recommended by the
partment, reserve the right to issue discipli-
manufacturer.
nary warnings to employees, up to and in-
cluding termination, for failure to follow the (2) Rated load capacities, and rec-
guidelines of this program. ommended operating speeds, special
hazard warnings, or instruction, shall
IV. ACCIDENT INVESTIGATIONS be conspicuously posted on all equip-
All accidents that result in injury to work- ment. Instructions or warnings shall be
ers, regardless of their nature, shall be inves- visible to the operator while he is at
tigated and reported. It is an integral part of his control station.
any safety program that documentation take (3) [Reserved]
place as soon as possible so that the cause
(4) Hand signals to crane and derrick
and means of prevention can be identified to
prevent a reoccurrence. operators shall be those prescribed by
In the event that an employee falls or the applicable ANSI standard for the
there is some other related, serious incident type of crane in use. An illustration of
occurring, this plan shall be reviewed to de- the signals shall be posted at the job
termine if additional practices, procedures, site.
or training need to be implemented to pre- (5) The employer shall designate a
vent similar types of falls or incidents from
competent person who shall inspect all
occurring.
machinery and equipment prior to each
V. CHANGES TO PLAN use, and during use, to make sure it is
Any changes to the plan will be approved in safe operating condition. Any defi-
by (name of the qualified person). This plan ciencies shall be repaired, or defective
shall be reviewed by a qualified person as the parts replaced, before continued use.
job progresses to determine if additional (6) A thorough, annual inspection of
practices, procedures or training needs to be the hoisting machinery shall be made
implemented by the competent person to im- by a competent person, or by a govern-
prove or provide additional fall protection.
ment or private agency recognized by
Workers shall be notified and trained, if nec-
essary, in the new procedures. A copy of this the U.S. Department of Labor. The em-
plan and all approved changes shall be main- ployer shall maintain a record of the
tained at the jobsite. dates and results of inspections for
[59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
each hoisting machine and piece of
equipment.
(7) Wire rope shall be taken out of
Subpart N—Cranes, Derricks, service when any of the following con-
Hoists, Elevators, and Conveyors ditions exist:
(i) In running ropes, six randomly
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours distributed broken wires in one lay or
and Safety Standards Act (Construction three broken wires in one strand in one
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- lay;
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
(ii) Wear of one-third the original di-
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR ameter of outside individual wires.
25059), or 9–83 (49 FR 35736), as applicable. Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any
Section 1926.550 also issued under 29 CFR other damage resulting in distortion of
Part 1911. the rope structure;
(iii) Evidence of any heat damage
§ 1926.550 Cranes and derricks. from any cause;
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- (iv) Reductions from nominal diame-
ployer shall comply with the manufac- ter of more than one-sixty-fourth inch
turer’s specifications and limitations for diameters up to and including five-
applicable to the operation of any and sixteenths inch, one-thirty-second inch
all cranes and derricks. Where manu- for diameters three-eighths inch to and
facturer’s specifications are not avail- including one-half inch, three-sixty-
able, the limitations assigned to the fourths inch for diameters nine-six-
equipment shall be based on the deter- teenths inch to and including three-
357
fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch for di- (14) Fuel tank filler pipe shall be lo-
ameters seven-eighths inch to 11⁄8 cated in such a position, or protected
inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds in such manner, as to not allow spill or
inch for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches in- overflow to run onto the engine, ex-
clusive; haust, or electrical equipment of any
(v) In standing ropes, more than two machine being fueled.
broken wires in one lay in sections be- (i) An accessible fire extinguisher of
yond end connections or more than one 5BC rating, or higher, shall be avail-
broken wire at an end connection. able at all operator stations or cabs of
(vi) Wire rope safety factors shall be equipment.
in accordance with American National (ii) All fuels shall be transported,
Standards Institute B30.5–1968 or SAE stored, and handled to meet the rules
J959–1966. of subpart F of this part. When fuel is
(8) Belts, gears, shafts, pulleys, transported by vehicles on public high-
sprockets, spindles, drums, fly wheels, ways, Department of Transportation
chains, or other reciprocating, rotat- rules contained in 49 CFR Parts 177 and
ing, or other moving parts or equip- 393 concerning such vehicular transpor-
ment shall be guarded if such parts are tation are considered applicable.
exposed to contact by employees, or (15) Except where electrical distribu-
otherwise create a hazard. Guarding tion and transmission lines have been
shall meet the requirements of the deenergized and visibly grounded at
American National Standards Institute point of work or where insulating bar-
B15.1–1958 Rev., Safety Code for Me- riers, not a part of or an attachment to
chanical Power Transmission Appa- the equipment or machinery, have been
ratus. erected to prevent physical contact
(9) Accessible areas within the swing with the lines, equipment or machines
radius of the rear of the rotating super- shall be operated proximate to power
structure of the crane, either perma- lines only in accordance with the fol-
nently or temporarily mounted, shall lowing:
be barricaded in such a manner as to (i) For lines rated 50 kV. or below,
prevent an employee from being struck minimum clearance between the lines
or crushed by the crane. and any part of the crane or load shall
(10) All exhaust pipes shall be guard- be 10 feet;
ed or insulated in areas where contact (ii) For lines rated over 50 kV., min-
by employees is possible in the per- imum clearance between the lines and
formance of normal duties. any part of the crane or load shall be 10
(11) Whenever internal combustion feet plus 0.4 inch for each 1 kV. over 50
engine powered equipment exhausts in kV., or twice the length of the line in-
enclosed spaces, tests shall be made sulator, but never less than 10 feet;
and recorded to see that employees are (iii) In transit with no load and boom
not exposed to unsafe concentrations of lowered, the equipment clearance shall
toxic gases or oxygen deficient be a minimum of 4 feet for voltages
atmospheres. less than 50 kV., and 10 feet for
(12) All windows in cabs shall be of voltages over 50 kV., up to and includ-
safety glass, or equivalent, that intro- ing 345 kV., and 16 feet for voltages up
duces no visible distortion that will to and including 750 kV.
interfere with the safe operation of the (iv) A person shall be designated to
machine. observe clearance of the equipment and
(13) (i) Where necessary for rigging or give timely warning for all operations
service requirements, a ladder, or where it is difficult for the operator to
steps, shall be provided to give access maintain the desired clearance by vis-
to a cab roof. ual means;
(ii) Guardrails, handholds, and steps (v) Cage-type boom guards, insu-
shall be provided on cranes for easy ac- lating links, or proximity warning de-
cess to the car and cab, conforming to vices may be used on cranes, but the
American National Standards Institute use of such devices shall not alter the
B30.5. requirements of any other regulation
(iii) Platforms and walkways shall of this part even if such device is re-
have anti-skid surfaces. quired by law or regulation;
358
(vi) Any overhead wire shall be con- belly slings does not constitute compli-
sidered to be an energized line unless ance with this rule.
and until the person owning such line (2) All crawler, truck, or locomotive
or the electrical utility authorities in- cranes in use shall meet the applicable
dicate that it is not an energized line requirements for design, inspection,
and it has been visibly grounded; construction, testing, maintenance and
(vii) Prior to work near transmitter operation as prescribed in the ANSI
towers where an electrical charge can B30.5–1968, Safety Code for Crawler, Lo-
be induced in the equipment or mate- comotive and Truck Cranes. However,
rials being handled, the transmitter the written, dated, and signed inspec-
shall be de-energized or tests shall be tion reports and records of the monthly
made to determine if electrical charge inspection of critical items prescribed
is induced on the crane. The following in section 5–2.1.5 of the ANSI B30.5–1968
precautions shall be taken when nec- standard are not required. Instead, the
essary to dissipate induced voltages: employer shall prepare a certification
(a) The equipment shall be provided record which includes the date the
with an electrical ground directly to crane items were inspected; the signa-
the upper rotating structure sup- ture of the person who inspected the
porting the boom; and crane items; and a serial number, or
(b) Ground jumper cables shall be at- other identifier, for the crane in-
tached to materials being handled by spected. The most recent certification
boom equipment when electrical record shall be maintained on file until
charge is induced while working near a new one is prepared.
energized transmitters. Crews shall be (c) Hammerhead tower cranes. (1) Ade-
provided with nonconductive poles hav- quate clearance shall be maintained
ing large alligator clips or other simi- between moving and rotating struc-
lar protection to attach the ground tures of the crane and fixed objects to
cable to the load. allow the passage of employees without
(c) Combustible and flammable mate- harm.
rials shall be removed from the imme- (2) Each employee required to per-
diate area prior to operations. form duties on the horizontal boom of
(16) No modifications or additions hammerhead tower cranes shall be pro-
which affect the capacity or safe oper- tected against falling by guardrails or
ation of the equipment shall be made by a personal fall arrest system in con-
by the employer without the manufac- formance with subpart M of this part.
turer’s written approval. If such modi- (3) Buffers shall be provided at both
fications or changes are made, the ca- ends of travel of the trolley.
pacity, operation, and maintenance in- (4) Cranes mounted on rail tracks
struction plates, tags, or decals, shall shall be equipped with limit switches
be changed accordingly. In no case limiting the travel of the crane on the
shall the original safety factor of the track and stops or buffers at each end
equipment be reduced. of the tracks.
(17) The employer shall comply with (5) All hammerhead tower cranes in
Power Crane and Shovel Association use shall meet the applicable require-
Mobile Hydraulic Crane Standard No. ments for design, construction, instal-
2. lation, testing, maintenance, inspec-
(18) Sideboom cranes mounted on tion, and operation as prescribed by
wheel or crawler tractors shall meet the manufacturer.
the requirements of SAE J743a–1964. (d) Overhead and gantry cranes. (1)
(19) All employees shall be kept clear The rated load of the crane shall be
of loads about to be lifted and of sus- plainly marked on each side of the
pended loads. crane, and if the crane has more than
(b) Crawler, locomotive, and truck one hoisting unit, each hoist shall have
cranes. (1) All jibs shall have positive its rated load marked on it or its load
stops to prevent their movement of block, and this marking shall be clear-
more than 5° above the straight line of ly legible from the ground or floor.
the jib and boom on conventional type (2) Bridge trucks shall be equipped
crane booms. The use of cable type with sweeps which extend below the
359
top of the rail and project in front of tion of employees working onboard ma-
the truck wheels. rine vessels specified in § 1926.605.
(3) Except for floor-operated cranes, a (g) Crane or derrick suspended per-
gong or other effective audible warning sonnel platforms—(1) Scope, application
signal shall be provided for each crane and definitions—(i) Scope and applica-
equipped with a power traveling mech- tion. This standard applies to the de-
anism. sign, construction, testing, use and
(4) All overhead and gantry cranes in maintenance of personnel platforms,
use shall meet the applicable require- and the hoisting of personnel platforms
ments for design, construction, instal- on the load lines of cranes or derricks.
lation, testing, maintenance, inspec- (ii) Definitions. For the purposes of
tion, and operation as prescribed in the this paragraph (g), the following defini-
ANSI B30.2.0–1967, Safety Code for tions apply:
Overhead and Gantry Cranes. (A) Failure means load refusal, break-
(e) Derricks. All derricks in use shall age, or separation of components.
meet the applicable requirements for (B) Hoist (or hoisting) means all
design, construction, installation, in- crane or derrick functions such as low-
spection, testing, maintenance, and op- ering, lifting, swinging, booming in and
eration as prescribed in American Na- out or up and down, or suspending a
tional Standards Institute B30.6–1969, personnel platform.
Safety Code for Derricks. (C) Load refusal means the point
(f) Floating cranes and derricks—(1) where the ultimate strength is exceed-
Mobile cranes mounted on barges. (i) ed.
When a mobile crane is mounted on a (D) Maximum intended load means the
barge, the rated load of the crane shall total load of all employees, tools, ma-
not exceed the original capacity speci- terials, and other loads reasonably an-
fied by the manufacturer. ticipated to be applied to a personnel
platform or personnel platform compo-
(ii) A load rating chart, with clearly
nent at any one time.
legible letters and figures, shall be pro-
(E) Runway means a firm, level sur-
vided with each crane, and securely
face designed, prepared and designated
fixed at a location easily visible to the
as a path of travel for the weight and
operator.
configuration of the crane being used
(iii) When load ratings are reduced to
to lift and travel with the crane sus-
stay within the limits for list of the
pended platform. An existing surface
barge with a crane mounted on it, a
may be used as long as it meets these
new load rating chart shall be pro-
criteria.
vided.
(2) General requirements. The use of a
(iv) Mobile cranes on barges shall be crane or derrick to hoist employees on
positively secured. a personnel platform is prohibited, ex-
(2) Permanently mounted floating cept when the erection, use, and dis-
cranes and derricks. (i) When cranes and mantling of conventional means of
derricks are permanently installed on a reaching the worksite, such as a per-
barge, the capacity and limitations of sonnel hoist, ladder, stairway, aerial
use shall be based on competent design lift, elevating work platform or scaf-
criteria. fold, would be more hazardous, or is
(ii) A load rating chart with clearly not possible because of structural de-
legible letters and figures shall be pro- sign or worksite conditions.
vided and securely fixed at a location (3) Cranes and derricks—(i) Operational
easily visible to the operator. criteria. (A) Hoisting of the personnel
(iii) Floating cranes and floating der- platform shall be performed in a slow,
ricks in use shall meet the applicable controlled, cautious manner with no
requirements for design, construction, sudden movements of the crane or der-
installation, testing, maintenance, and rick, or the platform.
operation as prescribed by the manu- (B) Load lines shall be capable of sup-
facturer. porting, without failure, at least seven

(3) Protection of employees working on times the maximum intended load, ex-
barges. The employer shall comply with cept that where rotation resistant rope
the applicable requirements for protec- is used, the lines shall be capable of
360
supporting without failure, at least ten trolled load lowering.) Free fall is pro-
times the maximum intended load. The hibited.
required design factor is achieved by (4) Personnel platforms—(i) Design cri-
taking the current safety factor of 3.5 teria. (A) The personnel platform and
(required under paragraph (b)(2)) of this suspension system shall be designed by
section and applying the 50 per cent de- a qualified engineer or a qualified per-
rating of the crane capacity which is son competent in structural design.
required by paragraph (g)(3)(i)(F) of (B) The suspension system shall be
this section. designed to minimize tipping of the
(C) Load and boom hoist drum platform due to movement of employ-
brakes, swing brakes, and locking de- ees occupying the platform.
vices such as pawls or dogs shall be en- (C) The personnel platform itself, ex-
gaged when the occupied personnel cept the guardrail system and personal
platform is in a stationary working po- fall arrest system anchorages, shall be
sition. capable of supporting, without failure,
(D) The crane shall be uniformly its own weight and at least five times
level within one percent of level grade the maximum intended load. Criteria
and located on firm footing. Cranes for guardrail systems and personal fall
equipped with outriggers shall have arrest system anchorages are con-
them all fully deployed following man- tained in subpart M of this Part.
ufacturer’s specifications, insofar as (ii) Platform specifications. (A) Each
applicable, when hoisting employees. personnel platform shall be equipped
(E) The total weight of the loaded with a guardrail system which meets
personnel platform and related rigging the requirements of subpart M, and,
shall not exceed 50 percent of the rated shall be enclosed at least from the
capaciy for the radius and configura- toeboard to mid-rail with either solid
tion of the crane or derrick. construction or expanded metal having
(F) The use of machines having live openings no greater than 1⁄2 inch (1.27
booms (booms in which lowering is con- cm).
trolled by a brake without aid from (B) A grab rail shall be installed in-
other devices which slow the lowering side the entire perimeter of the per-
speeds) is prohibited. sonnel platform.
(ii) Instruments and components. (A) (C) Access gates, if installed, shall
Cranes and derricks with variable not swing outward during hoisting.
angle booms shall be equipped with a (D) Access gates, including sliding or
boom angle indicator, readily visible to folding gates, shall be equipped with a
the operator. restraining device to prevent acci-
(B) Cranes with telescoping booms dental opening.
shall be equipped with a device to indi- (E) Headroom shall be provided which
cate clearly to the operator, at all allows employees to stand upright in
times, the boom’s extended length, or the platform.
an accurate determination of the load (F) In addition to the use of hard
radius to be used during the lift shall hats, employees shall be protected by
be made prior to hoisting personnel. overhead protection on the personnel
(C) A positive acting device shall be platform when employees are exposed
used which prevents contact between to falling objects.
the load block or overhaul ball and the (G) All rough edges exposed to con-
boom tip (anti-two-blocking device), or tact by employees shall be surfaced or
a system shall be used which deacti- smoothed in order to prevent injury to
vates the hoisting action before dam- employees from punctures or lacera-
age occurs in the event of a two-block- tions.
ing situation (two block damage pre- (H) All welding of the personnel plat-
vention feature). form and its components shall be per-
(D) The load line hoist drum shall formed by a qualified welder familiar
have a system or device on the power with the weld grades, types and mate-
train, other than the load hoist brake, rial specified in the platform design.
which regulates the lowering rate of (I) The personnel platform shall be
speed of the hoist mechanism (con- conspicuously posted with a plate or
361
other permanent marking which indi- platform and the necessary employees,
cates the weight of the platform and their tools and the materials necessary
its rated load capacity or maximum in- to do their work, and shall not be used
tended load. for any other purpose when not hoist-
(iii) Personnel platform loading. (A) ing personnel.
The personnel platform shall not be (5) Trial lift, inspection, and proof test-
loaded in excess of its rated load capac- ing. (i) A trial lift with the unoccupied
ity. When a personnel platform does personnel platform loaded at least to
not have a rated load capacity then the the anticipated liftweight shall be
personnel platform shall not be loaded made from ground level, or any other
in excess of its maximum intended location where employees will enter
load. the platform, to each location at which
(B) The number of employees occu- the personnel platform is to be hoisted
pying the personnel platform shall not and positioned. This trial lift shall be
exceed the number required for the performed immediately prior to plac-
work being performed. ing personnel on the platform. The op-
(C) Personnel platforms shall be used erator shall determine that all sys-
only for employees, their tools, and the tems, controls and safety devices are
materials necessary to do their work, activated and functioning properly;
and shall not be used to hoist only ma- that no interferences exist; and that all
terials or tools when not hoisting per- configurations necessary to reach
sonnel. those work locations will allow the op-
(D) Materials and tools for use during erator to remain under the 50 percent
a personnel lift shall be secured to pre- limit of the hoist’s rated capacity. Ma-
vent displacement. terials and tools to be used during the
(E) Materials and tools for use during actual lift can be loaded in the plat-
a personnel lift shall be evenly distrib- form, as provided in paragraphs
uted within the confines of the plat- (g)(4)(iii) (D), and (E) of this section for
form while the platform is suspended. the trial lift. A single trial lift may be
(iv) Rigging. (A) When a wire rope bri- performed at one time for all locations
dle is used to connect the personnel that are to be reached from a single set
platform to the load line, each bridle up position.
leg shall be connected to a master link (ii) The trial lift shall be repeated
or shackle in such a manner to ensure prior to hoisting employees whenever
that the load is evenly divided among the crane or derrick is moved and set
the bridle legs. up in a new location or returned to a
(B) Hooks on overhaul ball assem- previously used location. Additionally,
blies, lower load blocks, or other at- the trial lift shall be repeated when the
tachment assemblies shall be of a type lift route is changed unless the oper-
that can be closed and locked, elimi- ator determines that the route change
nating the hook throat opening. Alter- is not significant (i.e. the route change
natively, an alloy anchor type shackle would not affect the safety of hoisted
with a bolt, nut and retaining pin may employees.)
be used. (iii) After the trial lift, and just prior
(C) Wire rope, shackles, rings, master to hoisting personnel, the platform
links, and other rigging hardware must shall be hoisted a few inches and in-
be capable of supporting, without fail- spected to ensure that it is secure and
ure, at least five times the maximum properly balanced. Employees shall not
intended load applied or transmitted to be hoisted unless the following condi-
that component. Where rotation resist- tions are determined to exist:
ant rope is used, the slings shall be ca- (A) Hoist ropes shall be free of kinks;
pable of supporting without failure at (B) Multiple part lines shall not be
least ten times the maximum intended twisted around each other;
load. (C) The primary attachment shall be
(D) All eyes in wire rope slings shall centered over the platform; and
be fabricated with thimbles. (D) The hoisting system shall be in-

(E) Bridles and associated rigging for spected if the load rope is slack to en-
attaching the personnel platform to sure all ropes are properly stated on
the hoist line shall be used only for the drums and in sheaves.
362
(iv) A visual inspection of the crane a signal person would create a greater
or derrick, rigging, personnel platform, hazard for that person, direct commu-
and the crane or derrick base support nication alone such as by radio may be
or ground shall be conducted by a com- used.
petent person immediately after the (vii) Except over water, employees
trial lift to determine whether the occupying the personnel platform shall
testing has exposed any defect or pro- use a body belt/harness system with
duced any adverse effect upon any com- lanyard appropriately attached to the
ponent or structure. lower load block or overhaul ball, or to
(v) Any defects found during inspec- a structural member within the per-
tions which create a safety hazard sonnel platform capable of supporting a
shall be corrected before hoisting per- fall impact for employees using the an-
sonnel. chorage. When working over water, the
(vi) At each job site, prior to hoisting requirements of § 1926.106 shall apply.
employees on the personnel platform, (viii) No lifts shall be made on an-
and after any repair or modification, other of the crane’s or derrick’s
the platform and rigging shall be proof loadlines while personnel are sus-
tested to 125 percent of the platform’s pended on a platform.
rated capacity by holding it in a sus- (7) Traveling. (i) Hoisting of employ-
pended position for five minutes with ees while the crane is traveling is pro-
the test load evenly distributed on the hibited, except for portal, tower and lo-
platform (this may be done concur- comotive cranes, or where the em-
rently with the trial lift). After ployer demonstrates that there is no
prooftesting, a competent person shall less hazardous way to perform the
inspect the platform and rigging. Any work.
deficiencies found shall be corrected (ii) Under any circumstances where a
and another proof test shall be con- crane would travel while hoisting per-
ducted. Personnel hoisting shall not be sonnel, the employer shall implement
conducted until the proof testing re- the following procedures to safeguard
quirements are satisfied. employees:
(6) Work practices. (i) Employees shall (A) Crane travel shall be restricted to
keep all parts of the body inside the a fixed track or runway;
platform during raising, lowering, and (B) Travel shall be limited to the
positioning. This provision does not load radius of the boom used during the
apply to an occupant of the platform lift; and
performing the duties of a signal per- (C) The boom must be parallel to the
son. direction of travel.
(ii) Before employees exit or enter a (D) A complete trial run shall be per-
hoisted personnel platform that is not formed to test the route of travel be-
landed, the platform shall be secured to fore employees are allowed to occupy
the structure where the work is to be the platform. This trial run can be per-
performed, unless securing to the formed at the same time as the trial
structure creates an unsafe situation. lift required by paragraph (g)(5)(i) of
(iii) Tag lines shall be used unless this section which tests the route of
their use creates an unsafe condition. the lift.
(iv) The crane or derrick operator (E) If travel is done with a rubber
shall remain at the controls at all tired-carrier, the condition and air
times when the crane engine is running pressure of the tires shall be checked.
and the platform is occupied. The chart capacity for lifts on rubber
(v) Hoisting of employees shall be shall be used for application of the 50
promptly discontinued upon indication percent reduction of rated capacity.
of any dangerous weather conditions or Notwithstanding paragraph (g)(3)(i)(E)
other impending danger. of this section, outriggers may be par-
(vi) Employees being hoisted shall re- tially retracted as necessary for travel.
main in continuous sight of and in di- (8) Pre-lift meeting. (i) A meeting at-
rect communication with the operator tended by the crane or derrick oper-
or signal person. In those situations ator, signal person(s) (if necessary for
where direct visual contact with the the lift), employee(s) to be lifted, and
operator is not possible, and the use of the person responsible for the task to
363
be performed shall be held to review downwash. All loose gear within 100
the appropriate requirements of para- feet of the place of lifting the load, de-
graph (g) of this section and the proce- positing the load, and all other areas
dures to be followed. susceptible to rotor downwash shall be
(ii) This meeting shall be held prior secured or removed.
to the trial lift at each new work loca- (g) Housekeeping. Good housekeeping
tion, and shall be repeated for any em- shall be maintained in all helicopter
ployees newly assigned to the oper- loading and unloading areas.
ation. (h) Operator responsibility. The heli-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, copter operator shall be responsible for
1979, as amended at 52 FR 36382, Sept. 28, size, weight, and manner in which
1987; 53 FR 29139, Aug. 2, 1988; 54 FR 15406, loads are connected to the helicopter.
Apr. 18, 1989; 54 FR 24334, June 7, 1989; 58 FR
35183, June 30, 1993; 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994; If, for any reason, the helicopter oper-
61 FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] ator believes the lift cannot be made
safely, the lift shall not be made.
§ 1926.551 Helicopters. (i) Hooking and unhooking loads. When
(a) Helicopter regulations. Helicopter employees are required to perform
cranes shall be expected to comply work under hovering craft, a safe
with any applicable regulations of the means of access shall be provided for
Federal Aviation Administration. employees to reach the hoist line hook
(b) Briefing. Prior to each day’s oper- and engage or disengage cargo slings.
ation a briefing shall be conducted. Employees shall not perform work
This briefing shall set forth the plan of under hovering craft except when nec-
operation for the pilot and ground per- essary to hook or unhook loads.
sonnel. (j) Static charge. Static charge on the
(c) Slings and tag lines. Load shall be suspended load shall be dissipated with
properly slung. Tag lines shall be of a a grounding device before ground per-
length that will not permit their being sonnel touch the suspended load, or
drawn up into rotors. Pressed sleeve, protective rubber gloves shall be worn
swedged eyes, or equivalent means
by all ground personnel touching the
shall be used for all freely suspended
suspended load.
loads to prevent hand splices from
spinning open or cable clamps from (k) Weight limitation. The weight of an
loosening. external load shall not exceed the man-
(d) Cargo hooks. All electrically oper- ufacturer’s rating.
ated cargo hooks shall have the elec- (l) Ground lines. Hoist wires or other
trical activating device so designed and gear, except for pulling lines or con-
installed as to prevent inadvertent op- ductors that are allowed to ‘‘pay out’’
eration. In addition, these cargo hooks from a container or roll off a reel, shall
shall be equipped with an emergency not be attached to any fixed ground
mechanical control for releasing the structure, or allowed to foul on any
load. The hooks shall be tested prior to fixed structure.
each day’s operation to determine that (m) Visibility. When visibility is re-
the release functions properly, both duced by dust or other conditions,
electrically and mechanically. ground personnel shall exercise special
(e) Personal protective equipment. (1) caution to keep clear of main and sta-
Personal protective equipment for em- bilizing rotors. Precautions shall also
ployees receiving the load shall consist be taken by the employer to eliminate
of complete eye protection and hard as far as practical reduced visibility.
hats secured by chinstraps.
(n) Signal systems. Signal systems be-
(2) Loose-fitting clothing likely to
tween aircrew and ground personnel
flap in the downwash, and thus be
snagged on hoist line, shall not be shall be understood and checked in ad-
worn. vance of hoisting the load. This applies
(f) Loose gear and objects. Every prac- to either radio or hand signal systems.
tical precaution shall be taken to pro- Hand signals shall be as shown in Fig-
vide for the protection of the employ- ure N–1.
ees from flying objects in the rotor
364
(o) Approach distance. No unauthor- (p) Approaching helicopter. Whenever

ized person shall be allowed to ap- approaching or leaving a helicopter

proach within 50 feet of the helicopter with blades rotating, all employees
when the rotor blades are turning. shall remain in full view of the pilot
365
EC30OC91.015</GPH>
and keep in a crouched position. Em- inches; and three thirty-seconds inch
ployees shall avoid the area from the for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches.
cockpit or cabin rearward unless au- (4) Hoisting ropes shall be installed
thorized by the helicopter operator to in accordance with the wire rope manu-
work there. facturers’ recommendations.
(q) Personnel. Sufficient ground per- (5) The installation of live booms on
sonnel shall be provided when required hoists is prohibited.
for safe helicopter loading and unload- (6) The use of endless belt-type
ing operations. manlifts on construction shall be pro-
(r) Communications. There shall be hibited.
constant reliable communication be- (b) Material hoists. (1)(i) Operating
tween the pilot, and a designated em- rules shall be established and posted at
ployee of the ground crew who acts as the operator’s station of the hoist.
a signalman during the period of load- Such rules shall include signal system
ing and unloading. This signalman and allowable line speed for various
shall be distinctly recognizable from loads. Rules and notices shall be posted
other ground personnel. on the car frame or crosshead in a con-
(s) Fires. Open fires shall not be per- spicuous location, including the state-
mitted in an area that could result in ment ‘‘No Riders Allowed.’’
such fires being spread by the rotor (ii) No person shall be allowed to ride
downwash. on material hoists except for the pur-
poses of inspection and maintenance.
§ 1926.552 Material hoists, personnel (2) All entrances of the hoistways
hoists, and elevators.
shall be protected by substantial gates
(a) General requirements. (1) The em- or bars which shall guard the full width
ployer shall comply with the manufac- of the landing entrance. All hoistway
turer’s specifications and limitations entrance bars and gates shall be paint-
applicable to the operation of all hoists ed with diagonal contrasting colors,
and elevators. Where manufacturer’s such as black and yellow stripes.
specifications are not available, the (i) Bars shall be not less than 2- by 4-
limitations assigned to the equipment inch wooden bars or the equivalent, lo-
shall be based on the determinations of cated 2 feet from the hoistway line.
a professional engineer competent in Bars shall be located not less than 36
the field. inches nor more than 42 inches above
(2) Rated load capacities, rec- the floor.
ommended operating speeds, and spe- (ii) Gates or bars protecting the en-
cial hazard warnings or instructions trances to hoistways shall be equipped
shall be posted on cars and platforms. with a latching device.
(3) Wire rope shall be removed from (3) Overhead protective covering of 2-
service when any of the following con- inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood, or
ditions exists: other solid material of equivalent
(i) In hoisting ropes, six randomly strength, shall be provided on the top
distributed broken wires in one rope of every material hoist cage or plat-
lay or three broken wires in one strand form.
in one rope lay; (4) The operator’s station of a hoist-
(ii) Abrasion, scrubbing, flattening, ing machine shall be provided with
or peening, causing loss of more than overhead protection equivalent to tight
one-third of the original diameter of planking not less than 2 inches thick.
the outside wires; The support for the overhead protec-
(iii) Evidence of any heat damage re- tion shall be of equal strength.
sulting from a torch or any damage (5) Hoist towers may be used with or
caused by contact with electrical without an enclosure on all sides. How-
wires; ever, whichever alternative is chosen,
(iv) Reduction from nominal diame- the following applicable conditions
ter of more than three sixty-fourths shall be met:

inch for diameters up to and including (i) When a hoist tower is enclosed, it
three-fourths inch; one-sixteenth inch shall be enclosed on all sides for its en-
for diameters seven-eights to 11⁄8 tire height with a screen enclosure of
366
1⁄2-inch mesh, No. 18 U.S. gauge wire or (6) A door or gate shall be provided at
equivalent, except for landing access. each entrance to the car which shall
(ii) When a hoist tower is not en- protect the full width and height of the
closed, the hoist platform or car shall car entrance opening.
be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides (7) Overhead protective covering of 2-
for the full height between the floor inch planking, 3⁄4-inch plywood or other
and the overhead protective covering solid material or equivalent strength
with 1⁄2-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge shall be provided on the top of every
wire or equivalent. The hoist platform personnel hoist.
enclosure shall include the required (8) Doors or gates shall be provided
gates for loading and unloading. A 6- with electric contacts which do not
foot high enclosure shall be provided allow movement of the hoist when door
on the unused sides of the hoist tower or gate is open.
at ground level. (9) Safeties shall be capable of stop-
ping and holding the car and rated load
(6) Car arresting devices shall be in-
when traveling at governor tripping
stalled to function in case of rope fail-
speed.
ure. (10) Cars shall be provided with a ca-
(7) All material hoist towers shall be pacity and data plate secured in a con-
designed by a licensed professional en- spicuous place on the car or crosshead.
gineer. (11) Internal combustion engines
(8) All material hoists shall conform shall not be permitted for direct drive.
to the requirements of ANSI A10.5–1969, (12) Normal and final terminal stop-
Safety Requirements for Material ping devices shall be provided.
Hoists. (13) An emergency stop switch shall
(c) Personnel hoists. (1) Hoist towers be provided in the car and marked
outside the structure shall be enclosed ‘‘Stop.’’
for the full height on the side or sides (14) Ropes: (i) The minimum number
used for entrance and exit to the struc- of hoisting ropes used shall be three for
ture. At the lowest landing, the enclo- traction hoists and two for drum-type
sure on the sides not used for exit or hoists.
entrance to the structure shall be en- (ii) The minimum diameter of hoist-
closed to a height of at least 10 feet. ing and counterweight wire ropes shall
Other sides of the tower adjacent to be 1⁄2-inch.
floors or scaffold platforms shall be en- (iii) Safety factors:
closed to a height of 10 feet above the
level of such floors or scaffolds. MINIMUM FACTORS OF SAFETY FOR SUSPENSION
(2) Towers inside of structures shall WIRE ROPES
be enclosed on all four sides through- Minimum
out the full height. Rope speed in feet per minute factor of
safety
(3) Towers shall be anchored to the
structure at intervals not exceeding 25 50 ......................................................................... 7.60
75 ......................................................................... 7.75
feet. In addition to tie-ins, a series of 100 ....................................................................... 7.95
guys shall be installed. Where tie-ins 125 ....................................................................... 8.10
are not practical the tower shall be an- 150 ....................................................................... 8.25
chored by means of guys made of wire 175 ....................................................................... 8.40
200 ....................................................................... 8.60
rope at least one-half inch in diameter, 225 ....................................................................... 8.75
securely fastened to anchorage to en- 250 ....................................................................... 8.90
sure stability. 300 ....................................................................... 9.20
350 ....................................................................... 9.50
(4) Hoistway doors or gates shall be 400 ....................................................................... 9.75
not less than 6 feet 6 inches high and 450 ....................................................................... 10.00
500 ....................................................................... 10.25
shall be provided with mechanical 550 ....................................................................... 10.45
locks which cannot be operated from 600 ....................................................................... 10.70
the landing side, and shall be acces-
sible only to persons on the car. (15) Following assembly and erection
(5) Cars shall be permanently en- of hoists, and before being put in serv-
closed on all sides and the top, except ice, an inspection and test of all func-
sides used for entrance and exit which tions and safety devices shall be made
have car gates or doors. under the supervision of a competent
367
person. A similar inspection and test is (c) Evidence of any heat damage from
required following major alteration of any cause;
an existing installation. All hoists (d) Reductions from nominal diame-
shall be inspected and tested at not ter of more than three-sixty-fourths
more than 3-month intervals. The em- inch for diameters to and including
ployer shall prepare a certification three-fourths inch, one-sixteenth inch
record which includes the date the infor diameters seven-eights inch to 11⁄8
spection and test of all functions and inches inclusive, three-thirty-seconds
safety devices was performed; the sig- inch for diameters 11⁄4 to 11⁄2 inches in-
nature of the person who performed the clusive;
inspection and test; and a serial num- (e) In standing ropes, more than two
ber, or other identifier, for the hoist broken wires in one lay in sections be-
that was inspected and tested. The yond end connections or more than one
most recent certification record shall broken wire at an end connection.
be maintained on file. (d) Permanent elevators under the
(16) All personnel hoists used by em- care and custody of the employer and
ployees shall be constructed of mate- used by employees for work covered by
rials and components which meet the this Act shall comply with the require-
specifications for materials, construc- ments of American National Standards
tion, safety devices, assembly, and Institute A17.1–1965 with addenda
structural integrity as stated in the A17.1a–1967, A17.1b–1968, A17.1c–1969,
American National Standard A10.4– A17.1d–1970, and inspected in accord-
1963, Safety Requirements for Work- ance with A17.2–1960 with addenda
men’s Hoists. The requirements of this A17.2a–1965, A17.2b–1967.
paragraph (c)(16) do not apply to canti-
lever type personnel hoists. [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(17) (i) Personnel hoists used in
1987]
bridge tower construction shall be ap-
proved by a registered professional en- § 1926.553 Base-mounted drum hoists.
gineer and erected under the super-
vision of a qualified engineer com- (a) General requirements. (1) Exposed
petent in this field. moving parts such as gears, projecting
(ii) When a hoist tower is not en- screws, setscrews, chain, cables, chain
closed, the hoist platform or car shall sprockets, and reciprocating or rotat-
be totally enclosed (caged) on all sides ing parts, which constitute a hazard,
for the full height between the floor shall be guarded.
and the overhead protective covering (2) All controls used during the nor-
with 3⁄4-inch mesh of No. 14 U.S. gauge mal operation cycle shall be located
wire or equivalent. The hoist platform within easy reach of the operator’s sta-
enclosure shall include the required tion.
gates for loading and unloading. (3) Electric motor operated hoists
(iii) These hoists shall be inspected shall be provided with:
and maintained on a weekly basis. (i) A device to disconnect all motors
Whenever the hoisting equipment is ex- from the line upon power failure and
posed to winds exceeding 35 miles per not permit any motor to be restarted
hour it shall be inspected and put in until the controller handle is brought
operable condition before reuse. to the ‘‘off’’ position;
(iv) Wire rope shall be taken out of (ii) Where applicable, an overspeed
service when any of the following con- preventive device;
ditions exist: (iii) A means whereby remotely oper-
(a) In running ropes, six randomly ated hoists stop when any control is in-
distributed broken wires in one lay or effective.
three broken wires in one strand in one (4) All base-mounted drum hoists in
lay; use shall meet the applicable require-
(b) Wear of one-third the original di- ments for design, construction, instal-
ameter of outside individual wires. lation, testing, inspection, mainte-

Kinking, crushing, bird caging, or any nance, and operations, as prescribed by
other damage resulting in distortion of the manufacturer.
the rope structure; (b) Specific requirements. [Reserved]
368
§ 1926.554 Overhead hoists. suitable signs, as required by subpart G

of this part.
(a) General requirements. (1) The safe
(7) Conveyors shall be locked out or
working load of the overhead hoist, as
otherwise rendered inoperable, and
determined by the manufacturer, shall
tagged out with a ‘‘Do Not Operate’’
be indicated on the hoist, and this safe
tag during repairs and when operation
working load shall not be exceeded.
is hazardous to employees performing
(2) The supporting structure to which
maintenance work.
the hoist is attached shall have a safe
(8) All conveyors in use shall meet
working load equal to that of the hoist.
the applicable requirements for design,
(3) The support shall be arranged so
construction, inspection, testing,
as to provide for free movement of the
maintenance, and operation, as pre-
hoist and shall not restrict the hoist
scribed in the ANSI B20.1–1957, Safety
from lining itself up with the load.
Code for Conveyors, Cableways, and
(4) The hoist shall be installed only
Related Equipment.
in locations that will permit the oper-
ator to stand clear of the load at all
times. Subpart O—Motor Vehicles,
(5) Air hoists shall be connected to an Mechanized Equipment, and
air supply of sufficient capacity and Marine Operations
pressure to safely operate the hoist. All
air hoses supplying air shall be posi- AUTHORITY: Section 107, Construction
tively connected to prevent their be- Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (Con-
coming disconnected during use. struction Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4,
(6) All overhead hoists in use shall 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health Act of
meet the applicable requirements for 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of La-
bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
construction, design, installation, test- 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or
ing, inspection, maintenance, and oper- 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applicable. Section
ation, as prescribed by the manufac- 1926.602 also issued under 29 CFR part 1911.
turer.
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] § 1926.600 Equipment.
(a) General requirements. (1) All equip-
§ 1926.555 Conveyors.
ment left unattended at night, adja-
(a) General requirements. (1) Means for cent to a highway in normal use, or ad-
stopping the motor or engine shall be jacent to construction areas where
provided at the operator’s station. Con- work is in progress, shall have appro-
veyor systems shall be equipped with priate lights or reflectors, or barri-
an audible warning signal to be sound- cades equipped with appropriate lights
ed immediately before starting up the or reflectors, to identify the location of
conveyor. the equipment.
(2) If the operator’s station is at a re- (2) A safety tire rack, cage, or equiv-
mote point, similar provisions for stop- alent protection shall be provided and
ping the motor or engine shall be pro- used when inflating, mounting, or dis-
vided at the motor or engine location. mounting tires installed on split rims,
(3) Emergency stop switches shall be or rims equipped with locking rings or
arranged so that the conveyor cannot similar devices.
be started again until the actuating (3) (i) Heavy machinery, equipment,
stop switch has been reset to running or parts thereof, which are suspended
or ‘‘on’’ position. or held aloft by use of slings, hoists, or
(4) Screw conveyors shall be guarded jacks shall be substantially blocked or
to prevent employee contact with turn- cribbed to prevent falling or shifting
ing flights. before employees are permitted to
(5) Where a conveyor passes over work under or between them. Bulldozer
work areas, aisles, or thoroughfares, and scraper blades, end-loader buckets,
suitable guards shall be provided to dump bodies, and similar equipment,
protect employees required to work shall be either fully lowered or blocked

below the conveyors. when being repaired or when not in
(6) All crossovers, aisles, and passage- use. All controls shall be in a neutral
ways shall be conspicuously marked by position, with the motors stopped and
369
brakes set, unless work being per- (4) No employer shall use any motor
formed requires otherwise. vehicle equipment having an ob-
(ii) Whenever the equipment is structed view to the rear unless:
parked, the parking brake shall be set. (i) The vehicle has a reverse signal
Equipment parked on inclines shall alarm audible above the surrounding
have the wheels chocked and the park- noise level or:
ing brake set. (ii) The vehicle is backed up only
(4) The use, care and charging of all when an observer signals that it is safe
batteries shall conform to the require- to do so.
ments of subpart K of this part. (5) All vehicles with cabs shall be
(5) All cab glass shall be safety glass, equipped with windshields and powered
or equivalent, that introduces no visi- wipers. Cracked and broken glass shall
ble distortion affecting the safe oper- be replaced. Vehicles operating in
ation of any machine covered by this areas or under conditions that cause
subpart. fogging or frosting of the windshields
(6) All equipment covered by this shall be equipped with operable
subpart shall comply with the require- defogging or defrosting devices.
ments of § 1926.550(a)(15) when working (6) All haulage vehicles, whose pay
or being moved in the vicinity of power load is loaded by means of cranes,
lines or energized transmitters. power shovels, loaders, or similar
(7) Rolling railroad cars. Derail and/or equipment, shall have a cab shield and/
bumper blocks shall be provided on or canopy adequate to protect the oper-
spur railroad tracks where a rolling car ator from shifting or falling materials.
could contact other cars being worked, (7) Tools and material shall be se-
enter a building, work or traffic area. cured to prevent movement when
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] transported in the same compartment
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, with employees.
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993] (8) Vehicles used to transport em-
ployees shall have seats firmly secured
§ 1926.601 Motor vehicles. and adequate for the number of em-
(a) Coverage. Motor vehicles as cov- ployees to be carried.
ered by this part are those vehicles (9) Seat belts and anchorages meet-
that operate within an off-highway job- ing the requirements of 49 CFR part 571
site, not open to public traffic. The re- (Department of Transportation, Fed-
quirements of this section do not apply eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards)
to equipment for which rules are pre- shall be installed in all motor vehicles.
scribed in § 1926.602. (10) Trucks with dump bodies shall be
(b) General requirements. (1) All vehi- equipped with positive means of sup-
cles shall have a service brake system, port, permanently attached, and capa-
an emergency brake system, and a ble of being locked in position to pre-
parking brake system. These systems vent accidental lowering of the body
may use common components, and while maintenance or inspection work
shall be maintained in operable condi- is being done.
tion. (11) Operating levers controlling
(2)(i) Whenever visibility conditions hoisting or dumping devices on haulage
warrant additional light, all vehicles, bodies shall be equipped with a latch or
or combinations of vehicles, in use other device which will prevent acci-
shall be equipped with at least two dental starting or tripping of the mech-
headlights and two taillights in oper- anism.
able condition. (12) Trip handles for tailgates of
(ii) All vehicles, or combination of dump trucks shall be so arranged that,
vehicles, shall have brake lights in opin dumping, the operator will be in the
erable condition regardless of light clear.
conditions. (13) (i) All rubber-tired motor vehicle
(3) All vehicles shall be equipped with equipment manufactured on or after

an adequate audible warning device at May 1, 1972, shall be equipped with
the operator’s station and in an oper- fenders. All rubber-tired motor vehicle
able condition. equipment manufactured before May 1,
370
1972, shall be equipped with fenders not (3) Access roadways and grades. (i) No
later than May 1, 1973. employer shall move or cause to be
(ii) Mud flaps may be used in lieu of moved construction equipment or vehi-
fenders whenever motor vehicle equip- cles upon any access roadway or grade
ment is not designed for fenders. unless the access roadway or grade is
(14) All vehicles in use shall be constructed and maintained to accom-
checked at the beginning of each shift modate safely the movement of the
to assure that the following parts, equipment and vehicles involved.
equipment, and accessories are in safe (ii) Every emergency access ramp
operating condition and free of appar- and berm used by an employer shall be
ent damage that could cause failure constructed to restrain and control
while in use: service brakes, including runaway vehicles.
trailer brake connections; parking sys- (4) Brakes. All earthmoving equip-
ment mentioned in this § 1926.602(a)
tem (hand brake); emergency stopping
shall have a service braking system ca-
system (brakes); tires; horn; steering
pable of stopping and holding the
mechanism; coupling devices; seat
equipment fully loaded, as specified in
belts; operating controls; and safety
Society of Automotive Engineers SAE-
devices. All defects shall be corrected J237, Loader Dozer–1971, J236, Graders–
before the vehicle is placed in service. 1971, and J319b, Scrapers–1971. Brake
These requirements also apply to systems for self-propelled rubber-tired
equipment such as lights, reflectors, off-highway equipment manufactured
windshield wipers, defrosters, fire ex- after January 1, 1972 shall meet the ap-
tinguishers, etc., where such equip- plicable minimum performance criteria
ment is necessary. set forth in the following Society of
Automotive Engineers Recommended
§ 1926.602 Material handling equip- Practices:
ment.
Self-Propelled Scrapers ................ SAE J319b–1971.
(a) Earthmoving equipment; General. (1) Self-Propelled Graders ................. SAE J236–1971.
Trucks and Wagons ...................... SAE J166–1971.
These rules apply to the following Front End Loaders and Dozers .... SAE J237–1971.
types of earthmoving equipment:
scrapers, loaders, crawler or wheel (5) Fenders. Pneumatic-tired earth-
tractors, bulldozers, off-highway moving haulage equipment (trucks,
trucks, graders, agricultural and indus- scrapers, tractors, and trailing units)
trial tractors, and similar equipment. whose maximum speed exceeds 15 miles
The promulgation of specific rules for per hour, shall be equipped with fend-
compactors and rubber-tired ‘‘skid- ers on all wheels to meet the require-
steer’’ equipment is reserved pending ments of Society of Automotive Engi-
neers SAE J321a–1970, Fenders for
consideration of standards currently
Pneumatic-Tired Earthmoving Haulage
being developed.
Equipment. An employer may, of
(2) Seat belts. (i) Seat belts shall be course, at any time seek to show under
provided on all equipment covered by § 1926.2, that the uncovered wheels
this section and shall meet the require- present no hazard to personnel from
ments of the Society of Automotive flying materials.
Engineers, J386–1969, Seat Belts for (6) Rollover protective structures
Construction Equipment. Seat belts for (ROPS). See subpart W of this part for
agricultural and light industrial trac- requirements for rollover protective
tors shall meet the seat belt require- structures and overhead protection.
ments of Society of Automotive Engi- (7) Rollover protective structures for off-
neers J333a–1970, Operator Protection highway trucks. The promulgation of
for Agricultural and Light Industrial standards for rollover protective struc-
Tractors. tures for off-highway trucks is reserved
(ii) Seat belts need not be provided pending further study and develop-
for equipment which is designed only ment.
for standup operation. (8) Specific effective dates—brakes and
(iii) Seat belts need not be provided fenders. (i) Equipment mentioned in
for equipment which does not have paragraph (a)(4) and (5) of this section,
roll-over protective structure (ROPS) and manufactured after January 1,
or adequate canopy protection. 1972, which is used by any employer
371
after that date, shall comply with the the normal seating arrangement for
applicable rules prescribed therein contractor operation, even though back-
cerning brakes and fenders. Equipment hoes, breakers, or other similar attach-
mentioned in paragraphs (a) (4) and (5) ments are used on these machines for
of this section, and manufactured be- excavating or other work.
fore January 1, 1972, which is used by (2) For the purposes of this subpart
any employer after that date, shall and of subpart N of this part, the no-
meet the applicable rules prescribed menclatures and descriptions for meas-
herein not later than June 30, 1973. It urement of dimensions of machinery
should be noted that, as permitted and attachments shall be as described
under § 1926.2, employers may request in Society of Automotive Engineers
variations from the applicable brakes 1970 Handbook, pages 1088 through 1103.
and fender standards required by this (3) The safety requirements, ratios,
subpart. Employers wishing to seek or limitations applicable to machines
variations from the applicable brakes or attachment usage covered in Power
and fenders rules may submit any re- Crane and Shovel Associations Stand-
quests for variations after the publica- ards No. 1 and No. 2 of 1968, and No. 3
tion of this document in the FEDERAL of 1969, shall be complied with, and
REGISTER. Any statements intending to shall apply to cranes, machines, and
meet the requirements of § 1926.2(b)(4), attachments under this part.
should specify how the variation would (c) Lifting and hauling equipment
protect the safety of the employees by (other than equipment covered under sub-
providing for any compensating re- part N of this part). (1) Industrial trucks
strictions on the operation of equip- shall meet the requirements of
ment. § 1926.600 and the following:
(ii) Notwithstanding the provisions of (i) Lift trucks, stackers, etc., shall
paragraphs (a)(5) and (a)(8)(i) of this have the rated capacity clearly posted
section, the requirement that fenders on the vehicle so as to be clearly visi-
be installed on pneumatic-tired ble to the operator. When auxiliary re-
earthmoving haulage equipment, is movable counterweights are provided
suspended pending reconsideration of by the manufacturer, corresponding al-
the requirement. ternate rated capacities also shall be
(9) Audible alarms. (i) All clearly shown on the vehicle. These
bidirectional machines, such as rollers, ratings shall not be exceeded.
compacters, front-end loaders, bull- (ii) No modifications or additions
dozers, and similar equipment, shall be which affect the capacity or safe oper-
equipped with a horn, distinguishable ation of the equipment shall be made
from the surrounding noise level, without the manufacturer’s written ap-
which shall be operated as needed when proval. If such modifications or
the machine is moving in either direc- changes are made, the capacity, oper-
tion. The horn shall be maintained in ation, and maintenance instruction
an operative condition. plates, tags, or decals shall be changed
(ii) No employer shall permit accordingly. In no case shall the origi-
earthmoving or compacting equipment nal safety factor of the equipment be
which has an obstructed view to the reduced.
rear to be used in reverse gear unless (iii) If a load is lifted by two or more
the equipment has in operation a re- trucks working in unison, the propor-
verse signal alarm distinguishable tion of the total load carried by any
from the surrounding noise level or an one truck shall not exceed its capacity.
employee signals that it is safe to do (iv) Steering or spinner knobs shall
so. not be attached to the steering wheel
(10) Scissor points. Scissor points on unless the steering mechanism is of a
all front-end loaders, which constitute type that prevents road reactions from
a hazard to the operator during normal causing the steering handwheel to spin.
operation, shall be guarded. The steering knob shall be mounted
(b) Excavating and other equipment. (1) within the periphery of the wheel.
Tractors covered in paragraph (a) of (v) All high lift rider industrial
this section shall have seat belts as re- trucks shall be equipped with overhead
quired for the operators when seated in guards which meet the configuration
372
and structural requirements as defined and which meets the requirements of

in paragraph 421 of American National subpart N of this part, shall be pro-
Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety vided. Protection shall be the equiva-
Standards for Powered Industrial lent of 2-inch planking or other solid
Trucks. material of equivalent strength.
(vi) All industrial trucks in use shall (4) Stop blocks shall be provided for
meet the applicable requirements of the leads to prevent the hammer from
design, construction, stability, inspec- being raised against the head block.
tion, testing, maintenance, and oper-
(5) A blocking device, capable of safe-
ation, as defined in American National
ly supporting the weight of the ham-
Standards Institute B56.1–1969, Safety
Standards for Powered Industrial mer, shall be provided for placement in
Trucks. the leads under the hammer at all
(vii) Unauthorized personnel shall times while employees are working
not be permitted to ride on powered in- under the hammer.
dustrial trucks. A safe place to ride (6) Guards shall be provided across
shall be provided where riding of the top of the head block to prevent
trucks is authorized. the cable from jumping out of the
(viii) Whenever a truck is equipped sheaves.
with vertical only, or vertical and hori- (7) When the leads must be inclined
zontal controls elevatable with the lift- in the driving of batter piles, provi-
ing carriage or forks for lifting per- sions shall be made to stabilize the
sonnel, the following additional pre- leads.
cautions shall be taken for the protec- (8) Fixed leads shall be provided with
tion of personnel being elevated. ladder, and adequate rings, or similar
(A) Use of a safety platform firmly attachment points, so that the loft
secured to the lifting carriage and/or
worker may engage his safety belt lan-
forks.
yard to the leads. If the leads are pro-
(B) Means shall be provided whereby
personnel on the platform can shut off vided with loft platforms(s), such plat-
power to the truck. form(s) shall be protected by standard
(C) Such protection from falling ob- guardrails.
jects as indicated necessary by the op- (9) Steam hose leading to a steam
erating conditions shall be provided. hammer or jet pipe shall be securely
(d) Powered industrial truck operator attached to the hammer with an ade-
training. quate length of at least 1⁄4-inch diame-
NOTE: The requirements applicable to con-
ter chain or cable to prevent whipping
struction work under this paragraph are in the event the joint at the hammer is
identical to those set forth at § 1910.178(l) of broken. Air hammer hoses shall be pro-
this chapter. vided with the same protection as re-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, quired for steam lines.
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35183, June 30, 1993; (10) Safety chains, or equivalent
63 FR 66274, Dec. 1, 1998] means, shall be provided for each hose
connection to prevent the line from
§ 1926.603 Pile driving equipment.
thrashing around in case the coupling
(a) General requirements. (1) Boilers becomes disconnected.
and piping systems which are a part of, (11) Steam line controls shall consist
or used with, pile driving equipment of two shutoff valves, one of which
shall meet the applicable requirements shall be a quick-acting lever type with-
of the American Society of Mechanical in easy reach of the hammer operator.
Engineers, Power Boilers (section I).
(12) Guys, outriggers, thrustouts, or
(2) All pressure vessels which are a
part of, or used with, pile driving counterbalances shall be provided as
equipment shall meet the applicable necessary to maintain stability of pile
requirements of the American Society driver rigs.
of Mechanical Engineers, Pressure Ves- (b) Pile driving from barges and floats.
sels (section VIII). Barges or floats supporting pile driving
(3) Overhead protection, which will operations shall meet the applicable
not obscure the vision of the operator requirements of § 1926.605.
373
(c) Pile driving equipment. (1) Engi- of this chapter. The term ‘‘longshoring
neers and winchmen shall accept sig- operations’’ means the loading, unload-
nals only from the designated signaling, moving, or handling of construc-
men. tion materials, equipment and supplies,
(2) All employees shall be kept clear etc. into, in, on, or out of any vessel
when piling is being hoisted into the from a fixed structure or shore-to-ves-
leads. sel, vessel-to-shore or fixed structure
(3) When piles are being driven in an or vessel-to-vessel.
excavated pit, the walls of the pit shall (b) Access to barges. (1) Ramps for ac-
be sloped to the angle of repose or cess of vehicles to or between barges
sheet-piled and braced. shall be of adequate strength, provided
(4) When steel tube piles are being with side boards, well maintained, and
‘‘blown out’’, employees shall be kept properly secured.
well beyond the range of falling mate- (2) Unless employees can step safely
rials. to or from the wharf, float, barge, or
(5) When it is necessary to cut off the river towboat, either a ramp, meeting
tops of driven piles, pile driving oper- the requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of
ations shall be suspended except where this section, or a safe walkway, shall
the cutting operations are located at be provided.
least twice the length of the longest (3) Jacob’s ladders shall be of the
pile from the driver. double rung or flat tread type. They
(6) When driving jacked piles, all ac- shall be well maintained and properly
cess pits shall be provided with ladders secured.
and bulkheaded curbs to prevent mate- (4) A Jacob’s ladder shall either hang
rial from falling into the pit. without slack from its lashings or be
§ 1926.604 Site clearing. pulled up entirely.
(5) When the upper end of the means
(a) General requirements. (1) Employ- of access rests on or is flush with the
ees engaged in site clearing shall be top of the bulwark, substantial steps
protected from hazards of irritant and properly secured and equipped with at
toxic plants and suitably instructed in least one substantial hand rail approxi-
the first aid treatment available. mately 33 inches in height, shall be
(2) All equipment used in site clear- provided between the top of the bul-
ing operations shall be equipped with wark and the deck.
rollover guards meeting the require-
(6) Obstructions shall not be laid on
ments of this subpart. In addition,
or across the gangway.
rider-operated equipment shall be
equipped with an overhead and rear (7) The means of access shall be ade-
canopy guard meeting the following re- quately illuminated for its full length.
quirements: (8) Unless the structure makes it im-
(i) The overhead covering on this possible, the means of access shall be
canopy structure shall be of not less so located that the load will not pass
than 1⁄8-inch steel plate or 1⁄4-inch over employees.
woven wire mesh with openings no (c) Working surfaces of barges. (1) Em-
greater than 1 inch, or equivalent. ployees shall not be permitted to walk
(ii) The opening in the rear of the along the sides of covered lighters or
canopy structure shall be covered with barges with coamings more than 5 feet
not less than 1⁄4-inch woven wire mesh high, unless there is a 3-foot clear
with openings no greater than 1 inch. walkway, or a grab rail, or a taut
(b) Specific requirements. [Reserved] handline is provided.
(2) Decks and other working surfaces
§ 1926.605 Marine operations and shall be maintained in a safe condition.
equipment. (3) Employees shall not be permitted
(a) Material handling operations. (1) to pass fore and aft, over, or around
Operations fitting the definition of deckloads, unless there is a safe pas-
‘‘material handling’’ shall be per- sage.

formed in conformance with applicable (4) Employees shall not be permitted
requirements of part 1918, ‘‘Safety and to walk over deckloads from rail to
Health Regulations for Longshoring’’ coaming unless there is a safe passage.
374
If it is necessary to stand at the out- 25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable, and
board or inboard edge of the deckload 29 CFR part 1911.
where less than 24 inches of bulwark, SOURCE: 54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, unless
rail, coaming, or other protection ex- otherwise noted.
ists, all employees shall be provided
with a suitable means of protection § 1926.650 Scope, application, and defi-
against falling from the deckload. nitions applicable to this subpart.
(d) First-aid and lifesaving equipment. (a) Scope and application. This sub-
(1) Provisions for rendering first aid part applies to all open excavations
and medical assistance shall be in ac- made in the earth’s surface. Exca-
cordance with subpart D of this part. vations are defined to include trenches.
(2) The employer shall ensure that (b) Definitions applicable to this sub-
there is in the vicinity of each barge in part.
use at least one U.S. Coast Guard-ap- Accepted engineering practices means
proved 30-inch lifering with not less those requirements which are compat-
than 90 feet of line attached, and at ible with standards of practice required
least one portable or permanent ladder by a registered professional engineer.
which will reach the top of the apron Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring means a
to the surface of the water. If the above pre-engineered shoring system com-
equipment is not available at the pier, prised of aluminum hydraulic cylinders
the employer shall furnish it during (crossbraces) used in conjunction with
the time that he is working the barge. vertical rails (uprights) or horizontal
(3) Employees walking or working on rails (walers). Such system is designed,
the unguarded decks of barges shall be specifically to support the sidewalls of
protected with U.S. Coast Guard-ap- an excavation and prevent cave-ins.
proved work vests or buoyant vests. Bell-bottom pier hole means a type of
(e) Commercial diving operations. Com- shaft or footing excavation, the bottom
mercial diving operations shall be sub- of which is made larger than the cross
ject to subpart T of part 1910, section above to form a belled shape.
§§ 1910.401–1910.441, of this chapter.
Benching (Benching system) means a
[39 FR 22801, June 24, 1974, as amended at 42 method of protecting employees from
FR 37674, July 22, 1977] cave-ins by excavating the sides of an
excavation to form one or a series of
§ 1926.606 Definitions applicable to horizontal levels or steps, usually with
this subpart. vertical or near-vertical surfaces be-
(a) Apron—The area along the water- tween levels.
front edge of the pier or wharf. Cave-in means the separation of a
(b) Bulwark—The side of a ship above mass of soil or rock material from the
the upper deck. side of an excavation, or the loss of soil
(c) Coaming—The raised frame, as from under a trench shield or support
around a hatchway in the deck, to keep system, and its sudden movement into
out water. the excavation, either by falling or
(d) Jacob’s ladder—A marine ladder of sliding, in sufficient quantity so that it
rope or chain with wooden or metal could entrap, bury, or otherwise injure
rungs. and immobilize a person.
(e) Rail, for the purpose of § 1926.605, Competent person means one who is
means a light structure serving as a capable of identifying existing and pre-
guard at the outer edge of a ship’s dictable hazards in the surroundings,
deck. or working conditions which are unsan-
itary, hazardous, or dangerous to em-
Subpart P—Excavations ployees, and who has authorization to
take prompt corrective measures to
eliminate them.
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Worker
Cross braces mean the horizontal

tion Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, members of a shoring system installed
Occupational Safety and Hea1th Act of 1970 perpendicular to the sides of the exca-
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s vation, the ends of which bear against
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR either uprights or wales.
375
Excavation means any man-made cut, accordance with § 1926.652 (c)(3) or

cavity, trench, or depression in an (c)(4). Shields used in trenches are usu-
earth surface, formed by earth re- ally referred to as ‘‘trench boxes’’ or
moval. ‘‘trench shields.’’
Faces or sides means the vertical or Shoring (Shoring system) means a
inclined earth surfaces formed as a re- structure such as a metal hydraulic,
sult of excavation work. mechanical or timber shoring system
Failure means the breakage, displace- that supports the sides of an exca-
ment, or permanent deformation of a vation and which is designed to prevent
structural member or connection so as cave-ins.
to reduce its structural integrity and Sides. See ‘‘Faces.’’
its supportive capabilities. Sloping (Sloping system) means a
Hazardous atmosphere means an at- method of protecting employees from
mosphere which by reason of being ex- cave-ins by excavating to form sides of
plosive, flammable, poisonous, corro- an excavation that are inclined away
sive, oxidizing, irritating, oxygen defi- from the excavation so as to prevent
cient, toxic, or otherwise harmful, may cave-ins. The angle of incline required
cause death, illness, or injury. to prevent a cave-in varies with dif-
Kickout means the accidental release ferences in such factors as the soil
or failure of a cross brace. type, environmental conditions of ex-
Protective system means a method of
posure, and application of surcharge
protecting employees from cave-ins,
loads.
from material that could fall or roll
Stable rock means natural solid min-
from an excavation face or into an ex-
cavation, or from the collapse of adja- eral material that can be excavated
cent structures. Protective systems in- with vertical sides and will remain in-
clude support systems, sloping and tact while exposed. Unstable rock is
benching systems, shield systems, and considered to be stable when the rock
other systems that provide the nec- material on the side or sides of the ex-
essary protection. cavation is secured against caving-in
Ramp means an inclined walking or or movement by rock bolts or by an-
working surface that is used to gain ac- other protective system that has been
cess to one point from another, and is designed by a registered professional
constructed from earth or from struc- engineer.
tural materials such as steel or wood. Structural ramp means a ramp built of
Registered Professional Engineer means steel or wood, usually used for vehicle
a person who is registered as a profes- access. Ramps made of soil or rock are
sional engineer in the state where the not considered structural ramps.
work is to be performed. However, a Support system means a structure
professional engineer, registered in any such as underpinning, bracing, or shor-
state is deemed to be a ‘‘registered pro- ing, which provides support to an adja-
fessional engineer’’ within the meaning cent structure, underground installa-
of this standard when approving de- tion, or the sides of an excavation.
signs for ‘‘manufactured protective Tabulated data means tables and
systems’’ or ‘‘tabulated data’’ to be charts approved by a registered profes-
used in interstate commerce. sional engineer and used to design and
Sheeting means the members of a construct a protective system.
shoring system that retain the earth in Trench (Trench excavation) means a
position and in turn are supported by narrow excavation (in relation to its
other members of the shoring system. length) made below the surface of the
Shield (Shield system) means a struc- ground. In general, the depth is greater
ture that is able to withstand the than the width, but the width of a
forces imposed on it by a cave-in and trench (measured at the bottom) is not
thereby protect employees within the greater than 15 feet (4.6 m). If forms or
structure. Shields can be permanent other structures are installed or con-
structures or can be designed to be structed in an excavation so as to re-

portable and moved along as work produce the dimension measured from the
gresses. Additionally, shields can be ei- forms or structure to the side of the ex-
ther premanufactured or job-built in cavation to 15 feet (4.6 m) or less
376
(measured at the bottom of the exca- (4) While the excavation is open, un-
vation), the excavation is also consid- derground installations shall be pro-
ered to be a trench. tected, supported or removed as nec-
Trench box. See ‘‘Shield.’’ essary to safeguard employees.
Trench shield. See ‘‘Shield.’’ (c) Access and egress—(1) Structural
Uprights means the vertical members ramps. (i) Structural ramps that are
of a trench shoring system placed in used solely by employees as a means of
contact with the earth and usually po- access or egress from excavations shall
sitioned so that individual members do be designed by a competent person.
not contact each other. Uprights Structural ramps used for access or
placed so that individual members are egress of equipment shall be designed
closely spaced, in contact with or by a competent person qualified in
interconnected to each other, are often structural design, and shall be con-
called ‘‘sheeting.’’ structed in accordance with the design.
Wales means horizontal members of a (ii) Ramps and runways constructed
shoring system placed parallel to the of two or more structural members
excavation face whose sides bear shall have the structural members con-
against the vertical members of the nected together to prevent displace-
shoring system or earth. ment.
(iii) Structural members used for
§ 1926.651 Specific excavation require- ramps and runways shall be of uniform
ments. thickness.
(a) Surface encumbrances. All surface (iv) Cleats or other appropriate
encumbrances that are located so as to means used to connect runway struc-
create a hazard to employees shall be tural members shall be attached to the
removed or supported, as necessary, to bottom of the runway or shall be at-
safeguard employees. tached in a manner to prevent tripping.
(b) Underground installations. (1) The (v) Structural ramps used in lieu of
estimated location of utility installa- steps shall be provided with cleats or
tions, such as sewer, telephone, fuel, other surface treatments on the top
electric, water lines, or any other un- surface to prevent slipping.
derground installations that reason- (2) Means of egress from trench exca-
ably may be expected to be encoun- vations. A stairway, ladder, ramp or
tered during excavation work, shall be other safe means of egress shall be lo-
determined prior to opening an exca- cated in trench excavations that are 4
vation. feet (1.22 m) or more in depth so as to
(2) Utility companies or owners shall require no more than 25 feet (7.62 m) of
be contacted within established or cus- lateral travel for employees.
tomary local response times, advised of (d) Exposure to vehicular traffic. Em-
the proposed work, and asked to estab- ployees exposed to public vehicular
lish the location of the utility under- traffic shall be provided with, and shall
ground installations prior to the start wear, warning vests or other suitable
of actual excavation. When utility garments marked with or made of
companies or owners cannot respond to reflectorized or high-visibility mate-
a request to locate underground utility rial.
installations within 24 hours (unless a (e) Exposure to falling loads. No em-
longer period is required by state or ployee shall be permitted underneath
local law), or cannot establish the loads handled by lifting or digging
exact location of these installations, equipment. Employees shall be re-
the employer may proceed, provided quired to stand away from any vehicle
the employer does so with caution, and being loaded or unloaded to avoid being
provided detection equipment or other struck by any spillage or falling mate-
acceptable means to locate utility in- rials. Operators may remain in the
stallations are used. cabs of vehicles being loaded or un-
(3) When excavation operations ap- loaded when the vehicles are equipped,
proach the estimated location of under- in accordance with § 1926.601(b)(6), to

ground installations, the exact loca- provide adequate protection for the op-
tion of the installations shall be deter- erator during loading and unloading
mined by safe and acceptable means. operations.
377
(f) Warning system for mobile equip- mospheric conditions exist or may rea-
ment. When mobile equipment is oper- sonably be expected to develop during
ated adjacent to an excavation, or work in an excavation. This equipment
when such equipment is required to ap- shall be attended when in use.
proach the edge of an excavation, and (ii) Employees entering bell-bottom
the operator does not have a clear and pier holes, or other similar deep and
direct view of the edge of the exca- confined footing excavations, shall
vation, a warning system shall be uti- wear a harness with a life-line securely
lized such as barricades, hand or me- attached to it. The lifeline shall be sep-
chanical signals, or stop logs. If pos- arate from any line used to handle ma-
sible, the grade should be away from terials, and shall be individually at-
the excavation. tended at all times while the employee
(g) Hazardous atmospheres—(1) Testing wearing the lifeline is in the exca-
and controls. In addition to the require- vation.
ments set forth in subparts D and E of (h) Protection from hazards associated
this part (29 CFR 1926.50–1926.107) to with water accumulation. (1) Employees
prevent exposure to harmful levels of shall not work in excavations in which
atmospheric contaminants and to as- there is accumulated water, or in exca-
sure acceptable atmospheric condi- vations in which water is accumu-
tions, the following requirements shall lating, unless adequate precautions
apply: have been taken to protect employees
(i) Where oxygen deficiency against the hazards posed by water ac-
(atmospheres containing less than 19.5 cumulation. The precautions necessary
percent oxygen) or a hazardous atmos- to protect employees adequately vary
phere exists or could reasonably be ex- with each situation, but could include
pected to exist, such as in excavations special support or shield systems to
in landfill areas or excavations in areas protect from cave-ins, water removal
where hazardous substances are stored to control the level of accumulating
nearby, the atmospheres in the exca- water, or use of a safety harness and
vation shall be tested before employees lifeline.
enter excavations greater than 4 feet (2) If water is controlled or prevented
(1.22 m) in depth. from accumulating by the use of water
(ii) Adequate precautions shall be removal equipment, the water removal
taken to prevent employee exposure to equipment and operations shall be
atmospheres containing less than 19.5 monitored by a competent person to
percent oxygen and other hazardous ensure proper operation.
atmospheres. These precautions in- (3) If excavation work interrupts the
clude providing proper respiratory pro- natural drainage of surface water (such
tection or ventilation in accordance as streams), diversion ditches, dikes, or
with subparts D and E of this part re- other suitable means shall be used to
spectively. prevent surface water from entering
(iii) Adequate precaution shall be the excavation and to provide adequate
taken such as providing ventilation, to drainage of the area adjacent to the ex-
prevent employee exposure to an at- cavation. Excavations subject to runoff
mosphere containing a concentration from heavy rains will require an in-
of a flammable gas in excess of 20 per- spection by a competent person and
cent of the lower flammable limit of compliance with paragraphs (h)(1) and
the gas. (h)(2) of this section.
(iv) When controls are used that are (i) Stability of adjacent structures. (1)
intended to reduce the level of atmos- Where the stability of adjoining build-
pheric contaminants to acceptable lev- ings, walls, or other structures is en-
els, testing shall be conducted as often dangered by excavation operations,
as necessary to ensure that the atmos- support systems such as shoring, brac-
phere remains safe. ing, or underpinning shall be provided
(2) Emergency rescue equipment. (i) to ensure the stability of such struc-
Emergency rescue equipment, such as tures for the protection of employees.

breathing apparatus, a safety harness (2) Excavation below the level of the
and line, or a basket stretcher, shall be base or footing of any foundation or re-
readily available where hazardous at- taining wall that could be reasonably
378
expected to pose a hazard to employees the shift. Inspections shall also be

shall not be permitted except when: made after every rainstorm or other
(i) A support system, such as under- hazard increasing occurrence. These in-
pinning, is provided to ensure the safe- spections are only required when em-
ty of employees and the stability of the ployee exposure can be reasonably an-
structure; or ticipated.
(ii) The excavation is in stable rock; (2) Where the competent person finds
or evidence of a situation that could re-
(iii) A registered professional engi- sult in a possible cave-in, indications
neer has approved the determination of failure of protective systems, haz-
that the structure is sufficently re- ardous atmospheres, or other haz-
moved from the excavation so as to be ardous conditions, exposed employees
unaffected by the excavation activity; shall be removed from the hazardous
or area until the necessary precautions
(iv) A registered professional engi- have been taken to ensure their safety.
neer has approved the determination (l) Walkways shall be provided where
that such excavation work will not employees or equipment are required
pose a hazard to employees. or permitted to cross over excavations.
(3) Sidewalks, pavements, and appur- Guardrails which comply with
tenant structure shall not be under- § 1926.502(b) shall be provided where
mined unless a support system or an- walkways are 6 feet (1.8 m) or more
other method of protection is provided above lower levels.
to protect employees from the possible
collapse of such structures. [54 FR 45959, Oct. 31, 1989, as amended by 59
FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
(j) Protection of employees from loose
rock or soil. (1) Adequate protection § 1926.652 Requirements for protective
shall be provided to protect employees systems.
from loose rock or soil that could pose
a hazard by falling or rolling from an (a) Protection of employees in exca-
excavation face. Such protection shall vations. (1) Each employee in an exca-
consist of scaling to remove loose ma- vation shall be protected from cave-ins
terial; installation of protective barri- by an adequate protective system de-
cades at intervals as necessary on the signed in accordance with paragraph
face to stop and contain falling mate- (b) or (c) of this section except when:
rial; or other means that provide equiv- (i) Excavations are made entirely in
alent protection. stable rock; or
(2) Employees shall be protected from (ii) Excavations are less than 5 feet
excavated or other materials or equip- (1.52m) in depth and examination of the
ment that could pose a hazard by fall- ground by a competent person provides
ing or rolling into excavations. Protec- no indication of a potential cave-in.
tion shall be provided by placing and (2) Protective systems shall have the
keeping such materials or equipment capacity to resist without failure all
at least 2 feet (.61 m) from the edge of loads that are intended or could rea-
excavations, or by the use of retaining sonably be expected to be applied or
devices that are sufficient to prevent transmitted to the system.
materials or equipment from falling or (b) Design of sloping and benching sys-
rolling into excavations, or by a com- tems. The slopes and configurations of
bination of both if necessary. sloping and benching systems shall be
(k) Inspections. (1) Daily inspections selected and constructed by the em-
of excavations, the adjacent areas, and ployer or his designee and shall be in
protective systems shall be made by a accordance with the requirements of
competent person for evidence of a sit- paragraph (b)(1); or, in the alternative,
uation that could result in possible paragraph (b)(2); or, in the alternative,
cave-ins, indications of failure of pro- paragraph (b)(3), or, in the alternative,
tective systems, hazardous paragraph (b)(4), as follows:
atmospheres, or other hazardous condi- (1) Option (1)—Allowable configurations

tions. An inspection shall be conducted and slopes. (i) Excavations shall be
by the competent person prior to the sloped at an angle not steeper than one
start of work and as needed throughout and one-half horizontal to one vertical
379
(34 degrees measured from the hori- (B) The configurations that were de-
zontal), unless the employer uses one termined to be safe for the particular
of the other options listed below. project; and
(ii) Slopes specified in paragraph (C) The identity of the registered pro-
(b)(1)(i) of this section, shall be exca- fessional engineer approving the de-
vated to form configurations that are sign.
in accordance with the slopes shown (iii) At least one copy of the design
for Type C soil in Appendix B to this shall be maintained at the jobsite
subpart. while the slope is being constructed.
(2) Option (2)—Determination of slopes After that time the design need not be
and configurations using Appendices A at the jobsite, but a copy shall be made
and B. Maximum allowable slopes, and available to the Secretary upon re-
allowable configurations for sloping quest.
(c) Design of support systems, shield
and benching systems, shall be deter-
systems, and other protective systems. De-
mined in accordance with the condi-
signs of support systems shield sys-
tions and requirements set forth in ap-
tems, and other protective systems
pendices A and B to this subpart.
shall be selected and constructed by
(3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab- the employer or his designee and shall
ulated data. (i) Designs of sloping or be in accordance with the requirements
benching systems shall be selected of paragraph (c)(1); or, in the alter-
from and be in accordance with tab- native, paragraph (c)(2); or, in the al-
ulated data, such as tables and charts. ternative, paragraph (c)(3); or, in the
(ii) The tabulated data shall be in alternative, paragraph (c)(4) as follows:
written form and shall include all of (1) Option (1)—Designs using appen-
the following: dices A, C and D. Designs for timber
(A) Identification of the parameters shoring in trenches shall be determined
that affect the selection of a sloping or in accordance with the conditions and
benching system drawn from such data; requirements set forth in appendices A
(B) Identification of the limits of use and C to this subpart. Designs for alu-
of the data, to include the magnitude minum hydraulic shoring shall be in
and configuration of slopes determined accordance with paragraph (c)(2) of this
to be safe; section, but if manufacturer’s tab-
(C) Explanatory information as may ulated data cannot be utilized, designs
be necessary to aid the user in making shall be in accordance with appendix D.
a correct selection of a protective sys- (2) Option (2)—Designs Using Manufac-
tem from the data. turer’s Tabulated Data. (i) Design of sup-
(iii) At least one copy of the tab- port systems, shield systems, or other
ulated data which identifies the reg- protective systems that are drawn
istered professional engineer who ap- from manufacturer’s tabulated data
proved the data, shall be maintained at shall be in accordance with all speci-
fications, recommendations, and limi-
the jobsite during construction of the
tations issued or made by the manufac-
protective system. After that time the
turer.
data may be stored off the jobsite, but
(ii) Deviation from the specifications,
a copy of the data shall be made avail-
recommendations, and limitations
able to the Secretary upon request.
issued or made by the manufacturer
(4) Option (4)—Design by a registered shall only be allowed after the manu-
professional engineer. (i) Sloping and facturer issues specific written ap-
benching systems not utilizing Option proval.
(1) or Option (2) or Option (3) under (iii) Manufacturer’s specifications,
paragraph (b) of this section shall be recommendations, and limitations, and
approved by a registered professional manufacturer’s approval to deviate
engineer. from the specifications, recommenda-
(ii) Designs shall be in written form tions, and limitations shall be in writ-
and shall include at least the following: ten form at the jobsite during con-
(A) The magnitude of the slopes that struction of the protective system.
were determined to be safe for the par- After that time this data may be
ticular project; stored off the jobsite, but a copy shall
380
be made available to the Secretary ner that is consistent with the rec-
upon request. ommendations of the manufacturer,
(3) Option (3)—Designs using other tab- and in a manner that will prevent em-
ulated data. (i) Designs of support sys- ployee exposure to hazards.
tems, shield systems, or other protec- (3) When material or equipment that
tive systems shall be selected from and is used for protective systems is dam-
be in accordance with tabulated data, aged, a competent person shall exam-
such as tables and charts. ine the material or equipment and
(ii) The tabulated data shall be in evaluate its suitability for continued
written form and include all of the fol- use. If the competent person cannot as-
lowing: sure the material or equipment is able
(A) Identification of the parameters to support the intended loads or is oth-
that affect the selection of a protective erwise suitable for safe use, then such
system drawn from such data; material or equipment shall be re-
(B) Identification of the limits of use moved from service, and shall be evalu-
of the data; ated and approved by a registered pro-
(C) Explanatory information as may fessional engineer before being re-
be necessary to aid the user in making turned to service.
a correct selection of a protective sys- (e) Installation and removal of sup-
tem from the data. port—(1) General. (i) Members of sup-
(iii) At least one copy of the tab- port systems shall be securely con-
ulated data, which identifies the reg- nected together to prevent sliding, fall-
istered professional engineer who ap- ing, kickouts, or other predictable fail-
proved the data, shall be maintained at ure.
the jobsite during construction of the (ii) Support systems shall be in-
protective system. After that time the stalled and removed in a manner that
data may be stored off the jobsite, but protects employees from cave-ins,
a copy of the data shall be made avail- structural collapses, or from being
able to the Secretary upon request. struck by members of the support sys-
(4) Option (4)—Design by a registered tem.
professional engineer. (i) Support sys- (iii) Individual members of support
tems, shield systems, and other protec- systems shall not be subjected to loads
tive systems not utilizing Option 1, Op- exceeding those which those members
tion 2 or Option 3, above, shall be ap- were designed to withstand.
proved by a registered professional en- (iv) Before temporary removal of in-
gineer. dividual members begins, additional
(ii) Designs shall be in written form precautions shall be taken to ensure
and shall include the following: the safety of employees, such as in-
(A) A plan indicating the sizes, types, stalling other structural members to
and configurations of the materials to carry the loads imposed on the support
be used in the protective system; and system.
(B) The identity of the registered (v) Removal shall begin at, and
professional engineer approving the de- progress from, the bottom of the exca-
sign. vation. Members shall be released slow-
(iii) At least one copy of the design ly so as to note any indication of pos-
shall be maintained at the jobsite dur- sible failure of the remaining members
ing construction of the protective sys- of the structure or possible cave-in of
tem. After that time, the design may the sides of the excavation.
be stored off the jobsite, but a copy of (vi) Backfilling shall progress to-
the design shall be made available to gether with the removal of support sys-
the Secretary upon request. tems from excavations.
(d) Materials and equipment. (1) Mate- (2) Additional requirements for support
rials and equipment used for protective systems for trench excavations. (i) Exca-
systems shall be free from damage or vation of material to a level no greater
defects that might impair their proper than 2 feet (.61 m) below the bottom of
function. the members of a support system shall

(2) Manufactured materials and be permitted, but only if the system is
equipment used for protective systems designed to resist the forces calculated
shall be used and maintained in a man- for the full depth of the trench, and
381
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
there are no indications while the to subpart P of part 1926, and when alu-
trench is open of a possible loss of soil minum hydraulic shoring is designed in ac-
from behind or below the bottom of the cordance with appendix D. This Appendix
also applies if other protective systems are
support system. designed and selected for use from data pre-
(ii) Installation of a support system pared in accordance with the requirements
shall be closely coordinated with the set forth in § 1926.652(c), and the use of the
excavation of trenches. data is predicated on the use of the soil clas-
(f) Sloping and benching systems. Em- sification system set forth in this appendix.
ployees shall not be permitted to work (b) Definitions. The definitions and exam-
on the faces of sloped or benched exca- ples given below are based on, in whole or in
vations at levels above other employ- part, the following: American Society for
Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards D653–85
ees except when employees at the lower and D2488; The Unified Soils Classification
levels are adequately protected from System, The U.S. Department of Agriculture
the hazard of falling, rolling, or sliding (USDA) Textural Classification Scheme; and
material or equipment. The National Bureau of Standards Report
(g) Shield systems—(1) General. (i) BSS–121.
Shield systems shall not be subjected Cemented soil means a soil in which the par-
to loads exceeding those which the sys- ticles are held together by a chemical agent,
tem was designed to withstand. such as calcium carbonate, such that a hand-
size sample cannot be crushed into powder or
(ii) Shields shall be installed in a individual soil particles by finger pressure.
manner to restrict lateral or other haz- Cohesive soil means clay (fine grained soil),
ardous movement of the shield in the or soil with a high clay content, which has
event of the application of sudden lat- cohesive strength. Cohesive soil does not
eral loads. crumble, can be excavated with vertical
(iii) Employees shall be protected sideslopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohe-
from the hazard of cave-ins when enter- sive soil is hard to break up when dry, and
ing or exiting the areas protected by exhibits significant cohesion when sub-
merged. Cohesive soils include clayey silt,
shields. sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay.
(iv) Employees shall not be allowed Dry soil means soil that does not exhibit
in shields when shields are being in- visible signs of moisture content.
stalled, removed, or moved vertically. Fissured means a soil material that has a
(2) Additional requirement for shield tendency to break along definite planes of
systems used in trench excavations. Exca- fracture with little resistance, or a material
vations of earth material to a level not that exhibits open cracks, such as tension
greater than 2 feet (.61 m) below the cracks, in an exposed surface.
Granular soil means gravel, sand, or silt,
bottom of a shield shall be permitted,
(coarse grained soil) with little or no clay
but only if the shield is designed to re- content. Granular soil has no cohesive
sist the forces calculated for the full strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit
depth of the trench, and there are no apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be
indications while the trench is open of molded when moist and crumbles easily
a possible loss of soil from behind or when dry.
below the bottom of the shield. Layered system means two or more dis-
tinctly different soil or rock types arranged
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART P OF PART in layers. Micaceous seams or weakened
1926—SOIL CLASSIFICATION planes in rock or shale are considered lay-
ered.
(a) Scope and application—(1) Scope. This Moist soil means a condition in which a soil
appendix describes a method of classifying looks and feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can
soil and rock deposits based on site and envi- easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into
ronmental conditions, and on the structure small diameter threads before crumbling.
and composition of the earth deposits. The Moist granular soil that contains some cohe-
appendix contains definitions, sets forth re- sive material will exhibit signs of cohesion
quirements, and describes acceptable visual between particles.
and manual tests for use in classifying soils. Plastic means a property of a soil which al-
(2) Application. This appendix applies when lows the soil to be deformed or molded with-
a sloping or benching system is designed in out cracking, or appreciable volume change.
accordance with the requirements set forth Saturated soil means a soil in which the
in § 1926.652(b)(2) as a method of protection voids are filled with water. Saturation does
for employees from cave-ins. This appendix not require flow. Saturation, or near satura-
also applies when timber shoring for exca- tion, is necessary for the proper use of in-
vations is designed as a method of protection struments such as a pocket penetrometer or
from cave-ins in accordance with appendix C sheer vane.
382
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. A
Soil classification system means, for the pur- (v) Material in a sloped, layered system
pose of this subpart, a method of catego- where the layers dip into the excavation or a
rizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy slope of four horizontal to one vertical
of Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C, (4H:1V) or steeper.
in decreasing order of stability. The cat- Unconfined compressive strength means the
egories are determined based on an analysis load per unit area at which a soil will fail in
of the properties and performance character- compression. It can be determined by labora-
istics of the deposits and the environmental tory testing, or estimated in the field using
conditions of exposure. a pocket penetrometer, by thumb penetra-
Stable rock means natural solid mineral tion tests, and other methods.
matter that can be excavated with vertical Wet soil means soil that contains signifi-
sides and remain intact while exposed. cantly more moisture than moist soil, but in
Submerged soil means soil which is under- such a range of values that cohesive material
water or is free seeping. will slump or begin to flow when vibrated.
Type A means cohesive soils with an Granular material that would exhibit cohe-
unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 ton sive properties when moist will lose those co-
per square foot (tsf) (144 kPa) or greater. Ex- hesive properties when wet.
amples of cohesive soils are: clay, silty clay, (c) Requirements—(1) Classification of soil
sandy clay, clay loam and, in some cases, and rock deposits. Each soil and rock deposit
silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Ce- shall be classified by a competent person as
mented soils such as caliche and hardpan are Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, or Type C in
also considered Type A. However, no soil is accordance with the definitions set forth in
Type A if: paragraph (b) of this appendix.
(i) The soil is fissured; or (2) Basis of classification. The classification
of the deposits shall be made based on the re-
(ii) The soil is subject to vibration from
sults of at least one visual and at least one
heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects;
manual analysis. Such analyses shall be con-
or
ducted by a competent person using tests de-
(iii) The soil has been previously disturbed;
scribed in paragraph (d) below, or in other
or
recognized methods of soil classification and
(iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered testing such as those adopted by the Amer-
system where the layers dip into the exca- ica Society for Testing Materials, or the U.S.
vation on a slope of four horizontal to one Department of Agriculture textural classi-
vertical (4H:1V) or greater; or fication system.
(v) The material is subject to other factors (3) Visual and manual analyses. The visual
that would require it to be classified as a less and manual analyses, such as those noted as
stable material. being acceptable in paragraph (d) of this ap-
Type B means: pendix, shall be designed and conducted to
(i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- provide sufficient quantitative and quali-
pressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48 tative information as may be necessary to
kPa) but less than 1.5 tsf (144 kPa); or identify properly the properties, factors, and
(ii) Granular cohesionless soils including: conditions affecting the classification of the
angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), deposits.
silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some (4) Layered systems. In a layered system,
cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. the system shall be classified in accordance
(iii) Previously disturbed soils except those with its weakest layer. However, each layer
which would otherwise be classed as Type C may be classified individually where a more
soil. stable layer lies under a less stable layer.
(iv) Soil that meets the unconfined com- (5) Reclassification. If, after classifying a de-
pressive strength or cementation require- posit, the properties, factors, or conditions
ments for Type A, but is fissured or subject affecting its classification change in any
to vibration; or way, the changes shall be evaluated by a
(v) Dry rock that is not stable; or competent person. The deposit shall be re-
(vi) Material that is part of a sloped, lay- classified as necessary to reflect the changed
ered system where the layers dip into the ex- circumstances.
cavation on a slope less steep than four hori- (d) Acceptable visual and manual tests—(1)
zontal to one vertical (4H:1V), but only if the Visual tests. Visual analysis is conducted to
material would otherwise be classified as determine qualitative information regarding
Type B. the excavation site in general, the soil adja-
Type C means: cent to the excavation, the soil forming the
(i) Cohesive soil with an unconfined com- sides of the open excavation, and the soil
pressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less; or taken as samples from excavated material.
(ii) Granular soils including gravel, sand, (i) Observe samples of soil that are exca-
and loamy sand; or vated and soil in the sides of the excavation.
(iii) Submerged soil or soil from which Estimate the range of particle sizes and the
water is freely seeping; or relative amounts of the particle sizes. Soil
(iv) Submerged rock that is not stable, or that is primarily composed of fine-grained
383
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
material is cohesive material. Soil composed designation D2488—‘‘Standard Recommended
primarily of coarse-grained sand or gravel is Practice for Description of Soils (Visual—
granular material. Manual Procedure).’’) Type A soils with an
(ii) Observe soil as it is excavated. Soil unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tsf
that remains in clumps when excavated is can be readily indented by the thumb; how-
cohesive. Soil that breaks up easily and does ever, they can be penetrated by the thumb
not stay in clumps is granular. only with very great effort. Type C soils with
(iii) Observe the side of the opened exca- an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf
vation and the surface area adjacent to the can be easily penetrated several inches by
excavation. Crack-like openings such as ten- the thumb, and can be molded by light finger
sion cracks could indicate fissured material. pressure. This test should be conducted on
If chunks of soil spall off a vertical side, the an undisturbed soil sample, such as a large
soil could be fissured. Small spalls are evi- clump of spoil, as soon as practicable after
dence of moving ground and are indications excavation to keep to a miminum the effects
of potentially hazardous situations. of exposure to drying influences. If the exca-
(iv) Observe the area adjacent to the excavation is later exposed to wetting influences
vation and the excavation itself for evidence (rain, flooding), the classification of the soil
of existing utility and other underground must be changed accordingly.
structures, and to identify previously dis- (iv) Other strength tests. Estimates of
turbed soil. unconfined compressive strength of soils can
(v) Observe the opened side of the exca- also be obtained by use of a pocket pene-
vation to identify layered systems. Examine trometer or by using a hand-operated
layered systems to identify if the layers shearvane.
slope toward the excavation. Estimate the (v) Drying test. The basic purpose of the
degree of slope of the layers. drying test is to differentiate between cohe-
(vi) Observe the area adjacent to the exca- sive material with fissures, unfissured cohe-
vation and the sides of the opened exca- sive material, and granular material. The
vation for evidence of surface water, water procedure for the drying test involves drying
seeping from the sides of the excavation, or a sample of soil that is approximately one
the location of the level of the water table. inch thick (2.54 cm) and six inches (15.24 cm)
(vii) Observe the area adjacent to the exca- in diameter until it is thoroughly dry:
vation and the area within the excavation (A) If the sample develops cracks as it
for sources of vibration that may affect the dries, significant fissures are indicated.
stability of the excavation face. (B) Samples that dry without cracking are
(2) Manual tests. Manual analysis of soil to be broken by hand. If considerable force is
samples is conducted to determine quan- necessary to break a sample, the soil has sig-
titative as well as qualitative properties of nificant cohesive material content. The soil
soil and to provide more information in can be classified as a unfissured cohesive ma-
order to classify soil properly. terial and the unconfined compressive
(i) Plasticity. Mold a moist or wet sample of strength should be determined.
soil into a ball and attempt to roll it into (C) If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is
threads as thin as 1⁄8-inch in diameter. Cohe- either a fissured cohesive material or a
sive material can be successfully rolled into granular material. To distinguish between
threads without crumbling. For example, if the two, pulverize the dried clumps of the
at least a two inch (50 mm) length of 1⁄8-inch sample by hand or by stepping on them. If
thread can be held on one end without tear- the clumps do not pulverize easily, the mate-
ing, the soil is cohesive. rial is cohesive with fissures. If they pul-
(ii) Dry strength. If the soil is dry and verize easily into very small fragments, the
crumbles on its own or with moderate pres- material is granular.
sure into individual grains or fine powder, it
is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, APPENDIX B TO SUBPART P OF PART
or silt). If the soil is dry and falls into 1926—SLOPING AND BENCHING
clumps which break up into smaller clumps,
but the smaller clumps can only be broken (a) Scope and application. This appendix
up with difficulty, it may be clay in any contains specifications for sloping and
combination with gravel, sand or silt. If the benching when used as methods of protecting
dry soil breaks into clumps which do not employees working in excavations from
break up into small clumps and which can cave-ins. The requirements of this appendix
only be broken with difficulty, and there is apply when the design of sloping and bench-
no visual indication the soil is fissured, the ing protective systems is to be performed in
soil may be considered unfissured. accordance with the requirements set forth
(iii) Thumb penetration. The thumb penetra- in § 1926.652(b)(2).
tion test can be used to estimate the (b) Definitions.

unconfined compressive strength of cohesive Actual slope means the slope to which an
soils. (This test is based on the thumb pene- excavation face is excavated.
tration test described in American Society Distress means that the soil is in a condi-
for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard tion where a cave-in is imminent or is likely
384
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. B
to occur. Distress is evidenced by such phe- (2) Maximum allowable slope. The maximum
nomena as the development of fissures in the allowable slope for a soil or rock deposit
face of or adjacent to an open excavation; shall be determined from Table B–1 of this
the subsidence of the edge of an excavation; appendix.
the slumping of material from the face or (3) Actual slope. (i) The actual slope shall
the bulging or heaving of material from the not be steeper than the maximum allowable
bottom of an excavation; the spalling of ma- slope.
terial from the face of an excavation; and (ii) The actual slope shall be less steep
ravelling, i.e., small amounts of material than the maximum allowable slope, when
such as pebbles or little clumps of material there are signs of distress. If that situation
suddenly separating from the face of an exca- occurs, the slope shall be cut back to an ac-
vation and trickling or rolling down into the tual slope which is at least 1⁄2 horizontal to
excavation. one vertical (1⁄2H:1V) less steep than the
Maximum allowable slope means the steep- maximum allowable slope.
est incline of an excavation face that is ac- (iii) When surcharge loads from stored ma-
ceptable for the most favorable site condi- terial or equipment, operating equipment, or
tions as protection against cave-ins, and is traffic are present, a competent person shall
expressed as the ratio of horizontal distance determine the degree to which the actual
to vertical rise (H:V). slope must be reduced below the maximum
Short term exposure means a period of time allowable slope, and shall assure that such
less than or equal to 24 hours that an exca- reduction is achieved. Surcharge loads from
vation is open. adjacent structures shall be evaluated in ac-
(c) Requirements—(1) Soil classification. Soil cordance with § 1926.651(i).
and rock deposits shall be classified in ac- (4) Configurations. Configurations of slop-
cordance with appendix A to subpart P of ing and benching systems shall be in accord-
part 1926. ance with Figure B–1.
385
EC30OC91.016</GPH>
Figure B–1
Slope Configurations
(All slopes stated below are in the horizontal to vertical ratio)
B–1.1 Excavations made in Type A soil.

1. All simple slope excavation 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 3⁄4:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE—GENERAL
Exception: Simple slope excavations which are open 24 hours or less (short term) and which
are 12 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1⁄2:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE—SHORT TERM

2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 3⁄4 to 1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:
EC30OC91.019</GPH>
EC30OC91.018</GPH>
386
EC30OC91.017</GPH>
SIMPLE BENCH
MULTIPLE BENCH
3. All excavations 8 feet or less in depth which have unsupported vertically sided lower por-
tions shall have a maximum vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 8 FEET IN DEPTH

All excavations more than 8 feet but not more than 12 feet in depth which unsupported
vertically sided lower portions shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1 and a maximum
vertical side of 31⁄2 feet.
EC30OC91.022</GPH>
EC30OC91.021</GPH>
387
EC30OC91.020</GPH>
UNSUPPORTED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION—MAXIMUM 12 FEET IN DEPTH
All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions that are
supported or shielded shall have a maximum allowable slope of 3⁄4:1. The support or shield sys-
tem must extend at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side.
SUPPORTED OR SHIELDED VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION

4. All other simple slope, compound slope, and vertically sided lower portion excavations
shall be in accordance with the other options permitted under § 1926.652(b).
B–1.2 Excavations Made in Type B Soil

1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable
slope of 1:1.
SIMPLE SLOPE
2. All benched excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable slope
of 1:1 and maximum bench dimensions as follows:
EC30OC91.024</GPH>
388
EC30OC91.023</GPH>
SINGLE BENCH
MULTIPLE BENCH
3. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall
be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All
such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 1:1.
EC30OC91.027</GPH>
VERTICALLY SIDED LOWER PORTION

4. All other sloped excavations shall be in accordance with the other options permitted in
§ 1926.652(b).
B–1.3 Excavations Made in Type C Soil

EC30OC91.026</GPH>
1. All simple slope excavations 20 feet or less in depth shall have a maximum allowable
slope of 11⁄2:1.
389
EC30OC91.025</GPH>
SIMPLE SLOPE
2. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth which have vertically sided lower portions shall
be shielded or supported to a height at least 18 inches above the top of the vertical side. All
such excavations shall have a maximum allowable slope of 11⁄2:1.
VERTICAL SIDED LOWER PORTION

§ 1926.652(b).
B–1.4 Excavations Made in Layered Soils

1. All excavations 20 feet or less in depth made in layered soils shall have a maximum al-
lowable slope for each layer as set forth below.
EC30OC91.029</GPH>
390
EC30OC91.028</GPH>
391
EC30OC91.030</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
§ 1926.652(b).
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART P OF PART (b) Soil Classification. In order to use the

1926—TIMBER SHORING FOR TRENCHES data presented in this appendix, the soil type
or types in which the excavation is made
(a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- must first be determined using the soil clas-
tion that can be used timber shoring is pro- sification method set forth in appendix A of
vided as a method of protection from cave- subpart P of this part.
ins in trenches that do not exceed 20 feet (6.1 (c) Presentation of Information. Information
m) in depth. This appendix must be used is presented in several forms as follows:
when design of timber shoring protective (1) Information is presented in tabular
systems is to be performed in accordance form in Tables C–1.1, C–1.2, and C–1.3, and Ta-
with § 1926.652(c)(1). Other timber shoring bles C–2.1, C–2.2 and C–2.3 following para-
configurations; other systems of support graph (g) of the appendix. Each table pre-
such as hydraulic and pneumatic systems; sents the minimum sizes of timber members
and other protective systems such as slop- to use in a shoring system, and each table
ing, benching, shielding, and freezing sys- contains data only for the particular soil
tems must be designed in accordance with type in which the excavation or portion of
the requirements set forth in § 1926.652(b) and
§ 1926.652(c).
392
EC30OC91.031</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. C
the excavation is made. The data are ar- (B) When vertical loads imposed on cross
ranged to allow the user the flexibility to se- braces exceed a 240-pound gravity load dis-
lect from among several acceptable configu- tributed on a one-foot section of the center
rations of members based on varying the of the crossbrace.
horizontal spacing of the crossbraces. Stable (C) When surcharge loads are present from
rock is exempt from shoring requirements equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
and therefore, no data are presented for this pounds.
condition. (D) When only the lower portion of a
(2) Information concerning the basis of the trench is shored and the remaining portion
tabular data and the limitations of the data of the trench is sloped or benched unless:
is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less
dix, and on the tables themselves. steep than three horizontal to one vertical;
(3) Information explaining the use of the or the members are selected from the tables
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of for use at a depth which is determined from
this appendix. the top of the overall trench, and not from
(4) Information illustrating the use of the the toe of the sloped portion.
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of (e) Use of Tables. The members of the shor-
this appendix.
ing system that are to be selected using this
(5) Miscellaneous notations regarding Ta-
information are the cross braces, the
bles C–1.1 through C–1.3 and Tables C–2.1
uprights, and the wales, where wales are re-
through C–2.3 are presented in paragraph (g)
quired. Minimum sizes of members are speci-
of this Appendix.
fied for use in different types of soil. There
(d) Basis and limitations of the data—(1) Di-
are six tables of information, two for each
mensions of timber members. (i) The sizes of the
soil type. The soil type must first be deter-
timber members listed in Tables C–1.1
through C–1.3 are taken from the National mined in accordance with the soil classifica-
Bureau of Standards (NBS) report, ‘‘Rec- tion system described in appendix A to sub-
ommended Technical Provisions for Con- part P of part 1926. Using the appropriate
struction Practice in Shoring and Sloping of table, the selection of the size and spacing of
Trenches and Excavations.’’ In addition, the members is then made. The selection is
where NBS did not recommend specific sizes based on the depth and width of the trench
of members, member sizes are based on an where the members are to be installed and,
analysis of the sizes required for use by ex- in most instances, the selection is also based
isting codes and on empirical practice. on the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces.
(ii) The required dimensions of the mem- Instances where a choice of horizontal spac-
bers listed in Tables C–1.1 through C–1.3 refer ing of crossbracing is available, the hori-
to actual dimensions and not nominal di- zontal spacing of the crossbraces must be
mensions of the timber. Employers wanting chosen by the user before the size of any
to use nominal size shoring are directed to member can be determined. When the soil
Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3, or have this type, the width and depth of the trench, and
choice under § 1926.652(c)(3), and are referred the horizontal spacing of the crossbraces are
to The Corps of Engineers, The Bureau of known, the size and vertical spacing of the
Reclamation or data from other acceptable crossbraces, the size and vertical spacing of
sources. the wales, and the size and horizontal spac-
(2) Limitation of application. (i) It is not ining of the uprights can be read from the ap-
tended that the timber shoring specification propriate table.
apply to every situation that may be experi- (f) Examples to Illustrate the Use of Tables C–
enced in the field. These data were developed 1.1 through C–1.3.
to apply to the situations that are most (1) Example 1.
commonly experienced in current trenching A trench dug in Type A soil is 13 feet deep
practice. Shoring systems for use in situa- and five feet wide.
tions that are not covered by the data in this From Table C–1.1, for acceptable arrange-
appendix must be designed as specified in ments of timber can be used.
§ 1926.652(c).
(ii) When any of the following conditions Arrangement #B1
are present, the members specified in the ta- Space 4×4 crossbraces at six feet hori-
bles are not considered adequate. Either an zontally and four feet vertically.
alternate timber shoring system must be de-
Wales are not required.
signed or another type of protective system
Space 3×8 uprights at six feet horizontally.
designed in accordance with § 1926.652.
(A) When loads imposed by structures or This arrangement is commonly called ‘‘skip
by stored material adjacent to the trench shoring.’’
weigh in excess of the load imposed by a two- Arrangement #B2

foot soil surcharge. The term ‘‘adjacent’’ as
used here means the area within a horizontal Space 4×6 crossbraces at eight feet hori-
distance from the edge of the trench equal to zontally and four feet vertically.
the depth of the trench. Space 8×8 wales at four feet vertically.
393
Space 2×6 uprights at four feet hori- Space 12×12 wales at five feet vertically.
zontally. Position 2×6 uprights in a close sheeting
configuration unless water pressure must be
Arrangement #B3 resisted. Tight sheeting must be used where
Space 6×6 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- water must be retained.
zontally and four feet vertically. (4) Example 4.
Space 8×10 wales at four feet vertically. A trench dug in Type C soil is 20 feet deep
Space 2×6 uprights at five feet hori- and 11 feet wide. The size and spacing of
zontally. members for the section of trench that is
over 15 feet in depth is determined using
Arrangement #B4
Table C–1.3. Only one arrangement of mem-
Space 6×6 crossbraces at 12 feet hori- bers is provided.
zontally and four feet vertically. Space 8×10 crossbraces at six feet hori-
Space 10×10 wales at four feet vertically. zontally and five feet vertically.
Spaces 3×8 uprights at six feet hori- Space 12×12 wales at five feet vertically.
zontally.
Use 3×6 tight sheeting.
(2) Example 2.
A trench dug in Type B soil in 13 feet deep Use of Tables C–2.1 through C–2.3 would fol-
and five feet wide. From Table C–1.2 three low the same procedures.
acceptable arrangements of members are (g) Notes for all Tables.
listed. 1. Member sizes at spacings other than in-
dicated are to be determined as specified in
Arrangement #B1 § 1926.652(c), ‘‘Design of Protective Systems.’’
Space 6×6 crossbraces at six feet hori- 2. When conditions are saturated or sub-
zontally and five feet vertically. merged use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting
Space 8×8 wales at five feet vertically. refers to the use of specially-edged timber
Space 2×6 uprights at two feet hori- planks (e.g., tongue and groove) at least
zontally. three inches thick, steel sheet piling, or
similar construction that when driven or
Arrangement #B2 placed in position provide a tight wall to re-
Space 6×8 crossbraces at eight feet hori- sist the lateral pressure of water and to pre-
zontally and five feet vertically. vent the loss of backfill material. Close
Space 10×10 wales at five feet vertically. Sheeting refers to the placement of planks
Space 2×6 uprights at two feet hori- side-by-side allowing as little space as pos-
zontally. sible between them.
3. All spacing indicated is measured center
Arrangement #B3 to center.
Space 8×8 crossbraces at 10 feet hori- 4. Wales to be installed with greater di-
zontally and five feet vertically. mension horizontal.
Space 10×12 wales at five feet vertically. 5. If the vertical distance from the center
Space 2×6 uprights at two feet vertically. of the lowest crossbrace to the bottom of the
(3) Example 3. trench exceeds two and one-half feet,
A trench dug in Type C soil is 13 feet deep uprights shall be firmly embedded or a
and five feet wide. mudsill shall be used. Where uprights are
From Table C–1.3 two acceptable arrange- embedded, the vertical distance from the
ments of members can be used. center of the lowest crossbrace to the bot-
tom of the trench shall not exceed 36 inches.
Arrangement #B1 When mudsills are used, the vertical dis-
Space 8×8 crossbraces at six feet hori- tance shall not exceed 42 inches. Mudsills are
zontally and five feet vertically. wales that are installed at the toe of the
Space 10×12 wales at five feet vertically. trench side.
Position 2×6 uprights as closely together as 6. Trench jacks may be used in lieu of or in
possible. combination with timber crossbraces.
If water must be retained use special 7. Placement cf crossbraces. When the
tongue and groove uprights to form tight vertical spacing of crossbraces is four feet,
sheeting. place the top crossbrace no more than two
feet below the top of the trench. When the
Arrangement #B2
vertical spacing of crossbraces is five feet,
Space 8×10 crossbraces at eight feet hori- place the top crossbrace no more than 2.5
zontally and five feet vertically. feet below the top of the trench.
394
395
EC30OC91.032</GPH>
396
EC30OC91.033</GPH>
397
EC30OC91.034</GPH>
398
EC30OC91.035</GPH>
399
EC30OC91.036</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART P OF PART do not exceed 20 feet (6.1m) in depth. This ap-
1926—ALUMINUM HYDRAULIC SHOR- pendix must be used when design of the alu-
ING FOR TRENCHES minum hydraulic protective system cannot
be performed in accordance with
(a) Scope. This appendix contains informa- § 1926.652(c)(2).

tion that can be used when aluminum hy- (b) Soil Classification. In order to use data
draulic shoring is provided as a method of presented in this appendix, the soi1 type or
protection against cave-ins in trenches that types in which the excavation is made must
400
EC30OC91.037</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. D
first be determined using the soil classifica- bles are not considered adequate. In this
tion method set forth in appendix A of sub- case, an alternative aluminum hydraulic
part P of part 1926. shoring system or other type of protective
(c) Presentation of Information. Information system must be designed in accordance with
is presented in several forms as follows: § 1926.652.
(1) Information is presented in tabular (A) When vertical loads imposed on cross
form in Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and E–1.4. braces exceed a 100 Pound gravity load dis-
Each table presents the maximum vertical tributed on a one foot section of the center
and horizontal spacings that may be used of the hydraulic cylinder.
with various aluminum member sizes and (B) When surcharge loads are present from
various hydraulic cylinder sizes. Each table equipment weighing in excess of 20,000
contains data only for the particular soil pounds.
type in which the excavation or portion of (C) When only the lower portion or a
the excavation is made. Tables D–1.1 and D– trench is shored and the remaining portion
1.2 are for vertical shores in Types A and B of the trench is sloped or benched unless:
soil. Tables D–1.3 and D1.4 are for horizontal The sloped portion is sloped at an angle less
waler systems in Types B and C soil. steep than three horizontal to one vertical;
(2) Information concerning the basis of the or the members are selected from the tables
tabular data and the limitations of the data for use at a depth which is determined from
is presented in paragraph (d) of this appen- the top of the overall trench, and not from
dix. the toe of the sloped portion.
(3) Information explaining the use of the (e) Use of Tables D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3 and D–
tabular data is presented in paragraph (e) of 1.4. The members of the shoring system that
this appendix. are to be selected using this information are
(4) Information illustrating the use of the the hydraulic cylinders, and either the
tabular data is presented in paragraph (f) of vertical shores or the horizontal wales. When
this appendix. a waler system is used the vertical timber
(5) Miscellaneous notations (footnotes) re- sheeting to be used is also selected from
garding Table D–1.1 through D–1.4 are pre- these tables. The Tables D–1.1 and D–1.2 for
sented in paragraph (g) of this appendix. vertical shores are used in Type A and B
(6) Figures, illustrating typical installa- soils that do not require sheeting. Type B
tions of hydraulic shoring, are included just soils that may require sheeting, and Type C
prior to the Tables. The illustrations page is soils that always require sheeting are found
entitled ‘‘Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring; in the horizontal wale Tables D–1.3 and D–1.4.
Typical Installations.’’ The soil type must first be determined in ac-
(d) Basis and limitations of the data. (1) cordance with the soil classification system
Vertical shore rails and horizontal wales are described in appendix A to subpart P of part
those that meet the Section Modulus re- 1926. Using the appropriate table, the selec-
quirements in the D–1 Tables. Aluminum tion of the size and spacing of the members
material is 6061–T6 or material of equivalent is made. The selection is based on the depth
strength and properties. and width of the trench where the members
(2) Hydraulic cylinders specifications. (i) 2- are to be installed. In these tables the
inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in- vertical spacing is held constant at four feet
side diameter with a minimum safe working on center. The tables show the maximum
capacity of no less than 18,000 pounds axial horizontal spacing of cylinders allowed for
compressive load at maximum extension. each size of wale in the waler system tables,
Maximum extension is to include full range and in the vertical shore tables, the hydrau-
of cylinder extensions as recommended by lic cylinder horizontal spacing is the same as
product manufaturer. the vertical shore spacing.
(ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3- (f) Example to Illustrate the Use of the Tables:
inch inside diameter with a safe working ca- (1) Example 1:
pacity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial A trench dug in Type A soil is 6 feet deep
compressive load at extensions as rec- and 3 feet wide. From Table D–1.1: Find
ommended by product manufacturer. vertical shores and 2 inch diameter cylinders
(3) Limitation of application. spaced 8 feet on center (o.c.) horizontally and
(i) It is not intended that the aluminum 4 feet on center (o.c.) vertically. (See Figures
hydraulic specification apply to every situa- 1 & 3 for typical installations.)
tion that may be experienced in the field. (2) Example 2:
These data were developed to apply to the A trench is dug in Type B soil that does
situations that are most commonly experi- not require sheeting, 13 feet deep and 5 feet
enced in current trenching practice. Shoring wide. From Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores
systems for use in situations that are not and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced 6.5 feet
covered by the data in this appendix must be o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically.
otherwise designed as specified in (See Figures 1 & 3 for typical installations.)
§ 1926.652(c). (3) A trench is dug in Type B soil that does
(ii) When any of the following conditions not require sheeting, but does experience
are present, the members specified in the Ta- some minor raveling of the trench face. The
401
trench is 16 feet deep and 9 feet wide. From (2) 2 inch diameter cylinders, at this width,
Table D–1.2: Find vertical shores and 2 inch shall have structural steel tube
diameter cylinder (with special oversleeves (3.5×3.5×0.1875) oversleeves, or structural
as designated by footnote #B2) spaced 5.5 feet oversleeves of manufacturer’s specification,
o.c. horizontally and 4 feet o.c. vertically, extending the full, collapsed length.
plywood (per footnote (g)(7) to the D–1 Table) (3) Hydraulic cylinders capacities. (i) 2
should be used behind the shores. (See Fig- inch cylinders shall be a minimum 2-inch in-
ures 2 & 3 for typical installations.) side diameter with a safe working capacity
(4) Example 4: A trench is dug in pre- of not less than 18,000 pounds axial compres-
viously disturbed Type B soil, with charac- sive load at maximum extension. Maximum
teristics of a Type C soil, and will require extension is to include full range of cylinder
sheeting. The trench is 18 feet deep and 12 extensions as recommended by product man-
feet wide. 8 foot horizontal spacing between ufacturer.
cylinders is desired for working space. From (ii) 3-inch cylinders shall be a minimum 3-
Table D–1.3: Find horizontal wale with a sec- inch inside diameter with a safe work capac-
tion modulus of 14.0 spaced at 4 feet o.c. ity of not less than 30,000 pounds axial com-
vertically and 3 inch diameter cylinder pressive load at maximum extension. Max-
spaced at 9 feet maximum o.c. horizontally. imum extension is to include full range of
3×12 timber sheeting is required at close cylinder extensions as recommended by
spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for typical product manufacturer.
installation.)
(4) All spacing indicated is measured cen-
(5) Example 5: A trench is dug in Type C
ter to center.
soil, 9 feet deep and 4 feet wide. Horizontal
(5) Vertical shoring rails shall have a min-
cylinder spacing in excess of 6 feet is desired
imum section modulus of 0.40 inch.
for working space. From Table D–1.4: Find
horizontal wale with a section modulus of 7.0 (6) When vertical shores are used, there
and 2 inch diameter cylinders spaced at 6.5 must be a minimum of three shores spaced
feet o.c. horizontally. Or, find horizontal equally, horizontally, in a group.
wale with a 14.0 section modulus and 3 inch (7) Plywood shall be 1.125 in. thick
diameter cylinder spaced at 10 feet o.c. hori- softwood or 0.75 inch. thick, 14 ply, arctic
zontally. Both wales are spaced 4 feet o.c. white birch (Finland form). Please note that
vertically. 3×12 timber sheeting is required plywood is not intended as a structural
at close spacing vertically. (See Figure 4 for member, but only for prevention of local rav-
typical installation.) eling (sloughing of the trench face) between
(g) Footnotes, and general notes, for Tables shores.
D–1.1, D–1.2, D–1.3, and D–1.4. (8) See appendix C for timber specifica-
(1) For applications other than those listed tions.
in the tables, refer to § 1926.652(c)(2) for use of (9) Wales are calculated for simple span
manufacturer’s tabulated data. For trench conditions.
depths in excess of 20 feet, refer to (10) See appendix D, item (d), for basis and
§ 1926.652(c)(2) and § 1926.652(c)(3). limitations of the data.
402
403
EC30OC91.038</GPH>
404
EC30OC91.039</GPH>
405
EC30OC91.040</GPH>
406
EC30OC91.041</GPH>
407
EC30OC91.042</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. E 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART P OF PART 1926—ALTERNATIVES TO TIMBER SHORING

408
EC30OC91.043</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART P OF PART part P for excavations 20 feet or less in

1926—SELECTION OF PROTECTIVE depth. Protective systems for use in exca-
SYSTEMS vations more than 20 feet in depth must be
designed by a registered professional engi-
The following figures are a graphic sum- neer in accordance with § 1926.652 (b) and (c).
mary of the requirements contained in sub-
409
EC30OC91.044</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
410
EC30OC91.045</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F
411
EC30OC91.046</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. P, App. F 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
412
EC30OC91.047</GPH>
Subpart Q—Concrete and forms and shores are removed, in order

Masonry Construction to support partially cured concrete and
construction loads.
(7) Shore means a supporting member
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours that resists a compressive force im-
and Safety Standards Act (Construction
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6 and 8
posed by a load.
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (8) Vertical slip forms means forms
(29 U.S.C. 653, 655, and 657); Secretary of La- which are jacked vertically during the
bor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR placement of concrete.
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), (9) Jacking operation means the task
as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911. of lifting a slab (or group of slabs)
SOURCE: 53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, unless vertically from one location to another
otherwise noted. (e.g., from the casting location to a
temporary (parked) location, or from a
§ 1926.700 Scope, application, and defi- temporary location to another tem-
nitions applicable to this subpart. porary location, or to its final location
(a) Scope and application. This sub- in the structure), during the construc-
part sets forth requirements to protect tion of a building/structure where the
all construction employees from the lift-slab process is being used.
hazards associated with concrete and [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 55
masonry construction operations per- FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]
formed in workplaces covered under 29
CFR part 1926. In addition to the re- § 1926.701 General requirements.
quirements in subpart Q, other rel- (a) Construction loads. No construc-
evant provisions in parts 1910 and 1926 tion loads shall be placed on a concrete
apply to concrete and masonry con- structure or portion of a concrete
struction operations. structure unless the employer deter-
(b) Definitions applicable to this sub- mines, based on information received
part. In addition to the definitions set from a person who is qualified in struc-
forth in § 1926.32, the following defini- tural design, that the structure or por-
tions apply to this subpart. tion of the structure is capable of sup-
(1) Bull float means a tool used to porting the loads.
spread out and smooth concrete. (b) Reinforcing steel. All protruding
(2) Formwork means the total system reinforcing steel, onto and into which
of support for freshly placed or par- employees could fall, shall be guarded
tially cured concrete, including the to eliminate the hazard of impalement.
mold or sheeting (form) that is in con- (c) Post-tensioning operations. (1) No
tact with the concrete as well as all employee (except those essential to the
supporting members including shores, post-tensioning operations) shall be
reshores, hardware, braces, and related permitted to be behind the jack during
hardware. tensioning operations.
(3) Lift slab means a method of con- (2) Signs and barriers shall be erected
crete construction in which floor, and to limit employee access to the post-
roof slabs are cast on or at ground level tensioning area during tensioning oper-
and, using jacks, lifted into position. ations.
(4) Limited access zone means an area (d) Riding concrete buckets. No em-
alongside a masonry wall, which is ployee shall be permitted to ride con-
under construction, and which is clear- crete buckets.
ly demarcated to limit access by em- (e) Working under loads. (1) No em-
ployees. ployee shall be permitted to work
(5) Precast concrete means concrete under concrete buckets while buckets
members (such as walls, panels, slabs, are being elevated or lowered into posi-
columns, and beams) which have been tion.
formed, cast, and cured prior to final (2) To the extent practical, elevated
placement in a structure. concrete buckets shall be routed so
(6) Reshoring means the construction that no employee, or the fewest num-
operation in which shoring equipment ber of employees, are exposed to the
(also called reshores or reshoring hazards associated with falling con-
equipment) is placed, as the original crete buckets.
413
(f) Personal protective equipment. No (g) Tremies. Sections of tremies and

employee shall be permitted to apply a similar concrete conveyances shall be
cement, sand, and water mixture secured with wire rope (or equivalent
through a pneumatic hose unless the materials) in addition to the regular
employee is wearing protective head couplings or connections.
and face equipment. (h) Bull floats. Bull float handles,
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 59 used where they might contact ener-
FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994] gized electrical conductors, shall be
constructed of nonconductive material
§ 1926.702 Requirements for equip- or insulated with a nonconductive
ment and tools. sheath whose electrical and mechan-
(a) Bulk cement storage. (1) Bulk stor- ical characteristics provide the equiva-
age bins, containers, and silos shall be lent protection of a handle constructed
equipped with the following: of nonconductive material.
(i) Conical or tapered bottoms; and (i) Masonry saws. (1) Masonry saws
(ii) Mechanical or pneumatic means shall be guarded with a semicircular
of starting the flow of material. enclosure over the blade.
(2) No employee shall be permitted to (2) A method for retaining blade frag-
enter storage facilities unless the ejec- ments shall be incorporated in the de-
tion system has been shut down, locked sign of the semicircular enclosure.
out, and tagged to indicate that the (j) Lockout/Tagout Procedures. (1) No
ejection system is not to be operated. employee shall be permitted to perform
(b) Concrete mixers. Concrete mixers maintenance or repair activity on
with one cubic yard (.8 m3) or larger equipment (such as compressors, mix-
loading skips shall be equipped with ers, screens or pumps used for concrete
the following: and masonry construction activities)
(1) A mechanical device to clear the where the inadvertent operation of the
skip of materials; and equipment could occur and cause in-
(2) Guardrails installed on each side jury, unless all potentially hazardous
of the skip. energy sources have been locked out
(c) Power concrete trowels. Powered and tagged.
and rotating type concrete troweling
(2) Tags shall read Do Not Start or
machines that are manually guided
similar language to indicate that the
shall be equipped with a control switch
equipment is not to be operated.
that will automatically shut off the
power whenever the hands of the oper- § 1926.703 Requirements for cast-in-
ator are removed from the equipment place concrete.
handles.
(d) Concrete buggies. Concrete buggy (a) General requirements for formwork.
handles shall not extend beyond the (1) Formwork shall be designed, fab-
wheels on either side of the buggy. ricated, erected, supported, braced and
(e) Concrete pumping systems. (1) Con- maintained so that it will be capable of
crete pumping systems using discharge supporting without failure all vertical
pipes shall be provided with pipe sup- and lateral loads that may reasonably
ports designed for 100 percent overload. be anticipated to be applied to the
(2) Compressed air hoses used on con- formwork. Formwork which is de-
crete pumping system shall be provided signed, fabricated, erected, supported,
with positive fail-safe joint connectors braced and maintained in conformance
to prevent separation of sections when with the Appendix to this section will
pressurized. be deemed to meet the requirements of
(f) Concrete buckets. (1) Concrete this paragraph.
buckets equipped with hydraulic or (2) Drawings or plans, including all
pneumatic gates shall have positive revisions, for the jack layout,
safety latches or similar safety devices formwork (including shoring equip-
installed to prevent premature or acci- ment), working decks, and scaffolds,
dental dumping. shall be available at the jobsite.

(2) Concrete buckets shall be de- (b) Shoring and reshoring. (1) All shor-
signed to prevent concrete from hanging equipment (including equipment
ing up on top and the sides. used in reshoring operations) shall be
414
inspected prior to erection to deter- (c) Vertical slip forms. (1) The steel
mine that the equipment meets the re- rods or pipes on which jacks climb or
quirements specified in the formwork by which the forms are lifted shall be—
drawings. (i) Specifically designed for that pur-
(2) Shoring equipment found to be pose; and
damaged such that its strength is re- (ii) Adequately braced where not en-
duced to less than that required by cased in concrete.
§ 1926.703(a)(1) shall not be used for (2) Forms shall be designed to pre-
shoring. vent excessive distortion of the struc-
(3) Erected shoring equipment shall ture during the jacking operation.
be inspected immediately prior to, dur- (3) All vertical slip forms shall be
ing, and immediately after concrete provided with scaffolds or work plat-
placement. forms where employees are required to
(4) Shoring equipment that is found work or pass.
to be damaged or weakened after erec- (4) Jacks and vertical supports shall
tion, such that its strength is reduced be positioned in such a manner that
to less than that required by the loads do not exceed the rated ca-
§ 1926.703(a)(1), shall be immediately re- pacity of the jacks.
inforced. (5) The jacks or other lifting devices
(5) The sills for shoring shall be shall be provided with mechanical dogs
sound, rigid, and capable of carrying or other automatic holding devices to
the maximum intended load. support the slip forms whenever failure
(6) All base plates, shore heads, ex- of the power supply or lifting mecha-
tension devices, and adjustment screws nism occurs.
shall be in firm contact, and secured (6) The form structure shall be main-
when necessary, with the foundation tained within all design tolerances
and the form. specified for plumbness during the
jacking operation.
(7) Eccentric loads on shore heads
(7) The predetermined safe rate of lift
and similar members shall be prohib-
shall not be exceeded.
ited unless these members have been
(d) Reinforcing steel. (1) Reinforcing
designed for such loading.
steel for walls, piers, columns, and
(8) Whenever single post shores are
similar vertical structures shall be
used one on top of another (tiered), the
adequately supported to prevent over-
employer shall comply with the fol-
turning and to prevent collapse.
lowing specific requirements in addi-
(2) Employers shall take measures to
tion to the general requirements for
prevent unrolled wire mesh from re-
formwork:
coiling. Such measures may include,
(i) The design of the shoring shall be but are not limited to, securing each
prepared by a qualified designer and end of the roll or turning over the roll.
the erected shoring shall be inspected (e) Removal of formwork. (1) Forms
by an engineer qualified in structural and shores (except those used for slabs
design. on grade and slip forms) shall not be
(ii) The single post shores shall be removed until the employer determines
vertically aligned. that the concrete has gained sufficient
(iii) The single post shores shall be strength to support its weight and su-
spliced to prevent misalignment. perimposed loads. Such determination
(iv) The single post shores shall be shall be based on compliance with one
adequately braced in two mutually per- of the following:
pendicular directions at the splice (i) The plans and specifications stipu-
level. Each tier shall also be diagonally late conditions for removal of forms
braced in the same two directions. and shores, and such conditions have
(9) Adjustment of single post shores been followed, or
to raise formwork shall not be made (ii) The concrete has been properly
after the placement of concrete. tested with an appropriate ASTM
(10) Reshoring shall be erected, as the standard test method designed to indi-
original forms and shores are removed, cate the concrete compressive
whenever the concrete is required to strength, and the test results indicate
support loads in excess of its capacity. that the concrete has gained sufficient
415
strength to support its weight and su- those employees required for the erec-
perimposed loads. tion of those members.
(2) Reshoring shall not be removed [53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 54
until the concrete being supported has FR 41088, Oct. 5, 1989]
attained adequate strength to support
its weight and all loads in place upon § 1926.705 Requirements for lift-slab
it. construction operations.
(a) Lift-slab operations shall be de-
APPENDIX TO § 1926.703(a)(1) signed and planned by a registered pro-
fessional engineer who has experience
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FORMWORK in lift-slab construction. Such plans
and designs shall be implemented by
(This Appendix is non-mandatory.) the employer and shall include detailed
This appendix serves as a non-manda- instructions and sketches indicating
tory guideline to assist employers in the prescribed method of erection.
complying with the formwork require- These plans and designs shall also in-
ments in § 1926.703(a)(1). Formwork clude provisions for ensuring lateral
which has been designed, fabricated, stability of the building/structure dur-
erected, braced, supported and main- ing construction.
tained in accordance with Sections 6 (b) Jacks/lifting units shall be
marked to indicate their rated capac-
and 7 of the American National Stand-
ity as established by the manufacturer.
ard for Construction and Demolition
(c) Jacks/lifting units shall not be
Operations—Concrete and Masonry
loaded beyond their rated capacity as
Work, ANSI A10.9–1983, shall be deemed
established by the manufacturer.
to be in compliance with the provision (d) Jacking equipment shall be capa-
of § 1926.703(a)(1). ble of supporting at least two and one-
[53 FR 22643, June 16, 1988, as amended at 61 half times the load being lifted during
FR 5510, Feb. 13, 1996] jacking operations and the equipment
shall not be overloaded. For the pur-
§ 1926.704 Requirements for precast pose of this provision, jacking equip-
concrete. ment includes any load bearing compo-
(a) Precast concrete wall units, nent which is used to carry out the lift-
structural framing, and tilt-up wall ing operation(s). Such equipment in-
panels shall be adequately supported to cludes, but is not limited, to the fol-
prevent overturning and to prevent col- lowing: threaded rods, lifting attach-
lapse until permanent connections are ments, lifting nuts, hook-up collars, T-
completed. caps, shearheads, columns, and foot-
ings.
(b) Lifting inserts which are embed-
(e) Jacks/lifting units shall be de-
ded or otherwise attached to tilt-up
signed and installed so that they will
precast concrete members shall be ca-
neither lift nor continue to lift when
pable of supporting at least two times
they are loaded in excess of their rated
the maximum intended load applied or
capacity.
transmitted to them. (f) Jacks/lifting units shall have a
(c) Lifting inserts which are embed- safety device installed which will cause
ded or otherwise attached to precast the jacks/lifting units to support the
concrete members, other than the tilt- load in any position in the event any
up members, shall be capable of sup- jack/lifting unit malfunctions or loses
porting at least four times the max- its lifting ability.
imum intended load applied or trans- (g) Jacking operations shall be syn-
mitted to them. chronized in such a manner to ensure
(d) Lifting hardware shall be capable even and uniform lifting of the slab.
of supporting at least five times the During lifting, all points at which the
maximum intended load applied or slab is supported shall be kept within 1/
transmitted to the lifting hardware. 2 inch of that needed to maintain the

(e) No employee shall be permitted slab in a level position.
under precast concrete members being (h) If leveling is automatically con-
lifted or tilted into position except trolled, a device shall be installed that
416
will stop the operation when the 1⁄2inch lent method of securing the wedges to
tolerance set forth in paragraph (g) of prevent them from falling out of posi-
this section is exceeded or where there tion. Lifting rods may not be released
is a malfunction in the jacking (lifting) until the wedges at that column have
system. been secured.
(i) If leveling is maintained by man- (m) All welding on temporary and
ual controls, such controls shall be lo- permanent connections shall be per-
cated in a central location and at- formed by a certified welder, familiar
tended by a competent person while with the welding requirements speci-
lifting is in progress. In addition to fied in the plans and specifications for
meeting the definition in § 1926.32(f), the lift-slab operation.
the competent person must be experi- (n) Load transfer from jacks/lifting
enced in the lifting operation and with units to building columns shall not be
the lifting equipment being used. executed until the welds on the column
(j) The maximum number of manu- shear plates (weld blocks) are cooled to
ally controlled jacks/lifting units on air temperature.
one slab shall be limited to a number (o) Jacks/lifting units shall be posi-
that will permit the operator to main- tively secured to building columns so
tain the slab level within specified tol- that they do not become dislodged or
erances of paragraph (g) of this section, dislocated.
but in no case shall that number ex- (p) Equipment shall be designed and
ceed 14. installed so that the lifting rods cannot
(k)(1) No employee, except those es- slip out of position or the employer
sential to the jacking operation, shall shall institute other measures, such as
be permitted in the building/structure the use of locking or blocking devices,
while any jacking operation is taking which will provide positive connection
place unless the building/structure has between the lifting rods and attach-
been reinforced sufficiently to ensure ments and will prevent components
its integrity during erection. The from disengaging during lifting oper-
phrase ‘‘reinforced sufficiently to en- ations.
sure its integrity’’ used in this para-
graph means that a registered profes- APPENDIX TO § 1926.705—LIFT-SLAB
sional engineer, independent of the en- OPERATIONS
gineer who designed and planned the
(This Appendix is non-mandatory.)
lifting operation, has determined from
the plans that if there is a loss of sup- In paragraph 1926.705(k), OSHA re-
port at any jack location, that loss will quires employees to be removed from
be confined to that location and the the building/structure during jacking
structure as a whole will remain sta- operations unless an independent reg-
ble. istered professional engineer, other
(2) Under no circumstances, shall any than the engineer who designed and
employee who is not essential to the planned the lifting operation, has de-
jacking operation be permitted imme- termined that the building/structure
diately beneath a slab while it is being has been sufficiently reinforced to in-
lifted. sure the integrity of the building/struc-
(3) For the purpose of paragraph (k) ture. One method to comply with this
of this section, a jacking operation be- provision is for the employer to ensure
gins when a slab or group of slabs is that continuous bottom steel is pro-
lifted and ends when such slabs are se- vided in every slab and in both direc-
cured (with either temporary connections through every wall or column
tions or permanent connections). head area. (Column head area means
(4) Employers who comply with ap- the distance between lines that are one
pendix A to § 1926.705 shall be consid- and one half times the thickness of the
ered to be in compliance with the pro- slab or drop panel. These lines are lo-
visions of paragraphs (k)(1) through cated outside opposite faces of the
(k)(3) of this section. outer edges of the shearhead sections—

(l) When making temporary connec- See Figure 1). The amount of bottom
tions to support slabs, wedges shall be steel shall be established by assuming
secured by tack welding, or an equiva- loss of support at a given lifting jack
417
and then determining the steel nec- In addition, the surrounding supports
essary to carry, by catenary action must be capable of resisting any addi-
over the span between surrounding sup- tional load transferred to them as a re-
ports, the slab service dead load plus sult of the loss of support at the lifting
any service dead and live loads likely jack considered.
to be acting on the slab during jacking.
[55 FR 42328, Oct. 18, 1990]

418
EC30OC91.048</GPH>
§ 1926.706 Requirements for masonry • Standard Test Method for Making and
construction. Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
(ASTM C31–85).
(a) A limited access zone shall be es- • Standard Test Method for Penetration
tablished whenever a masonry wall is Resistance of Hardened Concrete (ASTM
being constructed. The limited access C803–82).
zone shall conform to the following. • Standard Test Method for Compressive
(1) The limited access zone shall be Strength of Concrete Cylinders Cast In-Place
established prior to the start of con- in Cylindrical Molds (ASTM C873–85).
struction of the wall. • Standard Method for Developing Early
(2) The limited access zone shall be Age Compressive Test Values and Projecting
equal to the height of the wall to be Later Age Strengths (ASTM C918–80).
constructed plus four feet, and shall • Recommended Practice for Inspection
run the entire length of the wall. and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel and
(3) The limited access zone shall be Bituminous Materials as Used in Construc-
established on the side of the wall tion (ASTM E329–77).
which will be unscaffolded. • Method of Making and Curing Concrete
(4) The limited access zone shall be Test Specimens in the Laboratory (ASTM
restricted to entry by employees ac- C192–88).
tively engaged in constructing the • Methods of Obtaining and Testing Drilled
Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete (ASTM
wall. No other employees shall be per-
C42–87).
mitted to enter the zone.
• Methods of Securing, Preparing and Test-
(5) The limited access zone shall re-
ing Specimens from Hardened Lightweight
main in place until the wall is ade- Insulating Concrete for Compressive
quately supported to prevent over- Strength (ASTM C513–86).
turning and to prevent collapse unless • Test Method for Comprehensive Strength
the height of wall is over eight feet, in of Lightweight Insulating Concrete (ASTM
which case, the limited access zone C495–86).
shall remain in place until the require- • Method of Making, Accelerating Curing,
ments of paragraph (b) of this section and Testing of Concrete Compression Test
have been met. Specimens (ASTM C684–81).
(b) All masonry walls over eight feet • Test Method for Compressive Strength of
in height shall be adequately braced to Concrete Using Portions of Beams Broken in
prevent overturning and to prevent col- Flexure (ASTM C116–68 (1980)).
lapse unless the wall is adequately sup-
ported so that it will not overturn or Subpart R—Steel Erection
collapse. The bracing shall remain in
place until permanent supporting ele-
ments of the structure are in place. and Safety Standards Act (Construction
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Sec. 4, 6, and 8,
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART Q OF PART
Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970
1926—REFERENCES TO SUBPART Q OF (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s
PART 1926 Order No. 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), No. 5–2002 (67
(This Appendix is non-mandatory.) FR 65008), or No. 5–2007 (72 FR 31160) as appli-
cable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
The following non-mandatory references
provide information which can be helpful in SOURCE: 66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, unless
understanding and complying with the re- otherwise noted.
quirements contained in subpart Q.
• Accident Prevention Manual for Indus- § 1926.750 Scope.
trial Operations; Eighth Edition; National
Safety Council. (a) This subpart sets forth require-
• Building Code Requirements for Rein- ments to protect employees from the
forced Concrete (ACI 318–83). hazards associated with steel erection
• Formwork for Concrete (ACI SP–4). activities involved in the construction,
• Recommended Practice for Concrete alteration, and/or repair of single and
Formwork (ACI 347–78).
• Safety Requirements for Concrete and multi-story buildings, bridges, and
Masonry Work (ANSI A10.9–1983). other structures where steel erection

• Standard Test Method for Compressive occurs. The requirements of this sub-
Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens part apply to employers engaged in
(ASTM C39–86).
419
steel erection unless otherwise speci- ing and assemblies; anchoring devices;
fied. This subpart does not cover elec- structural cabling; cable stays; perma-
trical transmission towers, commu- nent and temporary bents and towers;
nication and broadcast towers, or falsework for temporary supports of
tanks. permanent steel members; stone and
NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (a): Examples of struc- other non-precast concrete architec-
tures where steel erection may occur include tural materials mounted on steel
but are not limited to the following: Single frames; safety systems for steel erec-
and multi-story buildings; systems-engi- tion; steel and metal joists; metal
neered metal buildings; lift slab/tilt-up decking and raceway systems and ac-
structures; energy exploration structures; cessories; metal roofing and acces-
energy production, transfer and storage
structures and facilities; auditoriums; malls;
sories; metal siding; bridge flooring;
amphitheaters; stadiums; power plants; cold formed steel framing; elevator
mills; chemical process structures; bridges; beams; grillage; shelf racks; multi-pur-
trestles; overpasses; underpasses; viaducts; pose supports; crane rails and acces-
aqueducts; aerospace facilities and struc- sories; miscellaneous, architectural
tures; radar and communication structures; and ornamental metals and metal
light towers; signage; billboards; score-
work; ladders; railings; handrails;
boards; conveyor systems; conveyor supports
and related framing; stairways; stair towers; fences and gates; gratings; trench cov-
fire escapes; draft curtains; fire containment ers; floor plates; castings; sheet metal
structures; monorails; aerialways; catwalks; fabrications; metal panels and panel
curtain walls; window walls; store fronts; el- wall systems; louvers; column covers;
evator fronts; entrances; skylights; metal enclosures and pockets; stairs; per-
roofs; industrial structures; hi-bay struc- forated metals; ornamental iron work,
tures; rail, marine and other transportation
structures; sound barriers; water process and
expansion control including bridge ex-
water containment structures; air and cable pansion joint assemblies; slide bear-
supported structures; space frames; geodesic ings; hydraulic structures; fascias; sof-
domes; canopies; racks and rack support fit panels; penthouse enclosures; sky-
structures and frames; platforms; walkways; lights; joint fillers; gaskets; sealants
balconies; atriums; penthouses; car dumpers; and seals; doors; windows; hardware;
stackers/reclaimers; cranes and craneways; detention/security equipment and
bins; hoppers; ovens; furnaces; stacks;
amusement park structures and rides; and doors, windows and hardware; con-
artistic and monumental structures. veying systems; building specialties;
building equipment; machinery and
(b)(1) Steel erection activities in- plant equipment, furnishings and spe-
clude hoisting, laying out, placing, cial construction.
connecting, welding, burning, guying, (c) The duties of controlling contrac-
bracing, bolting, plumbing and rigging tors under this subpart include, but are
structural steel, steel joists and metal not limited to, the duties specified in
buildings; installing metal decking, §§ 1926.752 (a) and (c), 1926.755(b)(2),
curtain walls, window walls, siding sys- 1926.759(b), and 1926.760(e).
tems, miscellaneous metals, orna-
mental iron and similar materials; and § 1926.751 Definitions.
moving point-to-point while per-
forming these activities. Anchored bridging means that the
(2) The following activities are cov- steel joist bridging is connected to a
ered by this subpart when they occur bridging terminus point.
during and are a part of steel erection Bolted diagonal bridging means diago-
activities: rigging, hoisting, laying out, nal bridging that is bolted to a steel
placing, connecting, guying, bracing, joist or joists.
dismantling, burning, welding, bolting, Bridging clip means a device that is
grinding, sealing, caulking, and all re- attached to the steel joist to allow the
lated activities for construction, alter- bolting of the bridging to the steel
ation and/or repair of materials and as- joist.
semblies such as structural steel; fer- Bridging terminus point means a wall,
rous metals and alloys; non-ferrous a beam, tandem joists (with all bridg-
metals and alloys; glass; plastics and ing installed and a horizontal truss in
synthetic composite materials; struc- the plane of the top chord) or other ele-
tural metal framing and related brac- ment at an end or intermediate
420
point(s) of a line of bridging that pro- bility for the construction of the
vides an anchor point for the steel joist project—its planning, quality and com-
bridging. pletion.
Choker means a wire rope or syn- Critical lift means a lift that (1) ex-
thetic fiber rigging assembly that is ceeds 75 percent of the rated capacity
used to attach a load to a hoisting de- of the crane or derrick, or (2) requires
vice. the use of more than one crane or der-
Cold forming means the process of rick.
using press brakes, rolls, or other Decking hole means a gap or void
methods to shape steel into desired more than 2 inches (5.1 cm) in its least
cross sections at room temperature. dimension and less than 12 inches (30.5
Column means a load-carrying cm) in its greatest dimension in a
vertical member that is part of the pri- floor, roof or other walking/working
mary skeletal framing system. Col- surface. Pre-engineered holes in cel-
umns do not include posts. lular decking (for wires, cables, etc.)
Competent person (also defined in are not included in this definition.
§ 1926.32) means one who is capable of Derrick floor means an elevated floor
identifying existing and predictable of a building or structure that has been
hazards in the surroundings or working designated to receive hoisted pieces of
conditions which are unsanitary, haz- steel prior to final placement.
ardous, or dangerous to employees, and Double connection means an attach-
who has authorization to take prompt ment method where the connection
corrective measures to eliminate them. point is intended for two pieces of steel
Connector means an employee who, which share common bolts on either
working with hoisting equipment, is side of a central piece.
placing and connecting structural Double connection seat means a struc-
members and/or components. tural attachment that, during the in-
Constructibility means the ability to stallation of a double connection, sup-
erect structural steel members in ac- ports the first member while the sec-
cordance with subpart R without hav- ond member is connected.
ing to alter the over-all structural de- Erection bridging means the bolted di-
sign. agonal bridging that is required to be
Construction load (for joist erection) installed prior to releasing the hoisting
means any load other than the weight cables from the steel joists.
of the employee(s), the joists and the Fall restraint system means a fall pro-
bridging bundle. tection system that prevents the user
Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ) means from falling any distance. The system
an area in which certain work (for ex- is comprised of either a body belt or
ample, initial installation and place- body harness, along with an anchorage,
ment of metal decking) may take place connectors and other necessary equip-
without the use of guardrail systems, ment. The other components typically
personal fall arrest systems, fall re- include a lanyard, and may also in-
straint systems, or safety net systems clude a lifeline and other devices.
and where access to the zone is con- Final interior perimeter means the pe-
trolled. rimeter of a large permanent open
Controlled load lowering means low- space within a building such as an atri-
ering a load by means of a mechanical um or courtyard. This does not include
hoist drum device that allows a hoisted openings for stairways, elevator shafts,
load to be lowered with maximum con- etc.
trol using the gear train or hydraulic Girt (in systems-engineered metal build-
components of the hoist mechanism. ings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped mem-
Controlled load lowering requires the ber formed from sheet steel spanning
use of the hoist drive motor, rather between primary framing and sup-
than the load hoist brake, to lower the porting wall material.
load. Headache ball means a weighted hook
Controlling contractor means a prime that is used to attach loads to the hoist
contractor, general contractor, con- load line of the crane.
struction manager or any other legal Hoisting equipment means commer-
entity which has the overall responsi- cially manufactured lifting equipment
421
designed to lift and position a load of fall from a working level. A personal
known weight to a location at some fall arrest system consists of an an-
known elevation and horizontal dis- chorage, connectors, a body harness
tance from the equipment’s center of and may include a lanyard, decelera-
rotation. ‘‘Hoisting equipment’’ in- tion device, lifeline, or suitable com-
cludes but is not limited to cranes, der- bination of these. The use of a body
ricks, tower cranes, barge-mounted belt for fall arrest is prohibited.
derricks or cranes, gin poles and gan- Positioning device system means a body
try hoist systems. A ‘‘come-a-long’’ (a belt or body harness rigged to allow an
mechanical device, usually consisting employee to be supported on an ele-
of a chain or cable attached at each vated, vertical surface, such as a wall
end, that is used to facilitate move- or column and work with both hands
ment of materials through leverage) is free while leaning.
not considered ‘‘hoisting equipment.’’ Post means a structural member with
Leading edge means the unprotected a longitudinal axis that is essentially
side and edge of a floor, roof, or vertical, that: (1) weighs 300 pounds or
formwork for a floor or other walking/ less and is axially loaded (a load press-
working surface (such as deck) which es down on the top end), or (2) is not
changes location as additional floor, axially loaded, but is laterally re-
roof, decking or formwork sections are strained by the above member. Posts
placed, formed or constructed. typically support stair landings, wall
Metal decking means a commercially framing, mezzanines and other sub-
manufactured, structural grade, cold structures.
rolled metal panel formed into a series
Project structural engineer of record
of parallel ribs; for this subpart, this
means the registered, licensed profes-
includes metal floor and roof decks,
sional responsible for the design of
standing seam metal roofs, other metal
structural steel framing and whose seal
roof systems and other products such
appears on the structural contract doc-
as bar gratings, checker plate, ex-
uments.
panded metal panels, and similar prod-
ucts. After installation and proper fas- Purlin (in systems-engineered metal
tening, these decking materials serve a buildings) means a ‘‘Z’’ or ‘‘C’’ shaped
combination of functions including, member formed from sheet steel span-
but not limited to: a structural ele- ning between primary framing and sup-
ment designed in combination with the porting roof material.
structure to resist, distribute and Qualified person (also defined in
transfer loads, stiffen the structure and § 1926.32) means one who, by possession
provide a diaphragm action; a walking/ of a recognized degree, certificate, or
working surface; a form for concrete professional standing, or who by exten-
slabs; a support for roofing systems; sive knowledge, training, and experi-
and a finished floor or roof. ence, has successfully demonstrated
Multiple lift rigging means a rigging the ability to solve or resolve problems
assembly manufactured by wire rope relating to the subject matter, the
rigging suppliers that facilitates the work, or the project.
attachment of up to five independent Safety deck attachment means an ini-
loads to the hoist rigging of a crane. tial attachment that is used to secure
Opening means a gap or void 12 an initially placed sheet of decking to
inches (30.5 cm) or more in its least di- keep proper alignment and bearing
mension in a floor, roof or other walk- with structural support members.
ing/working surface. For the purposes Shear connector means headed steel
of this subpart, skylights and smoke studs, steel bars, steel lugs, and similar
domes that do not meet the strength devices which are attached to a struc-
requirements of § 1926.754(e)(3) shall be tural member for the purpose of
regarded as openings. achieving composite action with con-
Permanent floor means a structurally crete.
completed floor at any level or ele- Steel erection means the construction,
vation (including slab on grade). alteration or repair of steel buildings,
Personal fall arrest system means a bridges and other structures, including
system used to arrest an employee in a the installation of metal decking and
422
all planking used during the process of § 1926.752 Site layout, site-specific
erection. erection plan and construction se-
Steel joist means an open web, sec- quence.
ondary load-carrying member of 144 (a) Approval to begin steel erection. Be-
feet (43.9 m) or less, designed by the fore authorizing the commencement of
manufacturer, used for the support of steel erection, the controlling con-
floors and roofs. This does not include tractor shall ensure that the steel erec-
structural steel trusses or cold-formed tor is provided with the following writ-
joists. ten notifications:
Steel joist girder means an open web, (1) The concrete in the footings, piers
primary load-carrying member, de- and walls and the mortar in the ma-
signed by the manufacturer, used for sonry piers and walls has attained, on
the support of floors and roofs. This the basis of an appropriate ASTM
does not include structural steel truss- standard test method of field-cured
es. samples, either 75 percent of the in-
Steel truss means an open web mem- tended minimum compressive design
ber designed of structural steel compo- strength or sufficient strength to sup-
nents by the project structural engi- port the loads imposed during steel
erection.
neer of record. For the purposes of this
subpart, a steel truss is considered (2) Any repairs, replacements and
modifications to the anchor bolts were
equivalent to a solid web structural
conducted in accordance with
member.
§ 1926.755(b).
Structural steel means a steel member,
(b) Commencement of steel erection. A
or a member made of a substitute ma- steel erection contractor shall not
terial (such as, but not limited to, fi- erect steel unless it has received writ-
berglass, aluminum or composite mem- ten notification that the concrete in
bers). These members include, but are the footings, piers and walls or the
not limited to, steel joists, joist gird- mortar in the masonry piers and walls
ers, purlins, columns, beams, trusses, has attained, on the basis of an appro-
splices, seats, metal decking, girts, and priate ASTM standard test method of
all bridging, and cold formed metal field-cured samples, either 75 percent
framing which is integrated with the of the intended minimum compressive
structural steel framing of a building. design strength or sufficient strength
Systems-engineered metal building to support the loads imposed during
means a metal, field-assembled build- steel erection.
ing system consisting of framing, roof (c) Site layout. The controlling con-
and wall coverings. Typically, many of tractor shall ensure that the following
these components are cold-formed is provided and maintained:
shapes. These individual parts are fab- (1) Adequate access roads into and
ricated in one or more manufacturing through the site for the safe delivery
facilities and shipped to the job site for and movement of derricks, cranes,
assembly into the final structure. The trucks, other necessary equipment, and
engineering design of the system is the material to be erected and means
normally the responsibility of the sys- and methods for pedestrian and vehic-
tems-engineered metal building manu- ular control. Exception: this require-
facturer. ment does not apply to roads outside of
the construction site.
Tank means a container for holding
(2) A firm, properly graded, drained
gases, liquids or solids.
area, readily accessible to the work
Unprotected sides and edges means any
with adequate space for the safe stor-
side or edge (except at entrances to age of materials and the safe operation
points of access) of a walking/working of the erector’s equipment.
surface, for example a, floor, roof, ramp (d) Pre-planning of overhead hoisting
or runway, where there is no wall or operations. All hoisting operations in

guardrail system at least 39 inches (1.0 steel erection shall be pre-planned to
m) high. ensure that the requirements of
§ 1926.753(d) are met.
423
(e) Site-specific erection plan. Where (J) Ground conditions around the
employers elect, due to conditions spe- hoisting equipment for proper support,
cific to the site, to develop alternate including ground settling under and
means and methods that provide em- around outriggers, ground water accu-
ployee protection in accordance with mulation, or similar conditions;
§ 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) or (K) The hoisting equipment for level
§ 1926.757(e)(4), a site-specific erection position; and
plan shall be developed by a qualified (L) The hoisting equipment for level
person and be available at the work position after each move and setup.
site. Guidelines for establishing a site- (ii) If any deficiency is identified, an
specific erection plan are contained in immediate determination shall be
Appendix A to this subpart. made by the competent person as to
whether the deficiency constitutes a
§ 1926.753 Hoisting and rigging. hazard.
(a) All the provisions of § 1926.550 (iii) If the deficiency is determined to
apply to hoisting and rigging with the constitute a hazard, the hoisting equip-
exception of § 1926.550(g)(2). ment shall be removed from service
(b) In addition, paragraphs (c) until the deficiency has been corrected.
through (e) of this section apply re- (iv) The operator shall be responsible
garding the hazards associated with for those operations under the opera-
hoisting and rigging. tor’s direct control. Whenever there is
(c) General. (1) Pre-shift visual in- any doubt as to safety, the operator
spection of cranes. shall have the authority to stop and
(i) Cranes being used in steel erection refuse to handle loads until safety has
activities shall be visually inspected been assured.
prior to each shift by a competent per- (2) A qualified rigger (a rigger who is
son; the inspection shall include obser- also a qualified person) shall inspect
vation for deficiencies during oper- the rigging prior to each shift in ac-
ation. At a minimum this inspection cordance with § 1926.251.
shall include the following: (3) The headache ball, hook or load
(A) All control mechanisms for mal- shall not be used to transport per-
adjustments; sonnel except as provided in paragraph
(B) Control and drive mechanism for (c)(4) of this section.
excessive wear of components and con- (4) Cranes or derricks may be used to
tamination by lubricants, water or hoist employees on a personnel plat-
other foreign matter; form when work under this subpart is
(C) Safety devices, including but not being conducted, provided that all pro-
limited to boom angle indicators, boom visions of § 1926.550 (except for
stops, boom kick out devices, anti-two § 1926.550(g)(2)) are met.
block devices, and load moment indica- (5) Safety latches on hooks shall not
tors where required; be deactivated or made inoperable ex-
(D) Air, hydraulic, and other pressur- cept:
ized lines for deterioration or leakage, (i) When a qualified rigger has deter-
particularly those which flex in normal mined that the hoisting and placing of
operation; purlins and single joists can be per-
(E) Hooks and latches for deforma- formed more safely by doing so; or
tion, chemical damage, cracks, or (ii) When equivalent protection is
wear; provided in a site-specific erection
(F) Wire rope reeving for compliance plan.
with hoisting equipment manufactur- (d) Working under loads. (1) Routes for
er’s specifications; suspended loads shall be pre-planned to
(G) Electrical apparatus for malfunc- ensure that no employee is required to
tioning, signs of excessive deteriora- work directly below a suspended load
tion, dirt, or moisture accumulation; except for:
(H) Hydraulic system for proper fluid (i) Employees engaged in the initial
level; connection of the steel; or
(I) Tires for proper inflation and con- (ii) Employees necessary for the
dition; hooking or unhooking of the load.
424
(2) When working under suspended § 1926.754 Structural steel assembly.

loads, the following criteria shall be
(a) Structural stability shall be
met:
maintained at all times during the
(i) Materials being hoisted shall be
erection process.
rigged to prevent unintentional dis-
(b) The following additional require-
placement;
ments shall apply for multi-story
(ii) Hooks with self-closing safety
structures:
latches or their equivalent shall be
(1) The permanent floors shall be in-
used to prevent components from slip-
stalled as the erection of structural
ping out of the hook; and
members progresses, and there shall be
(iii) All loads shall be rigged by a
not more than eight stories between
qualified rigger
the erection floor and the upper-most
(e) Multiple lift rigging procedure. (1) A permanent floor, except where the
multiple lift shall only be performed if structural integrity is maintained as a
the following criteria are met: result of the design.
(i) A multiple lift rigging assembly is
(2) At no time shall there be more
used;
than four floors or 48 feet (14.6 m),
(ii) A maximum of five members are whichever is less, of unfinished bolting
hoisted per lift; or welding above the foundation or up-
(iii) Only beams and similar struc- permost permanently secured floor, ex-
tural members are lifted; and cept where the structural integrity is
(iv) All employees engaged in the maintained as a result of the design.
multiple lift have been trained in these (3) A fully planked or decked floor or
procedures in accordance with nets shall be maintained within two
§ 1926.761(c)(1). stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever is
(v) No crane is permitted to be used less, directly under any erection work
for a multiple lift where such use is being performed.
contrary to the manufacturer’s speci- (c) Walking/working surfaces—shear
fications and limitations. connectors and other similar devices—(1)
(2) Components of the multiple lift Tripping hazards. Shear connectors
rigging assembly shall be specifically (such as headed steel studs, steel bars
designed and assembled with a max- or steel lugs), reinforcing bars, de-
imum capacity for total assembly and formed anchors or threaded studs shall
for each individual attachment point. not be attached to the top flanges of
This capacity, certified by the manu- beams, joists or beam attachments so
facturer or a qualified rigger, shall be that they project vertically from or
based on the manufacturer’s specifica- horizontally across the top flange of
tions with a 5 to 1 safety factor for all the member until after the metal deck-
components. ing, or other walking/working surface,
(3) The total load shall not exceed: has been installed.
(i) The rated capacity of the hoisting (2) Installation of shear connectors on
equipment specified in the hoisting composite floors, roofs and bridge decks.
equipment load charts; When shear connectors are used in con-
(ii) The rigging capacity specified in struction of composite floors, roofs and
the rigging rating chart. bridge decks, employees shall lay out
(4) The multiple lift rigging assembly and install the shear connectors after
shall be rigged with members: the metal decking has been installed,
(i) Attached at their center of grav- using the metal decking as a working
ity and maintained reasonably level; platform. Shear connectors shall not be
(ii) Rigged from top down; and installed from within a controlled
(iii) Rigged at least 7 feet (2.1 m) decking zone (CDZ), as specified in
apart. § 1926.760(c)(8).
(5) The members on the multiple lift (d) Plumbing-up. (1) When deemed
rigging assembly shall be set from the necessary by a competent person,
bottom up. plumbing-up equipment shall be in-

(6) Controlled load lowering shall be stalled in conjunction with the steel
used whenever the load is over the con- erection process to ensure the stability
nectors. of the structure.
425
(2) When used, plumbing-up equip- ure, twice the weight of the employees,
ment shall be in place and properly in- equipment and materials that may be
stalled before the structure is loaded imposed on the cover at any one time.
with construction material such as (ii) All covers shall be secured when
loads of joists, bundles of decking or installed to prevent accidental dis-
bundles of bridging. placement by the wind, equipment or
(3) Plumbing-up equipment shall be employees.
removed only with the approval of a (iii) All covers shall be painted with
competent person. high-visibility paint or shall be marked
(e) Metal decking—(1) Hoisting, landing with the word ‘‘HOLE’’ or ‘‘COVER’’ to
and placing of metal decking bundles. (i) provide warning of the hazard.
Bundle packaging and strapping shall (iv) Smoke dome or skylight fixtures
not be used for hoisting unless specifi- that have been installed, are not con-
cally designed for that purpose. sidered covers for the purpose of this
(ii) If loose items such as dunnage, section unless they meet the strength
flashing, or other materials are placed requirements of paragraph (e)(3)(i) of
on the top of metal decking bundles to this section.
be hoisted, such items shall be secured (4) Decking gaps around columns. Wire
to the bundles. mesh, exterior plywood, or equivalent,
(iii) Bundles of metal decking on shall be installed around columns
joists shall be landed in accordance where planks or metal decking do not
with § 1926.757(e)(4). fit tightly. The materials used must be
(iv) Metal decking bundles shall be of sufficient strength to provide fall
landed on framing members so that protection for personnel and prevent
enough support is provided to allow the objects from falling through.
bundles to be unbanded without dis- (5) Installation of metal decking. (i) Ex-
lodging the bundles from the supports. cept as provided in § 1926.760(c), metal
(v) At the end of the shift or when en- decking shall be laid tightly and imme-
vironmental or jobsite conditions re- diately secured upon placement to pre-
quire, metal decking shall be secured vent accidental movement or displace-
against displacement. ment.
(2) Roof and floor holes and openings. (ii) During initial placement, metal
Metal decking at roof and floor holes decking panels shall be placed to en-
and openings shall be installed as fol- sure full support by structural mem-
lows: bers.
(i) Framed metal deck openings shall (6) Derrick floors. (i) A derrick floor
have structural members turned down shall be fully decked and/or planked
to allow continuous deck installation and the steel member connections com-
except where not allowed by structural pleted to support the intended floor
design constraints or constructibility. loading.
(ii) Roof and floor holes and openings (ii) Temporary loads placed on a der-
shall be decked over. Where large size, rick floor shall be distributed over the
configuration or other structural de- underlying support members so as to
sign does not allow openings to be prevent local overloading of the deck
decked over (such as elevator shafts, material.
stair wells, etc.) employees shall be [66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 71
protected in accordance with FR 2885, Jan. 18, 2006; 71 FR 16674, Apr. 3,
§ 1926.760(a)(1). 2006]
(iii) Metal decking holes and open-
ings shall not be cut until immediately § 1926.755 Column anchorage.
prior to being permanently filled with (a) General requirements for erection
the equipment or structure needed or stability. (1) All columns shall be an-
intended to fulfill its specific use and chored by a minimum of 4 anchor rods
which meets the strength requirements (anchor bolts).
of paragraph (e)(3) of this section, or (2) Each column anchor rod (anchor
shall be immediately covered. bolt) assembly, including the column-

(3) Covering roof and floor openings. (i) to-base plate weld and the column
Covers for roof and floor openings shall foundation, shall be designed to resist
be capable of supporting, without fail- a minimum eccentric gravity load of
426
300 pounds (136.2 kg) located 18 inches main connected to the first member
(.46m) from the extreme outer face of unless a shop-attached or field-at-
the column in each direction at the top tached seat or equivalent connection
of the column shaft. device is supplied with the member to
(3) Columns shall be set on level fin- secure the first member and prevent
ished floors, pre-grouted leveling the column from being displaced (See
plates, leveling nuts, or shim packs Appendix H to this subpart for exam-
which are adequate to transfer the con- ples of equivalent connection devices).
struction loads. (2) If a seat or equivalent device is
(4) All columns shall be evaluated by used, the seat (or device) shall be de-
a competent person to determine signed to support the load during the
whether guying or bracing is needed; if double connection process. It shall be
guying or bracing is needed, it shall be adequately bolted or welded to both a
installed. supporting member and the first mem-
(b) Repair, replacement or field modi- ber before the nuts on the shared bolts
fication of anchor rods (anchor bolts). (1) are removed to make the double con-
Anchor rods (anchor bolts) shall not be nection.
repaired, replaced or field-modified (d) Column splices. Each column splice
without the approval of the project shall be designed to resist a minimum
structural engineer of record. eccentric gravity load of 300 pounds
(2) Prior to the erection of a column, (136.2 kg) located 18 inches (.46 m) from
the controlling contractor shall pro- the extreme outer face of the column
vide written notification to the steel in each direction at the top of the col-
erector if there has been any repair, re- umn shaft.
placement or modification of the an- (e) Perimeter columns. Perimeter col-
chor rods (anchor bolts) of that columns shall not be erected unless:
umn. (1) The perimeter columns extend a
minimum of 48 inches (1.2 m) above the
§ 1926.756 Beams and columns. finished floor to permit installation of
(a) General. (1) During the final plac- perimeter safety cables prior to erec-
ing of solid web structural members, tion of the next tier, except where
the load shall not be released from the constructibility does not allow (see Ap-
hoisting line until the members are se- pendix F to this subpart);
cured with at least two bolts per con- (2) The perimeter columns have holes
nection, of the same size and strength or other devices in or attached to pe-
as shown in the erection drawings, rimeter columns at 42–45 inches (107–114
drawn up wrench-tight or the equiva- cm) above the finished floor and the
lent as specified by the project struc- midpoint between the finished floor
tural engineer of record, except as and the top cable to permit installa-
specified in paragraph (b) of this section of perimeter safety cables required
tion. by § 1926.760(a)(2), except where
(2) A competent person shall deter- constructibility does not allow. (See
mine if more than two bolts are nec- Appendix F to this subpart).
essary to ensure the stability of canti-
levered members; if additional bolts § 1926.757 Open web steel joists.
are needed, they shall be installed. (a) General. (1) Except as provided in
(b) Diagonal bracing. Solid web struc- paragraph (a)(2) of this section, where
tural members used as diagonal brac- steel joists are used and columns are
ing shall be secured by at least one bolt not framed in at least two directions
per connection drawn up wrench-tight with solid web structural steel mem-
or the equivalent as specified by the bers, a steel joist shall be field-bolted
project structural engineer of record. at the column to provide lateral sta-
(c) (1) Double connections at columns bility to the column during erection.
and/or at beam webs over a column. When For the installation of this joist:
two structural members on opposite (i) A vertical stabilizer plate shall be
sides of a column web, or a beam web provided on each column for steel
over a column, are connected sharing joists. The plate shall be a minimum of
common connection holes, at least one 6 inch by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm)
bolt with its wrench-tight nut shall re- and shall extend at least 3 inches (76
427
mm) below the bottom chord of the vidual steel joists to steel structures in
joist with a 13⁄16 inch (21 mm) hole to bays of 40 feet (12.2 m) or more shall be
provide an attachment point for guying fabricated to allow for field bolting
or plumbing cables. during erection.
(ii) The bottom chords of steel joists (ii) These connections shall be field-
at columns shall be stabilized to pre- bolted unless constructibility does not
vent rotation during erection. allow.
(iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- (9) Steel joists and steel joist girders
leased until the seat at each end of the shall not be used as anchorage points
steel joist is field-bolted, and each end for a fall arrest system unless written
of the bottom chord is restrained by approval to do so is obtained from a
the column stabilizer plate. qualified person.
(2) Where constructibility does not (10) A bridging terminus point shall
allow a steel joist to be installed at the be established before bridging is in-
column: stalled. (See Appendix C to this sub-
(i) an alternate means of stabilizing part.)
joists shall be installed on both sides (b) Attachment of steel joists and steel
near the column and shall: joist girders. (1) Each end of ‘‘K’’ series
(A) provide stability equivalent to steel joists shall be attached to the
paragraph (a)(1) of this section; support structure with a minimum of
(B) be designed by a qualified person; two 1⁄8-inch (3 mm) fillet welds 1 inch
(C) be shop installed; and (25 mm) long or with two 1⁄2-inch (13
(D) be included in the erection draw- mm) bolts, or the equivalent.
ings. (2) Each end of ‘‘LH’’ and ‘‘DLH’’ se-
(ii) hoisting cables shall not be re- ries steel joists and steel joist girders
leased until the seat at each end of the shall be attached to the support struc-
steel joist is field-bolted and the joist ture with a minimum of two 1⁄4-inch (6
is stabilized. mm) fillet welds 2 inches (51 mm) long,
(3) Where steel joists at or near col- or with two 3⁄4-inch (19 mm) bolts, or
umns span 60 feet (18.3 m) or less, the the equivalent.
joist shall be designed with sufficient (3) Except as provided in paragraph
strength to allow one employee to re- (b)(4) of this section, each steel joist
lease the hoisting cable without the shall be attached to the support struc-
need for erection bridging. ture, at least at one end on both sides
(4) Where steel joists at or near col- of the seat, immediately upon place-
umns span more than 60 feet (18.3 m), ment in the final erection position and
the joists shall be set in tandem with before additional joists are placed.
all bridging installed unless an alter- (4) Panels that have been pre-assem-
native method of erection, which pro- bled from steel joists with bridging
vides equivalent stability to the steel shall be attached to the structure at
joist, is designed by a qualified person each corner before the hoisting cables
and is included in the site-specific erec- are released.
tion plan. (c) Erection of steel joists. (1) Both
(5) A steel joist or steel joist girder sides of the seat of one end of each
shall not be placed on any support steel joist that requires bridging under
structure unless such structure is sta- Tables A and B shall be attached to the
bilized. support structure before hoisting ca-
(6) When steel joist(s) are landed on a bles are released.
structure, they shall be secured to pre- (2) For joists over 60 feet, both ends
vent unintentional displacement prior of the joist shall be attached as speci-
to installation. fied in paragraph (b) of this section and
(7) No modification that affects the the provisions of paragraph (d) of this
strength of a steel joist or steel joist section met before the hoisting cables
girder shall be made without the ap- are released.
proval of the project structural engi- (3) On steel joists that do not require
neer of record. erection bridging under Tables A and

(8) Field-bolted joists. (i) Except for B, only one employee shall be allowed
steel joists that have been pre-assem- on the joist until all bridging is in-
bled into panels, connections of indi- stalled and anchored.
428
TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT TABLE A—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR SHORT
SPAN JOISTS SPAN JOISTS—Continued
Joist Span Joist Span
8L1 ................................................................. NM 14KCS2 ......................................................... NM

10K1 .............................................................. NM 14KCS3 ......................................................... NM
12K1 .............................................................. 23–0 16KCS2 ......................................................... NM
12K3 .............................................................. NM 16KCS3 ......................................................... NM
12K5 .............................................................. NM 16KCS4 ......................................................... NM
14K1 .............................................................. 27–0 16KCS5 ......................................................... NM
14K3 .............................................................. NM 18KCS2 ......................................................... 35–0
14K4 .............................................................. NM 18KCS3 ......................................................... NM
14K6 .............................................................. NM 18KCS4 ......................................................... NM
16K2 .............................................................. 29–0 18KCS5 ......................................................... NM
16K3 .............................................................. 30–0 20KCS2 ......................................................... 36–0
16K4 .............................................................. 32–0 20KCS3 ......................................................... 39–0
16K5 .............................................................. 32–0 20KCS4 ......................................................... NM
16K6 .............................................................. NM 20KCS5 ......................................................... NM
16K7 .............................................................. NM 22KCS2 ......................................................... 36–0
16K9 .............................................................. NM 22KCS3 ......................................................... 40–0
18K3 .............................................................. 31–0 22KCS4 ......................................................... NM
18K4 .............................................................. 32–0 22KCS5 ......................................................... NM
18K5 .............................................................. 33–0 24KCS2 ......................................................... 39–0
18K6 .............................................................. 35–0 24KCS3 ......................................................... 44–0
18K7 .............................................................. NM 24KCS4 ......................................................... NM
18K9 .............................................................. NM 24KCS5 ......................................................... NM
18K10 ............................................................ NM 26KCS2 ......................................................... 39–0
20K3 .............................................................. 32–0 26KCS3 ......................................................... 44–0
20K4 .............................................................. 34–0 26KCS4 ......................................................... NM
20K5 .............................................................. 34–0 26KCS5 ......................................................... NM
20K6 .............................................................. 36–0 28KCS2 ......................................................... 40–0
20K7 .............................................................. 39–0 28KCS3 ......................................................... 45–0
20K9 .............................................................. 39–0 28KCS4 ......................................................... 53–0
20K10 ............................................................ NM 28KCS5 ......................................................... 53–0
22K4 .............................................................. 34–0 30KC53 .......................................................... 45–0
22K5 .............................................................. 35–0 30KCS4 ......................................................... 54–0
22K6 .............................................................. 36–0 30KCS5 ......................................................... 54–0
22K7 .............................................................. 40–0
22K9 .............................................................. 40–0 NM=diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists under
40 feet.
22K10 ............................................................ 40–0
22K11 ............................................................ 40–0
24K4 .............................................................. 36–0 TABLE B—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR LONG SPAN
24K5 .............................................................. 38–0 JOISTS
24K6 .............................................................. 39–0
24K7 .............................................................. 43–0 Joist Span
24K8 .............................................................. 43–0
24K9 .............................................................. 44–0 18LH02 .................................. 33–0.
24K10 ............................................................ NM 18LH03 .................................. NM.
24K12 ............................................................ NM 18LH04 .................................. NM.
26K5 .............................................................. 38–0 18LH05 .................................. NM.
26K6 .............................................................. 39–0 18LH06 .................................. NM.
26K7 .............................................................. 43–0 18LH07 .................................. NM.
26K8 .............................................................. 44–0 18LH08 .................................. NM.
26K9 .............................................................. 45–0 18LH09 .................................. NM.
26K10 ............................................................ 49–0 20LH02 .................................. 33–0.
26K12 ............................................................ NM 20LH03 .................................. 38–0.
28K6 .............................................................. 40–0 20LH04 .................................. NM.
28K7 .............................................................. 43–0 20LH05 .................................. NM.
28K8 .............................................................. 44–0 20LH06 .................................. NM.
28K9 .............................................................. 45–0 20LH07 .................................. NM.
28K10 ............................................................ 49–0 20LH08 .................................. NM.
28K12 ............................................................ 53–0 20LH09 .................................. NM.
30K7 .............................................................. 44–0 20LH10 .................................. NM.
30K8 .............................................................. 45–0 24LH03 .................................. 35–0.
30K9 .............................................................. 45–0 24LH04 .................................. 39–0.
30K10 ............................................................ 50–0 24LH05 .................................. 40–0.
30K11 ............................................................ 52–0 24LH06 .................................. 45–0.
30K12 ............................................................ 54–0 24LH07 .................................. NM.
10KCS1 ......................................................... NM 24LH08 .................................. NM.
10KCS2 ......................................................... NM 24LH09 .................................. NM.
10KCS3 ......................................................... NM 24LH10 .................................. NM.

12KCS1 ......................................................... NM 24LH11 .................................. NM.
12KCS2 ......................................................... NM 28LH05 .................................. 42–0.
12KCS3 ......................................................... NM 28LH06 .................................. 42–0.
14KCS1 ......................................................... NM 28LH07 .................................. NM.
429
TABLE B—ERECTION BRIDGING FOR LONG SPAN (ii) Two rows of bolted diagonal erec-
JOISTS—Continued tion bridging shall be installed near
the third points of the steel joist;
Joist Span
(iii) Hoisting cables shall not be re-
28LH08 .................................. NM. leased until this bolted diagonal erec-
28LH09 .................................. NM. tion bridging is installed and anchored;
28LH10 .................................. NM. and
28LH11 .................................. NM.
28LH12 .................................. NM. (iv) No more than two employees
28LH13 .................................. NM. shall be allowed on these spans until
32LH06 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. all other bridging is installed and an-
32LH07 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. chored.
32LH08 .................................. 55–0 through 60–0.
32LH09 .................................. NM through 60–0.
(3) Where the span of the steel joist is
32LH10 .................................. NM through 60–0. over 100 feet (30.5 m) through 144 feet
32LH11 .................................. NM through 60–0. (43.9 m), the following shall apply:
32LH12 .................................. NM through 60–0. (i) All rows of bridging shall be
32LH13 .................................. NM through 60–0. bolted diagonal bridging;
32LH14 .................................. NM through 60–0.
32LH15 .................................. NM through 60–0. (ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re-
36LH07 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. leased until all bridging is installed
36LH08 .................................. 47–0 through 60–0. and anchored; and
36LH09 .................................. 57–0 through 60–0. (iii) No more than two employees
36LH10 .................................. NM through 60–0.
36LH11 .................................. NM through 60–0.
shall be allowed on these spans until
36LH12 .................................. NM through 60–0. all bridging is installed and anchored.
36LH13 .................................. NM through 60–0. (4) For steel members spanning over
36LH14 .................................. NM through 60–0. 144 feet (43.9 m), the erection methods
36LH15 .................................. NM through 60–0.
used shall be in accordance with
NM = diagonal bolted bridging not mandatory for joists § 1926.756.
under 40 feet.
(5) Where any steel joist specified in
(4) Employees shall not be allowed on paragraphs (c)(2) and (d)(1), (d)(2), and
steel joists where the span of the steel (d)(3) of this section is a bottom chord
joist is equal to or greater than the bearing joist, a row of bolted diagonal
span shown in Tables A and B except in bridging shall be provided near the sup-
accordance with § 1926.757(d). port(s). This bridging shall be installed
(5) When permanent bridging ter- and anchored before the hoisting
minus points cannot be used during cable(s) is released.
erection, additional temporary bridg- (6) When bolted diagonal erection
ing terminus points are required to bridging is required by this section, the
provide stability. (See appendix C of following shall apply:
this subpart.) (i) The bridging shall be indicated on
(d) Erection bridging. (1) Where the the erection drawing;
span of the steel joist is equal to or (ii) The erection drawing shall be the
greater than the span shown in Tables exclusive indicator of the proper place-
A and B, the following shall apply: ment of this bridging;
(i) A row of bolted diagonal erection (iii) Shop-installed bridging clips, or
bridging shall be installed near the functional equivalents, shall be used
midspan of the steel joist; where the bridging bolts to the steel
(ii) Hoisting cables shall not be re- joists;
leased until this bolted diagonal erec- (iv) When two pieces of bridging are
tion bridging is installed and anchored; attached to the steel joist by a com-
and mon bolt, the nut that secures the first
(iii) No more than one employee shall piece of bridging shall not be removed
be allowed on these spans until all from the bolt for the attachment of the
other bridging is installed and an- second; and
chored. (v) Bridging attachments shall not
(2) Where the span of the steel joist is protrude above the top chord of the
over 60 feet (18.3 m) through 100 feet steel joist.

(30.5 m), the following shall apply: (e) Landing and placing loads. (1) Dur-
(i) All rows of bridging shall be ing the construction period, the em-
bolted diagonal bridging; ployer placing a load on steel joists
430
shall ensure that the load is distrib- each flange before the hoisting equip-
uted so as not to exceed the carrying ment is released.
capacity of any steel joist. (d) Construction loads shall not be
(2) Except for paragraph (e)(4) of this placed on any structural steel frame-
section, no construction loads are al- work unless such framework is safely
lowed on the steel joists until all bridg- bolted, welded or otherwise adequately
ing is installed and anchored and all secured.
joist-bearing ends are attached. (e) In girt and eave strut-to-frame
(3) The weight of a bundle of joist connections, when girts or eave struts
bridging shall not exceed a total of share common connection holes, at
1,000 pounds (454 kg). A bundle of joist least one bolt with its wrench-tight
bridging shall be placed on a minimum nut shall remain connected to the first
of three steel joists that are secured at member unless a manufacturer-sup-
one end. The edge of the bridging bun- plied, field-attached seat or similar
dle shall be positioned within 1 foot (.30 connection device is present to secure
m) of the secured end. the first member so that the girt or
(4) No bundle of decking may be eave strut is always secured against
placed on steel joists until all bridging displacement.
has been installed and anchored and all (f) Both ends of all steel joists or
joist bearing ends attached, unless all cold-formed joists shall be fully bolted
of the following conditions are met: and/or welded to the support structure
(i) The employer has first determined before:
from a qualified person and docu- (1) Releasing the hoisting cables;
mented in a site-specific erection plan (2) Allowing an employee on the
that the structure or portion of the joists; or
structure is capable of supporting the (3) Allowing any construction loads
load; on the joists.
(g) Purlins and girts shall not be used
(ii) The bundle of decking is placed
as an anchorage point for a fall arrest
on a minimum of three steel joists;
system unless written approval is ob-
(iii) The joists supporting the bundle tained from a qualified person.
of decking are attached at both ends; (h) Purlins may only be used as a
(iv) At least one row of bridging is in- walking/working surface when install-
stalled and anchored; ing safety systems, after all permanent
(v) The total weight of the bundle of bridging has been installed and fall
decking does not exceed 4,000 pounds protection is provided.
(1816 kg); and (i) Construction loads may be placed
(vi) Placement of the bundle of deck- only within a zone that is within 8 feet
ing shall be in accordance with para- (2.5 m) of the center-line of the primary
graph (e)(5) of this section. support member.
(5) The edge of the construction load
shall be placed within 1 foot (.30 m) of § 1926.759 Falling object protection.
the bearing surface of the joist end. (a) Securing loose items aloft. All mate-
rials, equipment, and tools, which are
§ 1926.758 Systems-engineered metal not in use while aloft, shall be secured
buildings.
against accidental displacement.
(a) All of the requirements of this (b) Protection from falling objects other
subpart apply to the erection of sys- than materials being hoisted. The con-
tems-engineered metal buildings ex- trolling contractor shall bar other con-
cept §§ 1926.755 (column anchorage) and struction processes below steel erec-
1926.757 (open web steel joists). tion unless overhead protection for the
(b) Each structural column shall be employees below is provided.
anchored by a minimum of four anchor
rods (anchor bolts). § 1926.760 Fall protection.
(c) Rigid frames shall have 50 percent (a) General requirements. (1) Except as
of their bolts or the number of bolts provided by paragraph (a)(3) of this sec-
specified by the manufacturer (which- tion, each employee engaged in a steel
ever is greater) installed and tightened erection activity who is on a walking/
on both sides of the web adjacent to working surface with an unprotected
431
side or edge more than 15 feet (4.6 m) (4) Each employee working in a CDZ
above a lower level shall be protected shall have completed CDZ training in
from fall hazards by guardrail systems, accordance with § 1926.761.
safety net systems, personal fall arrest (5) Unsecured decking in a CDZ shall
systems, positioning device systems or not exceed 3,000 square feet (914.4 m2).
fall restraint systems. (6) Safety deck attachments shall be
(2) Perimeter safety cables. On multi- performed in the CDZ from the leading
story structures, perimeter safety ca- edge back to the control line and shall
bles shall be installed at the final inte- have at least two attachments for each
rior and exterior perimeters of the metal decking panel.
floors as soon as the metal decking has (7) Final deck attachments and in-
been installed. stallation of shear connectors shall not
(3) Connectors and employees work- be performed in the CDZ.
ing in controlled decking zones shall be (d) Criteria for fall protection equip-
protected from fall hazards as provided ment. (1) Guardrail systems, safety net
in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this sec- systems, personal fall arrest systems,
tion, respectively. positioning device systems and their
(b) Connectors. Each connector shall: components shall conform to the cri-
(1) Be protected in accordance with teria in § 1926.502 (see Appendix G to
paragraph (a)(1) of this section from this subpart).
fall hazards of more than two stories or (2) Fall arrest system components
30 feet (9.1 m) above a lower level, shall be used in fall restraint systems
whichever is less; and shall conform to the criteria in
(2) Have completed connector train- § 1926.502 (see Appendix G). Either body
ing in accordance with § 1926.761; and belts or body harnesses shall be used in
(3) Be provided, at heights over 15 fall restraint systems.
and up to 30 feet above a lower level, (3) Perimeter safety cables shall
with a personal fall arrest system, po- meet the criteria for guardrail systems
sitioning device system or fall rein § 1926.502 (see Appendix G).
straint system and wear the equipment
(e) Custody of fall protection. Fall pro-
necessary to be able to be tied off; or be
tection provided by the steel erector
provided with other means of protec-
shall remain in the area where steel
tion from fall hazards in accordance
erection activity has been completed,
with paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
to be used by other trades, only if the
(c) Controlled Decking Zone (CDZ). A
controlling contractor or its author-
controlled decking zone may be estab-
ized representative:
lished in that area of the structure
(1) Has directed the steel erector to
over 15 and up to 30 feet above a lower
leave the fall protection in place; and
level where metal decking is initially
being installed and forms the leading (2) Has inspected and accepted con-
edge of a work area. In each CDZ, the trol and responsibility of the fall pro-
following shall apply: tection prior to authorizing persons
(1) Each employee working at the other than steel erectors to work in
leading edge in a CDZ shall be pro- the area.
tected from fall hazards of more than
§ 1926.761 Training.
two stories or 30 feet (9.1 m), whichever
is less. The following provisions supplement
(2) Access to a CDZ shall be limited the requirements of § 1926.21 regarding
to only those employees engaged in the hazards addressed in this subpart.
leading edge work. (a) Training personnel. Training re-
(3) The boundaries of a CDZ shall be quired by this section shall be provided
designated and clearly marked. The by a qualified person(s).
CDZ shall not be more than 90 feet (27.4 (b) Fall hazard training. The employer
m) wide and 90 (27.4 m) feet deep from shall train each employee exposed to a
any leading edge. The CDZ shall be fall hazard in accordance with the re-
marked by the use of control lines or quirements of this section. The em-
the equivalent. Examples of acceptable ployer shall institute a training pro-
procedures for demarcating CDZ’s can gram and ensure employee participa-
be found in Appendix D to this subpart. tion in the program.
432
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. A
(c) Special training programs. In addi- such as the project engineer and fabricator
tion to the training required in para- before the start of steel erection. The pur-
graphs (a) and (b) of this section, the pose of such conference(s) is to develop and
employer shall provide special training review the site-specific erection plan that
to employees engaged in the following will meet the requirements of this section.
(c) Components of a site-specific erection
activities.
plan. In developing a site-specific erection
(1) Multiple lift rigging procedure. The
plan, a steel erector considers the following
employer shall ensure that each em- elements:
ployee who performs multiple lift rig- (1) The sequence of erection activity, de-
ging has been provided training in the veloped in coordination with the controlling
following areas: contractor, that includes the following:
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- (i) Material deliveries:
ated with multiple lifts; and (ii) Material staging and storage; and
(ii) The proper procedures and equip- (iii) Coordination with other trades and
ment to perform multiple lifts required construction activities.
by § 1926.753(e). (2) A description of the crane and derrick
(2) Connector procedures. The em- selection and placement procedures, includ-
ployer shall ensure that each connector ing the following:
has been provided training in the fol- (i) Site preparation;
lowing areas: (ii) Path for overhead loads; and
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- (iii) Critical lifts, including rigging sup-
ated with connecting; and plies and equipment.
(ii) The establishment, access, proper (3) A description of steel erection activities
connecting techniques and work prac- and procedures, including the following:
tices required by § 1926.756(c) and (i) Stability considerations requiring tem-
§ 1926.760(b). porary bracing and guying;
(3) Controlled Decking Zone Procedures. (ii) Erection bridging terminus point;
Where CDZs are being used, the em- (iii) Anchor rod (anchor bolt) notifications
ployer shall assure that each employee regarding repair, replacement and modifica-
has been provided training in the fol- tions;
lowing areas: (iv) Columns and beams (including joists
(i) The nature of the hazards associ- and purlins);
(v) Connections;
ated with work within a controlled
(vi) Decking; and
decking zone; and
(vii) Ornamental and miscellaneous iron.
(ii) The establishment, access, proper
(4) A description of the fall protection pro-
installation techniques and work prac-
cedures that will be used to comply with
tices required by § 1926.760(c) and
§ 1926.760.
§ 1926.754(e). (5) A description of the procedures that
[66 FR 5265, Jan. 18, 2001, as amended at 73 will be used to comply with § 1926.759.
FR 75589, Dec. 12, 2008] (6) A description of the special procedures
required for hazardous non-routine tasks.
APPENDIX A TO SUBPART R OF PART (7) A certification for each employee who
1926—GUIDELINES FOR ESTABLISHING has received training for performing steel
THE COMPONENTS OF A SITE-SPECIFIC erection operations as required by § 1926.761.
ERECTION PLAN: NON-MANDATORY (8) A list of the qualified and competent
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH persons.
§ 1926.752(e). (9) A description of the procedures that
will be utilized in the event of rescue or
(a) General. This appendix serves as a emergency response.
guideline to assist employers who elect to (d) Other plan information. The plan:
develop a site-specific erection plan in ac-
(1) Includes the identification of the site
cordance with § 1926.752(e) with alternate
means and methods to provide employee pro- and project; and
tection in accordance with § 1926.752(e), (2) Is signed and dated by the qualified per-
§ 1926.753(c)(5), § 1926.757(a)(4) and son(s) responsible for its preparation and
modification.
§ 1926.757(e)(4).
(b) Development of a site-specific erection
plan. Pre-construction conference(s) and site APPENDIX B TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926
inspection(s) are held between the erector [RESERVED]
and the controlling contractor, and others
433
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
APPENDIX C TO SUBPART R OF PART 1926—ILLUSTRATIONS OF BRIDGING TERMINUS

POINTS: NON-MANDATORY
434
ER18JA01.021</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. C
435
ER18JA01.022</GPH>
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. D 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
APPENDIX D TO SUBPART R OF PART metal deck and other operations connected

1926—ILLUSTRATION OF THE USE OF with leading edge work are taking place, the
controlled decking zone (CDZ) is defined by a
CONTROL LINES TO DEMARCATE CON-
control line or by any other means that re-
TROLLED DECKING ZONES (CDZS): stricts access.
NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR
(i) A control line for a CDZ is erected not

COMPLYING WITH § 1926.760(c)(3) less than 6 feet (1.8 m) nor more than 90 feet
(27.4 m) from the leading edge.
(1) When used to control access to areas (ii) Control lines extend along the entire
where leading edge and initial securement of length of the unprotected or leading edge
436
ER18JA01.023</GPH>
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G
and are approximately parallel to the unpro- NOTE: When employees are using stilts, the
tected or leading edge. top edge height of the top rail, or equivalent
(iii) Control lines are connected on each member, shall be increased an amount equal
side to a guardrail system, wall, stanchion or to the height of the stilts.
other suitable anchorage. (2) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate
(2) Control lines consist of ropes, wires, vertical members, or equivalent inter-
tapes, or equivalent materials, and sup- mediate structural members shall be in-
porting stanchions as follows: stalled between the top edge of the guardrail
(i) Each line is rigged and supported in system and the walking/working surface
such a way that its lowest point (including when there is no wall or parapet wall at least
sag) is not less than 39 inches (1.0 m) from 21 inches (53 cm) high.
the walking/working surface and its highest
(i) Midrails, when used, shall be installed
point is not more than 45 inches (1.3 m) from
at a height midway between the top edge of
the walking/working surface.
the guardrail system and the walking/work-
(ii) Each line has a minimum breaking
ing level.
strength of 200 pounds (90.8 kg).
(ii) Screens and mesh, when used, shall ex-
tend from the top rail to the walking/work-
APPENDIX E TO SUBPART R OF PART
ing level and along the entire opening be-
1926—TRAINING: NON-MANDATORY tween top rail supports.
GUIDELINES FOR COMPLYING WITH (iii) Intermediate members (such as balus-
§ 1926.761 ters), when used between posts, shall be not
more than 19 inches (48 cm) apart.
The training requirements of § 1926.761 will
(iv) Other structural members (such as ad-
be deemed to have been met if employees
ditional midrails and architectural panels)
have completed a training course on steel
shall be installed such that there are no
erection, including instruction in the provi-
openings in the guardrail system that are
sions of this standard, that has been ap-
more than 19 inches (.5 m) wide.
proved by the U.S. Department of Labor Bu-
(3) Guardrail systems shall be capable of
reau of Apprenticeship.
withstanding, without failure, a force of at
least 200 pounds (890 N) applied within 2
APPENDIX F TO SUBPART R OF PART inches (5.1 cm) of the top edge, in any out-
1926—PERIMETER COLUMNS: NON- ward or downward direction, at any point
MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR COM- along the top edge.
PLYING WITH § 1926.756(e) TO PRO- (4) When the 200 pound (890 N) test load
TECT THE UNPROTECTED SIDE OR specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section
EDGE OF A WALKING/WORKING SUR- (§ 1926.502) is applied in a downward direc-
FACE tion, the top edge of the guardrail shall not
deflect to a height less than 39 inches (1.0 m)
In multi-story structures, when holes in above the walking/working level. Guardrail
the column web are used for perimeter safety system components selected and constructed
cables, the column splice must be placed suf- in accordance with the appendix B to subpart
ficiently high so as not to interfere with any M of this part will be deemed to meet this re-
attachments to the column necessary for the quirement.
column splice. Column splices are rec- (5) Midrails, screens, mesh, intermediate
ommended to be placed at every other or vertical members, solid panels, and equiva-
fourth levels as design allows. Column lent structural members shall be capable of
splices at third levels are detrimental to the withstanding, without failure, a force of at
erection process and should be avoided if pos- least 150 pounds (666 N) applied in any down-
sible. ward or outward direction at any point along
the midrail or other member.
APPENDIX G TO SUBPART R OF PART (6) Guardrail systems shall be so surfaced
1926—§ 1926.502 (b)–(e) FALL PROTEC- as to prevent injury to an employee from
TION SYSTEMS CRITERIA AND PRAC- punctures or lacerations, and to prevent
TICES snagging of clothing.
(7) The ends of all top rails and midrails
(b) ‘‘Guardrail systems.’’ Guardrail sys- shall not overhang the terminal posts, ex-
tems and their use shall comply with the fol- cept where such overhang does not con-
lowing provisions: stitute a projection hazard.
(1) Top edge height of top rails, or equiva- (8) Steel banding and plastic banding shall
lent guardrail system members, shall be 42 not be used as top rails or midrails.
inches (1.1 m) plus or minus 3 inches (8 cm) (9) Top rails and midrails shall be at least
above the walking/working level. When con- one-quarter inch (0.6 cm) nominal diameter
ditions warrant, the height of the top edge or thickness to prevent cuts and lacerations.
may exceed the 45-inch height, provided the If wire rope is used for top rails, it shall be
guardrail system meets all other criteria of flagged at not more than 6-foot intervals
this paragraph (§ 1926.502(b)). with high-visibility material.
437
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
(10) When guardrail systems are used at (14) Guardrail systems used on ramps and
hoisting areas, a chain, gate or removable runways shall be erected along each unpro-
guardrail section shall be placed across the tected side or edge.
access opening between guardrail sections (15) Manila, plastic or synthetic rope being
when hoisting operations are not taking used for top rails or midrails shall be in-
place. spected as frequently as necessary to ensure
(11) When guardrail systems are used at that it continues to meet the strength re-
holes, they shall be erected on all unpro- quirements of paragraph (b)(3) of this section
tected sides or edges of the hole. (§ 1926.502).
(12) When guardrail systems are used
(c) Safety net systems. Safety net systems
around holes used for the passage of mate-
and their use shall comply with the fol-
rials, the hole shall have not more than two
lowing provisions:
sides provided with removable guardrail sec-
tions to allow the passage of materials. (1) Safety nets shall be installed as close as
When the hole is not in use, it shall be closed practicable under the walking/working sur-
over with a cover, or a guardrail system face on which employees are working, but in
shall be provided along all unprotected sides no case more than 30 feet (9.1 m) below such
or edges. level. When nets are used on bridges, the po-
(13) When guardrail systems are used tential fall area from the walking/working
around holes which are used as points of ac- surface to the net shall be unobstructed.
cess (such as ladderways), they shall be pro- (2) Safety nets shall extend outward from
vided with a gate, or be so offset that a per- the outermost projection of the work surface
son cannot walk directly into the hole. as follows:
Minimum required horizontal distance of outer edge of net from

Vertical distance from working level to horizontal plane of net the edge of the working surface
Up to 5 feet .................................................................................. 8 feet

More than 5 feet up to 10 feet .................................................... 10 feet
More than 10 feet ........................................................................ 13 feet
(3) Safety nets shall be installed with suffi- certification record must include an identi-
cient clearance under them to prevent con- fication of the net and net installation for
tact with the surface or structures below which the certification record is being pre-
when subjected to an impact force equal to pared; the date that it was determined that
the drop test specified in paragraph (4) of the identified net and net installation were
this section [§ 1926.502]. in compliance with paragraph (c)(3) of this
(4) Safety nets and their installations shall section (§ 1926.502) and the signature of the
be capable of absorbing an impact force person making the determination and cer-
equal to that produced by the drop test spec- tification. The most recent certification
ified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section record for each net and net installation shall
[§ 1926.502]. be available at the jobsite for inspection.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (5) Defective nets shall not be used. Safety
(c)(4)(ii) of this section (§ 1926.502), safety nets shall be inspected at least once a week
nets and safety net installations shall be for wear, damage, and other deterioration.
drop-tested at the jobsite after initial instal- Defective components shall be removed from
lation and before being used as a fall protec- service. Safety nets shall also be inspected
tion system, whenever relocated, after major after any occurrence which could affect the
repair, and at 6-month intervals if left in one
integrity of the safety net system.
place. The drop-test shall consist of a 400
(6) Materials, scrap pieces, equipment, and
pound (180 kg) bag of sand 30+ or ¥2 inches
(76+ or ¥5 cm) in diameter dropped into the tools which have fallen into the safety net
net from the highest walking/working sur- shall be removed as soon as possible from the
face at which employees are exposed to fall net and at least before the next work shift.
hazards, but not from less than 42 inches (1.1 (7) The maximum size of each safety net
m) above that level. mesh opening shall not exceed 36 square
(ii) When the employer can demonstrate inches (230 cm) nor be longer than 6 inches
that it is unreasonable to perform the drop- (15 cm) on any side, and the opening, meas-
test required by paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this ured center-to-center of mesh ropes or web-
section (§ 1926.502), the employer (or a des- bing, shall not be longer than 6 inches (15
ignated competent person) shall certify that cm). All mesh crossings shall be secured to
prevent enlargement of the mesh opening.
the net and net installation is in compliance

with the provisions of paragraphs (c)(3) and (8) Each safety net (or section of it) shall
(c)(4)(i) of this section (§ 1926.502) by pre- have a border rope for webbing with a min-
paring a certification record prior to the net imum breaking strength of 5,000 pounds (22.2
being used as a fall protection system. The kN).
438
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. G
(9) Connections between safety net panels (9) Lanyards and vertical lifelines shall
shall be as strong as integral net components have a minimum breaking strength of 5,000
and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches pounds (22.2 kN).
(15 cm) apart. (10)(i) Except as provided in paragraph
(d) ‘‘Personal fall arrest systems.’’ Per- (d)(10)(ii) of this section [§ 1926.502], when
sonal fall arrest systems and their use shall vertical lifelines are used, each employee
comply with the provisions set forth below. shall be attached to a separate lifeline.
Effective January 1, 1998, body belts are not (ii) During the construction of elevator
acceptable as part of a personal fall arrest shafts, two employees may be attached to
system. the same lifeline in the hoistway, provided
both employees are working atop a false car
NOTE: The use of a body belt in a posi- that is equipped with guardrails; the
tioning device system is acceptable and is strength of the lifeline is 10,000 pounds [5,000
regulated under paragraph (e) of this section pounds per employee attached] (44.4 kN); and
(§ 1926.502). all other criteria specified in this paragraph
(1) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed for lifelines have been met.
or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate- (11) Lifelines shall be protected against
rials. being cut or abraded.
(2) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re- (12) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards
sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges which automatically limit free fall distance
shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter- to 2 feet (0.61 m) or less shall be capable of
facing parts of the system. sustaining a minimum tensile load of 3,000
(3) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall have a pounds (13.3 kN) applied to the device with
minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended
(22.2 kN). position.
(13) Self-retracting lifelines and lanyards
(4) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-
which do not limit free fall distance to 2 feet
tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600
(0.61 m) or less, ripstitch lanyards, and tear-
pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking,
ing and deforming lanyards shall be capable
or taking permanent deformation.
of sustaining a minimum tensile load of 5,000
(5) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat-
pounds (22.2 kN) applied to the device with
ible with the member to which they are con-
the lifeline or lanyard in the fully extended
nected to prevent unintentional disengage-
position.
ment of the snaphook by depression of the
(14) Ropes and straps (webbing) used in lan-
snaphook keeper by the connected member,
yards, lifelines, and strength components of
or shall be a locking type snaphook designed
body belts and body harnesses shall be made
and used to prevent disengagement of the
from synthetic fibers.
snaphook by the contact of the snaphook
(15) Anchorages used for attachment of
keeper by the connected member. Effective
personal fall arrest equipment shall be inde-
January 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks
pendent of any anchorage being used to sup-
shall be used.
port or suspend platforms and capable of sup-
(6) Unless the snaphook is a locking type porting at least 5,000 pounds (22.2 kN) per
and designed for the following connections, employee attached, or shall be designed, in-
snaphooks shall not be engaged: stalled, and used as follows:
(i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope; (i) as part of a complete personal fall ar-
(ii) to each other; rest system which maintains a safety factor
(iii) to a dee-ring to which another of at least two; and
snaphook or other connector is attached; (ii) under the supervision of a qualified
(iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or person.
(v) to any object which is incompatibly (16) Personal fall arrest systems, when
shaped or dimensioned in relation to the stopping a fall, shall:
snaphook such that unintentional disengage- (i) limit maximum arresting force on an
ment could occur by the connected object employee to 900 pounds (4 kN) when used
being able to depress the snaphook keeper with a body belt;
and release itself. (ii) limit maximum arresting force on an
(7) On suspended scaffolds or similar work employee to 1,800 pounds (8 kN) when used
platforms with horizontal lifelines which with a body harness;
may become vertical lifelines, the devices (iii) be rigged such that an employee can
used to connect to a horizontal lifeline shall neither free fall more than 6 feet (1.8 m), nor
be capable of locking in both directions on contact any lower level;
the lifeline. (iv) bring an employee to a complete stop
(8) Horizontal lifelines shall be designed, and limit maximum deceleration distance an
installed, and used, under the supervision of employee travels to 3.5 feet (1.07 m); and,
a qualified person, as part of a complete per- (v) have sufficient strength to withstand
sonal fall arrest system, which maintains a twice the potential impact energy of an em-
safety factor of at least two. ployee free falling a distance of 6 feet (1.8 m),
439
Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
or the free fall distance permitted by the twice the potential impact load of an em-
system, whichever is less. ployee’s fall or 3,000 pounds (13.3 kN), which-
NOTE: If the personal fall arrest system ever is greater.
meets the criteria and protocols contained in (3) Connectors shall be drop forged, pressed
Appendix C to subpart M, and if the system or formed steel, or made of equivalent mate-
is being used by an employee having a com- rials.
bined person and tool weight of less than 310 (4) Connectors shall have a corrosion-re-
pounds (140 kg), the system will be consid- sistant finish, and all surfaces and edges
ered to be in compliance with the provisions shall be smooth to prevent damage to inter-
of paragraph (d)(16) of this section [§ 1926.502]. facing parts of this system.
If the system is used by an employee having (5) Connecting assemblies shall have a
a combined tool and body weight of 310 minimum tensile strength of 5,000 pounds
pounds (140 kg) or more, then the employer
(22.2 kN)
must appropriately modify the criteria and
protocols of the Appendix to provide proper (6) Dee-rings and snaphooks shall be proof-
protection for such heavier weights, or the tested to a minimum tensile load of 3,600
system will not be deemed to be in compli- pounds (16 kN) without cracking, breaking,
ance with the requirements of paragraph or taking permanent deformation.
(d)(16) of this section (§ 1926.502). (7) Snaphooks shall be sized to be compat-
ible with the member to which they are con-
(17) The attachment point of the body belt
nected to prevent unintentional disengage-
shall be located in the center of the wearer’s
ment of the snaphook by depression of the
back. The attachment point of the body har-
ness shall be located in the center of the snaphook keeper by the connected member,
wearer’s back near shoulder level, or above or shall be a locking type snaphook designed
the wearer’s head. and used to prevent disengagement of the
(18) Body belts, harnesses, and components snaphook by the contact of the snaphook
shall be used only for employee protection keeper by the connected member. As of Jan-
(as part of a personal fall arrest system or uary 1, 1998, only locking type snaphooks
positioning device system) and not to hoist shall be used.
materials. (8) Unless the snaphook is a locking type
(19) Personal fall arrest systems and com- and designed for the following connections,
ponents subjected to impact loading shall be snaphooks shall not be engaged:
immediately removed from service and shall (i) directly to webbing, rope or wire rope;
not be used again for employee protection (ii) to each other;
until inspected and determined by a com-
(iii) to a dee-ring to which another
petent person to be undamaged and suitable
snaphook or other connector is attached;
for reuse.
(20) The employer shall provide for prompt (iv) to a horizontal lifeline; or to depress
rescue of employees in the event of a fall or the snaphook keeper and release itself.
shall assure that employees are able to res- (v) to any object which is incompatibly
cue themselves. shaped or dimensioned in relation to the
(21) Personal fall arrest systems shall be snaphook such that unintentional disengage-
inspected prior to each use for wear, damage ment could occur by the connected object
and other deterioration, and defective com- being able to depress the snaphook keeper
ponents shall be removed from service. and release itself.
(22) Body belts shall be at least one and (9) Positioning device systems shall be in-
five-eighths (15⁄8) inches (4.1 cm) wide. spected prior to each use for wear, damage,
(23) Personal fall arrest systems shall not and other deterioration, and defective com-
be attached to guardrail systems, nor shall ponents shall be removed from service.
they be attached to hoists except as specified
(10) Body belts, harnesses, and components
in other subparts of this Part.
shall be used only for employee protection
(24) When a personal fall arrest system is
(as part of a personal fall arrest system or
used at hoist areas, it shall be rigged to
allow the movement of the employee only as positioning device system) and not to hoist
far as the edge of the walking/working sur- materials.
face.
(e) Positioning device systems. Positioning APPENDIX H TO SUBPART R OF PART
device systems and their use shall conform 1926—DOUBLE CONNECTIONS: ILLUS-
to the following provisions: TRATION OF A CLIPPED END CONNEC-
(1) Positioning devices shall be rigged such TION AND A STAGGERED CONNECTION:
that an employee cannot free fall more than
NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES FOR
2 feet (.9 m).
(2) Positioning devices shall be secured to COMPLYING WITH § 1926.756(c)(1)
an anchorage capable of supporting at least
440
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. R, App. H
Clipped end connections are connection member to remain in place. The notch(es)
material on the end of a structural member fits around the nut or bolt head of the oppos-
which has a notch at the bottom and/or top ing member to allow the second member to
to allow the bolt(s) of the first member be bolted up without removing the bolt(s)
placed on the opposite side of the central holding the first member.
Staggered connections are connection ma- Subpart S—Underground Con-

terial on a structural member in which all of
the bolt holes in the common member web struction, Caissons,
are not shared by the two incoming members Cofferdams and Compressed
in the final connection. The extra hole in the Air
column web allows the erector to maintain
at least a one bolt connection at all times

while making the double connection.
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333);
ER18JA01.025</GPH>
secs. 4, 6, and 8 of the Occupational Safety

and Health Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657);
441
ER18JA01.024</GPH>
Secretary of Labor’s Orders 12–71 (36 FR ronmental controls are effective, and
8754), 8–76 (41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1– when the remaining construction ac-
90 (55 FR 9033), or 6–96 (62 FR 111), as applica-
tivity will not cause any environ-
ble.
mental hazard or structural failure
§ 1926.800 Underground construction. within the facilities.
(a) Scope and application. (1) This sec- (d) Safety instruction. All employees
tion applies to the construction of un- shall be instructed in the recognition
derground tunnels, shafts, chambers, and avoidance of hazards associated
and passageways. This section also ap- with underground construction activi-
plies to cut-and-cover excavations ties including, where appropriate, the
which are both physically connected to following subjects:
ongoing underground construction op- (1) Air monitoring;
erations within the scope of this sec- (2) Ventilation;
tion, and covered in such a manner as (3) Illumination;
to create conditions characteristic of (4) Communications;
underground construction. (5) Flood control;
(2) This section does not apply to the (6) Mechanical equipment;
following:
(7) Personal protective equipment;
(i) Excavation and trenching oper-
ations covered by subpart P of this (8) Explosives;
part, such as foundation operations for (9) Fire prevention and protection;
above-ground structures that are not and
physically connected to underground (10) Emergency procedures, including
construction operations, and surface evacuation plans and check-in/check-
excavation; nor out systems.
(ii) Underground electrical trans- (e) Notification. (1) Oncoming shifts
mission and distribution lines, as ad- shall be informed of any hazardous oc-
dressed in subpart V of this part. currences or conditions that have af-
(b) Access and egress. (1) The employer fected or might affect employee safety,
shall provide and maintain safe means including liberation of gas, equipment
of access and egress to all work sta- failures, earth or rock slides, cave-ins,
tions. floodings, fires or explosions.
(2) The employer shall provide access (2) The employer shall establish and
and egress in such a manner that em- maintain direct communications for
ployees are protected from being coordination of activities with other
struck by excavators, haulage ma- employers whose operations at the job-
chines, trains and other mobile equip- site affect or may affect the safety of
ment. employees underground.
(3) The employer shall control access
(f) Communications. (1) When natural
to all openings to prevent unauthorized
unassisted voice communication is in-
entry underground. Unused chutes,
effective, a power-assisted means of
manways, or other openings shall be
voice communication shall be used to
tightly covered, bulkheaded, or fenced
off, and shall be posted with warning provide communication between the
signs indicating ‘‘Keep Out’’ or similar work face, the bottom of the shaft, and
language. Completed or unused sec- the surface.
tions of the underground facility shall (2) Two effective means of commu-
be barricaded. nication, at least one of which shall be
(c) Check-in/check-out. The employer voice communication, shall be provided
shall maintain a check-in/check-out in all shafts which are being developed
procedure that will ensure that above- or used either for personnel access or
ground personnel can determine an ac- for hoisting. Additional requirements
curate count of the number of persons for hoist operator communication are
underground in the event of an emer- contained in paragraph (t)(3)(xiv) of
gency. However, this procedure is not this section.
required when the construction of un- (3) Powered communication systems

derground facilities designed for shall operate on an independent power
human occupancy has been sufficiently supply, and shall be installed so that
completed so that the permanent envi- the use of or disruption of any one
442
phone or signal location will not dis- (5) Rescue teams. (i) On jobsites where
rupt the operation of the system from 25 or more employees work under-
any other location. ground at one time, the employer shall
(4) Communication systems shall be provide (or make arrangements in ad-
tested upon initial entry of each shift vance with locally available rescue
to the underground, and as often as services to provide) at least two 5-per-
necessary at later times, to ensure that son rescue teams, one on the jobsite or
they are in working order. within one-half hour travel time from
(5) Any employee working alone un- the entry point, and the other within 2
derground in a hazardous location, who hours travel time.
is both out of the range of natural un- (ii) On jobsites where less than 25 em-
assisted voice communication and not ployees work underground at one time,
under observation by other persons, the employer shall provide (or make
shall be provided with an effective arrangements in advance with locally
means of obtaining assistance in an available rescue services to provide) at
emergency. least one 5-person rescue team to be ei-
(g) Emergency provisions—(1) Hoisting ther on the jobsite or within one-half
capability. When a shaft is used as a hour travel time from the entry point.
means of egress, the employer shall (iii) Rescue team members shall be
make advance arrangements for power- qualified in rescue procedures, the use
assisted hoisting capability to be read- and limitations of breathing apparatus,
ily available in an emergency, unless and the use of firefighting equipment.
the regular hoisting means can con- Qualifications shall be reviewed not
tinue to function in the event of an less than annually.
electrical power failure at the jobsite.
(iv) On jobsites where flammable or
Such hoisting means shall be designed
noxious gases are encountered or an-
so that the load hoist drum is powered
ticipated in hazardous quantities, res-
in both directions of rotation and so
cue team members shall practice don-
that the brake is automatically applied
ning and using self-contained breathing
upon power release or failure.
apparatus monthly.
(2) Self-rescuers. The employer must
(v) The employer shall ensure that
provide self-rescuers approved by the
rescue teams are familiar with condi-
National Institute for Occupational
tions at the jobsite.
Safety and Health under 42 CFR part
84. The respirators must be imme- (h) Hazardous classifications—(1) Po-
diately available to all employees at tentially gassy operations. Underground
work stations in underground areas construction operations shall be classi-
where employees might be trapped by fied as potentially gassy if either:
smoke or gas. The selection, issuance, (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per-
use, and care of respirators must be in cent or more of the lower explosive
accordance with 29 CFR 1926.103. limit for methane or other flammable
(3) Designated person. At least one gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm)
designated person shall be on duty ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face,
above ground whenever any employee floor or walls in any underground work
is working underground. This des- area for more than a 24-hour period; or
ignated person shall be responsible for (ii) The history of the geographical
securing immediate aid and keeping an area or geological formation indicates
accurate count of employees under- that 10 percent or more of the lower ex-
ground in case of emergency. The des- plosive limit for methane or other
ignated person must not be so busy flammable gases is likely to be encoun-
with other responsibilities that the tered in such underground operations.
counting function is encumbered. (2) Gassy operations. Underground
(4) Emergency lighting. Each employee construction operations shall be classi-
underground shall have an acceptable fied as gassy if:
portable hand lamp or cap lamp in his (i) Air monitoring discloses 10 per-
or her work area for emergency use, cent or more of the lower explosive
unless natural light or an emergency limit for methane or other flammable
lighting system provides adequate illu- gases measured at 12 inches (304.8 mm)
mination for escape. ±0.25 inch (6.35 mm) from the roof, face,
443
floor or walls in any underground work (ii) Installation of new equipment, or

area for three consecutive days; or conversion of existing equipment, to
(ii) There has been an ignition of comply with this paragraph (i); and
methane or of other flammable gases (iii) Installation of above-ground con-
emanating from the strata that indi- trols for reversing the air flow.
cates the presence of such gases; or (j) Air quality and monitoring—(1) Gen-
(iii) The underground construction eral. Air quality limits and control re-
operation is both connected to an un- quirements for construction are found
derground work area which is cur- in § 1926.55, except as modified by this
rently classified as gassy and is also section.
subject to a continuous course of air (i)(A) The employer shall assign a
containing the flammable gas con- competent person who shall perform all
centration. air monitoring required by this sec-
(3) Declassification to potentially gassy tion.
operations. Underground construction (B) Where this paragraph requires
gassy operations may be declassified to monitoring of airborne contaminants
Potentially Gassy when air monitoring ‘‘as often as necessary,’’ the competent
results remain under 10 percent of the person shall make a reasonable deter-
lower explosive limit for methane or mination as to which substances to
other flammable gases for three con- monitor and how frequently to mon-
secutive days. itor, considering at least the following
(i) Gassy operations-additional require- factors:
ments. (1) Only acceptable equipment, (1) Location of jobsite: Proximity to
maintained in suitable condition, shall fuel tanks, sewers, gas lines, old land-
be used in gassy operations. fills, coal deposits, and swamps;
(2) Mobile diesel-powered equipment (2) Geology: Geological studies of the
used in gassy operations shall be either jobsite, particularly involving the soil
approved in accordance with the re- type and its permeability;
quirements of 30 CFR part 36 (formerly (3) History: Presence of air contami-
Schedule 31) by MSHA, or shall be dem- nants in nearby jobsites, changes in
onstrated by the employer to be fully levels of substances monitored on the
equivalent to such MSHA-approved prior shift; and
equipment, and shall be operated in ac- (4) Work practices and jobsite condi-
cordance with that part. tions: The use of diesel engines, use of
(3) Each entrance to a gassy oper- explosives, use of fuel gas, volume and
ation shall be prominently posted with flow of ventilation, visible atmospheric
signs notifying all entrants of the conditions, decompression of the at-
gassy classification. mosphere, welding, cutting and hot
(4) Smoking shall be prohibited in all work, and employees’ physical reac-
gassy operations and the employer tions to working underground.
shall be responsible for collecting all (ii)(A) The atmosphere in all under-
personal sources of ignition, such as ground work areas shall be tested as
matches and lighters, from all persons often as necessary to assure that the
entering a gassy operation. atmosphere at normal atmospheric
(5) A fire watch as described in pressure contains at least 19.5 percent
§ 1926.352(e) shall be maintained when oxygen and no more than 22 percent ox-
hot work is performed. ygen.
(6) Once an operation has met the cri- (B) Tests for oxygen content shall be
teria in paragraph (h)(2) warranting made before tests for air contaminants.
classification as gassy, all operations (iii)(A) The atmosphere in all under-
in the affected area, except the fol- ground work areas shall be tested
lowing, shall be discontinued until the quantitatively for carbon monoxide, ni-
operation either is in compliance with trogen dioxide, hydrogen sulfide, and
all of the gassy operation requirements other toxic gases, dusts, vapors, mists,
or has been declassified in accordance and fumes as often as necessary to en-

with paragraph (h)(3) of this section: sure that the permissible exposure lim-
(i) Operations related to the control its prescribed in § 1926.55 are not ex-
of the gas concentration; ceeded.
444
(B) The atmosphere in all under- that air contaminants may be present
ground work areas shall be tested in sufficient quantity to be dangerous
quantitatively for methane and other to life, the employer shall:
flammable gases as often as necessary (A) Prominently post a notice at all
to determine: entrances to the underground jobsite
(1) Whether action is to be taken to inform all entrants of the hazardous
under paragraphs (j)(1)(vii), (viii), and condition; and
(ix), of this section; and (B) Ensure that the necessary pre-
(2) Whether an operation is to be cautions are taken.
classified potentially gassy or gassy (vii) Whenever five percent or more
under paragraph (h) of this section. of the lower explosive limit for meth-
(C) If diesel-engine or gasoline-engine ane or other flammable gases is de-
driven ventilating fans or compressors tected in any underground work area(s)
are used, an initial test shall be made or in the air return, steps shall be
of the inlet air of the fan or com- taken to increase ventilation air vol-
pressor, with the engines operating, to ume or otherwise control the gas con-
ensure that the air supply is not concentration, unless the employer is op-
taminated by engine exhaust. erating in accordance with the poten-
(D) Testing shall be performed as tially gassy or gassy operation require-
often as necessary to ensure that the ments. Such additional ventilation
ventilation requirements of paragraph
controls may be discontinued when gas
(k) of this section are met.
concentrations are reduced below five
(iv) When rapid excavation machines
percent of the lower explosive limit,
are used, a continuous flammable gas
but shall be reinstituted whenever the
monitor shall be operated at the face
five percent level is exceeded.
with the sensor(s) placed as high and
(viii) Whenever 10 percent or more of
close to the front of the machine’s cut-
the lower explosive limit for methane
ter head as practicable.
or other flammable gases is detected in
(v)(A) Whenever air monitoring indi-
the vicinity of welding, cutting, or
cates the presence of 5 ppm or more of
other hot work, such work shall be sus-
hydrogen sulfide, a test shall be con-
pended until the concentration of such
ducted in the affected underground
flammable gas is reduced to less than
work area(s), at least at the beginning
10 percent of the lower explosive limit.
and midpoint of each shift, until the
concentration of hydrogen sulfide has (ix) Whenever 20 percent or more of
been less than 5 ppm for 3 consecutive the lower explosive limit for methane
days. or other flammable gases is detected in
(B) Whenever hydrogen sulfide is de- any underground work area(s) or in the
tected in an amount exceeding 10 ppm, air return:
a continuous sampling and indicating (A) All employees, except those nec-
hydrogen sulfide monitor shall be used essary to eliminate the hazard, shall be
to monitor the affected work area. immediately withdrawn to a safe loca-
(C) Employees shall be informed tion above ground; and
when a concentration of 10 ppm hydro- (B) Electrical power, except for ac-
gen sulfide is exceeded. ceptable pumping and ventilation
(D) The continuous sampling and in- equipment, shall be cut off to the area
dicating hydrogen sulfide monitor shall endangered by the flammable gas until
be designed, installed, and maintained the concentration of such gas is re-
to provide a visual and aural alarm duced to less than 20 percent of the
when the hydrogen sulfide concentra- lower explosive limit.
tion reaches 20 ppm to signal that addi- (2) Additional monitoring for potentially
tional measures, such as respirator use, gassy and gassy operations. Operations
increased ventilation, or evacuation, which meet the criteria for potentially
might be necessary to maintain hydro- gassy and gassy operations set forth in
gen sulfide exposure below the permis- paragraph (h) of this section shall be
sible exposure limit. subject to the additional monitoring

(vi) When the competent person de- requirements of this paragraph.
termines, on the basis of air moni- (i) A test for oxygen content shall be
toring results or other information, conducted in the affected underground
445
work areas and work areas imme- (2) A minimum of 200 cubic feet (5.7
diately adjacent to such areas at least m3) of fresh air per minute shall be sup-
at the beginning and midpoint of each plied for each employee underground.
shift. (3) The linear velocity of air flow in
(ii) When using rapid excavation ma- the tunnel bore, in shafts, and in all
chines, continuous automatic flam- other underground work areas shall be
mable gas monitoring equipment shall at least 30 feet (9.15 m) per minute
be used to monitor the air at the head- where blasting or rock drilling is con-
ing, on the rib, and in the return air ducted, or where other conditions like-
duct. The continuous monitor shall sig- ly to produce dust, fumes, mists, va-
nal the heading, and shut down electric pors, or gases in harmful or explosive
power in the affected underground quantities are present.
work area, except for acceptable pump- (4) The direction of mechanical air
ing and ventilation equipment, when 20 flow shall be reversible.
percent or more of the lower explosive (5) Following blasting, ventilation
limit for methane or other flammable systems shall exhaust smoke and
gases is encountered. fumes to the outside atmosphere before
(iii) A manual flammable gas mon- work is resumed in affected areas.
itor shall be used as needed, but at
(6) Ventilation doors shall be de-
least at the beginning and midpoint of
signed and installed so that they re-
each shift, to ensure that the limits
main closed when in use, regardless of
prescribed in paragraphs (h) and (j) are
the direction of the air flow.
not exceeded. In addition, a manual
electrical shut down control shall be (7) When ventilation has been re-
provided near the heading. duced to the extent that hazardous lev-
els of methane or flammable gas may
(iv) Local gas tests shall be made
have accumulated, a competent person
prior to and continuously during any
shall test all affected areas after ven-
welding, cutting, or other hot work.
tilation has been restored and shall de-
(v) In underground operations driven
termine whether the atmosphere is
by drill-and-blast methods, the air in
within flammable limits before any
the affected area shall be tested for
power, other than for acceptable equip-
flammable gas prior to re-entry after
ment, is restored or work is resumed.
blasting, and continuously when em-
ployees are working underground. (8) Whenever the ventilation system
has been shut down with all employees
(3) Recordkeeping. A record of all air
out of the underground area, only com-
quality tests shall be maintained above
petent persons authorized to test for
ground at the worksite and be made
air contaminants shall be allowed un-
available to the Secretary of Labor
upon request. The record shall include derground until the ventilation has
the location, date, time, substance and been restored and all affected areas
amount monitored. Records of expo- have been tested for air contaminants
sures to toxic substances shall be re- and declared safe.
tained in accordance with § 1910.33 of (9) When drilling rock or concrete,
this chapter. All other air quality test appropriate dust control measures
records shall be retained until comple- shall be taken to maintain dust levels
tion of the project. within limits set in § 1926.55. Such
(k) Ventilation. (1)(i) Fresh air shall measures may include, but are not lim-
be supplied to all underground work ited to, wet drilling, the use of vacuum
areas in sufficient quantities to pre- collectors, and water mix spray sys-
vent dangerous or harmful accumula- tems.
tion of dusts, fumes, mists, vapors or (10)(i) Internal combustion engines,
gases. except diesel-powered engines on mo-
(ii) Mechanical ventilation shall be bile equipment, are prohibited under-
provided in all underground work areas ground.
except when the employer can dem- (ii) Mobile diesel-powered equipment
onstrate that natural ventilation pro- used underground in atmospheres other
vides the necessary air quality through than gassy operations shall be either
sufficient air volume and air flow. approved by MSHA in accordance with
446
the provisions of 30 CFR part 32 (for- ed in areas having fire or explosion

merly Schedule 24), or shall be dem- hazards.
onstrated by the employer to be fully (3) The employer may store under-
equivalent to such MSHA-approved ground no more than a 24-hour supply
equipment, and shall be operated in ac- of diesel fuel for the underground
cordance with that part. (Each brake equipment used at the worksite.
horsepower of a diesel engine requires (4) The piping of diesel fuel from the
at least 100 cubic feet (28.32 m3) of air surface to an underground location is
per minute for suitable operation in ad- permitted only if:
dition to the air requirements for per- (i) Diesel fuel is contained at the sur-
sonnel. Some engines may require a face in a tank whose maximum capac-
greater amount of air to ensure that ity is no more than the amount of fuel
the allowable levels of carbon mon- required to supply for a 24-hour period
oxide, nitric oxide, and nitrogen diox- the equipment serviced by the under-
ide are not exceeded.) ground fueling station; and
(11) Potentially gassy or gassy oper-
(ii) The surface tank is connected to
ations shall have ventilation systems
the underground fueling station by an
installed which shall:
acceptable pipe or hose system that is
(i) Be constructed of fire-resistant
controlled at the surface by a valve,
materials; and
and at the shaft bottom by a hose noz-
(ii) Have acceptable electrical sys-
zle; and
tems, including fan motors.
(iii) The pipe is empty at all times
(12) Gassy operations shall be pro-
except when transferring diesel fuel
vided with controls located above
from the surface tank to a piece of
ground for reversing the air flow of
equipment in use underground; and
ventilation systems.
(13) In potentially gassy or gassy op- (iv) Hoisting operations in the shaft
erations, wherever mine-type ventila- are suspended during refueling oper-
tion systems using an offset main fan ations if the supply piping in the shaft
installed on the surface are used, they is not protected from damage.
shall be equipped with explosion-doors (5)(i) Gasoline shall not be carried,
or a weak-wall having an area at least stored, or used underground.
equivalent to the cross-sectional area (ii) Acetylene, liquefied petroleum
of the airway. gas, and Methylacetylene Propadiene
(l) Illumination. (1) Illumination re- Stabilized gas may be used under-
quirements applicable to underground ground only for welding, cutting and
construction operations are found in other hot work, and only in accordance
Table D–3 of § 1926.56 of this part. with subpart J of this part, and para-
(2) Only acceptable portable lighting graphs (j), (k), (m), and (n) of this sec-
equipment shall be used within 50 feet tion.
(15.24 m) of any underground heading (6) Oil, grease, and diesel fuel stored
during explosives handling. underground shall be kept in tightly
(m) Fire prevention and control. Fire sealed containers in fire-resistant areas
prevention and protection require- at least 300 feet (91.44 m) from under-
ments applicable to underground con- ground explosive magazines, and at
struction operations are found in sub- least 100 feet (30.48 m) from shaft sta-
part F of this part, except as modified tions and steeply inclined passageways.
by the following additional standards. Storage areas shall be positioned or
(1) Open flames and fires are prohib- diked so that the contents of ruptured
ited in all underground construction or overturned containers will not flow
operations except as permitted for from the storage area.
welding, cutting and other hot work (7) Flammable or combustible mate-
operations in paragraph (n) of this sec- rials shall not be stored above ground
tion. within 100 feet (30.48 m) of any access
(2) (i) Smoking may be allowed only opening to any underground operation.
in areas free of fire and explosion haz- Where this is not feasible because of
ards. space limitations at the jobsite, such
(ii) Readily visible signs prohibiting materials may be located within the
smoking and open flames shall be post- 100-foot limit, provided that:
447
(i) They are located as far as prac- protection to ensure safe access of em-
ticable from the opening; and ployees and equipment. Adjacent areas
(ii) Either a fire-resistant barrier of shall be scaled or otherwise secured to
not less than one-hour rating is placed prevent loose soil, rock, or fractured
between the stored material and the materials from endangering the portal
opening, or additional precautions are and access area.
taken which will protect the materials (2) Subsidence areas. The employer
from ignition sources. shall ensure ground stability in haz-
(8) Fire-resistant hydraulic fluids ardous subsidence areas by shoring, by
shall be used in hydraulically-actuated filling in, or by erecting barricades and
underground machinery and equipment posting warning signs to prevent entry.
unless such equipment is protected by (3) Underground areas. (i)(A) A com-
a fire suppression system or by multi- petent person shall inspect the roof,
purpose fire extinguisher(s) rated at of face, and walls of the work area at the
sufficient capacity for the type and size start of each shift and as often as nec-
of hydraulic equipment involved, but essary to determine ground stability.
rated at least 4A:40B:C. (B) Competent persons conducting
(9)(i) Electrical installations in un- such inspections shall be protected
derground areas where oil, grease, or from loose ground by location, ground
diesel fuel are stored shall be used only support or equivalent means.
for lighting fixtures. (ii) Ground conditions along
(ii) Lighting fixtures in storage haulageways and travelways shall be
areas, or within 25 feet (7.62 m) of un- inspected as frequently as necessary to
derground areas where oil, grease, or ensure safe passage.
diesel fuel are stored, shall be approved
(iii) Loose ground that might be haz-
for Class I, Division 2 locations, in ac-
ardous to employees shall be taken
cordance with subpart K of this part.
down, scaled or supported.
(10) Leaks and spills of flammable or
combustible fluids shall be cleaned up (iv) (A) Torque wrenches shall be
immediately. used wherever bolts that depend on
(11) A fire extinguisher of at least torsionally applied force are used for
4A:40B:C rating or other equivalent ex- ground support.
tinguishing means shall be provided at (B) A competent person shall deter-
the head pulley and at the tail pulley mine whether rock bolts meet the nec-
of underground belt conveyors. essary torque, and shall determine the
(12) Any structure located under- testing frequency in light of the bolt
ground or within 100 feet (30.48 m) of an system, ground conditions and the dis-
opening to the underground shall be tance from vibration sources.
constructed of material having a fire- (v) Suitable protection shall be pro-
resistance rating of at least one hour. vided for employees exposed to the haz-
(n) Welding, cutting, and other hot ard of loose ground while installing
work. In addition to the requirements ground support systems.
of subpart J of this part, the following (vi) Support sets shall be installed so
requirements shall apply to under- that the bottoms have sufficient an-
ground welding, cutting, and other hot chorage to prevent ground pressures
work. from dislodging the support base of the
(1) No more than the amount of fuel sets. Lateral bracing (collar bracing,
gas and oxygen cylinders necessary to tie rods, or spreaders) shall be provided
perform welding, cutting, or other hot between immediately adjacent sets to
work during the next 24-hour period ensure added stability.
shall be permitted underground. (vii) Damaged or dislodged ground
(2) Noncombustible barriers shall be supports that create a hazardous condi-
installed below welding, cutting, or tion shall be promptly repaired or re-
other hot work being done in or over a placed. When replacing supports, the
shaft or raise. new supports shall be installed before
(o) Ground support—(1) Portal areas. the damaged supports are removed.
Portal openings and access areas shall (viii) A shield or other type of sup-
be guarded by shoring, fencing, head port shall be used to maintain a safe
walls, shotcreting or other equivalent travelway for employees working in
448
dead-end areas ahead of any support re- (q) Drilling. (1) A competent person
placement operation. shall inspect all drilling and associated
(4) Shafts. (i) Shafts and wells over 5 equipment prior to each use. Equip-
feet (1.53 m) in depth that employees ment defects affecting safety shall be
must enter shall be supported by a corrected before the equipment is used.
steel casing, concrete pipe, timber, (2) The drilling area shall be in-
solid rock or other suitable material. spected for hazards before the drilling
(ii) (A) The full depth of the shaft operation is started.
shall be supported by casing or bracing (3) Employees shall not be allowed on
except where the shaft penetrates into a drill mast while the drill bit is in op-
solid rock having characteristics that eration or the drill machine is being
will not change as a result of exposure. moved.
Where the shaft passes through earth (4) When a drill machine is being
into solid rock, or through solid rock moved from one drilling area to an-
into earth, and where there is potential other, drill steel, tools, and other
for shear, the casing or bracing shall equipment shall be secured and the
extend at least 5 feet (1.53 m) into the mast shall be placed in a safe position.
solid rock. When the shaft terminates (5) Receptacles or racks shall be pro-
in solid rock, the casing or bracing vided for storing drill steel located on
shall extend to the end of the shaft or jumbos.
5 feet (1.53 m) into the solid rock, (6) Employees working below jumbo
whichever is less. decks shall be warned whenever drill-
(B) The casing or bracing shall ex- ing is about to begin.
tend 42 inches (1.07 m) plus or minus 3 (7) Drills on columns shall be an-
inches (8 cm) above ground level, ex- chored firmly before starting drilling,
cept that the minimum casing height
and shall be retightened as necessary
may be reduced to 12 inches (0.3 m),
thereafter.
provided that a standard railing is in-
(8) (i) The employer shall provide me-
stalled; that the ground adjacent to the
chanical means on the top deck of a
top of the shaft is sloped away from the
jumbo for lifing unwieldy or heavy ma-
shaft collar to prevent entry of liquids;
and that effective barriers are used to terial.
prevent mobile equipment operating (ii) When jumbo decks are over 10
near the shaft from jumping over the 12 feet (3.05 m) in height, the employer
inch (0.3 m) barrier. shall install stairs wide enough for two
(iii) After blasting operations in persons.
shafts, a competent person shall deter- (iii) Jumbo decks more than 10 feet
mine if the walls, ladders, timbers, (3.05 m) in height shall be equipped
blocking, or wedges have loosened. If with guardrails on all open sides, ex-
so, necessary repairs shall be made be- cluding access openings of platforms,
fore employees other than those as- unless an adjacent surface provides
signed to make the repairs are allowed equivalent fall protection.
in or below the affected areas. (iv) (A) Only employees assisting the
(p) Blasting. This paragraph applies in operator shall be allowed to ride on
addition to the requirements for blast- jumbos, unless the jumbo meets the re-
ing and explosives operations, includ- quirements of paragraph (r)(6)(ii) of
ing handling of misfires, which are this section.
found in subpart U of this part. (B) Jumbos shall be chocked to pre-
(1) Blasting wires shall be kept clear vent movement while employees are
of electrical lines, pipes, rails, and working on them.
other conductive material, excluding (v) (A) Walking and working surfaces
earth, to prevent explosives initiation of jumbos shall be maintained to pre-
or employee exposure to electric cur- vent the hazards of slipping, tripping
rent. and falling.
(2) Following blasting, an employee (B) Jumbo decks and stair treads
shall not enter a work area until the shall be designed to be slip-resistent
air quality meets the requirements of and secured to prevent accidental dis-
paragraph (j) of this section. placement.
449
(9) Scaling bars shall be available at (ii) No employee shall ride haulage
scaling operations and shall be main- equipment unless it is equipped with
tained in good condition at all times. seating for each passenger and protects
Blunted or severely worn bars shall not passengers from being struck, crushed,
be used. or caught between other equipment or
(10) (i) Blasting holes shall not be surfaces. Members of train crews may
drilled through blasted rock (muck) or ride on a locomotive if it is equipped
water. with handholds and nonslip steps or
(ii) Employees in a shaft shall be pro- footboards. Requirements applicable to
tected either by location or by suitable Underground Construction for motor
barrier(s) if powered mechanical load- vehicle transportation of employees
ing equipment is used to remove muck are found in § 1926.601 of this part.
containing unfired explosives. (7) Powered mobile haulage equip-
(11) A caution sign reading ‘‘Buried ment, including trains, shall not be left
Line,’’ or similar wording shall be post-
unattended unless the master switch or
ed where air lines are buried or other-
motor is turned off; operating controls
wise hidden by water or debris.
are in neutral or park position; and the
(r) Haulage. (1)(i) A competent person
brakes are set, or equivalent pre-
shall inspect haulage equipment before
cautions are taken to prevent rolling.
each shift.
(ii) Equipment defects affecting safe- (8) Whenever rails serve as a return
ty and health shall be corrected before for a trolley circuit, both rails shall be
the equipment is used. bonded at every joint and crossbonded
(2) Powered mobile haulage equip- every 200 feet (60.96 m).
ment shall have suitable means of stop- (9) When dumping cars by hand, the
ping. car dumps shall have tiedown chains,
(3)(i) Power mobile haulage equip- bumper blocks, or other locking or
ment, including trains, shall have audi- holding devices to prevent the cars
ble warning devices to warn employees from overturning.
to stay clear. The operator shall sound (10) Rocker-bottom or bottom-dump
the warning device before moving the cars shall be equipped with positive
equipment and whenever necessary locking devices to prevent unintended
during travel. dumping.
(ii) The operator shall assure that (11) Equipment to be hauled shall be
lights which are visible to employees loaded and secured to prevent sliding
at both ends of any mobile equipment, or dislodgement.
including a train, are turned on when- (12)(i) Mobile equipment, including
ever the equipment is operating. rail-mounted equipment, shall be
(4) In those cabs where glazing is stopped for manual connecting or serv-
used, the glass shall be safety glass, or ice work.
its equivalent, and shall be maintained (ii) Employees shall not reach be-
and cleaned so that vision is not ob- tween moving cars during coupling op-
structed.
erations.
(5) Anti-roll back devices or brakes
(iii) Couplings shall not be aligned,
shall be installed on inclined conveyor
drive units to prevent conveyors from shifted or cleaned on moving cars or lo-
inadvertently running in reverse. comotives.
(6)(i) (A) Employees shall not be per- (13)(i) Safety chains or other connec-
mitted to ride a power-driven chain, tions shall be used in addition to cou-
belt, or bucket conveyor unless the plers to connect man cars or powder
conveyor is specifically designed for cars whenever the locomotive is uphill
the transportation of persons. of the cars.
(B) Endless belt-type manlifts are (ii) When the grade exceeds one per-
prohibited in underground construc- cent and there is a potential for run-
tion. away cars, safety chains or other con-
(C) General requirements also appli- nections shall be used in addition to

cable to underground construction for couplers to connect haulage cars or, as
use of conveyors in construction are an alternative, the locomotive must be
found in § 1926.555 of this part. downhill of the train.
450
(iii) Such safety chains or other con- of subpart N of this part apply: Re-
nections shall be capable of maintain- quirements for cranes are found in
ing connection between cars in the § 1926.550 of this part. Paragraph (g) of
event of either coupler disconnect, fail- § 1926.550 applies to crane-hoisting of
ure or breakage. personnel, except that the limitation
(14) Parked rail equipment shall be in paragraph (g)(2) does not apply to
chocked, blocked, or have brakes set to the routine access of employees to the
prevent inadvertent movement. underground via a shaft. Requirements
(15) Berms, bumper blocks, safety for material hoists are found in
hooks, or equivalent means shall be § 1926.552 (a) and (b) of this part. Re-
provided to prevent overtravel and quirements for personnel hoists are
overturning of haulage equipment at found in the personnel hoist require-
dumping locations. ments of § 1926.552 (a) and (c) of this
(16) Bumper blocks or equivalent part and in the elevator requirement of
stopping devices shall be provided at § 1926.552 (a) and (d) of this part.
all track dead ends. (1) General requirements for cranes and
(17)(i) Only small handtools, lunch hoists. (i) Materials, tools, and supplies
pails or similar small items may be being raised or lowered, whether within
transported with employees in man- a cage or otherwise, shall be secured or
cars, or on top of a locomotive. stacked in a manner to prevent the
(ii) When small hand tools or other load from shifting, snagging or falling
small items are carried on top of a lo- into the shaft.
comotive, the top shall be designed or (ii) A warning light suitably located
modified to retain them while trav- to warn employees at the shaft bottom
eling. and subsurface shaft entrances shall
(18)(i) Where switching facilities are flash whenever a load is above the
available, occupied personnel-cars shall shaft bottom or subsurface entrances,
be pulled, not pushed. If personnel-cars or the load is being moved in the shaft.
must be pushed and visibility of the This paragraph does not apply to fully
track ahead is hampered, then a quali- enclosed hoistways.
fied person shall be stationed in the (iii) Whenever a hoistway is not fully
lead car to give signals to the loco- enclosed and employees are at the
motive operator. shaft bottom, conveyances or equip-
(ii) Crew trips shall consist of per- ment shall be stopped at least 15 feet
sonnel-loads only. (4.57 m) above the bottom of the shaft
(s) Electrical safety. This paragraph and held there until the signalman at
applies in addition to the general re- the bottom of the shaft directs the op-
quirements for electrical safety which erator to continue lowering the load,
are found in subpart K of this part. except that the load may be lowered
(1) Electric power lines shall be insu- without stopping if the load or convey-
lated or located away from water lines, ance is within full view of a bottom
telephone lines, air lines, or other con- signalman who is in constant voice
ductive materials so that a damaged communication with the operator.
circuit will not energize the other sys- (iv) (A) Before maintenance, repairs,
tems. or other work is commenced in the
(2) Lighting circuits shall be located shaft served by a cage, skip, or bucket,
so that movement of personnel or the operator and other employees in
equipment will not damage the circuits the area shall be informed and given
or disrupt service. suitable instructions.
(3) Oil-filled transformers shall not (B) A sign warning that work is being
be used underground unless they are lo- done in the shaft shall be installed at
cated in a fire-resistant enclosure suit- the shaft collar, at the operator’s sta-
ably vented to the outside and sur- tion, and at each underground landing.
rounded by a dike to retain the con- (v) Any connection between the
tents of the transformers in the event hoisting rope and the cage or skip shall
of rupture. be compatible with the type of wire

(t) Hoisting unique to underground con- rope used for hoisting.
struction. Except as modified by this (vi) Spin-type connections, where
paragraph (t), the following provisions used, shall be maintained in a clean
451
condition and protected from foreign controlled by an operator within the

matter that could affect their oper- cage or skip.
ation. (vii) Line speed shall not exceed the
(vii) Cage, skip, and load connections design limitations of the systems.
to the hoist rope shall be made so that (viii) Hoists shall be equipped with
the force of the hoist pull, vibration, landing level indicators at the opera-
misalignment, release of lift force, or tor’s station. Marking of the hoist rope
impact will not disengage the connec- does not satisfy this requirement.
tion. Moused or latched open-throat (ix) Whenever glazing is used in the
hooks do not meet this requirement. hoist house, it shall be safety glass, or
(viii) When using wire rope wedge its equivalent, and be free of distor-
sockets, means shall be provided to tions and obstructions.
prevent wedge escapement and to en- (x) A fire extinguisher that is rated
sure that the wedge is properly seated. at least 2A:10B:C (multi-purpose, dry
(2) Additional requirements for cranes. chemical) shall be mounted in each
Cranes shall be equipped with a limit hoist house.
switch to prevent overtravel at the (xi) Hoist controls shall be arranged
boom tip. Limit switches are to be used so that the operator can perform all
only to limit travel of loads when oper- operating cycle functions and reach the
ational controls malfunction and shall emergency power cutoff without hav-
not be used as a substitute for other ing to reach beyond the operator’s nor-
operational controls. mal operating position.
(3) Additional requirements for hoists. (xii) Hoists shall be equipped with
(i) Hoists shall be designed so that the limit switches to prevent overtravel at
load hoist drum is powered in both di- the top and bottom of the hoistway.
rections of rotation, and so that brakes (xiii) Limit switches are to be used
are automatically applied upon power only to limit travel of loads when oper-
release or failure. ational controls malfunction and shall
(ii) Control levers shall be of the not be used as a substitute for other
‘‘deadman type’’ which return auto- operational controls.
matically to their center (neutral) po- (xiv) Hoist operators shall be pro-
sition upon release. vided with a closed-circuit voice com-
(iii) When a hoist is used for both munication system to each landing sta-
personnel hoisting and material hoist- tion, with speaker-microphones so lo-
ing, load and speed ratings for per- cated that the operator can commu-
sonnel and for materials shall be as- nicate with individual landing stations
signed to the equipment. during hoist use.
(iv) Material hoisting may be per- (xv) When sinking shafts 75 feet (22.86
formed at speeds higher than the rated m) or less in depth, cages, skips, and
speed for personnel hoisting if the hoist buckets that may swing, bump, or snag
and components have been designed for against shaft sides or other structural
such higher speeds and if shaft condi- protrusions shall be guided by fenders,
tions permit. rails, ropes, or a combination of those
(v) Employees shall not ride on top of means.
any cage, skip or bucket except when (xvi) When sinking shafts more than
necessary to perform inspection or 75 feet (22.86 m) in depth, all cages,
maintenance of the hoisting system, in skips, and buckets shall be rope or rail-
which case they shall be protected by a guided to within a rail length from the
body belt/harness system to prevent sinking operation.
falling. (xvii) Cages, skips, and buckets in all
(vi) Personnel and materials (other completed shafts, or in all shafts being
than small tools and supplies secured used as completed shafts, shall be rope
in a manner that will not create a haz- or rail-guided for the full length of
ards to employees) shall not be hoisted their travel.
together in the same conveyance. How- (xviii) Wire rope used in load lines of
ever, if the operator is protected from material hoists shall be capable of sup-
the shifting of materials, then the op- porting, without failure, at least five
erator may ride with materials in times the maximum intended load or
cages or skips which are designed to be the factor recommended by the rope
452
manufacturer, whichever is greater. (ii) The operator shall remain within

Refer to § 1926.552(c)(14)(iii) of this part sight and sound of the signals at the
for design factors for wire rope used in operator’s station.
personnel hoists. The design factor (iii) All sides of personnel cages shall
shall be calculated by dividing the be enclosed by one-half inch (12.70 mm)
breaking strength of wire rope, as re- wire mesh (not less than No. 14 gauge
ported in the manufacturer’s rating ta- or equivalent) to a height of not less
bles, by the total static load, including than 6 feet (1.83 m). However, when the
the weight of the wire rope in the shaft cage or skip is being used as a work
when fully extended. platform, its sides may be reduced in
(xix) A competent person shall vis- height to 42 inches 1.07 m) when the
ually check all hoisting machinery, conveyance is not in motion.
equipment, anchorages, and hoisting (iv) All personnel cages shall be pro-
rope at the beginning of each shift and vided with positive locking door that
during hoist use, as necessary. does not open outward.
(xx) Each safety device shall be (v) All personnel cages shall be pro-
checked by a competent person at least vided with a protective canopy. The
weekly during hoist use to ensure suit- canopy shall be made of steel plate, at
able operation and safe condition. least 3⁄16-inch (4.763 mm) in thickness,
or material of equivalent strength and
(xxi) In order to ensure suitable oper-
impact resistance. The canopy shall be
ation and safe condition of all func-
sloped to the outside, and so designed
tions and safety devices, each hoist as-
that a section may be readily pushed
sembly shall be inspected and load-
upward to afford emergency egress.
tested to 100 percent of its rated capac-
The canopy shall cover the top in such
ity: at the time of installation; after
a manner as to protect those inside
any repairs or alterations affecting its
from objects falling in the shaft.
structural integrity; after the oper-
(vi) Personnel platforms operating on
ation of any safety device; and annu-
guide rails or guide ropes shall be
ally when in use. The employer shall
equipped with broken-rope safety de-
prepare a certification record which in-
vices, safety catches or arrestment de-
cludes the date each inspection and vices that will stop and hold 150 per-
load-test was performed; the signature cent of the weight of the personnel
of the person who performed the in- platform and its maximum rated load.
spection and test; and a serial number (vii) During sinking operations in
or other identifier for the hoist that shafts where guides and safeties are
was inspected and tested. The most re- not yet used, the travel speed of the
cent certification record shall be main- personnel platform shall not exceed 200
tained on file until completion of the feet (60.96 m) per minute. Governor
project. controls set for 200 feet (60.96 m) per
(xxii) Before hoisting personnel or minute shall be installed in the control
material, the operator shall perform a system and shall be used during per-
test run of any cage or skip whenever sonnel hoisting.
it has been out of service for one com- (viii) The personnel platform may
plete shift, and whenever the assembly travel over the controlled length of the
or components have been repaired or hoistway at rated speeds up to 600 feet
adjusted. (182.88 m) per minute during sinking
(xxiii) Unsafe conditions shall be cor- operations in shafts where guides and
rected before using the equipment. safeties are used.
(4) Additional requirements for per- (ix) The personnel platform may
sonnel hoists. (i) Hoist drum systems travel at rated speeds greater than 600
shall be equipped with at least two feet (182.88 m) per minute in completed
means of stopping the load, each of shafts.
which shall be capable of stopping and (u) Definitions. ‘‘Accept’’—Any de-
holding 150 percent of the hoist’s rated vice, equipment, or appliance that is
line pull. A broken-rope safety, safety either approved by MSHA and main-
catch, or arrestment device is not a tained in permissible condition, or is
permissible means of stopping under listed or labeled for the class and loca-
this paragraph. tion under subpart K of this part.
453
‘‘Rapid Excavation Machine’’—Tun- (b) Warning signals for evacuation of

nel boring machines, shields, employees in case of emergency shall
roadheaders, or any other similar exca- be developed and posted.
vation machine. (c) Cofferdam walkways, bridges, or
ramps with at least two means of rapid
[54 FR 23850, June 2, 1989; 58 FR 35311, June exit shall be provided with guardrails
30, 1993, as amended at 61 FR 5510, Feb. 13,
1996; 63 FR 1297, Jan. 8, 1998; 71 FR 16674, Apr.
as specified in subpart M of this part.
3, 2006] (d) Cofferdams located close to navi-
gable shipping channels shall be pro-
§ 1926.801 Caissons. tected from vessels in transit, where
possible.
(a) Wherever, in caisson work in
which compressed air is used, and the § 1926.803 Compressed air.
working chamber is less than 11 feet in (a) General provisions. (1) There shall
length, and when such caissons are at be present, at all times, at least one
any time suspended or hung while work competent person designated by and
is in progress so that the bottom of the representing the employer, who shall
excavation is more than 9 feet below be familiar with this subpart in all re-
the deck of the working chamber, a spects, and responsible for full compli-
shield shall be erected therein for the ance with these and other applicable
protection of the employees. subparts.
(b) Shafts shall be subjected to a hy- (2) Every employee shall be in-
drostatic or air-pressure test, at which structed in the rules and regulations
pressure they shall be tight. The shaft which concern his safety or the safety
shall be stamped on the outside shell of others.
about 12 inches from each flange to (b) Medical attendance, examination,
show the pressure to which they have and regulations. (1) There shall be re-
been subjected. tained one or more licensed physicians
(c) Whenever a shaft is used, it shall familiar with and experienced in the
be provided, where space permits, with physical requirements and the medical
a safe, proper, and suitable staircase aspects of compressed air work and the
for its entire length, including landing treatment of decompression illness. He
platforms, not more than 20 feet apart. shall be available at all times while
Where this is impracticable, suitable work is in progress in order to provide
ladders shall be installed with landing medical supervision of employees em-
platforms located about 20 feet apart to ployed in compressed air work. He
break the climb. shall himself be physically qualified
(d) All caissons having a diameter or and be willing to enter a pressurized
side greater than 10 feet shall be pro- environment.
vided with a man lock and shaft for the (2) No employee shall be permitted to
exclusive use of employees. enter a compressed air environment
until he has been examined by the phy-
(e) In addition to the gauge in the
sician and reported by him to be phys-
locks, an accurate gauge shall be main-
ically qualified to engage in such work.
tained on the outer and inner side of
(3) In the event an employee is absent
each bulkhead. These gauges shall be
from work for 10 days, or is absent due
accessible at all times and kept in ac-
to sickness or injury, he shall not re-
curate working order.
sume work until he is reexamined by
(f) In caisson operations where em- the physician, and his physical condi-
ployees are exposed to compressed air tion reported, as provided in this para-
working environments, the require- graph, to be such as to permit him to
ments contained in § 1926.803 shall be work in compressed air.
complied with. (4) After an employee has been em-
ployed continuously in compressed air
§ 1926.802 Cofferdams.
for a period designated by the physi-
(a) If overtopping of the cofferdam by cian, but not to exceed 1 year, he shall
high waters is possible, means shall be be reexamined by the physician to de-
provided for controlled flooding of the termine if he is still physically quali-
work area. fied to engage in compressed air work.
454
(5) Such physician shall at all times (viii) Be equipped with internal con-
keep a complete and full record of ex- trols which may be overridden by ex-
aminations made by him. The physi- ternal controls;
cian shall also keep an accurate record (ix) Be provided with air pressure
of any decompression illness or other gauges to show the air pressure within
illness or injury incapacitating any each compartment to observers inside
employee for work, and of all loss of and outside the medical lock.
life that occurs in the operation of a (x) Be equipped with a manual type
tunnel, caisson, or other compartment sprinkler system that can be activated
in which compressed air is used. inside the lock or by the outside lock
(6) Records shall be available for the tender.
inspection of the Secretary or his rep- (xi) Be provided with oxygen lines
resentatives, and a copy thereof shall and fittings leading into external
be forwarded to OSHA within 48 hours tanks. The lines shall be fitted with
following the occurrence of the acci- check valves to prevent reverse flow.
dent, death, injury, or decompression The oxygen system inside the chamber
illness. It shall state as fully as pos- shall be of a closed circuit design and
sible the cause of said death or decom- be so designed as to automatically shut
pression illness, and the place where off the oxygen supply whenever the fire
the injured or sick employee was system is activated.
taken, and such other relative informa- (xii) Be in constant charge of an at-
tion as may be required by the Sec-
tendant under the direct control of the
retary.
retained physician. The attendant shall
(7) A fully equipped first aid station be trained in the use of the lock and
shall be provided at each tunnel project suitably instructed regarding steps to
regardless of the number of persons be taken in the treatment of employee
employed. An ambulance or transpor- exhibiting symptoms compatible with
tation suitable for a litter case shall be a diagnosis of decompression illness;
at each project.
(xiii) Be adjacent to an adequate
(8) Where tunnels are being excavated emergency medical facility;
from portals more than 5 road miles
(xiv) The medical facility shall be
apart, a first aid station and transpor-
equipped with demand-type oxygen in-
tation facilities shall be provided at
halation equipment approved by the
each portal.
U.S. Bureau of Mines;
(9) A medical lock shall be estab-
(xv) Be capable of being maintained
lished and maintained in immediate
at a temperature, in use, not to exceed
working order whenever air pressure in
90 °F. nor be less than 70 °F.; and
the working chamber is increased
(xvi) Be provided with sources of air,
above the normal atmosphere.
free of oil and carbon monoxide, for
(10) The medical lock shall:
normal and emergency use, which are
(i) Have at least 6 feet of clear head- capable of raising the air pressure in
room at the center, and be subdivided the lock from 0 to 75 p.s.i.g. in 5 min-
into not less than two compartments; utes.
(ii) Be readily accessible to employ- (11) Identification badges shall be
ees working under compressed air; furnished to all employees, indicating
(iii) Be kept ready for immediate use that the wearer is a compressed air
for at least 5 hours subsequent to the worker. A permanent record shall be
emergence of any employee from the kept of all identification badges issued.
working chamber; The badge shall give the employee’s
(iv) Be properly heated, lighted and name, address of the medical lock, the
ventilated; telephone number of the licensed phy-
(v) Be maintained in a sanitary con- sician for the compressed air project,
dition; and contain instructions that in case of
(vi) Have a nonshatterable port emergency of unknown or doubtful
through which the occupant(s) may be cause or illness, the wearer shall be
kept under constant observation; rushed to the medical lock. The badge
(vii) Be designed for a working pres- shall be worn at all times—off the job,
sure of 75 p.s.i.g. as well as on the job.
455
(c) Telephone and signal communica- lieved. If, after 5 minutes the discom-
tion. (1) Effective and reliable means of fort does not disappear, the lock at-
communication, such as bells, whistles, tendant shall gradually reduce the
or telephones, shall be maintained, at pressure until the employee signals
all times between all the following lo- that the discomfort has ceased. If he
cations: does not indicate that the discomfort
(i) The working chamber face; has disappeared, the lock attendant
(ii) The working chamber side of the shall reduce the pressure to atmos-
man lock near the door; pheric and the employee shall be re-
(iii) The interior of the man lock; leased from the lock.
(iv) Lock attendant’s station; (5) No employee shall be subjected to
(v) The compressor plant; pressure exceeding 50 pounds per
(vi) The first-aid station; square inch except in emergency.
(vii) The emergency lock (if one is re- (f) Decompression. (1) Decompression
quired); and to normal condition shall be in accord-
(viii) The special decompression ance with the Decompression Tables in
chamber (if one is required). Appendix A of this subpart.
(d) Signs and records. (1) The time of
(2) In the event it is necessary for an
decompression shall be posted in each
employee to be in compressed air more
man lock as follows:
than once in a 24-hour period, the ap-
TIME OF DECOMPRESSION FOR THIS LOCK pointed physician shall be responsible
ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes. for the establishment of methods and
ll pounds to ll pounds in ll minutes. procedures of decompression applicable
(Signed by) llllll (Superintendent) to repetitive exposures.
This form shall be posted in the Man Lock at (3) If decanting is necessary, the ap-
all times. pointed physician shall establish proce-
(2) Any code of signals used shall be dures before any employee is permitted
conspicuously posted near workplace to be decompressed by decanting meth-
entrances and such other locations as ods. The period of time that the em-
may be necessary to bring them to the ployees spend at atmospheric pressure
attention of all employees concerned. between the decompression following
(3) For each 8-hour shift, a record of the shift and recompression shall not
employees employed under air pressure exceed 5 minutes.
shall be kept by an employee who shall (g) Man locks and special decompres-
remain outside the lock near the en- sion chambers—(1) Man locks. (i) Except
trance. This record shall show the pe- in emergency, no employees employed
riod each employee spends in the air in compressed air shall be permitted to
chamber and the time taken from de- pass from the working chamber to at-
compression. A copy shall be submitted mospheric pressure until after decom-
to the appointed physician after each pression, in accordance with the proce-
shift. dures in this subpart.
(e) Compression. (1) Every employee (ii) The lock attendant in charge of a
going under air pressure for the first man lock shall be under the direct su-
time shall be instructed on how to pervision of the appointed physician.
avoid excessive discomfort. He shall be stationed at the lock con-
(2) During the compression of em- trols on the free air side during the pe-
ployees, the pressure shall not be in- riod of compression and decompression
creased to more than 3 p.s.i.g. within and shall remain at the lock control
the first minute. The pressure shall be station whenever there are men in the
held at 3 p.s.i.g. and again at 7 p.s.i.g. working chamber or in the man lock.
sufficiently long to determine if any (iii) Except where air pressure in the
employees are experiencing discomfort. working chamber is below 12 p.s.i.g.,
(3) After the first minute the pres- each man lock shall be equipped with
sure shall be raised uniformly and at a automatic controls which, through
rate not to exceed 10 p.s.i. per minute. taped programs, cams, or similar appa-
(4) If any employee complains of dis- ratus, shall automatically regulate de-
comfort, the pressure shall be held to compressions. It shall also be equipped
determine if the symptoms are re- with manual controls to permit the
456
lock attendant to override the auto- (xi) In addition to the pressure gauge
matic mechanism in the event of an in the locks, an accurate pressure
emergency, as provided in paragraph gauge shall be maintained on the outer
(g)(1)(viii) of this section. and inner side of each bulkhead. These
(iv) A manual control, which can be gauges shall be accessible at all times
used in the event of an emergency, and shall be kept in accurate working
shall be placed inside the man lock. order.
(v) A clock, thermometer, and con- (xii) Man locks shall have an observa-
tinuous recording pressure gauge with tion port at least 4 inches in diameter
a 4-hour graph shall be installed out- located in such a position that all oc-
side of each man lock and shall be cupants of the man lock may be ob-
changed prior to each shift’s decom- served from the working chamber and
pression. The chart shall be of suffi- from the free air side of the lock.
cient size to register a legible record of (xiii) Adequate ventilation in the
variations in pressure within the man lock shall be provided.
lock and shall be visible to the lock at- (xiv) Man locks shall be maintained
tendant. A copy of each graph shall be at a minimum temperature of 70 °F.
submitted to the appointed physician (xv) When locks are not in use and
after each shift. In addition, a pressure employees are in the working chamber,
gauge, clock, and thermometer shall lock doors shall be kept open to the
also be installed in each man lock. Ad- working chamber, where practicable.
ditional fittings shall be provided so (xvi) Provision shall be made to
that test gauges may be attached allow for rescue parties to enter the
whenever necessary. tunnel if the working force is disabled.
(vi) Except where air pressure is (xvii) A special decompression cham-
below 12 p.s.i.g. and there is no danger ber of sufficient size to accommodate
of rapid flooding, all caissons having a the entire force of employees being de-
working area greater than 150 square compressed at the end of a shift shall
feet, and each bulkhead in tunnels of 14 be provided whenever the regularly es-
feet or more in diameter, or equivalent tablished working period requires a
area, shall have at least two locks in total time of decompression exceeding
perfect working condition, one of 75 minutes.
which shall be used exclusively as a (2) Special decompression chamber. (i)
man lock, the other, as a materials The headroom in the special decom-
lock. pression chamber shall be not less than
(vii) Where only a combination man- a minimum 7 feet and the cubical con-
and-materials lock is required, this tent shall provide at least 50 cubic feet
single lock shall be of sufficient capac- of airspace for each employee. For each
ity to hold the employees constituting occupant, there shall be provided 4
two successive shifts. square feet of free walking area and 3
(viii) Emergency locks shall be large square feet of seating space, exclusive
enough to hold an entire heading shift of area required for lavatory and toilet
and a limit maintained of 12 p.s.i.g. facilities. The rated capacity shall be
There shall be a chamber available for based on the stated minimum space per
oxygen decompression therapy to 28 employee and shall be posted at the
p.s.i.g. chamber entrance. The posted capacity
(ix) The man lock shall be large shall not be exceeded, except in case of
enough so that those using it are not emergency.
compelled to be in a cramped position, (ii) Each special decompression
and shall not have less than 5 feet clear chamber shall be equipped with the fol-
head room at the center and a min- lowing:
imum of 30 cubic feet of air space per (a) A clock or clocks suitably placed
occupant. so that the attendant and the chamber
(x) Locks on caissons shall be so lo- occupants can readily ascertain the
cated that the bottom door shall be not time;
less than 3 feet above the water level (b) Pressure gauges which will indi-
surrounding the caisson on the outside. cate to the attendants and to the
(The water level, where it is affected by chamber occupants the pressure in the
tides, is construed to mean high tide.) chamber;
457
(c) Valves to enable the attendant to the special chamber to atmospheric

control the supply and discharge of pressure upon the completion of the de-
compressed air into and from the compression procedure.
chamber; (h) Compressor plant and air supply. (1)
(d) Valves and pipes, in connection At all times there shall be a thor-
with the air supply and exhaust, ar- oughly experienced, competent, and re-
ranged so that the chamber pressure liable person on duty at the air control
can be controlled from within and valves as a gauge tender who shall reg-
without; ulate the pressure in the working
(e) Effective means of oral inter- areas. During tunneling operations,
communication between the attendant, one gauge tender may regulate the
occupants of the chamber, and the air pressure in not more than two head-
compressor plant; and ings: Provided, That the gauge and con-
(f) An observation port at the en- trols are all in one location. In caisson
trance to permit observation of the work, there shall be a gauge tender for
chamber occupants. each caisson.
(iii) Seating facilities in special de- (2) The low air compressor plant shall
compression chambers shall be so ar- be of sufficient capacity to not only
ranged as to permit a normal sitting permit the work to be done safely, but
posture without cramping. Seating shall also provide a margin to meet
space, not less than 18 inches by 24 emergencies and repairs.
inches wide, shall be provided per occu-
(3) Low air compressor units shall
pant.
have at least two independent and sep-
(iv) Adequate toilet and washing fa-
arate sources of power supply and each
cilities, in a screened or enclosed re-
shall be capable of operating the entire
cess, shall be provided. Toilet bowls
low air plant and its accessory sys-
shall have a built-in protector on the
tems.
rim so that an air space is created
(4) The capacity, arrangement, and
when the seat lid is closed.
number of compressors shall be suffi-
(v) Fresh and pure drinking water
cient to maintain the necessary pres-
shall be available. This may be accom-
sure without overloading the equip-
plished by either piping water into the
ment and to assure maintenance of
special decompression chamber and
such pressure in the working chamber
providing drinking fountains, or by
during periods of breakdown, repair, or
providing individual canteens, or by
emergency.
some other sanitary means. Commu-
nity drinking vessels are prohibited. (5) Switching from one independent
(vi) No refuse or discarded material source of power supply to the other
of any kind shall be permitted to accu- shall be done periodically to ensure the
mulate, and the chamber shall be kept workability of the apparatus in an
clean. emergency.
(vii) Unless the special decompres- (6) Duplicate low-pressure air
sion chamber is serving as the man feedlines and regulating valves shall be
lock to atmospheric pressure, the spe- provided between the source of air sup-
cial decompression chamber shall be ply and a point beyond the locks with
situated, where practicable, adjacent one of the lines extending to within 100
to the man lock on the atmospheric feet of the working face.
pressure side of the bulkhead. A pas- (7) All high- and low-pressure air sup-
sageway shall be provided, connecting ply lines shall be equipped with check
the special chamber with the man lock, valves.
to permit employees in the process of (8) Low-pressure air shall be regu-
decompression to move from the man lated automatically. In addition,
lock to the special chamber without a manually operated valves shall be pro-
reduction in the ambient pressure from vided for emergency conditions.
that designated for the next stage of (9) The air intakes for all air com-
decompression. The passageway shall pressors shall be located at a place

be so arranged as to not interfere with where fumes, exhaust, gases, and other
the normal operation of the man lock, air contaminants will be at a min-
nor with the release of the occupants of imum.
458
(10) Gauges indicating the pressure in foot-candles, and in all workplaces the
the working chamber shall be installed lighting shall at all times be such as to
in the compressor building, the lock at- enable employees to see clearly.
tendant’s station, and at the employ- (3) All electrical equipment and wir-
er’s field office. ing for light and power circuits shall
(i) Ventilation and air quality. (1) Ex- comply with the requirements of sub-
haust valves and exhaust pipes shall be part K of this part for use in damp,
provided and operated so that the hazardous, high temperature, and com-
working chamber shall be well venti- pressed air environments.
lated, and there shall be no pockets of (4) External parts of lighting fixtures
dead air. Outlets may be required at in- and all other electrical equipment,
termediate points along the main low- when within 8 feet of the floor, shall be
pressure air supply line to the heading constructed of noncombustible, non-
to eliminate such pockets of dead air. absorptive, insulating materials, ex-
Ventilating air shall be not less than 30 cept that metal may be used if it is ef-
cubic feet per minute. fectively grounded.
(2) The air in the workplace shall be (5) Portable lamps shall be equipped
analyzed by the employer not less than with noncombustible, nonabsorptive,
once each shift, and records of such insulating sockets, approved handles,
tests shall be kept on file at the place basket guards, and approved cords.
where the work is in progress. The test
(6) The use of worn or defective port-
results shall be within the threshold
able and pendant conductors is prohib-
limit values specified in subpart D of
ited.
this part, for hazardous gases, and
(k) Sanitation. (1) Sanitary, heated,
within 10 percent of the lower explosive
lighted, and ventilated dressing rooms
limit of flammable gases. If these lim-
and drying rooms shall be provided for
its are not met, immediate action to
all employees engaged in compressed
correct the situation shall be taken by
air work. Such rooms shall contain
the employer.
suitable benches and lockers. Bathing
(3) The temperature of all working
accommodations (showers at the ratio
chambers which are subjected to air
of one to 10 employees per shift),
pressure shall, by means of after-cool-
equipped with running hot and cold
ers or other suitable devices, be main-
water, and suitable and adequate toilet
tained at a temperature not to exceed
accommodations, shall be provided.
85 °F.
One toilet for each 15 employees, or
(4) Forced ventilation shall be pro-
fractional part thereof, shall be pro-
vided during decompression. During
vided.
the entire decompression period, forced
ventilation through chemical or me- (2) When the toilet bowl is shut by a
chanical air purifying devices that will cover, there should be an air space so
ensure a source of fresh air shall be that the bowl or bucket does not im-
provided. plode when pressure is increased.
(5) Whenever heat-producing ma- (3) All parts of caissons and other
chines (moles, shields) are used in com- working compartments shall be kept in
pressed air tunnel operations, a posi- a sanitary condition.
tive means of removing the heat build- (l) Fire prevention and protection. (1)
up at the heading shall be provided. Firefighting equipment shall be avail-
(j) Electricity. (1) All lighting in com- able at all times and shall be main-
pressed-air chambers shall be by elec- tained in working condition.
tricity exclusively, and two inde- (2) While welding or flame-cutting is
pendent electric-lighting systems with being done in compressed air, a
independent sources of supply shall be firewatch with a fire hose or approved
used. The emergency source shall be extinguisher shall stand by until such
arranged to become automatically op- operation is completed.
erative in the event of failure of the (3) Shafts and caissons containing
regularly used source. flammable material of any kind, either

(2) The minimum intensity of light above or below ground, shall be pro-
on any walkway, ladder, stairway, or vided with a waterline and a fire hose
working level shall be not less than 10 connected thereto, so arranged that all
459
points of the shaft or caisson are with- combustible material shall not be used
in reach of the hose stream. in the working chamber in quantities
(4) Fire hose shall be at least 11⁄2 which could cause a fire hazard. The
inches in nominal diameter; the water compressor building shall be con-
pressure shall at all times be adequate structed of non-combustible material.
for efficient operation of the type of (9) Man locks shall be equipped with
nozzle used; and the water supply shall a manual type fire extinguisher system
be such as to ensure an uninterrupted that can be activated inside the man
flow. Fire hose, when not in use, shall lock and also by the outside lock at-
be located or guarded to prevent injury tendant. In addition, a fire hose and
thereto. portable fire extinguisher shall be pro-
(5) The power house, compressor vided inside and outside the man lock.
house, and all buildings housing ven- The portable fire extinguisher shall be
tilating equipment, shall be provided the dry chemical type.
with at least one hose connection in (10) Equipment, fixtures, and fur-
the water line, with a fire hose con- niture in man locks and special decom-
nected thereto. A fire hose shall be pression chambers shall be constructed
maintained within reach of structures of noncombustible materials. Bedding,
of wood over or near shafts. etc., shall be chemically treated so as
(6) Tunnels shall be provided with a to be fire resistant.
2-inch minimum diameter water line
(11) Head frames shall be constructed
extending into the working chamber
of structural steel or open frame-work
and to within 100 feet of the working
fireproofed timber. Head houses and
face. Such line shall have hose outlets
other temporary surface buildings or
with 100 feet of fire hose attached and
structures within 100 feet of the shaft,
maintained as follows: One at the
caisson, or tunnel opening shall be
working face; one immediately inside
built of fire-resistant materials.
of the bulkhead of the working cham-
ber; and one immediately outside such (12) No oil, gasoline, or other combus-
bulkhead. In addition, hose outlets tible material shall be stored within
shall be provided at 200-foot intervals 100 feet of any shaft, caisson, or tunnel
throughout the length of the tunnel, opening, except that oils may be stored
and 100 feet of fire hose shall be at- in suitable tanks in isolated fireproof
tached to the outlet nearest to any lo- buildings, provided such buildings are
cation where flammable material is not less than 50 feet from any shaft,
being kept or stored or where any caisson, or tunnel opening, or any
flame is being used. building directly connected thereto.
(7) In addition to fire hose protection (13) Positive means shall be taken to
required by this subpart, on every floor prevent leaking flammable liquids
of every building not under compressed from flowing into the areas specifically
air, but used in connection with the mentioned in the preceding paragraph.
compressed air work, there shall be (14) All explosives used in connection
provided at least one approved fire ex- with compressed air work shall be se-
tinguisher of the proper type for the lected, stored, transported, and used as
hazard involved. At least two approved specified in subpart U of this part.
fire extinguishers shall be provided in (m) Bulkheads and safety screens. (1)
the working chamber as follows: One at Intermediate bulkheads with locks, or
the working face and one immediately intermediate safety screens or both,
inside the bulkhead (pressure side). Ex- are required where there is the danger
tinguishers in the working chamber of rapid flooding.
shall use water as the primary extin- (2) In tunnels 16 feet or more in di-
guishing agent and shall not use any ameter, hanging walkways shall be
extinguishing agent which could be provided from the face to the man lock
harmful to the employees in the work- as high in the tunnel as practicable,
ing chamber. The fire extinguisher with at least 6 feet of head room. Walk-
shall be protected from damage. ways shall be constructed of non-

(8) Highly combustible materials combustible material. Standard rail-
shall not be used or stored in the work- ings shall be securely installed
ing chamber. Wood, paper, and similar throughout the length of all walkways
460
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A
on open sides in accordance with sub- (j) Normal condition—One during

part M of this part. Where walkways which exposure to compressed air is
are ramped under safety screens, the limited to a single continuous working
walkway surface shall be skidproofed period followed by a single decompres-
by cleats or by equivalent means. sion in any given 24-hour period; the
(3) Bulkheads used to contain com- total time of exposure to compressed
pressed air shall be tested, where prac- air during the single continuous work-
ticable, to prove their ability to resist ing period is not interrupted by expo-
the highest air pressure which may be sure to normal atmospheric pressure,
expected to be used. and a second exposure to compressed
air does not occur until at least 12 con-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
secutive hours of exposure to normal
1979, as amended at 47 FR 14696, 14706, Apr. 6,
1982; 51 FR 25318, July 11, 1986; 61 FR 5510, atmospheric pressure has elapsed since
Feb. 13, 1996] the employee has been under pressure.
(k) Pressure—A force acting on a unit
§ 1926.804 Definitions applicable to area. Usually shown as pounds per
this subpart. square inch. (p.s.i.)
(a) Bulkhead—An airtight structure (l) Absolute pressure (p.s.i.a.)—The
separating the working chamber from sum of the atmospheric pressure and
free air or from another chamber under gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.).
a lesser pressure than the working (m) Atmospheric pressure—The pres-
pressure. sure of air at sea level, usually 14.7
(b) Caisson—A wood, steel, concrete p.s.i.a. (1 atmosphere), or 0 p.s.i.g.
or reinforced concrete, air- and water- (n) Gauge pressure (p.s.i.g.)—Pressure
tight chamber in which it is possible measured by a gauge and indicating
for men to work under air pressure the pressure exceeding atmospheric.
greater than atmospheric pressure to (o) Safety screen—An air- and water-
excavate material below water level. tight diaphragm placed across the
upper part of a compressed air tunnel
(c) Decanting—A method used for de-
between the face and bulkhead, in
compressing under emergency cir-
order to prevent flooding the crown of
cumstances. In this procedure, the em-
the tunnel between the safety screen
ployees are brought to atmospheric
and the bulkhead, thus providing a safe
pressure with a very high gas tension
means of refuge and exit from a flood-
in the tissues and then immediately re-
ing or flooded tunnel.
compressed in a second and separate
chamber or lock. (p) Special decompression chamber—A
chamber to provide greater comfort of
(d) Emergency locks—A lock designed
employees when the total decompres-
to hold and permit the quick passage of
sion time exceeds 75 minutes.
an entire shift of employees.
(q) Working chamber—The space or
(e) High air—Air pressure used to sup- compartment under air pressure in
ply power to pneumatic tools and de- which the work is being done.
vices.
(f) Low air—Air supplied to pressurize APPENDIX A TO SUBPART S OF PART
working chambers and locks. 1926—DECOMPRESSION TABLES
(g) Man lock—A chamber through
which men pass from one air pressure 1. Explanation. The decompression tables
are computed for working chamber pressures
environment into another.
from 0 to 14 pounds, and from 14 to 50 pounds
(h) Materials lock—A chamber per square inch gauge inclusive by 2-pound
through which materials and equip- increments and for exposure times for each
ment pass from one air pressure envi- pressure extending from one-half to over 8
ronment into another. hours inclusive. Decompressions will be con-
(i) Medical lock—A special chamber in ducted by two or more stages with a max-
which employees are treated for de- imum of four stages, the latter for a working
chamber pressure of 40 pounds per square
compression illness. It may also be
inch gauge or over.

used in preemployment physical ex- Stage 1 consists of a reduction in ambient
aminations to determine the adapt- pressure ranging from 10 to a maximum of 16
ability of the prospective employee to pounds per square inch, but in no instance
changes in pressure. will the pressure be reduced below 4 pounds
461
Pt. 1926, Subpt. S, App. A 29 CFR Ch. XVII (7–1–09 Edition)
at the end of stage 1. This reduction in pres- Examples Minutes
sure in stage 1 will always take place at a
rate not greater than 5 pounds per minute. Example No. 1: 4 hours working period at 20
pounds gauge.
Further reduction in pressure will take Decompression Table No. 1: 20 pounds for 4
place during stage 2 and subsequent stages as hours, total decompression time ...................... 43
required at a slower rate, but in no event at Decompression Table No. 2:
a rate greater than 1 pound per minute. Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 20 pounds
to 4 pounds at the uniform rate of 5
Decompression Table No. 1 indicates in the
pounds per minute.
body of the table the total decompression Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ................... 3
time in minutes for various combinations of Stage 2 (final stage): Reduce pressure at a
working chamber pressure and exposure uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound
time. gage over a period of 40 minutes.
Rate—0.10 pound per minute or 10 minutes
Decompression Table No. 2 indicates for per pound.
the same various combinations of working Stage 2 (final) elapsed time ......................... 40
chamber pressure and exposure time the fol-
lowing: Total time .............................................. 43
Example No. 2: 5-hour working period at 24
a. The number of stages required;
pounds gage.
b. The reduction in pressure and the ter- Decompression Table No. 1: 24 pounds for 5
minal pressure for each required stage; hours, total decompression time ...................... 117
c. The time in minutes through which the Decompression Table No. 2:
reduction in pressure is accomplished for Stage 1: Reduce pressure from 24 pounds
to 8 pounds at the uniform rate of 5
each required stage; pounds per minute.
d. The pressure reduction rate in minutes Elapsed time stage 1: 16/5 ................... 3
per pound for each required stage; Stage 2: Reduce pressure at a uniform rate
from 8 pounds to 4 pounds over a period
IMPORTANT NOTE: The Pressure Reduction of 4 minutes. Rate, 1 pound per minute
in Each Stage is Accomplished at a Uniform elapsed time, stage 2 ............................... 4
Rate. Do Not Interpolate Between Values Transfer men to special decompression
Shown on the Tables. Use the Next Higher chamber maintaining the 4-pound pres-
Value of Working Chamber Pressure or Expo- sure during the transfer operation.
Stage 3 (final stage): In the special decom-
sure Time Should the Actual Working Cham- pression chamber, reduce the pressure at
ber Pressure or the Actual Exposure Time, a uniform rate from 4 pounds to 0-pound
Respectively, Fall Between Those for Which gage over a period of 110 minutes. Rate,
Calculated Values Are Shown in the Body of 0.037 pound per minute or 27.5 minutes
the Tables. per pound. Stage 3 (final) elapsed time ... 110
Total time .............................................. 117
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 1—TOTAL DECOMPRESSION TIME

Working period hours
Work pressure p.s.i.g. Over
⁄
12 1 1 ⁄
12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8
9 to 12 ........................................ 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
14 ................................................ 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 16 16 33
16 ................................................ 7 7 7 7 7 7 17 33 48 48 62
18 ................................................ 7 7 7 8 11 17 48 63 63 73 87
20 ................................................ 7 7 8 15 15 43 63 73 83 103 113
22 ................................................ 9 9 16 24 38 68 93 103 113 128 133
24 ................................................ 11 12 23 27 52 92 117 122 127 137 151
26 ................................................ 13 14 29 34 69 104 126 141 142 142 163
28 ................................................ 15 23 31 41 98 127 143 153 153 165 183
30 ................................................ 17 28 38 62 105 143 165 168 178 188 204
32 ................................................ 19 35 43 85 126 163 178 193 203 213 226
34 ................................................ 21 39 58 98 151 178 195 218 223 233 248
36 ................................................ 24 44 63 113 170 198 223 233 243 253 273
38 ................................................ 28 49 73 128 178 203 223 238 253 263 278
40 ................................................ 31 49 84 143 183 213 233 248 258 278 288
42 ................................................ 37 56 102 144 189 215 245 260 263 268 293
44 ................................................ 43 64 118 154 199 234 254 264 269 269 293
46 ................................................ 44 74 139 171 214 244 269 274 289 299 318
48 ................................................ 51 89 144 189 229 269 299 309 319 319 ..........
50 ................................................ 58 94 164 209 249 279 309 329 .......... .......... ..........
462
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2

[Do not interpolate, use next higher value for conditions not computed]
Decompression data
Working
Working chamber pressure Total time
period Pressure reduc. p.s.i.g. Time in Pressure
p.s.i.g. decom-
hours Stage No. stage min- reduc. rate press min-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
14 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
1 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
11⁄2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
2 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
3 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
4 1 14 0 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
5 1 14 4 2 0.20 6
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
6 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 6
7 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 16
8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 16
Over 8 1 14 4 2 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 30 7.50 32
16 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 16 4 3 0.20 7
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 ⁄
12 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
2 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
3 1 16 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
4 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
5 1 14 4 3 0.20 7
2 4 0 4 3.50 17
6 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 30 7.50 33
7 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
Over 8 1 14 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
18 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
11⁄2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
2 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 5 1.25 8
3 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 8 2.00 11
4 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 14 3.50 17
5 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 45 11.25 48
6 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
7 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 70 17.50 73
Over 8 1 18 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 84 21.00 87
463
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—Continued

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
20 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................

2 4 0 4 1.00 7
1 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 4 1.00 7
11⁄2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 5 1.25 8
2 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 12 3.00 15
3 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 12 3.00 15
4 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 40 10.00 43
5 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 60 15.00 63
6 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 70 17.50 73
7 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 80 20.00 83
8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 100 25.00 103
Over 8 1 20 4 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 110 27.50 113
22 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 6 1.00 9
1 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 6 1.00 9
1 ⁄
12 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 13 2.20 16
2 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 21 3.50 24
3 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 35 5.85 38
4 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 65 10.83 68
5 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 90 15.00 93
6 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 4 0 100 16.67 103
7 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 110 18.35 113
8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 125 20.80 128
Over 8 1 22 6 3 0.20 ..................
2 6 0 130 21.70 133
24 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 11
1 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 12
11⁄2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 16 4.00 23
2 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 27
3 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 45 11.25 52
4 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.25 92
5 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 117
6 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
464

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.80 122
7 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 127
8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 137
Over 8 1 24 8 3 0.20 ..................
2 8 4 8 2.00 ..................
3 4 0 140 35.00 151
26 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 13
1 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 14
11⁄2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 29
2 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 34
3 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 69
4 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 95 23.75 104
5 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 8 1.33 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.80 126
6 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 8 1.33 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 141
7 1 26 10 3 2.20 ..................
2 10 4 9 1.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 142
8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 9 1.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 142
Over 8 1 26 10 3 0.20 ..................
2 10 4 30 5.00 ..................
3 4 0 30 32.50 163
28 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 15
1 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 12 3.00 23
11⁄2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 31
2 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 41
3 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 10 1.25 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.20 98
4 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 14 1.75 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 127

5 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 143
6 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
465

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 153
7 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 120 32.50 153
8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 32 4.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 165
Over 8 1 28 12 3 0.20 ..................
2 12 4 50 6.25 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 183
30 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 17
1 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 15 3.75 28
11⁄2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 38
2 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 14 1.40 ..................
3 4 0 45 11.25 62
3 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 17 1.70 ..................
3 4 0 85 21.20 105
4 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 30 3.00 ..................
3 4 0 110 27.50 143
5 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 165
6 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 168
7 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 45 4.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 178
8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 55 5.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 188
Over 8 1 30 14 3 0.20 ..................
2 14 4 71 7.10 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 204
32 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 19
1 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 20 5.00 35
11⁄2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 15 1.25 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 43
2 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 22 1.83 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 85
3 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 28 2.33 ..................
3 4 0 95 23.75 126
4 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 40 3.33 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 163

5 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 45 3.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 178
6 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
466

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 16 4 60 5.00 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 193
7 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 70 5.83 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 203
8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 80 6.67 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 213
Over 8 1 32 16 3 0.20 ..................
2 16 4 93 7.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 226
34 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 4 1.00 21
1 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 22 5.50 39
11⁄2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 25 1.80 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 58
2 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 35 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 60 15.00 98
3 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 43 3.10 ..................
3 4 0 105 26.25 151
4 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 55 3.93 ..................
3 4 0 120 30.00 178
5 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 62 4.43 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 195
6 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 85 6.07 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 218
7 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 90 6.43 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 223
8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 100 7.15 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 233
Over 8 1 34 18 3 0.20 ..................
2 18 4 115 8.23 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 248
36 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 16 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 5 1.25 24
1 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 16 1.00 ..................
3 4 0 25 6.25 44
11⁄2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 30 1.88 ..................
3 4 0 30 7.50 63
2 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 40 2.50 ..................
3 4 0 70 17.50 113
3 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 52 3.25 ..................
3 4 0 115 28.75 170
4 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 65 4.06 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 198

5 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 90 5.63 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 223
6 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
467

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
2 20 4 100 6.25 ..................

3 4 0 130 32.50 233
7 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 110 6.88 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 243
8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 120 7.50 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 253
Over 8 1 36 20 3 0.20 ..................
2 20 4 140 8.75 ..................
3 4 0 130 32.50 273
38 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 16 1.00 ..................
3 6 0 9 1.50 28
1 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 16 1.00 ..................
3 6 0 30 5.00 49
11⁄2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 20 1.25 ..................
3 6 0 50 8.34 73
2 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 30 1.88 ..................
3 6 0 95 15.83 128
3 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 35 2.19 ..................
3 6 0 140 23.35 178
4 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 50 3.12 ..................
3 6 0 150 25.00 203
5 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 55 3.44 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 223
6 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 70 4.38 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 238
7 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 85 5.32 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 253
8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 95 5.93 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 263
Over 8 1 38 22 3 0.20 ..................
2 22 6 110 6.88 ..................
3 6 0 165 27.50 278
40 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 4 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 8 2.00 31
1 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 5 1.25 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 49
11⁄2 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 16 1.00 ..................
3 8 4 20 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 45 11.25 84
2 2 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
1 24 8 25 1.56 ..................
3 8 4 20 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 143
3 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 30 1.88 ..................
3 8 4 30 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 183
4 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 45 2.81 ..................
468

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
3 8 4 35 8.75 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 213
5 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 47 2.94 ..................
3 8 4 53 13.25 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 233
6 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 55 3.44 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 248
7 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 65 4.06 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 258
8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 75 4.70 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 268
Over 8 1 40 24 3 0.20 ..................
2 24 8 95 5.93 ..................
3 8 4 60 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 288
42 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 6 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 12 3.00 37
1 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 12 2.00 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 56
11⁄2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 23 3.83 ..................
4 4 0 60 15.00 102
2 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 30 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 144
3 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 50 8.34 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 189
4 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 17 1.06 ..................
3 10 4 65 10.83 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 215
5 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 27 1.69 ..................
3 10 4 85 14.18 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 245
6 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 27 1.69 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 260
7 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 30 1.88 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 263
8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 35 2.19 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 268

Over 8 1 42 26 3 0.20 ..................
2 26 10 60 3.75 ..................
3 10 4 100 16.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 293
469

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
44 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................

2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 8 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 16 4.00 43
1 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 20 2.50 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 64
11⁄2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 27 3.38 ..................
4 4 0 72 18.00 118
2 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 40 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 95 23.75 154
3 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 60 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 199
4 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 85 10.62 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 234
5 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 105 13.13 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 254
6 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 115 14.38 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 264
7 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 16 1.00 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
Over 8 1 44 28 3 0.20 ..................
2 28 12 40 2.50 ..................
3 12 4 120 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 293
46 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 10 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 15 3.75 44
1 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 25 2.50 ..................
4 4 0 30 7.50 74
11⁄2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 35 3.50 ..................
4 4 0 85 21.20 139
2 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 47 4.70 ..................
4 4 0 105 26.25 171
3 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 65 6.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 214
4 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
470

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
3 14 4 95 9.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 244
5 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 120 12.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
6 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 125 12.50 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 274
7 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 10 4 140 14.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 289
8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 16 1.00 ..................
3 14 4 150 15.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 299
Over 8 1 46 30 3 0.20 ..................
2 30 14 25 1.56 ..................
3 14 4 160 16.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 318
48 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 12 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 20 5.00 51
1 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 35 2.92 ..................
4 4 0 35 8.75 89
11⁄2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 45 3.75 ..................
4 4 0 80 20.00 144
2 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 60 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 110 27.50 189
3 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 90 7.50 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 229
4 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 120 10.00 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 269
5 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 140 11.67 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 209
6 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 160 13.33 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 309
7 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 170 14.17 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 ..................
8 1 48 32 3 0.20 ..................
2 32 16 16 1.00 ..................
3 16 4 170 14.17 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 ..................

50 ................................................ 12 ⁄ 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 14 1.00 ..................
4 4 0 25 6.25 58
471

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
1 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 40 2.86 ..................
4 4 0 35 8.75 94
11⁄2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 55 3.93 ..................
4 4 0 90 22.50 164
2 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 70 5.00 ..................
4 4 0 120 30.00 209
3 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 100 7.15 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 249
4 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 130 8.58 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 279
5 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 160 11.42 ..................
DECOMPRESSION TABLE NO. 2—CONTINUED

Decompression data
Working
p.s.i.g. decom-
utes Min/pound
From To utes
4 4 0 130 32.50 309

6 1 50 34 3 0.20 ..................
2 34 18 16 1.00 ..................
3 18 4 180 12.85 ..................
4 4 0 130 32.50 329
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6. 1979; as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993]
Subpart T—Demolition unplanned collapse of any portion of

the structure. Any adjacent structure
where employees may be exposed shall
and Safety Standards Act (Construction also be similarly checked. The em-
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu- ployer shall have in writing evidence
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29 that such a survey has been performed.
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s (b) When employees are required to
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
work within a structure to be demol-
25059), or 9–83 (48 FR 35736), as applicable.
ished which has been damaged by fire,
§ 1926.850 Preparatory operations. flood, explosion, or other cause, the
walls or floor shall be shored or braced.
(a) Prior to permitting employees to
start demolition operations, an engi- (c) All electric, gas, water, steam,
neering survey shall be made, by a sewer, and other service lines shall be
competent person, of the structure to shut off, capped, or otherwise con-
determine the condition of the fram- trolled, outside the building line before
ing, floors, and walls, and possibility of demolition work is started. In each
472
case, any utility company which is in- be completely protected by sidewalk

volved shall be notified in advance. sheds or canopies, or both, providing
(d) If it is necessary to maintain any protection from the face of the build-
power, water or other utilities during ing for a minimum of 8 feet. All such
demolition, such lines shall be tempo- canopies shall be at least 2 feet wider
rarily relocated, as necessary, and pro- than the building entrances or open-
tected. ings (1 foot wider on each side thereof),
(e) It shall also be determined if any and shall be capable of sustaining a
type of hazardous chemicals, gases, ex- load of 150 pounds per square foot.
plosives, flammable materials, or simi-
larly dangerous substances have been § 1926.851 Stairs, passageways, and
used in any pipes, tanks, or other ladders.
equipment on the property. When the
presence of any such substances is ap- (a) Only those stairways, passage-
parent or suspected, testing and purg- ways, and ladders, designated as means
ing shall be performed and the hazard of access to the structure of a building,
eliminated before demolition is start- shall be used. Other access ways shall
ed. be entirely closed at all times.
(f) Where a hazard exists from frag- (b) All stairs, passageways, ladders
mentation of glass, such hazards shall and incidental equipment thereto,
be removed. which are covered by this section, shall
(g) Where a hazard exists to employ- be periodically inspected and main-
ees falling through wall openings, the tained in a clean safe condition.
opening shall be protected to a height (c) In a multistory building, when a
of approximately 42 inches. stairwell is being used, it shall be prop-
(h) When debris is dropped through erly illuminated by either natural or
holes in the floor without the use of artificial means, and completely and
chutes, the area onto which the mate- substantially covered over at a point
rial is dropped shall be completely en- not less than two floors below the floor
closed with barricades not less than 42 on which work is being performed, and
inches high and not less than 6 feet access to the floor where the work is in
back from the projected edge of the
progress shall be through a properly
opening above. Signs, warning of the
lighted, protected, and separate pas-
hazard of falling materials, shall be
sageway.
posted at each level. Removal shall not
be permitted in this lower area until § 1926.852 Chutes.
debris handling ceases above.
(i) All floor openings, not used as ma- (a) No material shall be dropped to
terial drops, shall be covered over with any point lying outside the exterior
material substantial enough to support walls of the structure unless the area is
the weight of any load which may be effectively protected.
imposed. Such material shall be prop- (b) All materials chutes, or sections
erly secured to prevent its accidental thereof, at an angle of more than 45°
movement. from the horizontal, shall be entirely
(j) Except for the cutting of holes in enclosed, except for openings equipped
floors for chutes, holes through which with closures at or about floor level for
to drop materials, preparation of stor- the insertion of materials. The open-
age space, and similar necessary pre- ings shall not exceed 48 inches in
paratory work, the demolition of exte- height measured along the wall of the
rior walls and floor construction shall chute. At all stories below the top
begin at the top of the structure and
floor, such openings shall be kept
proceed downward. Each story of exte-
closed when not in use.
rior wall and floor construction shall
be removed and dropped into the stor- (c) A substantial gate shall be in-
age space before commencing the re- stalled in each chute at or near the dis-
moval of exterior walls and floors in charge end. A competent employee

the story next below. shall be assigned to control the oper-
(k) Employee entrances to multi- ation of the gate, and the backing and
story structures being demolished shall loading of trucks.
473
(d) When operations are not in (d) Structural or load-supporting

progress, the area surrounding the dis- members on any floor shall not be cut
charge end of a chute shall be securely or removed until all stories above such
closed off. a floor have been demolished and re-
(e) Any chute opening, into which moved. This provision shall not pro-
workmen dump debris, shall be prohibit the cutting of floor beams for the
tected by a substantial guardrail ap- disposal of materials or for the instal-
proximately 42 inches above the floor lation of equipment, provided that the
or other surface on which the men requirements of §§ 1926.853 and 1926.855
stand to dump the material. Any space are met.
between the chute and the edge of (e) Floor openings within 10 feet of
openings in the floors through which it any wall being demolished shall be
passes shall be solidly covered over. planked solid, except when employees
(f) Where the material is dumped are kept out of the area below.
from mechanical equipment or wheel- (f) In buildings of ‘‘skeleton-steel’’
barrows, a securely attached toeboard construction, the steel framing may be
or bumper, not less than 4 inches thick left in place during the demolition of
and 6 inches high, shall be provided at masonry. Where this is done, all steel
each chute opening. beams, girders, and similar structural
(g) Chutes shall be designed and con- supports shall be cleared of all loose
structed of such strength as to elimi- material as the masonry demolition
nate failure due to impact of materials progresses downward.
or debris loaded therein. (g) Walkways or ladders shall be pro-
vided to enable employees to safely
§ 1926.853 Removal of materials
through floor openings. reach or leave any scaffold or wall.
(h) Walls, which serve as retaining
Any openings cut in a floor for the walls to support earth or adjoining
disposal of materials shall be no larger structures, shall not be demolished
in size than 25 percent of the aggregate until such earth has been properly
of the total floor area, unless the lat- braced or adjoining structures have
eral supports of the removed flooring been properly underpinned.
remain in place. Floors weakened or (i) Walls, which are to serve as re-
otherwise made unsafe by demolition
taining walls against which debris will
operations shall be shored to carry
be piled, shall not be so used unless ca-
safely the intended imposed load from
pable of safely supporting the imposed
demolition operations.
load.
§ 1926.854 Removal of walls, masonry
sections, and chimneys. § 1926.855 Manual removal of floors.
(a) Masonry walls, or other sections (a) Openings cut in a floor shall ex-
of masonry, shall not be permitted to tend the full span of the arch between
fall upon the floors of the building in supports.
such masses as to exceed the safe car- (b) Before demolishing any floor
rying capacities of the floors. arch, debris and other material shall be
(b) No wall section, which is more removed from such arch and other ad-
than one story in height, shall be per- jacent floor area. Planks not less than
mitted to stand alone without lateral 2 inches by 10 inches in cross section,
bracing, unless such wall was origi- full size undressed, shall be provided
nally designed and constructed to for, and shall be used by employees to
stand without such lateral support, and stand on while breaking down floor
is in a condition safe enough to be self- arches between beams. Such planks
supporting. All walls shall be left in a shall be so located as to provide a safe
stable condition at the end of each support for the workmen should the
shift. arch between the beams collapse. The
(c) Employees shall not be permitted open space between planks shall not
to work on the top of a wall when exceed 16 inches.
weather conditions constitute a haz- (c) Safe walkways, not less than 18
ard. inches wide, formed of planks not less
474
than 2 inches thick if wood, or of equiv- does not endanger the stability of the
alent strength if metal, shall be pro- structure.
vided and used by workmen when nec- (e) Storage space into which material
essary to enable them to reach any is dumped shall be blocked off, except
point without walking upon exposed for openings necessary for the removal
beams. of material. Such openings shall be
(d) Stringers of ample strength shall kept closed at all times when material
be installed to support the flooring is not being removed.
planks, and the ends of such stringers
shall be supported by floor beams or § 1926.858 Removal of steel construc-
girders, and not by floor arches alone. tion.
(e) Planks shall be laid together over (a) When floor arches have been re-
solid bearings with the ends overlap- moved, planking in accordance with
ping at least 1 foot. § 1926.855(b) shall be provided for the
(f) When floor arches are being re- workers engaged in razing the steel
moved, employees shall not be allowed framing.
in the area directly underneath, and (b) Cranes, derricks, and other hoist-
such an area shall be barricaded to pre- ing equipment used shall meet the re-
vent access to it. quirements specified in subpart N of
(g) Demolition of floor arches shall this part.
not be started until they, and the sur- (c) Steel construction shall be dis-
rounding floor area for a distance of 20 mantled column length by column
feet, have been cleared of debris and length, and tier by tier (columns may
any other unnecessary materials. be in two-story lengths).
§ 1926.856 Removal of walls, floors, (d) Any structural member being dis-
and material with equipment. membered shall not be overstressed.
(a) Mechanical equipment shall not § 1926.859 Mechanical demolition.
be used on floors or working surfaces
unless such floors or surfaces are of (a) No workers shall be permitted in
sufficient strength to support the im- any area, which can be adversely af-
posed load. fected by demolition operations, when
(b) Floor openings shall have curbs or balling or clamming is being per-
stop-logs to prevent equipment from formed. Only those workers necessary
running over the edge. for the performance of the operations
(c) Mechanical equipment used shall shall be permitted in this area at any
meet the requirements specified in sub- other time.
parts N and O of this part. (b) The weight of the demolition ball
shall not exceed 50 percent of the
§ 1926.857 Storage. crane’s rated load, based on the length
(a) The storage of waste material and of the boom and the maximum angle of
debris on any floor shall not exceed the operation at which the demolition ball
allowable floor loads. will be used, or it shall not exceed 25
(b) In buildings having wooden floor percent of the nominal breaking
construction, the flooring boards may strength of the line by which it is sus-
be removed from not more than one pended, whichever results in a lesser
floor above grade to provide storage value.
space for debris, provided falling mate- (c) The crane boom and loadline shall
rial is not permitted to endanger the be as short as possible.
stability of the structure. (d) The ball shall be attached to the
(c) When wood floor beams serve to loadline with a swivel-type connection
brace interior walls or free-standing to prevent twisting of the loadline, and
exterior walls, such beams shall be left shall be attached by positive means in
in place until other equivalent support such manner that the weight cannot
can be installed to replace them. become accidentally disconnected.
(d) Floor arches, to an elevation of (e) When pulling over walls or por-
not more than 25 feet above grade, may tions thereof, all steel members af-
be removed to provide storage area for fected shall have been previously cut
debris: Provided, That such removal free.
475
(f) All roof cornices or other such or- with explosives. All employees shall be
namental stonework shall be removed removed to a safe area and the fire area
prior to pulling walls over. guarded against intruders.
(g) During demoliton, continuing in- (g) Original containers, or Class II
spections by a competent person shall magazines, shall be used for taking det-
be made as the work progresses to de- onators and other explosives from stor-
tect hazards resulting from weakened age magazines to the blasting area.
or deteriorated floors, or walls, or loos- (h) When blasting is done in con-
ened material. No employee shall be gested areas or in proximity to a struc-
permitted to work where such hazards
ture, railway, or highway, or any other
exist until they are corrected by shor-
installation that may be damaged, the
ing, bracing, or other effective means.
blaster shall take special precautions
§ 1926.860 Selective demolition by ex- in the loading, delaying, initiation, and
plosives. confinement of each blast with mats or
Selective demolition by explosives other methods so as to control the
shall be conducted in accordance with throw of fragments, and thus prevent
the applicable sections of subpart U of bodily injury to employees.
this part. (i) Employees authorized to prepare
explosive charges or conduct blasting
Subpart U—Blasting and the Use operations shall use every reasonable
of Explosives precaution including, but not limited
to, visual and audible warning signals,
flags, or barricades, to ensure employee
and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 333); safety.
secs. 4, 6, 8, Occupational Safety and Health (j) Insofar as possible, blasting oper-
Act of 1970 (29 U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary ations above ground shall be conducted
of Labor’s Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 between sunup and sundown.
(41 FR 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 6–96 (62 FR
(k) Due precautions shall be taken to
111), as applicable; and 29 CFR part 1911.
prevent accidental discharge of electric
§ 1926.900 General provisions. blasting caps from current induced by
(a) The employer shall permit only radar, radio transmitters, lightning,
authorized and qualified persons to adjacent powerlines, dust storms, or
handle and use explosives. other sources of extraneous electricity.
(b) Smoking, firearms, matches, open These precautions shall include:
flame lamps, and other fires, flame or (1) Detonators shall be short-
heat producing devices and sparks shall circuited in holes which have been
be prohibited in or near explosive mag- primed and shunted until wired into
azines or while explosives are being the blasting circuit.
handled, transported or used. (2) The suspension of all blasting op-
(c) No person shall be allowed to han- erations and removal of persons from
dle or use explosives while under the the blasting area during the approach
influence of intoxicating liquors, nar- and progress of an electric storm;
cotics, or other dangerous drugs. (3) (i) The prominent display of ade-
(d) All explosives shall be accounted quate signs, warning against the use of
for at all times. Explosives not being mobile radio transmitters, on all roads
used shall be kept in a locked maga- within 1,000 feet of blasting operations.
zine, unavailable to persons not au- Whenever adherence to the 1,000-foot
thorized to handle them. The employer
distance would create an operational
shall maintain an inventory and use
handicap, a competent person shall be
record of all explosives. Appropriate
consulted to evaluate the particular
authorities shall be notified of any
loss, theft, or unauthorized entry into situation, and alternative provisions
a magazine. may be made which are adequately de-
(e) No explosives or blasting agents signed to prevent any premature firing

shall be abandoned. of electric blasting caps. A description
(f) No fire shall be fought where the of any such alternatives shall be re-
fire is in imminent danger of contact duced to writing and shall be certified
476
as meeting the purposes of this subdivi- (q) All loading and firing shall be di-
sion by the competent person con- rected and supervised by competent
sulted. The description shall be main- persons thoroughly experienced in this
tained at the construction site during field.
the duration of the work, and shall be (r) All blasts shall be fired elec-
available for inspection by representa- trically with an electric blasting ma-
tives of the Secretary of Labor. chine or properly designed electric
(ii) Specimens of signs which would power source, except as provided in
meet the requirements of paragraph § 1926.906 (a) and (r).
(k)(3) of this section are the following: (s) Buildings used for the mixing of
blasting agents shall conform to the re-
quirements of this section.
(1) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
tible construction or sheet metal on
wood studs.
(2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
materials.
(3) All fuel oil storage facilities shall
be separated from the mixing plant and
located in such a manner that in case
(4) Ensuring that mobile radio trans- of tank rupture, the oil will drain away
mitters which are less than 100 feet from the mixing plant building.
away from electric blasting caps, in (4) The building shall be well venti-
other than original containers, shall be lated.
deenergized and effectively locked; (5) Heating units which do not depend
(5) Compliance with the rec- on combustion processes, when prop-
ommendations of The Institute of the erly designed and located, may be used
Makers of Explosives with regard to in the building. All direct sources of
blasting in the vicinity of radio trans- heat shall be provided exclusively from
mitters as stipulated in Radio Fre- units located outside the mixing build-
quency Energy—A Potential Hazard in ing.
the Use of Electric Blasting Caps, IME (6) All internal-combustion engines
Publication No. 20, March 1971. used for electric power generation shall
(l) Empty boxes and paper and fiber be located outside the mixing plant
packing materials, which have pre- building, or shall be properly venti-
viously contained high explosives, lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
shall not be used again for any purpose, haust systems on all such engines shall
but shall be destroyed by burning at an be located so any spark emission can-
approved location. not be a hazard to any materials in or
(m) Explosives, blasting agents, and adjacent to the plant.
blasting supplies that are obviously de- (t) Buildings used for the mixing of
teriorated or damaged shall not be water gels shall conform to the re-
used. quirements of this subdivision.
(n) Delivery and issue of explosives (1) Buildings shall be of noncombus-
shall only be made by and to author- tible construction or sheet metal on
ized persons and into authorized maga- wood studs.
zines or approved temporary storage or (2) Floors in a mixing plant shall be
handling areas. of concrete or of other nonabsorbent
(o) Blasting operations in the prox- materials.
imity of overhead power lines, commu- (3) Where fuel oil is used all fuel oil
nication lines, utility services, or other storage facilities shall be separated
services and structures shall not be from the mixing plant and located in
carried on until the operators and/or such a manner that in case of tank rup-
owners have been notified and meas- ture, the oil will drain away from the
ures for safe control have been taken. mixing plant building.
(p) The use of black powder shall be (4) The building shall be well venti-
prohibited. lated.
477
EC30OC91.049</GPH>
(5) Heating units that do not depend (c) No person shall smoke, or carry
on combustion processes, when prop- matches or any other flame-producing
erly designed and located, may be used device, nor shall firearms or loaded
in the building. All direct sources of cartridges be carried while in or near a
heat shall be provided exclusively from motor vehicle or conveyance trans-
units located outside of the mixing porting explosives.
building. (d) Explosives, blasting agents, and
(6) All internal-combustion engines blasting supplies shall not be trans-
used for electric power generation shall ported with other materials or cargoes.
be located outside the mixing plant
Blasting caps (including electric) shall
building, or shall be properly venti-
not be transported in the same vehicle
lated and isolated by a firewall. The ex-
haust systems on all such engines shall with other explosives.
be located so any spark emission can- (e) Vehicles used for transporting ex-
not be a hazard to any materials in or plosives shall be strong enough to
adjacent to the plant. carry the load without difficulty, and
shall be in good mechanical condition.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(f) When explosives are transported
by a vehicle with an open body, a Class
§ 1926.901 Blaster qualifications. II magazine or original manufacturer’s
(a) A blaster shall be able to under- container shall be securely mounted on
stand and give written and oral orders. the bed to contain the cargo.
(b) A blaster shall be in good physical (g) All vehicles used for the transpor-
condition and not be addicted to nar- tation of explosives shall have tight
cotics, intoxicants, or similar types of floors and any exposed spark-producing
drugs. metal on the inside of the body shall be
(c) A blaster shall be qualified, by covered with wood, or other non-
reason of training, knowledge, or expe- sparking material, to prevent contact
rience, in the field of transporting, with containers of explosives.
storing, handling, and use of explo- (h) Every motor vehicle or convey-
sives, and have a working knowledge of ance used for transporting explosives
State and local laws and regulations shall be marked or placarded on both
which pertain to explosives. sides, the front, and the rear with the
(d) Blasters shall be required to fur- word ‘‘Explosives’’ in red letters, not
nish satisfactory evidence of com- less than 4 inches in height, on white
petency in handling explosives and per- background. In addition to such mark-
forming in a safe manner the type of ing or placarding, the motor vehicle or
blasting that will be required. conveyance may display, in such a
(e) The blaster shall be knowledge- manner that it will be readily visible
able and competent in the use of each from all directions, a red flag 18 inches
type of blasting method used. by 30 inches, with the word ‘‘Explo-
§ 1926.902 Surface transportation of sives’’ painted, stamped, or sewed
explosives. thereon, in white letters, at least 6
inches in height.
(a) Transportation of explosives shall
meet the provisions of Department of (i) Each vehicle used for transpor-
Transportation regulations contained tation of explosives shall be equipped
in 46 CFR parts 146–149, Water Carriers; with a fully charged fire extinguisher,
49 CFR parts 171–179, Highways and in good condition. An Underwriters
Railways; 49 CFR part 195, Pipelines; Laboratory-approved extinguisher of
and 49 CFR parts 390–397, Motor Car- not less than 10-ABC rating will meet
riers. the minimum requirement. The driver
(b) Motor vehicles or conveyances shall be trained in the use of the extin-
transporting explosives shall only be guisher on his vehicle.
driven by, and be in the charge of, a li- (j) Motor vehicles or conveyances
censed driver who is physically fit. He carrying explosives, blasting agents, or

shall be familiar with the local, State, blasting supplies, shall not be taken in-
and Federal regulation governing the side a garage or shop for repairs or
transportation of explosives. servicing.
478
(k) No motor vehicle transporting ex- (k) No explosives or blasting agents

plosives shall be left unattended. shall be transported on a man haul
trip.
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
(l) The car or conveyance containing
explosives or blasting agents shall be
§ 1926.903 Underground transpor- pulled, not pushed, whenever possible.
tation of explosives. (m) The powder car or conveyance es-
pecially built for the purpose of trans-
(a) All explosives or blasting agents
porting explosives or blasting agents
in transit underground shall be taken
shall bear a reflectorized sign on each
to the place of use or storage without
side with the word ‘‘Explosives’’ in let-
delay.
ters, not less than 4 inches in height;
(b) The quantity of explosives or upon a background of sharply con-
blasting agents taken to an under- trasting color.
ground loading area shall not exceed (n) Compartments for transporting
the amount estimated to be necessary detonators and explosives in the same
for the blast. car or conveyance shall be physically
(c) Explosives in transit shall not be separated by a distance of 24 inches or
left unattended. by a solid partition at least 6 inches
(d) The hoist operator shall be noti- thick.
fied before explosives or blasting (o) Detonators and other explosives
agents are transported in a shaft con- shall not be transported at the same
veyance. time in any shaft conveyance.
(e) Trucks used for the transpor- (p) Explosives, blasting agents, or
tation of explosives underground shall blasting supplies shall not be trans-
have the electrical system checked ported with other materials.
weekly to detect any failures which (q) Explosives or blasting agents, not
may constitute an electrical hazard. A in original containers, shall be placed
certification record which includes the in a suitable container when trans-
date of the inspection; the signature of ported manually.
the person who performed the inspec- (r) Detonators, primers, and other ex-
tion; and a serial number, or other plosives shall be carried in separate
identifier, of the truck inspected shall containers when transported manually.
be prepared and the most recent cer-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
tification record shall be maintained
on file. 1987]
(f) The installation of auxiliary
lights on truck beds, which are pow- § 1926.904 Storage of explosives and
ered by the truck’s electrical system, blasting agents.
shall be prohibited. (a) Explosives and related materials
(g) Explosives and blasting agents shall be stored in approved facilities
shall be hoisted, lowered, or conveyed required under the applicable provi-
in a powder car. No other materials, sions of the Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco
supplies, or equipment shall be trans- and Firearms regulations contained in
ported in the same conveyance at the 27 CFR part 55, Commerce in Explo-
same time. sives.
(h) No one, except the operator, his (b) Blasting caps, electric blasting
helper, and the powderman, shall be caps, detonating primers, and primed
permitted to ride on a conveyance cartridges shall not be stored in the
transporting explosives and blasting same magazine with other explosives
agents. or blasting agents.
(i) No person shall ride in any shaft (c) Smoking and open flames shall
conveyance transporting explosives not be permitted within 50 feet of ex-
and blasting agents. plosives and detonator storage maga-
(j) No explosives or blasting agents zine.
shall be transported on any loco- (d) No explosives or blasting agents

motive. At least two car lengths shall shall be permanently stored in any un-
separate the locomotive from the pow- derground operation until the oper-
der car. ation has been developed to the point
479
where at least two modes of exit have or blasting agents being loaded into
been provided. drill holes. Cables in the proximity of
(e) Permanent underground storage the blast area shall be deenergized and
magazines shall be at least 300 feet locked out by the blaster.
from any shaft, adit, or active under- (k) Holes shall be checked prior to
ground working area. loading to determine depth and condi-
(f) Permanent underground maga- tions. Where a hole has been loaded
zines containing detonators shall not with explosives but the explosives have
be located closer than 50 feet to any failed to detonate, there shall be no
magazine containing other explosives drilling within 50 feet of the hole.
or blasting agents. (l) When loading a long line of holes
with more than one loading crew, the
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35311, June 30, 1993] crews shall be separated by practical
distance consistent with efficient oper-
§ 1926.905 Loading of explosives or ation and supervision of crews.
blasting agents. (m) No explosive shall be loaded or
(a) Procedures that permit safe and used underground in the presence of
efficient loading shall be established combustible gases or combustible
before loading is started. dusts.
(b) All drill holes shall be sufficiently (n) No explosives other than those in
large to admit freely the insertion of Fume Class 1, as set forth by the Insti-
the cartridges of explosives. tute of Makers of Explosives, shall be
(c) Tamping shall be done only with used; however, explosives complying
wood rods or plastic tamping poles with the requirements of Fume Class 2
without exposed metal parts, but non- and Fume Class 3 may be used if ade-
sparking metal connectors may be used quate ventilation has been provided.
for jointed poles. Violent tamping shall (o) All blast holes in open work shall
be avoided. The primer shall never be be stemmed to the collar or to a point
tamped. which will confine the charge.
(d) No holes shall be loaded except (p) Warning signs, indicating a blast
those to be fired in the next round of area, shall be maintained at all ap-
blasting. After loading, all remaining proaches to the blast area. The warn-
explosives and detonators shall be im- ing sign lettering shall not be less than
mediately returned to an authorized 4 inches in height on a contrasting
magazine. background.
(e) Drilling shall not be started until (q) A bore hole shall never be sprung
all remaining butts of old holes are ex- when it is adjacent to or near a hole
amined for unexploded charges, and if that is loaded. Flashlight batteries
any are found, they shall be refired be- shall not be used for springing holes.
fore work proceeds. (r) Drill holes which have been
(f) No person shall be allowed to sprung or chambered, and which are
deepen drill holes which have con- not water-filled, shall be allowed to
tained explosives or blasting agents. cool before explosives are loaded.
(g) No explosives or blasting agents (s) No loaded holes shall be left unat-
shall be left unattended at the blast tended or unprotected.
site. (t) The blaster shall keep an accu-
(h) Machines and all tools not used rate, up-to-date record of explosives,
for loading explosives into bore holes blasting agents, and blasting supplies
shall be removed from the immediate used in a blast and shall keep an accu-
location of holes before explosives are rate running inventory of all explosives
delivered. Equipment shall not be oper- and blasting agents stored on the oper-
ated within 50 feet of loaded holes. ation.
(i) No activity of any nature other (u) When loading blasting agents
than that which is required for loading pneumatically over electric blasting
holes with explosives shall be per- caps, semiconductive delivery hose
mitted in a blast area. shall be used and the equipment shall

(j) Powerlines and portable electric be bonded and grounded.
cables for equipment being used shall [44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
be kept a safe distance from explosives 1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184, June 30, 1993]
480
§ 1926.906 Initiation of explosive This gap shall be bridged by a flexible

charges—electric blasting. jumper cord just before firing the blast.
(a) Electric blasting caps shall not be (l) When firing from a power circuit,
used where sources of extraneous elec- the firing switch shall be locked in the
tricity make the use of electric blast- open or ‘‘Off’’ position at all times, ex-
ing caps dangerous. Blasting cap leg cept when firing. It shall be so designed
wires shall be kept short-circuited that the firing lines to the cap circuit
(shunted) until they are connected into are automatically short-circuited when
the circuit for firing. the switch is in the ‘‘Off’’ position.
(b) Before adopting any system of Keys to this switch shall be entrusted
electrical firing, the blaster shall con- only to the blaster.
duct a thorough survey for extraneous (m) Blasting machines shall be in
currents, and all dangerous currents good condition and the efficiency of
shall be eliminated before any holes the machine shall be tested periodi-
are loaded. cally to make certain that it can de-
(c) In any single blast using electric liver power at its rated capacity.
blasting caps, all caps shall be of the (n) When firing with blasting ma-
same style or function, and of the same chines, the connections shall be made
manufacture. as recommended by the manufacturer
(d) Electric blasting shall be carried of the electric blasting caps used.
out by using blasting circuits or power (o) The number of electric blasting
circuits in accordance with the electric caps connected to a blasting machine
blasting cap manufacturer’s rec- shall not be in excess of its rated ca-
ommendations, or an approved con- pacity. Furthermore, in primary blast-
tractor or his designated representa- ing, a series circuit shall contain no
tive. more caps than the limits rec-
(e) When firing a circuit of electric ommended by the manufacturer of the
blasting caps, care must be exercised to electric blasting caps in use.
ensure that an adequate quantity of de- (p) The blaster shall be in charge of
livered current is available, in accord- the blasting machines, and no other
ance with the manufacturer’s rec- person shall connect the leading wires
ommendations. to the machine.
(f) Connecting wires and lead wires (q) Blasters, when testing circuits to
shall be insulated single solid wires of charged holes, shall use only blasting
sufficient current-carrying capacity. galvanometers or other instruments
(g) Bus wires shall be solid single that are specifically designed for this
wires of sufficient current-carrying ca- purpose.
pacity. (r) Whenever the possibility exists
(h) When firing electrically, the insu- that a leading line or blasting wire
lation on all firing lines shall be ade- might be thrown over a live powerline
quate and in good condition. by the force of an explosion, care shall
(i) A power circuit used for firing be taken to see that the total length of
electric blasting caps shall not be wires are kept too short to hit the
grounded. lines, or that the wires are securely an-
(j) In underground operations when chored to the ground. If neither of
firing from a power circuit, a safety these requirements can be satisfied, a
switch shall be placed in the perma- nonelectric system shall be used.
nent firing line at intervals. This (s) In electrical firing, only the man
switch shall be made so it can be making leading wire connections shall
locked only in the ‘‘Off’’ position and fire the shot. All connections shall be
shall be provided with a short- made from the bore hole back to the
circuiting arrangement of the firing source of firing current, and the lead-
lines to the cap circuit. ing wires shall remain shorted and not
(k) In underground operations there be connected to the blasting machine
shall be a ‘‘lightning’’ gap of at least 5 or other source of current until the

feet in the firing system ahead of the charge is to be fired.
main firing switch; that is, between (t) After firing an electric blast from
this switch and the source of power. a blasting machine, the leading wires
481
shall be immediately disconnected one charge from dislodging other shots

from the machine and short-circuited. in the blast.
(m) When blasting with safety fuses,
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
consideration shall be given to the
length and burning rate of the fuse.
§ 1926.907 Use of safety fuse. Sufficient time, with a margin of safe-
ty, shall always be provided for the
(a) Safety fuse shall only be used blaster to reach a place of safety.
where sources of extraneous electricity
make the use of electric blasting caps § 1926.908 Use of detonating cord.
dangerous. The use of a fuse that has
(a) Care shall be taken to select a
been hammered or injured in any way
detonating cord consistent with the
shall be forbidden.
type and physical condition of the bore
(b) The hanging of a fuse on nails or
hole and stemming and the type of ex-
other projections which will cause a
plosives used.
sharp bend to be formed in the fuse is
(b) Detonating cord shall be handled
prohibited.
and used with the same respect and
(c) Before capping safety fuse, a short care given other explosives.
length shall be cut from the end of the (c) The line of detonating cord ex-
supply reel so as to assure a fresh cut tending out of a bore hole or from a
end in each blasting cap. charge shall be cut from the supply
(d) Only a cap crimper of approved spool before loading the remainder of
design shall be used for attaching the bore hole or placing additional
blasting caps to safety fuse. Crimpers charges.
shall be kept in good repair and acces- (d) Detonating cord shall be handled
sible for use. and used with care to avoid damaging
(e) No unused cap or short capped or severing the cord during and after
fuse shall be placed in any hole to be loading and hooking-up.
blasted; such unused detonators shall (e) Detonating cord connections shall
be removed from the working place and be competent and positive in accord-
destroyed. ance with approved and recommended
(f) No fuse shall be capped, or primers methods. Knot-type or other cord-to-
made up, in any magazine or near any cord connections shall be made only
possible source of ignition. with detonating cord in which the ex-
(g) No one shall be permitted to carry plosive core is dry.
detonators or primers of any kind on (f) All detonating cord trunklines and
his person. branchlines shall be free of loops, sharp
(h) The minimum length of safety kinks, or angles that direct the cord
fuse to be used in blasting shall be as back toward the oncoming line of deto-
required by State law, but shall not be nation.
less than 30 inches. (g) All detonating cord connections
(i) At least two men shall be present shall be inspected before firing the
when multiple cap and fuse blasting is blast.
done by hand lighting methods. (h) When detonating cord milli-
(j) Not more than 12 fuses shall be second-delay connectors or short-inter-
lighted by each blaster when hand val-delay electric blasting caps are
lighting devices are used. However, used with detonating cord, the practice
when two or more safety fuses in a shall conform strictly to the manufac-
group are lighted as one by means of turer’s recommendations.
igniter cord, or other similar fuse- (i) When connecting a blasting cap or
lighting devices, they may be consid- an electric blasting cap to detonating
ered as one fuse. cord, the cap shall be taped or other-
(k) The so-called ‘‘drop fuse’’ method wise attached securely along the side
of dropping or pushing a primer or any or the end of the detonating cord, with
explosive with a lighted fuse attached the end of the cap containing the ex-
is forbidden. plosive charge pointed in the direction

(l) Cap and fuse shall not be used for in which the detonation is to proceed.
firing mudcap charges unless charges (j) Detonators for firing the trunk-
are separated sufficiently to prevent line shall not be brought to the loading
482
area nor attached to the detonating and in tunnels, after the muck pile has
cord until everything else is in readi- been wetted down.
ness for the blast.
§ 1926.911 Misfires.
§ 1926.909 Firing the blast. (a) If a misfire is found, the blaster
(a) A code of blasting signals equiva- shall provide proper safeguards for ex-
lent to Table U–1, shall be posted on cluding all employees from the danger
one or more conspicuous places at the zone.
operation, and all employees shall be (b) No other work shall be done ex-
required to familiarize themselves with cept that necessary to remove the haz-
the code and conform to it. Danger ard of the misfire and only those em-
signs shall be placed at suitable loca- ployees necessary to do the work shall
tions. remain in the danger zone.
(b) Before a blast is fired, a loud (c) No attempt shall be made to ex-
warning signal shall be given by the tract explosives from any charged or
blaster in charge, who has made cer- misfired hole; a new primer shall be
tain that all surplus explosives are in a put in and the hole reblasted. If re-
safe place and all employees, vehicles, firing of the misfired hole presents a
and equipment are at a safe distance, hazard, the explosives may be removed
or under sufficient cover. by washing out with water or, where
(c) Flagmen shall be safely stationed the misfire is under water, blown out
on highways which pass through the with air.
danger zone so as to stop traffic during (d) If there are any misfires while
blasting operations. using cap and fuse, all employees shall
(d) It shall be the duty of the blaster remain away from the charge for at
to fix the time of blasting. least 1 hour. Misfires shall be handled
(e) Before firing an underground under the direction of the person in
blast, warning shall be given, and all charge of the blasting. All wires shall
possible entries into the blasting area, be carefully traced and a search made
and any entrances to any working for unexploded charges.
place where a drift, raise, or other (e) No drilling, digging, or picking
opening is about to hole through, shall shall be permitted until all missed
be carefully guarded. The blaster shall holes have been detonated or the au-
make sure that all employees are out thorized representative has approved
of the blast area before firing a blast. that work can proceed.
TABLE U–1
§ 1926.912 Underwater blasting.
WARNING SIGNAL—A 1-minute series of long
blasts 5 minutes prior to blast signal.
(a) A blaster shall conduct all blast-
BLAST SIGNAL—A series of short blasts 1 ing operations, and no shot shall be
minute prior to the shot. fired without his approval.
ALL CLEAR SIGNAL—A prolonged blast fol- (b) Loading tubes and casings of dis-
lowing the inspection of blast area. similar metals shall not be used be-
cause of possible electric transient cur-
§ 1926.910 Inspection after blasting. rents from galvanic action of the met-
(a) Immediately after the blast has als and water.
been fired, the firing line shall be dis- (c) Only water-resistant blasting caps
connected from the blasting machine, and detonating cords shall be used for
or where power switches are used, they all marine blasting. Loading shall be
shall be locked open or in the off posi- done through a nonsparking metal
tion. loading tube when tube is necessary.
(b) Sufficient time shall be allowed, (d) No blast shall be fired while any
not less than 15 minutes in tunnels, for vessel under way is closer than 1,500
the smoke and fumes to leave the feet to the blasting area. Those on
blasted area before returning to the board vessels or craft moored or an-
shot. An inspection of the area and the chored within 1,500 feet shall be noti-
surrounding rubble shall be made by fied before a blast is fired.

the blaster to determine if all charges (e) No blast shall be fired while any
have been exploded before employees swimming or diving operations are in
are allowed to return to the operation, progress in the vicinity of the blasting
483
area. If such operations are in progress, (g) When tunnel excavation in rock
signals and arrangements shall be face is approaching mixed face, and
agreed upon to assure that no blast when tunnel excavation is in mixed
shall be fired while any person is in the face, blasting shall be performed with
water. light charges and with light burden on
(f) Blasting flags shall be displayed. each hole. Advance drilling shall be
(g) The storage and handling of ex- performed as tunnel excavation in rock
plosives aboard vessels used in under- face approaches mixed face, to deter-
water blasting operations shall be ac- mine the general nature and extent of
cording to provisions outlined herein rock cover and the remaining distance
on handling and storing explosives. ahead to soft ground as excavation ad-
(h) When more than one charge is vances.
placed under water, a float device shall
be attached to an element of each § 1926.914 Definitions applicable to
charge in such manner that it will be this subpart.
released by the firing. Misfires shall be
handled in accordance with the re- (a) American Table of Distances (also
quirements of § 1926.911. known as Quantity Distance Tables)
means American Table of Distances for
§ 1926.913 Blasting in excavation work Storage of Explosives as revised and
under compressed air. approved by the Institute of the Mak-
(a) Detonators and explosives shall ers of Explosives, June 5, 1964.
not be stored or kept in tunnels, shafts, (b) Approved storage facility—A facil-
or caissons. Detonators and explosives ity for the storage of explosive mate-
for each round shall be taken directly rials conforming to the requirements of
from the magazines to the blasting this part and covered by a license or
zone and immediately loaded. Deto- permit issued under authority of the
nators and explosives left over after Bureau of Alcohol, Tobacco and Fire-
loading a round shall be removed from arms. (See 27 CFR Part 55)
the working chamber before the con- (c) Blast area—The area in which ex-
necting wires are connected up. plosives loading and blasting oper-
(b) When detonators or explosives are ations are being conducted.
brought into an air lock, no employee (d) Blaster—The person or persons au-
except the powderman, blaster, lock thorized to use explosives for blasting
tender and the employees necessary for purposes and meeting the qualifica-
carrying, shall be permitted to enter tions contained in § 1926.901.
the air lock. No other material, sup-
(e) Blasting agent—A blasting agent is
plies, or equipment shall be locked
any material or mixture consisting of a
through with the explosives.
fuel and oxidizer used for blasting, but
(c) Detonators and explosives shall be
not classified an explosive and in which
taken separately into pressure working
chambers. none of the ingredients is classified as
(d) The blaster or powderman shall be an explosive provided the furnished
responsible for the receipt, unloading, (mixed) product cannot be detonated
storage, and on-site transportation of with a No. 8 test blasting cap when
explosives and detonators. confined. A common blasting agent
(e) All metal pipes, rails, air locks, presently in use is a mixture of ammo-
and steel tunnel lining shall be elec- nium nitrate (NH4 NO3) and carbo-
trically bonded together and grounded naceous combustibles, such as fuel oil
at or near the portal or shaft, and such or coal, and may either be procured,
pipes and rails shall be cross-bonded to- premixed and packaged from explosives
gether at not less than 1,000-foot inter- companies or mixed in the field.
vals throughout the length of the tun- (f) Blasting cap—A metallic tube
nel. In addition, each low air supply closed at one end, containing a charge
pipe shall be grounded at its delivery of one or more detonating compounds,
end. and designed for and capable of detona-

(f) The explosives suitable for use in tion from the sparks or flame from a
wet holes shall be water-resistant and safety fuse inserted and crimped into
shall be Fume Class 1. the open end.
484
(g) Block holing—The breaking of Class A Explosives. Possessing detonating

boulders by firing a charge of explo- hazard, such as dynamite, nitroglycerin, pic-
sives that has been loaded in a drill ric acid, lead azide, fulminate of mercury,
black powder, blasting caps, and detonating
hole.
primers.
(h) Conveyance—Any unit for trans- Class B Explosives. Possessing flammable
porting explosives or blasting agents, hazard, such as propellant explosives, includ-
including but not limited to trucks, ing some smokeless propellants.
trailers, rail cars, barges, and vessels. Class C Explosives. Include certain types of
(i) Detonating cord—A flexible cord manufactured articles which contain Class A
containing a center core of high explo- or Class B explosives, or both, as compo-
sives which when detonated, will have nents, but in restricted quantities.
sufficient strength to detonate other (o) Fuse lighters—Special devices for
cap-sensitive explosives with which it the purpose of igniting safety fuse.
is in contact. (p) Magazine—Any building or struc-
(j) Detonator—Blasting caps, electric ture, other than an explosives manu-
blasting caps, delay electric blasting facturing building, used for the storage
caps, and nonelectric delay blasting of explosives.
caps. (q) Misfire—An explosive charge
(k) Electric blasting cap—A blasting which failed to detonate.
cap designed for and capable of detona- (r) Mud-capping (sometimes known as
tion by means of an electric current. bulldozing, adobe blasting, or dobying).
(l) Electric blasting circuitry— The blasting of boulders by placing a
(1) Bus wire. An expendable wire, quantity of explosives against a rock,
used in parallel or series, in parallel boulder, or other object without con-
circuits, to which are connected the leg fining the explosives in a drill hole.
wires of electric blasting caps. (s) Nonelectric delay blasting cap—A
(2) Connecting wire. An insulated ex- blasting cap with an integral delay ele-
pendable wire used between electric ment in conjunction with and capable
blasting caps and the leading wires or of being detonated by a detonation im-
between the bus wire and the leading pulse or signal from miniaturized deto-
wires. nating cord.
(3) Leading wire. An insulated wire (t) Primary blasting—The blasting op-
used between the electric power source eration by which the original rock for-
and the electric blasting cap circuit. mation is dislodged from its natural lo-
(4) Permanent blasting wire. A per- cation.
manently mounted insulated wire used (u) Primer—A cartridge or container
between the electric power source and of explosives into which a detonator or
the electric blasting cap circuit. detonating cord is inserted or attached.
(m) Electric delay blasting caps—Caps (v) Safety fuse—A flexible cord con-
designed to detonate at a predeter- taining an internal burning medium by
mined period of time after energy is which fire is conveyed at a continuous
applied to the ignition system. and uniform rate for the purpose of fir-
(n) Explosives—(1) Any chemical coming blasting caps.
pound, mixture, or device, the primary (w) Secondary blasting—The reduction
or common purpose of which is to func- of oversize material by the use of ex-
tion by explosion; that is, with sub- plosives to the dimension required for
stantially instantaneous release of gas handling, including mudcapping and
and heat, unless such compound, mix- blockholing.
ture or device is otherwise specifically (x) Stemming—A suitable inert incom-
classified by the U.S. Department of bustible material or device used to con-
Transportation. fine or separate explosives in a drill
(2) All material which is classified as hole, or to cover explosives in mud-cap-
Class A, Class B, and Class C Explo- ping.
sives by the U.S. Department of Trans- (y) Springing—The creation of a pock-
portation. et in the bottom of a drill hole by the

(3) Classification of explosives by the use of a moderate quantity of explo-
U.S. Department of Transportation is sives in order that larger quantities or
as follows: explosives may be inserted therein.
485
(z) Water gels, or slurry explosives—A ment need not be modified to conform
wide variety of materials used for to the requirements of applicable
blasting. They all contain substantial standards in this subpart V, until such
proportions of water and high propor- work as described in paragraph (a)(1) of
tions of ammonium nitrate, some of this section is to be performed on such
which is in solution in the water. Two lines or equipment.
broad classes of water gels are: (1) (3) The standards set forth in this
Those which are sensitized by a mate- subpart V provide minimum require-
rial classed as an explosive, such as ments for safety and health. Employers
TNT or smokeless powder, and (2) those may require adherence to additional
which contain no ingredient classified standards which are not in conflict
as an explosive; these are sensitized with the standards contained in this
with metals such as aluminum or with subpart V.
other fuels. Water gels may be (b) Initial inspections, tests, or deter-
premixed at an explosives plant or minations. (1) Existing conditions shall
mixed at the site immediately before be determined before starting work, by
delivery into the bore hole. an inspection or a test. Such condi-
(aa) Semiconductive hose. tions shall include, but not be limited
Semiconductive hose—a hose with an to, energized lines and equipment, con-
electrical resistance high enough to ditions of poles, and the location of cir-
limit flow of stray electric currents to cuits and equipment, including power
safe levels, yet not so high as to pre- and communication lines, CATV and
vent drainage of static electric charges fire alarm circuits.
to ground; hose of not more than 2 (2) Electric equipment and lines shall
megohms resistance over its entire be considered energized until deter-
length and of not less than 5,000 ohms mined to be deenergized by tests or
per foot meets the requirement. other appropriate methods or means.
(3) Operating voltage of equipment
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6,
1979, as amended at 58 FR 35184 and 35311, and lines shall be determined before
June 30, 1993] working on or near energized parts.
(c) Clearances. The provisions of para-
graph (c) (1) or (2) of this section shall
Subpart V—Power Transmission be observed.
and Distribution (1) No employee shall be permitted to
approach or take any conductive object
AUTHORITY: Sec. 107, Contract Work Hours without an approved insulating handle
and Safety Standards Act (Construction closer to exposed energized parts than
Safety Act) (40 U.S.C. 333); Secs. 4, 6, 8, Occu-
shown in Table V–1, unless:
pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); Secretary of Labor’s (i) The employee is insulated or
Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR guarded from the energized part (gloves
25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), or 1–90 (55 FR 9033), or gloves with sleeves rated for the
as applicable. Section 1926.951 also issued voltage involved shall be considered in-
under 29 CFR Part 1911. sulation of the employee from the en-
ergized part), or
§ 1926.950 General requirements. (ii) The energized part is insulated or
(a) Application. The occupational guarded from him and any other con-
safety and health standards contained ductive object at a different potential,
in this subpart V shall apply to the or
construction of electric transmission (iii) The employee is isolated, insu-
and distribution lines and equipment. lated, or guarded from any other con-
(1) As used in this subpart V the term ductive object(s), as during live-line
‘‘construction’’ includes the erection of bare-hand work.
new electric transmission and distribu- (2) (i) The minimum working dis-
tion lines and equipment, and the al- tance and minimum clear hot stick dis-
teration, conversion, and improvement tances stated in Table V–1 shall not be
of existing electric transmission and violated. The minimum clear hot stick
distribution lines and equipment. distance is that for the use of live-line
(2) Existing electric transmission and tools held by linemen when performing
distribution lines and electrical equip- live-line work.
486
(ii) Conductor support tools, such as insure that equipment or lines have
link sticks, strain carriers, and insu- been deenergized.
lator cradles, may be used: Provided, (iv) Protective grounds shall be ap-
That the clear insulation is at least as plied on the disconnected lines or
long as the insulator string or the min- equipment to be worked on.
imum distance specified in Table V–1 (v) Guards or barriers shall be erect-
for the operating voltage. ed as necessary to adjacent energized
lines.
TABLE V–1—ALTERNATING CURRENT—MINIMUM (vi) When more than one independent
DISTANCES crew requires the same line or equip-
Minimum ment to be deenergized, a prominent
working tag for each such independent crew
Voltage range (phase to phase) kilovolt) and clear
hot stick shall be placed on the line or equip-
distance ment by the designated employee in
charge.
2.1 to 15 .............................................................. 2 ft. 0 in.
15.1 to 35 ............................................................ 2 ft. 4 in. (vii) Upon completion of work on de-
35.1 to 46 ............................................................ 2 ft. 6 in. energized lines or equipment, each des-
46.1 to 72.5 ......................................................... 3 ft. 0 in. ignated employee in charge shall deter-
72.6 to 121 .......................................................... 3 ft. 4 in.
138 to 145 ........................................................... 3 ft. 6 in. mine that all employees in his crew are
161 to 169 ........................................................... 3 ft. 8 in. clear, that protective grounds installed
230 to 242 ........................................................... 5 ft. 0 in. by his crew have been removed, and he
345 to 362 ........................................................... 17 ft. 0 in.
500 to 552 ........................................................... 1 11 ft. 0 shall report to the designated author-
in. ity that all tags protecting his crew
700 to 765 ........................................................... 1 15 ft. 0
may be removed.
in. (2) When a crew working on a line or
1 NOTE: For 345–362 kv., 500–552 kv., and 700–765 kv.,
equipment can clearly see that the
the minimum working distance and the minimum clear hot
stick distance may be reduced provided that such distances means of disconnecting from electric
are not less than the shortest distance between the energized energy are visibly open or visibly
part and a grounded surface.
locked-out, the provisions of para-
(d) Deenergizing lines and equipment. graphs (d)(i), and (ii) of this section
(1) When deenergizing lines and equip- shall apply:
ment operated in excess of 600 volts, (i) Guards or barriers shall be erected
and the means of disconnecting from as necessary to adjacent energized
electric energy is not visibly open or lines.
visibly locked out, the provisions of (ii) Upon completion of work on de-
paragraphs (d)(1) (i) through (vii) of energized lines or equipment, each des-
this section shall be complied with: ignated employee in charge shall deter-
(i) The particular section of line or mine that all employees in his crew are
equipment to be deenergized shall be clear, that protective grounds installed
clearly identified, and it shall be iso- by his crew have been removed, and he
lated from all sources of voltage. shall report to the designated author-
(ii) Notification and assurance from ity that all tags protecting his crew
the designated employee shall be ob- may be removed.
tained that: (e) Emergency procedures and first aid.
(a) All switches and disconnectors (1) The employer shall provide training
through which electric energy may be or require that his employees are
supplied to the particular section of knowledgeable and proficient in:
line or equipment to be worked have (i) Procedures involving emergency
been deenergized; situations, and
(b) All switches and disconnectors are (ii) First-aid fundamentals including
plainly tagged indicating that men are resuscitation.
at work; (2) In lieu of paragraph (e)(1) of this
(c) And that where design of such section the employer may comply with
switches and disconnectors permits, the provisions of § 1926.50(c) regarding
they have been rendered inoperable. first-aid requirements.
(iii) After all designated switches and (f) Night work. When working at
disconnectors have been opened, ren- night, spotlights or portable lights for
dered inoperable, and tagged, visual in- emergency lighting shall be provided
spection or tests shall be conducted to as needed to perform the work safely.
487
(g) Work near and over water. When which case other safeguards shall be
crews are engaged in work over or near employed.
water and when danger of drowning ex- (2) Body belts and safety straps shall
ists, suitable protection shall be pro- meet the requirements of § 1926.959. In
vided as stated in § 1926.104, or § 1926.105, addition to being used as an employee
or § 1926.106. safeguarding item, body belts with ap-
(h) Sanitation facilities. The require- proved tool loops may be used for the
ments of § 1926.51 of subpart D of this purpose of holding tools. Body belts
part shall be complied with for sanita- shall be free from additional metal
tion facilities. hooks and tool loops other than those
(i) Hydraulic fluids. All hydraulic permitted in § 1926.959.
fluids used for the insulated sections of (3) Body belts and straps shall be in-
derrick trucks, aerial lifts, and hydrau- spected before use each day to deter-
lic tools which are used on or around mine that they are in safe working
energized lines and equipment shall be condition.
of the insulating type. The require- (4)(i) Lifelines and lanyards shall
ments for fire resistant fluids of comply with the provisions of § 1926.502.
§ 1926.302(d)(1) do not apply to hydraulic (ii) Safety lines are not intended to
tools covered by this paragraph. be subjected to shock loading and are
used for emergency rescue such as low-
§ 1926.951 Tools and protective equip-
ment. ering a man to the ground. Such safety
lines shall be a minimum of one-half-
(a) Protective equipment. (1)(i) Rubber inch diameter and three or four strand
protective equipment shall be in ac- first-grade manila or its equivalent in
cordance with the provisions of the strength (2,650 lb.) and durability.
American National Standards Institute (5) Defective ropes shall be replaced.
(ANSI), ANSI J6 series, as follows:
(c) Ladders. (1) Portable metal or con-
Item Standard ductive ladders shall not be used near
energized lines or equipment except as
Rubber insulating gloves ..................... J6.6–1971.
Rubber matting for use around electric J6.7–1935 (R1971).
may be necessary in specialized work
apparatus. such as in high voltage substations
Rubber insulating blankets .................. J6.4–1971. where nonconductive ladders might
Rubber insulating hoods ..................... J6.2–1950 (R1971). present a greater hazard than conduc-
Rubber insulating line hose ................. J6.1–1950 (R1971).
Rubber insulating sleeves ................... J6.5–1971.
tive ladders. Conductive or metal lad-
ders shall be prominently marked as
(ii) Rubber protective equipment conductive and all necessary pre-
shall be visually inspected prior to use. cautions shall be taken when used in
(iii) In addition, an ‘‘air’’ test shall specialized work.
be performed for rubber gloves prior to (2) Hook or other type ladders used in
use. structures shall be positively secured
(iv) Protective equipment of material to prevent the ladder from being acci-
other than rubber shall provide equal dentally displaced.
or better electrical and mechanical (d) Live-line tools. (1) Only live-line
protection. tool poles having a manufacturer’s cer-
(2) Protective hats shall be in accord- tification to withstand the following
ance with the provisions of ANSI Z89.2– minimum tests shall be used:
1971 Industrial Protective Helmets for (i) 100,000 volts per foot of length for
Electrical Workers, Class B, and shall 5 minutes when the tool is made of fi-
be worn at the jobsite by employees berglass; or
who are exposed to the hazards of fall- (ii) 75,000 volts per foot of length for
ing objects, electric shock, or burns. 3 minutes when the tool is made of
(b) Personal climbing equipment. (1) wood; or
Body belts with straps or lanyards (iii) Other tests equivalent to para-
shall be worn to protect employees graph (d) (i) or (ii) of this section as ap-
working at elevated locations on poles, propriate.

towers, or other structures except (2) All live-line tools shall be visually
where such use creates a greater haz- inspected before use each day. Tools to
ard to the safety of the employees, in be used shall be wiped clean and if any
488
hazardous defects are indicated such (b) Aerial lifts. (1) The provisions of
tools shall be removed from service. § 1926.556, subpart N of this part, shall
(e) Measuring tapes or measuring ropes. apply to the utilization of aerial lifts.
Measuring tapes or measuring ropes (2) When working near energized
which are metal or contain conductive lines or equipment, aerial lift trucks
strands shall not be used when working shall be grounded or barricaded and
on or near energized parts. considered as energized equipment, or
(f) Handtools. (1) Switches for all pow- the aerial lift truck shall be insulated
ered hand tools shall comply with for the work being performed.
§ 1926.300(d). (3) Equipment or material shall not
(2) All portable electric handtools be passed between a pole or structure
shall: and an aerial lift while an employee
(i) Be equipped with three-wire cord working from the basket is within
having the ground wire permanently reaching distance of energized conduc-
connected to the tool frame and means tors or equipment that are not covered
for grounding the other end; or with insulating protective equipment.
(ii) Be of the double insulated type (c) Derrick trucks, cranes and other lift-
and permanently labeled as ‘‘Double ing equipment. (1) All derrick trucks,
Insulated’’; or cranes and other lifting equipment
(iii) Be connected to the power sup- shall comply with subpart N and O of
ply by means of an isolating trans- this part except:
former, or other isolated power supply.
(i) As stated in § 1926.550(a)(15) (i) and
(3) All hydraulic tools which are used
(ii) relating to clearance (for clear-
on or around energized lines or equip-
ances in this subpart see Table V–1)
ment shall use nonconducting hoses
and
having adequate strength for the nor-
mal operating pressures. It should be (ii) Derrick truck (electric line
noted that the provisions of trucks) shall not be required to comply
§ 1926.302(d)(2) shall also apply. with § 1926.550(a)(7)(vi), (a)(17), (b)(2),
(4) All pneumatic tools which are and (e).
used on or around energized lines or (2) With the exception of equipment
equipment shall: certified for work on the proper volt-
(i) Have nonconducting hoses having age, mechanical equipment shall not be
adequate strength for the normal oper- operated closer to any energized line or
ating pressures, and equipment than the clearances set
(ii) Have an accumulator on the com- forth in § 1926.950(c) unless:
pressor to collect moisture. (i) An insulated barrier is installed
between the energized part and the me-
[44 FR 8577, Feb. 9, 1979; 44 FR 20940, Apr. 6, chanical equipment, or
1979, as amended at 59 FR 40730, Aug. 9, 1994]
(ii) The mechanical equipment is
§ 1926.952 Mechanical equipment. grounded, or
(iii) The mechanical equipment is in-
(a) General. (1) Visual inspections
sulated, or
shall be made of the equipment to de-
termine that it is in good condition (iv) The mechanical equipment is
each day the equipment is to be used. considered as energized.
(2) Tests shall be made at the begin-
§ 1926.953 Material handling.
ning of each shift during which the
equipment is to be used to determine (a) Unloading. Prior to unloading
that the brakes and operating systems steel, poles, cross arms and similar ma-
are in proper working condition. terial, the load shall be thoroughly ex-
(3) No employer shall use any motor amined to ascertain if the load has
vehicle equipment having an ob- shifted, binders or stakes have broken
structed view to the rear unless: or the load is otherwise hazardous to
(i) The vehicle has a reverse signal employees.
alarm audible above the surrounding (b) Pole hauling. (1) During pole haul-
noise level or: ing operations, all loads shall be se-

(ii) The vehicle is backed up only cured to prevent displacement and a
when an observer signals that it is safe red flag shall be displayed at the trail-
to do so. ing end of the longest pole.
489
(2) Precautions shall be exercised to (c) Communication conductors. Bare

prevent blocking of roadways or endan- wire communication conductors on
gering other traffic. power poles or structures shall be
(3) When hauling poles during the treated as energized lines unless pro-
hours of darkness, illuminated warning tected by insulating materials.
devices shall be attached to the trail- (d) Voltage testing. Deenergized con-
ing end of the longest pole. ductors and equipment which are to be
(c) Storage. (1) No materials or equip- grounded shall be tested for voltage.
ment shall be stored under energized Results of this voltage test shall deter-
bus, energized lines, or near energized mine the subsequent procedures as re-
equipment, if it is practical to store quired in § 1926.950(d).
them elsewhere. (e) Attaching grounds. (1) When at-
(2) When materials or equipment are taching grounds, the ground end shall
stored under energized lines or near en- be attached first, and the other end
ergized equipment, applicable clear- shall be attached and removed by
ances shall be maintained as stated in means of insulated tools or other suit-
Table V–1; and extraordinary caution able devices.
shall be exercised when moving mate- (2) When removing grounds, the
rials near such energized equipment. grounding device shall first be removed
(d) Tag line. Where hazards to em- fromt the line or equipment using insu-
ployees exist tag lines or other suitable lating tools or other suitable devices.
devices shall be used to control loads (f) Grounds shall be placed between
being handled by hoisting equipment. work location and all sources of energy
and as close as practicable to the work
(e) Oil filled equipment. During con-
location, or grounds shall be placed at
struction or repair of oil filled equip-
the work location. If work is to be per-
ment the oil may be stored in tem-
formed at more than one location in a
porary containers other than those re-
line section, the line section must be
quired in § 1926.152, such as pillow
grounded and short circuited at one lo-
tanks.
cation in the line section and the con-
(f) Framing. During framing oper-
ductor to be worked on shall be
ations, employees shall not work under
grounded at each work location. The
a pole or a structure suspended by a
minimum distance shown in Table V–1
crane, A-frame or similar equipment
shall be maintained from ungrounded
unless the pole or structure is ade-
conductors at the work location. Where
quately supported.
the making of a ground is impracti-
(g) Attaching the load. The hoist rope cable, or the conditions resulting
shall not be wrapped around the load. therefrom would be more hazardous
This provision shall not apply to elec- than working on the lines or equip-
tric construction crews when setting or ment without grounding, the grounds
removing poles. may be omitted and the line or equip-
ment worked as energized.
§ 1926.954 Grounding for protection of
employees. (g) Testing without grounds. Grounds
may be temporarily removed only
(a) General. All conductors and equip- when necessary for test purposes and
ment shall be treated as energized extreme caution shall be exercised dur-
until tested or otherwise determined to ing the test procedures.
be deenergized or until grounded. (h) Grounding electrode. When ground-
(b) New construction. New lines or ing electrodes are utilized, such elec-
equipment may be considered deener- trodes shall have a resistance to
gized and worked as such where: ground low enough to remove the dan-
(1) The lines or equipment are ger of harm to personnel or permit
grounded, or prompt operation of protective devices.
(2) The hazard of induced voltages is (i) Grounding to tower. Grounding to
not present, and adequate clearances or tower shall be made with a tower
other means are implemented to pre- clamp capable of conducting the antici-
vent contact with energized lines or pated fault current.
equipment and the new lines or equip- (j) Ground lead. A ground lead, to be
ment. attached to either a tower ground or
490
driven ground, shall be capable of con- (b) Metal tower construction. (1) When
ducting the anticipated fault current working in unstable material the exca-
and shall have a minimum conductance vation for pad- or pile-type footings in
of No. 2 AWG copper. excess of 5 feet deep shall be either
sloped to the angle of repose as re-
§ 1926.955 Overhead lines. quired in § 1926.652 or shored if entry is
(a) Overhead lines. (1) When working required. Ladders shall be provided for
on or with overhead lines the provi- access to pad- or pile-type footing ex-
sions of paragraphs (a) (2) through (8) cavations in excess of 4 feet.
of this section shall be complied with (2) When working in unstable mate-
in addition to other applicable provi- rial provision shall be made for clean-
sions of this subpart. ing out auger-type footings without re-
(2) Prior to climbing poles, ladders, quiring an employee to enter the foot-
scaffolds, or other elevated structures, ing unless shoring is used to protect
an inspection shall be made to deter- the employee.
mine that the structures are capable of (3)(i) A designated employee shall be
sustaining the additional or unbal- used in directing mobile equipment ad-
anced stresses to which they will be jacent to footing excavations.
subjected. (ii) No one shall be permitted to re-
(3) Where poles or structures may be main in the footing while equipment is
unsafe for climbing, they shall not be being spotted for placement.
climbed until made safe by guying, (iii) Where necessary to assure the
bracing, or other adequate means. stability of mobile equipment the loca-
(4) Before installing or removing wire tion of use for such equipment shall be
or cable, strains to which poles and graded and leveled.
structures will be subjected shall be (4)(i) Tower assembly shall be carried
considered and necessary action taken out with a minimum exposure of em-
to prevent failure of supporting struc- ployees to falling objects when working
tures. at two or more levels on a tower.
(5)(i) When setting, moving, or re- (ii) Guy lines shall be used as nec-
moving poles using cranes, derricks, essary to maintain sections or parts of
gin poles, A-frames, or other mecha- sections in position and to reduce the
nized equipment near energized lines or possibility of tipping.
equipment, precautions shall be taken (iii) Members and sections being as-
to avoid contact with energized lines or sembled shall be adequately supported.
equipment, except in bare-hand live- (5) When assembling and erecting
line work, or where barriers or protec- towers the provisions of paragraphs
tive devices are used. (b)(5) (i), (ii) and (iii) of this section
(ii) Equipment and machinery oper- shall be complied with:
ating adjacent to energized lines or (i) The construction of transmission
equipment shall comply with towers and the erecting of poles, hoist-
§ 1926.952(c)(2). ing machinery, site preparation ma-
(6)(i) Unless using suitable protective chinery, and other types of construc-
equipment for the voltage involved, tion machinery shall conform to the
employees standing on the ground shall applicable requirements of this part.
avoid contacting equipment or machin- (ii) No one shall be permitted under a
ery working adjacent to energized lines tower which is in the process of erec-
or equipment. tion or assembly, except as may be re-
(ii) Lifting equipment shall be bond- quired to guide and secure the section
ed to an effective ground or it shall be being set.
considered energized and barricaded (iii) When erecting towers using
when utilized near energized equip- hoisting equipment adjacent to ener-
ment or lines. gized transmission lines, the lines shall
(7) Pole holes shall not be left unat- be deenergized when practical. If the
tended or unguarded in areas where lines are not deenergized, extraor-
employees are currently working. dinary caution shall be exercised to

(8) Tag lines shall be of a nonconduc- maintain the minimum clearance dis-
tive type when used near energized tances required by § 1926.950(c), includ-
lines. ing Table V–1.
491
(6)(i) Erection cranes shall be set on (ii) When crossing over energized
firm level foundations and when the conductors in excess of 600 volts, rope
cranes are so equipped outriggers shall nets or guard structures shall be in-
be used. stalled unless provision is made to iso-
(ii) Tag lines shall be utilized to late or insulate the workman or the en-
maintain control of tower sections ergized conductor. Where practical the
being raised and positioned, except automatic reclosing feature of the cir-
where the use of such lines would cre- cuit interrupting device shall be made
ate a greater hazard. inoperative. In addition, the line being
(iii) The loadline shall not be de- strung shall be grounded on either side
tached from a tower section until the of the crossover or considered and
section is adequately secured. worked as energized.
(iv) Except during emergency res- (5) Conductors being strung in or re-
toration procedures erection shall be moved shall be kept under positive
discontinued in the event of high wind control by the use of adequate tension
or other adverse weather conditions reels, guard structures, tielines, or
which would make the work hazardous. other means to prevent accidental con-
(v) Equipment and rigging shall be tact with energized circuits.
regularly inspected and maintained in (6) Guard structure members shall be
safe operating condition. sound and of adequate dimension and
(7) Adequate traffic control shall be strength, and adequately supported.
maintained when crossing highways
(7)(i) Catch-off anchors, rigging, and
and railways with equipment as re-
hoists shall be of ample capacity to
quired by the provisions of § 1926.200(g)
prevent loss of the lines.
(1) and (2).
(ii) The manufacturer’s load rating
(8) A designated employee shall be
shall not be exceeded for stringing
utilized to determine that required
lines, pulling lines, sock connections,
clearance is maintained in moving
and all load-bearing hardware and ac-
equipment under or near energized
cessories.
lines.
(c) Stringing or removing deenergized (iii) Pulling lines and accessories
conductors. (1) When stringing or re- shall be inspected regularly and re-
moving deenergized conductors, the placed or repaired when damaged or
provisions of paragraphs (c) (2) through when dependability is doubtful. The
(12) of this section shall be complied provisions of § 1926.251(c)(4)(ii) (con-
with. cerning splices) shall not apply.
(2) Prior to stringing operations a (8) Conductor grips shall not be used
briefing shall be held setting forth the on wire rope unless designed for this
plan of operation and specifying the application.
type of equipment to be used, ground- (9) While the conductor or pulling
ing devices and procedures to be fol- line is being pulled (in motion) employ-
lowed, crossover methods to be em- ees shall not be permitted directly
ployed, and the clearance authoriza- under overhead operations, nor shall
tion required. any employee be permitted on the
(3) Where there is a possibility of the crossarm.
conductor accidentally contacting an (10) A transmission clipping crew
energized circuit or receiving a dan- shall have a minimum of two struc-
gerous induced voltage buildup, to fur- tures clipped in between the crew and
ther protect the employee from the the conductor being sagged. When
hazards of the conductor, the con- working on bare conductors, clipping
ductor being installed or removed shall and tying crews shall work between
be grounded or provisions made to in- grounds at all times. The grounds shall
sulate or isolate the employee. remain intact until the conductors are
(4)(i) If the existing line is deener- clipped in, except on dead end struc-
gized, proper clearance authorization tures.
shall be secured and the line grounded (11)(i) Except during emergency res-
on both sides of the crossover or, the toration procedures, work from struc-
line being strung or removed shall be tures shall be discontinued when ad-
considered and worked as energized. verse weather (such as high wind or ice
492
on structures) makes the work haz- (ii) Such grounds shall be removed as
ardous. the last phase of aerial cleanup.
(ii) Stringing and clipping operations (iii) Except for moving type grounds,
shall be discontinued during the the grounds shall be placed and re-
progress of an electrical storm in the moved with a hot stick.
immediate vicinity. (6) Conductors, subconductors, and
(12)(i) Reel handling equipment, in- overhead ground conductors shall be
cluding pulling and braking machines, grounded at all dead-end or catch-off
shall have ample capacity, operate points.
smoothly, and be leveled and aligned in (7) A ground shall be located at each
accordance with the manufacturer’s side and within 10 feet of working areas
operating instructions. where conductors, subconductors, or
(ii) Reliable communications be- overhead ground conductors are being
tween the reel tender and pulling rig spliced at ground level. The two ends
operator shall be provided. to be spliced shall be bonded to each
(iii) Each pull shall be snubbed or other. It is recommended that splicing
dead ended at both ends before subse- be carried out on either an insulated
quent pulls. platform or on a conductive metallic
(d) Stringing adjacent to energized grounding mat bonded to both grounds.
lines. (1) Prior to stringing parallel to When a grounding mat is used, it is
an existing energized transmission line
recommended that the grounding mat
a competent determination shall be
be roped off and an insulated walkway
made to ascertain whether dangerous
induced voltage buildups will occur, provided for access to the mat.
particularly during switching and (8)(i) All conductors, subconductors,
ground fault conditions. When there is and overhead ground conductors shall
a possibility that such dangerous in- be bonded to the tower at any isolated
duced voltage may exist the employer tower where it may be necessary to
shall comply with the provisions of complete work on the transmission
paragraphs (d) (2) through (9) of this line.
section in addition to the provisions of (ii) Work on dead-end towers shall re-
paragraph (c) of this § 1926.955, unless quire grounding on all deenergized
the line is worked as energized. lines.
(2) When stringing adjacent to ener- (iii) Grounds may be removed as soon
gized lines the tension stringing meth- as the work is completed: Provided,
od or other methods which preclude un- That the line is not left open circuited
intentional contact between the lines at the isolated tower at which work is
being pulled and any employee shall be being completed.
used. (9) When performing work from the
(3) All pulling and tensioning equip- structures, clipping crews and all oth-
ment shall be isolated, insulated, or ef- ers working on conductors, subconduc-
fectively grounded. tors, or overhead ground conductors
(4) A ground shall be installed be- shall be protected by individual
tween the tensioning reel setup and the grounds installed at every work loca-
first structure in order to ground each tion.
bare conductor, subconductor, and
(e) Live-line bare-hand work. In addi-
overhead ground conductor during
tion to any other applicable standards
stringing operations.
contained elsewhere in this subpart all
(5) During stringing operations, each
live-line bare-hand work shall be per-
bare conductor, subconductor, and
overhead ground conductor shall be formed in accordance with the fol-
grounded at the first tower adjacent to lowing requirements:
both the tensioning and pulling setup (1) Employees shall be instructed and
and in increments so that no point is trained in the live-line bare-hand tech-
more than 2 miles from a ground. nique and the safety requirements per-
(i) The grounds shall be left in place tinent thereto before being permitted
until conductor installation is com- to use the technique on energized cir-
pleted. cuits.
493
(2) Before using the live-line bare- age is going to be worked and when
hand technique on energized high-volt- changed conditions indicate a need for
age conductors or parts, a check shall additional tests. Aerial buckets used
be made of: for bare-hand live-line work shall be
(i) The voltage rating of the circuit subjected to an arm current test. This
on which the work is to be performed; test shall consist of placing the bucket
(ii) The clearances to ground of lines in contact with an energized source
and other energized parts on which equal to the voltage to be worked upon
work is to be performed; and for a minimum time of three (3) min-
(iii) The voltage limitations of the utes. the leakage current shall not ex-
aerial-lift equipment intended to be ceed 1 microampere per kilo-volt of
used.
nominal line-to-line voltage. Work op-
(3) Only equipment designed, tested,
erations shall be suspended imme-
and intended for live-line bare-hand
work shall be used. diately upon any indication of a mal-
(4) All work shall be personally su- function in the equipment.
pervised by a person trained and quali- (12) All aerial lifts to be used for live-
fied to perform live-line bare-hand line bare-hand work shall have dual
work. controls (lower and upper) as required
(5) The automatic reclosing feature by paragraph (e)(12) (i) and (ii) of this
of circuit interrupting devices shall be section.
made inoperative where practical be- (i) The upper controls shall be within
fore working on any energized line or easy reach of the employee in the bas-
equipment. ket. If a two basket type lift is used ac-
(6) Work shall not be performed dur- cess to the controls shall be within
ing the progress of an electrical storm easy reach from either basket.
in the immediate vicinity. (ii) The lower set of controls shall be
(7) A conductive bucket liner or other located near base of the boom that will
suitable conductive device shall be pro- permit over-ride operation of equip-
vided for bonding the insulated aerial ment at any time.
device to the energized line or equip-
(13) Ground level lift control shall
ment.
not be operated unless permission has
(i) The employee shall be connected
to the bucket liner by use of conduc- been obtained from the employee in
tive shoes, leg clips, or other suitable lift, except in case of emergency.
means. (14) Before the employee contacts the
(ii) Where necessary, adequate elec- energized part to be worked on, the
trostatic shielding for the voltage conductive bucket liner shall be bond-
being worked or conductive clothing ed to the energized conductor by means
shall be provided. of a positive connection which shall re-
(8) Only tools and equipment in- main attached to the energized con-
tended for live-line bare-hand work ductor until the work on the energized
shall be used, and such tools and equip- circuit is completed.
ment shall be kept clean and dry. (15) The minimum clearance dis-
(9) Before the boom is elevated, the tances for live-line bare-hand work
outriggers on the aerial truck shall be shall be as specified in Table V–2.
extended and adjusted to stabilize the These minimum clearance distances
truck and the body of the truck shall shall be maintained from all grounded
be bonded to an effective ground, or objects and from lines and equipment
barricaded and considered as energized at a different potential than that to
equipment. which the insulated aerial device is
(10) Before moving the aerial lift into bonded unless such grounded objects or
the work position, all controls (ground
other lines and equipment are covered
level and bucket) shall be checked and
by insulated guards. These distances
tested to determine that they are in
proper working condition. shall be maintained when approaching,

(11) Arm current tests shall be made leaving, and when bonded to the ener-
before starting work each day, each gized circuit.
time during the day when higher volt-
494
TABLE V–2—MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES § 1926.956 Underground lines.

FOR LIVE-LINE BARE-HAND WORK (ALTER-
(a) Guarding and ventilating street
NATING CURRENT)
opening used for access to underground
Distance in feet and lines or equipment. (1) Appropriate
inches for maximum warning signs shall be promptly placed
Voltage range (phase-to-phase) voltage
kilovolts when covers of manholes, handholes, or
Phase to Phase to vaults are removed. What is an appro-
ground phase
priate warning sign is dependent upon
2.1 to 15 ........................................ 2′0″ 2′0″ the nature and location of the hazards
15.1 to 35 ...................................... 2′4″ 2′4″ involved.
35.1 to 46 ...................................... 2′6″ 2′6″ (2) Before an employee enters a street
46.1 to 72.5 ................................... 3′0″ 3′0″ opening, such as a manhole or an
72.6 to 121 .................................... 3′4″ 4′6″
138 to 145 ..................................... 3′6″ 5′0″
unvented vault, it shall be promptly
161 to 169 ..................................... 3′8″ 5′6″ protected with a barrier, temporary
230 to 242 ..................................... 5′0″ 8′4″ cover, or other suitable guard.
345 to 362 ..................................... 1 7′0″ 1 13′4″
(3) When work is to be performed in a
500 to 552 ..................................... 1 11′0″ 1 20′0″
1 15′0″ 1 31′0″
manhole or unvented vault:
700 to 765 .....................................
(i) No entry shall be permitted unless
1 For 345–362kv., 500–552kv., and 700–765kv., the min-
forced ventilation is provided or the at-
imum clearance distance may be reduced provided the dis-
tances are not made less than the shortest distance between mosphere is found to be safe by testing
the energized part and a grounded surface. for oxygen deficiency and the presence
of explosive gases or fumes;
(16) When approaching, leaving, or
(ii) Where unsafe conditions are de-
bonding to an energized circuit the
tected, by testing or other means, the
minimum distances in Table V–2 shall
work area shall be ventilated and oth-
be maintained between all parts of the
erwise made safe before entry;
insulated boom assembly and any
(iii) Provisions shall be made for an
grounded parts (including the lower
adequate continuous supply of air.
arm or portions of the truck).
(b) Work in manholes. (1) While work
(17) When positioning the bucket is being performed in manholes, an em-
alongside an energized bushing or insu- ployee shall be available in the imme-
lator string, the minimum line-to- diate vicinity to render emergency as-
ground clearances of Table V–2 must be sistance as may be required. This shall
maintained between all parts of the not preclude the employee in the im-
bucket and the grounded end of the mediate vicinity from occasionally en-
bushing or insulator string. tering a manhole to provide assistance,
(18)(i) The use of handlines between other than emergency. This require-
buckets, booms, and the ground is pro- ment does not preclude a qualified em-
hibited. ployee, working alone, from entering
(ii) No conductive materials over 36 for brief periods of time, a manhole
inches long shall be placed in the buck- where energized cables or equipment
et, except for appropriate length jump- are in service, for the purpose of in-
ers, armor rods, and tools. spection, housekeeping, taking read-
(iii) Nonconductive-type handlines ings, or similar work if such work can
may be used from line to ground when be performed safely.
not supported from the bucket. (2) When open flames must be used or
(19) The bucket and upper insulated smoking is permitted in manholes,
boom shall not be overstressed by at- extra precautions shall be taken to
tempting to lift or support weights in provide adequate ventilation.
excess of the manufacturer’s rating. (3) Before using open flames in a
(20)(i) A minimum clearance table (as manhole or excavation in an area
shown in table V–2) shall be printed on where combustible gases or liquids may
a plate of durable nonconductive mate- be present, such as near a gasoline
rial, and mounted in the buckets or its service station, the atmosphere of the
vicinity so as to be visible to the oper- manhole or excavation shall be tested
ator of the boom. and found safe or cleared of the com-

(ii) It is recommended that insulated bustible gases or liquids.
measuring sticks be used to verify (c) Trenching and excavating. (1) Dur-
clearance distances. ing excavation or trenching, in order to
495
prevent the exposure of employees to (c) Barricades and barriers. (1) Barri-
the hazards created by damage to dan- cades or barriers shall be installed to
gerous underground facilities, efforts prevent accidental contact with ener-
shall be made to determine the loca- gized lines or equipment.
tion of such facilities and work con- (2) Where appropriate, signs indi-
ducted in a manner designed to avoid cating the hazard shall be posted near
damage. the barricade or barrier. These signs
(2) Trenching and excavation oper- shall comply with § 1926.200.
ations shall comply with §§ 1926.651 and (d) Control panels. (1) Work on or ad-
1926.652.
jacent to energized control panels shall
(3) When underground facilities are
be performed by designated employees.
exposed (electric, gas, water, tele-
phone, etc.) they shall be protected as (2) Precaution shall be taken to pre-
necessary to avoid damage. vent accidental operation of relays or
(4) Where multiple cables exist in an other protective devices due to jarring,
excavation, cables other than the one vibration, or improper wiring.
being worked on shall be protected as (e) Mechanized equipment. (1) Use of
necessary. vehicles, gin poles, cranes, and other
(5) When multiple cables exist in an equipment in restricted or hazardous
excavation, the cable to be worked on areas shall at all times be controlled
shall be identified by electrical means by designated employees.
unless its identity is obvious by reason (2) All mobile cranes and derricks
of distinctive appearance. shall be effectively grounded when
(6) Before cutting into a cable or being moved or operated in close prox-
opening a splice, the cable shall be imity to energized lines or equipment,
identified and verified to be the proper or the equipment shall be considered
cable. energized.
(7) When working on buried cable or (3) Fenders shall not be required for
on cable in manholes, metallic sheath
lowboys used for transporting large
continuity shall be maintained by
electrical equipment, transformers, or
bonding across the opening or by equiv-
alent means. breakers.
(f) Storage. The storage requirements
§ 1926.957 Construction in energized of § 1926.953(c) shall be complied with.
substations. (g) Substation fences. (1) When a sub-
(a) Work near energized equipment fa- station fence must be expanded or re-
cilities. (1) When construction work is moved for construction purposes, a
performed in an energized substation, temporary fence affording similar pro-
authorization shall be obtained from tection when the site is unattended,
the designated, authorized person be- shall be provided. Adequate inter-
fore work is started. connection with ground shall be main-
(2) When work is to be done in an en- tained between temporary fence and
ergized substation, the following shall permanent fence.
be determined: (2) All gates to all unattended sub-
(i) What facilities are energized, and stations shall be locked, except when
(ii) What protective equipment and work is in progress.
precautions are necessary for the safe- (h) Footing excavation. (1) Excavation
ty of personnel. for auger, pad and piling type footings
(3) Extraordinary caution shall be ex-
for structures and towers shall require
ercised in the handling of busbars,
the same precautions as for metal
tower steel, materials, and equipment
in the vicinity of energized facilities. tower construction (see § 1926.955(b)(1)).
The requirements set forth in (2) No employee shall be permitted to
§ 1926.950(c), shall be complied with. enter an unsupported auger-type exca-
(b) Deenergized equipment or lines. vation in unstable material for any
When it is necessary to deenergize purpose. Necessary clean-out in such

equipment or lines for protection of cases shall be accomplished without
employees, the requirements of entry.
§ 1926.950(d) shall be complied with.
496
§ 1926.958 External load helicopters. pockets. On shifting D belts, this meas-

In all operations performed using a urement for pocket tabs shall be taken
rotorcraft for moving or placing exter- when the D ring section is centered.
nal loads, the provisions of § 1926.551 of (3) A maximum of four (4) tool loops
subpart N of this part shall be complied shall be so situated on the body belt
with. that four (4) inches of the body belt in
the center of the back, measuring from
§ 1926.959 Lineman’s body belts, safety D ring to D ring, shall be free of tool
straps, and lanyards. loops, and any other attachments.
(a) General requirements. The require- (4) Suitable copper, steel, or equiva-
ments of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this lent liners shall be used around bar of
section shall be complied with for all D rings to prevent wear between these
lineman’s body belts, safety straps and members and the leather or fabric en-
lanyards acquired for use after the ef- closing them.
fective date of this subpart.
(5) All stitching shall be of a min-
(1) Hardware for lineman’s body
imum 42-pound weight nylon or equiva-
belts, safety straps, and lanyards shall
be drop forged or pressed steel and have lent thread and shall be lock stitched.
a corrosive resistive finish tested to Stitching parallel to an edge shall not
American Society for Testing and Ma- be less than three-sixteenths (3⁄16) inch
terials B117–64 (50-hour test). Surfaces from edge of narrowest member caught
shall be smooth and free of sharp edges. by the thread. The use of cross stitch-
(2) All buckles shall withstand a ing on leather is prohibited.
2,000-pound tensile test with a max- (6) The keeper of snaphooks shall
imum permanent deformation no have a spring tension that will not
greater than one sixty-fourth inch. allow the keeper to begin to open with
(3) D rings shall withstand a 5,000- a weight of 21⁄2 pounds or less, but the
pound tensile test without failure. keeper of snaphooks shall begin to
Failure of a D ring shall be considered open with a weight of four (4) pounds,
cracking or breaking. when the weight is supported on the
(4) Snaphooks shall withstand a 5,000- keeper against the end of the nose.
pound tensile test without failure. (7) Testing of lineman’s safety straps,
Failure of a snaphook shall be distor- body belts and lanyards shall be in ac-
tion sufficient to release the keeper.
cordance with the following procedure:
(b) Specific requirements. (1)(i) All fab-
ric used for safety straps shall with- (i) Attach one end of the safety strap
stand an A.C. dielectric test of not less or lanyard to a rigid support, the other
than 25,000 volts per foot ‘‘dry’’ for 3 end shall be attached to a 250-pound
minutes, without visible deterioration. canvas bag of sand:
(ii) All fabric and leather used shall (ii) Allow the 250-pound canvas bag of
be tested for leakage current and shall sand to free fall 4 feet for (safety strap
not exceed 1 milliampere when a test) and 6 feet for (lanyard test); in
potention of 3,000 volts is applied to the each case stopping the fall of the 250-
electrodes positioned 12 inches apart. pound bag:
(iii) Direct current tests may be per- (iii) Failure of the strap or lanyard
mitted in lieu of alternating current shall be indicated by any breakage, or
tests. slippage sufficient to permit the bag to
(2) The cushion part of the body belt fall free of the strap or lanyard. The
shall: entire ‘‘body belt assembly’’ shall be
(i) Contain no exposed rivets on the tested using one D ring. A safety strap
inside; or lanyard shall be used that is capable
(ii) Be at least three (3) inches in
of passing the ‘‘impact loading test’’
width;
and attached as required in paragraph
(iii) Be at least five thirty-seconds
(5⁄32) inch thick, if made of leather; and (b)(7)(i) of this section. The body belt
(iv) Have pocket tabs that extended shall be secured to the 250-pound bag of
at least 11⁄2 inches down and three (3) sand at a point to simulate the waist of
inches back of the inside of circle of a man and allowed to drop as stated in
each D ring for riveting on plier or tool paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section.
497
Failure of the body belt shall be indi- NOTE: A cable sheath may consist of mul-
cated by any breakage, or slippage suf- tiple layers of which one or more is conduc-
tive.
ficient to permit the bag to fall free of
the body belt. (i) Circuit. The term means a con-
ductor or system of conductors
§ 1926.960 Definitions applicable to through which an electric current is in-
this subpart. tended to flow.
(a) Alive or live (energized). The term (j) Communication lines. The term
means electrically connected to a means the conductors and their sup-
source of potential difference, or elec- porting or containing structures which
trically charged so as to have a poten- are used for public or private signal or
communication service, and which op-
tial significantly different from that of
erate at potentials not exceeding 400
the earth in the vicinity. The term
volts to ground or 750 volts between
‘‘live’’ is sometimes used in place of any two points of the circuit, and the
the term ‘‘current-carrying,’’ where transmitted power of which does not
the intent is clear, to avoid repetition exceed 150 watts. When operating at
of the longer term. less than 150 volts no limit is placed on
(b) Automatic circuit recloser. The term the capacity of the system.
means a self-controlled device for auto- NOTE: Telephone, telegraph, railroad sig-
matically interrupting and reclosing nal, data, clock, fire, police-alarm, commu-
an alternating current circuit with a nity television antenna, and other systems
predetermined sequence of opening and conforming with the above are included.
Lines used for signaling purposes, but not in-
reclosing followed by resetting, hold cluded under the above definition, are con-
closed, or lockout operation. sidered as supply lines of the same voltage
(c) Barrier. The term means a phys- and are to be so run.
ical obstruction which is intended to
(k) Conductor. The term means a ma-
prevent contact with energized lines or terial, usually in the form of a wire,
equipment. cable, or bus bar suitable for carrying
(d) Barricade. The term means a phys- an electric current.
ical obstruction such as tapes, screens, (l) Conductor shielding. The term
or cones intended to warn and limit ac- means an envelope which encloses the
cess to a hazardous area. conductor of a cable and provides an
(e) Bond. The term means an elec- equipotential surface in contact with
trical connection from one conductive the cable insulation.
element to another for the purpose of (m) Current-carrying part. The term
minimizing potential differences or means a conducting part intended to be
providing suitable conductivity for connected in an electric circuit to a
fault current or for mitigation of leak- source of voltage. Non-current-car-
age current and electrolytic action. rying parts are those not intended to
(f) Bushing. The term means an insu- be so connected.
lating structure including a through (n) Dead (deenergized). The term
conductor, or providing a passageway means free from any electrical connec-
for such a conductor, with provision for tion to a source of potential difference
mounting on a barrier, conducting or and from electrical charges: Not having
otherwise, for the purpose of insulating a potential difference from that of
the conductor from the barrier and earth.
conducting current from one side of the NOTE: The term is used only with reference
to current-carrying parts which are some-
barrier to the other. times alive (energized).
(g) Cable. The term means a con- (o) Designated employee. The term
ductor with insulation, or a stranded means a qualified person delegated to
conductor with or without insulation perform specific duties under the con-
and other coverings (single-conductor ditions existing.
cable) or a combination of conductors (p) Effectively grounded. The term
insulated from one another (multiple- means intentionally connected to earth

conductor cable). through a ground connection or con-
(h) Cable sheath. The term means a nections of sufficiently low impedance
protective covering applied to cables. and having sufficient current-carrying
498
capacity to prevent the buildup of (y) Ground (as a verb). The term
voltages which may result in undue means the connecting or establishment
hazard to connected equipment or to of a connection, whether by intention
persons. or accident of an electric circuit or
(q) Electric line trucks. The term equipment to reference ground.
means a truck used to transport men, (z) Grounding electrode (ground elec-
tools, and material, and to serve as a trode). The term grounding electrode
traveling workshop for electric power means a conductor embedded in the
line construction and maintenance earth, used for maintaining ground po-
work. It is sometimes equipped with a tential on conductors connected to it,
boom and auxiliary equipment for set- and for dissipating into the earth cur-
ting poles, digging holes, and elevating rent conducted to it.
material or men. (aa) Grounding electrode resistance.
The term means the resistance of the
(r) Enclosed. The term means sur-
grounding electrode to earth.
rounded by a case, cage, or fence,
(bb) Grounding electrode conductor
which will protect the contained equip-
(grounding conductor). The term means
ment and prevent accidental contact of
a conductor used to connect equipment
a person with live parts.
or the grounded circuit of a wiring sys-
(s) Equipment. This is a general term tem to a grounding electrode.
which includes fittings, devices, appli- (cc) Grounded conductor. The term
ances, fixtures, apparatus, and the like, means a system or circuit conductor
used as part of, or in connection with, which is intentionally grounded.
an electrical power transmission and (dd) Grounded system. The term
distribution system, or communication means a system of conductors in which
systems. at least one conductor or point (usu-
(t) Exposed. The term means not iso- ally the middle wire, or neutral point
lated or guarded. of transformer or generator windings)
(u) Electric supply lines. The term is intentionally grounded, either sol-
means those conductors used to trans- idly or through a current-limiting de-
mit electric energy and their necessary vice (not a current-interrupting de-
supporting or containing structures. vice).
Signal lines of more than 400 volts to (ee) Hotline tools and ropes. The term
ground are always supply lines within means those tools and ropes which are
the meaning of the rules, and those of especially designed for work on ener-
less than 400 volts to ground may be gized high voltage lines and equipment.
considered as supply lines, if so run and Insulated aerial equipment especially
operated throughout. designed for work on energized high
(v) Guarded. The term means pro- voltage lines and equipment shall be
tected by personnel, covered, fenced, or considered hot line.
enclosed by means of suitable casings, (ff) Insulated. The term means sepa-
barrier rails, screens, mats, platforms, rated from other conducting surfaces
or other suitable devices in accordance by a dielectric substance (including air
with standard barricading techniques space) offering a high resistance to the
designed to prevent dangerous ap- passage of current.
proach or contact by persons or ob- NOTE: When any object is said to be insu-
jects. lated, it is understood to be insulated in
suitable manner for the conditions to which
NOTE: Wires, which are insulated but not it is subjected. Otherwise, it is within the
otherwise protected, are not considered as purpose of this subpart, uninsulated. Insu-
guarded. lating covering of conductors is one means of
(w) Ground. (Reference). The term making the conductor insulated.
means that conductive body, usually (gg) Insulation (as applied to cable).
earth, to which an electric potential is The term means that which is relied
referenced. upon to insulate the conductor from
(x) Ground (as a noun). The term other conductors or conducting parts
means a conductive connection wheth- or from ground.

er intentional or accidental, by which (hh) Insulation shielding. The term
an electric circuit or equipment is con- means an envelope which encloses the
nected to reference ground. insulation of a cable and provides an
499
equipotential surface in contact with between any two conductors. If one cir-
cable insulation. cuit is directly connected to and sup-
(ii) Isolated. The term means an ob- plied from another circuit of higher
ject that is not readily accessible to voltage (as in the case of an
persons unless special means of access autotransformer), both are considered
are used. as of the higher voltage, unless the cir-
(jj) Manhole. The term means a sub- cuit of lower voltage is effectively
surface enclosure which personnel may grounded, in which case its voltage is
enter and which is used for the purpose not determined by the circuit of higher
of installing, operating, and maintain- voltage. Direct connection implies
ing equipment and/or cable. electric connection as distinguished
(kk) Pulling tension. The term means from connection merely through elec-
the longitudinal force exerted on a tromagnetic or electrostatic induction.
cable during installation.
(ll) Qualified person. The term means Subpart W—Rollover Protective
a person who by reason of experience or Structures; Overhead Protection
training is familiar with the operation
to be performed and the hazards in- AUTHORITY: Section 3704 of the Contract
volved. Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40
(mm) Switch. The term means a de- U.S.C. 3701); Sections 4, 6, and 8 of the Occu-
vice for opening and closing or chang- pational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (29
ing the connection of a circuit. In these U.S.C. 653, 655, 657); and Secretary of Labor’s
rules, a switch is understood to be Order No. 12–71 (36 FR 8754), 8–76 (41 FR
manually operable, unless otherwise 25059), 9–83 (48 FR 35736), 1–90 (55 FR 9033), 6–
96 (62 FR 111), 3–2000 (65 FR 50017), or 5–2002
stated. (67 FR 65008), as applicable.
(nn) Tag. The term means a system
or method of identifying circuits, sys- § 1926.1000 Rollover protective struc-
tems or equipment for the purpose of tures (ROPS) for material handling
alerting persons that the circuit, sys- equipment.
tem or equipment is being worked on. (a) Coverage. (1) This section applies
(oo) Unstable material. The term to the following types of material han-
means earth material, other than run- dling equipment: To all rubber-tired,
ning, that because of its nature or the self-propelled scrapers, rubber-tired
influence of related conditions, cannot front-end loaders, rubber-tired dozers,
be depended upon to remain in place wheel-type agricultural and industrial
without extra support, such as would tractors, crawler tractors, crawler-type
be furnished by a system of shoring. loaders, and motor graders, with or
(pp) Vault. The term means an enclo- without attachments, that are used in
sure above or below ground which per- construction work. This requirement
sonnel may enter and is used for the does not apply to sideboom pipelaying
purpose of installing, operating, and/or tractors.
maintaining equipment and/or cable. (2) The promulgation of specific
(qq) Voltage. The term means the ef- standards for rollover protective struc-
fective (rms) potential difference be- tures for compactors and rubber-tired
tween any two conductors or between a skid-steer equipment is reserved pend-
conductor and ground. Voltages are ex- ing consideration of standards cur-
pressed in nominal values. The nominal rently being developed.
voltage of a system or circuit is the (b) Equipment manufactured on or after
value assigned to a system or circuit of September 1, 1972. Material handling
a given voltage class for the purpose of machinery described in paragraph (a)
convenient designation. The operating of this section and manufactured on or
voltage of the system may vary above after September 1, 1972, shall be
or below this value. equipped with rollover protective
(rr) Voltage of an effectively grounded structures which meet the minimum
circuit. The term means the voltage be- performance standards prescribed in
tween any conductor and ground unless §§ 1926.1001 and 1926.1002, as applicable.
otherwise indicated. (c) Equipment manufactured before Sep-
(ss) Voltage of a circuit not effectively tember 1, 1972. (1) All material handling
grounded. The term means the voltage equipment described in paragraph (a)
500
of this section and manufactured or tive structures, shall be deemed in

placed in service (owned or operated by compliance with this section if it
the employer) prior to September 1, meets the rollover protective structure
1972, shall be fitted with rollover pro- requirements of the State of Cali-
tective structures no later than the fornia, the U.S. Army Corps of Engi-
dates listed below: neers, or the Bureau of Reclamation of
(i) Machines manufactured on or the U.S. Department of the Interior in
after January 1, 1972, shall be fitted no effect on April 5, 1972. The require-
later than April 1, 1973. ments in effect are:
(ii) Machines manufactured between (1) State of California: Construction
July 1, 1971, and December 31, 1971, Safety Orders, issued by the Depart-
shall be fitted no later than July 1, ment of Industrial Relations pursuant
1973. to Division 5, Labor Code, § 6312, State
(iii) Machines manufactured between of California.
July 1, 1970, and June 30, 1971, shall be (2) U.S. Army Corps of Engineers:
fitted no later than January 1, 1974. General Safety Requirements, EM–385–
(iv) Machines manufactured between 1–1 (March 1967).
July 1, 1969, and June 30, 1970, shall be (3) Bureau of Reclamation, U.S. De-
fitted no later than July 1, 1974. partment of the Interior: Safety and
(v) Machines manufactured before
Health Regulations for Construction.
July 1, 1969: Reserved pending further
Part II (September 1971).
study, development, and review.
(2) Rollover protective structures and § 1926.1001 Minimum performance cri-
supporting attachment shall meet the teria for rollover protective struc-
minimum performance criteria de- tures for designated scrapers, load-
tailed in §§ 1926.1001 and 1926.1002, as ap- ers, dozers, graders, and crawler
plicable or shall be designed, fab- tractors.
ricated, and installed in a manner (a) General. This section prescribes
which will support, based on the ulti- minimum performance criteria for roll-
mate strength of the metal, at least over protective structures (ROPS) for
two times the weight of the prime rubber-tired self-propelled scrapers;
mover applied at the point of impact. rubber-tired front-end loaders and rub-
(i) The design objective shall be to ber-tired dozers; crawler tractors, and
minimize the likelihood of a complete crawler-type loaders, and motor grad-
overturn and thereby minimize the ers. The vehicle and ROPS as a system
possibility of the operator being
shall have the structural characteris-
crushed as a result of a rollover or
tics prescribed in paragraph (f) of this
upset.
section for each type of machine de-
(ii) The design shall provide a
scribed in this paragraph.
vertical clearance of at least 52 inches
from the work deck to the ROPS at the (b) The static laboratory test pre-
point of ingress or egress. scribed herein will determine the ade-
(d) Remounting. ROPS removed for quacy of the structures used to protect
any reason, shall be remounted with the operator under the following condi-
equal quality, or better, bolts or weld- tions:
ing as required for the original mount- (1) For rubber-tired self-propelled
ing. scrapers, rubber-tired front-end load-
(e) Labeling. Each ROPS shall have ers, and rubber-tired dozers: Operating
the following information permanently between 0 and 10 miles per hour over
affixed to the structure: hard clay where rollover would be lim-
(1) Manufacturer or fabricator’s name ited to a maximum roll angle of 360°
and address; down a slope of 30° maximum.
(2) ROPS model number, if any; (2) For motor graders: Operating be-
(3) Machine make, model, or series tween 0 and 10 miles per hour over hard
number that the structure is designed clay where rollover would be limited to
to fit. 360° down a slope of 30° maximum.

(f) Machines meeting certain existing (3) For crawler tractors and crawler-
governmental requirements. Any machine type loaders: Operating between 0 and
in use, equipped with rollover protec- 10 miles per hour over hard clay where
501
rollover would be limited to a max- (d) Vehicle condition. The ROPS to be

imum roll angle of 360° down a slope of tested must be attached to the vehicle
45°. structure in the same manner as it will
(c) Facilities and apparatus. (1) The be attached during vehicle use. A to-
following material is necessary: tally assembled vehicle is not required.
(i) Material, equipment, and tiedown However, the vehicle structure and
means adequate to insure that the frame which support the ROPS must
represent the actual vehicle installa-
ROPS and its vehicle frame absorb the
tion. All normally detachable windows,
applied energy.
panels, or nonstructural fittings shall
(ii) Equipment necessary to measure be removed so that they do not con-
and apply loads to the ROPS. Adequate tribute to the strength of the ROPS.
means to measure deflections and (e) Test procedure. The test procedure
lengths should also be provided. shall include the following, in the se-
(iii) Recommended, but not manda- quence indicated:
tory, types of test setups are illus- (1) Energy absorbing capabilities of
trated in Figure W–1 for all types of ROPS shall be verified when loaded lat-
equipment to which this section ap- erally by incrementally applying a dis-
plies; and in Figure W–2 for rubber- tributed load to the longitudinal out-
tired self-propelled scrapers; Figure W– side top member of the ROPS, as shown
3 for rubber-tired front-end loaders, in Figure W–1, W–2, or W–3, as applica-
rubber-tired dozers, and motor graders; ble. The distributed load must be ap-
and Figure W–4 for crawler tractors plied so as to result in approximately
and crawler-type loaders. uniform deflection of the ROPS. The
(2) Table W–1 contains a listing of the load increments should correspond
required apparatus for all types of with approximately 0.5 in. ROPS de-
equipment described in paragraph (a) flection increment in the direction of
of this section. the load application, measured at the
ROPS top edge. Should the operator’s
TABLE W–1 seat be offcenter, the load shall be ap-
plied on the offcenter side. For each ap-
Means to measure Accuracy plied load increment, the total load
(lb.) versus corresponding deflection
Deflection of ROPS, inches .......... ±5% of deflection meas-
ured. (in.) shall be plotted, and the area
Vehicle weight, pounds ................ ±5% of the weight meas- under the load -deflection curve shall
ured. be calculated. This area is equal to the
Force applied to frame, pounds ... ±5% of force measured. energy (in.-lb.) absorbed by the ROPS.
Dimensions of critical zone, ±0.5 in. For a typical load-deflection curve and
inches.
calculation method, see Figure W–5.
502
EC30OC91.051</GPH>
503
EC30OC91.050</GPH>
ROPS shall be verified by suitable ma-

terial tests or material certification
(see paragraph (f)(2)(iv) of this section).
Incremental loading shall be continued

until the ROPS has absorbed the
amount of energy and the minimum
applied load specified under paragraph
(f) of this section has been reached or
surpassed.
(2) To cover the possibility of the ve-
hicle coming to rest on its top, the sup-
port capability shall be verified by ap-
plying a distributed vertical load to
EC30OC91.054</GPH>
the top of the ROPS so as to result in

approximately uniform deflection (see
Figure W–1). The load magnitude is
specified in paragraph (f)(2)(iii) of this

section.
EC30OC91.053</GPH>
(3) The low temperature impact

strength of the material used in the
504
EC30OC91.052</GPH>
(f) Performance requirements—(1) Gen- scrapers; in Figure W–11 for rubber-

eral performance requirements. (i) No re- tired front-end loaders and rubber-tired
pairs or straightening of any member dozers; in Figure W–12 for crawler trac-
shall be carried out between each pre- tors and crawler-type loaders; and in
scribed test. Figure W–13 for motor graders.
(ii) During each test, no part of the (iii) The load magnitude for purposes
ROPS shall enter the critical zone as of compliance with paragraph (e)(2) of
detailed in SAE J397 (1969). Deforma- this section is equal to the vehicle
tion of the ROPS shall not allow the weight. The test of load magnitude
plane of the ground to enter this zone. shall only be made after the require-
(2) Specific performance requirements. ments of paragraph (f)(2)(i) of this sec-
(i) The energy requirement for pur- tion are met.
poses of meeting the requirements of
paragraph (e)(1) of this section is to be
determined by referring to the plot of
the energy versus weight of vehicle (see
Figure W–6 for rubber-tired self-pro-
pelled scrapers; Figure W–7 for rubber-
tired front-end loaders and rubber-tired
dozers; Figure W–8 for crawler tractors
and crawler-type loaders; and Figure
W–9 for motor graders). For purposes of
this section, force and weight are
measured as pounds (lb.); energy (U) is
measured as inch-pounds.
(iv) Material used in the ROPS must

have the capability of performing at
zero degrees Fahrenheit, or exhibit
Charpy V notch impact strength of 8
foot-pounds at minus 20 °Fahrenheit.
This is a standard Charpy specimen as
described in American Society of Test-
ing and Materials A 370, Methods and
Definitions for Mechanical Testing of
Steel Products (available at each Re-
gional Office of the Occupational Safe-
ty and Health Administration). The
purpose of this requirement is to re-
(ii) The applied load must attain at duce the tendency of brittle fracture
least a value which is determined by associated with dynamic loading, low
multiplying the vehicle weight by the temperature operation, and stress rais-
corresponding factor shown in Figure ers which cannot be entirely avoided
W–10 for rubber-tired self-propelled on welded structures.
EC30OC91.056</GPH>
505
EC30OC91.055</GPH>
manufacturer’s maximum weight of
the prime mover for rubber-tired self-
propelled scrapers. For other types of
equipment to which this section ap-
plies, ‘‘vehicle weight’’ means the man-
ufacturer’s maximum recommended
weight of the vehicle plus the heaviest
attachment.
EC30OC91.060</GPH>
(g) Definitions. For purposes of this

section, ‘‘vehicle weight’’ means the
EC30OC91.059</GPH>
EC30OC91.058</GPH>
506
EC30OC91.057</GPH>
of interpretation arise. The rec-

ommended practices appear in the 1971
SAE Handbook, which may be exam-
ined in each of the Regional Offices of
the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration.
§ 1926.1002 Protective frames (roll-

over protective structures, known
as ROPS) for wheel-type agricul-
tural and industrial tractors used
in construction.
(a) General. (1) The purpose of this
section is to set forth requirements for
frames used to protect operators of
wheel-type agricultural and industrial
tractors that will minimize the possi-
bility of operator injury resulting from
accidental upsets during normal oper-
ation. With respect to agricultural and
industrial tractors, the provisions of 29
CFR 1926.1001 and 1926.1003 for rubber-
tired dozers and rubber-tired loaders
may be used instead of the require-
ments of this section.
(2) The protective frame that is the
subject of this standard is a structure
mounted to the tractor that extends
above the operator’s seat and conforms
generally to Figure W–14.
(3) When an overhead weather shield
is attached to the protective frame, it
may be in place during testing, pro-
vided that it does not contribute to the
strength of the protective frame. When
such an overhead weather shield is at-
tached, it must meet the requirements
of paragraph (i) of this section.
(4) For overhead protection require-
ments, see 29 CFR 1926.1003.
(h) Source of standard. This standard (5) The following provisions address
is derived from, and restates, the fol- requirements for protective enclosures.
lowing Society of Automotive Engi- (i) When protective enclosures are
neers Recommended Practices: SAE used on wheel-type agricultural and in-
J320a, Minimum Performance Criteria dustrial tractors, they shall meet the
for Roll-Over Protective Structure for requirements of Society of Automotive
Rubber-Tired, Self-Propelled Scrapers; Engineers (‘‘SAE’’) standard J168–1970
SAE J394, Minimum Performance Cri- (‘‘Protective enclosures—test proce-
teria for Roll-Over Protective Struc- dures and performance requirements’’),
ture for Rubber-Tired Front End Load- which is incorporated by reference. The
ers and Rubber-Tired Dozers; SAE J395, incorporation by reference was ap-
Minimum Performance Criteria for proved by the Director of the Federal
Roll-Over Protective Structure for Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C.
Crawler Tractors and Crawler-Type 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51.
Loaders; and SAE J396, Minimum Per- (ii) SAE standard J168–1970 appears in
formance Criteria for Roll-Over Protec- the 1971 SAE Handbook, or it may be
tive Structure for Motor Graders. examined at: any OSHA Regional Of-
EC30OC91.062</GPH>
These recommended practices shall be fice; the OSHA Docket Office, U.S. De-
resorted to in the event that questions partment of Labor, 200 Constitution
507
EC30OC91.061</GPH>
Avenue, NW., Room N–2625, Wash- (6) The low-temperature impact

ington, DC 20210 (telephone: (202) 693– strength of the material used in the
2350 (TTY number: (877) 889–5627)); or protective structure shall be verified
the National Archives and Records Ad- by suitable material tests or material
ministration (‘‘NARA’’). (For informa- certifications according to 29 CFR
tion on the availability of this mate- 1926.1001(f)(2)(iv).
rial at NARA, telephone (202) 741–6030 (e) Test procedure for vehicle overturn—
or access the NARA Web site at (1) Vehicle weight. The weight of the
www.archives.gov/federallregister/ tractor, for purposes of this section, in-
codeloflfederallregulations/ cludes the protective frame, all fuels,
ibrllocations.html.) Copies may be pur- and other components required for nor-
chased from the Society of Automotive mal use of the tractor. Ballast must be
Engineers, 400 Commonwealth Drive,
added when necessary to achieve a
Warrendale, Pennsylvania 15096–0001.
minimum total weight of 130 lb (59 kg)
(b) Applicability. The requirements of per maximum power-takeoff horse-
this section apply to wheel-type agri-
power at the rated engine speed. The
cultural and industrial tractors used in
weight of the front end must be at
construction work. See paragraph (j) of
least 33 lb (15 kg) per maximum power-
this section for definitions of agricul-
tural tractors set forth in paragraph (i) takeoff horsepower. In case power-
of this section. takeoff horsepower is unavailable, 95
(c) Performance requirements. (1) Ei- percent of net engine flywheel horse-
ther a laboratory test or a field test is power shall be used.
required to determine the performance (2) Agricultural tractors shall be
requirements set forth in paragraph (i) tested at the weight set forth in para-
of this section. graph (e)(1) of this section.
(2) A laboratory test may be either (3) Industrial tractors shall be tested
static or dynamic. The laboratory test with items of integral or mounted
must be under conditions of repeatable equipment and ballast that are sold as
and controlled loading to permit anal- standard equipment or approved by the
ysis of the protective frame. vehicle manufacturer for use with the
(3) A field-upset test, when used, vehicle when the protective frame is
shall be conducted under reasonably expected to provide protection for the
controlled conditions, both rearward operator with such equipment in-
and sideways to verify the effectiveness stalled. The total vehicle weight and
of the protective frame under actual front-end weight as tested shall not be
dynamic conditions. less than the weights established in
(d) Test procedures—general. (1) The paragraph (e)(1) of this section.
tractor used shall be the tractor with (4) The following provisions address
the greatest weight on which the pro- soil bank test conditions.
tective frame is to be used. (i) The test shall be conducted on a
(2) A new protective frame and dry, firm soil bank as illustrated in
mounting connections of the same de- Figure W–15. The soil in the impact
sign shall be used for each test proce- area shall have an average cone index
dure. in the 0-in. to 6-in. (0-mm to 153-mm)
(3) Instantaneous and permanent layer not less than 150 according to
frame deformation shall be measured American Society of Agricultural En-
and recorded for each segment of the gineers (‘‘ASAE’’) recommendation
test.
ASAE R313.1–1971 (‘‘Soil cone pene-
(4) Dimensions relative to the seat trometer’’), as reconfirmed in 1975,
shall be determined with the seat un-
which is incorporated by reference. The
loaded and adjusted to its highest and
incorporation by reference was ap-
most rearward latched position pro-
vided for a seated operator. proved by the Director of the Federal
Register in accordance with 5 U.S.C.

(5) When the seat is offset, the frame
loading shall be on the side with the 552(a) and 1 CFR part 51. The path of
least space between the centerline of vehicle travel shall be 12° ± 2° to the
the seat and the upright. top edge of the bank.
508
(ii) ASAE recommendation ASAE to which the protective frame is at-

R313.1–1971, as reconfirmed in 1975, ap- tached, including the mounting parts.
pears in the 1977 Agricultural Engi- (ii) The protective frame shall be in-
neers Yearbook, or it may be examined strumented with the necessary equip-
at: any OSHA Regional Office; the ment to obtain the required load-de-
OSHA Docket Office, U.S. Department flection data at the locations and di-
of Labor, 200 Constitution Avenue, rections specified in Figures W–16, W–
NW., Room N–2625, Washington, DC 17, and W–18.
20210 (telephone: (202) 693–2350 (TTY (iii) The protective frame and mount-
number: (877) 889–5627)); or the National ing connections shall be instrumented
Archives and Records Administration with the necessary recording equip-
(‘‘NARA’’). (For information on the ment to obtain the required load-de-
availability of this material at NARA, flection data to be used in calculating
telephone (202) 741–6030 or access the FSB (see paragraph (j)(3) of this sec-
NARA Web site at www.archives.gov/ tion). The gauges shall be placed on
federallregister/ mounting connections before the in-
codeloflfederallregulations/ stallation load is applied.
ibrllocations.html). Copies may be pur- (2) Test procedure. (i) The side-load
chased from the American Society of application shall be at the upper ex-
Agricultural Engineers 2950 Niles Road, tremity of the frame upright at a 90°
St. Joseph, MI 49085. angle to the centerline of the vehicle.
(5) The upper edge of the bank shall The side load L shall be applied accord-
be equipped with an 18-in. (457-mm) ing to Figure W–16. L and D shall be re-
high ramp as described in Figure W–15 corded simultaneously. The test shall
to assist in tipping the vehicle. be stopped when:
(6) The front and rear wheel-tread
(A) The strain energy absorbed by
settings, when adjustable, shall be at
the frame is equal to the required input
the position nearest to halfway be-
energy (Eis);
tween the minimum and maximum set-
(B) Deflection of the frame exceeds
tings obtainable on the vehicle. When
the allowable deflection; or
only two settings are obtainable, the
minimum setting shall be used. (C) The frame load limit occurs be-
(7) Vehicle overturn test—sideways and fore the allowable deflection is reached
rearward. (i) The tractor shall be driven in the side load.
under its own power along the specified (ii) The L–D diagram (see Figure W–
path of travel at a minimum speed of 10 19 for an example) shall be constructed
mph (16 kph), or maximum vehicle using the data obtained according to
speed when under 10 mph (16 kph), up paragraph (g)(2)(i) of this section.
the ramp as described in paragraph (iii) The modified Lm–Dm diagram
(d)(5) of this section to induce sideways shall be constructed according to para-
overturn. graph (g)(2)(ii) and Figure W–20 of this
(ii) Rear upset shall be induced by en- section. The strain energy absorbed by
gine power with the tractor operating the frame (Eu) shall then be deter-
in gear to obtain 3 to 5 mph (4.8 to 8 mined.
kph) at maximum governed engine (iv) Eis, FER, and FSB shall be cal-
rpm, preferably by driving forward di- culated.
rectly up a minimum slope of two (v) The test procedure shall be re-
vertical to one horizontal. The engine peated on the same frame using L (rear
clutch may be used to aid in inducing input; see Figure W–18) and Eir. Rear-
the upset. load application shall be distributed
(f) Other test procedures. When the uniformly along a maximum projected
field-upset test is not used to deter- dimension of 27 in. (686 mm) and a max-
mine ROPS performance, either the imum area of 160 sq. in. (1,032 sq. cm)
static test or the dynamic test, con- normal to the direction of load applica-
tained in paragraph (g) or (h) of this tion. The load shall be applied to the
section, shall be made. upper extremity of the frame at the

(g) Static test—(1) Test conditions. (i) point that is midway between the cen-
The laboratory mounting base shall in- terline of the seat and the inside of the
clude that part of the tractor chassis frame upright.
509
(h) Dynamic test—(1) Test conditions. three times its depth (see Figures W–22
(i) The protective frame and tractor and W–23).
shall meet the requirements of para- (v) Means shall be provided for indi-
graphs (e)(2) or (3) of this section, as cating the maximum instantaneous de-
appropriate. flection along the line of impact. A
(ii) The dynamic loading shall be pro- simple friction device is illustrated in
duced by using a 4,410-lb (2,000-kg) Figure W–18.
weight acting as a pendulum. The im- (vi) No repair or adjustments may be
pact face of the weight shall be 27 ± 1 carried out during the test.
in. by 27 ± 1 in. (686 ± 25 mm by 686 ± 25 (vii) When any cables, props, or
mm), and shall be constructed so that blocking shift or break during the test,
its center of gravity is within 1.0 in. the test shall be repeated.
(25.4 mm) of its geometric center. The (2) Test procedure. (i) General. The
weight shall be suspended from a pivot frame shall be evaluated by imposing
point 18 to 22 ft (5.5 to 6.7 m) above the dynamic loading to the rear, followed
point of impact on the frame, and shall by a load to the side on the same
be conveniently and safely adjustable frame. The pendulum dropped from the
for height (see Figure W–21). height (see the definition of ‘‘H’’ in
paragraph (j)(3) of this section) imposes
(iii) For each phase of testing, the
the dynamic load. The position of the
tractor shall be restrained from mov-
pendulum shall be so selected that the
ing when the dynamic load is applied.
initial point of impact on the frame
The restraining members shall be 0.50-
shall be in line with the arc of travel of
to 0.63-in. (12.5- to 16.0-mm) steel cable,
the center of gravity of the pendulum.
and points for attaching restraining
A quick-release mechanism should be
members shall be located an appro-
used but, when used, it shall not influ-
priate distance behind the rear axle ence the attitude of the block.
and in front of the front axle to provide (ii) Impact at rear. The tractor shall
a 15° to 30° angle between the restrain- be restrained properly according to
ing cable and the horizontal. The re- paragraphs (h)(1)(iii) and (h)(1)(iv) of
straining cables shall either be in the this section. The tractor shall be posi-
plane in which the center of gravity of tioned with respect to the pivot point
the pendulum will swing, or more than of the pendulum so that the pendulum
one restraining cable shall give a re- is 20° from the vertical prior to impact
sultant force in this plane (see Figure as shown in Figure W–22. The impact
W–22). shall be applied to the upper extremity
(iv) The wheel-tread setting shall of the frame at the point that is mid-
comply with the requirements of para- way between the centerline of the
graph (e)(6) of this section. The tires frame and the inside of the frame up-
shall have no liquid ballast, and shall right of a new frame.
be inflated to the maximum operating (iii) Impact at side. The blocking and
pressure recommended by the tire man- restraining shall conform to para-
ufacturer. With the specified tire infla- graphs (h)(1)(iii) and (h)(1)(iv) of this
tion, the restraining cables shall be section. The center point of impact
tightened to provide tire deflection of 6 shall be that structural member of the
to 8 percent of the nominal tire-section protective frame likely to hit the
width. After the vehicle is restrained ground first in a sideways accidental
properly, a wooden beam that is 6-in. × upset. The side impact shall be applied
6-in. (150 mm × 150 mm) shall be driven to the side opposite that used for rear
tightly against the appropriate wheels impact.
and clamped. For the test to the side, (i) Performance requirements—(1) Gen-
an additional wooden beam shall be eral. (i) The frame, overhead weather
placed as a prop against the wheel shield, fenders, or other parts in the
nearest to the operator’s station, and operator area may be deformed in these
shall be secured to the floor so that tests, but shall not shatter or leave
when it is positioned against the wheel sharp edges exposed to the operator, or
rim, it is at an angle of 25° to 40° to the violate the dimensions shown in Fig-
horizontal. It shall have a length 20 to ures W–16 and W–17, and specified as
25 times its depth, and a width two to follows:
510
D = 2 in. (51 mm) inside of the frame rubber-tired loaders and dozers de-
upright to the vertical centerline of scribed in 29 CFR 1926.1001), used in op-
the seat; erations such as landscaping, construc-
E = 30 in. (762 mm); tion services, loading, digging, grounds
F = Not less than 0 in. (0 mm) and not keeping, and highway maintenance.
more than 12 in. (305 mm), measured (3) The following symbols, terms, and
at the centerline of the seat backrest explanations apply to this section:
to the crossbar along the line of load Eis = Energy input to be absorbed dur-
application as shown in Figure W–17; ing side loading in ft-lb (E′is in J
and [joules]);
G = 24 in. (610 mm). Eis = 723 + 0.4 W ft-lb (E′ is = 100 + 0.12
(ii) The material and design combina- W′ , J);
tion used in the protective structure Eir = Energy input to be absorbed dur-
must be such that the structure can ing rear loading in ft-lb (E′ ir in J);
meet all prescribed performance tests Eir = 0.47 W ft-lb (E′ ir = 0.14 W’, J);
at 0 °F (¥18 °C) according to 29 CFR W = Tractor weight as specified by 29
1926.1001(f)(2)(iv). CFR 1926.1002(e)(1) and (e)(3), in lb (W′
(2) Vehicle overturn performance re- , kg);
quirements. The requirements of this L = Static load, lb (kg);
paragraph (i) must be met in both side
D = Deflection under L, in. (mm);
and rear overturns.
L–D = Static load-deflection diagram;
(3) Static test performance requirements.
Design factors shall be incorporated in Lm–Dm = Modified static load-deflection
each design to withstand an overturn diagram (Figure W–20). To account
test as specified by this paragraph (i). for an increase in strength due to an
The structural requirements will be increase in strain rate, raise L in the
met generally when FER is greater plastic range L × K;
than 1.0 and FSB is greater than K–1 in K = Increase in yield strength induced
both side and rear loadings. by higher rate of loading (1.3 for hot,
(4) Dynamic test performance require- rolled, low-carbon steel 1010–1030).
ments. Design factors shall be incor- Low carbon is preferable; however,
porated in each design to withstand the when higher carbon or other material
overturn test specified by this para- is used, K must be determined in the
graph (i). The structural requirements laboratory. Refer to Norris, C.H.,
will be met generally when the dimen- Hansen, R.J., Holley, M.J., Biggs,
sions in this paragraph (i) are used dur- J.M., Namyet, S., and Minami, J.V.,
ing both side and rear loads. Structural Design for Dynamic Loads,
(j) Definitions applicable to this section. McGraw-Hill, New York, 1959, p. 3;
(1) ‘‘Agricultural tractor’’ means a Lmax = Maximum observed static load;
wheel-type vehicle of more than 20 en- Load Limit = Point on a continuous L–
gine horsepower, used in construction D curve at which the observed static
work, that is designed to furnish the load is 0.8 Lmax (refer to Figure W–19);
power to pull, propel, or drive imple- Eu = Strain energy absorbed by the
ments. (SAE standard J333a–1970 (‘‘Op- frame, ft-lb (J); area under the Lm–Dm
erator protection for wheel-type agri- curve;
cultural and industrial tractors’’) de- FER = Factor of energy ratio, FER =
fines ‘‘agricultural tractor’’ as a EuEis; also, FER = EuEir;
‘‘wheel-type vehicle of more than 20 en- Pb = Maximum observed force in
gine horsepower designed to furnish mounting connection under a static
the power to pull, carry, propel, or load, L, lb (kg);
drive implements that are designed for Pu = Ultimate force capacity of mount-
agricultural usage.’’ Since this part ing connection, lb (kg);
1926 applies only to construction work, FSB = Design margin for a mounting
the SAE definition of ‘‘agricultural connection (PuPb)¥1; and
tractor’’ is adopted for purposes of this H = Vertical height of lift of 4,410-lb
subpart.) (2,000-kg) weight, in. (H′, mm). The

(2) ‘‘Industrial tractor’’ means that weight shall be pulled back so that
class of wheel-type tractors of more the height of its center of gravity
than 20 engine horsepower (other than above the point of impact is defined
511
as follows: H = 4.92 + 0.00190 W (H′ = (c) Test procedures—general. (1) The

125 + 0.107 W′) (see Figure W–24). requirements of 29 CFR 1926.1002(d), (e),
(k) Source of standard. The standard and (f) shall be met.
in this section is derived from, and re- (2) Static and dynamic rear load ap-
states, in part, Society of Automotive plication shall be distributed uni-
Engineers (‘‘SAE’’) standard J334a-1970 formly along a maximum projected di-
(‘‘Protective frame test procedures and mension of 27 in. (686 mm), and a max-
performance requirements’’). The SAE imum area of 160 sq. in. (1,032 sq. cm),
standard appears in the 1971 SAE Hand- normal to the direction of load applica-
book, which may be examined at any tion. The load shall be applied to the
OSHA regional office. upper extremity of the frame at the
[70 FR 76985, Dec. 29, 2005, as amended at 71 point that is midway between the cen-
FR 41129, July 20, 2006] terline of the seat and the inside of the
frame upright.
§ 1926.1003 Overhead protection for (3) The static and dynamic side load
operators of agricultural and indus- application shall be distributed uni-
trial tractors used in construction. formly along a maximum projected di-
(a) General—(1) Purpose. When over- mension of 27 in. (686 mm), and a max-
head protection is provided on wheel- imum area of 160 sq. in. (1,032 sq. cm),
type agricultural and industrial trac- normal to the direction of load applica-
tors, the overhead protection shall be tion. The direction of load application
designed and installed according to the is the same as in 29 CFR 1926.1002 (g)
requirements contained in this section. and (h). To simulate the characteris-
The provisions of 29 CFR 1926.1001 for tics of the structure during an upset,
rubber-tired dozers and rubber-tired the center of load application may be
loaders may be used instead of the located from a point 24 in. (610 mm) (K)
standards contained in this section. forward to 12 in. (305 mm) (L) rearward
The purpose of this standard is to mini- of the front of the seat backrest, to
mize the possibility of operator injury best use the structural strength (see
resulting from overhead hazards such Figure W–25).
as flying and falling objects, and at the
(d) Drop test procedures. (1) The same
same time to minimize the possibility
frame shall be subjected to the drop
of operator injury from the cover itself
test following either the static or dy-
in the event of accidental upset.
(2) Applicability. This standard applies namic test.
to wheel-type agricultural and indus- (2) A solid steel sphere or material of
trial tractors used in construction equivalent spherical dimension weigh-
work (see 29 CFR 1926.1002(b) and (j)). ing 100 lb (45.4 kg) shall be dropped
In the case of machines to which 29 once from a height 10 ft (3.08 m) above
CFR 1926.604 (relating to site clearing) the overhead cover.
also applies, the overhead protection (3) The point of impact shall be on
may be either the type of protection the overhead cover at a point within
provided in 29 CFR 1926.604, or the type the zone of protection as shown in Fig-
of protection provided by this section. ure W–26, which is furthest removed
(b) Overhead protection. When over- from major structural members.
head protection is installed on wheel- (e) Crush test procedure. (1) The same
type agricultural or industrial tractors frame shall be subjected to the crush
used in construction work, it shall test following the drop test and static
meet the requirements of this para- or dynamic test.
graph. The overhead protection may be (2) The test load shall be applied as
constructed of a solid material. When shown in Figure W–27, with the seat po-
grid or mesh is used, the largest per- sitioned as specified in 29 CFR
missible opening shall be such that the 1926.1002(d)(4). Loading cylinders shall
maximum circle that can be inscribed be mounted pivotally at both ends.
between the elements of the grid or Loads applied by each cylinder shall be
mesh is 1.5 in. (38 mm) in diameter. The equal within two percent, and the sum
overhead protection shall not be in- of the loads of the two cylinders shall
stalled in such a way as to become a be two times the tractor weight as set
hazard in the case of upset. forth in 29 CFR 1926.1002(e)(1). The
512
Occupational Safety and Health Admin., Labor Pt. 1926, Subpt. W, App. A
maximum width of the beam illus- (3) Crush test performance require-
trated in Figure W–27 shall be 6 in. (152 ments. The protected zone as described
mm). in Figure W–28 must not be violated.

CFR TITLE 29 - Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations For Construction

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CFR TITLE 29 - Part 1926 - Safety and Health Regulations For Construction

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

PART 1926—SAFETY AND HEALTH 1926.60 Methylenedianiline.

1926.61 Retention of DOT markings, plac-

mists. 1926.305 Jacks—lever and ratchet, screw,

Subpart J—Welding and Cutting APPENDIX C TO SUBPART L—LIST OF NA-

APPENDIX B TO SUBPART L—CRITERIA FOR DE- FOR TRENCHES

§ 1926.502: NON-MANDATORY GUIDELINES

1926.1087 Liveboating. applicable to construction work. This repub-

Subpart A—General § 1926.3 Inspections—right of entry.

opportunity to be heard upon the re- 29 CFR citation OMB con-

1926.33 ................................................................ 1218–0065 Subpart B—General

1926.1110 ............................................................ 1218–0082 overtime requirements of the Contract

which subject to specific exemptions, full scope of the work to be performed

single family or multifamily housing roads, streets, curbs, gutters, side-

agencies, organizations, or institutions ute provides that the National Rail-

dangerous to his health or safety. ployee.—(1) Personal protective equip-

protective measures required. an effective fire protection and preven-

The employer shall ensure the avail- § 1926.29 Acceptable certifications.

lection, and maintenance of personal (1) Offices of the Occupational Safety

(h) Defect means any characteristic (q) Shall means mandatory.

to meet a given purpose, occasion, con- (2) Procedures to be followed by em-

at a minimum, shall be included in the maintain a written plan.

Subpart D—Occupational Health essary ambulance service, shall be pro-

(iii) A sample computation showing (c) Employees, when working in areas

APPENDIX A TO § 1926.55—1970 AMERICAN CONFERENCE OF GOVERNMENTAL

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION

Abate; see Temephos.

Aniline and homologs ............................ 62–53–3 5 19 X

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Arsenic, inorganic compounds (as As);

Butanethiol; see Butyl mercaptan.

Carbon monoxide .................................. 630–08–0 50 55 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Chlorinated camphene .......................... 8001–35–2 — 0.5 X

Cyclohexane .......................................... 110–82–7 300 1050 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Cyclopentadiene .................................... 542–92–7 75 200 —

Dimethylaniline (N,N-Dimethylaniline) ... 121–69–7 5 25 X

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Methyl cellosolve acetate.

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

N-Ethylmorpholine ................................. 100–74–3 20 94 X

Isoamyl acetate ..................................... 123–92–2 100 525 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Isophorone ............................................ 78–59–1 25 140 —

Methyl cellosolve acetate; see 2-

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Methylcyclohexane ................................ 108–87–2 500 2000 —

o-isomer ......................................... 88–72–2;

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Octachloronaphthalene ......................... 2234–13–1 — 0.1 X

Respirable fraction ......................... 5 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

n-Propyl alcohol .................................... 71–23–8 200 500 —

Styrene .................................................. 100–42–5 (C)100 (C)420 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

Sulfur hexafluoride ................................ 2551–62–4 1000 6000 —

1,1,2-Trichloro-1,2,2-trifluoroethane ...... 76–13–1 1000 7600 —

THRESHOLD LIMIT VALUES OF AIRBORNE CONTAMINANTS FOR CONSTRUCTION—Continued

mppcf × 35.3 = million particles per cubic meter = particles

§ 1926.56 Illumination. (b) Other areas. For areas or oper-

and active storerooms, barracks or liv-

refuse receptacles, shall be so designed, (iii) Blast cleaning barrel. A complete